HBH
60
A90B
6k
w<
mSsmR
111
H
1
■
««§
ran
■Hi ■ N
ills
^^H
HSirailSlliBs
Mm*
'-'■'V*
Hi
■
HH HH
IHHmlH H
H
^H
I ■ ;; Hi
^H Hi
I
PROCEEDINGS OF THE
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING
ASSOCIATION
(Engineering Division, Association of American Railroads)
CONTENTS, VOLUME 64
(For detailed index, see Bulletin 579, page 739)
Bulletin 573, September-October 1962
Page
Epoxy Resins 1
Termite Control Investigation — Inspection of Specimens After 52 Months
of Exposure 19
Grading Problems Encountered During Relocation of the Santa Fe Railway's
Main Line Between Williams and Crookton, Ariz 25
Conductivity Tests of Open-Hearth-Slag Ballast 35
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties 39
Preventing Rail Failures in Track 47
Welded Railroad Bridges 57
Field Investigation of Florida East Coast Prestressed Concrete Beams 69
Field Investigation of Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Concrete Girder Spans 70
Train Performance Calculator 73
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations 82
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation 95
Bulletin 574, November 1962 (Reports of Committees)
16 — Economics of Railway Location and Operation Ill
9 — Highways 131
13 — Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 139
14 — Yards and Terminals 159
20 — Contract Forms 187
25 — Waterways and Harbors 197
6 — Buildings 213
Bulletin 575, December 1962 (Reports of Committees)
8 — Masonry 223
3 — Ties and Wood Preservation 241
22 — Economics of Railway Labor 263
27 — Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 305
30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses 327
28 — Clearances 2>2>2>
Bulletin 576, January 1963 (Reports of Committees)
15 — Iron and Steel Structures 359
7— Wood Bridges and Trestles 371
11 — Engineering and Valuation Records 387
24 — Cooperative Relations with Universities 397
18— Electricity 407
Bulletin 577, February 1963 (Reports of Committees)
5— Track 419
Continuous Welded Rail 449
4— Rail 497
1 — Roadway and Ballast 543
Bulletin 579, June-July 1963
Report of the Business Meeting of the Association, March 15-16, 1963 579
Report of the Executive Secretary 706
Report of the Treasurer 725
Constitution
Tie Renewals and Cost per Mile of Maintained Track 738
Index of Proceeding, Vol. 64, 1963 739
&if
American Railway
Engineering Association— Bulletin
Vol. 63, No. 573 September-October 1962
CONTENTS
Epoxy Resins 1
Termite Control Investigation — Inspection of Specimens After
52 Months of Exposure 19
Grading Problems Encountered During Relocation of the
Santa Fe Railway's Main Line Between Williams and
Crookton, Ariz. 25
Conductivity Tests of Open-Hearth Slag Ballast 35
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties 39
Preventing Rail Failures in Main Track 47
Welded Railroad Bridges 57
Field Investigation of Florida East Coast Prestressed Con-
crete Beams 69
Field Investigation of Southern Pacific Company, Texas &
Louisiana Lines, Prestressed Concrete Girder Spans 70
Train Performance Calculator 73
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations 82
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation 95
Copyright 1962, by American Railway Engineering Association
BOARD OF DIRECTION
1962-1963
President
C. J. Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
Vice Presidents
L. A. Loggins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Houston 1, Tex.
T. F. Burris, Chief Engineer System, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Huntington, W. Va.
Past Presidents
E. J. Brown, Chief Engineer, Burlington Lines, Chicago 6.
R. H. Beeder, Chief Engineer System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago 4.
Directors
C. J. Henry, Chief Engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
J. M. Trissal, Vice President and Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago 5.
W. B. Throckmorton, Chief Engineer, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, Chi-
cago 5.
J. A. Bunjer, Chief Engineer, Union Pacific Railroad, Omaha 2, Nebr.
J. H. Brown, Chief Engineer, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, Springfield 2, Mo.
J. E. Eisemann, Chief Engineer, Western Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Rail-
way, Amarillo, Tex.
W. H. Huffman, Assistant Chief Engineer — Construction, Chicago & North Western
Railway, Chicago 6.
F. R. Smith, Chief Engineer, Union Railroad, East Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. L. Young, Chief Engineer, Norfolk & Western Railway, Roanoke 17, Va.
T. B. Hutcheson, Chief Engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond 13, Va.
C. E. Defendorf, Chief Engineer, New York Central System, New York 17.
John Ayer, Jr., Vice President — Operations, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad,
Denver 17, Colo.
Treasurer
A. B. Hillman, Retired Chief Engineer, Belt Railway of Chicago; Chicago & Western
Indiana Railroad, Chicago 5.
Executive Secretary
Neal D. Howard, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Assistant Secretary
E. G. Gehrke, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Secretary Emeritus
Walter S. Lacher, 407 East Fuller Road, Hinsdale, 111.
Published by the American Railway Engineering Association, Monthly, January, February, March,
November and December; Bi-Monthly, June-July, and September-October, at 2211 Fordem
Avenue, Madison, Wis.; Editorial and Executive Offices,
59 Van Buren Street, Chicago 5, 111.
Second class postage paid at Madison, Wis.
Accepted for mailing at special rate of postage for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917,
authorized on June 29, 1918.
Subscription $10 per annum.
Advance Report of Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles
Report on Assignment 6
Applications of Synthetic Resins and Adhesives
to Wood Bridges and Trestles
Collaborating with Committees 8 and 15
L. R. Kubacki (chairman, subcommittee), R. E. Anderson, C. E. Atwater, J. W. Brent,
T. P. Burgess, J. \V. Chambers, B. E. Daniels, R. H. Hunsinger, W. D. Keeney,
C. A. Meadows, T. K. May, D. V. Sartore, F. E. Schneider, W. D. Turner, D. L.
Walker.
This report, in four parts, is presented as information. It supersedes the report on
this assignment published in Bulletin 562, January 1961, pages 526 to 537, incl. Part 1
explains the technology of epoxy resins. Part 2 summarizes the railroad applications of
epcxy resins. Part 3 presents tentative formulations for epoxy resins. Part 4 provides
general instructions for the use of epcxy resins.
The report was prepared for the committee by F. P. Drew, research engineer struc-
tures, Association of American Railroads under the general direction of G. M. Magee,
director of engineering research, AAR.
Part 1
Technology of Epoxy Resins
1. Characteristics of Epoxy Resins
The term "epoxy" refers to a three-member ring structure containing two carbon
atoms and an oxygen atom. Materials containing an average of more than one epoxy
group per molecule are considered to be epoxy resins.
Epoxy resins are thermosetting materials which can be converted with a wide
variety of curing agents to insoluble, infusible solids. The commercial use of these
resins is based on the superiority of the epoxy resins over other thermosetting resins
in one or more of the following properties:
a. The liquid resin is convenient and easy to use in many different types of
applications.
b. Versatility in curing schedule is possible with a wide variety of curing agents.
c. The property of the cured resins may be varied within wide limits witli tin
pre per choice of curing agent and modifier.
d. No volatile materials are formed during the cure of epoxy resins.
e. Low shrinkage during cure allows for accurate reproductions.
f. The combination of hardness and toughness of cured resins is outstanding.
g. The overall strength properties such as tensile, flexure, and compression strength
are excellent.
h. Resistance to solvents and chemicals of many kinds is exceptionally k'«'od.
i. Adhesion of cured epoxy resins to most surface- i- excellent,
j. Electrical insulation properties of cured epoxy resins are very good.
Epoxy resins may be used with a wide variety of fillers to further modify and
reduce cost of epoxy resin compositions. The color of many epoxy resin systems is satis-
factory for all except the most exacting applications.
1
Bull. 573
2 Epoxy Resins
Several modifications of the basic epoxy resins are available. The use of these mod-
ified resins is generally directed toward a specific application, since the improvement
of one property is normally accompanied by a sacrifice in one or more of the other
properties.
Most epoxy adhesives are two-package systems which are mixed just prior to appli-
cation because of limited pot life. Depending on the curing agent and the desired curing
time, these two-package systems may be cured at room temperature or an elevated tem-
perature. Systems designed to cure at room temperature normally reach handling strength
within a few hours, but usually require several days to attain maximum strength. De-
pending on the curing agent, adhesives formulated for curing at elevated temperatures
may require a few minutes to several hours for complete cure. As with other epoxy resin
applications, the choice of resin and curing agent depends on the service requirements
and desired curing schedule.
2. Curing Agents
A curing agent, which is usually added just prior to use, is required to convert
epoxy resins to thermoset polymers. Curing agents may be poly-functional compounds
containing groups which react with the epoxide ring or they may be catalysts which
promote the self-polymerization of the resin. Some curing agents act through a com-
bination of these processes.
3. Formulation
The selection of an eopxy resin system for a particular application depends not
only on the required properties of the cured resin, but also on the desired curing sched-
ule and handling properties, such as viscosity, pot life, exotherm and toxicity. The prop-
erties of both the uncured composition and the cured product can be varied over a wide
range by the proper selection and use of resin modifiers, reactive diluents and fillers.
These materials are important components of most epoxy resin formulations and infor-
mation concerning their effect on the properties of the composition before, during and
after it is cured is necessary for the most effective use of epoxy resins.
In Part 2 of this report are listed various applications of epoxy resins on timber,
concrete and steel railroad structures. For each application a suggested formulation num-
ber is indicated. These numbers refer to Part 3 of this report wherein the composition
of each formulation is given, together with certain pertinent information such as mixing,
curing, application and physical properties.
4. Resin Modifiers
Epoxy resins are modified primarily to improve the mechanical and thermal shock-
resistant properties of the cured resin, although in some cases the main purpose of the
modifier is to reduce the cost of the resin system. In general, nonreactive plasticizers,
which are used widely with thermoplastic resins, are of little value for modifying epoxy
resins. The most satisfactoiy modifiers are materials which react either with the resin
or with the curing agent to become an integral part of the cured resin. One obvious
approach is the use of curing agents or modified resins which contribute the desired
degree of flexibility.
The modifications of epoxy resins to improve impact and thermal shock resistance
is usually accompanied by a loss of strength as well as electrical insulation properties
and chemical resistance. Since the loss of properties is most evident at elevated tem-
peratures, an epoxy resin should not be modified more than necessary to meet the
requirements for a specific application.
Epoxy Resins 3
5. Reactive Diluents
For many applications it is necessary to reduce the viscosity of epoxy resin for-
mulation and at the same time maintain as nearly as possible the original properties
of the cured resin. Since the most suitable materials for this purpose react to become
a part of a cured system, they are commonly called reactive diluents. A reactive should
contribute good viscosity reduction at low concentration, be nonreactive with the resin
under normal storage conditions, react at approximately the same rate as the resin and
have little effect on the properties of the cured resin.
The most effective reactive diluents are low-viscosity epoxy compounds. In addi-
tion to viscosity reduction they contribute better wetting and penetration and permit
a higher loading of inert filter. The degree to which the properties of the resin are
affected depends not only on the choice of diluent, but also on the amount used. The
properties most affected arc chemical and solvent resistance and strength at elevated
temperatures. Although most reactive diluents may be used in ratios of 25 or more parts
per 100 parts of resin, it is recommended that no more be used than is actually required
for a given application.
Properties such as pot life, curing schedule, and exotherm are usually altered some-
what by the presence of a diluent. Epoxy resins containing reactive diluents are available
commercially.
6. Fillers
In addition to reducing the cost of epoxy resin formulations, fillers are used to
modify properties of both the cured and uncured composition. For many applications
the success of an epoxy formulation may depend on the judicious use of fillers. Advan-
tages to be gained by the use of fillers include extended pot life, reduced exotherm,
lower shrinkage during cure, flow control, reduced coefficient of thermal expansion and
increased thermal conductivity. These effects are dependent on volume loading as well
as on the specific filler being used. With the exception of fibrous, reinforcing fillers,
properties such as tensile, flexural and compressive strength are adversely affected by
the addition of fillers.
Epoxy resins have a remarkable tolerance for fillers of almost every variety. They
should be nonreactive with both resin and curing agent and should be stable under the
conditions at which the formulation is to be cured and used. For most applications
the limiting factor on filler content is the viscosity of the uncured mixture. Reactive
diluents may be used to permit higher loadings in many applications. Handling of for-
mulations at elevated temperatures also allow a greater concentration of filler to be used.
For a given weight of filler a larger particle size gives less viscosity increase bul ilii-
advantage must be balanced by the greater settling tendency of larger parti
In general, colloidal silica fillers and fibrous fillers such as asbestos pri duce a max
imum pourable viscosity at less than 10 parts per hundred parts of resin (phr). At
the usual 200 to 325 mesh size, fillers such as silica, calcium carbonate, mica, flint,
pumice and slate ran be used at loadings of 50 to 150 phr. Atomized aluminum, alumina
and calcium silicate are used at 100 to 200 phr, and the heavier oilers such as iron and
iron oxide can be used up to .?00 phr. In some applications it is possible to use 50-mesh
sand at loadings as high as 800 phr.
The choice of filler depends largely on the application, Silica and alumina are used
extensively in electrical potting applications. Adhesives are Improved considerably with
moderate loadings of alumina and asbestos fillir. Parts which may require machining
may be loaded with powdered aluminum, calcium carbonate or caldum sili
4 Epoxy Resins
Aluminum-filled compositions are widely used in metal forming tools, and alumina,
flint and carborundum are used to improve abrasion resistance. Maximum leadings of
alumina, calcium carbonate or silica are recommended for reducing the coefficient of
thermal expansion. Aluminum powder is used to improve thermal conductivity, although
it is only marginally better than alumina in this respect. Steel wool has been suggested
for improving mechanical properties as well as thermal conductivity, but special tech-
niques are required for fillers of this type.
For best results fillers should be free of moisture and absorbed gases. Thorough
mixing can usually be accomplished with mechanical stirring at an elevated temperature,
although for some fillers grinding or milling may be necessary.
7. Handling Precautions
Prolonged or frequent skin contact of materials used in epoxy resin systems may
cause dermatitis for some individuals. The reactive diluents that are used in epoxy resins
have been found to be sources of skin irritation.
In working with epoxy resins it is important to realize that dermatitis problems
may exist even though they may not be apparent at first. Most persons can work with
these materials for some time without taking any precautions to avoid skin irritation.
A few persons under these conditions may suddenly break out with skin irritations
which will disappear when they are transferred to other types of work. Those who
return to work with epoxy resins and experience skin disorders very quickly are to be
considered sensitized and should discontinue work with the resins. Some individuals
become relatively immune to the materials and with normal contact do not experience
any difficulty.
Dermatitis can be avoided or held to a minimum by the use of proper equipment
and handling technique. The following protective measures have been effective in reduc-
ing the incidence of dermatitis:
a. Reasonable care in preventing skin contact and regular washing of hands, arms
and face with warm, soapy water.
b. Effective ventilation to prevent the accumulation of vapors of the volatile
amines and reactive diluents.
c. Storage of materials in closed containers fitted with spigots and valves.
d. Use of disposable containers for mixing the materials to keep cleaning of con-
taminated equipment to a minimum.
e. Solvents such as denatured alcohol for clean up must be used with extreme
care since contaminated solvents are a prime source of irritation.
f. Use of rubber gloves and prctective clothing is helpful but they should not be
worn after they have been contaminated.
Part 2
Applications of Epoxy Resins
The recommended formulations for the following applications are based on the
assumption that the surfaces on which they will be used are dry. For damp surface
conditions alternate formulations can be used, as indicated below:
On Dry Surfaces On Damp Surfaces
Formulation PI Formulation P2
Formulation 991-67 Formu'ation 991-76
Formulation 1101-32 Formulation 991-75
Epoxy Resins 5
While the damp-surface formulations can also be used on dry surfaces, they are
particularly designed to cure well in the presence of moisture. However, they are less
flexible and have a shorter pot life than the corresponding formulations recommended
for use on dry surfaces.
A. APPLICATIONS FOR COMMITTEE 7— WOOD BRIDGES AND TRESTLES
1. Protection of Pile Cut-Offs
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply adhesive formulation 991-67 1/16
in thick as a protective coating.
2. Hardening of Bearing Surfaces
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply adhesive formulation 991-67.
Incorporate either emery grit or graphite. The emery will produce an abrasive surface,
and the graphite will produce a hard sliding surface.
3. Repairs to Checks and Splits
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then, assuming that the application is for
timber impregnated with creosote, apply adhesive formulation 991-67.
4. Adhesive for Laminating Timbers
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then, assuming that the application is for
timber impregnated with creosote, apply adhesive formulation 991-67.
5. Adhesive for Gluing Component Parts of Trestle
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then, assuming that the application is for
timber impregnated with creosote, apply adhesive formulation 991-67.
6. Adhesive for Bonding Concrete Surfacing to Laminated Timber Girders
If cast-in-place concrete is to be used, coat the timber surfaces with formulation
991-61, 991-75 or P2, and cast the concrete onto the wet epoxy formulation.
If precast concrete is to be used prime both the timber and the concrete surfaces
with formulation Pi. Use formulation 991-67 to completely fill space between concrete
and timber.
7. Bonding Other Wearing Surfaces to Timber Decks
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply formulation 991-67.
8. Spraying for Fire Retardants
No suggestions.
9. Filling Rotted Cores in Piles, Caps, Etc.
The decayed wood should be removed to expose a sound substrate. Formulation
991-67 is suggested for filing the volume from which the decayed material has been
removed. If possible, first apply a prime coat of formulation Pi. Large cavities can be
partially filled with sound wood, using the adhesive for filling the balance <>t the void.
B. APPLICATION'S FOR COMMITTEE 8— MASONRY
1. Waterproofing of Concrete and Dampproofing
Backs of Abutments, Retaining Walls, Etc.
Use formulation Pi. It may be applied by brush oi spray equipment.
6 Epcxy Resins
2. Surfacing Car Washing Platforms
Use formulation 632-1255, a pigmented coating, for concrete washing platforms.
It may be applied by brush or spray equipment.
If the platform has a concrete surface that is pitted or spalled, prime the surface
with formulation Pi, then apply the epoxy floor-topping compound, formulation 1101-
32. This formula may be pigmented to any desired color, and may be applied tV to
% in thick.
If a non-skid surface is desired on the washing platforms, a brush or squeegee
coat of formulation Pi may be applied, and sand or an abrasive aggregate such as
carborundum may be strewn on top of the wet application. Following an overnight
cure at room temperature (75 F or above) the surface is ready for light traffic. If
waterproofing the surface is required, use formulation Pi.
3. Bonding New Concrete to Old Concrete
Use formulation 991-61, 991-75 or P2. Apply a brush coat onto the old concrete
and cast the fresh concrete onto the wet epoxy to effect a bond.
4. Splicing Concrete Piles
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then use formulation 991-67. Apply a brush
coat to both concrete surfaces prior to splicing.
5. Protection of Post-Tensioning Anchorage
If chemical and solvent resistance is of prime importance and water resistance is
not required, use Epi-Rez 285-1 primer with Epi-Rez 285-6 as an enamel finish. If
water resistance is of prime importance use Epi-Rez 285-22 primer with 632-1255 as
an enamel finish. These may be applied by brush or spray equipment.
6. Bonding for Composite Section of Concrete and Steel
Prime concrete surfaces with formulation Pi, then use formulation 991-67. Apply a
brush coat of 991-67 to both surfaces to be bonded.
7. Sealing Joints Where Masonry Stones Are Moving Under Load
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply formulation 991-67.
8. Grout for Heavy Bed Plates
Use formulation 991-67.
9. Joint Filler
Use formulation Epi-Rez 504-33.
10. Repair of Membrane Waterproofing
Use formulation Epi-Rez 242-2.
11. Fastening Rubber Pads to Concrete
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply adhesive formulation 991-67.
12. Shear Keys Between Concrete Beams
Prime surfaces with formulation Pi and then fill keyway with formulation 1101-32,
using 600 parts of sand per 100 parts of resin by weight. If a faster cure time is required
use formulation 991-75 instead of 1101-32. Use of electric heating cables or steam in
the key-way will further accelerate the cure.
Epoxy Resins 7
C. APPLICATIONS FOR COMMITTEE 15— IRON AND STEEL STRUCTURES
1. Protection Against Corrosion
If chemical and solvent resistance is of prime importance and water resistance is
not required, use Epi-Rez 285-1 primer with Epi-Rez 285-6 as an enamel finish. If water
resistance is of prime importance use Epi-Rez 285-22 primer with 632-1255 as an
enamel finish. The materials may be applied by brush or spray equipment.
These applications are two-ccat systems. If time permits only a one-coat system,
use formulation Cl. This is not considered a substitute for the two-coat system and
should be used only if time does not permit using the two-coat system.
2. Fastening Masonry Plates to Concrete
Prime concrete surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply formulation 991-67. Apply
a brush coat to both surfaces to be bonded.
3. Preventing Slippage of Bolted Joints
Use adhesive formulation 991-67. It may be applied on the contact surfaces and
on the bolt shanks.
4. Waterproofing Steel Plates in Lieu of Other Waterproofing Methods
Use Epi-Rez 285-22 and formulation 632-1255. If time permits only a one-ccat
system, use formulation Cl. This is not considered a substitute for the two-coat system
and should be used only when time does not permit using the two-coat system.
5. Tacking Welded Sub-Assemblies Prior to Welding
Use formulation 991-67. The application of heat (blow torch) to the bonded mem-
ber will speed up the rate of set of this adhesive.
6. Shipping Shop Assembled Sub-Assemblies
Use formulation 991-67. The application of heat (blow torch) to the bonded mem-
ber will speed up the rate of set of this adhesive.
7. Bonding Timber Decks and Ties to Steel Girders
Prime the timber surfaces with formulation Pi, then apply formulation 991-67 to
either the timber or the steel surfaces.
8. Bonding Elevation Blocks to Bridge Decks
Prime the timber surfaces with formulation Pi. then apply formulation 991-67 to
either the timber or the steel surfaces.
9. Sealing Hold-Down Devices and Spikes Firmly in Bridge Timber
Formulation Pi is recommended where a fluid system is needed to obtain good
penetration. If the space to be filled IS large, formulation 991-67 or 1101-32 can
be used.
10. Applying Anti-Slip Surfaces on Steel Plates,
Stairs and Other Areas for Positive Traction
Apply a squeegee coat of formulation Pi and sand, or an abrasive aggregate such
as carborundum may be strewn on top 01 the wet coat. Following an overnight cure
at room temperature (75 F or above), the surface i- ready for traffic.
Epoxy Resins
Part 3
Formulations
FORMULATION 242-2, EPOXY— TAR COATING
Formula:
Pounds
Gallons
Material
25.0
1.42
Cab-O-Sil
300.0
12.86
Silver Lake talc
433.0
44.41
Tar @ 75% solids*
361.0
38.00
Epi-Rez 242
24.0
3.31
Solvesso 1 00
1143.0
100.00
32.5
3.91
Tetraethylene penta
Catalyze:
To 100.0 lb 242-2, add 2.9 lb tetraethylene pentamine. Age 1 hr, then apply.
Constants:
Viscosity
Wt/Gal
P.V.C.
Vehicle solids
Total solids
Converter
Pot life
Resin Composition:
50% tar solids
50% epoxy solids
Thixotropic
11.43
18.4%
79.4%
85.3%
10.0% on epoxy solids
4-8 hr
* Various tars can be used; successful results were obtained with those having a melting point
of 50-60 C and a free carbon content of 10-20%.
EPI-REZ 285-1, ZINC CHROMATE— IRON OXIDE PRIMER
Formula and Manufacturing Procedure:
Pounds Gallons Material
245.0
5.70
Pure iron oxide
36.8
.79
Zinc oxide
36.8
1.26
Zinc chromate
116.0
4.80
Asbestine
116.0
5.16
Whiting
408.0
47.00
Epi-Rez 285
124.0
17.29
Xylol
136.0
18.00
Butyl cellosolve
1218.6
100.00
14.7
1.71
T.E.P.A. (tetraethyh
Reduce and Catalyze:
3:1 (by weight) + 1.2 lb T.E.P.A/100 lb 632-768
Reduction solvent for spray — 2, 1, 1 tuluol, butanol, M.E.K. (by volume)
Reduction solvent for brushing — 2, 1, 1 xylol, butyl cellosolve (by volume)
Allow to stand 1 hr before using
Epoxy Resins 9
Constants:
Viscosity
77 K.U.
Wt/Gal
12.19
Red. viscosity
spray — (after 1 hr aging) — 19-21 sec, No. 4 Ford cup
brush — (after 1 hr aging) — 24-27 sec, No. 4 Ford cup
Application
spray/brush
P.V.C.
41.4%
Total solids
65.5%
Vehicle solids
36.6%
Converter
6% T.E.P.A. (on resin solids)
Pot life
8-12 hr
EPI-REZ 285-6, GRAY ENAMEL
Formula and Manufacturing Precedure-
Materials
Rutile non-chalking titanium dioxide
Lampblack
IAF Compound X-2280 Imperial Color & Chem.
Epi-Rez 285
Xylol
Butyl cellosolve
Tetraethylene pentamine
Pounds
Gallons
100.0
2.86
3.0
.20
4.0
.18
698.0
80.00
60.5
8.41
62.7
8.35
928.2
100.00
16.8
2.04
Co.
Reduce and Catalyze:
For Spray— to 100 lb of 285-6 add 35 lb of reducing solvent and 1.8 lb of T.E.P.A.
Allow to stand 1 hr before using.
For Brush— to 100 lb of 285-6 add 20 lb of reducing solvent and 1.8 lb of T.E.P.A.
Allow to stand 1 hr before using.
Reducing Solvent Lineup — 2-1-1 parts by volume diacetone alcohol, toluol and butyl
cellosolve.
Constants:
Viscosity
75 K.U.
Wt/gal
9.28
Red. viscosity
spray (1 hr aging) 19-22 sec. No. 4 Ford cup
brush (1 hr aging) 54-57 sec. No. 4 Ford cup
Application
brush or spray
P.V.C.
6.8%
Vehicle solids
51.6%
Total solids
56.7%
Catalyst
4% on resin solids
Pot life
8-12 hr
EPI-REZ 285-22, RUST INHIBITIVE PRIMER
Formula and Manufacturing Procedure:
Pounds
Gallons
Part
A
Material
600.0
17.50
M-50 lead silica chromatc
4.0
.50
Soya lecithin
261.0
30.00
Epi-Rez 285
71.7
10.00
Xylol
112.3
15.00
Butyl cellosolve
15.8
2.00
Diacetone alcohol
1064.8
75.00
National Lead Co
1(1
Epoxy Resins
Viscosity— 72 K.U.
Wt/gal— 14.18 lb
Part B
171.5 22.00
23.7 3.00
195.2
25 mi
Versamid 401
Diacetone alcohol
Viscosity — 70 K.U.
Wt/gal— 7.82
.General Mills
Composite Blend
1064.8 75.00 Part A
195.2 25.00 Part B
1260.0
100.00
Constants:
Viscosity
70 K.U.
Wt/gal
12.60 lb
P.V.C.
39.4%
Vehicle solids
39.5%
Total solids
68.5%
Application
brush after aging
blend approximately 1 hr
Pot life
8-24 hr
FORMULATION 504-33— JOINT FILLER
Resin Portion:
Part A
k
Same Formula
Based on
100 Parts by
Pounds
Gallons
Material
Weight of Resin
56.8
6.14
Epi-Rez 504
100
8.5
0.57
Bentone 34
15
29.5
1.34
Surfex MM
52
5.2
0.31
Asbestos 7RF6
9
100.0
8.36
Converter: Part B
73.8
9.36
Epi-Cure 854
130
11.3
0.75
Bentone 34
20
45.4
2.06
Surfex MM
80
8.5
0.50
Asbestos 7RF6
15
139.0
12.67
Constants:
Viscosity
Paste
Wt/gal
11.36 lb
Pot life
8 hr
for 1 gal. at 77 F
Mixing:
Part A — Combine Epi-Rez 504, Bentone 34, Surfex MM and Asbestos 7RF6. Blend
thoroughly. Pass resin composition through a three-roll paint mill. (Color is light gray).
Part B — Combine Epi-Cure 854, Bentone 34, Surfex MM and Asbestos 7RF6. Blend
thoroughly. Pass converter composition through a three-roll paint mill. (Color is buff).
When ready to use combine Part A and Part B and mix thoroughly until a uniform
color is obtained
Epoxy Resins
11
Application:
Caulking compound may be applied by putty knife, spatula, or caulking gun.
Curing Schedule:
Gel time, 16 hr at 74 F for thin sections. At 74 F the compound continues to cure
lor several days. At temperatures below 70 F this composition will cure only very slowly.
Physical Data:
This material develops a hardness of Shore A 70 in five days and will not harden
appreciably on further aging. The water resistance and caustic resistance is quite good,
although immersion in strong solvents and acids is not recommended.
Material Sources:
Epi-Rez 504
Bentone 34
Surfex MM
Asbestos 7RF6
Epi-Cure 854
(Jones-Dabney Company)
(National Lead Company)
(Diamond Alkali Company)
(Johns-Manville Asbestos Fibre Division)
(Jones-Dabney Company)
FORMULATION 632-1255
Description and Use:
Epi-Rez 285 — Versamid 401 gray enamal
Formula and Manufacturing Procedure:
Pounds
Gallons
(Part A)
Material
100.0
2.86
Rutile non-chalking TiOa
3.0
.20
Lamp black
4.0
.18
IAFX-2280
350.0
40.14
Epi-Rez 285
98.0
13.00
Butyl cellosolve
81.0
10.29
Diacetone alcohol
Viscosity— 61 KU,
636.0
66.67
wt/gal-
(Part B)
233.0
29.87
Versamid 401**
27.0
3.46
Diacetone alcohol
260.00
33.33
Composite Blend***
636.0 66.67
260.0 33.33
896.0
100.00
Viscosity— 89 KU, wt/gal— 7.80
Part A
Part B
Resin Composition
60 — epoxy solids
40 — Versamid solids
*' If Versamid 100 is preferred, then use 60% by weight (if the Versamid
'• Allow mixture to age 1 hr before using.
Constants:
Viscosity 72 KU
Wt/cal 8.96
P.V.C. 7.5%
Vehicle solids 44.4%
Total solids 51.0%
Pot life 24-^8 hr
12
Epoxy Resins
FORMULATION 991-
61
Resin Portion
Same Formula Based on
Pounds
45.35
54.42
0.23
Gallons
4.67
2.46
0.01
Material
Epi-Rez 509
Surfex MM
Lamp black S-100
100 Parts by Weight of Resin
100
120
0.5
100.00
7.14
Converter :
22.67
4.53
36.28
2.14
0.56
1.64
Thiokol LP-3
DMP-30
Surfex MM
50
10
80
Constants:
Wt/gal
Viscositv
Pot life'
14.24 lb, including converter
brushing paste
45 min-1 lb batch, at 72 F
Mixing:
Blend Epi-Rez 509, Surfex MM, and lamp black. Stir thoroughly. Pass combina-
tion over a three-roll mill two passes for good dispersion. Blend Thickol LP-3, DMP-
30, and Surfex MM, and stir thoroughly. Pass combination over a three-roll mill two
passes for a good dispersion. When ready to use combine the resin mixture with con-
verter mixture and blend thoroughly.
Application:
Apply this adhesive to the old concrete surface evenly with a stiff brush to a film
thickness of at least 15 mils. Apply immediately fresh concrete on top of the adhesive.
No more should be mixed at one time than can be used within the limits of the pot life
of the adhesive.
Suggested Uses:
For bonding old to new concrete, under water; for bonding old to new concrete
in air; for sealing cracks on horizontal concrete surfaces.
Cure:
Time required for curing under water is approximately 14 days. Cure time at room
temperature is over night.
Material Sources:
Epi-Rez 509
Surfex MM
Lamp black S-
DMP-30
Thiokol LP-3
(Jones-Dabney Company)
(Diamond Alkali Company)
100 (Monsanto Chemical Company)
(Rohm and Haas Company)
(Thiokol Chemical Company)
FORMULATION 991-67, GENERAL PURPOSE ADHESIVE
Resin Portion:
Pounds Gallons
Material
Same Formula Based on
100 Parts by Weight of Resin
64.51
25.81
9.68
6.65
1.21
0.31
Epi-Rez 509
Asbestos 7-TF-l
Alumina T-60
100
40
15
100.00
8.17
Epoxy Resins 13
Converter:
32.26 4.08 Epi-Cure 855 50
6.45 0.37 Asbestos 7-TF-l 10
6.45 0.21 Alumina T-60 10
Constants:
Wt/gal 11.31 lb, including converter portion
Pot life 2]/2 hr at 77 F 1-lb batch
Viscosity Brookfield, No. 6 spindle, at 77 F
RPM Cps
5 56,000
10 34,000
20 22,500
Mixing:
Blend the Epi-Rez 509, 7-TF-l Asbestos, and T-60 Alumina to a smooth texture.
Blend the Epi-Cure 855, 7-TF-l Asbestos, and T-60 Alumina to a smooth texture.
When ready to use combine the resin and converter compositions and blend
thoroughly.
Curing Schedule:
This adhesive will reach its maximum strength at 77 F after 2 days. At 250 F
the maximum strength is obtained in 10 min.
Physical Properties:
The following shear strengths were obtained after five days at room temperature:
1. Creosoted wood to creosoted wood 1,610 psi in shear
Wood failure on all tests.
2. Creosoted wood to steel 1,744 psi in shear
Wood failure on all tests.
3. Steel to steel 2,793 psi in shear
4. Aluminum to aluminum 2,130 psi in shear
5. Rubber to concrete 1 20 psi
The elongation of the rubber was 285%, at ultimate shear.
The adhesive was applied approximately 5 mils thick on each surface to be bonded.
Only sufficient pressure to achieve contact was applied. All samples were allowed to cure
at room temperature for a ptriod of five days prior to testing.
Material Sources:
Epi-Rez 509 ( Jones-Dabney Company)
Asbestos 7-TF-l (Johns-Manville Asbestos Fibre Division)
Alumina T-60 (Aluminum Company of America)
Epi-Cure 855 (Jones-Dabney Company)
FORMULATION 991-75
Resin Portion: Same Formula Based on
Pounds Gallons Material 100 Paris by Weight of Resin
100.00 10.31 Epi-Rez 509 100
Converter:
35.00 4.27 Epi-Cure 872 35
Filler:
(Variable) (Variable) Clean, dry, well graded masonry sand
The amount of sand to use will depend on the gradation of the taod and the
degree of workability desired. Mix trial batches to determine best proportions.
14
Epoxy Resins
Constants:
Unfilled Filled
Pot life at 77 F in 1-lb batch y2 hr Ya, hr
Pot life in thin films at 77 F 2 hr 2 hr
FORMULATION 991-76
Resin Portion:
Pounds
Gallons
Material
Part
71.42
7.36
Epi-Rez 509
100
14.29
0.47
Alumina T-60
20
14.29
0.67
Asbestos 7-TF-l
20
100.00 8.50 140
Converter :
25.00 3.05 Epi-Cure 872 35
15.00 0.50 Alumina T60 21
15.00 0.70 Asbestos 7-TF-l 21
55.00 4.25 77
Constants:
Viscosity at 1 rpm, 77 F (cps) 84,000
Viscosity at 5 rpm, 77 F (cps) 35,200
Pot life at 77 F for a 1-pint batch (min) 35
Material Sources:
Epi-Rez 509 (Jones-Dabney Company)
Alumina T-60 (Aluminum Company of America)
Asbestos 7-TF-l ( Johns-Manville Asbestos Fibre Division)
Epi-Cure 872 (Jones-Dabney Company)
FORMULATION 1101-32
Same Formula Based on
Pounds Gallons Material 100 Parts by Weight of Resin
100 10.31 Epi-Rez 509 100
Converter :
50 6.33 Epi-Cure 855 50
Filler:
(Variable) (Variable) Clean, dry, well graded masonry sand
The amount of sand to use will depend on the gradation of the sand and the degree
of workability desired. Mix trial batches to determine best proportions.
Constants:
Pot life (filled) 3-4 hr
Pot life (unfilled) \y2-2 hr
mixing 1,900 cps at 77 F on Brookfield Spindle
No. 3 at 20 rpm 33% of liquid
Converter
Wt/gal (unfilled) 9.0 lb
Mixing:
Blend resin, converter, and sand, in that order.
Epoxy Resins
15
Curing Schedule:
Light traffic — overnight at 77 F
Heavy traffic — 3 days at 77 F
Material Sources:
Epi-Rez 509 (Jones-Dabney Company)
Epi-Cure 855 (Jones-Dabney Company)
Crystal silica sand (Ottawa Silica Company)
FORMULATION Pi
\<\ >i.\ Portion:
Pounds Gallons
100 10.31
Converter:
50
6.33
Material
Epi-Rez 509
Epi-Cure 855
Same formula Based on
100 Parts by Weight of Resin
100
50
Pot life: 100-g batch at 77 F = 4J^ hr.
FORMULATION P2
Resin Portion:
Pounds Gallon*
100 10.31
Material
Epi-Rez 509
Epi-Cure 872
Pot life: 100-g batch at 77 F = 38 min
Convert kr :
35
4.27
Same Formula Based on
100 Parts by Weight of Resin
100
35
Resin Portion: Part .1
Pounds Gallons
100
10.31
0.45
FORMULATION Cl
Material
Epi-Rez 509
Cabosil M5
Same Formula Based on
100 Parts by Weight of Resin
100
Converter Portion: Part B
35 4.27 Epi-Cure --7-
35
Mixing:
1. Using separate containers, measure out 108 parts by weight of the resin portion
( white paste marked "A") and 35 parts of the converter portion (brown liquid marked
"B").
2. Put the 108 part- ol "A" and 35 parts of "BM together in a third container.
3. Blend "A" and "B" together until the mix has a uniform color with oo streaks
Be sure that no unmixed resin adheres to the side of the container. It should take from
3 to 5 min to obtain thorough blending.
4. The epoxy mixture should now be applied without delay to the surfaces to be
coated. An inexpensive 4-in brush i- recommended. Brush it on in a thick even coal
The coverage should be approximately 100 sq ft per gal on a reasonably smooth sur
face, less coverage will be realized over areas containing rivel head- or deep pits. It the
rate of application i- dower than anticipated, the hardening time for the batch (pot
life) can be extended by emptying tht containei ol epoxj along the surface to be
and then brushing it out for the required covei
16 Epoxy Resins
Curing Time:
When the epoxy is spread out in a thin film, the internal heat of the reaction is
rapidly dissipated into the air. Because of this, the curing time of the epoxy ccating
is dependent on the surrounding temperature; below 60 F it will not harden, between
60 and 70 F it will harden in a few hours and obtain maximum strength in three to
four days. If a second or touch up coat is necessary, it can be applied as soon as the
first coat is hard enough so that the second application will not disturb it.
Part 4
General Instructions for Use of Epoxy Resins
1. Surface Preparation
For Application to Timber
Untreated timber will normally not require any special surface treatment. Surface
brushing or blowing with high-pressure air will remove dirt, dust and loose particles.
Make certain the air compressor is equipped with an oil-water trap. Oil and grease
should be removed with a solvent. The surface should preferably be dry.
Timber treated with a preservative such as creosote, coal-tar or petroleum oil must
have the preservative removed from the surface before applying the epoxy resin. Loose
oil must be scraped off and the surface washed with a solvent. A final rubbing with
clean cloths should then produce a suitable surface. Treated timber that has weathered
a number of years and has no surface oil present can be cleaned as indicated for
untreated timber.
For Application to Concrete
Concrete has a natural roughness that is favorable to the acceptance of epoxy resin.
New concrete and old concrete that is still sound should be well brushed and air blown
with high presssure air. Any oil or grease on the surface should be removed with a
solvent and the surface wiped with clean cloths. If the surface has been treated with a
curing membrane, oil, silicone, etc., such materials must be removed, sand blasting may
be necessary. Laittance must also be removed. Loose material on old concrete that has
surface deterioration must be removed to sound concrete. All pulverized and powdered
concrete must then be removed from cracks and cavities. A high-pressure water jet can
be used for this, followed by blowing with high-pressure air supplied by a compressor
with an oil-water trap. Allow to dry as necessary for the type of epoxy resin to be used.
For Application to Steel
Until various surface treatments have been evaluated it is recommended that steel
surfaces be sand blasted to receive the epoxy resin. If sand blasting is not practical, the
surfaces should be thoroughly scraped, wire brushed to remove loose mill scale and
cleaned with a solvent to remove all dirt, oil, grease and other materials that would
prevent the epoxy resin from bonding to the base metal. Wipe with clean cloths. This
is not a substitute for sand blasting, but may in some instances produce satisfac-
tory bond.
For Application to Rubber
Wash surfaces thoroughly with methyl ethyl ketone to remove any mold-release
agent.
E poxy Resins 17
2. Mixing
The manufacture's instructions should be read and followed. Some mixtures require
a specific time for aging before application, others do not. Note also the specified pot
life, as this can be a guide as to how fast the mixture will set up.
Mix small quantities at a time. Usually 1 to 3 gal can be most conveniently handled.
Use separate containers and measure parts, by volume or weight, of resin, converter
and fillers as specified in Part 3, Formulations.
Thorough blending of all ingredients is essential. Blend the resin and converter
before adding the filler. The mixing container should be of larger capacity than the
volume to be mixed. For example, for a 1-gal batch, use a 3-gal container. Mix thor-
oughly so that all components are blended uniformly from top to bottom as well as to
the sides of the container.
If the resin portion and the converter portion are furnished in contrasting colors,
the time of mixing can be determined by the time required to attain a uniform color.
If color contrast is not apparent, a 1-gal mix should be hand mixed with a spatula for
5 min or mixed with an electric paint-type mixer for 2 min.
Care should be taken to not contaminate the resin and converter by reusing mixing
tools covered with other ingredients.
The chemical reaction between resin and converter generates heat. When large quan-
ties are mixed, this heat cannot be dissipated through the sides of the container or into
the air and will accelerate the setting of the mixture. Pot life is thus influenced by the
volume of the mixture and the degree with which its heat of reaction can be dissipated.
Spread out in a thin film, it will set up slower than if in a deep container.
Advance Report of Committee 3 — Ties and Wood Preservation*
R. B. Radkey, Chairman
Termite Control Investigation — Inspection of Specimens
After 52 Months of Exposure
Introduction
This report summarizes the results of an inspection of treated specimens and un-
treated control specimens after about 52 months of exposure in a test plot established
in the Austin Cary Memorial Forest of the University of Florida near Gainesville, Fla.,
to determine the most effect preservatives and preservative retentions to reduce the rate
of decay and termite attack in oak, pine and fir wood.
The initial installation, consisting of 1296 treated specimens and 30 untreated con-
trol specimens, was made in November 1957. A total of 9 different preservatives was
used, with 3 different retentions for each preservative. A report describing the initial
installation is published in the 1959 Proceedings, Vol. 60, page 131. It covers in detail
the treatment of the specimens, chemical analyses of the preservatives, and method of
installation. A supplemental installation of 576 specimens treated with 4 additional pre-
servatives, and 15 untreated control specimens, was made in November 1959. A detailed
report describing this installation is published in the 1961 Proceedings, Vol. 62, page 95.
The results of an inspection of the specimens after 40 months of exposure are set
forth in AAR Research Department report ER-16 and in the 1962 Proceedings, Vol. 63,
page 53. The general conclusion was that only those specimens treated with coal tar
creosote completely resisted both decay and termite attack during that interval.
The investigation is being conducted under the general direction of G. M. Magee,
director of engineering research, Research Department, AAR. The conduct of the inves-
tigation and preparation of the report were in charge of E. J. Ruble, executive research
engineer, research staff, AAR. The inspection of the specimens was conducted by Dr.
J. B. Huffman of the University of Florida, R. B. Radkey, chairman of Committee 3 —
Ties and Wood Preservation, F. J. Fudge and W. L. Kahler, members of Committee 3,
and I. A. Eaton, research staff, AAR. Funds for the investigation are being provided
by the AAR.
Grading
The system of specimen grading for both decay and termite attack used during the
inspection corresponds to that recommended by the American Wood Preservers Associa-
tion and is fully described in the previously mentioned reports covering the inspection
after 40 months of exposure.
Field Inspections
The inspection of the specimens was conducted in the same manner as described in
the above mentioned reports. It involved the removal of each 2- by 4- by 18-in speci-
men, which is buried in the ground for half its length, cleaning off the dirt and sand
with a spatula and then determining its grade for both decay and termite attack. The
specimen was then replaced in its original position. The decay and termite grades are
recorded on "Field Inspection Data Sheets" an example of which is shown in the above
mentioned reports.
• An abstract of Report ER-23 issued by the Research Department. AAR. Copies of the full
report can be obtained from the director of engineering revarch, AAR, 3140 S. Federal St., Chicago 16
19
20 Termite Control Investigation
Analysis of Field Inspection Data
The data on the decay and termite attack grades, as recorded on the ''Field Inspec-
tion Data Sheets" were summarized and recorded on the "Classified Data Sheets",
example of which is shown in the above mentioned reports. The ratings for decay and
termite attack were determined in the same manner as explained in the previous reports.
In previous reports the average index rating was obtained by averaging the decay
rating with the termite attack rating. It has been pointed out that when all the stakes
have failed, either by decay or termite attack, the average index rating should be zero,
but the method previously used to determine this average rating will result in a num-
erical value greater than zero after all the stakes have failed. The method to determine
the average value in this report follows the recommendation of ASTM Method D 1758-
60T, Evaluating Wood Preservatives by Field Tests with Stakes, in which the decay
and termite grades are combined, that is, the lowest grade from either cause is used.
The average index rating for the untreated specimens as determined for the previous
inspections and shown in Tables 1, 2, and 3 have not been revised, however.
Results of Inspections
Untreated Controls
The decay and termite attack ratings with their average index ratings for the un-
treated controls installed in November 1957 are shown in Table 1 for exposures of 14
months, 25 months, 40 months and 52 months. The values shown in this table are the
average of 10 untreated specimens of each species, and it can be seen that after 52 months,
7 of the oak, 6 of the fir and all 10 of the pine specimens had failed. It can be seen from
the index ratings that both decay and termite attack contributed to the failure of the
specimens.
Additional untreated controls were installed at the time of each inspection, and the
index ratings for these specimens for the exposure time are shown on Tables 2, 3, and 4.
In general the index ratings for termite attack are lower than the ratings for decay.
Treated Specimens
The decay and termite attack ratings after 52 months of exposure for the speci-
mens treated with preservatives 1 to 9, inch, are shown in Table 5. The data are also
shown for preservative 13, a 25 percent creosote with 75 percent petroleum, after 27
months of exposure for the No. 1 retention. Complete data are shown for retention 1
and 2 for the nine preservatives and also for the specimens having No. 3 retention of
preservative 2, chromated zinc chloride, and preservative 3, tanalith. Only a cursory
examination was made of the remaining specimens, but it was evident that very little,
if any, decay or termite attack has taken place.
The data tabulated in Table 5 for the specimens treated with No. 1 retention are
shown graphically by the bar diagram on Fig. 1. It is evident from this diagram that
even with this light retention, which is only half that recommended by AREA, coal tar
creosote is offering the best protection against decay and termite attack while chromated
zinc chloride and tanalith are offering the least protection.
Conclusions
From the data secured during the inspection of treated specimens of oak, fir and pine
species after 52 months of exposure, it seems logical to conclude that:
Termite Control Investig ation
21
Table 1
SUMMARY OF INDEX RATINGS
UNTREATED SPECIMENS
INSTALLED: NOV. 1957
T=Termito
or
D» Decay
14 Months
Exposure ,
25 Months
Exposure
40 Months
Exposure
52 Months
Exposure
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
T
D
AV.
77.5
72.5
75.0
67.5
95.0
81.25
60.0
70.0
65.0
37.5
40.0
38.75
40.0
72.5
56.25
30.0
25.0
27.5
27.5
22.5
25.0
40.0
55.0
48.75
10.0
12.5
11.25
10.0
17.5
7.5
15.0
47.5
15.0
0
0
0
No. of
Failures
1
1
0
2
1
6
4
3
9
7
6
10
Table 2
SUMMARY OF INDEX RATINGS
UNTREATED SPECIMENS
INSTALLED: JAN 1959
T=Termite
or
D=Decay
11 Months
Exposure
26 Months
Exposure
37 Months
Exposure
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
T
D
AV.
62.5
67.5
65.0
60.0
67.5
63.75
62.5
65.0
63.75
47.5
42.5
45.0
37.5
57.5
47.5
37.5
17.5
27.5
30.0
35.0
25.0
30.0
42.5
20.0
5.0
5.0
0
No. of
Failures
0
0
0
2
2
5
5
5
10
Table 3
SUMMARY OF INDEX RATINGS
UNTREATED SPECIMENS
INSTALLED: NOV. 1959
T=Termite
or
D-Decay
15 Months
Exposure
27 Months
Exposure
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
T
D
AV.
70.0
75.0
72.5
67.5
77.5
72.5
55.0
70.0
62.5
57.5
65.0
50.0
45.0
67.5
45.0
35.0
47.5
20.0
No. of
Failures
0
0
0
0
1
4
Table h
SUMMARY OF INDEX RATINGS
UNTREATED SPECIMENS
INSTALLED: FEB. 1961
T"=Termite
or
D=Decay
12 Months
Exposure
Oak
Fir
Pine
T
D
AV.
62.5
87.5
60.0
50.0
75.0
50.0
47.5
72.5
40.0
No. of
Failures
0
0
0
1. Coal tar creosote is offering the best protection against decay and termite
attack.
2. Chromated zinc chloride and tanalith are affording less protection against
decay and termite attack than the other preservatives. However, even the
bwer retentions of chromated zinc chloride and tanalith considerably reduce
the rate of decay and termite attack compared with no treatment.
22
Termite Control Investigation
Table 5
SUMMARY OF QUALITY INDEX-RATINGS
TREATED SPE OMENS
Months
T=Termite
No.
1 Retention
No
2 Retention
No. 3 Retention
of
Service
Pres.
D=Decay
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
Oak
Fir
Pine
T
100.0
100.0
97.5
100.0
100.0
100.0
1
52
D
100.0
100.0
100.0
97.5
100.0
100.0
AV.
100.0
100.0
97.5
97.5
100.0
100.0
T
67.5
55.0
37.5
70.0
60.0
67.5
75.0
80.0
82.5
2
52
D
80.0
92.5
80.0
92.5
95.0
95.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
AV.
55.0
55.0
37.5
67.5
60.0
67.5
75.0
80.0
82.5
T
60.0
87.5
35.0
65.0
77.5
75.0
97.5
92.5
92.5
3
52
D
57.5
92.5
55.0
57.5
92.5
87.5
67.5
97.5
95.0
AV.
45.0
80.0
27.5
45.0
77.5
70.0
67.5
90.0
87.5
T
90.0
75.0
70.0
100.0
87.5
82.5
4
52
D
87.5
90.0
92.5
97.5
100.0
92.5
AV.
80.0
72.5
70.0
97.5
87.5
80.0
T
90.0
92.5
85.0
97.5
97.5
100.0
5
52
D
87.5
95.0
95.0
100.0
100.0
100.0
AV.
80.0
90.0
82.5
97.5
97.5
100.0
T
72.5
65.0
67.5
97.5
100.0
92.5
6
52
D
82.5
92.5
82.5
97.5
100.0
100.0
AV.
67.5
62.5
65.0
92.5
100.0
92.5
T
100.0
100.0
92.5
100.0
100.0
97.5
7
52
D
77.5
100.0
100.0
87.5
100.0
100.0
AV.
77.5
100.0
92.5
87.5
100.0
97.5
T
75.0
90.0
62.5
92.5
97.5
90.0
8
52
D
72.5
87.5
85.0
75.0
95.0
95.0
AV.
60.0
82.5
55.0
75.0
95.0
85.0
T
72.5
90.0
77.5
92.5
92.5
85.0
9
52
D
67.5
90.0
97.5
85.0
87.5
100.0
AV.
57.5
82.5
77.5
82.5
80.0
85.0
T
10
27
D
AV.
T
11
27
D
AV.
T
12
27
D
AV.
T
100.0
100.0
97.5
13
27
D
AV.
95.0
95.0
100.0
100.0
92.5
90.0
Specimens treated with preservatives 1 to 9 incl. were installed in November 1957.
Specimens treated with preservatives 10 to 13 incl. were installed in November 1959.
Inspection Date: Feb. 1962
Ter mite Control Investigation
23
FIG l
SUMMA 'ALITY INDEX RATINGS
TREATED SPECIMENS
RETENTION: I
QUALITf INDEX RATING- PERCENT
— DECAY
iTMBOl urn™ TERMITE
100 JO dO 70 60 50 40 iO
Advance Report of Committee 1 — Roadway and Ballast
F. N. Beighley, Chairman
Grading Problems Encountered During Relocation of the
Santa Fe Railway's Main Line Between Williams
and Crookton, Ariz.
By R. A. STANE
Construction Engineer, Coast Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway
The Santa Fe Railway completed the construction of a 44-mile relocation of its
double-track railroad between Williams and Crookton, Ariz., in December 1960. Con-
struction of the original single-track railrcad was started in April 1881, and the line
was completed and placed in service in the winter of 1883. Lewis Kingman, Santa Fe's
locating engineer at that time, was aware of a more operable route farther to the north.
However, its construction would have entailed the movement of malpais rock in quan-
tities too large to be practicable for the equipment of that time, so he was forced to
locate the line from Williams down through Johnson Canyon to Crookton by way of
Ash Fork. This location called for canyon wall construction and the building of Johnson
Canyon tunnel, 396 ft long and on a 10-deg, 6-min curve.
In time the single-track railrcad no longer sufficed, and by 1913 a separated tunnel-
free second track had been placed in service to serve as the eastbound main line as it
was intended that westward traffic would be carried on the old single-track railroad.
However, the company was frequently called upon to handle westbound loads too high
or too wide to pass through Johnson Canyon tunnel and they had to be run against
traffic on the eastbound main line, resulting in considerable loss of train time in eastward
movements. This, together with excessive costs due to rail wear on curves as sharp as
10 deg, 34 min, fuel consumption on heavy grades as steep as 1.8 percent, helper service,
etc., created a serious need for a major relocation.
Reconnaissance surveys were made, and it was determined that with modern equip-
ment a route employing curves of 1 deg or less and maximum grades of 1 percent was
feasible — probably not too distant from the northerly route mentioned in Mr. Kingman's
memoirs.
During the time of planning, the basalts were considered to be a major problem
even though they constituted only 41 percent of the solid-rock excavation, the remain-
ing 59 percent being sandstone and limestone. If the basalts had been entirely solid and
unbroken, they would not have been too difficult to handle with modern heavy equip-
ment and blasting agents. However, they were badly fractured during the cooling process,
and, in addition, many types were encountered, each presenting an individual problem.
The first type was solid and firm with no distinct cleavage or fracture planes. It
was so coarse in grain that it approached the texture of gabbro, and was dark in color.
On the surface, it was evidenced by well rounded outcrops. The rock was hard; the rate
of drill penetration in it was low, approximately 30 to 40 ft per hr, and the powder
factor was high — as high as 1.75 lb per cu yd. However, the rock broke into small
fragments, which resulted in good shovel production.
The second type was solid and firm with distinct, closely spaced horizontal cleavage
planes. It was fine grained and could be identified by its slab-like appearance and Bat
residual boulders. It could be drilled at a rate of 52 to 56 ft per hr and broke well into
small fragments.
25
26 Grading Problems— Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation
&&&&&.
Fig. 1— North face of Cedar Tank cut at Mile Post SQS1/^ This shows
conditions at the time it was decided to lay slopes back and do additional
benching because of a general failure of the cut slopes caused by petrostatic
pressures in this cut, which is 115 ft deep.
Grading Problems— Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation 27
The third type was solid and firm with fracture planes in all directions. It was fine
grained and could be identified by its irregular and well rounded outcrops. Drill pene-
tration was approximately 56 ft per hr, and the rock broke into small, well graded
fragments which made it particularly suitable for roadbed embankments.
The fourth type was vesicular but firm, having no distinct cleavage or fracture planes
The rock was light in both color and weight and drilled easily, but blasting results were
erratic and much secondary shooting was required.
The fifth type was solid and firm but intermixed with volcanic cinders. The loose
cinders caused the drill holes to plug during the drilling and hading operations, which
resulted in high drilling costs and poor loading patterns causing poor fragmentation and
requiring extensive secondary shooting. However, the resulting material, though expen-
sive in its production, made exceptionally good roadbed embankment.
The sixth type was a volcanic cinder with inclusions of malpais boulders or dikes.
Stripping was difficult, in some areas so much so that stripping was not economically
feasible. Drilling and loading were very difficult and expensive and recovery was unsatis-
factory. The resulting drill patterns were poor, and excessive secondary shooting was
required. This condition could be recognized by the presence of occasional ledges out-
cropping in the cinder areas.
Roadbeds were constructed in excavation with a minimum bottom width of 42 tt.
sufficiently wide to permit the use of 4-yd shovels. As these machines are capable of
working 30-ft faces, drill holes were, for the most part, 30 ft deep. The holes were 3in.
in diameter and were drilled on various patterns, the most common being on 6- by 7-tt
centers, and were loaded with ammonium nitrate blasting materials boosted by 60 percent
extra dynamite which was, in turn, detonated by primacord.
On the average, 1.347 lb of explosive were used per cubic yard of malpais excavated.
During the first V/2 years the track was in service the only failures experienced in
the malpais areas were in cut slopes comprised of malpais boulders in a matrix of vol-
canic cinders. These failures were minor and developed so slowly that loosened materials
could be removed before the track was endangered.
Sandstone and limestone comprised the greater portion of the rock excavation and.
though more easily moved than the malpais, they posed the most difficult design prob
lems. Both sedimentary formations were laid down during the Permian Period. The
sandstones are particularly interesting, as in them is seen substantiation of the theory
of shifting poles. According to recent papers by geologist M. D. Opdyke and physicisl
S. K. Runcorn a study of the magnetic fields in the Supai sandstone, southeast of Wil
liams and southwest of Flagstaff, indicates that at the time of their formation, during
the early Permian Period, the north pole was near Nanking, China, not taking into
account changes in relative location due to continental drift. This placed the equator
approximately in the middle of Utah. Its direction was that which is now northeast to
southwest. A later study of the magnetic fields, during the Triassic Period, in the Moen
kopi formation shows the north pole to have been so positioned as to have placed the
equator in the proximity of Tampico, Mexico in a direction which is now south IS deg
west, more or less. If this may be accepted, the equator passed slightly south ol the
Williams area about Mid-Permian in a direction roughly northeast to southwest, and
for this reason the prevailing winds wen- fr< m what is now north but at that time
northeast.
Sand migrations caused by these winds sweeping over an ancient dead sea built up
deposits which were later to become the Coconino sandstones. The materials so dej
28 Grading Problems— Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation
Fig. 2 — North side of cut about 2000 ft long and 75 ft deep just east
of Mile Post 410. This picture shows the failure which occurred in the
deepest part of the cut about one year after the line was placed in service.
Grading Problems — Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation 29
Fig. 3 — North side of same cut as shown in Fig. 2, but view shows the
north face of this cut just east of point of failure in the steeply dipping
sandstone.
created a huge sand plain, its surface being from 200 to 300 ft above underlying mate-
rials— in this area the Hermit shales — and, as equatorial winds are very nearly constant
in direction, a great sloping front was advanced toward the southwest as the sands
spilled over its face. This would account for the bedding planes dipping from what is
now north to south due to the 45 deg rotation of the earth's surface, with occasional
ancmalies caused by storms moving in directions contrary to that of the trade wind-
Laminations are probably the result of crustations caused by intermittent precipitation
and/or gradation variations resulting from wind velocity changes.
The general area then subsided and the Permian Sea moved in to form the Kaibab
limestone by marine depositicn. The country rose and again subsided for the Cretaceous
Sea. It then began its rise to its present level. This rise was fairly uniform over a great
area. However, minor differences caused alternate compression and tension in the rock
masses which probably accounts for the jointing now evident in plane- roughly °0 deg
to each other.
The sandstone lies in thin beds varying in thickness from less than 1 in to 2 or
3 ft. It is badly crossbedded and lies on planes sloping, for the mosl part, 2 or 3 tt
horizontally to 1 ft vertically. This variatii n from the u.-ual angle Ol repose of -and-
is probably due largely to the encouragement of horizontal movement oi the -and par
tides by winds passing over the sloping face always in a direction tending to Batten
the slopes. To a lesser degree, thi- Hatter slope is the result of the pull of gravity being
less as it would be at the equator because of the greater distance between the centers
30
Grading Problems — Santa Fc's Williams-Crookton Relocation
■
Fig. 4 — North face of cut just east of Mile Post 410 during the con-
struction period. The massive sandstone material jutting out of the slope
behind the pickup truck was removed by a series of tractor treads pulled
between two crawler tractors.
of masses, and greater opposition by an increased centrifugal force because of the ex-
tended radius of the earth at the equator and a slightly faster rotation of the earth at
that time, all of which would reduce the "weight" of the sand particles thus requiring
a lesser external horizontal force to cause movement.
The bedding planes are covered by a thin coating of clay which originated in the
overlying shales and limestones. The joints through which these clays gained access to
the bedding planes now permit surface water to find its way to the clays, thus lubricating
the planes making huge rock slides a possibility. In fact, approximately one year after
the new line was placed in service, a large-scale failure occurred following a period of
considerable precipitation. The failure, however, was anticipated at the time of construc-
tion and sufficient extra width had been provided to safely contain the slide.
In many areas the sandstone formation is still overlaid with limestone in beds
which lie very nearly on the horizontal. Apparently the entire area through which the
new line was constructed is presently in compression due to the current upward move-
ment of the earth's crust, as it is found that instability of slopes in limestone cuts was
further increased by petrostatic pressure. The blasting for one cut, approximately
40 ft deep and 3000 ft long, was done in one operation, and the limestone overlying the
Grading Problems — Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation 3 1
sandstone suddenly moved in about 14 in. No correction was made and no further
movement has occurred. Another cut, 13,000 ft long and having a maximum depth of
115 ft, was designed for a roadway width of 42 ft, s'.opes of JA:1, and a 25-ft bench at
the 50-ft level. Excavation was about two-thirds completed when the slopes began to
fail due to petrostatic pressures, and it was necessary to reopen the entire cut. In the
redesigned roadbed the original width and slopes were maintained; however, two 35-ft
benches were constructed at the 40-ft and 70-ft levels. The redesigned slopes, during
the first two years after construction, have been stationary, and it appears that there
will be no further movement.
The sandstones, though highly abrasive to bits, could be drilled easily, progress
being from 62 to 70 ft per hr.
Limestones were not abrasive and varied considerably in hardness. The harder
limestones were drilled at the rate of 54 to 60 ft per hr; the softer limestones were
drilled at rates varying from 80 to 100 ft per hr.
On the average, 1.075 lb of explosive were used per cubic yard of sandstone/lime-
stone excavated.
Over the entire job the blasting agents were comprised, by weight, of 13.5 percent
dynamite and 86.5 percent ammonium nitrate in one form or another. Coated ammonium
nitrate prills were used where holes were dry; however, nitro-carbo-nitrate was used
where holes were wet. It was found, when the holes were dry, that the nitro-carbo-
nitrate materials were a little more efficient than the ammonium nitrate prills sensitized
by the addition of 2 qt of diesel fuel oil per 50 lb of prills. Regardless as to which
materials were used, the required spacing of dynamite bocs.ers was the same — in gen-
eral, three 1.09-lb sticks in the bottom of the hole with 1 stick at every 5- to 8-ft level
to within 30 in of the top of the hole.
A definite saving can be made by making use of ammonium nitrate prills wherever
possible. For example, letting the cost of coated ammonium nitrate prills after treatment
serve as an index, that is 1.0, the comparative cost of one of the nitro-carbo-nitrates
was 1.57, the second 2.22, and dynamite 4.83.
Usual railroad roadbed specifications require that embankments made of rock be
constructed in lifts of no greater than 18-in depths. To have obtained rock usable in
such lifts would have required much more expensive drilling and blasting. Dense fill-
were constructed using rock of 3-ft sizes and even, occasionally, as large as 4 ft in
diameter. This was accomplished by dropping the loads on top of the lift being made
and dozing the materials over the face of the lift. The fines of the later dumpings were
thus dropped into the voids created by the larger rolling rock of the preceding dumpings
Occasionally it was necessary to bring in fines to provide a smooth roadwaj for the
trucks, and only when this was done were sheepsfoot tamp- employed on rock fills.
No water was used on the entire construction, including the making of roadbed
embankments of cinders and clay, and, by slightly increasing the compactive effort, no
difficulty was experienced in obtaining required densities. For the most part, the com
paction of common materials was by proper routing of beavj rubber-tired hauling
equipment, the remainder being by sheepsfoot tamp.
The compaction of select materials around corrugated metal pipes was also accom
plished without the use of water. These materials, either cinders deteriorating to daj
or of a more solid granular nature, were tamped with hand-operated pneumati» tamper-
directly under the haunch of the pipe. The volume so tamped was kept at an absolute
minimum and the remainder, up to the spring line, was compacted bj a No. 12 motor
32 Grading Problems— Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation
Fig. 5— North face of 75-ft cut just east of Mile Post 410 during the
construction period, showing the variable dips and strikes of the Coconino
sandstone of the Permian period.
Grading Problems — Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation 33
^^SvSSSS^
► *..-» -~4
"A
M?0
*k-
i>isf:
/
Fig. 6 — North face of sandstone cut with maximum depth of 110 ft
just west of Mile Post 410, showing condition of the Coconino sandstone
during the construction period.
patrol running longitudinally with the pipe with its front wheels laid over as far as
possible so as to force the material under the pipe. Above the spring line, to an elevation
of twice the radius above the spring line but not less than 3 ft over the top of the
pipe, and outside of vertical planes tangent to the pipe, materials were tamped by a
front-end loader running longitudinally with the pipe and carrying a full load in its
scoop. In so doing, loose materials spilled over the top of the pipe, filling that area
between the vertical planes mentioned above. The leader was then passed transversely
over the pipe until at least the upper 1 ft had been compacted to roadbed embankment
requirements. The result was an evenly compacted embankment easily meeting the re-
quirements for roadbed construction and the pipes were squeezed so as to slightly elon-
gate the vertical axis. It was found after large diameter pipes had been subjected to loads
imposed by high fills that the entire ellipse provided in the manufacture of the pipe
remained.
Since the line has been placed in service a slight Battening of the upper half of 72-in
corrugated metal pipes has been noted where they have been placed with minimum
— 3 ft below base of rail. This has occurred wherever select cinder material contained
an appreciable clay fraction. Apparently the clay fraction reduces the safety factor to
very nearly 1.0 percent. Maximum distortion probably occurs just before the front
wheels of fast-moving locomotives reach the center of the pipe, thus causing maximum
Hull. 573
34 Grading Problems — Santa Fe's Williams-Crookton Relocation
loading on one side of the pipe with nothing but the weight of the minimum cover
resisting on the other side. As all 72-in pipes under minimum cover did not fail it would
seem that the little additional resistance required may be obtained by increasing the
minimum cover approximately 6 in wherever the clay fraction cannot be avoided. An-
other solution to this problem might be the introduction of vibratory equipment above
the spring line to attain a higher degree of compaction directly over the pipe, as con-
siderable consolidation would be obtained through the transmission of vibratory forces
into the soils not directly beneath the compactor.
The Williams-Crookton relocation required the movement of 3% million yards of
basalt, 5 million yards of sandstone and limestone, Zl/2 million yards of common mate-
rials, \l/2 million yards of common borrow, the construction of bridges costing $2 mil-
lion, the laying of 88 track miles of electrically welded rail, and the installation of the
most modern train control and signal systems, certainly a major undertaking for private
enterprise and a clear indication that railroads are willing to expand their plants even
at tremendous costs to better their service in the field of heavy, long-haul transportation
for which they are so well equipped.
Advance Report of Committee 1 — Roadway and Ballast
Report on Assignment 10 (a)
Ballast Tests
T. W. Creighton (chairman, subcommittee), E. W. Bauman, J. G. Campbell, J. E. Gray,
\V. C. McCormick, E. W. McCuskey, E. L. Robinson, Jr., Stanton Walker, C. E.
Webb, E. L. Woods.
Your committee presents as information a report on conductivity tests conducted
at the AAR Research Center on open-hearth slag* furnished by the United States Steel
Corporation from Lorain, Ohio, to determine if that material is satisfactory for use as
railrcad ballast in track-circuit territory.
This research is sponsored by Committee 1 — Roadway and Ballast, and the tests
were performed by the engineering research staff of the AAR Research Depart nun t
under the direction of G. M. Magee, director of engineering research, and Rockwell
Smith, research engineer roadway. The tests were conceived and conducted by M. F.
Smucker, assistant electrical engineer, and G. L. Hinueber, engineering laboratory man-
ager. The report was prepared by G. L. Hinueber.
A series of conductivity tests were run on the open-hearth slag using a specially
built 8-cu-ft box with dimensions of 2 by 2 by 2 ft. The box was constructed of >4-in ply-
wood, and the inside was coated with epoxy resin to waterproof it. Two copper plates
(24 in by llj^ in by iV in) were bonded to each of two opposite faces of the inside
of the box. The upper and lower plates on each face were separated by approximately
1 in.
The box was filled to the top with the open-hearth slag and the resistance between
the copper plates on opposite faces was determined by using an ohmmeter. Resistance
readings were taken between the two bottom plates and between the two top plates.
The top and bottom plates were then connected in parallel, and resistance readings were
then taken between the two sides. The open-hearth slag was removed from the box and
sprinkled with water until thoroughly wet. It was allowed to drain for about 1 hr and
then shoveled back into the box. The resistance of the wet ballast in the box was deter-
mined by applying a-c voltage across the copper plates, measuring both the current and
applied voltage. The dynamic resistance of the sample was determined by dividing the
applied voltage by the current. It was necessary to use the a-c method for determining
the resistance of the wet ballast material to overcome the polarity of the individual
ballast particles which would tend to make d-c resistance readings unreliable.
In order to compare the resistance readings of the opm-hearth-slag ballast material
with a ballast of acceptable conductivity, the procedure described above was repeated,
using a representative blast-furnace-slag ballast.
The results of these tests are as follow-:
Ballast Type
Open-hearth slag
Open-hearth slag
Open-hearth slag
Blast-furnace slag
Blast-furnace slag
Blast-furnace slag
* Open-hearth slag is formed simultaneously whin steel i- produced and refined i" open-hearth
furnaces. It consists essentially of a fused mixturi of oxides and
35
Plata Between
.' Readings
Whirh Resistance
Box Full
Full
Was Measured
Empty Box
Dry Ballast
Wei Ballast
. Bottom in bottom
Infinity
620 megohms
3500 ohms
.Tup In tOP
infinity
620 megohms
3900 ohm-
.Side to side
infinity
500 megohms
2200 ohm-
.Bottom to bottom
infinity
I n G n i t y
1850 ohm-
.Top to top
infinity
Infinity
3100 ohms
.Side to side
Infinity
Infinity
1350 ohm-
36 Ballast Tests
These results indicate that the open-hearth slag is a better conductor in the dry
state than the blast-furnace slag. This was to be expected because of the higher metallic
content of the open-hearth slag. However, when the ballast materials were wet the
open-hearth slag showed a slightly lower conductivity than the blast-furnace slag. Blast-
furnace slag is more porous than the open hearth and consequently will retain more
water, which is a conductor. It will also be noted that the b'.ast-furnace slag sample
contained more fine material than the open-hearth slag, and a check with a magnet indi-
cated the presence of considerable metallic material in the fines. These fines had a tend-
ency to settle to the bottom of the test bcx and probably account for the resistance
reading of the wet blast-furnace slag in the bottom half of the box being lower than
that in the top half.
The next phase of the investigation consisted of testing the conductivity of individual
pieces of seven different ballast materials. Ten representative pieces of each of the seven
ballast materials were selected. An chmmeter was used to determine the resistance across
each piece in the dry condition. Next the pieces were soaked in water and the resistance
across each piece was determined for the wet state. The pieces were then surface dried
with a cloth and resistances determined for the saturated surface-dry state. The fol-
lowing results of these tests are reported for the average of the resistances of the 10
pieces of each ballast material:
Saturated Surface- Wet
Ballast Material Dry Resistance Dry Resistance Resistance
Open-hearth slag 27 megohms 550,000 ohms 145,000 ohms
Blast-furnace slag Infinity 850,000 ohms 180,000 ohms
Limestone Infinity 1.4 meg ohms 260,000 ohms
Chert (Chat) Infinity 10 meg ohms 500,000 ohms
Quartzite Infinity 10 meg ohms 800,000 ohms
Trap Rock Infinity 10 meg ohms 600,000 ohms
Granite Infinity 10 meg ohms 340,000 ohms
It will be noted that a considerable difference exists between the resistance of the
open-hearth slag pieces and the resistance of the other types of ballast tested in the dry
state. This difference is somewhat less, although still considerable, in the saturated surface-
dry state. The difference between the resistance of the open-hearth slag and the resistance
of the other ballast materials tested is considerably smaller in the saturated state. The
materials with higher porosities, such as blast-furnace slag, and higher absorptive qual-
ities, such as limestone, exhibit conductivity of higher magnitudes in the saturated surface-
dry and wet states than those of lower porosity and lower absorption. The conductivity
of these more porous and absorptive aggregates approaches the conductivity of the
open-hearth slag fairly closely for the saturated surface-dry condition and even more
closely for the wet or saturated state.
The last phase of the investigation was conducted with the use of a 5-ft, 3-tie sec-
tion of railroad track. The track was first placed on the laboratory floor and the re-
sistance across the rails was read with an ohmmeter. The dry open-hearth slag ballast
was then leveled to a depth of 2 ft and the track section placed on top. The resistance
reading across the rails was again read. Next, the cribs between the ties were fiiled with
ballast, making certain that the ballast particles were in contact with the rail base. The
resistance reading was repeated. The ballast and the track section were then thoroughly
saturated with water and the resistance reading repeated once again. The track and
ballast section were allowed to drain for a period of about 1 hr, at which time the
resistance reading was taken for the damp condition.
Ballast Tests 37
Results of these tests on the open-hearth slag are as follows:
Resistance
Condition Across Rails
3-tie section on lab. floor 20 megohms
3-tie section on top of dry ballast 10 megohms
J dry ballast 10 megohms
3-tie section on ballast with cribs full I damp ballast 7500 ohms
j wet ballast 4500 ohms
Again it will be observed that the lowest resistance measured was for the thoroughly
saturated condition. If we extrapolate the resistance for the 5-ft track length to a 1000-ft
track length, we get a 22. 5-ohm resistance for the saturated condition. This value satisfies
the minimum value of 2 ohms as specified by the AAR Communication and Signal
Section. The tests utilizing the 5-ft track section were, however, run on the laboratory
flcor, and it should be noted that the test procedure is of limited extent and would not
necessarily be directly comparable to track conditions.
In 1959 three ballast materials, a limestone, an open-hearth slag from Hammond.
Ind., and a blast-furnace slag, were tested for conductivity using the 5-ft track section
and following the same procedure as described above. The resistances for the saturated
condition per 1000 ft track length were obtained by extrapolating the data from the
5 ft track length. The results were as follows:
Resistance —
Ohms
Per 1000 Ft
Ballast Material Track Length
Limestone (saturated) 22.5 ohms
Open-hearth slag (saturated) 15.0 ohms
Blast-furnace slag (saturated) 20.0 ohms
All of the tests run indicate that the open-hearth slag sample had a higher conduc-
tivity in the dry state than any of the other ballast materials tested. However, in tin
wet condition, which is the most critical as far as conductivity is concerned, the open-
hearth slag is about comparable to the blast-furnace slag used in the investigation and
apparently not much less favorable than the limestone. In fact, the resistance of the
individual pieces of the open-hearth slag tested was in the same general range as. although
lower than, the quartzite, chat, trap rock and »ranitc matt-rials whin tested in tin-
saturated condition.
The test results indicate that the moisture in the ballast cm In- a more important
factor in conductivity than the ballast material itself. For the- ballast materials tested,
the moisture is undoubtedly the governing factor when the ballast section is saturated.
In addition to the conductivity tests, the tests required in the AREA Ballast
Specifications for air-cooled blast-furnace slag were run en the open-hearth slag from
Lorain, Ohio. These test results are as follows:
( in \n\l [ON
Screen Size Percent Passing
2]/2" 100.0
2"
V/2" 80.9
1"
y4" i6A
V2" 2.6
H" 1-7
No. 4 1.2
38 Ballast Tests
Los Angeles Abrasion
Percent loss =31.5
Sodium Sulfate Soundness
Percent loss= 1.0
Weight per Cubic Foot (Compacted)
Wt/Ft3= 116.6 lb
The gradation does not conform strictly with any of the AREA ballast grading
requirements. However, this is merely a matter of processing which could be easily
altered to produce a material of satisfactory gradation. All of the other physical test
results are well within the limits required by the AREA Ballast Specifications.
The test results on the open-hearth slag as included in this report are for a sample
furnished by the U. S. Steel Corporation from Lorain, Ohio. Although these results indi-
cate that this material should prove satisfactory from the conductivity standpoint, it
must be noted that they will not necessarily apply to open-hearth slag material from
other sources. It is believed that open-hearth slag can be processed to produce acceptable
ballast material. However, control of the processing, particularly for the elimination of
particles high in metallic content, is very important.
In addition to the above tests a field inspection was made on a railroad in Michigan
whose main line track is ballasted for a distance of approximately 90 miles with an open-
hearth slag ballast. The track has been in service with this ballast for a period of about
five years without any difficulty being encountered with the signal system. The ballast
is performing well in service, having apparently resisted breakdown due to weathering
and abrasion. Inspections of this nature are planned on other railroads using open-hearth
slag ballast, with samples being taken for laboratory tests.
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties*
Introduction
In designing the fastenings for AAR Type E prestressed concrete ties, and having
in mind particularly their use with welded rail, it was considered that a minimum rail
slippage resistance of 2000 lb per tie per rail was desirable. This was based on measure-
ments that had been made of the resistance of wood ties to movement in the ballast by
rail creepage forces (see AREA Proceedings, Vol. 56, 1955, page 283) and on studies
made of the forces needed to properly restrain welded rail from expansion and contrac-
tion movements at the ends, against buckling in extreme hot weather, and against exces-
sive gap in the event of rail breakage in very cold weather (see AREA Proceedings,
Vol. 38, 1937, page 493). Calculations based on a coefficient of friction of the rail base
on the tie plate of 0.25 and the leverage ratios of the clips indicated that with the
fastenings designed for the Type E tie the slippage resistance would be 2000 lb with
5000-lb bolt tension. It was further considered that an initial bolt tension of 10,000 lb
would be desirable to extend the period between tightenings so the cost of tightening
the clip bolts would be within economical limits. It was, therefore, anticipated that the
slippage resistance would range between 4000 and 2000 lb per tie per rail.
However, no actual slippage tests had been made with the fastenings to check the
slippage resistance anticipated in the design calculations. For making these tests it was
thought desirable to include a drive-on type anchor and wood tie, and also French,
German and Swedish concrete ties with the particular type fastenings used on these ties.
In discussion of the subject, the Portland Cement Association kindly agreed to the con-
duct of such tests in their research development laboratories at Skokie, 111., where the
PCA staff designed and built the test layout, and provided the necessary test instru-
mentation and a portion of the personnel for operation. The AAR furnished the ties
and fastenings, except the Swedish tie, and members of the research staff cooperated
in the conduct of the tests.
Test Procedure
It was decided that the control test should be with conventional wood tie construc-
tion using 132 RE rail, a double-shoulder tie plate and a grip-type rail anchor. The
control test was followed by the AAR Type E prestressed concrete tie with AAR design
fastenings, a variation of the Type E tie without a tie plate, but having direct fixation
with only a pad under the rail, the French RS concrete tie, the German post-tensioned
concrete tie with GEO-type fastenings, and the Swedish concrete tie with FIST sprint
rail clip. The fastenings for the concrete ties are shown in Fig. 1.
It was believed that the vibrations that accompany train movement might have an
effect on the rail slippage resistance of the fastenings. In order to study the vibration
effect, certain of the tests were repeated with a 60-cycle vibrator attached to the rail;
the magnitude of vibration was determined by the amplitude of vibration <>t the rail
directly above the tie connection. This method of introducing vibration was used for
practical reasons realizing that the vibrations so produced did not necessarilj simulate
those that occur in track.
The testing layout was designed for tests as follows with three slips for each con
dition.
*An abstract of Report No. V.R-22 issued by the Research Department. \ \k. Copies of the full
report can be obtained from the director of engineering research, AAR, 3140 a Chicago 16.
39
40
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties
AAR Tie - AAR Fastenings
AAR Tie - Direct Fixation
French RS Tie & Fastenings
German Tie - GEO Fastenings Swedish Tie - FIST Clip
Fig. 1.
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties 41
Series A — Wood tie control test
2 rail anchors without vibration
2 rail anchors with vibration
Total 4 tests
Series B — Concrete tie, Type E, AAR fastenings (See ER-20 report for details)
Bolt tension 5000 lb, 7500 lb, 10,000 lb
Polyethylene pad without vibration
Polyethylene pad with vibration
Hardwood plywood pad without vibration
Total 9 tests
Series C — Concrete tie, variation of Type E for direct fixation with uniclips
Bolt tension 5000 lb, 7500 lb and 10,000 lb
Polyethylene pad without vibration
Polyethylene pad with vibration
Hardwood plywood pad without vibration
Total 9 tests
Series D — Concrete tie, French RS with rubber pad and RX clips
With and without vibration
2 tests
Series E — Concrete tie, German with GEO-type fastenings
With and without vibration
2 tests
Series F — Concrete tie, Swedish 101 with rubber pad and FIST rail clip
With and without vibration
2 tests
The test layout, shown in the illustration on page 42, consisted of a concrete
base with a variable position loading crosshead for attaching a hydraulic jack with pro-
vision for centering the jack at the centroidal axis of the rail. Hold-down bolts, suitably-
spaced in the concrete base, permitted moving the jack and rail over a sufficient range
to obtain new bearing surfaces on the rail and tie plate or pad for each test. The tie was
sjrouted to the floor at proper height and held down by two crossheads bolted through
the floor by tensioned tie-rods which were prestressed by hydraulic jacks beneath the
floor. Thus the slippage values are between the rail and the tie or between the rail and
the tie plate without movement of the tie. The free end of the rail was supported on a
ring of roller bearings to reduce friction to the minimum. Pressure on the rail end was
applied at 2000 lb per minute.
The instrumentation consisted of a load cell to measure the force at the rail end
while the movements of the rail with respect to the tie and also with respect to the tie
plate were determined by differential transformers. AH instrumentation results were
continuously recorded by an oscillograph. Dial gages were used with the grip-type r;iil
anchor to determine the incident of slip of the rail through the anchor.
Vibration was provided by a 60-cycle vibrator mounted <>" the rail. The rail ampli-
tudes above the tie were those which could be held constant with the equipment
The actual bolt tension was measured by means of two -train gages mounted 00
each bolt throuuh the use of a static strain Indicator, In the case of the French tie,
the bolts were tightened to a prescribed torque of 120 ft-lb and the tension was
measured with the strain gages, except for slip test D-4 where the bolts were tightened
to a tension of 7000 lb.
42
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties
Test layout.
Rail anchors, clips, plates and pads were changed out after each test to provide new
bearing surfaces.
The AAR is indebted to the Portland Cement Association for providing the test
facilities and the personnel to aid in carrying out the investigation. The tests were con-
ducted in the PCA laboratory under the general direction of Eivind Hognestad, manager.
Structural Development Section. The design and construction of the test equipment was
by Charles H. Raths, assistant development engineer, who also participated in the direct
supervision of the tests.
Participation in the tests by the AAR research staff was under the general direction
of W. M. Keller, vice president— research, and G. M. Magee, director of engineering
research; E. J. Ruble, executive research engineer, was in direct charge, assisted by L. R.
Lamport, assistant research engineer — track, who shared the supervision at the PCA
laboratory and was responsible for the report.
Test Results
The slippage forces together with the initial bolt tension and bolt tension loss for
each test condition are presented in Report No. ER-22 in Tables 1, 2, 3, and 4, which
are not reproduced herein. In the test with the Swedish tie an attempt was made to
measure the clamping force on the rail by means of strain gages but the results were
unsatisfactory, hence this report must deal only with the slippage force applied to the
rail end. The Swedish Railway, however, advises that the pressure on the rail is 2000 kg
(4410 lb).
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties
43
RAIL SLIPPAGE TESTS
Table 5. Comparison of Average Slippage Forces
Type of Tie
and Anchor or Clip
Witho
it Vibration
With
Vibration
Slip Force
Percent of Control
Slip Force
Percent of Control
Creosoted Oak Tie- Fair
Rail Anchor Control
5215
100
5445
100
AAR Type "E" Concrete
Tie, AAR Clips
Polvethvlene Pad
5000 lb. Bolt Tension
2033
39
1002
18
7500 lb. Bolt Tension
3207
61
1717
31
10000 lb. Bolt Tension
4037
77
2707
50
Hdwd. Plywood Pad
5000 lb. Bolt Tension
2277
44
-
-
7500 lb. Bolt Tension
2217
42
-
-
10000 lb. Bolt Tension
3290
63
-
-
AAR Type "E" Concrete
Tie with Direct Fixation
and Uniclips
Polyethylene Pad
5000 lb. Bolt Tension
1197
23
1273
23
7500 lb. Bolt Tension
2163
42
1227
23
10000 lb. Bolt Tension
2593
50
2443
45
Hdwd. Plywood Pad
5000 lb. Bolt Tension
2013
39
-
-
10000 lb. Bolt Tension
3427
66
-
-
French Concrete Tie and
Clips (120 ft. lb. Torque)
2903
56
2320
43
German Concrete Tie and
GEO Clips
4143
79
3967
73
Swedish Concrete Tie and
FIST Clip
2160
41
2113
39
From the comparison in Table 5 it is apparent that rail slippage resistance with the
concrete tie is greatest on a steel tie plate, namely, the German tie with GEO fastening!
and the AAR tie with AAR design fastenings. These arc followed bj the AAR tie with
direct fixation on a hardwood plywood pad, the French tie with a rubber pad, the AAR
tie with direct fixation on a polyethylene pad, and last, the Swedish tie with a
rubber pad.
The loss of slippage resistance due to vibration was greatest "ii the AAR tie-, p.n
ticularly those with 5000-lb and 7500-lb bolt tension. There was no appreciable effed
on the rail anchors with wood ties, the German ties, or the Swedish ties.
The loss of bolt tension was somewhat erratic on the AAR Type E ties with the
AAR clips at 5000-lb and 7500-lb bolt tension. It is believed that this was due primarily
to some rotation of the clips as the slips occurred. More uniformity WW had in tin t v - 1 ~
44
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties
RAIL SLIPPAGE TESTS - CONCRETE TIES
Table 6. Ratio: Slippage Force to Pressure on Rail - Without Vibration
Tie and Fastenings
Initial Bolt
Tens ion -Lb.
Avg. Slip
Force
Avg. Pressure
on Rail
Ratio Slip Force
to Rail Pressure
AAR Type "E" with AAR
clips and polyethylene
pad
5000
7500
10000
2033
3207
4037
3770
5470
7810
0.54
0.59
0.52
Avg. 0.55
As above with hard-
wood plywood pad
5000
7500
10000
2277
2217
3290
3850
5810
7950
0.59
0.35
0.41
Avg. 0.45
AAR Type "E" direct
fixation with uni clips
and polyethylene pad
5000
7500
10000
1197
2163
2593
3680
5430
7220
0.33
0.38
0.36
Avg. 0.36
As above with hard-
wood plywood pad
5000
10000
2013
3427
3680
7220
0.55
0.47
Avg. 0.51
French Tie and fasten-
ings-rubber pad
120 ft. lb.
torque
2903
4760
0.61
German Tie-GEO
fastenings
6720
4143
5870
0.69
Swedish Tie- FIST
Clip
2160
4410
0.47
Vertical Pressure on Rail
AAR Type "E" with AAR Clips 2 x 0.41 x Bolt Tension
AAR Type "E" direct fixation-Uniclips 2 x 0.37 x Bolt Tension
French 2 x 0 . 44 x Bolt Tension
German 2 x 0. 50 x Bolt Tension
Swedish * 44i0 lb.
* Swedish Railway advise the pressure on rail is 2000 Kg (4410 lb. )
made with 10,000-lb bolt tension and also with the AAR Type E ties with direct fixa-
tion and the French and German ties, where little rotation of the clips was possible.
It will be noted that the bolts were retightened in a few instances with the result that
the bolt tension loss was usually less in the subsequent slip.
Table 6 shows the ratio of slippage force to pressure on the rail and brings out the
relatively low slippage resistance of the polyethylene pad on the AAR Type E tie with
direct fixation. The polyethylene pads have a smooth, wax-like surface which undoubtedly
accounts for the low slippage resistance.
Rail Slippage Tests — Concrete Ties 45
Discussion of Test Results
The values of rail slippage resistance as determined in these tests for the AAR design
clips for the Type E tie were generally in excess of the 2000 lb minimum for 5000-lb
bolt tension, except those with vibration, which were only about 1C00 lb. However, as
previously stated, it is not known to what extent the vibration actually simulated track
vibrations so it is questionable as to how significant these values are.
The slippage resistance with the AAR clip is much below that of the drive-on-
type anchor. This may be reflected in track by some slippage through the clips at the
ends of welded rail at extreme temperatures, but not necessarily to the extent the slip-
page resistance provided may be sufficient to move the ties in the ballast. The slippage
resistance provided throughout the length of the rail should be adequate to prevent
buckling and excessive gap opening in the event of rail breakage.
The slippage resistance with the direct fixation Uniclips is somewhat lower than for
the AAR design clips, and it might be found desirable to maintain the bolt tension
between a range of 7500 lb to 10,000 lb to provide adequate slippage resistance in track.
The slippage resistance with the German tie and GEO type clip was very good and
was little affected by vibration.
The slippage resistance for the French RN-type clip was slightly above that for
the AAR clip at the same bolt tension, possibly due to the two contact points between
the clip and rail and the shear force carried by the pad.
The slippage resistance of the Swedish clip was above the 2000-lb desired minimum,
both with and without vibration.
Conclusions
The measurements of rail slippage resistance obtained in these tests agree reasonably
well with those anticipated in the design of the fastening for the AAR Type E pre-
stressed concrete tie. It is believed that a range of bolt tension between 10,000 and
5000 lb should be maintained with AAR clips until such time as service experience might
indicate that a change in these limits is warranted.
Preventing Rail Failures in Track*
By G. M. MAGEE
Director of Engineering Research, AAR
Rail is the most important component of the track structure for the safe operation
of trains. It serves two important functions, one to support the wheel and the other
to guide it. In order to support the wheel, the rail, through its flexural strength and
stiffness as a beam, distributes the wheel load over several ties lengthwise of the track.
The ties in turn distribute the portion of the wheel load they receive to the ballast and
the ballast distributes this load to the subgrade. Thus the rail, ties and ballast serve to
distribute the wheel load over a sufficient area of the subgrade that the pressure per
square foot is well within its supporting power. However, in serving this function there
is a repeated flexural stress in the rail for each passing wheel load.
In order to serve its function of guiding the wheel, it is most important that the
rail provide a continuous path for the wheel. This requires that the rail shall not become
broken. If the rail becomes broken, the rail ends will not be held at the same height.
If the rail is under tension due to low temperature it will tend to open up and make
a gap when the rail breaks. Thus a broken rail may result in a derailment of a train,
although this is not necessarily so as there are many broken rails that occur in track
that do not result in derailments, particularly it the break occurs on tangent track or on
the low side of a curve. Nevertheless it is a matter of first importance in the safe opera-
tion of trains to prevent broken rails occurring in track.
How can this be done? Very few of the broken rails that occur in service are sudden
or complete fractures of the rail unless there is some defect present in the rail. Com-
plete and sudden fractures rarely occur in sound rail. Also, in most cases defects in rail
are originally small and progressively grow under repeated wheel loadings. Thus if we
are able to examine the rail carefully and periodically to determine whether there are
any flaws or defects in the rail of a size likely to initiate a sudden rupture and remove
such rails from track and replace them with sound rails, the occurrence of broken rails
can be largely prevented. To distinguish between rails that are removed from track
because of detected defects that may cause the rail to break and those that actually
break in track, we refer to the first as detected rail failures and to the latter as service
rail failures.
For the purpose of describing the development of equipment For detecting rail de-
fects, I should like to classify rail defects into two general types, namely, head d
and web defects. Head defects include transverse fissures, compound fissures, detail
tures, vertical split heads, and horizontal split heads. Although each of these types <>i
defects have certain distinguishing characteristics, they are all progressive fractures that
grow from a small nucleus and result in a separation of metal in the rail head. Also,
it is usually not possible to determine the existence of these defects by looking at tin-
rail because the separation of the metal is inside the rail head and therefore not visible
Web defects generallj consisl of cracks in the horizontal plane in the upper fillet
between the rail head and the web or in crack- out of boll holes Most defects ol this
type occur within joint bar limits Horizontal crark- in the upper web fillet are called
head and web separations. These sometimes develop on the gage ride of the low rail
of curves when the rail head has become considerably reduced in depth by wear and
•Presented before the Railroad Sessions of the Transportation Engineering < I the
American Society of Civil Engineers in Detroit, Mich., October 8-11, 1962. 1!
features in the program of the Railroad Sessions, on October 9. developed by the Board of Direction
of the AREA.
47
48
Preventing Rail Failures in Tr ack
The first rail defect detector car— 1928.
flow. These develop relatively slowly and can be detected readily by visual inspection
so they do not offer much of a problem. The head and web separations and bolt hole
cracks within the rail joint limits, however, are not readily accessible for inspection.
The cost of removing joint bars to make inspections periodically would be prohibitive.
Thus an adequate and economical means of inspecting the rail web within the joint
bar limits is needed for this purpose. Here again both of these types of defects are
progressive-type fractures that grow with repeated stressing from the passing wheel loads.
Defect-detection equipment was developed first for the head type of defect because
it was of the most importance. The first rail defect detector car was built by the Sperry
Development Company for the American Railway Association upon the recommenda-
tion of the Rail committee of the American Railway Engineering Association. Several
years were required for the research and development work, and the car was accepted
by the Committee on October 2, 1928. In this detector car, two sets of brushes for each
rail were mounted underneath to continuously contact the top of the rail as the car
moved along the track. A very heavy electrical current (2 volts, 2000 amperes) was
passed between the brushes through the rail. If a defect existed in the rail head, it
caused an abrupt change in the direction of the flow of current at the location of the
defect. A specially designed pick-up coil was located above the rail between the two
brushes. The abrupt change in the direction of current flow at a defect and resultant
change in the magnetic flux surrounding the rail head, generated a small potential in
the pick-up coil by inductance. The voltage from the pick-up coil was, of course, very
low and had to be amplified with radio-type amplifiers to provide enough power to
Preventing Rail Failures in Track 49
actuate recording pens on a moving paper tape. A paint gun was also connected with
the defect indicating mechanism so that when the pens were actuated a spot of yellow
paint was also sprayed on the rail to locate the defect. This principle of detection is
generally referred to as the inductance method.
This principle of defect detection has both advantages and disadvantages. The prin-
cipal advantage is that it gives a strong signal for a defect and thus can be used to
detect relatively small transverse defects in the rail head. One disadvantage is that an
electrical contact must be made between the brushes and the rail and sometimes the
surface condition of the rail makes this difficult. Also, if sparking should occur this
creates a localized magnetic effect that may give a false indication of a defect. Another
disadvantage is that when one brush has passed over the rail gap the defect detection
equipment will not be operative until the second brush has also passed over it, thus
leaving a portion of each rail end in which defects cannot be located.
Another type of the defect-detection equipment for locating defects in the rail head
was later developed by the Association of American Railroads and is known as the
residual magnetic method. With this method no electric current is actually passed through
the rail, but a powerful magnet placed toward the front end of the detector car on each
side passes a heavy magnetic flux through the rail head. After the magnet has passed,
if there is any defect in the rail head there will be a small residual magnetic field at
the defect. A pick-up coil mechanism located at the rear end of the detector car on each
side generates a small potential when it cuts through the lines of the residual magnetic
force. This signal is amplified to actuate pens on a recording paper tape and also to
spray a spot of paint on the rail. The advantages of the residual magnetic method are
that no current is actually passed through the rail so there is no problem offered by any
surface condition of the rail that would tend to affect the resistance of the brush con-
tacts. Also with the residual magnetic equipment it is possible to locate defects close to
the rail ends. In other words, there is very little dead area at the rail ends with the
AAR type car.
The first of the AAR type detector cars was a double-unit rail car, the first car
being the tow car and power supply and the second or trailer car having the defect
detection pick-up equipment and sleeping quarters for the crew. A recent development
of the AAR type equipment is the road-rail unit which utilizes the same general prin-
ciples of defect detection as the rail-type unit. However, every effort has been expended
to make the equipment compact and light in weight so that it can be applied to a truck
chassis with a specially built panel bcdy. This unit is equipped with retractable pilot
wheels so that it can be operated on the rail for testing or on the highway for trans
ferring between test location.
Today, rail in main track is tested periodically by detector cars, the frequency of
testing depending upon the age of rail, density of traffic, number of defects found, etc
Approximately two-thirds of the track mileage is tested by Sperry Rail Service under
contractural arrangement with the individual railroads. This company i- ;m outgrowth
of the Sperry Development Company that developed the firsl detector car for the Ameri-
can Railroad Association. I am not sufficiently familiar with the Sperry detector car to
be able to describe its method of operation in detail, It i- mj understanding that the
Sperry car, in general terms, utilizes a combination of the inductance method of testing
combined with ultrasonic units that exph re the rail at the rail ends for head di
Thus the head of the rail is tested for defects for the entire rail length. The remaining
one-third of the track mileage is tested with detector cars that are owned and operated
by individual railroads or contracted for testing service from the AAR Research Center.
50
Preventing Rail Failures in Track
The AAR road-rail type detector car.
Defect detector pick-up coils at the rear of the road-rail detector car.
Preventing Rail Failures in Track
SI
For detecting defects in the rail web the ultrasonic principle of defect detection has
been found to be effective. There are several different types of units available for doing
this detection. In general these units inspect one joint at a time, the operator of the
equipment slowly moving the crystal over the rail for the length of the joint bar, ex-
amining the web for possible head-and-web separations or bolt-hole cracks. The crystal
generates an ultrasonic wave and transmits it vertically into the rail head and down into
the web. In one type of equipment the reflected sound wave is shown on an oscillo-
scope. The operator is able to see two lines representing the top and bottom of the rail
and when passing over the bolt hole the reflected sound wave is interrupted by the bolt
hole so that a definite pattern is shown for the hole. If there is a crack emanating from
a bolt hole a different pattern will be indicated which will enable the operator to deter-
mine the existence of a bolt-hole crack.
Another type of equipment is quite portable; in fact it can be carried in a sort of
knapsack on the back of the operator. The principle of detection is to pass a crystal
along the length of the rail, transmitting a vertical sound wave into it and the reflected
sound wave is picked up and transmitted to a set of earphones. An experienced opera-
tor is able to detect by the difference in the transmitted buzzing sound in the earphones,
the existence of a crack in a bolt hole or a head-and-web separation. In another type of
unit, the reflected sound wave is indicated visually on a meter.
For several years, the Santa Fe Railway has been engaged in the development of
a road-rail unit to continuously test the rail web for defects by the ultrasonic method.
This unit has a very ingenious coupling method utilizing a column of water to make
the coupling between the crystal and the top surface of the rail, surrounded by a rubber
Road-rail ultrasonic type rail defect detector car developed by the Santa Fe.
>2
Preventing Rail Failures in Track
Crystal coupling unit on the Santa Fe ultrasonic detector car.
suction cup to reclaim most of the water used. Cathode ray viewing scopes show the
reflected pattern continuously for both rails, and two additional retention-type scopes
show an enlarged pattern for each rail joint as it is passed.
It is my understanding that Sperry Rail Service has recently added further equip-
ment to their regular detector car so that it can be used to locate defects in the rail web
by ultrasonic means at the same time that the test is being made for head defects. This
supplemental equipment does not make a continuous record but indicates by a light sig-
nal when a defect is located and the operator of the car can then stop and make a hand
check with a portable ultrasonic unit to verify the existence of a bolt-hole crack or
head-and-web separation.
Several years ago the detector car engineer and metallurgical engineer of the Asso-
ciation of American Railroads made a trip to Germany to see the ultrasonic type of
detector car developed for the German National Railways. This type of car depends en-
tirely upon ultrasonic sound transmitted into the rail with three sets of crystals, one in
the vertical direction, one at 35 deg, and one at 70 deg, to locate defects both in the rail
head and in the web. This car has the advantage of affording high-speed operation as
it can be operated as fast as 40 mph, making a photographic-type record on sensitized
paper of the traces actuated by the reflected sound waves. It was considered that this
type of car had many advantages but that it had two important disadvantages for use
on railroads in the United States. One disadvantage is that the photographic record must
be developed and examined by observers especially trained to locate defects by noting
any deviation from the normal pattern. The existence of a defect would then have to be
communicated to the track men to locate and remove the rail from service. Thus a delay
Preventing Rail Failures in Track
S3
*►
Ultrasonic type detector car developed by the German National Railways.
Three sets of crystal generating and pickup units on the German National
Railways ultrasonic car.
>4
Preventing Rail Failures in Track
Interior view of the German National Railways ultrasonic car.
of several days would occur between the time when the car makes a test and the defec-
tive rail is replaced. Also, there is the possibility that a mistake might be made in locating
the defective rail and, therefore, it would not be removed and replaced with a sound
rail. These two disadvantages and other factors have been considered of sufficient im-
portance so that at the present time only limited use is being made of the German type
of car in the United States. However, I understand Sperry Rail Service does have at
least one car of this type with which it is experimenting and it is possible that further
development may make the detection of both head defects and web defects practical
with this type of unit.
The economic advantages to the railroads that have accrued from the use of defect-
detection equipment cannot be over emphasized. It is difficult to place a dollar-and-cents
evaluation on these advantages. However, an estimate can be made that will serve to
give some idea of the importance to the railways of the use of detector cars for prevent-
ing rail failures from occurring in service. Approximately 200,000 miles of track are
tested each year by detector cars and some 20,000 defective rails are located and replaced
with sound rails before service failure occurs. In one year one large railway had 65 service
failures that were not located by detector cars and from these 65 service failures there
were three train derailments that cost the railway approximately $750,000 in damages
to track, equipment and personal injury. This represents a cost of approximately $10,000
for each service failure. If, therefore, the 20,000 detected defective rails were left in
service until a service failure occurred, it could reasonably be assumed that these service
failures would cost the railroads an average of $10,000 each or a total of $200,0000,000
for the 20,000 defective rails that are detected and removed from track annually. This,
Preventing Rail Failures in Track 55
of course, is aside from the humane considerations of the reduction in personal injury
and possibly death of passengers and employees. The cost of testing 200,000 miles of
track per year is on the order of S4.000,000 and this cost would perhaps be increased
to approximately £6,000,000 if the cost of operating the ultrasonic equipment for testing
for bolt hole cracks and head and web failures is added thereto. Thus it is apparent that
the railways have benefited greatly not only in safety of train operation but also in
economy of train operation by virtue of preventing rail failures in track through the
use of defect-detection equipment.
Welded Railroad Bridges*
By J. E. SOUTH
System Engineer — Structures, Pennsylvania Railroad
It is interesting to note that the first all-welded bridges in this country and possibh
in the world were railroad bridges constructed in 1928.1 The first bridge was a single-
track through truss with a span of 135 ft built to carry the railroad over a canal at
Chicopee Falls, Mass., for the Westinghouse Company. The second bridge, also built in
1928 at the East Pittsburgh Plant of Westinghouse, is an open-floor single-track through
girder span of 55 ft. The floor system of this bridge is made up of rolled beams. No
connection angles are used — the ends of the stringers are fillet welded to the floorbeams
with a tension plate carried through the floorbeam web, making the stringers continuous.
The floorbeams are fillet welded to the girder webs. The girders are made up of Y% by
54-in web with three cover plates for each flange. One cover plate of each flange runs
full length, and the other plates are cut off as would be done with a riveted bridge.
The shortest cover plates are Yz in by 1 ft 4 in, the next plates are J^ in by 1 ft 2>l/$ in,
and the full length plates are % in by 1 ft 2l/2 in. Lateral bracing is welded directly
to the bottom flanges of the girders and floorbeams.
Another early all-welded bridge is a two-track bascule span built in 1935 for the
Florida East Coast Railroad. Plans and specifications for this bridge were prepared by
the railroad and the bridge was fabricated by McClintic-Marshall. J. M. Wolfe, chief
engineer of the Florida East Coast, advises that the bridge was designed for Copper E 55
loading, and in the 26 years the bridge has been in service it has carried each day an
average of 10 passenger trains with 16 cars each and six freight trains with 60 cars each,
or a total of 150,000 trains and about 10,000,000 freight cars. He further states that they
have experienced no difficulty with the \ve!ded work and have had no weld failures.
In their experience they have had more corrosive action from brine drippings from
refrigerator cars on rivet heads than en welds similarly exposed. In fact, he reports that
there has been practically no corrosion on weld metal.
In addition to these early bridges, welding has been employed extensively from the
early 'thirties by many railroads for the strengthening and repairing of steel bridges.
Welded railroad bridges in a number of ways are preferable to riveted constructirn.
the mest important being the matter of initial cost. To be certain of this point, a few-
years ago the Pennsylvania Railroad took bids on a deck-plate-girder bridge with a 65-ft
span. One span was designed for riveted construction and one span i< r welded construc-
tion. The riveted span weighed 25 percent more than the welded. The low bid was 16
cents per pound for the welded bridge and 17 cents per pound for the riveted bri Ige
Since that time similar welded bridges have been purchased fi t as low as 13.4 cents per
pound. The economy of the all-welded bridge has definitely been established.
The clean surfaces of the welded bridge make painting easier, and the paint last
longer. Rivet heads and edges of plates and angles are usually where the paint film first
breaks down as it is the thinnest at these points. Dirt that is often trapped by tivel
heads will many times be washed off the flanges of the welded bridges by a heavy rain
The lighter weight of the welded bridge often facilitates erection.
•Presented before the Railroad Sessions of the Transportation Engineering. Conference of the
American Society of Civil Engineers in Detroit, Mich., October 8-11, 1962. This papa «.i-
ten features in the program cl the Railroad Sessions, on October 9, developed by the Boat
Direction of the AREA.
1 Arc Welded Steel Frame Structures — Gilbert D. Fish McGraw-Hill.
57
58
Welded Railroad Bridges
""M*'n Stt ™
All-welded bridge built in 1928 at East Pittsburgh, Pa.
. ■ ■■■■
Removing old cover plates in connection with cover-plate replacement work,
Pennsylvania Railroad's West Philadelphia elevated line.
Welded Railroad Bridges 59
The proven economy of all-welded bridges and the many other advantages will
force their eventual adoption by most railroad bridge engineers. However, before that
happens, the engineers must be satisfied beyond any doubt that welded bridges will be-
as reliable from a safety standpoint as the riveted bridges have proven to be since the
turn of the century. The development of reliable riveted bridges was accomplished only
over a considerable period of time. In the 1870's and 1880's railroad bridges were failing
at the rate of about 25 per year.2 It was only the employment by the railroads of engi-
neers specializing in bridge engineering who through research, scientific design, careful
detailing, thorough testing of materials and inspection developed the reliable riveted
railroad bridges we have today.
It has only been since the end of the second world war that study and research in
connection with the brittle failure of a number of the more than 500 all-welded Liberty
Ships in service by January 1943s that the different requirements for welded and riveted
structures was understood.
When brittle failure occurs the crack usually propagates very rapidly across the
entire width of a plate. When plates are welded together they act as a single plate,
whereas in riveted work plates fastened together by rivets act more as individual plates,
thus limiting the extent of the fracture. In addition, thicker plates are generally used in
welded structures. Thicker plates are more sensitive to brittle fracture, from both
geometrical and metallurgical factors.4
In addition, the notch effect produced by the restraint of welded connections, the
notches due to imperfections in the welds, the residual stresses caused by weld shrinkage,
and many other factors, contribute to making welded structures more prone to brittle
failure than riveted structures.
To prevent the rapid propagation of a brittle fracture the steel must yield plastically
in the presence of a notch. The tendency toward failure in a brittle manner increases as
the temperature decreases and the rate of loading increases. Studies of welded ship fail-
ures by the Ship Structures Committee6 concluded that a steel that was not notch sensi-
tive at low operating temperature was required, resulting in the standard specification
for structural steel for ships, ASTM A 131.
It is interesting to compare the requirements for ship steel with the requirements
for welded bridge steel covered by ASTM Specifications. A 36, A 373 and A 441. Cer-
tainly the speed of application of load and low range of operating temperature is as
severe for a railroad bridge as for a ship. One main difference in the structures is that
it is more difficult to eliminate geometrical notches in ship construction, and the large
size of the ship increases the sensitivity to brittle failure. Since tension flange plates of
welded bridges are usually 2 in or more thick ("which inddently i> the greatest thickness
covered by the ship steel specification) the following comparison is confined to thick-
nesses in this range:
CnEMicAL Requirements"
A 131
Grade C° A 373 A 441
C max % 0.23 0.26 0.26 0.22
Mn % 0.60 to 0.90 0.50 to 0.90 0.80 to 1.20 1 2S max
Si % 0.15 to 0.30 0.15 to 0.30 0.15 to 0.30 0.30 max
V min 0 0 0 0.02
* All requirements shown tased <>n ladle analysis.
b Plate steel produced to requirements of Grade C '-hall he made with fine grain practice . . .
3 Railway .Age Centennial 1
3 Control of Steel Construction to Avoid Brittle Failure Welding Research Council, page 31.
♦Control of Steel Construction to Avoid Brittle Failure Welding Research Council, pagi
■Welding Research Council Bulletin Xo. 16.
60
Welded Railroad Bridges
Another view of cover-plate replacement work, West Philadelphia
elevated line.
Welding new 18- by iy2-in. plate.
Welded Railroad Bridges 61
Tensile Requirements
A 131 A 373 A 36 A 441
Tensile strength 58,OCO to 71,000 58,000 to 75,000 58,000 to 80,000 63,000 min
Yield point min 32,000 32.000 36,000 42 0:Omin
Elongation in 8" min ... 21% 21% 20% 19%
Elongation in 2" min ... 24% 24% 23% 24%
There is no reason to believe that A 36 steel will have more notch toughness than
A 373, and it is known that A 373 steel has failed by brittle fracture while field welding
a deck plate to the top flange plate of a welded railrcad bridge girder. There did exist,
however, a severe notch because of faulty construction procedure in cold weather. There
have also been brittle failures in service of A 441 steel under low temperature conditions.
It has been shown that the transition temperature of thicker plates is higher than
thinner plates of the same heat. Ship steel has been limited to 2 in. in thickness, and all
steel over 1 in thick must be Class C made to fine grain practice. Thicknesses are
permitted up to 4 in for steel for welded bridges, and in the case of A 373 and A 36,
an increase of carbon to 0.27 percent is permitted. In the case of A 441 steel there is no
minimum silicon specified, implying that killed or simi-killed steel is not required. There
is no minimum manganese requirement, so presumably if the manufacturer can find
some other strengthening material to enable meeting the tensile requirements, it could
be used regardless of the effect on notch toughness. It is not the average steel that is
produced under the specification that is of most concern to the bridge engineer, however.
It is the possibility of obtaining the worst possible steel that would still meet the
specifications that is a disturbing factor.
There has been no standard set for notch toughness requirements for steel for
welded bridges, but there seems little reason to believe it should be much less than
that required for ship construction. The rate of load application on a railrcad bridge
is probably more severe than for a ship and the thicknesses used are much greater. It
would seem logical that steel for important tension elements for bridges in thicknesses
over about 1 in should be made with fine grain practice as is the case for ship steel
over 1 in.
To the present time there have been few fatigue failures in railroad bridges in thi>
country except for connection angles, secondary members and members carrying high
live load and low dead load and subjected to high secondary stresses.
Since it has been demonstrated that certain details, such as short length cova
plates whether riveted or welded and other stress-raising details, can reduce the fatigue
strength at 2 million cycles of zero-to-tension stress range to as low as 10.000 psi," it i-
quite possible that the high impact allowances that have been used in the past also pro
vided a safeguard against fatigue failure.
With more accurate measurements of impact hading to a reduction of the Impart
loads combined with the higher stresses to be permitted with the A 16 Steel) probably
more consideration should be given to the effect i I fatigue on the shorter spans (under
60 ft) and where the full effert is obtained by loading s single track, In any case, in
the zero-to-tension stress range at 2 million cycles, members fabricated of bigh-strengtb
9 Prof. W. M. Wilson, Univ. "f Dlinois Akl \ Pi linj Mlnob
Bulletin Series No. 382.
62
Welded Railroad B ridges
PONTOON
ABUTMENT
LONGITUDINAL SECTION
Details of welded float transfer bridge, Norfolk Portsmouth Belt Line
Railroad, Norfolk, Va. See also drawings on opposite page.
i&'» Flame Plate
thickness \
inq
icKi
Edgeofplate-^
/—Edge of plate
GIRDER FLANGE JOINT
Welded Railroad Brid ges
63
a-a DETALS-OUTSHORE END
SLOPE 2nni-» * 60* *
WEB PLATE JOINT
MID -SECTION
-10".
60' ^;* %
NOSE SECTION
GIRDER SECTION
64 Welded Railroad Bridges
steel do not show any significant increase in fatigue strength over A 7 or A 373 steel,
so for certain short-span members no advantage can be gained by use of higher
strength steels.
On spans of about 60 ft and longer during the passage of an entire train the load-
ing will increase from zero to maximum and then fluctuate from about half maximum
to maximum. In this case fatigue becomes of considerably less importance. In the case
of longer spans (over 100 ft) and members receiving the maximum load from two
tracks, it is quite possible that the number of cycles of maximum load would be so low
that fatigue effect would be unimportant.
A study of Variable Stress Cycle Fatigue is now being carried out at the Ecole
Polytechnique, Montreal, Canada, under the guidance of the Fatigue of Welded Joints
Committee of the Welding Research Council that should be helpful in evaluating the
fatigue requirements for railroad bridges.
The design formulas in Table I of the AWS Specification for Welded Highway and
Railway Bridges are based on 2,000,000, 600,000, and 100 cycles of loading. There seems
to be need for a study that would develop the number of loading cycles that should
be considered for various spans and leading conditions.
It might be that the simplest method of providing for fatigue would be to assign
lower allowable unit stresses for certain span lengths and loading conditions. Certainly
the actual ultimate carrying capacity of a dynamically loaded bridge cannot be deter-
mined by having equal stress in all members as would be the case in a statically loaded
structure.
Fatigue cracks are of more importance in a welded structure only because of the
notch effect of the crack leading to possible brittle failure.
Regardless of some of the above uncertainties many all-welded railroad and high-
way bridges have been built and are functioning satisfactorily. In the New York Times
of August 21 there was an article about the failure of a new $10,000,000 welded girder
bridge in Melbourne, Australia, emphasizing the need of careful design, good workman-
ship and use of the proper steel for the job.
Design should follow the requirements of the American Welding Society Specifica-
tions for Highway and Railway Bridges.
In addition, the engineer should minimize the possibility of having a geometrical
or metallurgical notch effect in tension members. For instance:
a. Do not weld to tension flanges of beams or girders.
b. Avoid unnecessary splices in tension flanges. Have all such splices and others
in regions of high stress radiographed to insure weld soundness.
c. Grind flange splices smooth and to a rounded contour.
d. Inspect flange-to-web welds by dye penetrant or magnetic particles or other
satisfactory method to insure against weld cracks.
e. Use full penetration welds in important web-to-flange connections.
f. Carefully inspect all welds to see they are smooth and without unfilled weld
craters.
g. Edges of flange plates should be smooth and without nicks caused by handling
during fabrication or erection.
Welded R ailroad Bridges
65
Washout of timber trestle, Crawfordsville Branch, Pennsylvania Railroad.
Typical welded steel replacement trestle.
null. 573
66
Welded Railroad Bridges
Typical details of welded trestle.
h. Be certain that procedure for field welding will not produce undue shrinkage
stresses or result in stress-raising notches.
i. Arc strikes should be removed and voids filled with weld metal and surface
ground smooth.
Use the thinnest plates possible consistent with design requirements. For instance,
if design considerations permit, it would be preferable to use a 24- by 2-in flange plate
rather than a 16- by 3-in plate, giving the same area. Thinner plates have better notch
toughness than thicker plates from the same heat.
Steel for important tension elements can be ordered made to fine grain practice.
It has been estimated that this would add 1.3 to 1.75 percent to the cost of welded
bridges.7
If extra-thick tension plates are needed it would be desirable to specify that they
be normalized to lower the transition temperature. Normalizing will have greater effect
on steel made to fine grain practice.
Railroad bridges in regions of extremely low temperatures should be given special
consideration in regard to transition temperature of steel in tension elements.
If possible, select a type of structure where the failure of one member will not
result in the instability of the entire bridge. For instance use a series of longitudinal
7 Control of Steel Constructon to Avoid Brittle Failure — Welding Research Council — page 130.
Welded Railroad Bridges 67
stringers or girders instead of just one pair carrying one track independently of adjacent
tracks.
There are other things the engineer could do, such as limiting the allowable stress
in short spans which are likely to receive a large number of stress cycles of relatively
high intensity; avoiding high-strength material in these circumstances as such steels
show no increase in fatigue strength in fabricated form, and being certain that the
welded design has not introduced high secondary stresses.
There is no doubt that by scientific design, careful detailing, use of proper steel
for the job, and thorough inspection that all-welded railroad bridges will be as reliable
as the riveted bridges and will be built at considerable savings to the railroads
and others.
Advance Report of Committee 30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses
Report on Assignment 6
Concrete Structures
Collaborating with Committee 8
P. L. Montgomery (chairman, subcommittee), J. YV. Davidson, W. E. Dowling, C. E.
Ekberg, Jr., N. E. Ekrem, J. A. Erskine, J. F. Hoss, Jr., R. E. Kuban, K. H.
Lenzen, C. V. Lund, James Michalos, N. M. Newmark, L. P. Nicholson, M. Noys-
zewski A. L. Piepmeier, E. D. Ripple, A. P. Smith, C. A. Still, F. W. Thompson.
J. R. Williams, J. D. Woodward.
Your committee presents as information abstracts of two reports on investigations
undertaken for the committee by the research staff of the Association of American
Railroads.
FIELD INVESTIGATION OF FLORIDA EAST COAST PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE BEAMS*
This report covers the testing and analysis of two 30-ft 6-in long spans in ■
ballasted-deck precast, prctensioned concrete double-track bridge over Cypress Creek
Pompano Beach, Fla. East test span is comprised of sh 2 it 3 in wide l>y 2 u 6 in
deep rectangular beams per track and are identical except thai the beams In one ipan
had longitudinal recesses cast along their sides near the top which formed kiy\v;r
•An abstract of Report No. ER-21 issued by the Research Department VAF thr full
report can be obtained from the director of enginccrine research, A\K, 1140 9 I IfO It
69
70
Prestressed Concrete Structures
tilling with cement mortar. The purpose of the invesligation was to compare the static
and dynamic effect on spans with and without shear keys before and after transverse
post tensioning under the passage of a test train operating at speeds up to nearly 70
mph. The test train was composed of a two-unit diesel locomotive, five 50-ton and two
70-ton loaded hopper cars and a caboose.
Either shear keys or transverse post tensioning is effective in distributing the load
across the deck. An improvement in load distribution was noted for the span with shear
keys and after post tensioning. Before post tensioning, in several instances, the recorded
static strains in various beams exceeded the calculated values. For the span without
shear keys, the outside beam carried negligible load until after post tensioning. On the
other hand, the outside curb beam and the other five beams in the span with shear
keys carried approximately the same load before and after post tensioning. The post
tensioning caused some of the load to be transferred to the span in the adjacent track.
Comparing the spans, the one with shear keys had the lowest range of impact
values after post tensioning. While the maximum recorded total impact for the locomo-
tive did not exceed the current AREA specifications, it is interesting to note that the
increase in strains with increase of speed was appreciable only at speeds above SO mph.
FIELD INVESTIGATION OF SOUTHERN PACIFIC COMPANY, TEXAS &
LOUISIANA LINES, PRESTRESSED CONCRETE GIRDER SPANS*
A test was conducted in 1961 to determine maximum strains, static effects and load
distribution in two spans of a ballasted-deck single-track bridge near Houston, Tex.
Both spans have cast-in-place concrete decks supported by precast concrete girders
* An abstract of Repurt No. ER-25 issued by the Research Department, AAR. Copies of the full
report can be obtained from the director of engineering research, AAR, 3140 S. Federal St., Chicago 16.
Prestressed Concrete Structures 71
having the same I-shaped cross section. One span contains four 30-ft long pretensioned
girders while the other has five 55-ft long girders which were first pretensioned and
later post tensioned. The test loading consisted of two- and three-unit diesel li comotives
operating at speeds up to 20 mph.
Two different approaches were followed in the determination of calculated strains.
In one case, the basis was to assume that the entire cross section acted as a composite-
unit. In the other case, one girder and the corresponding portion of slab was assumed
to act together. The maximum recorded strains occurred at the maximum speed but
they did not exceed the calculated values regardless of which approach was followed.
The study of vertical strain distribution was dependent on the same assumptions
used in calculating the neutral axis. On the assumption that the entire cross section
acted as a unit, the neutral axis based on average recorded values was below that
calculated for the shorter span and approximately the same for the longer span. Com-
posite action existed between the precast girders and the cast-in-place decks of both
spans. In regard to transverse distr.bution, the two inside girders of the shorter span
carried approximately 63 percent of the total load. Each of the five girders in the longer
span carried nearly equal loads, and the interior girders also carried approximately
60 percent of the total load.
Advance Report of Committee 16 — Economics of Railway
Location and Operation
Report on Assignment 4
Potential Applications of Electronic Computers to Railway
Engineering and Maintenance Problems in Research,
Design, Inventory, Etc.
Collaborating with Committees 11 and 30, and Informally with the Railway
Systems and Procedures Association
F. Wascoe (chairman, subcommittee), L. P. Diamond, W. J. Dixon, G. B. Dutton, Jr.
S. B. Gill, C. A. James, T. J. Lamphier, R. J. Lane, A. S. Lang, M. B. Miller.
V. J. Roggeveen, G. Rugge, G. S. Sowers, J. J. Stark, Jr., C. L. Towle, T. D.
Wofford, Jr.
Your committee presents as information two reports on the use of computers in
operations research on the Canadian National Railways. One of these reports is entitled
"Train Performance Calculator" and the other, "A Computer Simulation of Railroad
CTC Operations."
Train Performance Calculator
By CHARLES SANKEY
Operational Research Branch, Research and Development Department,
Canadian National Railways
The Canadian National Railways' Train Performance Calculator (TPC) is a method
of using an electronic computer to simulate a train's movement along a railway lint'
The results include a graph showing the train's speed all along the line, and tables of
running times, station-to-station times, locomotive power factor and other useful
information.
The TPC program was developed by the Operational Research Branch in early
1960 at the request of the Transportation Department. Since then it has been exten-
sively used, particularly by the Operating Department. Among the questions investigated
by the use of TPC are:
1. To find the time any particular train will take to cover a .subdivision (or
several subdivisions). This is particularly useful in train scheduinp.
2. To find the amount of power required (i.e. how man) diesel units) to make
a run in a certain time.
3. To determine how much time is spent, and how much extra fuel is used, ii t
train makes an extra stop.
4. To find out what effect a speed restriction, or the removal of ;■ speed restrii
tion, will have on a train.
5. To estimate the effects of rolling-stock or locomotive improvements
rcl'.er bearings instead of solid journals) on schedules and fuel D DSUmptii n
TPC can be used just as easily for a track which has not been built, or i<t > nun
which does not exist, as it can for an actual train on an actual track. This is of the
greatest use in planning new lines, for example, where it is necessary to decide what th<
73
74 Train Performance Calculator
best route or the maximum grades and curvature should be. Approximate rules and
guesses can be replaced by detailed and accurate information.
In the past few years, several methods have been devised by different railroads
to perform train performance calculations on an electronic computer. In the CNR pro-
gram, particular emphasis has been placed on the ease with which it can be used and
in simulating actual conditions as accurately as possible. Among the special features are:
1. The length of the train is fully taken into account. This is important firstly
because the effective grade under a long train is different from that under a
short train, tending to smooth out variations in grade, and secondly because
speed restrictions generally apply to the whole length of a train — for example,
restrictions through turnouts. The other case, where a slow order applies only
until the engine has passed a point such as a grade crossing, is also correctly
treated.
2. The computer uses an automatic "look ahead" method to determine when the
train should apply brakes in order to comply with a lower speed limit or
come to a stop.
3. The effect of track curvature in retarding a train is allowed for in the com-
puter by using the relation that each degree of curvature is equivalent to a
certain increase in gradient.
4. Locomotive tractive forces and train resistance are given to the computer in
the form of tables as a function of train speed. This is much more flexible
than assuming a constant horsepower or using Davis-type formulas for train
resistance.
5. The actual calculations are done by a step-by-step solution of the differential
equation governing the train's motion, expressed in terms of energy rather than
acceleration. The effect of this is that a larger interval between successive steps
can be used. We have found that a lS-sec interval using the energy equation
gives as much accuracy as a 5-sec interval using accelerations. The result of
this is to reduce the number of calculations required for a run.
6. The "velocity profile" (i.e., graph of speed versus distance) which is produced
as an output shows very simply and clearly such things as the effect of slow
orders, the minimum speed up the ruling grade, and the relationship between
actual train speed and the speed limit.
7. The quantities entered on a control card and therefore completely under the
operator's control, include:
(a) The effective value of "free-fall" gravitational acceleration, modified by
rotational inertia, which varies from train to train.
(b) Braking deceleration.
(c) Height equivalent of curvature (see above).
(d) Length of train.
(e) Weight of train.
(f) Time interval for calculating successive steps.
(g) Distance interval for detail output and for the velocity profile.
8. Preparation of the input to the computer is very simple. One set of punched
cards contains tractive forces and train resistance, another gives speed limits,
a third has elevations and curvature at arbitrary points along the track (usually
where the gradient changes), and a last set gives temporary speed orders (slow
Train Perform ance Calculator 75
or fast), stations for which summary outputs are required, and train stops.
An interesting feature of the last three sets is that they are reversible. In order
to run a train in the opposite direction, the cards are merely turned around
and read into the computer backwards, without being sorted or rearranged.
This is accomplished by plug-beard wiring in the computer.
Although there are always differences from the ideal in actual train operation, and
no two train runs will ever be identical, the TPC results have shown remarkably good
agreement with measured train times.
The Transportation Department has used the program to prepare charts for all
main-line subdivisions, eastbound and westbound, giving running times as a function
of weight/power ratio for passenger trains and for freight trains with various values
of average car weight. These are being distributed to the Regions, and it is believed
that as they become more familiar to management and operating personnel, more uses
will be found for them and for the greatly improved information which they contain.
APPENDIX A— EQUIPMENT
IBM 650 with:
Basic alphabetic device
2000-word drum storage
On-line IBM 407 tabulating machine
The program is at present being rewritten to make use of the IBM-7070 computer
which has recently been acquired by the CNR. Various additions and modifications will
be incorporated at the same time.
APPENDIX B— MATHEMATICAL METHOD
Units
For simp'icity and precision in operations within the computer, the following
quantities have been used:
Distance .V miles
Time T minutes
Speed V miles per minute
Acceleration A m'les per minute1
Energy Potential P (miles per minute)
For machine use ( but not tor input and output), all variables have been expressed
in these units. For example:
I I- in lb ui
\r = acceleration due to tractive effort = — ■ . . • ,, G
tram weight m ll>
. . , Resistant e in lb w i
An = deceleration due to resistive forces = ; — : . . , . — r. ■ (,
train weight in lb
Pit = Energy potential due to height (including curve effeel
= average height of train in miles X G
In these examples, G is the gravitational acceleration constant, modified to lake
account of rotational inertia.
76 Train Performance Calculator
Full-Power Operation — i.e., Below Speed Limit
A step-by-step integration procedure is used, with an approximately constant time
increment.
Let DT, DX, DV, DPn denote increments of time, distance, speed and height
potential, and let DCT be the basic time interval. Suppose that after any step the train's
position and speed are X and V.
Then:
DX = (V + l/2 DoV) DeT, where D„V is a first approximation to DV (see below).
Calculate DPn corresponding to DX, from the elevation card input.
Calculate Am = Ap — AR for a speed V-\-l/2 D0V, by interploating in the table
of tractive force and resistance.
Am DX — DPb
DV — v+y2D0v
_ DX
DT~ v+y2DV
Provided that no braking lines or speed limits are violated, these increments are
then added to the old variables and the process is repeated, using the value of DV as
the new value for DaV.
For the first step after release from a speed limit, or from a stop, there is no
available value for D0V, and so it is calculated:
DoV =(AM — AG) DcT, where Ao is the acceleration due to the gradient under
the train.
Train Performance Calculator
77
••
T3TD '
A
C « O
re o "V
<£
«/>
,«t-5 c
4*.
oz
u ©
3
•i
O U A
\I
>-
<ANt»«<MnN«prtHN4<#a4rth-o»H«oo»
*ss
to
f»-#**d«0»*^-*£W«>l^.#oj?>f*o>^©«**\©0>«n
V9 •
z>v>
C t/)
— OQC
-" E c
vctl
cr
<UJ
Kzn.
t» z>
t
oouxx
aC c
u_
•OCT
W « re
•
atri
•- Ui
i
XUJ
•2E -
ujza.
uxr
z
!*
« P »)
<
•i •
or
^M
C o
h~
I-
o C ll
« i<
4f \t
\m d tl
*-
*(<
1:1
o w
+J to
a
D
O i •
a a
O
u.
w — u
° o °
a. 2 j=
4> -^ n_^
U*
O «o
• ZtU
« rt « * «* ~> m o- < ir o
U
u-cu
<M ©> o>> «o • •* «A *\< *> «■«
■-J «
r
oxa
• • • • •• •••••
Sog;
<
_j •/>
r\ «n «-> o m o* «n o «> e> •>
X
hhn r> *i «f\ r- «o> o **
j.-
§
•
ox
r-4 r4
rent
d o o
u.
1*1
xa •
*\ r- o o
• • • •
• • • • • • •
72 ■£ <->
a
«az
r- • r» • to ■€ * «o « m <C
E « °
BO
r
aOT >,
—•
i*i*
'C n-°
<
xv>
H w —
•z
a •
•• 5 2
Ik
U V .,
«^> re
O
<u>
-IK
UiX
_ t» W
.« WO
i
T3 ac
1
§
w X lu a
re <" t>
2
Ui tt
u a oc_#o z o < a: >- £
J=T3 X
UJ BE U
v2 v
h*
ae<
<
u uj ir >- z
jEo
BMOMXU jaillO J">K
H.c bo
g
»-
r «/i >w)OZ<<
OUlLhlOfCOUX
<c 3v
jiflMLwSNkjhU*!*! WJ
<z>ij<ii.>f3»j»)Kq
V)
&. z 3
jj ~ *>
«o
HhJIIIMi^U<
M E J
3 r C
•36
6
<OQkJ<M<UJ
5§3
3*5 -
o
au
o « i2
©
St
X-i
•
eoooooooooooooooooopoo«v«««
>» bflO
t
c E iS
5 3 tn
Ijg
•*©«©-#r>#-«M«o.#rMr^rx«D.©«>.->.*«>c><.*^.tfr--.#*.
■J
NNHOOfre
■S«)f-f-^>-OrfN*>-*^«^«^ — — •
2
»-_)
8
w ^
M
bo tn"°
*
z
•
• ••«•••••••••••••••••••••
.^u c
o«\ • m» «» s " . ^ »- «m r- — tr^^<r^*>»^r~^»'<ri«M«^<»
^ 3 O.-
.3 o re
ere-"
»-«»<*<iMr»'**'#tr*\«<«r>-f-«»»»'©©«-,'«<»«w
«•
n
7S
Train Performance Calculator
SU3D
VISON
IL UP KAII'
KLKI-yr<
M«N(.t UU
TRAIN NO. /c«/7 Ar**r+>/tfJb
TRIP M/P
MILEA6C LOC
stat; on
ELAP.TIME
HRS.MINS.
SPEED
M.P.H.
COMP.GR
%
POWER U. EXP. 8RA<INo
, ENERGY ET.ERGY ST, TO ST
P. AVAIL.* HP HR.S HP hRS. M1NS.
5 0*00
129.58
EDSON
S 0.00
12^.58
EDSON
0.25
129.33
01.0
25.6
.12-
0.50
129.08
01.5
33.4
.38-
0.75
128.83
01.9
35.0
.36-
1.00
128.58
02.4
35,0
.34-
1.25
128.33
02.8
35.0
.27-
1.50
128.08
03.2
39.9
.20-
1.75
127.83
03.5
43.4
.21-
2.00
127.58
03.9
46.5
.32-
2.25
127.33
04.2
49.4
.35-
2.50
127.08
04.5
52.0
.35-
2.75
126.83
04.8
54.4
.35-
3.00
126.58
05.0
56.5
.37-
3.25
126.33
05.3
58.4
.38-
3.50
126.08
05.5
60.0
.38-
3.75
125.83
05.8
60.0
.38-
A. 00
125.58
06.0
60.0
.39-
4.25
125.33
06.3
60.0
.39-
4.50
125.08
06.5
60.0
.40-
4.75
124.83
06.8
60.0
.40-
5.00
124.58
07.0
60.0
.40-
5.25
124.33
07.3
60.0
.19-
5.38
124.20
YATES
07.4
60.0
.08-
5.38
124.20
YATES
07.4
60 322 9 7.6
5.75
123.83
07.8
60.0
.43-
6.00
123.58
08.0
60.0
.38-
6.25
123.33
08.3
55.9
.34-
6.50
123.08
08.6
49.0
.06
6.75
122.83
08.9
41.0
.16
7.00
122.58
09.3
40.0
.05
7.25
122.33
09.7
40.0
7.50
122.08
10.0
40.0
.05-
7.75
121.83
10.4
40.0
.46-
8.00
121.58
10.8
44.4
.53-
8.25
121.33
U. 1
48.1
.29-
8.50
121.08
11.4
50.7
.22-
8.78
120.80
WOLF CREEK
11.7
53.0
.30-
8.78
120.80
WOUF CREEK
11.7
58 459 170 4.2
9.00
120.58
12.0
54.9
.35-
9.25
120.33
12.2
56.9
.36-
Fig. 2 — Detail output. Since the summary cards have not been sorted
out, they also appear in the print-out. The headings referring to the details
cards are: Trip mileage, Milepost location, Elapsed time, Speed, Gradient,
compensated for curve effect.
Train Performance Calculator
79
VELOCITY PROFILE
SUBDIVISION XJ
OATF t/9/i/
4_
'3
<
0
3
\
„-
-
^^
~
~-
-
0
I o
e
D
0
-
c ■>
u
L
IS
IH
-
U
0.
ID
\
J
I
Z 0
4
X
Zo
\
0
H
a
a
-
0.
in
I
i
<
Ul
Itl
or
a
©
111
1-
b.
O
0
0
c<s>/»-cru-f-rrurr(-arrrur<rcr'rur^furtfurcrurrrur<rur-C'«rf<--»rcrKr''--'
Fig. 3 — Velocity profile. The figures "1" refer to the train speed. "2"
to the speed limit. Where the train is travelling at the speed limit, a "3"
is printed.
80
Train Performance Calculator
€,°iod8l
TOT
•)*9drr>S
V6
L'6 „
BUB30£
1*6
TBU^ag
TOOOMO 01 c
JTnpexo
B3BU0TJ
qsn^BJinM
T .
a -
a ^
J3_*_
a a
a 3 a a
a a
— ; — cr-
? a
o o
^ w
.5 c
re1"*
Sis
CO
go
u
»%
is
"■^ c
c ^
cd u G
w O «*>
• _. w
gE,rt
U*2
S h'*f,
tn.E
re C V
3 re
E « <u
bO-O.S
.Sew
C w
Egv,
|.2E
.5 o
ET3 W.
OwJg
t: « «
J3 * „
Owe
■ >.s
o c
I
Train Performance Calculator
81
C 1- !/)»*-
^
3 re >, o
E
- £ C
X to re re
--c
M re h
r:
E w n
> 2 «
a
ti
9
u
E
•GX w'O
&6*"'S
3
^•s§
y
•-* re _c »h
u o 5 u c
•2 re p c«c
0- 53 m « c
o c
re '
c ac ™ a
re ;,, -"" en
go
u
X
3
u
X
ZJ
4_j
^
X
0.
u
B
re
u
re
re
ri
V
0
re
>
C
re
BO
x
Eh
u
re
x
go
in
II
9
u
>
re
B
g
re
i)
fl
V£
X vo
ex
U
EH
<N1
re
U
00
u
B
(Nl
•■
O
+-j
B
u
a
0
go
M
II
L)
II
go
3
u
U
>
a)
X
0
11
1
u
i
■y;
M
■_
0
re
u
OJ
~
CJ
U
R
1)
u
**
M
B
'5
re
-
re
A
x
7.
go
O
0
P
re
>
0
A
X
M
'53
U
_re
•-
O
X
a
0
O
u
4J O
R
0
B
bfl
**
3
E
'3
x
0
re
X
la
II
>>
0
-
II
>
re
9
E
CO
p
a
ao
E
0
0
c
a
0
u
h
re
X
VI
>
II
0
~
-
E
WV
I3
0,
E
CO
C
II
O
u
X
U1
■
0
E
h
■■
A
.5*x
„_;
>
^
d
Et,
X
X
Fi
u.
M
bf
>
0
V
u
*
0
cm
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations*
By C. J. HUDSON
Operational Research Branch, Research and Development Department
Canadian National Railways
A. INTRODUCTION
Background
The Canadian National Railways are currently implementing a program of Cen-
tralized Traffic Control on 40 main-line subdivisions, a total of 4500 miles of single track.
Since the cost of installing CTC is high ($50,000 per siding or approximately $1 million
per subdivision), it is essential to determine the most economic number and locations
of signalled sidings which will adequately handle the current and anticipated traffic.
In the past, upon a proposal to install CTC, the number of sidings required has
been based on the grid system, their location determined largely by local operating per-
sonnel and the suitability of the configuration evaluated by a manual redispatch. This
process of drawing by hand the trains' time-distance graphs and planning the meets as
would an experienced CTC dispatcher is time-consuming, and any quantitative measure
by which one siding configuration may be compared to another entails much further
work. The time taken to redispatch one day's train over a subdivision runs into several
man-hours.
The Operational Research Branch was asked to develop a technique which would
enable the Transportation Department to evaluate various proposals for siding con-
figurations easily and quickly, and to compare these alternatives quantitatively.
Many persons have been associated with the development of this project from its
beginning — in particular, J. M. Davey, KCS (Quebec) Ltd.; I. H. Cole, now with A. D.
Little Inc., and members of the Transportation and Maintenance Department.
Program Design
Various approaches to the problem were made, including linear programming and
combinatorial analysis. In an analytic formulation the complexity of the problem is
greatly increased by introducing the siding spacing, siding capacity, and train speed,
length, density and departure times as true variables. Yet it is essential that each of
these remains variable if the representation is to be realistic and the solution of prac-
tical value. From these considerations it was decided that the most suitable approach
would be a direct simulation using a digital computer.
By direct simulation is meant that an attempt is made to create in the computer
a representation of the situations that occur on a subdivision. In the computer represen-
tation of the CTC subdivision and the train traffic, the program moves the trains,
predicts meets, decides the trains to be delayed, arranges meets at the sidings and
imposes on the delayed trains the delays they incur in practice.
The use of a computer to represent a subdivision and its traffic is closely analogous
to that of a CTC dispatcher's console, which is itself a direct simulation of the track.
Here the dispatcher observes an indication of the presence of a train in a certain block
of track by a small light in the appropriate location on the console. The equivalent in
the computer might be the presence of a number, identifying the train, in a specific
memory location.
Presented at the 1962 Joint ASME-AIEE-EIC Railway Conference, Toronto, Ont., April 10, 1962.
82
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations 83
There were two stages to the development of the program. First the objectives
of the program had to be translated into a logical set of operating rules. Computer
techniques were then developed to represent and move trains. The objective of the pro-
gram is to "duplicate" good dispatching of trains over a subdivision. A dispatcher's
objectives can be stated simply:
1. Scheduled traffic should maintain its schedule as far as possible
2. In delaying trains, priorities must be recognized.
3. The overall delay to all trains should be as small as possible.
These objectives imply that:
4. Future meets must be anticipated.
5. A decision must depend on concurrent consideration of (1), (2) and (3)
above.
A set of decision-making rules now used in the program was the result ol many
discussions with dispatchers and operating personnel, analysis of CTC train charts, and
trial-and-error methods using the computer. One of the difficulties was to formulate a
set of rules which apply to any subdivision. Dispatchers, with considerable experience
of local traffic, have intuitively created for themselves a set of rules which are suitable
for the efficient movement of trains on their particular subdivisions; and with highly
repetitive patterns of movement, experience is one of the most useful factors of decision
making. Such a rule might be "If No. 1 doesn't overtake No. IS by siding X it will
arrive late at the terminal."
There are many ways of building a program to move trains, detect meets in ad-
vance, implement a decision once it has been made, and to initiate and terminate trains.
These are matters of technique and, in this case, the prime considerations in determining
the type of program were speed and convenience of operation, using the features and
capacity of the available 4000-word IBM 650.
B. DESCRIPTION OF PROGRAM
Data Preparation
When a decision is taken to study a subdivision prior to CTC installation, the
Operating Department first chooses one or more samples of actual traffic which are
considered suitable for evaluation of the siding configuration, the traffic being either
typical or as heavy as will be encountered on the subdivision in the foreseeable future.
These samples usually consist of a week's trains, though any lesser time period ma\
be used. If the installation of CTC indicates any changes in schedules, departure time]
or length of trains, these are allowed for in preparing the data The data which are
punched on cards completely specifies each train and includes such items as the running
characteristics, schedules, number of cars and tasks enroute.
Track and train running-time data complete the input to the simulation. Tin
information is that needed completely to specif] the CTC configuration, namely, the
location of signalled sidings, electric lock sidings and junction-, and the cai capadt]
and switch arrangement of sidings.
Instead of calculating the siding-to-siding running tfnv cfa nam pp
these times are interpolated from a series of time-distance tables, which are pari ol the
results of another simulation, the Train Performance Calculai 01 or TP( I I train
of given characteristics, this program simulate- its movement QVtt ol track,
taking into account elevation, curvature, speed limit- and temporary -low orders Cal
S4 A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations
culations are made at discrete time intervals, and the velocity, time, horsepower ex-
pended, braking, etc., are recorded at specified mileages. In addition, a velocity profile
is plotted. For the CTC simulation, which is only one of the many uses of this pro-
gram, condensed tables of running times are compiled for a range of trains of typical
characteristics. Using interpolation on these precalculated tables is both time and space
saving in the CTC simulation, although there may be a small loss of accuracy due to
rounding off siding-to-siding times to the nearest minute.
The Optimum Path Program
Because of limited storage in the computer, the simulation has been divided into
three separate programs, namely, an optimum path routine, the dispatching program
and a statistical analysis. A flow chart of the computer operation is shown in Fig. 1.
The optimum path routine assimulates the raw data and produces for each train a table
of the times it will enter and leave each siding and, in addition, indicates whether the
siding is adequate for the train, whether the power switch is facing or opposing the
train, and the type of task to be pertormed, if any. This optimum time line is the path
the train would take, allowing for schedules and tasks, but assuming there is no inter-
ference from other trains. The departure time from one siding and the arrival time at
the next specify the block requirements for each train. Since only one train may occupy
one block at a time, there is no need to record the distribution of time within a block.
The optimum time lines together with the track data form the input to the main
program.
The computer time for this routine averages 10 min, or approximately 10 percent
of that for the dispatching program. Incorporated in this routine are editing features
which detect most invalid data, and which from experience have proved very necessary.
The Dispatching Program
A block diagram of the dispatching program is shown in Fig. 2. Trains' optimum
time lines are read into the computer in the order trains are ready to enter the sub-
division. A horizon is set, determined by the earliest time that any train in the system
will reach its destination. All trains due to enter the system prior to this time are read
into the computer. By this means the number of trains being considered varies according
to the traffic density.
In a systematic manner, trains are moved forward as far as possible on a free
path. A train's progress is halted at the furthest adequate siding to which it can move
prior to a train ahead in the same direction, or to a conflict of time requirements for
a block. If progress is stopped by a conflict, the train number is stored in the appropri-
ate siding location, and the time is defined as the time the second train is to enter the
block. In this way all trains are moved as far as possible on a free path.
When all movements have been completed, the earliest of conflicts is found, together
with the trains involved. The CTC dispatcher normally plans meets and sets the switches
at sidings well ahead of the trains. Similarly, in the program the conflict is recognized
before either train enters the disputed block, and the decision is made at this time.
In the decision-logic phase of the program, the time-space around the two conflicting
trains is examined. For each train, information is collected on its priority, length, the
d3lay it will incur if the other proceeds, and for a scheduled train its slack time to the
next schedule point. The slack time is the difference between its minimum running time
and its schedule time. With the two basic alternatives of holding one train, the important
factors Influencing a decision are:
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CT C Operations 85
/TRACK DATA
( TRAIN DATA
RUNNING TIMES
OPTIMUM
PATH
ROUTINE
OPTIMUM
TIME LINES
DISPATCHING
ROUTINE
( DECISIONS
ORIGIN-
DESTINATION
PERFORMANCE
STATISTICAL
ROUTINE
STATISTICAL
ANALYSIS
Fig. 1 — The computer operation.
86
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations
READ TRAINS UP
TO HORIZON
DETECT EARLIEST
CONFLICT. MOVE
ALL TRAINS PRIOR
TO CONFLICT
IS SITUATION CLEAR
FROM PREVIOUS CONFLICT
USE FORCE-ON
LOGIC TO CHOOSE
TRAIN TO MOVE
DECIDE TRAIN
TO BE HELD
r
IMPLEMENT
DECISION
1
RESET
HORIZON
Fig. 2— Flow chart of the dispatching program.
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Ope rations
s:
C
ARE TRAINS AT
ADJACENT SIDINGS?
c
IS AN INTERMEDIATE
SIDING ADEQUATE FOR
EITHER TRAIN?
INVESTIGATE
ADVANTAGES OF
SAWBY
c
FAVOURABLE
PLAN
SAWBY
UNFAVOURABLE
3 C
IS ONLY ONE OF THE
TRAINS ABLE TO
ACCEPT DELAY
IS ONLY ONE OF THE
TRAINS BLOCKED BY THE
THIRD
DELAY
THAT
TRAIN
DELAY
BLOCKED
TRAIN
USE PRIORITIES TO
WEIGHT DELAYS.
DELAY TRAIN WITH
LEAST RELATIVE DELAY
Fig. 3 — Decision logic (simplified).
1. the possible interference to other trains;
2. the ability of each train to accept a delay;
3. the priority and potential delay of each train.
For a meet, the skeleton logic is Bow-charted in Fig. I \ scheduled train can
"accept" a delay if it can be absorbed in it- slack time, i.e., il can suffei the delaj and
still maintain its schedule. In this connotation an unscheduled train can always "accept"
a delay. The disposition of other trains in the system Is checked t.. see whethei .i delay
to a third train would ensue if either train were allowed I" proceed li SO, the train
which would cause this delay is said to be blocked. In the situation ol tw> trains oppoi
ing one, the tendency is to delay the one When neither or both train> are blocked,
and neither or both can accept the respective delays, the priority and delay for each
88 A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations
train are compounded to choose the minimum weighted delay. Other factors affecting
a decision are the presence of one train in a terminal (since there is a premium on ter-
minal time), the use of grade sidings, and tasks to be performed at a siding.
The inclusion of short sidings in a configuration (or the running of long trains)
contributes to the complications of the decision logic. With short sidings, a saw-by
is sometimes a third alternative to delaying either train at its present siding. For this,
the long train must arrive first at a siding which is long enough only for the short train.
Since this decision causes delays to both trains, the saw-by logic measures this total
delay against a delay to either train, and if unfavorable returns to the decision logic
for a straightforward meet.
Nothing has yet been said about overtaking situations. Overtaking occurs mainly
while one train is performing a task, and hence little or no delay is caused to that train.
The use of sidings for overtaking is limited to those which are both adequate for the
train being passed and which can be entered through the power switch. The desirability
of an overtake is based not only on the relative speeds of the trains, but also on future
tasks, if any, and on scheduled arrival times.
When it has been decided which train is to be delayed, the opposing train is moved
to the siding location of the delayed train, and one of the two trains placed in the
siding, depending on the power switch disposition. If the delaying train has to run
through the passing track it is delayed an amount equal to the difference in time to run
through at normal speed and at siding speed. Its arrival and departure times at all
siding locations ahead are then modified by this amount. The clearance time of the
delayed train is then determined by the delaying train, and its future path modified
according^.
With the two trains still at the same siding, the program returns to the beginning,
the horizon is reset, more trains are brought into the system if necessary, and all trains
are mcved prior to conflict. If one of the two formerly conflicting trains is able to move
on a free path to an adequate siding at this stage, then the next conflict in time may
be accepted for resolution. However, if the situation does not clear itself, one of the
two trains must be forced to move on to a further sid'ng, leaving one train only at
each siding and thus available for arranging future meets. The situation occurs in times
of congestion and in particular when one train is longer than some sidings. Considerable
program development was necessary to handle the many conditions that occur in "force-
ons", which resu't mostly from saw-by meets. These situations occur in real operation,
for when a dispatcher makes such a meet, and allows a long train into sections of track
where the sidings are inadequate, he must accept the consequence of that meet by ac-
cepting further saw-bys or, if opposed by other long trains, by first forcing the train
on to an adequate siding and holding the opposing trains.
In this way the program is recycled until all trains have been processed. For each
decision made, a record is punched, and when a train reaches its destination the resolved
path of its arrival and departure times for each siding location is punched out.
The sequence of operation of the program is reviewed in time-distance graphs for
a specific example, in Fig. 4. On the vertical scale S^, S3 are 100 car sidings and S«.
60 cars. The horizontal scale is time. The manifest MF is 100 cars; the passenger P, 10
cars; and the wayfreight WF, 40 cars. Stage (a) represents the output of the optimum
path routine, that is. the path each train wou'd take neglecting the pressnee of the other
trains. In (b) the first three trains have entered the system, moved as far as possible
prior to the earliest conflict, and are at the siding locations indicated by the arrows.
A Computer Simulation of Railroa d CTC Operations 89
A
MF
(100) ^
T
XI
l
I
K
\ I
-\T-
X
/\
/ \
±-4
p /
(10)4
1 /
X
/WF
/ (40)
(100)
(60)
S3
(100)
MF\
(100) \
/ \
/ \ /
\ 1 \ 1
?
^
* A
4 \ J \
s 1
h
(10)/
*1 /
r \
(o)
(b)
Fig. 4 — Phases of the dispatching program cycle.
Trains are halted at a siding prior to an event, hence tluir times an do) Identical. In
(c) the decision has been made to hold the manifi I Ml il 5 the pmcngfl P DU
been moved to 5! and the path of MF modified. The passenger P has readied the ter-
minal in stage (d) but the next decision must be made bcfori- the manifest movi
yond Si, as 53 is a short siding. The next operation would be to resolve thai conflict
between the manifest and the wayfreight.
90 A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations
I, I'. [AY ''".|.
I i
!l
w
► lit scr. i«i pfKiur
pc ■ t « ? :■
Fig. 5 — Simulated train chart.
The program uses the minimum clock technique, moving from conflict to conflict.
Based on the activity of an average subdivision, this represents a considerable saving in
time over the master clock method. The highest clock time is 10,000 min (just 40 min
short of 1 week) and the smallest interval is 1 min. For an average subdivision of 15
sidings and 120 trains per week, the dispatching program takes about V/z hr, which
gives a simulation ratio of 100 to 1. Since the relationship between computer time and
train density is non-linear, this ratio will decrease rapidly with higher density traffic.
Because of the limitation of 4000 words of storage in the IBM 650, the number of
sidings cannot exceed 38 and the number of trains in the system at any one time is
restricted to 10. The program itself occupies 3000 locations in memory.
The Train Charts and Analysis Program
The punched cards of the trains' resolved paths are sorted and listed off-line on an
IBM 407 to produce scaled time-distance charts of the simulated dispatching. Each train
is allocated a digit, and a point is plotted for the time a train arrives at, and leaves a
siding location, as shown in Fig. 5. The day is divided into 3 periods of 8 hr. The ends
of the sidings are considered to be 1 mile apart for plotting purposes. Where only one
mileage appears against a siding number it is either a junction or an electric lock siding.
The dotted lines show the difference in time between the actual arrival time and the
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations 91
scheduled arrival time. For unscheduled trains the equivalent of the scheduled time is
the time the train would have arrived without any interference
The statistical program utilizes the resolved origin-destination performance, and
the decision and delay data from the dispatching program to prepare an analysis of the
siding configuration and the traffic pattern imposed. The most general indication of
performance is given by the total train interference in train-minutes. This interference
is also given as a distribution over various trains or classes of trains. Some of the
other statistics derived include:
1. The lateness of scheduled trains leaving and arriving at terminals
2. A distribution of the number and duration of delays by sidings.
3. The accumulated number of meets and passes occurring during the same hour
of each day for the period. (This shows the traffic peaks).
4. The average delay per meet or pass.
5. A distribution of the activity of the system. This is measured by the number
of hours in which no meets, one meet, two meets, etc., occur.
6. The distribution of interference to each class of train caused by each class ol
train (e.g., to passenger trains by manifest trains).
C. PROJECT EVALUATION AND DEVELOPMENT
Evaluation of Results
When an analysis of a subdivision is required, about five or six configurations are
initially chosen for comparison. These configurations, which range from an expected
minimum to maximum number of sidings, are based on proposals from local and Re-
gional operating personnel, and the Headquarters Transportation Department. Because,
in most cases, CTC is being installed to supersede train-order operation on a subdivision,
and the cost of building complete new sidings is high, the existing siding locations impose
many constraints on the location of sidings to be signalled. On train-order subdivisions
the siding spacing is normally much less than that considered necessary for CTC opera-
tion. Hence the problem often reduces to deciding which of the existing sidings should
be signalled, and in some cases extended.
From the statistical analysis and from the train charts, the Transportation Depart-
ment can very quickly judge the feasibility of a configuration. The charts highlight any
extraordinary situations, or poor dispatching, which may be hidden in a statistical
summary. The results of'.en lead to further proposed configurations, which are simulated
before the economics of the different configurations are studied,
It is expected that the introduction of CTC will reduce both the operating
of a subdivision and the cost of interference to traffic on thai subdivision. The main
items contributing to the operating costs, which are significantly different in train order
and CTC operation, are operators' wages, maintenance ot signals and maintenance of
way. Operators' wages, and to some extent the maintenance costs, are independent ol
the CTC configuration. To the railway the main measurable costs ol Interfereno
car time and locomotive time. The potential reduction in costs must be weighed against
the capital cost of CTC (or the annual interest and depredation cost) Trends of the
capital cost of CTC and the resulting interference for a typical subdivision are shown
in Fig. 6.
In addition to the reduction of interference costs, there an benefits ol CTC which
have as yet only been measured qualitatively The most apparent of these are Imp
92 A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations
2000 2500 3000 3500
INTERFERENCE (TRAIN MINUTES)
Fig. 6 — Capital cost and interference.
operating safety, faster and more consistent service to both freight and passenger cus-
tomers. In a ccmplete appraisal of a configuration the quantitative value of these factors
must be included.
In most of the subdivisions studied to date, there is no proposed configuration
giving acceptable performance, which stands out clearly as the economic optimum.
Usually, within the limits of permissible performance there is a steady improvement in
performance with increased total cost. Two problems, however, can be easily solved:
if the capital cost is fixed, the configuration giving the best performance can be found,
or if the desired performance is specified, the cheapest configuration to attain this can
be found. In general, considerations other than performance limit the choice of con-
figuration. Since the studies are based on current traffic levels it is necessary in design-
ing the CTC configuration to provide enough flexibility to handle the expected traffic
five to ten years hence. It is now a standard practice in determining the most suitable
configuration, to choose one which can be easily and efficiently expanded for greater
capacity.
Program Development
The current simulation program produces a redispatch reasonably close to that of
a CTC dispatcher. It is to be stressed that the program is not designed to operate on
line and in real time to do the dispatcher's job. Its main function is in p'anning require-
ments for CTC installations and has been used for this purpose by the Headquarters
Transportation and Maintenance Department since July 1960. It has also proved valu-
able in planning siding extensions and retirements on existing CTC subdivisions. Fig. 7
A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operation:
► III SO0. 0>T M«I0
I.I I
II.} I
h.i i
m.i •
tl.?
II
• •.0
II
11.0
ii
H.J
It
»».»
11
tl.t
is.*
II
it
IS.'*
tt.l
II
it
tl.t
It.*
II
II
II. 1
it
rt.i
ii.i
20
n.«
11
•s.i
• t.r
ir.t
J!
101. I II
lot. I ir
IC5.S If
93
Fig. 7 — Simulated and actual dispatching.
94 A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations
is a comparison of simulated and actual dispatching on an existing CTC subdivision.
The simulated dispatching is shown by a solid line. Where the actual dispatching is
different from the simulated, it is shown by a dotted line. Overall, the differences are
minor, and the simulation compares favorably with the CTC dispatcher.
The current program has certain limitations, some of which are due to memory
size of the IBM 650. At present, for example, only one subdivision, or a section of
track with not more than 38 sidings, can be simulated. A new program, designed pri-
marily for the same purpose, is now being developed for use on an IBM 7070. This will
enable a greater length of track to be simulated, and will inccrporate more extensive
decision logic. Since the program was first used, much experience has been gained of
CTC operation and of subdivisional problems, and this knowledge is a valuable back-
ground for future programs.
A more general simulation of railroad operations is also planned. In this it is
intended to simulate traffic over a large network, such as Montreal and Toronto to
Winnipeg, and to incorporate in the simulation the operation of major yards.
With the availability of a general and a detailed simulation program, many oper-
ating problems can be studied. The detailed program will continue to be used for CTC
subdivision studies. In addition it may help in an understanding of the theory of single
track traffic flow by studying the relationships between interference, traffic density, sid-
ing spacing, train priority and velocity. The general simulation could be applied to such
problems as the scheduling of traffic between major terminals, and the operating effect
of varying the number and length of trains.
We now have a technique to compare CTC configurations quantitatively in terms
of performance and interference. The effect of these factors is, however, not sufficiently
understood to apply cost-effectiveness measures to the quantitative results. This is a
worthwhile area for intensive research.
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation*
By C. J. CODE
Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad
The cross tie statistics for Class I Railroads which appear annually in the Bulletins
of the American Railway Engineering Association and in the Cross Tie Bulletin are of
great interest to many people in the railrcad field. This interest extends from tcp man-
agement down into the ranks of the engineering and purchasing departments and has
not infrequently been the subject of editorial comment in railway magazines.
That these figures are subject to misinterpretation and misuse probably does not
distinguish them materially from other types of statistical information. The first cause
of misinterpretation is the tendency to look at the figures for one years renewals, or
even the average figures for five years, and place undue weight on the results as reflect-
ing differences in maintenance efficiency or economy — for instance, as between two rail-
roads. Again, if we are to evaluate the benefit of any change in practice which is ex-
pected to produce increased tie life, we must have an accurate idea of present-day tie
life on which to base a comparison. I think most of you will agree that the five-year
average including 1961. which could be interpreted as reflecting an average life of 62
years, is deceptive to say the least, and that these figures can scarcely be taken as truly
representative of average tie life.
Actually, to get a true overall picture of tie life, we should have an average over a
sufficient number of years to include the fife of the ties which remain in track longest.
This would mean, in my opinion, an average over a period of 50 to 60 years. However,
we have not been using creosoted ties for a major percentage of renewals for 60 years.
and it is necessary in obtaining a realistic average to confine our study to a period
during which the present-day standard of creosoted ties represents all but a very small
percentage of the ties used. It is also desirable if not essential to choose years for the
beginning and end of the period such that the average condition of ties in track is about
the same at the beginning and end of the period. I have chosen for these reasons the
period from 1934 to 1957, incl.
In interpreting the statistics, it is also necessary to take account of the fact that
mechanical wear and damage has an important effect on tie life and that consequently
the average life in a heavy-tonnage track in territory where there are many sharp curves
heavily elevated is going to be quite different from what it is under light traffic at low
speed on tangent and light curves. One cannot take the overall average, apply it to
any specific situation, and say that the ties in that location are expected to equal the
overall average life. For instance, if I make a study of the economic benefit of a certain
change in tie practice which will apply only to main track, or to main track in a specific
territory, and base the study on an average life which includes 40 percent of side and
yard tracks, I am only deceivim: myself.
How this can work out in a specific instance is shown on Table I. which repre-
sents a combination of two railroads, one eastern and one western, for which tin- statis-
tics were readily available, and in which the average renewals over the 24-year period,
1934 to 1957, inch, are broken down by classes of track. In making this breakdown
of mileage I have had to make some assumption-, but these are not such as to distort
the overall picture.
"Presented before the annual convention "f the Railw.iy Tie Association, Minneapolis, Minn,
October 24, 1962.
95
96 Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
Table I
Railroads A and B
Tie Life - 24 Year Average
1934 to 1957 Incl.
Class of Track and Miles on Ties in Ave. Ties Renewed
Annual Gross Ton Miles Cros3 Ties Ties/Mile Track Life Ties/Mile/Year Per Year Total
2560 19,700,000 60
3070 18,650,000 60
2710 3,210,000 50
2970 6,870,000 35
3100 10,400,000 30
3240 38,100,000 32
3100 10,050,000 25
3240 6,480,000 25
3250 6,630,000 20
39,657 120,090,000 35 86.5 3,428,000
(a) and (b) reflect differences in ties per mile.
The values of average life used for various classes of main track are based on my
own studies over the past 17 or 18 years in which I have had the opportunity to follow
the performance of dated test ties in detail throughout their life to date. This has been
augmented by observation of older ties of known vintage based on the type of end irons
used, and on overall observation of tie performance.
You will note that average life of ties in main track is shown as varying from 20
to 35 years for all but the lightest traffic lines, and these figures are pretty well sub-
stantiated as far as I am concerned by the observations referred to above. The 20-year
average for main-line heavy traffic could be further broken down to show some loca-
tions where life is only 15 years. The figure of 50 years for light traffic branch lines
and the figure of 60 years for side and yard tracks, are pretty much assumptions, but
they are assumptions which are necessary in order for the table to balance out to an
overall average of 35 years for the two railroads, which figure is obtained from the
published tie statistics for the 24 year period.
Since first preparing the table I have had a look at some 40-year-old ties in little
used side tracks, and I must confess that based on this observation, my 60-year figure
for yard and side tracks looks too optimistic. Nevertheless, I am quite hesitant to make
Side and Yard Tracks
(a) 7697
(b) 6080
Main Tracks
Less than 2 Million
Gros3 Ton Miles
1185
2 to 5 Million
Gross Ton Miles
2310
5 to 10 Million
Gross Ton Miles
(a) 3355
5 to 10 Million
Gross Ton Miles
(b)ll,750
10 to 25 Million
Gross Ton Miles
(a) 3240
10 to 25 Million
Gross Ton Miles
(b) 2000
Over 25 Million
Gross Ton Miles
2040
42.7
328,000
51.2
311,000
54.2
64,000
84.8
196,000
103.3
347,000
101.3
1,190,000
124.0
402,000
129.5
259,000
162.5
331,000
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
'-7
Table II
Railroads A and B
Tie Life - 24 Year Adjusted Average
1934 to 1957 incl.
Class of Track and Miles on
Annual Gross Ton Miles Cross Ties
Side and Yard Tracks (a) 7697
(b) 6080
Main Track
Less than 2 Million
Gross Ton Miles
2 to 5 Million
Gross Ton Miles
5 to 10 Million
Gross Ton Miles
5 to 10 Million
Gross Ton Miles
10 to 25 Million
Gross Ton Miles
10 to 25 Million
Gross Ton Miles
Over 25 Million
Gross Ton Miles
1185
2310
(a) 3355
(b) 11,750
(a) 3240
(b) 2000
2040
Total Ties
Ties/Mile in Track
2560 19,700,000
3070 18,650,000
2710 3,210,000
2970 6,870,000
3100 10,400,000
3240 38,100,000
3100 10,050,000
3240 6,480,000
3250 6,630,000
Ave. Ties Renewed
Life Ties/Mile/Year Per Year Total
50
51.2
394,000
50
61.4
373,000
50
54.2
64,000
35
84.8
196,000
30
103.3
347,000
32
101.3
1,190,000
25
124.0
402,000
25
129.5
259,000
20
162.5
331,000
39,657 120,090,000 33-8* 89.7* 3,556,000*
(a) and (b) reflect differences in ties per mile.
* This is an adjusted figure - see text.
the upward revision of about 5 percent in the life of main-track ties which is necessarj
to make the table balance with, for example. 50 years for side-track life.
It is quite likely that in the 24-year period covered by the average, we have not
experienced the renewal of a sufficient percentage of our side-track tie- to have thl
age figure truly representative of the life of these ties, li I assume SO year Bfe for tie-
in yard and side track, and make do change in tnj figures for main track, I arri<
an overall average life of 33.8 year- instead of IS years It seems t" me <i"'11' likely
that this is a more realistic overall average life than the ; years shown in Table I
I have prepared Table II to show this situation.
I am sure there are railroad- where there i- not such B wide variation in main
track tie life as I have shown, and perhaps a single figure would mi main
track mileage on such a road; however, I am sure that an adjustment should be made
to allow for the greater life in yards and side tra< I
has a single main line with 408 miles ol track maintained on
main track and L9S side and yard tracks, with an
year, representing an overall tie life oi
98 Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
and side tracks with 2840 ties per mile in such tracks vs. 3250 ties per mile in main
track, we arrive at an average life for main track of 25. 2 years, which is probably not
far off for this road.
Obviously, maintenance policy, in both good times and bad, has a marked effect
on tie life. A policy of careful economy disregarding refinement of line and surface
will produce longer-than-average life, while a policy of "nothing but the best is good
enough" will produce a shorter-than-average life. A change in maintenance policy can
easily make a difference of 5 or 10 percent in apparent average tie life.
So that you do not have to take on faith alone my figures for tie life in main
track, I am including a set of photographs which illustrate the appearance of ties in
main track after 3 years, 7 years, 10 years, 13 years, 15 years and 16 years in heavy
traffic main line, after 25 years in a branch line of moderate traffic, and after 32 years
in a track having frequent low-speed movement of light passenger trains, but no freight.
You will note that some have already been removed from track after 13 years. At 15
and 16 years many are ready for renewal. A recent check of about 1000 ties installed
15 years ago in a series of 6-deg curves in a track carrying an average of 60 million
gross tons annually, shows an estimated life, based on the percentage remaining in track,
of 14 years with one type of anti-splitting device and 16 years with another.
In the lighter traffic situation after 25 and 30 years, heavy renewal is indicated,
and was in fact in progress or about to start when I took my pictures.
In many cases these pictures show the worst ties of a given lot; however, I have
tried to include also some pictures of the average or better ties.
I have found that under heavy traffic most ties still look new after five years. At
from 8 to 10 years they start to show deterioration. At 13 to 16 years many are ready
for renewal, although many still have several years life.
The appearance of these ties, and of the ties associated with them, leads me to
believe that the table presented gives a reasonable interpretation of tie life under the
conditions with which I am familiar. A similar table can be constructed for any rail-
road or group of railroads by collecting certain basic information.
Tie statistics must be averaged over a long period of time to be meaningful, and
must be interpreted in the light of knowledge of the variations of life with different
classes of track and service conditions.
Average Tie Life — An I nterpretation
99
New ties, recently installed.
Hull. 573
100
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
3 year old ties, combined seasoning and treatment.
7 year old ties.
A v e r a ge Tie Life — An Interpretation
101
10 year old ties.
102
Average Tie Life — A n Interpretation
10 year old ties.
10 year old ties.
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
103
13 year old ti<
104
A v e r a ge Tie Life — An Interpretation
15 year old ties.
Average Tie Li f e — An Interpretation
105
16 year old ties.
106
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
■■
16 year old ties.
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
107
16 year old ties.
108
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
ysfis*1
a
5
16 year old ties.
Average Tie Life — An Interpreta t i o n
10"
25 year old ties — medium-traffic branch line.
no
Average Tie Life — An Interpretation
32 year old ties— light-tonnage, slow-speed suburban passenger traffic.
Cut Maintenance Costs With
Dependable Aeroquip Hose Lines
Aeroquip Flexible Hose and Reusable
Fittings are designed to cut costs two ways:
Dependable replacement lines can be
assembled quickly, easily in your shop as
they are needed. There's no costly in-
ventory of factory-made lines; a few coils
of bulk hose and some reusable fittings
meet every requirement. Second, you save
on future replacements because every
Aeroquip Fitting is detachable and com-
pletely reusable. Call your Aeroquip Dis-
tributor today!
AEROQUIP HOSE LINES FOR RAILROADS
For Hot Water, Fuel and Lube
Oils, use Aeroquip 1534 Hose and
Fittings. Sizes from Va" to 2Vi " meet
all locomotive and equipment require-
ments. Special high temperature hose
types also available.
For Air Brake and Signal Lines,
use Aeroquip 1531 Air Hose and
Fittings. Hose has internal reinforce-
ment for longer service life, lower
initial cost.
eroquip
AEROQUIP CORPORATION • JACKSON, MICHIGAN
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
INDUSTRIAL PLANTS: VAN WERT, O.J BURBANK, CALIF.; DALLAS, TEX.;
PORTLAND, ORE.; CRANBURY, N.J.; ATLANTA, GA.
In Canada: Aeroquip (Canada) Ltd., Toronto 19, Ontario
In Germany: Aeroquip GmbH., Baden Baden-Oo>
AEROQUIP PRODUCTS ARE PROTECTED BY PATENTS IN U.S.A., CANADA AND ABROAD
FLEXMASTER is an Aeroquip Trademark
AEROQUIP PRODUCTS ARE DESIGNED FOR BETTER RAILROADING
FLEXMASTER Pipe Coupling Diesel Manifold Clamp
Aeroquip Automatic Fueling Unit
£-x-t-e-n-d i-l-Q JZ-i-ft-el
USE TIE PLATE
LOCK SPIKES
One-piece Design
LOCK SPIKES hold tie plates firmly in place on
cross-ties and bridge timbers.
LOCK SPIKES are quickly and easily driven,
or removed, with standard track tools.
Driven to refusal, the spread shank is com-
pressed by the walls of the hole. Tie plates are held
against horizontal and vertical movement under
spring pressure. Play between the spike and the
hole is eliminated — abrasion and seating of tie
plates is overcome.
LOCK SPIKES hold their position in the tie,
and redriving to tighten the plate is not required.
They provide a quiet and strengthened track.
Annual cost of ties and maintenance expense is
reduced by extending the life of ties and holding
gage. Here is one answer to conservation of ma-
terials and labor. Write for free folder.
BERNUTH, LEMBCKE CO., INC.
420 Lexington Avenue, New York 17, N. Y.
Actual
Size
6RS Announces ...ROLKODE
A New Communication System SJJJT"
SOLID
UNITS
for centralized
traffic control
for supervisory
control systems
Advantages of the System:
• ROLKODE is up to 50%
faster than time coded sys-
tems.
• When combined with other
services, ROLKODE sim-
plifies line circuit require-
ments.
• ROLKODE operates on line
wire, cable, microwave, or
telephone company facili-
ties.
• ROLKODE eliminates
need for line battery or
stand-by a-c.
Control office solid state counter.
Typical coding unit.
ROLKODE is simple, fast, and
economical. Its advanced electronic
circuitry, solid Btate units, new and
improved relays, and unusual adapt •
ability will make your oexl
installation the most efficient avail-
able today.
FOR MORE INFORMATION ASK FOR PUBLICA
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL COMPANY
ROCHESTER 2, NEW YORK NEW YORK 17, NEW YORK CHICAGO 1, ILLINOIS ST. 10UIS 1. MISSOUH
The custom-built assembly shown
above and to the right is an all-purpose
rig designed to give maximum flexibility
in coating and painting work. It was
designed for field application of paints,
lacquers, vinyls, cutback asphalts,
creosotes, heavy oils and greases.
<- It uses the economical Graco Hydra-
Spray Process, and proves once again,
you get the job done faster and better
with Graco than with any other coat-
ing system.
If speed of coating application, and
material savings are important to you,
write today for all the details of the
Graco Hydra-Spray Process.
FREE!
Graco Engineers are prepared to help you in the design of your
paint and material spray assemblies. Your Graco Railway Rep-
resentative will be glad to explain the many benefits of this
service. Write or call him . . . today!
Graco
GRAY COMPANY, INC.
MINNEAPOLIS 13, MINNESOTA
RAILWAY DEPARTMENT
JOHN P. McADAMS, Eastern Sales Representative
2304 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia
CHICAGO— (Broadview, III.)
R. D. Worley
3030 South 25th Ave.
CLEVELAND
M. H. Frank Company, Inc.
1202 Marshall Building
HOUSTON
Houston Railroad Supply Co.
1610 Dumble Street
PHILADELPHIA
The A. R. Kidd Co.
1036 Suburban Station Bldg.
LOUISVILLE
T. F. & H. H. Going
6308 Limewood Circle
ST. LOUIS
The Carriers Supply Company
818 Olive Street
NEW YORK— Newark, New Jersey
R. A. Corley
744 Broad Street
SAN FRANCISCO
The Barnes Supply Company
Rm 504, 74 Montgomery Street
TWIN CITIES— SI. Paul, Minn.
The Daniel L. O'Brien Supply Compare
Endicott-On-Fourth Bldg,
WASHINGTON— Arlington, Va.
Southeastern Railway Supply, Inc.
2304 Wilson Blvd.
MONTREAL— Ontario, Canada
International Equipment Co., Ltd.
360 St. James Street West
the
JACKSON UTILITY TAMPER
An inexpensive, easy-to-maintain Multi-purpose Tamping Machine!
Here's a tamper involving very moderate investment that is gaining tremendous
favor with trackmen everywhere. It can be used to great advantage for jack-
tamping, spot-tamping and production tamping in moderate to high raises ... a
truly multi-purpose machine that can be kept working virtually all the time . . . and
one that returns one of the biggest dividends of any investment in track equipment.
PERFECT FOR SPOT TAMPING in all ballasts and
all conditions. Power options are available to suit in-
dividual requirements.
AS A JACK TAMPER-lts fast, accurate
and positive in reaching and holding the track
raise and level. It easily keeps ahead of large
production tampers and is adapted to existing
surfacing devices.
AN EXCELLENT PRODUCTION TAMPER
—Produces complete consolidation of ballast
in out-of-face raises with maximum stability
right under the rail— the load bearing zone.
SIMPLE CONTROLS
Fast, easy to coordinate.
Manual-hydraulic.
Let us furnish you with complete
information concerning this excep-
tionally advantageous machine.
As always, direct sales,
leases and service to all
U.S. railroads.
JACKSON
VIBRATORS. —
LUOINGTON. MICHIGAN. US»
Machine knocks off, ejects ties, lines track behind plow while above subgrade.
Mannix AUTO-TRACK
liminates 15 to 20 Men
PLOWING, TIE REPLACEMENT, TRACK ALINEMENT are
accomplished faster and with fewer men using the new
Mannix AUTO-TRACK unit.
Hydraulic hammer on each side knocks tie down. Con-
veyor belt ejects tie to either side. ^
NOW, lease or purchase MANNIX Auto-Track
Equipment to operate with railroad crew for
greatest convenience and maximum savings.
Write for details. Arrange showing of operating
films with no obligation,
^,™ 'mm* a
to • ^arn <*
• ♦ * k_J
Lining head controlled by levers
near rear end where operator
observes alinement. One man
replaces lining crew.
MANNIX
INTERNATIONAL
Phone: Liberty 5-0411
Box 7485
MINNEAPOLIS 22, MINNESOTA
at
your
service
for
all types of cranes
d iesel wreckers
pile drivers
buckets
ORTON
CRANE & SHOVEL CO.
608 S. DEARBORN ST.
CHICAGO 5, ILLINOIS
DANIEL A. COVELLI
President
Representative* in Principal Cities
with America's most complete line of
special trackwork: For Railroads,
Mines and Industries — A complete
line of frogs, switches and crossings •
Trackwork for installation in paved
areas • Manganese steel guard rails
• Automatic switch stands • Samson
switch points • Snow-Blowers • Switch
point guards • Rail and flange lubri-
cators • Tie pads • Racor studs • Dual
spike setters • Dual spike drivers •
Car retarders.
with America's most complete track-
work manufacturing facilities: Coast
to coast to serve your needs.
»► RACOR PLANTS:
Buffalo • Chicago Heights • Los Angeles •
Niagara Falls, Ontario, Canada • Pueblo
• Superior.
• RACOR SALES AND ENGINEERING
Chicago • Cleveland • Denver • Houston •
Los Angeles • Louisville • New York •
Philadelphia • Richmond • San Francisco
St. Louis ■ St. Paul. In Canada: Dominion
Brake Shoe Co., Ltd., Montreal, Quebec
• Niagara Falls, Ontario • Winnipeg,
Manitoba • Vancouver, B. C.
* RACOR RESEARCH:
Chicago • Mahwah, N. J.
with America's most complete track-
work engineering service: This lies in
making available to our customers
Racor's engineering experience —
practical experience from years of
designing and manufacturing . . .
advanced experience solving tomor-
row's trackwork problems today in
Racor research laboratories.
Why not let us help you with your
trackwork problems?
RAILROAD PRODUCTS DIVISION
-<JS2>" 530 Fifth Avenue, New York 36, New York
'[BrakeShoe,
CHANNELOC
...THE
^M
HARD-WORKING
RAIL ANCHOR
■
a
1
S'^7 ■ ,
39 \ ••■. -
1
»
HP1'
$
Channeloc's construction gives it the brute strength
to grip the rail with extra force — with plenty of
reserve strength for reapplication. And the way we
make it gives it the temper, the spring, to fit itself
to variations in the edge thickness of rail bases . . .
no shims. This is the anchor we introduced just
two years ago, and millions have already been
ordered by a large number of Class I roads.
ml RUE I EM PER.
RAILWAY APPLIANCE DIVISION
1623 EUCLID AVE.. CLEVELAND 15. OHIO
P. O. Box 10378
LOgan 6-7922
GREENHEART, INC.
1431 N. E. 26th Street
FORT LAUDERDALE, FLORIDA
President — John L. McEwen — Quarter Century Experience
IMPORTERS:
Greenheart Piles, Lumber, Timbers Long Length
MORA EXCELSA— Lumber and Timbers
Teak and other Woods from Burma, Siam, Australia,
Africa and South America
the world's largest
selling rail anchor
876R
IMPROVED
FAIR
RAIL ANCHOR
POWER
DESIGN MEANS
• longer service life
/ • Greater holding power
f^Faster, easier installation
fHIP.*M.22:
Division of Poor and Company
CHICAGO. NEW YORK, DENVER, ST. LOUIS, BOSTON, ST. PAUL, WASHINGTON. SAN FRANCISCO, MEXICO CITY
mmmgm
Assure lower maintenance costs,
better performance with...
;:::::::;:::::::x:>-::::: :■::-: ::::-::: ::::.::- 'xVy::':'::: yXyMVy*
TEXACO
Railroad Lubricants
and Systematic
Engineering Service
TEXACO inc.
RAILWAY SALES DIVISION
135 East 42nd St., New York 17. N. Y.
NEW YORK • CHICAGO • SAN FRANCISCO • ST. LOUIS • ST. PAUL . ATLANTA
t-
Hubbard Super Service Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Super Steel Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Track Tools
Hubbard Tool Division
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
New York Pittsburgh Chicago
%
Unit Rail Anchor
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR DIVISION
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
NEW YORK PITTSBURGH CHICAGO
FIBRE REPAIR PARTS
for
INSULATED JOINTS
The Effectiveness of the Joint
Is Dependent Upon the Quality,
Workmanship and Fit of Every Part.
Rail Joint Company
Division of Poor & Company, (Inc.)
New York 7, N. Y.
Model N U Tie Cutter
HERE IS THE WINNING TEAM
The Woolery NU Tie Cutter and the Woolery Tie-end Remover preserve the line and surface
of the track and at the same time reduce the cost of tie renewals. Ties can be removed
without trenching, jacking up track or adzing tops of rail-cut ties. With this team you simply
cut both ends of tie, pry out center piece, insert in its place the tie-end remover and out
go the tie ends pushed by the double acting, double ended hydraulic cylinder of the Tie-
end remover.
FOR HIGHEST EFFICIENCY USE TWO TIE CUTTERS WITH ONE TIE-END REMOVER
WOOLERY MACHINE COMPANY
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN
OCV WOODINGS-VERONA TOOL WORKS
\f Pioneer Manufacturers
oi
HIGH GRADE TRACK TOOLS
and
SPRING WASHERS FOR TRACK
Since 1873
VERONA. PA. CHICAGO. ILL.
w
WOODINGS FORGE 6c TOOL COMPANY
Makers
oi
WOODINGS RAIL ANCHORS
VERONA. PA.
CHICAGO.
ELL.
Notes on
Railroad Location and Construction Procedures
from the School of Experience
By J. A. Given
A series of notes, comments, short-cut methods and "tricks of the
trade" written by a railroad location engineer of many years of
practical experience for the benefit of young engineers.
Price $0.50
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
59 East Van Buren Street
Chicago 5, III.
VEGETATION CONTROL
CHEMICALS
READE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, INC.
Jersey City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas
City — Birmingham — Stockton
SERVING RAILROADS OF AMERICA FOR
MORE THAN FORTY YEARS
W
E
E
D
A
N
D
B
R
u
S
H
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Here are the up-to-date facts on the SPENO Ballast
Cleaning and the SPENO Rail Grinding Services.
BALLAST CLEANING
SPENO Engineering and Research has de-
veloped a superior screening arrangement so
that we are now using an improved Ballast
Cleaner with greater efficiency.
RAIL GRINDING
Our Rail Grinding Service has been so well
received we are now building a THIRD Rai
Grinding Train to take care of the increased
demand.
SPENO is constantly developing means jot
better service to make sure that the Railroads
receive everything they pay for — and more
(yfoz?~/z&& tfie ^acfomds yn^~naae used; as.
FRANK SPENO RAILROAD BALLAST CLEANING CO., INC.
COT'
IIII'.IHl
Clark Sir
East Syracusf
THE TRASCO
AUTONOMIC CAR RETARDER
CLAMPS IN PLACE
ANYWHERE IN TRACK
SIMPLE — EFFECTIVE — INEXPENSIVE
TRACK SPECIALTIES CO.
GENERAL MOTORS BLDG.
NEW YORK 19, N. Y.
American Railway
Engineering Association— Bulletin
Vol. 64, No. 574 November 1962
REPORTS OF COMMITTEES
1 6 — Economics of Railway Location and Operation 111
9 — Highways 131
1 3 — Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 139
1 4 — Yards and Terminals 159
20 — Contract Forms 187
25 — Waterways and Harbors 197
6 — Buildings 213
The reports in this issue of the Bulletin will be presented to the 1963 Busi-
ness Meeting of the Association at the Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago, March
15-16. Comments and discussion with respect to any of the reports are solicited,
and should be addressed to the chairman of the committee involved, in writing
in advance of the Meeting, or from the floor during the Meeting.
Copyright 1962, by American Railway Engineering Association
BOARD OF DIRECTION
1962-1963
President
C. J. Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
Vice Presidents
L. A. Loggins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Houston 1, Tex.
T. F. Burris, Chief Engineer System, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Huntington, W. Va.
Past Presidents
E. J. Brown, Chief Engineer, Burlington Lines, Chicago 6.
R. H. Beeder, Chief Engineer System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago 4.
Directors
C. J. Henry, Chief Engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
J. M. Trissal, Vice President and Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago 5.
W. B. Throckmorton, Chief Engineer, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, Chi-
cago 5.
J. A. Bunjer, Chief Engineer, Union Pacific Railroad, Omaha 2, Nebr.
J. H. Brown, Chief Engineer, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, Springfield 2, Mo.
J. E. Eisemann, Chief Engineer, Western Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Rail-
way, Amarillo, Tex.
W. H. Huffman, Assistant Chief Engineer — Construction, Chicago & North Western
Railway, Chicago 6.
F. R. Smith, Chief Engineer, Union Railroad, East Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. L. Young, Chief Engineer, Norfolk & Western Railway, Roanoke 17, Va.
T. B. Hutcheson, Chief Engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond 13, Va.
C. E. Defendorf, Chief Engineer, New York Central System, New York 17.
John Ayer, Jr., Vice President — Operations, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad,
Denver 17, Colo.
Treasurer
A. B. Hh-lman, Retired Chief Engineer, Belt Railway of Chicago; Chicago & Western
Indiana Railroad, Chicago 5.
Executive Secretary
Neal D. Howard, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Assistant Secretary
E. G. Gehrke, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Secretary Emeritus
Walter S. Lacher, 407 East Fuller Road, Hinsdale, 111.
Published by the American Railway Engineering Association, Monthly, January, February, March,
November and December; Bi-Monthly, June- July, and September-October, at 2211 Fordem
Avenue, Madison, Wis.; Editorial and Executive Offices,
59 Van Buren Street, Chicago S, 111.
Second class postage paid at Madison, Wis.
Accepted for mailing at special rate of postage for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917,
authorized on June 29, 1918.
Subscription $10 per annum.
Report of Committee 16 — Economics of Railway
Location and Operation
C. L. Towle, Chairman
T. D. WoFFOBD, JB.,
Vice Chairman
C. W. Sooby, Secretary
A. S. Lang
J. E. Inman
L. E. Ward
I". Wascoe
W. J. Dixon
H. L. WOLDBIDGE
A. L. Sams
Q. K. Baker
J. \Y. Barriger
G. A. Bennewitz, Jr.
C. H. Blackman (E)
J. W. Bolstad
I. C. Brewer
D. E. Brunn
H. S. Bull
B. ClIAPPELL
J. L. Charles
H. B. Ciiristiaxson, Jr.
P. J. Claffey
W. P. COLITON
L. P. Diamond
G. B. Dutton, Jr.
A. J. Gellman
S. B. Gill
R. L. Gray
F. E. Gunning
R. M. Hasdwicke
G. E. Hartsoe
L. \Y. Haydon
H. C. Hutson
C. A. James
T. D. Kern
T. J. Lamphier
R. J. Lane
R. F. Lark
H. A. Lim)
J. C. Martin
Raymond McCann
M. B. Miller
R. L. Milner
T. C. Nordquist
F. N. Nye
\V. E. Quinn
J. S. Reed
F. L. Rees
F. J. Richter
V. J. ROGGEVKEN
G. RUGGE
H. F. SCHRYVER (E)
T. M. Scott
L. K. Sillcox
G. S. Sowers
J. J. Stark, Jr.
D. S. Sundel
J. E. Teal (E)
K. A. Werden
Committer
i E i Members Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, \\K. Com-
mittee 16.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
No report at this time. Committee is continuing its work on revision "i
Manual material, with the aim of completing it in 1"
2. Study of methods of analyzing the economics oi railwaj engineering proj
ects designed primarily to improve the quality oi transportation service
This new subjeel i- being progressed through assignment of its various
phases to the committee membership.
v Determination of maintenance oi way expense variation with various traffi<
volumes and effed of using such variations, in terms ol equated milt
or other derived factors, for allocation ni available funds to maintenance
of way, collaborating with Committees n and
Progress report, submitted a- information p-ice 113
in
112 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
4. Potential applications of electronic computers to railway engineering prob-
lems in research, design, inventory, etc., collaborating with Committees
11 and 30, and informally with the Railway Systems and Management
Association.
Advance reports on the use of electronic computers in operations research
on the Canadian National Railways were published in Bulletin 573, Sep-
tember-October 1962.
5. Methods of reducing time of freight cars between loading and unloading
points, collaborating with Car Service Division, AAR, Communication and
Signal Section, AAR, Operating-Transportation Division, AAR, and
American Association of Railroad Superintendents.
As a result of the recommendation by the AAR to discontinue this subject,
progress is temporarily suspended awaiting determination of the Board
Committee on Assignments as to future handling of the assignment.
6. Features of economic and engineering interest in the study, design, con-
struction and operation of new railway line projects, or major line reloca-
tions, proposed, in progress or recently completed.
Photogrammetry as Applied to Railway Location page 116
Keystone Dam Relocation— St. Louis-San Francisco Railway page 119
Abra-Skull Valley Relocation in Arizona — Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe
Railway page 122
8. Innovations in railway operations.
No report at this time. Committee is continuing preparation of report
covering various aspects of containerization.
11. Review of developments in new methods and modes of transport.
No report at this time. Committee is continuing study and data collection
for possible future reports on pipeline operation and air-flow vehicles.
The Committee on Economics of Railway Location and Operation,
C. L. Towle, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 574, November 1962.
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 113
Report on Assignment 3
Determination of Maintenance of Way Expense Variation
With Various Traffic Volumes and Effect of Using
Such Variations, In Terms of Equated Mileage
or Other Derived Factors, For Allocation
of Available Funds To Maintenance
of Way
Collaborating With Committee 11 and 22
L. E. Ward (chairman, subcommittee), Q. K. Baker, J. W. Bolstad, I. C. Brewer, D. E.
Brunn, H. S. Bull, B. Chappell, H. B. Christianson, Jr., P. J. Claffev, L. P. Dia-
mond, R. L. Grav. G. E. Hartsoe, H. A. Lind, R. L. Milner, T. C. Nordquist, W. E.
Quinn, C. W. Sooby, J. J. Stark, Jr., C. L. Towle, F. Wasco, K. A. Werden.
Your committee submits the following report of progress as information. The por-
tion of maintenance of way and structures expenses affected by use, or variable with
traffic, has been a controversial and much discussed subject. This committee was given
the task of developing a formula which would allow measurement of the maintenance
of way and structures costs affected by use. A progress report was presented as infor-
mation in the Proceedings, Vol. 58, 1957.
Any track which is maintained in usable condition incurs some costs even if there
is no traffic on the track. Then there are costs which are variable with the amount of
traffic. There are factors other than traffic which affect total maintenance of way and
structures cost variation Some of these are:
.1. GEOGRAPHICAL-PHYSICAL
1. Temperature range and variation.
2. Rainfall — amount and intensity.
3. Snowfall — duration, amount, and nature.
4. Storms — duration, intensity, and nature.
5. Areal nature — metropolitan, urban, rural.
6. Drainage — size, frequency, flow, flooding.
7. Vegetation — type, rate of growth, fire hazard.
8. Character of adjacent area — ground cover, topography.
9. Accessibility of railroad.
10. Animal and insect conditions.
B. CONSTRUCTIONAL
1. Grade — amount and frequency,
2. Curvature — amount and frequency.
3. Subgrade conditions.
4. Right-of-way nature — cut, fill, ditched.
5. Bridges and culverts — design, type, special conditions.
6. Dikes, cribbing, retaining walls
7. Ballast — type and nature
8. Track — type and nature.
9. Tunnels, elevated structures, drawbridges — type and nature
10. Warvea and docks — type and nature.
li. Communication system type and nature
114 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
12. Crossings, railroad and highway — frequency, type and traffic.
13. Station, yard and facility — occurrence and nature.
14. Adequacy and nature of previous construction and maintenance.
15. Protectional facilities against trespassing and occupation.
16. Power systems and supply — type and nature.
17. Track arrangement — number and design.
C. POLITICAL
1. Activity and requirements of regulatory bodies.
2. Activity and nature of areal government operations — sanitary requirements,
drainage requirements, sidewalks, lighting, fences, etc.
3. Activity and relations with employee organizations.
4. Restrictions on accessory income.
5. Local labor costs, fringe benefits, and living and working requirements.
D. OPERATIONAL
1. Type and nature of train operation and control.
2. Protective train-track devices — extent and nature.
3. Nature of commodities transported.
4. Nature of locomotive power and power systems.
5. Accident hazard ratio of railroad.
6. Speed of trains.
7. Distance from source of material supply.
8. Joint facilities — type, nature and agreement provisions.
9. Materials employed — type and nature.
10. Availability of local labor and methods of employment.
E. MANAGERIAL
1. Type of organization and methods of budget control.
2. Accounting policies and practices — R&E, etc.
3. Policies on industrial track construction and maintenance.
4. Policies on degree and nature of maintenance.
5. Degree and effectiveness of supervisory control.
6. Overtime policies in relation to maintenance and operations.
7. Maintenance methods and equipment policy.
8. Stores practices and policies — inventory, protection, etc.
9. Policies on retirement of track and structures.
Attempts to determine relative importance and to assign significant values to such
factors has not been entirely successful to date, as adequate cost information has not
been generally available. One large railroad has been able to utilize its cost information
to derive a formula for use in estimating variation of track expense with increased or
decreased traffic. The formula has been checked against various traffic densities over a
period of several years. This formula is:
A = F (0.5+ D04X)
Where: A = Amount of annual track maintenance cost per mile of track.
F = Constant based on labor costs, productivity, and material prices.
D = Traffic density in millions of gross tons per year.
Several observations should be made concerning application of the formula at this
time.
Economics of Railway Loca tion and Operation
115
1. The formula reflects track maintenance costs only.
2. Further investigation is desirable in areas of high-volume single-tracks and on
lines carrying an extremely high ratio of passenger traffic. Experience thus far
indicates that single-track labor costs are relatively the same as multiple-track
labor costs up to approximately 12 M.G.T., then labor costs for single track
increase over multiple-track at the rate of approximately 2.5 percent per
M.G.T.
3. Analysis thus far does not indicate that such factors as local conditions and
type of traffic have an extreme effect on track costs.
4. The 0.5 in the formula which represents the cost of keeping the track in service
for use even if no trains are operated might be reduced to 0.4 or 0J, but will
have very little effect on the usefulness of the curve produced for determining
track cost variation with various traffic volumes.
5. The constant F should be determined for use on a particular line for a given
period. In the absence of information to derive the value, $1100 could be
substituted.
Thus the total annual track maintenance cost for any portion of a railroad
would be:
C — $1100 [2Mi (0.5 + Z?!0436) + Mi (0.5 + Dt**) + etc.]
Where: C = Total track maintenance cost.
M = Miles of track of each traffic density.
D = Annual millions of gross tons of traffic.
The formula should be checked against data for railroads operating under different
physical conditions, i.e., geographical, in a continued effort to determine significant
causes for variation. Analysis must also include communication and signals and struc-
tures costs.
ft 4,000
id
I
1-
l/>
Z
0
i
o
*
<
->
4.
a.
2
r-
Z
<
a.
Ui
a
ft 3,000
ft 2,000
ft 1,000
^
>J££
o.*3S }
h
2 4 6 8 io 12
TRAFFIC DENSITY
MILLION GROSS ToViS AMKHJ/SLLY
116 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
Report on Assignment 6
Features of Economic and Engineering Interest in the
Study, Design, Construction and Operation of New
Railway Line Projects, or Major Line Reloca-
tions, in Progress or Recently Completed
H. L. Woldridge (chairman, subcommittee). J. L. Charles, F. E. Gunning, L. W. Hay-
don, H. C. Hutson, J. E. Inman, H. A. Lind, J. C. Martin, F. N. Nye, F. L. Rees,
T. M. Scott, G. S. Sowers.
Your committee presents as information three monographs pertaining to Assign-
ment 6, as follows: "Photogrammetry as Applied to Railway Location", by J. L.
Charles; "Keystone Dam Relocation — St. Louis-San Francisco Railway", by H. L.
VVoldridge; and "Abra-Skull Valley Relocation in Arizona — Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe
Railway", by George Rugge.
Photogrammetry as Applied to Railway Location
By J. L. CHARLES, P.E.
Photogrammetry and related practices are invaluable aids to reconnaissance and
location surveys, especially through remote or rugged, undeveloped regions where ground
travel is difficult. This has been proven under extremely different conditions— in North-
ern Canada and in tropical West Africa.
Railway location is a specialized field. The engineer should have natural aptitude
for this "art" plus training and experience obtained on the ground and in observing
from aircraft. He should realize that ground checking of controlling features — in co-
ordination with aerial observation and office studies of photographs and maps — is
essential.
Final results, including economy, are dependent upon thorough reconnaissance —
the basic phase of location — to keep control surveys and mapping to a minimum; but,
at the same time to ensure that all practicable possibilities are studied.
A major example of photogrammetric worth was a study undertaken during the
summer of 1959 by the Canadian National Railways. It was desired that a route be
established between the existing railways in northern British Columbia and the northern
boundary of this province, at a point from whence it could be extended on through
Yukon Territory and Alaska, to the Alaska Railway. The length of the route was
estimated to be 700 miles.
General reconnaissance studies were made from a light aircraft, and a total of
3200 route miles were flown in making the studies. Several possibilities were determined.
The reconnaissance indicated that the point of commencement should be from the
Pacific Great Eastern Railway, near Prince George, to a terminus on the boundary of
Yukon Territory, southeast of Whitehorse. The actual distance was established as 697
miles, through rugged and, in some parts, precipitous mountain terrain — virgin country,
unspoiled by man.
Thorough reconnaissance was carried out, including alternative intermediate routes,
for an aggregate of 1100 miles. One helicopter was operated, supported by one fixed-
wing craft to supply fuel and rations and to move camp. Landings were made to ex-
amine all controlling features — summits, river crossings, areas subject to land and snow
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 117
slides and swamps — to establish the most practical route. This was achieved within
three weeks.
A strip, in general \l/> miles wide, was delineated to be photographed from an
elevation of 12,000 ft above the average ground. Two small ground parties, operating
tellurometers, theodolites and barometers with support of aircraft, were then put into
the field to establish horizonal and vertical control points. As the photographs were
received progressively, the reconnaissance engineer examined them in stereo pairs and
delineated a strip, varying in width from 1000 ft to one mile, to be mapped by pho-
togrammetry, showing all physical features and contours. This was done quickly and
accurately.
Following delivery of the first strip maps, scale 1 in to 400 ft, showing contours
with a 10-ft vertical interval, the reconnaissance engineer projected the location center
line. Assistants plotted the relative profile and the engineer then set the grade line.
Revisions were made where advisable. In this manner an average of SO miles of pro-
posed location were projected per day, ready to be staked on the ground when required
in preparation for the first item of construction — clearing right-of-way.
Based on maps and profiles of the projected locations, associate teams prepared
preliminary estimates of quantities — clearing, grading, culverts, bridges, track, etc. — for
construction and costs. A general route map, with condensed profile, and sketches of
proposed major bridge sites and general structures layout were drawn to accompany a
written report.
This entire survey, including the field and office work required to project and esti-
mate costs for 697 miles of railway, was accomplished within 6 months. This is a note-
worthy accomplishment, considering that the relatively small force of 18 men were
confronted with mountainous terrain and no surface access other than by packhorse
and cance. The projected line could then be staked on the ground when required for
construction. Except for a short distance around the Grand Canyon of the Stikine
maximum rate of gradient secured was 1.00 percent compensated.
Also during 1959, Canadian engineers employed photogrammetry to establish a
location for a railway in Liberia, West Africa. This was under very different climatic
conditions; 52 miles through tropical rain forests, between Bomi Hills and Mano River,
the boundary of Sierra Leone, in connection with the development of an iron mine
Reconnaissance was carried out by observation from a light fixed-wing aircraM and
making an appreciation on the ground. Xo helicopter was available
Beyond Bomi Hills the only development was native villages with small adjacent
cleared areas for production of cassava and native rice. Communicati< n between Hum
Pillages was by walking trails. A narrow landing Strip had been hewn ( ul in the den
foresl ul trees up to 150 ft high, near the prospective iron mine at Mano River.
When on the ground, vision was restricted to a radius <>| ;i lew feet, anil from a
low flying aircraft little could lie observed other than the dense foliage at the tree top .
excepting the villages which were 5 to io miles apart -even some important river- were
difficult to spot.
The topography encountered was rough, Five main divide- with considerable rise
and fall had to be surmounted. It was decided to endeavor to secure a maximum rate
of gradient 0.80 percent, compensated, tor loaded ore trains and i.SO percent tor erapt)
ore train-
After deciding on the route in be surveyed, a -trip averaging 1 ' .■ miles wide- was
delineated on a general map \n aerial camera had io be shipped from New York by
air express, and on arrival .it Monrovia it was mounted in a small aircraft. The required
118 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
strip was successfully photographed at a scale of 1 in to 1000 ft; however, it was found
that best results were obtained by use of infra-red film because of the dense foliage.
The nucleous of a ground survey party then arrived from Canada to establish the
necessary horizontal and vertical control points required for photogrammetric plotting.
This survey consisted of a traverse along walking-trails between villages and setting con-
trol points where visible in the respective photographs. After these surveys were com-
menced, it was not necessary for the two senior engineers to remain in Liberia. The
photographic films to be processed and survey notes to establish coordinates and eleva-
tions of ground control stations were shipped to Canada. After study of photographs,
strips to be mapped were delineated; plotting was then carried out by usual photogram-
metric methods and followed by projection of center-line location and relative profile.
Although it would be impractical to expect photogrammetric contour maps of this
rugged and broken territory, with its dense forests and many local hills, to be highly
accurate, the results were found to be surprisingly good when the projected location was
staked on the ground. These topographic maps were considerably more accurate than
could have been obtained by normal ground survey methods, under the conditions
encountered, excepting with expenditure of many months of painstaking work, at much
higher cost.
This location survey in Liberia was immediately followed by construction and the
railway is now in operation.
The writer is not at liberty to disclose costs on the above projects, but, during
August and September 1960, a preliminary location survey — reconnaissance, establishing
ground controls, photogrammetry, projection, photo interpretation and estimate of costs
— was carried out through undeveloped territory in northern Canada, a distance of
approximately 64 miles; it presents a good example of costs involved:
Reconnaissance area 2200 square miles, charter of helicopter — $105 per hr . . .$ 2,236.69
Aerial photography, strip \y2 miles wide, $20 per mile for approximately 64
miles 1,257.74
Set ground controls, horizontal and vertical, party of 8 men and cook, supplies
and transportation 11,901.04
Photogrammetry— 26,178 acres at $0,299 per acre 7,821.98
Photo interpretation — specialist's fee 772.50
Projection, estimating and general directive 6,095.75
$30,085.70
Average cost per mile $ 470.00
It should be noted that this project was carried out under favorable conditions,
as there is an access road from the existing railhead to the mine property to be served,
and there are many large lakes along the route, so very little line had to be cut to
establish ground control stations.
The cost to carry out this job, 64 miles, without photogrammetry, would have
been considerably higher.
In December 1960, surveys were commenced for a proposed railway from near
Peace River, Alberta, to Hay River, North West Territories, a distance of 377 miles, and
from Hay River to Pine Point, North West Territories, 53 miles — total 430 miles. By
employing the same methods, this survey was completed within 10 months.
Although temperatures may drop to 50 deg below zero, winter is a favorable season
for survey work in northern Canada, where there are extensive areas of muskeg which
would be difficult to traverse in summer; also, the muskegs produce hordes of mosqui-
toes and other pests, which tend to retard progress during the summer season.
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 119
During winter, a line was cut to establish ground control stations by the operation
ul two bulldozers. Six men — transitman, head chainman, rear chainman, stakeman, level-
man and rodman — following the two dozers, could run 4 to 5 miles per day. This is
very efficient practice where trees are not over 18 in. in diameter and there is not too
much rugged rock formation to retard the tractors.
Current prices in Canada for aerial photography for a strip 2 miles wide — scale ol
photos 1 in equals 1200 ft, format 9 in by 9 in — range from $14 to $25 per line mile.
Three sets of contact prints and photo index arc included in this price.
Map plotting, no field work included, original pencil manuscript on drafting film,
scale 1 in to 200 ft or 400 ft showing contours on 5-ft vertical intervals and all physical
features visible on respective photos, ranges from 25 cents to 50 cents per acre, in rela-
tion to the topography and other physical features to be shown, providing all necessary
horizontal and vertical controls are supplied. For a strip 2000 ft wide, cost would vary
from $60.50 to $121.00 per mile.
Photo analysis and interpretation of land forms and soils is related to photogram-
metry. It is advisable to engage a specialist in this field to indicate classes of soils (in-
cluding gravel for ballast), possible trouble areas (where land, rock and snow slides may
occur), the depth of muskegs and swamps, and the depth of overburden above solid rock.
To date, photogrammetry has not been generally accepted to facilitate measure-
ment of grading quantities. The writer is of the opinion that time and expenditure could
be reduced by this practice, together with calculation by electronic computers, particu-
larly in measurement of solid-rock excavation in precipituous mountain regions. This
should reduce the possibility of human errors and increase the accuracy of final results.
Keystone Dam Relocation — St. Louis-San Francisco
Railway
By H. L. WOLDRIDGE
Assistant Chief Engineer, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway
Construction of the Keystone dam and reservoir on the Arkansas River about 13
miles upstream from Tulsa, Okla., involved relocating 16.64 miles of St. Louis-San Fran-
cisco Railway main track between Tulsa and Enid, Okla. The relocation was required to
gain approximately 100 ft in elevation to permit operation above the flood-control pool
elevation as determined by the United States Army Corps of Engineers. Two stations
were involved in this relocation, one (Mannford, Okla.) being relocated and tin-
other abandoned. The existing sidings were considered, as well as the present require-
ments for sidings, and it was agreed to provide one 6100-fl siding and one 361-fl In use
track for the relocated station of Mannford. The old line was single track, and was
operated under time card, and train orders. The new line i- also single track and has the
same type of operation.
The Corps of Engineers negotiated a contract with the Frisco <>n this project pro
viding for the railway to design the bridges, furnish l>a~i< design criteria, retire the orig
inal track, make necessary connections at each end. construe) communication lines and
other facilities, furnish rail and the fastenings and provide a resident engineer. The aline
ment survey was made by a consulting engineering firm under contract to the Corps ol
Engineers Final plans wen- approved by the chief engineer of the Frisco after a field
inspection was made with representatives ol the railway, the Corps of Engineers, and
120
Economics of Railway Location and Operation
TERLTON
KEY3T0ME.
DAM
51
10 12
u l 1 1 1 1
SCALE IN MILES
SKETCH MAP
SHOWING RELOCATED LINE IN
KEYSTONE RESERVOIR AREA
APRIL 1962
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 12_1
the consulting engineers. The right-of-way was acquired by the Corp.- of Engineers, the
right-of-way of the original line being exchanged for the right-of-way of the new line.
Six contracts were awarded on the project, four for grading, one for bridge con-
struction, and one for track construction. Utility lines were relocated prior to grading
operations, and contracts were prepared on individual crossings to comply with railroad
specifications.
The new track length of 15.56 miles required 5.5 million yards of excavation. Maxi-
mum curvature is 2 deg and maximum grade, 1 percent. The grade is compensated at
the rate of 0.04 percent per degree of curve angle. In comparison with the orginal track,
the maximum curvature is reduced. The new line has the same maximum grade as the
old. but has a slightly longer ruling grade.
Slopes of 2:1 were used for fills not exceeding heights of 35 ft, and slopes of 2J^:1
were used for fills in excess of 35 ft. Roadbed width of 24 ft was used with an increase
of 1 ft in width for each additional 15 ft of height.
Back slopes in excavated sections were set at Yi\\ for rock and 2:1 for all other
material. Berms 12 ft wide were used on top of rock strata with maximum of 25 ft
vertically between berms. The roadbed width was 24 ft, plus 7 ft for flat-bottom track
ditches on each side. Ditch checks were placed at intervals of 200 ft divided by the ditch
slope in percent.
To provide a stable roadbed, select material was used for the upper 2 ft of roadbed
in excavated sections, and 3 ft of material was used in the embankment sections. The
select material was specified to have a liquid limit of less than 30 and a plasticity index
not exceeding 10. Sand rock was available for use as the select material, and sheeps
foot-roller compaction eliminated any large-size rock in the material. Six inches of
unwashed fine chatt was used for sub-ballast throughout the roadbed area, providing
gradation separation between the fine select material and the more coarse ballast. The
sub-ballast was rolled by rubber-tired pneumatic rollers, thus allowing the track con-
tractor to distribute the rail fastenings and place them on the outside of the embank-
ment by truck prior to the placement of cross ties. Embankment was compacted to 90
percent maximum density per AASHO Standard Method T 99.
Core samples were taken by the Corps of Engineers to determine the geological
strata along the alinement of the new roadbed. Sections of the rcadbed known to be in
slide areas on hillside locations were excavated to provide 4 ft of uniform material below
the select material base elevation. Sections in fine sandy areas were cut to a slope of
'■- \.\ to reduce surface erosion. All slopes were mulched with emulsified asphalt and hay
and were seeded with grass mixtures most favorable ti> each type of soil. Intercepting
ditches were constructed on t< p of all hillside cuts to divert the surface drainage from
the slope. Embankment slopes were riprapped within reservoir area to a height of 5 ft
above flood-control elevation. On the downstream side <>i tin- embankments 18 in of
riprap was placed, and on the upstream side of embankments, 12 in of riprap was
placed with both sides having 12 in of gravel backing.
The crossing ol three rivers required 1676 Lin ft of bridges. These bridges were
designed for Cooper E 60 hading plus AREA diesel impact loading Concrete piers were
Constructed on rock foundation except lor abutments placed on the tills, where 14-in
H beam bearings piles were driven. The maximum height of the piers is no ft. [-beams
were used for spans of 45 and 50 ft, while 100 fl Spans < ailed for deck plate girders.
A metal-grate walkway was constructed on one side of the full length of each bridge,
with a catwalk underneath the girders to provide an inspection walkway.
122 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
Since the new line crosses an arm of the reservoir, a small boat passage was
required. The opening was constructed parabolic in section and 392.5 ft long. The
passage provides a 14-ft horizontal opening and an 18-ft vertical opening. The height
of the fill over the structure is 67 ft. Other drainage structures are reinforced concrete
boxes and corrugated metal pipes (asphalt coated and asbestos bonded) with asphalt-
paved inverts.
Specifications called for oak cross ties, air-dried one year prior to creosote treating.
The relay rail was cropped, 112-lb section in lengths of 36 ft 6 in. Twenty-two ties per
rail were used in the construction of the new track and 12 rail anchors were applied
per rail length. The rail was furnished by the railway company from several sources.
A five-year deferred construction clause was incorporated in the contract between
the Corps of Engineers and the railway. The purpose of this clause was to relieve the
railway of any cost of abnormal maintenance on the new line.
The cost of the relocation, exclusive of right-of-way, rail, and fastenings, is
indicated below:
Grading $3,943,172
Bridges 924,972
Track 939,472
Railway Company 350,000
Total $6,157,616
The relocation work was started in November 1958, and the new line was opened
to traffic in February 1961.
Abra-Skull Valley Relocation in Arizona — Atchison,
Topeka & Santa Fe Railway
By GEORGE RUGGE
Assistant Engineer, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway
On March 29, 1961, the Santa Fe commenced construction of a 39-mile, single-track
line change in its line between Ash Fork and Phoenix, Ariz. The new line begins near
Abra, which is about 28 miles south of Ash Fork. It was completed and placed in
service April 21, 1962.
The basic logic of this relocation is illustrated in Photograph No. 1, which shows a
relief model of the Abra-Skull Valley area. The new line runs through a series of valleys
in contrast to the tortuous trans-mountain route of the old line between Prescott and
Skull Valley.
Drawing No. 1 shows the general geography of the line revision, together with the
profile of the old and new lines and a comparison of the engineering statistics of the
two lines.
The maximum elevation of the new line is 5018 ft, compared with 6108 ft on the
old route. The old route had a maximum ruling grade of 3 percent in both directions
with up to 12-deg curves. Contrasted with this arduous line, the new route has a
maximum grade of 1.42 percent eastward and 1.38 percent westward. The new line has
one curve of 2 deg 30 min while all of the other curves are 2 deg or less in sharpness.
The portion of the old line between Prescott and Skull Valley was retired. Prescott is
now served by the remaining part of the original line south from Abra.
Economics of Railway Location and Operation
123
LEGEND
— — NEW LINE
RETIRED LINE
OTHER LINES
Photograph No. 1
The A.T. & 3. P. Ry. Co.
LINE REVISION
ABRA TO SKULL VALLEY, ARIZONA
History
To understand this relocation it is necessary to review some of the early history
of this part of Arizona. The City of Prescotl in the 1880's was the territorial capital
and the center of the Arizona mining industry. It was also the most important trading
center in the state. The line from Ash Fork through Prescott to Phoenix was constructed
in the early 1890's, being completed in 1895. At the time, the important locatii n problem
was to find the shortest rail line between Prescott and Phoenix. To go around the north-
ern end of the Sierra Prieta Range would have added approximately 64 miles of dis
tance by rail between Prescott and Phoenix. The meager traffic between these points
did not justify the location through the Chino, Williamson and Skull Valleys that is
now traversed In the new line.
Since the 1920's the relative importance ol Prescott as a mining center has greatlj
declined, while the importance ol Phoenix and the surrounding Salt River Valle) has
increased at an accelerated rate. In 1958 when the studies for the line change were made,
we conservatively estimated that Maricopa Count) would increase about SO percent in
population by 1965. Actually, the county almost attained this increase bj Mas
Some recent projections ol this area indicate that within 25 years it will l>e one o( the
live great cities of the Nation. The phenomenal growth ol Maricopa Counts and it-
county seat, Phoenix, i- shown by the following statistics.
124
Economics of Railway Location and Operation
CO
o
►—
CO
CO
o
S
o
_l
O
3
<*> l*S K> rf»
SK'o UJ w V"
© o* o o "•»"
o •*>
81
5~ " C
♦ = — * *> K>
Uj uj -J » Ul
oc <r cc Q 2
O OUJ *J
o o So
£ £<# * *
«/> to T '
w WW uj uj ui ui
3 3 3 =^ =^ «2 «5
\m a at a a <r oc
2*
K i—
if 3
9!
O
O §
o .
UJ
5*
o * "■
» u in
Sum
*&*
* ° 3
■e «/» o
SB*
UJ ui I ' I I I Hi
is •bt-ViToto-
or
CD
o
bfl
C
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 125
Maricopa
County Phoenix
1881 Incorporated
1891 2,000
1910 34,488 11,134
1920 89,576 29,053
1930 150,970 48,1 18
1940 186,193 65,414
1950 331,770 106,816
1957 550,000 172,000
1960 663,510 439,170
1962 720,000 480,739
Santa Fe's problem was to find a "better way" to Phoenix and Central Arizona in
order that it could make its contribution to this thriving area and its future agricultural
and industrial development.
Effect of The Federal Interstate Highway Program
The federal interstate highway program in the mountainous areas of the West is
greatly altering the future competitive position of the railroads. This is especially true
of the route from Northern Arizona to Phoenix. If we were to effectively compete in
the future, it was necessary that we shorten the distance, reduce the curvature and im-
prove the gradients of our line which serves Phoenix and Central Arizona area. The
unusual geography of the Abra-Skull Valley area has enabled us with one line change
to go a long way toward this goal.
Descriptions of the Old and New Lines
The old line was constructed by the Santa Fe, Prescott & Phoenix Railway between
1893 and 1895, and acquired by the Santa Fe in 1911. South from Abra this line crosses
the Verde River and follows a valley location southerly about 29 miles to Prescott. This
portion of the line has a maximum gradient of 1.50 percent with curves as sharp as 12
deg. It starts at an elevation of 4642 ft, descends to the Verde River crossing at 4360 ft,
and ascends to Prescott, which has an elevation of 5330 ft.
At Prescott the portion of the old line that has been abandoned turned generally
west and immediately began the ascent over the Sierra Prietas, which it crossed at an
elevation of 6108 feet at Prieta and then descended westward to an elevation of 4282
feet at Skull Valley. In order to make this difficult ascent and descent over the Sierra
Prietas, it was necessary to use 3 percent compensated grades and thirty-two 12 -deg
curves, which included six so-called horseshoe curves. A general idea of the development
necessary to cross this range is reflected by the fact that the straight-line distance be-
tween Prescott and Skull Valley is slightly more than 14 miles, while the railroad
distance was 23.5 miles. The track consisted of 90-lb rail on treated ties and volcanic
cinder ballast. On the thirty-two 12 -deg curves it was necessary to have rail braces and
gage rods. The bridges consisted of a 270-ft deck girder bridge on high steel towers ovei
the Ramsgate Gorge and numerous pile trestles and culverts. The grading \\:i« chara<
terized by deep rock cuts.
The route ot the new line is approximate!} 14 mile- west <>i Prescott, but on tin
other side of the Sierra Prieta Mountain-. It extends from an elevation ot Id!
V/% miles east of Abra, following the Chino Valley westerlj for about 6 mile-, thence
4 miles over rolling terrain into Williamson Valley, proceeding along this vallej for <
distance of about 7 miles, then into Long Canyon for about 10 miles t.. Cowboj Pass
whidi ha- an elevation ol 5018 tt. then it descends foi about l. mile- into skull Vallej
126
Economics of Railway Location and Operation
which has an elevation of 4282 ft. Between Abra and Skull Valley the new line traverses
ranch land most of the distance, but also goes through Prescott National Forest for
about 6 miles.
Design Features
This is the first major line relocation where the Santa Fe has used continuous welded
secondhand rail. The 131-lb rail was cropped and welded by the electric-flash butt
welding process. Ties for this project were obtained from the segments of main line
that were retired in conjunction with the Williams-Crookton relocation 30 miles north
of Abra.
The route chosen for the new line had generally been known for many years. Gov-
ernment topographical maps were used for a rough preliminary location. After this was
completed, the route was flown and photogrammetric maps were made on the scale
of 1 in to 400 ft, with a contour interval of 10 ft. These photogrammetric maps were
used to determine the preliminary location. The main difference between this preliminary
location and the final one was the location of the crossing of U. S. Highway 89 near
the northern end of the project.
Some of the design elements for the line revision were:
Gradients
Maximum ascending gradient — westward — 1.38%
Maximum ascending gradient — eastward — 1.42%
Grade compensation per degree of curve — 0.04%
Curves
Central
Number Degree Angle
1 0° IS' 5° 40'
6 0° 30' 36° 11'
1 0° 40' 5° 13'
26 1 ° 00' 624° 28'
4 2° 00' 240° 51'
1 2 ° 30' 100° 01 '
Grading
Embankments:
Width of roadway — 22 ft
Slopes— \y2 to 1
All embankments compacted
Excavations :
Width of roadway (rock) — 28 ft
Width of roadway (common) — 44 ft
Slope inclination (rock)— % to 1
Slope inclination (common) — 1 to 1
Track
No. of main tracks — single track
Rail — 131-lb to the yard, continuous welded, secondhand
Tie plates — 7^4" by 14" double shoulder
Spikes (line) — ¥%" by 6"
Spikes (anchor) — Studs
Rail anchors per mile — 7500
Ties — secondhand, treated
Ballast — volcanic cinders, 3360 cu yd per mile
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 127
Signals
None — train order operation
Designated Speed
Freight trains — 19 mph
Passenger trains — 59 mph
Bridges
Corrugated metal pipe, asphalt coated
Reinforced concrete boxes
Ballasted-deck timber trestles
Steel beam spans
The soils encountered on the eastern portion of the line consisted of silts and clays
with which it was necessary to use water to achieve the desired compaction. On the
western portion of the line the soils encountered consisted principally of decomposed
sranite and silt formations. It was found that the desired compaction could be obtained
without the use of water; however, water was used because it considerably reduced
the cost of compaction.
The compaction was accomplished with a sheepsfoot roller equipped with a vibra-
tory compactor which was powered by a diesel engine and had a frequency of 1400 to
1600 vibrations per minute. This type of roller gave deep penetration of the compacting
action which reduced compaction cost. A sub-ballast of select material was used on the
roadbed to prevent future penetration of the ballast materials into the roadbed.
The quantities of the project included the following items:
1 . Clearing 603 acres
2. Roadbed excavation, rock 323,400 cu yd
Roadbed excavation, common 1,389,600 cu yd
3. Borrow 1.007,400 cu yd
4. Surface ditch and channel excavation, rock 2,400 cu yd
Surface ditch and channel excavation, common 156,300 cu yd
5. Fencing 27,200 rods
6. Structural excavation, rock 2,500 cu yd
Structural excavation, common 6.100 cu yd
7. Structural backfill 4,100 cu yd
8. Reinforced concrete 6,600 cu yd
9 Reinforcing steel 580,000 lb
10. Structural steel 75 tons
11. Ballasted-deck creosoted pile trestles 18,000 lin ft
12. Corrugated metal pipe, 36 in to 72 in 7,300 lin It
13. Structural plate pipe, 72 in to 96 in (>50 lin ft
14. 13 1 -lb secondhand continuous welded rail 410.000 lin it
15. 1.31 -lb secondhand jointed rail 42.400 lin It
16. Secondhand ties 121.000
The major items of the project completed by the contractor were clearing the right-
of-way, constructing the access roads, installing right-of-way fences, constructirm l i
pile trestles, 4 underpasses, 37 reinforced concrete boxes, 113 pipe culverts and excavating
almost 3.000,000 cu yd of material. The track construction was handled b) Santa Fe
forces. The total net capital cost of the work was estimated at <<A22.000.
The construction of this new line featured three interesting operations
1. The depth compaction of embankments by low-cycle vibrator) rollei
2. Ties for the new line were selected from the retired portions <>i the Williams
Crookton line change. The ties were picked up with their tie plates in plan- and banded
together in bundles of 12 to 16. Then they were trucked 30 mile- to the new line
where a truck-mounted crane unloaded them onto a tie distributing -led which wa-
towed behind the truck tram- ami from whii h they ware positioned <»n the roadbed.
128 Ec
onomics of Railway Location and Operation
Photograph No. 2.
Economics of Railway Location and Operation 129
3. The laying of a single track with continuous welded rail on a new roadbed
posed a special problem. To accomplish this a special piece of equipment was designed
called a "straddle buggy." It was built in the Santa Fe work equipment shop at Albu-
querque. This machine is illustrated in Photograph No. 2. The straddle buggy pulled
the strings of rail from the rail train in pairs and placed them on rollers that were
placed on the ties at SO-ft intervals. Once the rail strings were completely on the rollers
and joints were made at the rear of the string, the Straddel Buggy returned to lift up
the rail so that the rollers could be removed and retrieved by the straddle buggy. In so
doing, the rail was lowered into place on the tie plates. Immediately behind this opera-
tion the rail was spiked every fifth tie and the rail train moved forward, keeping pace
with the spiker. The air compressor for the spike drivers used in this operation was
mounted on the leading end of the rail train idler car. Behind the rail train the spiking
was completed and the anchors attached, after which ballast was unloaded and the
surfacing operation completed.
Benefits
Because of this change of line the Santa Fe
1. Is saving 2 hr each direction on freight trains.
2. Is saving 1 hr 10 min each direction on passenger trains.
3. Has eliminated helper service in both directions between Prescott and Skull
Valley over the Sierra Prieta Mountain Range.
4. Has reduced the maximum grade between Abra and Skull Valley from 3 per-
cent to 1.42 percent.
5. Has within the limits of the line change reduced the curve sharpness from 12
deg to 2 deg with the exception of one curve of 2 deg 30 min.
6. Has reduced the central angle 5131 deg.
7. Has reduced the distance between Ash Fork and Phoenix 14.5 miles.
8. Is now realizing the following annual savings:
a. Savings in expenses for maintenance of way $ 70,000
b. Reduction in freight train miles over shorter line 70,000
c. Reduction in passenger train miles over shorter line 21,000
d. Elimination of helper engine mileage 51,000
e. Fuel saved by reduction in grades 57.000
f. Reduction in mileage allowances paid on foreign-line and private-
line cars 10,000
g. Depreciation on helper engines no longer needed 48,000
h. Savings in freight crews' wages due to shortening line and reducing
grades 39,000
i. Savings in passenger crews' wages due to shortening line 7,000
j. Reduction in station forces at Prescott 25,000
k. Reduction in hostlers at Prescott 18,000
1. Reduction in mechanical forces at Prescott 44,000
m. Savings in pavments to crews deadheading between Prescotl and
Phoenix ^7,000
Total Savings $497,000
Report of Committee 9 — Highways
E. R. Englert M. Johnson (E)
J. T. Hoelzer R. F. MacDonald
J. A. Jorlett H. L. Michael
C. A. Christensen E. S. Miller
F. C. Cunningham H. G. Morgan (E)
C. I. Hartsell R. E. Nottingham
R. J. Pierce
\V. S. AUTREY W. C. PlNSCHMIDT (E)
F. X. Barker P. H. Slack
G. B. Blatt K. E. Smith
B. Blum (E) J. E. Spangler
W. A. Buckmaster R. F. Spars
R. B. Carrington, Jr. C. W. Truster
A. C. Cayou J. M. Trissal
M. H. Corbyn T. M. Vanderstempel
J. T. FlTZPATRK K H. W. WALBRIGHT
R. W. Mauer, Chairman T. L. Gibson V. R. Walling (E)
R. Dejaiffe, Vice Wm. J. Hedley G. H. Way, Jr.
Chairman J. A. Holmes H. J. Wilkins
R. E. Skinner, Secretary W. H. Huffman K. E. Wyckoff
Committee
i E > Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 9.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Progress report, with recommendations submitted for adoption page 132
2. Merits and economics of prefabricated types of highway-railway grade
crossings.
Progress report, submitted as information page 132
v Merits of various types of highway-railway grade crossing protection, col-
laborating with Communication and Signal Section, AAR.
Progress report, submitted as information page 133
I Factors to be considered for determining the advantages "i bighwaj over-
passes as opposed to underpasses.
Final report, submitted ;is information page 134
5. Recommended method of developing annual maintenance nisi ,,i the various
types of highway-railway grade crossing protection, collaborating with
Communication and Signal Section, AAR.
Brief progress report, submitted a- information pagi
6. Methods of providing additional advance warning t<> bighwaj traffic ap
preaching a highway railway grade crossing,
Brief progress report, submitted as information pagi
131
132 Highways
7. Conduct study with the view toward developing alternate types of auto-
matic crossing protection, collaborating with Communication and Signal
Section, AAR.
Progress report, submitted as information page 136
The Committee on Highways,
R. W. Mauer, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 574, November 1962.
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
E. R. Englert (chairman, subcommittee), F. N. Barker, A. C. Cayou, C. A. Christensen,
F. C. Cunningham, Wm. J. Hedley, J. T. Hoelzer, J. A. Jorlett, E. S. Miller, R. E.
Nottingham, W. C. Pinschmidt, J. E. Spangler, T. M. Vanderstempel, H. J. Wilkins,
K. E. Wyckoff.
The Communication and Signal Section, AAR, has eliminated from its Manual
drawings showing the vertical STOP sign on flashing-light and wig-wag types of crossing
signals. This was done because these signs are no longer being used for new installa-
tions. Your committee believes that these signs should remain in the AREA Manual to
protect those railroads which still have them. However, since they are no longer in the
Signal Manual, the notes referring to the Signal drawings on the AREA plans should
be deleted. The following changes are therefore recommended:
Page 9-3-18
Fig. 15 — Highway Crossing Signal, Flashing-Light Type with Stop Sign
Delete note reading "Details shown on Signal Drawing 1654."
Page 9-3-20
Fig. 17 — Highway Crossing Signal, Wig- Wag Type with Stop Sign
Delete note reading "Details shown on Signal Drawing 1652."
Report on Assignment 2
Merits and Economics of Prefabricated Types
of Highway-Railway Grade Crossings
J. T. Hoelzer (chairman, subcommittee), W. S. Autrey, F. N. Barker, W. A. Buckmaster,
C. A. Christensen, M. H. Corbvn, T. L. Gibson, W. H. Huffman, R. E. MacDonald,
R. E. Nottingham, R. J. Pierce, P. H. Slack, K. E. Smith, C. VV. Traister, H. VV.
Walbright, G. H. Way, Jr., H. J. Wilkins.
Prefabricated highway-railway grade crossings are of the following types:
1. Timber panel crossings
2. Concrete slab crossings
3. Metal panel crossings
4. Rubber panel crossings
Bituminous-paved crossings with a timber on each side of the rails are extensively
used. They are not considered prefabricated, except that the timbers are undercut on
Highways 133
the bottom of one edge to fit over the tops of the tie plates and track spikes, and usually
are prebored for lag or drive spikes.
A previous report on this assignment (Proceedings, Vol. 61, 1960, page 270) indi-
cated that at that time installation costs of several types of prefabricated crossing
varied from $21.50 to SS1.00 per lineal track foot, annual maintenance costs varying
from $2.47 and $5.05 per lineal foot. It also indicated that the cost of bituminous cross-
ings was about $12.00 per lineal foot and annual maintenance cost about $3.50 per lineal
foot. Obviously, annual maintenance costs and life of crossings are dependent upon
varying factors such as the amount and speed of railroad and highway traffic, weather,
drainage, and track subgrade conditions. From studies to date, it appears that full-depth
creosoted timber panel crossings may, in many circumstances, result in the least annual
expense.
Rubber panel crossings, which are quite expensive per lineal foot installed, have
been in use since the first one was installed in 1954 on Erie-Lackawanna Railroad near
Akron. Ohio. Recent information shows that i2 rubber panel crossings have been in-
stalled by railroads in the United States, and 75 have been installed throughout 20
states by other industries on interplant and industrial tracks.
This committee is collecting information on the installation and annual maintenance
costs of various types of crossings. Further data on actual maintenance costs and life
of highway crossings available from any railroad will be very helpful.
This is a progress report submitted as information. Your committee recommends
that the assignment be continued.
Report on Assignment 3
Merits of Various Types of Highway-Railway Grade
Crossing Protection
Collaborating with Communication and Signal Section, AAR
J. A. Jorlett (chairman, subcommittee). W. S. Autrey, G. B. Blatt, A. C. Cavou, M. H.
Corbvn, R. Dejaiffe, E. R. Englert, Wm. J. Hedlcv, J. A. Holmes, R. E. Mac-
Donald. H. L. Michael, R. F. Spars, J. M. Trissal, 6. H. Way, Jr.. H. J. Wilkins,
K. E. Wyckoff.
Last year your committee reported that the Armour Research Foundation of tin
[Qiois Institute of Technology, with funds provided through the Research Department
of the Association of American Railroads, had produced the final report on an "Analysis
of Railroad Crossings and Accident Data for the State of Ohio During the 10 Ye.n
Period, 1949 through 1958." Recognizing the weaknesses in the report which would
require careful evaluation of all factors before this method oi determining risk t :i » i < • i -
could be used, your committee did not release the report.
Since that time, considerable interest in the report ha- developed and numerous
requests have been received for topic-. Because <>t this interest in the report and the
considerable sum of money expended tor it-, preparation, your committee felt that it
should be released to all interested parties. To guard against misuse of the report and
acceptance of the formulas as infallible, your committee ha- prepared a foreword to bi
bound in the report which point- out the danger of using the formula^, without careful
consideration. With the following foreword, your committee recommends the release
of the report.
134 Highways
FOREWORD
This analysis covers 6011 accidents that occurred at 7416 highway crossings of 12
railroads in the State of Ohio during the 10-year period 1949 through 1958. While it
includes more data than had been available for previous similar studies, it must be un-
derstood that information on several important items was missing from the accident
reports. Deficiencies in the available data include the following:
(1) Highway and rail traffic was not recorded by hour of day or night. As a
result, it was not possible to relate properly rail-highway traffic conflicts, or
exposure to accident, in the analysis.
(2) The accident reports do not cover such important elements as season of the
year, weather conditions, pavement surface condition and whether accidents
occurred in daylight or darkness.
(3) Data were not available on the speed of highway traffic — an important
characteristic.
(4) Apparent mental and physical condition of drivers of highway vehicles in-
volved in accidents was not recorded. This omission is characteristic of
practically all accident reports because of the obvious difficulty or impos-
sibility of determining driver condition.
Because of these and other deficiencies in the data available for study, it is empha-
sized that while the relationships and conclusions developed by the study are acceptable
as representative of the Ohio data, they cannot be assumed to be completely reliable
when applied to other railway-highway grade crossings. If used as a guide to judgment,
they may be of some assistance in evaluating risks at other crossings.
This is a progress report submitted as information. Your committee recommends
that the assignment be continued.
Report on Assignment 4
Factors to Be Considered for Determining the
Advantages of Highway Overpasses as
Opposed to Underpasses
C. A. Christensen (chairman, subcommittee), W. S. Autrev, F. N. Barker, A. C. Cavou,
M. H. Corbyn, E. R. Englert, T. L. Gibson, Wm. J.Hedlev, J. A. Holmes, W". H.
Huffman, J. A. Jorlett, R. E. MacDonald, E. S. Miller, R. f. Pierce, J. E. Spangler,
J. M. Trissal, G. H. Way, Jr., K. E. Wyckoff.
Generally, the selection of the type of grade separation structure will be governed
by physical conditions at the site of the crossing. If the normal grade line of a highway
were some distance above that of the railroad, the highway would go over the track.
Conversely, if the highway grade were much lower, the highway would be carried under
the track by construction of a subway. In the case of the grade lines being the same,
or nearly so, a choice of type of construction is possible, and the advantages of overpass
construction should be considered.
Highway overpasses often can be built at less cost than underpasses. Loads carried
by highway vehicles are lighter than those carried on the railroad, thus lighter con-
struction is possible. Simpler construction procedures resulting in savings of cost are
possible with overpasses, as they can be built with little or no interference with railroad
traffic and involve no expensive temporary construction — falsework bridges to carry
railroad traffic or temporary detour tracks.
Highways 135
An overpass offers a better opportunity for stage construction of the highway and
structure with minimum impairment of the original facility. This is true if the original
structure is widened or if an additional structure and roadway is constructed for a
divided highway. Usually the railroad traffic is known and can be predicted with rea-
sonable accuracy. If additional tracks are to be required within a reasonable time, they
can be provided for in the original overpass design, often without increasing the cost.
Highway traffic is constantly increasing and required capacity can be provided as needed
with stage construction without loss of the initial facility. If an underpass requires
widening under these circumstances, extensive rebuilding and loss of a great part of the
original facility is seldom avoidable.
Troublesome drainage problems may be avoided by construction of an overpass.
In some locations the construction of an underpass would involve installation of expen-
sive drainage systems with pumping plants, costly to maintain and operate and subject
to failure during heavy storms. This alone may be sufficient reason to choose an
overpass.
An overpass provides a wide overlook for the vehicle driver from the structure and
its approaches, and the driver has a minimum feeling of restriction or confinement. It
also usually eliminates the problem of restricted overhead clearance and the attendant
hazard of high vehicular loads striking the bridge structure.
Lateral clearance can readily be provided for the railroads' off-track maintenance
equipment when an overpass is built, but provision for such equipment at highway
underpasses is more difficult. Also, the expense of track maintenance is increased by an
underpass structure.
An overpass does not require lighting during the daytime, and lighting at night is
optional or governed by policies affecting the highway as a whole.
Overpasses are not subject to the problems involved in keeping a subway clean and
light, particularly where pedestrian traffic is involved.
There are. of course, seme disadvantages involved in overpass construction. In yard
areas, for instance, overpass structures may interfere with free use of the area for track
rearrangement. Piers of an overpass may obstruct the view of switching crews, thus
hampering their operation. Vertical and lateral clearances, although adequate for opera-
tion of trains, may seriously curtail the use of work equipment such as cranes and pile-
drivers. This is especially serious in shop areas and in the vicinity of bridges.
This is a final report submitted as information. Your committee recommends that
the subject be discontinued.
Report on Assignment 5
Recommended Method of Developing Annual Main-
tenance Cost of the Various Types of Highway-
Railway Grade Crossing Protection
Collaborating with Communication and Signal Section AAK
P. C. Cunningham (chairman, subcommittee), \\ S Vutrey, <; B. Blatt, \\ \ Buck
master, V C. Cayou, M H. Corbyn, T, I- Gibson, C I HartseU, I V Holmes,
J. A. JorUtt. E. S. Mill.r. R I Pierce, P. U Slack, k K Smith, I E. Spangler,
R. F. Spar.-. J. M Trissal, H. \V. Wall, right.
Your committee is continuing collaboration with Committee 8 ol the Communica-
tion and Signal Section, \\k which i- progressing a concurrent stud} <>i this subject,
including a one-year ( J u I > 1961 to July 1962) actual cosl record stud) on represents
136 Highways
tive railroads. Signal Committee 8 is presently assembling cost figures supplied by these
railroads and expects to prepare a report in the near future.
In addition, your committee is communicating with the several AAR State Grade
Crossing Committees concerning any data which they have been assembling in con-
nection with this subject.
An evaluation of the results of these studies, together with the data the committee
now has, will form the basis of future recommendations.
This is a progress report submitted as information. Your committee recommends
that the assignment be continued.
Report on Assignment 6
Methods of Providing Additional Warning to Highway
Traffic Approaching a Highway-Railway
Grade Crossing
T. M. Vanderstempel (chairman, subcommittee), W. S. Autrey, G. B. Blatt, W. A. Buck-
master, F. C. Cunningham, T. L. Gibson, C. I. Hartsell, J. A. Holmes, W. H. Huff-
man, H. L. Michael, E. S. Miller, R. J. Pierce, W. C. Pinschmidt, R. E. Skinner,
K. E. Smith, J. E. Spangler, R. F. Spars, K. E. Wyckoff.
Your committee is conducting a survey on the use of additional warnings at high-
way-railway grade crossings by the various state highway departments. The purpose
of the survey is to determine what standards have been adopted and if the use of
additional warnings has resulted in any appreciable decrease in the number of accidents.
A further survey is contemplated on the use and types of advance warning signs
at highway-railway grade crossings. A study of the information received will form the
basis of future Committee 9 recommendations.
This is a progress report submitted as information. Your committee recommends
that the assignment be continued.
Report on Assignment 7
Conduct Study with the View Toward Developing
Alternate Types of Automatic Crossing
Protection
Collaborating with Communication and Signal Section, AAR
C. I. Hartsell (chairman, subcommittee), G. B. Blatt, VV. A. Buckmaster, F. C. Cunning-
ham, J. T. Hoelzer, R. F. MacDonald, H. L. Michael, R. E. Nottingham, R. E.
Skinner, P. H. Slack, K. E. Smith, R. F. Spars, C. W. Traister, J. M. Trissal, T. M.
Vanderstempel, H. W. Walbright, G. H. Way, Jr.
Your committee has found that the following types of alternate protection are
presently in use at some highway-railway grade crossings, constructed and maintained
as indicated:
1. By Public Authorities
a. Side-of-road reflectorized highway "STOP" signs without lights.
b. Side-of-road reflectorized highway "STOP" signs with one or two continuously
flashing red or amber lights either above and below or on each side of sign.
Highways 137
c. Side-ol-road reflectorized 36- by 36-in sign reading "Railroad Crossing", with or
without continuously flashing amber or red lights.
d. Regular highway traffic signals using red, amber, and green lights activated by
train crews or crossing watchmen— usually at switching leads or industrial track
crossings.
e. Continuously flashing overhead lights with or without railroad crossing sign.
f. Special 30- by 48-in red reflectorized background sign with white reflectorized
letters "RR" and "X", with continuously flashing amber lights above and below sign
placed in close proximity to standard railroad crossing sign.
2. By Railways at Joint Railway and Public Authority Expense
a. Track-circuited automatic flashlights with unc single center circuit. This is
usually on lightly used branch-line or industrial-lead track. The railroad movements stop
short of the crossing on the single circuit and then proceed, the railroad stop being pre-
determined so that the flashlights operate 20 to 30 sec before the engine or cars move
into the crossing area. Sometimes this protection is implemented by railroad operating
rules.
b. A transistorized electronic device superimposing a low frequency a-c circuit on
the rails in the track or tracks from which the position of the train and its speed are
obtained by the train forming a moving short on the track. Trains which may have
activated the crossing protection and stopped short of the crossing, or reversed their
movement, immediately deactivate the crossing protection. There are no insulated joints
in the track.
c. Signs on separate posts at double-track crossings with flashing-light signals read-
ing "Look for Train on Second Track", which are illuminated when two trains are in
track circuit simultaneously approaching crossing. At certain locations the installation
of these signs may eliminate the necessity for gates.
3. Suggested Improvements Received to Date for Greater Safety
1. Paint flashlight masts bright orange for better visibility.
2. Change center flasher circuits to show a constant red when center section through
crossings is occupied.
This is a progress report, submitted as information. Your committee recommends
that the assignment be continued.
Report of Committee 13 — Water, Oil and
Sanitation Services
E. C. Harris, Chairman
T. A. Tennyson, Jr.,
Vice Chairman
H. E. Graham, Secretary
J. J. DWYER
C. F. MuELDER
VV. F. Arksey
F. O. Klemstine
W. E. Billingsley
V. C. Barth
T. L. Hendrix
W. C. Harsh
R. C. Arcii.vmri All I
R. A. BARDWELL
R. C. Bardwell (E)
J. M. Bates
I. C. Brown
T. W. Brown
P. J. Calza
C. E. DeGeer
D. E. Drake
A. E. Dulik
R. S. Glynn
T. I. Gray
H. M. Hoff.meister
A. VV. Johnson
H. L. McMui.ux (E)
G. F. Metzdork
P. M. Miller
E. T. Myers
Henry Parrish, Jr.
A. B. Pierce (E)
R. D. Powrie
J. C. Roberts
J. P. Rodger
H. E. Silcox (E)
E. R. Sciilaf
R. M. Stimmel*
D. C. Teal
H. W. Van Hovenberg (E)
C. B. VOITELLE
E. M. Walters
J. E. Wiggins
Committee
< E i Member Emeritus.
* Died July 8, 1962.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 13.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Progress report, with recommendations submitted for adoption page 141
2. Prevention of corrosion in hot and cold water systems.
Report entitled Corrosion Prevention in Potable Hot Water Systems sub-
mitted for publication in the Manual at the end of Part 4 — Water Treat-
ment page 1 43
3. Design, construction and operation of coach servicing facilities to comply
with regulations of the U. S. Public Health Service.
Progress report, submitted as information, on the latest amendments to
U. S. Public Health Service Drinking Water Standards and Dining Car
Sanitary Regulations page 147
4. Cathodic protection of pipe lines and steel storage tanks, collaborating
with Committee 18.
Progress report, submitted as information, outlining practical examples in
application of cathodic protection to underground storage tanks page 148
6. Railway waste disposal.
Progress report, submitted as information, outlining the plan of work to l><-
followed in the development of a report for the ensuing year page 152
139
140 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
7. Practical methods for removing iron and manganese from small water
supplies.
Final report, submitted as information, covering the methods of removing
iron and manganese from water outlined in technical publications page 152
8. Methods of controlling spillage of fuel oil at diesel fueling and unloading
stations.
Progress report, submitted as information, stating procedure to be followed
in developing new information on automatic shut-off fueling devices for a
report in 1963 page 156
9. Disinfectants, deodorants, fumigants, and cleaning materials.
Progress is being made in the study of this complex subject for the pur-
pose of producing a report of recommended practices for 1963. There is no
report for 1962.
10. Railroad aspects of radioactive substances.
Final report, submitted as information, outlining specific methods of
handling radioactive substances page 157
The Committee on Water, Oil and Sanitation Services,
E. C. Harris, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 5 74, November 1962.
MEMOIR
^Robert Jlartcm Stimmel
Robert Marion Stimmel, engineer of test and water service, New York, Chicago &
St. Louis Railroad, died after a short illness at St. Francis of Oak Ridge Hospital, Green
Springs, Ohio, July 8, 1962.
Mr. Stimmel was born on September 30, 1896, at Garnett, Kans., and received his
higher education at the University of Kansas, graduating with the degree of Bachelor
of Arts.
He began his railroad career in 1924 as an assistant chemist in Water Supply De-
partment of the Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, at Huntington, W. Va., and by January 1,
1930, had been promoted to the position of chief chemist. Mr. Stimmel held this position
until August 1, 1933, when he transferred to the New York, Chicago & St. Louis,
where he served as chief chemist, superintendent of water service, and engineer of test
and water service until he retired on June 12, 1962.
He is survived by two daughters, Mrs. Nancy Staley and Mrs. Dorothy Davis, and
a son, Robert M. Stimmel, Jr.
Mr. Stimmel joined the American Railway Engineering Association in 1929 and
became a member of Committee 13 that same year. He was very active in committee
work and served as chairman of many subcommittees during the 33 years he had been
a member. He will be missed and remembered by his associates and friends for his
willingness to accept an assignment and his friendliness.
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 141
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
T. A. Tennvson (chairman, subcommittee). \V. F. Arksey, D. E. Drake, T. L. Hendrix.
A. W. Johnson, F. O. Klemstine, D. C. Teal, C. B. Voitelle.
Your committee has continued its review of the Manual and at this time submits
the following recommendations for adoption:
Page 13-8-1
WATER FOR DRINKING PURPOSES
Reapprove with the following revisions:
To bring the text in line with current practice, revise Par. 1 to read as follows:
1. Interstate Quarantine Regulations, latest revision, which includes revised Drink-
ing Water Standards, issued by the Department of Health, Education and Welfare,
provide that the Surgeon General of the United States Public Health Service shall
approve the use of water furnished by railways on cars in interstate traffic if, (1) the
water supply at the watering point meets prescribed standards of sanitary quality as
set forth in the Drinking Water Standards, and if (2) methods of and facilities for
delivery of such water to the conveyance and the sanitary conditions surrounding such
delivery prevent the introduction, transmission or spread of communicable diseases. The
Surgeon General may base his approval or disapproval of a watering point upon results
of investigations made by representatives of state departments of health or of the health
authorities of contiguous foreign nations. Further, if a watering point has not been
approved, the Surgeon General may permit the temporary use under such conditions as,
in his judgment, are necessary to prevent the introduction, transmission or spread of
communicable diseases. Upon request by the Surgeon General, operators of conveyance
shall provide information as to watering points used by them.
Add new Pars. 4 and 5 to read as follows:
4. The latest edition of United States Public Health Service handbook entitled
"Railroad Servicing Areas" sets up standards of sanitary practice intended for use as
a guide by (1) persons who design and operate railroad servicing equipment, and
health department representatives and others who make periodic investigations or inspec-
tions of facilities and operations in servicing areas. The standards arc established with
a view to conforming to the intent of the interstate Quarantine Regulations. This is one
of a set of three handbooks on railroad sanitation standards prepared by the United
States Public Health Service.
5. Water supplies and procedures which are in compliance with interstate Quaran
tine Regulations will also satisfy requirements of the various state health departments
for water to be used on passenger cars in intrastate traffic a- well a- drinking water
for locomotives and cabooses.
Add "References" as follows:
REFERENi ES
Railroad Servicing Area-, Public Health Service Publication No. <>(>. available from
Supt. of Document-. V S. Government Printing Office, Washington -,:;. D. ('. price
20 cent-
Dining Cars in Operation. Public Health Service Publication No 83, available from
Supt. of Document-, i - Government Printing Office, Washington . ;. I> C, pria
15 cents.
142 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
Railroad Passenger Car Construction, Public Health Service Publication No. 95, avail-
able from Supt. of Documents, U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington 25,
D. C, price 15 cents.
Pages 13-8-2 to 13-8-21, incl.
RAILWAY SEWAGE DISPOSAL FACILITIES
Reapprove with the following revisions:
Pages 13-8-2 and 13-8-3: Delete Art. 3, Sec. B, Use of Imhoff Tank, and Art. 4,
Sec. B, Disposal by Other Means, substituting therefor the following new Art. 3.
3. Disposal by Other Means
For larger sewage flows, the use of Imhoff tanks, extended aeration systems, pack-
age sewage treatment plants or sewage lagoons may be employed.
Pages 13-8-5 to 13-8-7, incl.: Delete the entire text under Sec. E. Design of Septic
Tanks, including Fig. 2 on page 13-8-6, substituting therefor the following new text:
E. DESIGN OF SEPTIC TANKS
Septic tank systems should be designed in accordance with local regulations, which
generally are derived from recommendations of the U. S. Department of Health, Edu-
cation and Welfare.
Pages 13-8-7 to 13-8-9, incl.: Delete in their entirety Sec. F. Multi-Compartment
Septic Tanks, and Sec. G. Septic Tanks with Automatic Siphons, including Fig. 3 on
page 13-8-8.
Page 13-8-9, Sec. H — Maintenance of Septic Tanks: Change the letter designation
of this Section from H to F.
Pages 13-8-9 to 13-8-19, incl.: Delete in their entirety the following sections: Sec.
I — Distribution Boxes, Sec. J — Absorption Fields, Sec. K — Subsurface Sand Fillers, Sec.
L — Surface Sand Fillers, and M — Other Treatment of Effluent, including Figs. 4 to
10, incl.
Page 13-8-19, Sec. N — Imhoff Tanks: Change letter designation of this Section
from N to G.
Page 13-8-20, Fig. 11: Change figure number from 11 to 2.
Add new Sec. H as follows:
H. PACKAGE-TYPE SEWAGE DISPOSAL SYSTEMS
Investigation of commercially available package-type sewage disposal systems is
recommended for new installations. These are adaptable to a wide variety of situations.
Add new Sec. I as follows:
I. LAGOONS
Under favorable conditions lagoons, sometimes known as oxidation ponds, can be
successfully used for treatment of both industrial and sanitary wastes. The basic criteria
as to whether lagoon treatment can be used are: (1) whether lagooning will provide
satisfactory treatment for the type of waste involved, and (2) whether sufficient open
space with suitable terrain is, or can be made available.
It is obvious that stabilization lagoons must be located some distance away from
existing or future residential or human work areas. To be economically feasible, use of
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 143
this method depends on cheap land, convenient open spaces, and a gently sloping ter-
rain so that length and depth of sewers will not become excessive. In this connection
the cost of land, if necessary to purchase it, or its value for industrial purposes, together
with the cost of installing sewer lines to it and in some cases sewage pumps, could
amount to more than the cost of the more conventional disposal facilities.
The lagoon method of sewage treatment depends on action by various forms of
organic life which require oxygen and sunlight to thrive. It has been approved for use
by small municipalities and residential subdivisions. In general, such lagoons should
be shallow enough to permit penetration by sunlight, and they should be kept free of
vegetation. Fencing, as well as posting of warning signs, is required.
Advice concerning specifications for sewage disposal lagoons is readily obtainable
from local or state public health authorities.
REFERENCES
Manual of Septic Tank Practice, Public Health Service Publication No. 526, available
from Supt. of Documents, U. S. Government Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C,
price 35 cents.
Report on Assignment 2
Corrosion Prevention in Hot and Cold Water Systems
J. J. Dwyer (chairman, subcommittee), R. C. Archambeault, M. V. Biar, W. E. Bil-
lingsley, T. W. Brown, P. J. Calza, C. E. DeGeer, A. E. Dulik, G. F. Metzdorf,
J. P. Rodger, A. G. Tompkins.
Your committee submits the following final report on Assignment 2 with the recom-
mendation that it be adopted and published in the Manual at the end of Part 4 — Water
Treatment.
CORROSION PREVENTION IN POTABLE HOT-WATER SYSTEMS
Corrosion damage in potable water systems in the past generally has been tol-
erated, replacements in kind being routine following failures of piping and tanks. This
attitude was accepted because: (1) most protective chemicals imparted an undesirable
taste to the water, (2) special equipment would be required to applj the treatment,
and (3) chemical control would be required to insure thai prescribed limits <>l impuri-
ties would not be exceeded. In recent years, due to rising costs for both materials and
labor, a new evaluation of the expense of such failures has become necessary.
Copper water tube has now practically replaced galvanized iron in the potable
water system field, particularly in the smaller pipe sizes. Copper costs more than iron
initially, hut lasts much longer under suitable conditions; ii is simpler t<> install, reducing
labor costs; and it does nol plug with deposits near!) as fast as iron pipe. Under these
conditions copper becomes cheaper, in the long run, than galvanized pipe.
There are certain conditions, however, under which copper tube maj fail faster than
iron pipe. Corrosion of copper water tube is accelerated by; (1) increased dissolved
oxygen, (2) increased carbon dioxide, (3) increased temperature, (4) increased velocity,
and (5) soft water. Zeolite-softened or zero-hardness water has been found t<> have ■<
more rapid destructive effect <>n new copper tube than old tubing previous]] used for
Bull. 574
144 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
hard water; a reason is that such old tube is protected by a film of adherent deposit,1
while the new tube has no such interior coating. Heat exchanger failures have likewise
been aggravated by: (1) aggressive water, (2) high temperatures, and (3) high
velocities.
Another cause of failures in potable hot water systems by corrosion is the galvanic
couple. Whenever two dissimilar metals, such as copper water tube and a galvanized
water tank are connected and thereby placed in electrical contact with each other, a
current flows. The water flowing in or out of the tank is the electrolyte. The current
produced tends to cause one of the metals to go into solution by corrosion. The rate
of corrosion is dependent upon several factors, such as: (1) the particular metals present,
(2) the temperature, (3) the substances dissolved in the water, and (4) its conductivity.
A solution to this problem would be to use copper tube with a copper or monel tank,
and galvanized pipe with a galvanized tank.
In spite of the disadvantages mentioned, it sometimes becomes necessary to use
components of two or more different metals or alloys in a potable hot water system.
Corrosion problems so introduced can be diminished by the use of rubber or plastic
couplings, so-called dielectric unions, bushings, nipples, or gaskets placed between the
two different metals so as to separate them electrically. This will tend to reduce greatly
the rate of corrosion at critical points at which dissimilar metals are close together in
the system. It should be noted, however, that a dielectric union or other insulator will
not stop or greatly mitigate corrosion if the water has a substantial amount of copper
dissolved in it. The copper ions are believed to plate out as metallic copper on galvan-
ized surfaces, forming miniature galvanic cells which produce a corrosive action. Water
containing ammonia or carbon dioxide is very prone to cause any copper in the system
to go into solution and form copper ions.
A method of preventing corrosion in potable hot water tanks is the utilization of
magnesium anodes. The magnesium anode must be properly sized and carefully spaced
to obtain a reasonably uniform current density throughout the tank interior surface.
It is usually connected to the shell through a high resistance which limits the current
flow, to prevent the anode from being consumed more rapidly than necessary. It is a
valuable accessory in a vitreous-enameled or "glass-lined" steel tank because of the
small amount of actual bare metal exposed in such a tank. Such anodes are normally
effective for use in water supplies with mineral content from 120 ppm upwards. They
do not provide adequate protection in very pure soft water, due to the low conductivity,
in which case driven or impressed current anodes are required. Ordinary galvanized
steel tanks may be protected by an anode plus a resistor to control current flow, but
as the size of the tank is increased, the sacrificial anode method becomes uneconomical,
and impressed current anodes should be used. This recommendation applies particularly
in commercial or industrial-size hot-water tanks. With the impressed current installa-
tion, using a mild iron anode suspended in the center and equidistant from the tank
walls, an average current density of 6.65 milli-amp/sq ft has been found to furnish
adequate protection against corrosion with most water supplies.2
Dissolved corrosive gases have been mentioned as a cause of hot-water system cor-
rosion. A means of diminishing the dissolved gas content of water is the mechanical
degasifier or deaerator. Deaeration is accomplished by dividing the water into small par-
ticles or thin films, thus facilitating gas removal. A vacuum should be maintained on
1 How Temperature, Velocity of Potable Water Affect Corrosion of Copper and Its Alloys", by
Malvern F. Obrecht, PhD, and Laurence L. Quill, PhD, Michigan State University.
3 "Corrosion Problems In Hot Water Tanks", by J. Van Bladeren, corrosion engineer, Northwest
Natural Gas Company, Portland, Ore.
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 145
the deaerator corresponding to the boiling pressure for the water temperature involved.
If necessary to reach extremely low gas concentrations, multi-stage units can be em-
ployed. Deaeration can lower incoming concentrations of oxygen from the range 6-12
ppm to 1-2 ppm, and can lower carbon dioxide from around 40 ppm to 5-7 ppm, or
reductions of up to 80 percent for these two gases. Corrosion losses in nondeaerated
soft water at high temperatures (above 170 deg F) and high velocities (above 8 ft per
sec) may be up to 50 percent higher than in deaerated water. Deaerators for potable
hot-water supply systems are designed mainly for use in large buildings such as hospi-
tals and hotels. Where deaerators might not be practical, the application of simple air-
release valves to water heaters, hot-water tanks, and other high points in the hot-water
system where gases collect, may reduce the corrosive gas content of the water.
The influence of pressure must not be overlooked. The use of a pneumatic tank to
increase pressure can increase the oxygen content of the water 300 percent, and likewise,
its corrosive effect.
Uniform temperature control in hot-water systems also is very important. Galva-
nizing is not recommended for hot-water lines at temperatures above 140 deg F. Above
this temperature zinc may reverse its potential and begin to accelerate the corrosion of
iron at any holidays which exist." At lower temperatures zinc is sacrificial and provides
cathodic protection for the iron or steel pipe. Copper tube is excellent for temperatures
not exceeding 140 deg F. For higher temperature water, Admiralty tube (approximate
composition 71 percent copper, 1 percent tin, 28 percent zinc, 0.06 percent arsenic) at a
cost of about 5 percent over copper, may be used. For more severe service, with both
high temperatures and high velocities, 90/10 cupro-nickel alloy, at about 65 percent over
cost of copper, is recommended.1
Temperatures above 140 deg F present the following disadvantages: (1) corrosive-
ness increases rapidly (doubles approximately each 17 deg rise, up to about 180 deg),
(2) reversal of potential may occur in galvanized pipe, and accelerated attack may take
place at locations where galvanizing has been lost, (3) dezincification of brass pipe is
accelerated, (4) pinhole pitting in copper tube may be expected, and (5) expansion and
contraction strains are magnified, and contribute to leaks at screwed fittings. Where
temperatures exceeding 140 deg F are required for a specific use, such as 180-190 deg
for dishwashing, a booster heater close to the point of use must be provided, and piping
from this booster to the point of use must be at least Admiralty tube, and preferably
should be 90/10 cupro-nickel alloy.
One of the suggested chemical methods of protecting potable hot-water systems is
the Saturation Index (carbonate balance) system of treatment, which aims at main-
taining a protective layer of calcium carbonate on the inside surface of the pipe or
container. The Saturation Index is an indication of the tendencj for a calcium car-
bonate scale to be deposited. Two possible disadvantages to this method are: (1) that
it requires constant attention and analyses to control the amount of calcium carbonate
and the pH, and (2) a carbonate balance based on cold water will deposil calcium car-
bonate scale in hot water; if the treatment is sel up on hot water, it will not be Satis
factory on cold water. This treatment system cannot be used on waters softened to rero
hardness.*
Two straight chemical treatments an- used without injuring tin water for domestic
use. One of these is sodium silicate, which has been used since 1920 to protect iron,
lead, and brass water pipe. The dosage for the initial month is general!} 12 to 16 ppm
s T. F. Wilkes, 37S Merchandise Mart Plaza, Chicagi
*See Treatment of Water for Cooling Purposes Other than Engines, Part i. Chapter IJ
146 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
as silica, after which it may be reduced to 8 ppm, or even lower. This simple treatment
may be us2d to retard solution of copper by regulating the silicate to give the water a
pH of about eight. The common method of application is the by-pass feeder, but
proportioning pumps could be used as well.
In general, three types of silicates are used for the inhibition of corrosion in
potable waters. They have Na20/Si0,. percentage compositions of 8.9/28.7, 18.0/36.0,
and 14.7/29.4.5 The first is used for waters with a pH above 6, while the latter two
are for waters with pH of 6 or below. The latter two are basically the same silicates,
differing in concentration and in viscosity. For hot water only, sodium silicate glass,
a slowly dissolving solid, may be used. The protection afforded by silicate treatment is
due to a film which forms on the inside surface of the pipe. It is not a scale and is
invisible when the pipe is wet. The thickness of this film is about that of a colloid.
If the silicate feed is discontinued, the film gradually disappears and the corrosion will
begin again— but there is a considerable lag, just as there was in building up the film
initially. Sodium silicate treatment may provide 90 percent protection or better. It should
be noted that protection with silicates is best in water below pH 7, is satisfactory in
the range 7 to 8, and that silica films do not form readily at pH above 8.5, and will
dissolve rapidly at pH of 9.5 and above.
Sodium metaphosphate glass has proved to be highly useful in preventing the for-
mation of scale deposits due to excess calcium and magnesium salts in water, utilizing
a dosage of only 2 to 5 ppm. Higher dosages of 8 to 10 ppm have materially retarded
corrosion when flow rate in pipes has been 1 ft per sec or higher. It should be noted
that the water must be circulated to get benefits from polyphosphates; they do not
protect in stagnant systems. Another requirement is that calcium must be present. Thus,
calcium is built into some of the slowly dissolving metaphosphate glasses. A mixture
of sodium metaphosphate glass and sodium silicate fed together is reported to give
better protection to potable water systems, both hot and cold, than either separately.
SUMMARY
Causes of Hot-Water-System Corrosion
1. Corrosive dissolved gases, such as carbon dinxide, oxygen, hydrogen sulfide, or
ammonia.
2. Dissolved copper.
3. High temperature.
4. High velocity, turbulence.
5. Galvanic couples.
6. Soft water.
Remedies for Potable Hot-Water-System Corrosion
1. Use deaerators where practicable.
2. Use air release valves at high points in system.
3. Do not use pneumatic tanks in hot-water systems.
4. Use Type K copper tube for temperatures up to 140 deg F.
5. Confine temperatures to the range 130-140 deg F.
6. Where higher temperatures are required, use 90/10 cupro-nickel alloy.
fTxhese are sometimes referred to as N, C and D silicates, respectively, and also as Grade F,
No. 6, and No. 22, in the same order.
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 147
7. Confine velocities to 5 ft per sec, preferably 4 ft per sec.
8. Insulate galvanic couples.
9. Use cathodic protection in hot water tanks when practicable.
10. Use appropriate chemical treatment. This may be:
(a) Carbonate balance system.
(b) Sodium silicate.
(c) Sodium metaphosphate.
(d) Mixture of (b) and (c).
(e) pH adjustment.'
(f) Dealkalization."
aSee AREA Bulletin 560, Vol. 62, November 1960, page 237.
Report on Assignment 3
Design, Construction and Operation of Coach-Servicing
Facilities to Comply With Regulations of U. S.
Public Health Service
C. F. Muelder (chairman, subcommittee), H. E. Graham, J. M. Bates, I. C Brown,
T. W. Brown, P. J. Calza, C. E. De Geer, A. W. Johnson, J. C. Roberts, J. P.
Rodger, F. M. Walters, J. E. Wiggins, Jr.
Under this assignment your committee reports information on new regulations and
standards pertaining to coach servicing and sanitation facilities regulated by the U. S.
Public Health Service. The following information was developed during the past year.
1. A new Food Service Sanitation Manual was released in July 1962 by the Public
Health Service. It is designated as Public Health Service Publication No. 934. It super-
sedes the 1959 Revision, Handbook on Sanitation of Dining Cars in Operation. The new
manual is not restricted to railroad facilities but covers all phases of food service and
sanitation regulated by the Public Health Service. It applies to other forms of trans-
portation and those engaged in interstate commerce.
2. The Public Health Service is now preparing a new manual which will supersede
the Handbook on Sanitation of Railroad Servicing Areas, publication No. 66. Publica-
tion date has not been announced.
3. There have been no new developments or requirements in the design, construi
tion, or operation of railroad coach servicing facilities. Prime empha^iv on the part of
governmental authorities has been shifting from equipment requirements to inspection
of the final facility While regulations on equipment have not been relaxed or changed,
major inspection efforts are being put on the drinking water, food, and services .i- it i-
offered and made available to the public. Any unacceptable conditions found resull in
immediate complaint and request to take the equipment or fatilitj out ol service until
the defects are corrected.
H8 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
Report on Assignment 4
Cathodic Protection of Pipelines and Steel Storage Tanks
Collaborating with Committee 18
VV. F. Arksey (chairman, subcommittee), A. E. Dulik, T. I. Gray, T. L. Hendrix, H. M.
Hoffmeister, F. O. Klemstine, C. F. Muelder, E. T. Myers.
The report for this year concludes a study begun in 1956. The first report, in 1957,
covered Introduction to Cathcdic Protection, and Cathodic Protection Technical Prac-
tices. The second report, in 1959, covered Instrumentation. The third report, in 1961,
covered Design of Cathodic Protection System for Pipelines. This year's report gives a
practical example of the application of cathodic protection to underground tanks and
is submitted as information.
E. PRACTICAL APPLICATION
A system of cathcdic protection was installed on two underground diesel fuel oil
tanks, each 11 ft in diameter and 48 ft long, to protect them from corrosion. The tanks
are insulated from all piping, and are placed with 2 ft of ground cover in a primarily
sandy soil having ground water close to the bottom of the tanks.
Seven magnesium anodes weighing 50 lb each were installed as shown in Fig. 1.
Leads from the ancdes were brought to terminal boxes where they were connected to
tank leads. The terminal boxes are short lengths of 4-in fiber pipe buried vertically in
the ground and are equipped with metal caps to keep the boxes dry and to allow access
for making tests. The tank leads were welded to the tank shells by thermit-type welds.
Tanks Nos. 1 and 2 were both connected to anode No. 6.
To allow the electrical conditions in the soil to stabilize, the tests described below
were not made until the system had been in service for 10 months.
Soils resistance measurements using the four-pin method were made, spacing the
pins 11 ft and 5 ft 6 in apart, respectively, for the two tests. The differences in results
show variations in the soil at depths corresponding to the spacing of the pins.
Pins 11 Ft Apart
£ = 2.35 volts 7=1.35 milli-amperes
Resistance = R — 2a X E/I
where R = resistivity in ohm — centimeters
a = spacing in centimeters
E = measured potential between two inner terminals
/= current between two inner terminals
Calculation R = (2 X H-0 X 12 X 2.54) X 2.35
0.00135
R = 1,166,000 ohm-cm
Pins 5 Ft 6 In Apart
£=1.86 volts 7=2.30 milli-amperes
Calculation R = (2 X 5-5 X 12 X 2.54) X 1-86
0.0023
R = 273,000 ohm-cm
The resistances obtained were very high and the current produced by each anode
correspondingly low. However, results of the entire test will illustrate procedure and
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
149
serve as a future guide. Fortunately, these tanks are located where frequent tests can
be run for additional information and checks.
Readings showing electrical characteristics of each anode are shown below:
Table 1
Aim,l, No. (imi 'l'u)„ Backfill
' 'urrent
M Mi-amps
Potential
Volts
.1 node
Resistance
in Ohms
' 'aU ulated
Life of l nodi
in Years
1
Prepacked..
Wet mix .
18.il
58. <>
84.0
5 1 . 5
23 . 5
3 1 . •">
44.0
0.71
0.90
0.94
0 . 8.">r»
0.935
0.955
0.975
38.2
1 5 . 1
LI. 2
L6.6
39.8
30.3
22 . 1
184
58.5
3
40.8
1
66.5
S
Dr,- mix._ ___
l 16
6
109
7
79
Method of Calculating Life of Anodes
Magnesium anodes are estimated to produce 600 amp hr per lb of metal consumed.
8760
600 amp hr/lb
Wt of anodes 50 lb
Life = 50X1
600
= 14.6 lb/amp hr
50
40.8 vears, anode No. 3
14.6 amp 14.6 X 0.0S4
Table 1 shows the life to be expected for the anodes. These anodes are larger than
necessary for reasonable life. Probably 9- or 1 7-lb anodes spaced 6 or 8 to a tank
would be more economical and give better protection. The lower potentials observed
between anodes would be raised, giving better overall protection.
Results in Table 1 indicate very graphically the effect of the various types of back-
fill material in a high-resistance soil. Those with wet mix produced much higher currents
and had lower resistance, but have a shorter life.
Fig. 1 shows the tank-to-soil potential as measured with a copper-copper sulfate
electrode and a multi-combination meter using the potentiometer circuit.* Readings
were taken at 5-ft intervals to show variation from points over the tank to points
rather remote. Note that the potential close to the anode is considerably higher than at
some distance away and that readings directly over the tank are lowest. The desired
minimum potential of 0.85 was obtained at remote distances from the tank.-.
Results described so far were sent to C. A. Erickson, who gave your committee a
very excellent talk several years ago, for his comments. He made a suggestion that the
anodes be disconnected and tank-to-soil potentials be taken directlj over the centei
line of the tanks to compare with the readings shown on Kit:, l. He advised thai thej
endeavor to obtain an increase of 0.30 v on a well coated structure, but o.io v inci
was about all that could be expected from a poorrj coated tank.
Accordingly, readings with anodes disconnected were taken at S it intervals with
the following results (readinu from I'M to right en Fig. 1):
• See Proceedings, Vol. 60, 1959, page 273.
150
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
Table 2 (Based on Fig. 1)
Center Line Tank No. 1
Anodes connected. _
Anodes disconnected
0.64
End tank
0.59
0.54
0.46"
0.58
0.56
0.52
0.46
0.52 0.58 0.60 0.56
0.47 0.52 0.49 0.52
Center Line Tank No. 2
0.55
0.50
0.53
0.49
End tank
0.64
0.56
0.68
0.58
0.67
0.58
0.59
0.56
0.65
0.61
0.66
0.63
0.60
0.64
0.57
0.63
0.59
0.61
0.51
0.50
0.51
0.44
0.49
0.47
End tank
0.89
0.58
Readings indicate that less than 0.10 v change is obtained with a high-resistance
soil which will cause little corrosion under soil moistures present during the summer
months when the tests were made. It is believed that the odd readings on tank No. 2
were caused by oil spillage between the first and second readings-
Results of the tests on the installation described illustrate how a cathodic protec-
tion system works. The soil resistance here was very high, therefore, not too much
corrosion would take place without the use of the system. However, experience obtained
on this test will enable better design of future installations in low-resistance soils where
corrosive conditions would be more acute.
The following procedure is recommended for designing a cathodic protection
system for underground tanks:
(1) Determine soil resistance by the four-pin, soils-box, or other suitable method.
(2) Read tank-to-soil potentials every 5 ft over center of tank.
(3) Select an anode that will have IS years of life. (Tables are available from
manufacturers of anodes showing current output and life expectancy of
various types and sizes of anodes in soils of varying resistances.)
(4) Install six or eight anodes per tank depending on length of tank.
(5) After anodes have been in service for three weeks to a month make readings
similar to those shown in Table 1 and 2 to see what results are being ob-
tained, for it may be found that more anodes are required. Experience gained
with each installation will prove very beneficial in later designs.
REFERENCES
Notes on backfill for anodes — Magnesium Anodes for Cathodic Protection, by The Dow
Chemical Company.
Notes on selecting size of anode — High Current Magnesium Anodes For Corrosion Con-
trol, by Standard Magnesium Corporation.
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
151
n
o
in
•
2
UJ
D
O
9)
Z
Ifi
r-
0>
io
(1
o
00
on
in
"X
T
m
CO
co
OD
O
z
oo
I
oo
CD
■
X
GO
00
00
00
«n
CO
^
UJ
CD
in
n
^
00
q
o
*
m
in
00
CO
oo
D
O
x
CO
r^
i
h-__J_
.IB
—
1
CO
00
CD
00
n
ff>
en
2
<
O
<o
1
t
cn
1
^
rr;
T
r^
m
OD
CO
OD
A
V
OD
r^
10
<T
IO
r
r-
d
2
CD
CO
00
•
i
,<.
h.
o
o
m
<r
_
<T
_
UJ
Q
O
en
_
00
CO
en
<J>
T
CO
^
10
<S)
IO
D
00
cn
OD
1
<a
to
in
o
-g
*>Q
cm
3
r-
i?
^
IO
I
cn
00
00
CD
r-
10 5;
o
<I
on
cn
cn
3
i
1
•
OD
10
<r
10 5
91
o
t
t
t
O
CO
so
00
00
f-
r^
in
<
f~
CD
01
o>
cn
0:
$
1
m
<T>
w
3
CO
tu
io y
i -5
n_
5
1
o
o
^
CO
00
ED
CO
OD
OD
r-
1-
CO
CD
00
-j
1
rs.
10
T
o
o>
ro
5 "oo
o
o
d
10
m
<r
T
CO
CO
00
h-
CO
f-
IS
r-
CD
00
i **
,-J
ID
T
<T
fO
O
o
*
en Tr-
ID
Uj
n
0D
CO
CD
00
i*-
lO ^"
IO
ID
f^
CD
CO
UJ
Q
10
in
o
in
cn
rO
0D
CO
CD
00
B
X
z
<
^
r^
a
IO
r-
r^-
CD
lf>
Kl
IO
•
in
en
<T
Ol
O
o
o
^:
CO
X
I
o
CD
5
DO
CO
N
r-
in
IO
r-
r^
00
CO
o
jji
1
z
t—
z
-
in
_
v
_
O
0
o
m
CO
cu
OJ
*5
<
<
o
r
cn
00
X
X
l*-
r^
<£
r-
00
OD
1-
o
_i
"-
X
_i
_|
<T
in
0
in
00
t
on
B
^
C4
IO
*T
CO
<
X
CO
X
r-
s
10
f^
CO
6
O
h-
1
1
2
CO
cn
_i
UJ
CO
CO
s
o
X
7
m
2
T
93
01
UJ
cn
o
S
o
Z
l
1
Q
O
Z
z
3
10
CO
V
00
00
r^-
to
■X'
£
IS
01
W
O
in
o
iT
cn
OD
Q
<
UJ
Q
U.
Q
Z
o
o
z
r-
10
1
h-
_•
n
T
UJ
cr
O
CO
00
OD
oo
LlI
3
p
i"
i
in
r
00
-
°
cn
CD
_i
<r
x
00
<x>
•r
00
en
B
3
Z
<
•
0
r-
x
1
C
1
1
m
is
° 1
IO <
.1
1
0
1
IS
s
7
B
fO
CD
O
O)
in
CO
in
CO
CO
<i
i-
z
UJ
1-
o
0.
2
CO
UJ
or
o
CE
UJ
Q
«T
o
1
1
1
N
cn
o
Z
CD
<
Z
3
CD
00
00
n
r-
IS
.n Q
5
'-
f^
CD
CO
cn
o
X
1
1
X
I
i
Kl
IO
cn
z
2
U.
O
OO
^3-
CD
OD
f-
P
1
1
*$
IS
1
1
'-
r-
^
r-
r>-
<
X
T
r^
lO
N
OD
T
r^
n
IO
in
r-
CO
1—
CO
00
oo
s
r-
IS
IS
^
01
f^
r^
r-
o
o
|
1
O
Z
h-
_l
£
T
0>
5
IS
*
c
IS
to
B
in
0
o
o
in
cn
cn
_l
3
CO
H
1
UJ
o
UJ
Z
o
O
o
x
CM
n
on
1
O
Cj
o
ID
C*>
CO
Q\
o
CO
op
OD
•
'■
IS
«]
'
c
o
z
•:
S
OD
r*
O
CO
00
X'
P
P
.
t
IO
■
•
a
o
00
O
00
cn
1
(V,
s
152 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
Report on Assignment 6
Railway Waste Disposal
F. 0. Klemstine (chairman, subcommittee), R. C. Archambeault, J. M. Bates, W. E.
Biliingsley, I. C. Brown, D. E. Drake, G. F. Metzdorf, H. Parrish, J. C. Roberts,
R. M. Stimmel, F. M. Walters.
One phase of this assignment involves a study of the economics of railway waste
disposal facilities, including such items as installation cost (capital investment), cost to
operate and salvage, if any (mostly fuel oil).
Each system, because of variations due to location, is a problem in itself and should
be dealt with individually.
Before any expenditure is made fcr waste disposal facilities, it is advisable that a
committee, consisting of representatives of the engineering and mechanical departments,
make a careful study of existing facilities to secure the following information:
1. Where is the waste coming from?
2. Why is the waste there in the first place? Can it be eliminated or relocated?
3. What are the water flows in gallons per minute that carry the waste away?
4. Are the flows necessary or are they a result of leakage or wastage of water?
The size or capacity of a disposal system is a function of the maximum flow, and
an effort should be made to reduce the flow to a minimum. Sometimes this can be done
by separating the present sewer systems or bypassing high flows and installing an oil
separator close to the source of pollution. Adequate means should be provided to re-
move and handle the oil or other contaminates that are removed before final discharge.
Report on Assignment 7
Practical Methods for Removing Iron and Manganese
from Small Water Supplies
W. E. Billingsley (chairman, subcommittee), R. A. Bardwell, M. V. Biar, T. W. Brown,
C. E. DeGeer, J. J. Dwyer, R. S. Glvnn, H. E. Graham, T. I. Gray, W. C. Harsh,
A. W. Johnson, D. C. Teal, A. G. Tompkins, F. M. Walters.
The following report is submitted as information on the problems and some prac-
tical solutions to these problems, resulting from the presence of iron and manganese in
small water supplies. Application, individually or in various combinations, of the meth-
ods may be through field-fabricated systems or through commercially available com-
ponents and systems.
The natural occurrence of iron and manganese, singly and together, presents several
problems in water supply systems. These problems are a particular nuisance in small
domestic-type systems which are normally not subject to modern water treatment meth-
ods. The United States Public Health Service standard for potable water limits the
concentration of iron and manganese, taken together, to a maximum of 0.3 ppm. Latest
U.S.P.H.S. directives indicate that the concentration of manganese should not be greater
than 0.05 mg/1. For industrial use a concentration of 0.3 to 0.5 ppm may be acceptable.
In domestic and commercial water supplies the presence of these agents contribute
to: (a) discoloring stains in textiles, cooking utensils and plumbing fixtures, (b) restrict-
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 153
ing deposits in water pipes and accessories, (c) distorting of color and taste of certain
cooked and processed foods and beverages, and (d) objectionable taste and odor of
potable water due to iron bacteria. In industrial water supplies the above items apply
plus the creating of deposits in beverages, inhibiting or preventing certain textile opera-
tions, and creating control problems in the tanning industry. In addition, deposits from
iron and manganese clog and scale heat exchange surfaces operating above approxi-
mately 140 F.
Iron and manganese occur naturally in the earth's sub-strata throughout most of
the United States, but especially in the Mississippi River iron-rich watershed area. Usu-
ally the two elements are found together and in varying proportions even in areas of
very close proximity. Iron is the fourth most common substance in the earth's crust,
and it is second only to aluminum as the most common metal.
The most common occurrence of iron in ground water is in the form of soluble
ferrous bicarbonate, but it may also be found as ferrous sulfate, ferric hydroxide and
colloidal or organic iron. Manganese is most prevalent as soluble manganous bicarbonate,
but may also be found as manganous sulfate and colloidal or organic manganese. In
regions where the water has filtered through swampy organic deposits on the earth's
surface or sub-strata, increased acidity and oxidation level are provided to enable the
water to dissolve the dioxide films from the sand and gravel aquifier. The seepage of
surface water through refuse land fills creates the same conditions. Complex chemical
reactions with organic and inorganic chemicals (such as humates, lignin, phosphates
and tannin) and acid-polluted waters (such as acid mine waters) will dissolve iron
and manganese in the oxygen-free sub-surface strata. The sulfates are generally in areas
polluted with acid mine waters or in water containing hydrogen sulfide. Water pumped
from aquifiers containing organic material or proximate to organic strata may yield
iron and manganese bound to organic matter.
Adjacent wells may, and most probably will, yield water of different analyses de-
pending upon the aquifier, depth of well, draw-down and flow. The first step in solving
the problems coincident with the presence of iron and manganese is to have an analysis
made by a qualified technician with repeated checks continuing as found necessary. The
methods for the removal of iron and manganese from water supplies are identical ex-
cept that for manganese the pH in aeration, sedimentation and contact filtration treat-
ments must be higher than that normally required for iron removal.
When an analysis reveals an objectionable level of iron and manganese, the pump-
ing and distribution system design should be examined regardless of whether it is a
proposed new system or an existing system. If the system itself is releasing the iron
flue to corrosive attack or the manganese by deposit release, the possibility of usiii),'
materials that are unaffected by corrosion and scaling should be evaluated. Piping and
valving arrangements should be installed in a manner to allow Bushing and draining of
tanks, coils and pipes with back-flushing, if possible, as a more effective means of
loosening scale and sludge.
If iron or manganese is contributed by the pumping or distribution system, after
first (lushing the system thoroughly and determining that the well water i- acceptabl)
pure, a sodium silicate solution may lie metered to the pump suction at a rate to allow-
about X ppm silicon dioxide in the treated water. Tin- will provide a film of iron silicate
to protect against the electrolytic attack caused by dissolved oxygen anil carbon dioxide
in the water. A residual of up to 25 ppm may be desirable lor the tir-t few weeks to
afford the initial protective coating. Alkalies maj be added simultaneousl) lor elevation
of the pH to a more desirable level.
154 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
If treatment of the water is deemed necessary, the different methods of treatment
should be evaluated against the single or combined existence of iron and manganese,
the presence of other deleterious agents and the end use of the water. Often it is pos-
sible to treat a relatively small quantity of water rather than the entire usage, which
might include stock, watering, lawn sprinkling, vehicle washing, etc. Whether it is desir-
able to soften the water or treat it for substances such as hydrogen sulfide may influ-
ence the choice of the most suitable treatment procedure.
For non-recirculating water systems having a combined content of iron and man-
ganese less than 3.0 ppm, the most economical method may be the complexation or in-
activation) of the metal in solution by the use of sequestrants to form a stable complex
to prevent oxidation and precipitation. Chelation is a special type of sequestration.
Only inorganic polyphosphates are permissible for potable systems, but organic com-
pounds may be used in non-potable systems. Polyphosphates are suitable only for low
iron contents due to the possibility of calcium phosphate precipitation at high feed
rates; also, the polyphosphates revert to orthophosphates at approximately 140 F, pro-
ducing stains very similar to those of iron and manganese oxides. High concentrations
of the organic sequestrants may be used without danger of precipitation, but there is
the possibility of attack on wetted equipment surfaces.
Sequestrants have been used successfully in domestic applications despite the fact
that most household water heaters are set at approximately 140 F. Sequestrants are
obtainable which will retain the iron in solution as either the ferrous or ferric ion and
in the presence of air or chlorine (bleach). For domestic usage, a relatively inexpensive
by-pass feeder may be installed between the pump and the pneumatic tank. For heavier
usages a chemical tank and proportioning pump should be installed. Regardless of the
method of application, it is important to inject the sequestrant prior to the commenc-
ing of any oxidation of the iron or manganese. Boiler and dishwasher installations gen-
erally require temperatures in the range of 180 F. and, therefore, complexing agents are
not recommended.
Sedimentation is an effective and economical method of iron and manganese re-
moval if adequate tank capacity is available to afford sufficient retention time as re-
lated to sedimentation rate. Water from a shallow well with fluctuating draw-down or a
well equipped with a jet pump often has begun partial aeration and carbon dioxide
release before reaching the surface. This initial natural process of separation may be
propagated by aeration and/or chemical oxidation and pH adjustment with subsequent
sedimentation of the oxides. Sodium carbonate or other alkali can be fed through a fixed
orifice where there is a uniform flow rate, and the alkaline solution then discharged into
a pneumatic tank through a spray nozzle to bring the water into intimate contact with
the air in the tank. The resulting increase of pH and oxidation level will render the
iron and manganese insoluble, resulting in sludge precipitation to the bottom of the
pneumatic tank if sufficient retention time is available. The pneumatic tank must be
recharged with air frequently and also drained of the resulting sludge regularly.
When sodium hypochlorite (NaCIO) as an oxidizing agent is fed into the water
system prior to the pneumatic tank, the rewards gained are accelerated oxidation,
sterilization of the water and the removal of hydrogen sulfide. Chlorine also kills iron
bacteria which exhibits itself in a malodorous slime, especially in toilet tanks. Chlorine
will oxidize iron and manganese in a pH range of 4 to 5 as opposed to a pH greater than
7 for oxidation by dissolved air. However, it requires 1 part chlorine to oxidize 1.6
parts iron as opposed to 1 part oxygen to 7 parts ferrous iron. Sodium hypochlorite
may be used also in the regeneration of oxidizing filters.
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 155
Where the iron concentration is below 5 ppm and is in a form bound with organic
matter, it may be necessary to introduce a coagulant salt such as alum to promote
sedimentation.
Oxidizing niters may be used on the discharge side of the tank to assist in con-
verting the iron and manganese ions into an insoluble state with subsequent separation
from the water by the filter media. These filters usually require a 12- to 15-gpm-per-
sq-ft backwash at regular intervals. This backwash flow rate, which is generally required
to raise the bed 50 percent or more, may be excessive for small water systems. The
filter also requires the regeneration of the oxidizing filter medium. However, by feeding
the strong oxidizing agent potassium permanganate (KMnOi) into the system the sedi-
mentation can be improved, and by slight overfeeding the filter bed will be regenerated
continuously. This overfeeding is approximately 0.5 to 1.0 part potassium permanganate
in the filter influent to 1.0 part of combined iron and manganese. The filter bed, while
being regenerated itself, will act as a buffer to remove the excess permanganate, thereby
resulting in a manganese-free filter effluent. Units operating on this principle will remove
high iron and manganese concentrations.
If the iron and manganese are still in a soluble state when the water reaches the
pump, probably the most effective method of removal is by ion exchange before a ferric
hydroxide suspension can be formed. This may be done by placing a sodium cycle cation
exchanger between the pump and the pneumatic tank. The exchanger replaces ferrous
and manganous ions with sodium ions prior to the aeration of the water as it is sprayed
into the pneumatic tank. If the exchanger tank will not withstand pump pressure, a
filter may be installed between the pump and the exchanger. The ion exchange method
will remove heavy concentrations of iron and manganese as well as calcium and mag-
nesium hardness. Commercially available exchangers generally are not recommended for
concentration above 10 ppm; however, properly designed units are effective up to 20-30
ppm. The iron content in parts per million should not be greater than the hardness in
grains per gallon for successful operation of the exchanger. A higher iron or manganese
content will result in excessive fouling of the zeolite bed. This method is particularly
effective for removing iron and manganese from soft water, and it is probably the most
practical method for domestic use where hardness is to be removed simultaneously.
Sodium hydrosulfite (NaHSOo) may be found to be a helpful clean-up agent for
zeolite beds fouled with iron and manganese. In some instances the chemical may be
mixed and charged with the regeneration salt at the time of backwash. The sodium
hydrosulfite reduces any oxidized iron and manganese back to the soluble ferrous or
manganous state which allows it to be flushed from the system.
A serious objection to ion exchangers may be the problem of disposal of the rela
lively large quantities of saline regeneration and backwash wastes. These waters will
clog portions of septic systems and adversely affect vegetation.
Subsequent to the ion exchanger the insoluble iron and manganese may l>e removed
by filtration as previously discussed.
The preceding methods, or combinations thereof, for the treatment of iron- and
manganese-laden waters should be applied only after carefully evaluating the particular
problem at hand, taking into consideration not only the cost and efficiency of the
method but also the requisites of the finished water supply. Attention should also be
given to the problem^ attenndant upon proper operation and maintenance which, ii
neglected, may nullify the potential advantages of a well designed system.
156 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
REFERENCES
Adams, R. B., "Manganese Removal by Oxidation with Potassium Permanganate",
Journal of AWWA, Vol. 52, No. 2, Feb. 1960.
Calise, V. J., and R. F. Dietz, "Iron and Manganese Removal from Municipal and
Industrial Water Supplies", Joint Meeting of the Florida Section of AWWA and
the Florida Sewage and Industrial Waste Association, Orlando, Fla., 1955.
Cherry, A. K., "Rx for Tastes and Odors — KMnOi and Activated Carbon", Water Works
Engineering, March 1962.
Dwyer, J. J., et al., "Corrosion Prevention in Potable Hot Water Systems", AREA Bul-
letin, Vol. 62, No. 560, November 1960; Vol. 63, No. 567, November 1961.
Edwards, S. E., and G. B. McCall, "Manganese Removal by Break-Point Chlorination",
Water and Sewage Works, Vol. 93, No. 8, August 1946.
Gurnham, C. F., Principles of Industrial Waste Treatment, John Wiley & Sons, Inc.,
New York, 1955.
Humphrey, S. B., and M. A. Eikelberry, "New Potassium Permanganate Techniques",
Water and Sewage Works, May 1961.
Mathews, E. R., "Iron and Manganese Removal by Free Residual Chlorination", Jour-
nal of AWWA, Vol. 39, No. 7, July 1947.
Scattergood, A. G., personal correspondence, American Water Softener Company, May
1962.
Symposium on Chemistry of Water Supplies, Washington, D. C, American Chemical
Society, 1962.
Taggart, E. J., J. Levendusky and V. J. Calise, "Iron and Manganese Reduction", 78th
Annual Conference of the AWWA, Dallas, Tex., 1958.
Technical Bulletin No. 101 1-C, Rohm and Haas Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Technical Bulletin No. CWF-61, Softener Corporation of America, Melrose Park, 111.
Technical Data: 243.1 March 28, 1955, Industrial Filter and Pump Manufacturing Com-
pany, Chicago.
Water Purification and Treatment Handbook, Everpure, Inc., Chicago.
Report on Assignment 8
Methods of Controlling Spillage of Fuel Oil at Diesel
Fueling and Unloading Stations
V. C. Barth (chairman, subcommittee), H. E. Graham, W. F. Arksey, R. A. Bardwell,
I. C. Brown, P. J. Calza, G. F. Metzdorf, C. F. Mueller, E. T. Myers, H. Parrish,
R. D. Powrie, J. C. Roberts, E. R. Schlaf, C. B. Voitelle, J. E. Wiggins, Jr.
Your committee submits the following progress report on Assignment 8.
At the committee meeting held on May 9, 1962, the subcommittee for this assign-
ment was directed to investigate new automatic cut-off fueling nozzles being developed
by a certain company. The latest information received indicates that, while a study is
being made, no basic design has been developed to date.
The committee was also directed to make a survey on the performance of various
types or designs of automatic shut-off diesel fueling nozzles and the savings to be
realized through their use. This is now being pursued; however, usage to date has been
too limited for reliable data to be reported. One or possibly two designs are being used
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 157
quite extensively, and one other is presently being applied on a large scale, but, it is too
early to evaluate the economics of automatic shut-off diese] fueling devices strictly on a
merit basis, avoiding any commercial aspects or favoritism.
Report on Assignment 10
Railroad Aspects of Radioactive Substances
W. C. Harsh (chairman, subcommittee), R. C. Archambeault, V. C. Barth, J. M. Bates.
R. S. Glynn, P. M. Miller, R. D. Powrie, J. P. Rodger, E. R. Schlaf, C. B. Voitelle.
Your committee submits as information the following report on handling radio-
active substances.
Radioactive materials have come into use during the past few years: (1) as tracers
to determine wear rates of materials, (2) for detection of flaws in various materials, and
(3) as an energy source for signal lighting.
Iron 59 and chromium 51 are used in diesel piston ring tests to determine wear
rates of lubricating and fuel oils. Radiography uses cobalt 60 for detecting flaws in
welds. Cesium 137 is used for railroad cross tie inspection. Radium is used to detect
pipeline corrosion and krypton 85 as an energy source for switch lamps.
In general, the specific effects of nuclear radiation are only superficially like those
of thermal radiation. As in the case of sunburn the effects are apparent only after
exposure. Since the human senses cannot detect radiation at the time of exposure, the
user of radioisotopes must monitor his operations at all times where the safety factor
has not been determined by trained professional personnel.
The three kinds of radiation likely to be encountered are:
(1) Gamma Radiation is the most penetrating and for this reason presents the
greatest hazard. Shields of lead, iron or concrete of sufficient thickness must
be used to protect the worker.
(2) Beta Radiation, often called "Beta Rays", are high-energy electrons. The
radiation damage to the body is generally confined to the surface and the
first few millimeters of the skin. Glass shields are sufficient for worker
protection.
(3) Alpha Radiation, because of its high specific ionization, has a very short
range in matter and is entirely absorbed by glass, rubber gloves and beavj
clothing. Alpha particles range in tissue is less than the outer layer of the
skin.
The handling of radioactive materials presents a few problems as Atomic Energy
Commission rules pertaining to their use must be followed. Distance is the best and
easiest shield: however, lead, iron, and concrete will reduce the hazard.
Proper clothing, shoe covering, gloves and breathing apparatus are required A sur
vey meter, normally a gamma-beta instrument, is required to measure radiation. The
device must be cared for, calibrated and not abused, as this instrument is the worker's
sixth sense. He must be well trained in its use and interpreting the information that it
gives him. Monitoring the area is the first step in handling radioactive material. This
will determine the necessary precautions that will be required for safe handling of such
materials.
Report of Committee 14 — Yards and Terminals
D. C. Hastings,
Chairman
H. J. McNally,
Vice Chairman
A. E. Biermann,
Secretary
F. E. AUSTERMAN
R. O. Balsters
W. P. Buchanan
M. H. Aldrich
C. E. Stoecker
F. A. Hess
W. H. Pollard
E. T. Lucey
F. S. King
L. L. Lyford (E)
R. F. Beck
S. N. MacIsaac
H. R. Beckmann
G. W. Mahn, Jr.
WlLLARD BlNZEN
T. F. Maloney, Jr.
H. M. Booth
J. C. Miller
E. G. Brisbin
C. J. Morris
B. E. Buterbaugh
C. H. Mottier (E)
G. H. Chabot
B. G. Packard
J. F. Chandler
R. H. Peak, Jr.
H. P. Clapp
H. L. Pepper
E. H. Cook
Hubert Phypers
V. R. Copp
L. F. Pohl
B. E. Crumpler
L. J. Riekenberg
J. L. Dahlrot
L. W. Robinson
H. M. Dalziel
H. T. Roebuck
A. V. Dasburg
H. H. Russell
CM. Frazhcr
R. A. Skooglun
W. H. Giles (E)
E. B. Sonnhelm
W. H. Goold
R. F. Straw
C. W. Hamilton
T. D. Styles
G. F. Hand (E)
J. G. Sutherland
VVm. J. Hedley
Jack Sutton
H. W. Hem
J. B. Sutton
J. E. Honing
J. J. Tibbits
V. C. Kennedy
L. G. TlEMAN
A. S. Krefting
J. N. Todd (E)
Fred C. Larsen, Jr.
J. W. Tucker
B. Laubenfels
W. E. Webster, Jr.
Glen Lichtenwalner
W. A. Wood
J. L. Loida
C. E. Zeman
Committee
(E) Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 14.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
There are no recommendations for revisions to Chapter 14 of the Manual
with the exception of those that are being presented under Assignments 2b
and 6a.
2. Classification yards, collaborating' with Committee 16.
a. Rollability of freight cars.
The work that should have done this year was not accomplished due
to the fact that no funds were allocated for research and testing. Request
for these funds has been included again in the budget in 1963.
b. Design of classification yard gradients.
Progress report, with recommendations submitted for adoption and
publication in the Manual page 161
159
160 Yards and Terminals
3. Scales used in railway service, collaborating with Committee 18.
a. Specifications governing the manufacture and installation of electronic
track scales.
Considerable work has been done on this subject, and it is hoped that a
final report can be submitted in 1964.
b. Specifications governing the manufacture and installation of automatic,
indicating and recording elements for large-capacity scales.
Considerable work has been completed on this subject, and a progress
report should be presented in 1964.
c. Studies of the accuracies obtained in motion weighing.
Considerable data have been received from tests in various sections of
the country, which will be tabulated and presented as information in
1964.
4. Facilities for freight car cleaning and washing, collaborating with Com-
mittee 6.
Final report, submitted as information page 164
5. Mechanized and electronic mail handling facilities.
Final report, submitted as information page 168
6. Facilities for loading and unloading rail-truck freight equipment, col-
laborating with Committee 6 and the AAR Motor Transportation Advisory
Committee.
a. Facilities for loading and unloading rail-truck freight equipment.
Progress report submitted with the recommendation that it be adopted
and published in the Manual page 173
b. Facilities for loading and unloading multi-level automobile cars.
Progress report, submitted as information, with the recommendation that
the subject be continued and that material suitable for publication in the
Manual be presented in 1964 page 173
7. Water front terminals.
Final report, submitted as information page 180
8. Present trends in yard maintenance.
Final report, submitted as information page 183
The Committee on Yards and Terminals,
D. C. Hastings, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 574, November 1962.
Yards and Terminals 161
Report on Assignment 2b
Design of Classification Yard Gradients
R. 0. Balsters (chairman, subcommittee), M. H. Aldrich, A. E. Biermann, W. Binzen,
B. E. Buterbaugh, H. P. Clapp, V. R. Copp, B. E. Crumpler, H. M. Ualziel, A. V.
Dasburg, C. M. Frazier, VV. H Goold, C. W. Hamilton, D. C. Hastings, B. Lauben-
fels, G. Lichtenwalner, S. N. Maclsaac, H. J. McNally, H. L. Pepper, L. F.
Pohl. L. W. Robinson, R. A. Skooglun, E. B. Sonnheim, T. D. Styles, W. A. Wood.
Your committee submits for adoption the following recommendations with respect
to material on design of classification yard gradients in Chapter 14 of the Manual:
Pages 14-3-1 to 14-3-18, incl.
FREIGHT TERMINALS
Page 14-3-7, Art. 3-b. Rolling Resistance: Add after first sentence in last para-
graph: "Strong head winds may increase maximum rolling resistance of empty cars to
2.0 percent."
Art. 3-c. Theory: At end of last line on page change "Fig. 1" to read "Fig. 1-a"
Add the following: "The expressions for velocity head do not take into account
the storage of energy in the rotating car wheels and, therefore, are approximations.
When a more precise solution is desired, the following expressions may be used:
he = 0.0334 F2_g_or he = 0.0155 v2 g
go go
wherein he represents the total energy head of the car including the rotational head.
The g is gravitational acceleration and g0 is an apparent value of gravitational accelera-
tion which accounts for the fact the acceleration of the car is slower because energy is
being stored in rotating wheels.
1 + K/W
wherein A' is a constant for the wheels and W is the gross weight of the car in tons.
An average value for K is 1.6. See Fig. 1-b."
Page 14-3-8, Art. 3-d. Design: Change the last sentence of the third paragraph to
read: "Cars with inner axle centers greater than the length of the track circuit will
require special handling."
Eliminate the last sentence of the fourth pargraph and add the following: "The
trend toward full automation in hump yards necessitates the provision of tangent and
curve rolling resistance measuring sections to be located between the crest of the hump
and the group retarder. Recent yard installations have used an accelerating grade not
t<> exceed 6.0 percent for a distance of 70 ft, more or less, at the crest of the hump to
assist in providing the proper separation of car-. The resistance measuring section then
is provided on an accelerating grade of 2.0 percent, mine or less, to the master retarder,
which may also I"- placed on a grade not i" exceed 6.0 percent Retarders tnaj In-
constructed with a vertical curve- at the lower end which facilitates placing the first
switch beyond the leaving end of both master and group retarders as close to the
retarders as possible."
In the first sentence of item (1), change "0J percent" to ''0.15 percent."
Page 14-3-9: Change "Fig. 1" to read 'Tig. I a".
Insert new Fig. 1-b, presented herewith, between Fig. 1 a and Fig. 2.
162
Yards and Terminals
00%
Boiling fi»itlonc« Ion
Fig. 1-b.
— he« Cntrgy
H«od
Page 14-3-10: In the second line of item (3), change "0.3 percent" to "0.15
percent."
Page 14-3-11: In the first sentence of the second pargraph below item (2), change
"0.12 percent" to "0.08 percent."
Page 14-3-12: Under Design Data, change "Rye = 0.3'%" to "Rle — 0.l5'%", and
change "J?2e = 0.12%" to "RSe = 0.08%".
Under Solution:
In the 4th line change "(0.0012)" to "(0.0008)."
In the 5th line change "0.76 ft" to "0.55 ft."
In the 6th line change ".0.76" to "0.55" and change "17.39 ft" to "17.60 ft".
Change 11th line to read: "(VH)s+a= 11.60+ 0.21 — (815) (0.0015) — (22.6S)
(0.025) = 16.02 ft."
Change 12th line to read: "Let (VH)a = 6.24 ft, then (VH)u — 9.78 ft.
Change 15th line to read: "Elevation of point D = — 9.78 — (395) (0.0015) —3.34
+ 0.21 = — 13.50 ft."
In 16th line change "0.3" to "0.15."
In 17th line change "0.12 percent" to "0.08 percent."
In 18th line change "0.3 percent" to "0.15 percent."
In 21st line change figures after the words "total retardation required is", to read
"6.24 ft+ 9.78 ft =16.02 ft."
In 22nd line change "14.59 ft" to "16.02 ft".
Page 14-3-12.1: Insert revised Fig. 3, presented herewith, in lieu of present Fig. 3.
Yards and Terminals
163
II 'II
t
t t
s
c5?l
3*
r
(\J<»
0 CO
■O K> rQ r*l
CD O
IrO ^
d
1 |
OOI
Pi
Ol
0D
O
6
3
1 1
?!
."1
Si
i
O
1
1
t-C+EI
|U|»eJ
1 1
T]
T
II •3UDJ0»|3
!
^7
< 1
o
/
1
tf
/
/
<
r /
'SI
1
nil 1 1 1
■-;
Tft'
0>l 1
•
E
E
■
f
1 ///
i
5i
•
c
o
//oo+zi
i
*1
1
f
T ////
• i
*
M
•
cr
i wO
oOO \l o
c
1 *"s?
c u \j 1 -
°"2 1 "
-
o
i
1 1 ill
o
1 «^
Em
— *>^o ■ 1
-■oS? 1
m
on
<->
<fr
I
"II 1 lh-
o
"°6D
1
o
>
•
Ul
1 vdo
•tO i
t!o I
i
. I
5?
CD
o
d
2
•
O
O
03 r\ «;0
o
a
6
^iV^
"> * "O
1
3
o
V, N
- SlK
T 1 'T
*l
■j
CD
. -
n* Sl+9
?
. i
— i
1
».i
-| •X 9/1
ad
h
'r rr
H*
I 00+Z
T
\. c\j / u
t
1 fVl/
►
1
' 5/
U-B-
Z
1
1
(
oBo
■ z
<
f
1
J
ujf
1
_J
1
/ /
/ /
«-
_IB
1
0.
*
5
/ /
"«>/ ° /
-/ in/
c
o
lZi
?J
o'l 2/
;
oB
■
\
•jj *1
c
K,
S6+C
Y
1
1
E -
1
1
/
spy z
o
3 °
I X
a
3
,' "a
AS
#
'-'
1.
in
OC + 2
t
1
1
jy
Id
o
1
oZ
o/7
*>//
a
//
u
CO
<N
1
duuni] jo |t*o
_3
i
1
00 + 0
bo
in
'>
164 Yards and Terminals
Report on Assignment 4
Facilities for Freight Car Cleaning and Washing
M. H. Aldrich (chairman, subcommittee), A. E. Biermann, H. R. Beckmann, W. Binzen,
W. O. Boessneck, E. G. Brisbin, B. E. Butterbaugh, E. H. Cook, V. R. Copp, W. H.
Giles, W. H. Goold, C. W. Hamilton, D. C. Hastings, F. S. King, A. S. Krefting,
B. Laubenfels, G. Lichtenwalner, S. N. Maclsaac, H. J. McNallv, B. G. Packard,
R. H. Peak, Jr., W. H. Pollard, L. J. Riekenberg, L. W. Robinson, H. T. Roebuck,
E. B. Sonnheim, J. G. Sutherland, J. B. Sutton, J. J. Tibbits, L. G. Tieman, C. E.
Zeman.
One-Spot Freight Car Cleaning Facilities
Your committee submits the following report as information with the recommenda-
tion that the subject be discontinued.
Several railroads have recently installed facilities for freight car cleaning in which
cuts of from 10 to 35 cars are moved through a concentrated working area by means
of a car puller. Details of the operation vary considerably. At some highly mechanized
installations a string of cars is moved one car length at a time on a quite definite time
schedule with a single type of operation performed at each of three or four successive
locations. At another installation, however, the cuts are worked on in groups of about
10 cars at a time alongside a working platform and employing more ordinary tools and
conventional equipment. In one instance, spot car cleaning is combined with the car
repair facility. A typical installation illustrating each of these variations is described
below in some detail.
Great Northern Car Cleaning Facility
The highly mechanized facility of the Great Northern Railway at Grand Forks,
N. D., consists of 2 stub-end tracks 2300 ft long with the cleaning area occupying about
250 ft of length near the midpoint of these two tracks. This provides space for about
20 to 25 cars at the stub end of each track and a like capacity for these cars after
they have passed through the cleaning area. A double-drum reversing car puller is
located on the outside of each track. The cable is 2650 ft long and arranged so that
25 empty cars can be pulled off the stub track past the car cleaning machinery.
At the first location there is a 30-ft-long refuse hopper between the tracks from
which a 30-in-wide conveyor belt moves refuse parallel to the tracks and to a height
of 21 ft. The debris drops into a hopper and down into a hog where it is chopped and
deposited on a 24-in-wide belt conveyor. This elevates the refuse to a swivel-mounted
discharge nozzle from which it is discharged into one of two 12-cu-yd load-lugger type
containers. When the containers are full, they are lifted onto a 24,000-lb capacity truck
by a hydraulic-operated cradle, and trucked to a dumping area.
At the second location there is a 54-ft-long platform covered with metal grating
extending between the tracks. This is at car-floor height and on it is located the car
vacuum and the control panel for the entire facility. The car vacuum consists of a fan
driven by a 15-hp motor, debris hopper and dual cyclone dust collector. One end of a
7 -in flexible hose 30 ft long is connected to the car vacuum hopper and on the other
end there is an aluminum nozzle 18 in wide used for vacuuming the car floors. (See
accompanying illustration.)
The third location is a station for performing inspections and making minor repairs.
Yards and Terminals
16S
Car vacuum used by the Great Northern Railway at its Grand Fork,
N. D., car cleaning facility.
At the fourth location there is a washing unit. This consists ol an air-operated tele
scopic boom mounted on a dolly which can be moved by remote control on an auxilian
track between the two parallel car cleaning tracks. The boom can be rotated 180 deg
so that cars on either track can be washed. Winn the boom enters the car, the water i-
automatically turned on and the multi-nozzled washer head oscillates for J min with
water flowing through the specially designed nozzle at 200 gpm under 200 lb pressure.
At the end of the washing period, the washer automatically retracts and awaits the
positioning of the next car.
To start the cleanine. operations, a cut of 20 to 25 cars is switched into one of the
2 stub tracks past the cleaninc area so that the first car out will be adjacent to the
refuse hopper. The car puller is then attached to a rear car. Practically everything is
166 Yards and Terminals
thrown into the hopper to be hogged, including broken grain doors and pallets, timbers
up to 12 ft long, old ties, banding straps, etc. Material such as tile, brick and concrete
blocks is thrown into a container and hauled directly to the dump without hogging.
After the debris has been cleaned out of the first car, warning is given on several
klaxon-type horns strategically located, and the cut is moved forward one car length.
The first car will then be adjacent to the vacuum cleaner and the second car adjacent
to the hopper. On the next move, the first car will be at the inspection station. Minor
repairs are made here, including patching of lining and floor and application of brake
shoes. The car is then carded for highest commodity. On the next move, the first car
reaches the fourth and last station where the washing is done.
Since the work at each station requires about 4 min, approximately 12 cars can be
cleaned each hour. If the condition of a car is such that an operation cannot be com-
pleted in the allotted time, that car is returned for further cleaning with another group
of cars. Before cleaning operations have been completed on a string of cars on one track,
a switch engine spots another cut on the other track. In this way there is no interrup-
tion to the cleaning operations.
The seven-man crew consists of one carman doing preliminary work, two carmen
making minor repairs and classifying cars, three laborers handling debris, and one laborer
operating the vacuum cleaner, car puller and car washer. Up to 95 cars are cleaned
during an 8-hr shift.
The Great Northern has a similar cleaning facility at Everett, Wash., with the
following major differences. There are three incoming tracks which converge to a single
track through the cleaning area. The elevating rubbish conveyor is at right angles to the
track, and a horizontal retractable conveyor carries the debris from the car to this
elevating one. Rubbish from the elevating conveyor drops onto a cantilever conveyor.
This can swing over either one of two incinerators. A "king-size" vacuum cleaner with
a S-ft-wide nozzle is used to clean the floors. After cleaning and washing, the cars are
moved to one of three outgoing tracks. Most go to the ready track, but if they require
steam cleaning they are moved to a second track. The third track is used for cars
requiring light repairs.
A six-man crew is required for this operation not including men used on the
outgoing tracks. The facility operates two 8-hr shifts and about 100 cars are cleaned
per shift.
New York Central Facility
The New York Central Railroad facility at Elkhart, Ind., consists of 2 parallel
tracks on 60-ft centers and about 3200 ft in length. The working area is about midway
along these tracks and consists of a reinforced concrete pavement 400 ft long. The
pavement is 84 ft wide and consequently extends 12 ft beyond the center line of each
of the 2 tracks. The transverse slope is % inch to the foot from each outside edge
toward the center. The top of rail is flush with the pavement surface. Drainage is pro-
vided by inlets with ^-in mesh screens on about 60-ft centers along the low points of
the pavement.
A short spur off the inside of each track at the incoming end of the working area
permits the placing of two gondolas. An incinerator is also located near this end of the
pavement. A service building is located within the paved area, and there is also a small
shed used to store tools and supplies for making minor repairs. A 3-ft-wide platform at
car-floor height with a metal grating surface extends along the inside of each track
throughout the length of the working area. Water is furnished to the working area under
Yards and Terminals 167
yard line pressure. Service hydrants along the tracks provide for the use of a hose
equipped with a nozzle for washing the car interiors. Two horizontal-drum electric car
pullers are located along the inside of each track. They have a starting pull of 15,000 lb
and are capable of handling 40 cars at a speed of 40 ft per min.
A ;-\vitch engine brings in a cut of 35 cars on each one of the tracks so that the
first 9 or 10 cars in each cut are adjacent to the 400-ft pavement. A commodity inspec-
tor goes down one side of a string and back the other, carding cars as to what is to be
done. Carmen start right in on running repairs and on any upgrading work that can be
done before washing. Nails and cleats are removed and rubbish taken out by laborers
and piled in aluminum trash carts. These trash carts are 8 ft long by il/2 ft wide and
have 12-in-diameter hard-rubber wheels. When filled, they are hauled with a fork lift
truck to a spot close to the incinerator where a man separates the burnable material and
tosses the remainder into one of the gondolas. After the rubbish is removed, cars are
swept out with brooms. This is followed by the washing out of any cars carded for this
operation, and finally by any upgrading still remaining to be done.
When all work is completed, the car puller cable is hauled back by a truck and
attached to a car in the cut. Warning is given over the paging system, and the cut of
cars is moved forward about 9 car lengths. The same cleaning procedure is then repeated.
About 4 hr are required to complete the 2 strings of cars. A switching crew brings in
2 more cuts of cars during the lunch period.
The crew of 19 men consists of a foreman, 2 carmen for commodity inspecting,
5 carmen upgrading and running repairs, 8 laborers cleaning and washing, 1 man on the
incinerator and 2 motor truckers. Production for an 8-hr shift averages about 130 cars.
St. Louis-San Francisco Facility
At its Cherokee Yard in Tulsa, Okla., the St. Louis-San Francisco Railway has
provided for spot car cleaning on the 3 light repair tracks through the repair shed. The
3 inbound leads have a total capacity of about 50 cars. Two cars at a time are moved
by a self-contained mobile unit to an area at the approach end of the repair shed. Here
rubbish is cleaned from the cars and loaded on a stake-bed rack-type truck and hauled
to an area for burning. Metal material is separated and put in bins that are supplied
and collected by a local salvage dealer. The 2 cars are then moved into the 160-ft-long
shed where end straightening running repairs and lining or coopering is completed. On
the outgoing side of the repair shed there are 80-ft-long washing platforms, each
equipped with an adjustable nozzle spray gun on a 50-ft hose. A piston-type pump
furnishes 7 gpm of water at 450 lb pressure to the washing system.
SUMMARY
The one spot car cleaning method is reported as now being used at the following
locations: Great Northern at Grand Forks and Everett; Louisville & Nashville at \t
lanta, Ga., Pensacola, Fla., and Birmingham, Ala.; New York Central at Elkhart, and
the Frisco at Tulsa. Track arrangements used include: (1) a single track for incoming,
cleaning and outgoing; (2) two tracks, either stub or through, for incoming, cleaning
and outgoing; (3) three tracks for incoming cars, converging to one track through the
cleaning area, then diverging to three tracks for outgoing cars. In most instances a level
grade is used for all tracks of each car cleaning facility. A departure from this is the
Everett Yard where the 3 inbound tracks are on an ascending 0.2 percent grade. The
(leaning track is level, but there is a descending 0.35 percent grade to the 3 outgoing
tracks. The tracks through the washing areas are tilted transversely in order to facilitate
168 Yards and Terminals
the drainage of the wash water from the inside of the cars. The rail superelevation in
the various installations ranges from 1% in to 4 in. Drainage lines with inlets, catch
basins or gutters at the washing platform are provided to dispose of the wash water.
Proper maintenance of this drainage system is an important feature and should not be
neglected. Facilities should be provided for cleaning the drains periodically.
General lighting is obtained by either mercury vapor or incandescent floodlights.
Some supplementary lighting may be employed. For example, at Elkhart poles spaced
about 75 ft apart along the 400-ft working platform support a cable. An incandescent
lamp is attached to one end of a telescopic rod, and a ring at the other end permits
the device to slide along the cable. A man standing on the metal platform can reach
one of the lamps, slide it opposite a car door and extend it to hook over the edge of
the door. The interior of the car is thus illuminated while cleaning or washing.
At all installations some upgrading and light repair work is done. Where a single
type of operation is handled at each spot, the upgrading and repair work is done after
cleaning but before washing, except at Everett. There, cars carded for repairs are
handled to an outgoing track reserved for this work.
Production of clean cars varies somewhat depending upon the size and character
of the facility and the extent of repair work done. In all cases where comparisons with
former methods are available there is increased production with the spot method. Using
the same size of crew as with the older methods, the reported increase ranges from 25
percent for a small single-track cleaning yard up to 400 percent for a larger highly
mechanized facility.
Report on Assignment 5
Mechanized and Electronic Mail Handling Facilities
C. E. Stoecker (chairman, subcommittee), F. E. Austerman, R. O. Balsters, A. E. Bier-
mann, W. O. Boessneck, E. H. Cook, C. M. Frazier, D. C. Hastings, E. T. Lucey,
G. W. Mahn, Jr., H. J. McNally, R. E. Robinson.
Your committee submits the following report as information with the recommenda-
tion that the subject be discontinued.
In order to improve the operations of sorting and handling U. S. sacked mail and
parcels at terminals with sufficient volume to justify the change, railroads are installing
mechanical and electronic facilities, thereby eliminating much of the labor involved with
the conventional saw-tooth type of sorting platform where mail is manually carried or
dragged to the individual carts parked around the periphery of the platform.
An automatic mail-handling system is developed and tailored specifically for a
facility after extensive investigation and study of the problems peculiar to that par-
ticular site. Such a system can be divided, for descriptive purposes, into:
1. Receiving
Conveyor belts, chutes and platform trucks are used to receive mail bags and parcels
inbound from mail cars, highway trucks, publishing houses, mail order houses and
United States Post Offices.
Storage of mail before sortation (pre-sort storage) is necessary in the event of any
surge of mail which cannot be immediately worked through the sortation section. This
storage can be made on chutes and slides; however, a slow-moving storage belt, nor-
mally 42 in wide at a speed of 60 ft per min, will permit stacking of mail for greater
Yards and Terminals
169
Fig. 1 — Coding station and gate-type deflectors, Louisville & Nashville
Railroad, Nashville, Tenn.
capacity. The diversion of mail into pre-sort storage can be accomplished either by an
operator activating the mechanism or by a load-limit switch just ahead of the sortation
section. Recall from pre-sort storage can be made by the operator when he sees that
the mail can be properly handled. Capacity of pre-sort storage is determined by a study
of the number of sources of incoming mail along with the time of arrival and quantity
of seasonal mail, such as catalogs, the exceptionally heavy volume of mail just prior
to the Christmas season, future growth and the amount of mail which can be handled
through the sortation section per hour.
2. Sortation
Two main considerations in the design of a sortation system are:
a. The necessary number of classifications to be made.
b. The maximum number of units to be handled in one hour.
Each operator has a keyboard at his coding station, which establishes a pre-
determined routing of each unit of mail to its designated station. He places the unit of
mail into the loading mechanism as he reads and interprets its destination and then
enters a corresponding number on the keyboard (sec Fig. 1 and Fig. 2.) The loading
mechanism places the unit on one of the following types of conveyors and the mail is
carried to its designated station: (1) belt, (2) tilt tray on chain drive, and (3) dump
cart on continuous track.
Present reports indicate that one coding station can generally handle 600 to 720
units of mail per hour.
Two of the methods for coding the mail for removal from conveyor into the desired
station are:
a. The number entered into the keyboard is stored in a memory unit. This
memory unit relates this number to the motion of the conveyor so a- to cause
the mail to be removed from the conveyor at the designated Nation.
b. The number entered into the keyboard imposes B magnetii pulse on the con-
veyor. This magnetic signal actuates a proximity switch, which, in turn, start-
170
Yards and Terminals
Fig. 2 — Four-position coding station with storage slide, Terminal Railroad
Association of St. Louis, St. Louis, Mo.
the mechanism for the removal of the mail from the conveyor at the designated
station.
The actual removal of the sorted mail from the conveyor at the designated station
can be accomplished by use of: (1) tilting tray, (2) dumping cart, (3) horizontal
pusher, (4) overhead paddle, and (5) gate-type deflector.
These stations can consist of:
a. A chute which empties into a platform truck. This chute has a gate located
at the bottom for the operator to close when he interchanges a full truck
with an empty one (see Fig. 3.)
b. A slow-moving inclined storage belt usually held for units to be loaded directly
into mail cars. This belt can have an electric eye at its discharge end. The
stacked mail on the belt intercepts the eye and automatically stops the feeding
of additional mail onto the belt and signals the operator that the belt is full
(see Fig. 4.)
3. Departure
The sorted mail can be carried by platform trucks, carts or conveyors to the point
of loading. Units for direct loading into cars can be carried over a series of belts to
the loading track. As the mail approaches the designated car, a deflector, extended across
the conveyor belt, diverts the mail from the conveyor down a chute and into the car
door. These deflectors and chutes are movable along the length of the conveyor (see
Fig. 5.)
Yards and Terminals
171
Fig. 3 — Sorted mail chutes and overhead paddle-type deflectors,
TRRA, St. Louis.
Fig. 4 — Inclined storage belts for holding sorted mail, TRRA, St. Louis.
172
Yards and Terminals
Fig. 5 — Outbound mail loading belt conveyor on car-floor-height platform,
with loading chute shown in place in car door, TRRA, St. Louis.
4. Control Room
This is the hub of the facility and may be so located that an unobstructed view
can be had of the entire operation. This room can contain:
a. Motor controls.
b. Electronic controls.
c. Manual-operation control.
d. Communication center.
Color-coded signal lights on motor controls and also on manual-operation controls
are an advantage. Adequate lighting, heat and ventilation are necessary in the control
room while air conditioning may be desirable.
General Remarks
Cat-walks and adequate lighting are necessary over the entire system to permit
complete access to working parts for inspection, lubrication and maintenance.
Yards and Terminals 173
Report on Assignment 6a
Facilities for Loading and Unloading Rail-Truck
Freight Equipment
Collaborating with Committee 6 and the AAR Motor Transportation
Advisory Committee
F. A. Hess (chairman, subcommittee), H. R. Beckmann, A. E. Biermann, W. O. Boess-
neck, B. E. Butterbaugh, G. H. Chabot, J. F. Chandler, E. H. Cook, Vern Copp,
B. E. Crumpler, C. M. Frazier, W. H. Goold, C. W. Hamilton, D. C. Hastings, Wm.
J. Hedley, J. E. Hoving, B. Laubenfels, G. Lichtenwalner, E. T. Lucey, G. W.
Mahn, Jr., T. F. Maloney, Jr., H. J. McNally, J. C. Miller, B. G. Packard, R. H.
Peak, Jr., H. L. Pepper, L. J. Riekenberg, L. VV. Robinson, R. A. Skooglun,
E. B. Sonnheim, C. E. Stoecker, R. F. Straw, T. De VV. Styles, J. G. Sutherland,
J. B. Sutton, J. J. Tibbits, J. VV. Tucker, W. E. Webster, Jr., C. E. Zeman.
Your committee submits the following material covering rail-truck loading and
unloading facilities, with the recommendation that it be adopted and published in the
Manual, adding it after the present material on page 14-3-18:
"The four types of facilities described above are illustrated by Figs. 4 to 7, incl."
(These figures are presented herewith on pages 174 to 177, incl.).
Report on Assignment 6b
Facilities for Loading and Unloading Multi-Level
Automobile Cars
This report covers track arrangements and special facilities for the loading and
unloading of multi-level automobile- and truck-carrying cars. This report is submitted
as information with the recommendation that the subject be continued.
Two typical layouts are illustrated. Fig. 1 shows a very simple one. The adjustable
ramp with adjustable movement can be mounted on a flat car or on a car-level dock.
A ramp is then provided to reach the ground. If a flat car is used, the ramp from tin
ground to the car is of a portable type so it can lie removed it' Deeded. Fig. 2 shows
an adjustable ramp serving several tracks, The adjustable ramp operates on rails so
that it can be moved in line with any of tin- tracks t" be unloaded or loaded. In some
Cases a fixed dock extends along the end of the multiple tracks and an adjustable ramp
i- provided on tin dock so that multi-level cars can be loaded or unloaded.
The drawings show supporting facilities desired or required 'Sir page 178 for Fig i
and page 179 for Fig. 2).
174
Yards and Terminals
Yards and Terminals
175
Hull. .'.7 1
176
Yards and Terminals
Yards and Terminals
177
178
Yards and Terminals
Yards and Terminals
179
180 Yards and Terminals
Report on Assignment 7
Water Front Terminals
VV. H. Pollard (chairman, subcommittee), F. E. Austerman, A. E. Biermann, W. Binzen,
E. G. Brisbin, G. H. Chabot, B. E. Crumpler, A. V. Dasburg, D. C. Hastings. J. E.
Hoving, F. S. King, T. F. Maloncv, Jr., H. J. McNally, J. C. Miller, B. G. Packard,
H. T. Roebuck, R. F. Straw, J. J. Tibbits, L. Tieman, W. E. Webster, Jr.
Your committee presents as information the following report covering loading and
unloading facilities for ore on the Great Lakes and the St. Lawrence River, including
its rail movement, as a phase of the assignment on water front terminals, with the
recommendation that the subject be discontinued.
Ore mined in the Great Lakes region of the United States and in Canada which is
chiefly destined to blast furnaces of steel mills located in the United States requires
numerous port facilities to load and unload the ore to and from vessels for its trans-
portation by water and rail in the route of destination.
The accompanying table provides pertinent information on ore loading docks on
the Great Lakes, includng two of importance on the Canadian side of the St. Lawrence
River.
A brief description of one of the facilities listed in the table, and its operation,
including rail movement of ore, is given below.
IRON ORE COMPANY OF CANADA, SEPT-ILES DOCK TERMINAL
ORE HANDLING FACILITIES
Ore trains consisting of 125 ore cars are transported over the Quebec North Shore
& Labrador Railway from the ore mines at Schefferville, Que., to the loading dock at
Sept-Iles, Que. Sept-IIes is located on the St. Lawrence River approximately 600 miles
east of Montreal, Que. Each ore car has a design capacity of 87 long tons of ore, and
as they are loaded at Schefferville, a sample is taken out of each car to determine the
grade of ore.
The ore trains arriving from the mines are brought to a five-track receiving yard.
A yard switcher then pushes the 125 cars over a hump where each car is weighed by
an electronic scale at the rate of one car every 15> sec. The cars then flow into a 12-
track classification yard, and are separated according to the grade of ore as determined
from the samples taken.
As a certain grade of ore is required for a ship, side-arm pushers running on a 3 -ft
6-in gage track between the tracks of the classification yard push the cars onto a single-
track lead. A barney hoist then pushes the cars, two at a time, into a tandem rotary
dumper where the ore passes through grissley beams which divert the oversize particles
into roll crushers, and the whole is then fed onto two 72-in conveyor belts.
If ore is to go directly to a ship, the two 72-in conveyor belts move the ore to
two 60-in conveyors which carry the ore to the mix-bins, each of which has a capacity
of 900 long tons. From the mix-bins, the ore travels by two 60-in conveyors with a
maximum capacity of 5500 long tons per hour each to the two traveling shiploaders
which dump directly into the holds of the ship at the loading dock.
The dock is 1600 ft in length, allowing 800 ft for a ship loading berth and an 800
ft mooring dock, and affords a draft of 37 ft at low tide.
If ore is not to go directly to a ship, the ore when dumped is transferred to two
48-in conveyor systems and deposited in a stockpile by a system of underground con-
Yards and Terminals
181
jo »■»«(!
■JBJIJOd
JO
vr\ o J> r
* 5?}
s^a
8.8.
o o
4 2
^00(1
JO
sinodc
jo
looa jo
(josa o-,
J»4*f. -li,
*Suj„
JO -4-J3 0,
MWtH
^*>iOd J63
jo -on
•ON HOOC
8 352 gg 382 283 8 8 8
CT» r^n« <^C\ N .-I CO %0 ■* >3 Ov flO c5
J J?? J? ?JJ
w-* C^ *^i -* >o>o ^) Co -»
•> "v ji
9 n* l1
o- o 6 6 6
- 3 Z
■O rH W^
U-f «-i .-<
797
33S
O Q Q
7 <?
3 ij
J c o
? j;
r- «c «
£8.
11
o ooo o c 8 o § ooo cc 2
*J *J »J *» *»** 41^^ «J -»J *> V*> *J
R RRR RR RRR RRR £R R
O <# £ V 4. • 0M9 "» 4J «K • « «t
■ 2 fi
I 5 >,
R* 88
. JJI-a -a . . .-a
-c a: 5: a; «j «■> ooo** o ** ♦> *i
.* |ii as
« * 3 3 ^jr"
s =x= SS
5 £21 21
8.8.8.
1
1? -
H
£ |
z •
m 2
5 a
s is
s - sfi
I I s
2 ft
5 3 £
I 3
I 3 5
2 5-
is.
& =
2 5
. 5
§ 6
5 I
5 i 3
k • H •
• U « K
t v. «, ^ o
3 s«s a.
• • o «
o a: k ** o
I HHBS
182 Yards and Terminals
veyors and two 60-ft-high self-propelled stackers which cover an area of 120 ft by
2000 ft on each side of each conveyor belt. Over 3,000,000 long tons of ore can be
stored in stockpile.
When ore is shipped from stockpile, it is reloaded into cars, using 6-cu-yd electric
shovels. The contents are then analyzed and the cars go through the weighing and
dumping cycles outlined above.
The ore cars, after being emptied in the rotary dumper, are run by gravity to a
four-track empty yard controlled by retarders and tower switching. One-hundred and
twenty-five cars are placed in each track, and bad order cars are run to a bad-order
track. The Quebec North Shore & Labrador Railway picks up trains of 125 cars from
this yard for transportation to Schefferville.
UNLOADING DOCKS
There are several different types of ore dock unloading facilities which are chiefly
located at ports along the southern shores of the Great Lakes or their tributaries. One
of the unloaders designated as an ore bridge can unload a vessel, stockpile and reload
the ore into suspended twin receiving hoppers which dump their load into an ore car
below for its transfer to the blast furnace. A bridge of this type operates on runway
tracks that are laid parallel to the face of the dock and on 350-ft centers. The bridge
is of the Warren truss type, 40 ft in depth, with V-shaped dock legs and plain shear
legs. The bridge from dock legs to end is 120 ft and from the shear legs to end 75 ft.
When unloading and stockpiling ore that requires a 35-ft hoist and 130-ft travel, a 12-
gross-ton clamshell-type ore bucket is operated from a trolley on the bridge which has
an operating cycle of 41 sec. The capacity of this operation is 1054 gross tons per hour.
In the operation of transferring the ore from stockpile to the receiving hoppers for the
loading of ore cars, a hoist of 35 ft and 190 ft travel is required- The cycle for this
operation is 48 sec with a capacity of 900 gross tons per hr. An ore dock facility of this
type usually has two bridges.
Another ore unloading facility employed extensively on the Great Lakes is the elec-
tric Hulett. This unloader operates on a traveling gantry under which some have as
many as six tracks for cars to be placed and loaded by a weigh lorry for rail movement
of the ore to storage area or directly to the steel mills. The gantry operates on runway
tracks that are laid parallel to the face of the dock and may be of any desired length.
Some of these facilities have a maximum outboard reach of 55 ft from face of dock to
the center line of rotation of the vertical leg on which a 20-ton clamshell-type ore
bucket is attached to the lower end. The bucket in open position measures 23 ft 9^4 in,
lip to lip, and can be rotated 360 deg for convenience in digging the ore from the ves-
sels' holds. The Hulett operates on the gantry in a shuttle movement, removing ore
from the vessel and discharging it in the weigh lorry. Any number of these unloaders
may be employed at a dock site.
Yards and Terminals 183
Report on Assignment 8
Present Trends in Yard Maintenance
F. S. King (chairman, subcommittee), R. F. Beck, A. E. Biermann, E. G. Brisbin,
H. M. Dalziel, A. V. Dasburg, W. H. Giles, D. C. Hastings, Wm. J. Hedlev, F. A.
Hess, T. F. Malonev, Jr., H. J. McNally, R. H. Peak. Jr., H. L. Pepper, L. F.
Pohl, W. H. Pollard, L. J. Riekenberg, C. E. Stoecker, L. Tieman, W. E. Webster, Jr.
The preliminary report on Present Trends in Yard Maintenance was published in
the Proceedings, Vol. 61, 1960, page 267, and indicated that improved maintenance of
yard tracks is being accomplished by:
(a) Use of better track materials.
(b) Increased mechanization of maintenance operations.
(c) More programming of maintenance work.
(d) Better deployment of yard maintenance forces.
(e) Fuller cooperation from operating personnel.
Items (a) and (b) are discussed in the Proceedings, Vol. 62, 1961, page 283. This
report elaborates on the remaining three of the above items, and is presented as infor-
mation with the recommendation that the subject be discontinued.
MORE PROGRAMMING OF MAINTENANCE WORK
Safe and efficient yard operation requires adequate yard maintenance. This can be
achieved most economically by the proper programming of yard maintenance work.
Generally, most railroads are programming some, if not all, of the following types of
this work:
1. Turnout and ladder renewals.
2. Rail laying.
3. Cross tie and switch timber renewals.
4. Raising and reballasting of running and body tracks.
5. Surfacing and lining of running, body tracks and ladders.
6. Rail end welding.
7. Frog welding.
8. Frog and switch grinding.
9. Joint bar renewals.
10. Bolt tightening.
1 1. Weed control.
12. Yard cleaning.
13. Road crossing maintenance.
14. Maintenance of access roads and walkways.
Usually these work programs are set up on an annual basis with enough flexibility
to meet emergencies or changing conditions, Where «li\ i-i<>n, district or system mechan-
ized gangs are used to perform any of this yard work, the yard program is "dove
tailed" into the main-track program. Yard work programs are usually sel up 1>> the
local yard supervision, amended and approved by division or district maintenance
officers ainl. mi some roads, approved by regional or system maintenance offii
The approved annual program, sel up into monthly work schedules, permits pro
gramming of material procurement on an annual basis. This practice is followed on
184 Yards and Terminals
some roads. Others carry a sufficient inventory of materials at storehouses, making
necessary material readily available for delivery on the order of local or division
supervision.
Successful completion of yard work programs, as with all work programs, requires
careful planning and execution by responsible supervision. Usually, division, district,
regional and system officers follow up the programs by means of weekly or monthly
work progress reports originated by the local supervision.
BETTER DEPLOYMENT OF YARD MAINTENANCE FORCES
During the past few years, the organization of yard maintenance forces has under-
gone considerable change. Section gang territories have been considerably increased, and
in many instances the number of men in the remaining section gangs reduced. Some
railroads have eliminated all section gangs in yards and terminals, replacing them with
floating or extra gangs with track inspectors or track patrol foremen. Wide variation
is found in the size of yard trackgangs, whether they be classified as section or extra
gangs. The larger gangs usually have one or more assistant foremen, making it possible
to break the gang into smaller sizes to work in more than one location. These forces
are usually supplemented with specialists such as rail welders, frog welders, switch point,
rail and frog grinders, truck drivers and other equipment operators.
Where section gangs have been eliminated, track inspectors or trad* patrol foremen
are assigned continually to patrol the yard. They check for conditions requiring atten-
tion and, in some cases, make minor repairs such as renewing an insulated joint, replac-
ing a broken splice bar, readjusting a switch, etc. Other conditions requiring the atten-
tion of more than one man, such as poor gage, surface or line, defective rails, frogs or
switch points, are reported to the yard maintenance supervision who arranges for neces-
sary correction. With the exception of emergencies or conditions requiring immediate
attention, the extra or floating gang or gangs are assigned on a daily basis. The small
gang handles the routine maintenance work such as spotting in an occasional tie or
switch timber, spot gaging, spot surfacing, renewing broken or defective rails, switch
points and frogs, correcting guard rail gage, renewing defective splice bars, repairing
run-through switches and handling the many other odd jobs that must be done to
keep the yard operating. In yards where the larger gangs are employed, they perform
this same work as well as some or all of the programmed out-of-face work. One or
more track laborers are assigned to service switch lamps and to clean and lubricate
switches. In the larger yards this is a continual five-day-a-week job.
In many of the larger yards the heavy programmed work is performed by mecha-
nized gangs organized specifically for the work to be performed. In some cases these
gangs were established and are used primarily for yard maintenance work. However, as
a result of curtailed maintenance expenditures caused by rising costs without compara-
tive increases in gross revenue, many roads have found it necessary to utilize their
mechanized trackwork gangs, which were originally organized for main track work, to
perform some, if not all, of the heavy programmed trackwork in yards.
Frog welders and grinder operators prolong the life of frogs and switches, reducing
the frequency of renewal of these expensive track materials. Many roads have found
that the efficiency of welders and grinder operators, as well as other machine operators,
can be increased by careful planning and scheduling of their work.
In recent years, yard maintenance forces have been considerably reduced. Mech-
anization and better utilization of the available forces have made it possible to offset
some of these force reductions. Careful planning, organizing and assigning of the avail-
Yards and Terminals 185
able forces is necessary in order to accomplish maximum constructive maintenance
work. The larger size gangs are assigned to heavy programmed work. In order to keep
them on their assigned job, specialists and small section or extra gang forces are avail-
able to handle the day-to-day emergencies that develop in large, busy yards. Material
is delivered to work sites in advance by track-mounted or off-track cranes, work trains
or automobile trucks, and wornout materials are picked up in the same manner. Actual
working time and efficiency of yard track forces has been increased by the use of buses
or man-hauling automobile trucks to transport these men, as rapidly as possible, directly
from their headquarters to the work locations, between work locations when necessary,
and back to headquarters. Every effort is being made to obtain the maximum mainte-
nance work from the limited forces available.
FULLER COOPERATION FROM OPERATING PERSONNEL
With the present curtailed yard forces and the necessity of using highly mechanized
specialist gangs to perform yard maintenance work, it is imperative that maximum
exclusive use of tracks or ladders be obtained efficiently to accomplish heavy out-of-face
work. Operating or transportation departments are aware of this situation and are
making definite efforts to provide their cooperation. When proper advance notice is
given to operating department supervision, one or two adjacent body tracks in a yard
are given up to the maintenance department. In most cases mechanized tieing and rais-
ing equipment requires the use of two tracks, the one being worked and an adjacent
one. In some yards mechanized gangs are permitted to hold one or more tracks from
the time the job is started until it is completed without clearing at the close of each
day's work, bringing about additional efficiency.
Heavy renewal or surfacing work on ladders, running tracks, hump tracks and
switches and car retarders presents a more complicated problem. Nevertheless, when
this work is planned well in advance to take advantage of light-traffic periods, operating
supervision is generally cooperating either by holding up yard movements or working
around the affected area. Track usage by maintenance forces of these types of facilities
varies in duration, depending on the traffic and physical characteristics of the respective
yard. Some roads, in an effort to minimize yard delays, and at the same time keep
their maintenance costs as low as possible, are renewing turnouts by constructing them
off-track. However, this is not a widespread practice.
In many yards operating officers are now providing a maximum of cooperation in
the handling of emergencies such as derailments, snow storms, etc. Considering the
limited forces available for this work, this is a practical necessity. The substitution of
mechanized snow-fighting equipment such as snow blowers and burners for track gangs
with brooms and shovels, requires track usage between yard movements. In most cases,
full cooperation between the operating and maintenance departments has proven that
emergencies can be handled more economically with a minimum of delay to yard
operations.
Generally, the former routine non-emergency services provided by the yard main-
tenance forces for the operating department have been eliminated or great!} reduced,
with some exceptions. Track forces are called upon to clean up debris -m h as spilled
lading, broken drawbars, brake riggings, etc. In some yards car cleaning work is also
performed by these forces. However, reduced track forces have materially cut down
on the many other odd jobs formerly performed at the request "i operating personnel.
Generally, where this type of work i- performed, it is now being <l<me at a time con-
186 Yards and Terminals
venient to the maintenance department rather than making the job an "immediate"
emergency which was a former common practice.
Reduced yard maintenance budgets and the advent of the highly mechanized special-
ist gangs demand full cooperation between the operating and maintenance departments
in all respects. On most roads the operating department is as aware of this as the
maintenance department.
Report of Committee 20 — Contract Forms
D. F. Lyons, Chairman
]. L. Perrier,
F. M. Jones
Vice Chairman
\\ I). Kirkpatrick
D. G. West, Secretary
J. S. LlLLlE (E)
C. L. Gatton
L. W. LlNDBERG
J. F. Halpin
W. J. Malone
R. C. Heckel
F. J. McMahon
E. W. Smith
J. C. Miller
F. B. Mallas
P. A. Moffitt
K. I. Silvey
W. G. Nusz (E)
J. J. Baffa
G. W. Patterson (E)
E. E. Brady
C. M. Sherman
H. F. Brockett
\V. B. Small
R. F. CORRELL
C. W. Smith
A. B. Costic
W. R. Swatosh (E)
C. R. DuBose
D. S. Taylor
C. E. Gipe
J. D. Taylor
E. A. Graham
W. B. Tittsworth Jr.
E. M. Hastings, Jr.
J. W. Wallenius
A. F. Hughes
H. L. Zouck
Committee
(E) Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 20.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Brief progress report, presented as information page 188
2. Form of agreement covering purchase and application of weed-control
chemicals on railway property, collaborating with Committee 1.
Status report, presented as information page 188
3. Form of agreement for placing commercial advertising on railway bridges.
Preliminary report, presented for review and comments page 188
4. Form of agreement to cover disposal of surplus railway property.
Progress report, with recommendations submitted for adoption page 191
5. Form of lease for railway property used for unloading and storing liquified
petroleum gases, anhydrous ammonia, and other flammable or dangerous
materials.
Preliminary report, submitted for review and comments page 191
7. Bibliography on subjects pertaining to contract forms.
Progress report, presented as information page 195
The Cum mii in on Contract Forms,
Donald F. Lyons, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 574, November 1962.
187
188 Contract Forms
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
C. L. Gatton (chairman, subcommittee), H. F. Brockett, E. M. Hastings, Jr., W. J.
Malone, G. W. Patterson, W. R. Swatosh, J. D. Taylor, W. B. Tittsworth, Jr.
Last year your committee submitted comprehensive recommendations with respect
to Chapter 20 of the Manual, which were adopted and published in the 1962 Manual
Supplement. During the past year the committee made a further review of its Chapter,
but has no recommendations to suggest at this time.
Report on Assignment 2
Form of Agreement Covering Purchase and Application
of Weed-Control Chemicals on Railway Property
Collaborating with Committee 1
J. F. Halpin (chairman, subcommittee), J. J. Baffa, A. B. Costic, R. C. Heckel, VV. D.
Kirkpatrick, F. J. McMahon, W. B. Small.
Your committee reports the following progress in carrying out its Assignment 2.
No railroad company that the committee is aware of has a contract form which
it specifically uses for purchasing and applying weed-control chemicals. Most of the
contracts are written on forms furnished by the chemical company involved. The con-
tracts vary greatly in regard to supplying the material, either liquid or solid, furnishing
equipment for the application of the material, and operation of this equipment. Also,
insurance requirements were found to vary greatly depending on the part of the country
where the weed killer is being furnished.
Just recently the committee discovered that weed killers are getting into reservoirs
used by communities for drinking water, and the communities are contemplating laws
limiting the use of weed killers in certain areas.
The committee will continue to work on this assignment.
Report on Assignment 3
Form of Agreement for Placing Commercial Advertising
on Railway Bridges
R. C. Heckel (chairman, subcommittee), E. E. Brady, C. E. Gipe, F. M. Jones, W. D.
Kirkpatrick, C. W. Smith, J. W. Wallenius, D. G. West.
Your committee submits as information a tentative draft of a form to cover this
assignment, and would be glad to receive any comments and criticisms.
FORM OF AGREEMENT FOR PLACING COMMERCIAL
ADVERTISING ON RAILWAY BRIDGES
THIS AGREEMENT, made this day of , 19 .....
by and between , a corporation organized and
existing under the laws of the State of hereinafter
Contract Forms 189
called the Railway Company, and , hereinafter
called the Advertising Company.
WITNESSETH!
Whereas, the Advertising Company is engaged in the advertising business and
desires to solicit and execute in its own name, not in the name of or on behalf of the
Railway Company, agreements of license covering the placement and maintenance of
advertising on the sides of the Railway Company's bridge ,
situated at and substantially as shown
on the plan and in the specifications hereto attached designated as
dated and made a part
hereof, and
Whereas, the Railway Company is agreeable to said placement, maintenance and
use;
Now, Therefore, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein stipulated to be
kept by the parties hereto, it is agreed as follows:
1. License
The Railway Company gives permission to the Advertising Company to place,
maintain and use advertising matter on the sides of the Railway Company's bridge in
accordance with said plan, and specifications forming a part thereof, subject to the
requirements of the Railway Company.
2. Advertising Matter
The permission herein given is upon the express condition that any advertising
placed thereon during the term of this agreement shall be in substance, form, nature,
wording, kind and character satisfactory to and approved by the
of the Railway Company and upon any breach of this condition by Advertising Com-
pany such license shall terminate at once.
3. Permits and Taxes
Prior to the placement of the advertising the Advertising Company shall, at its
sole cost and expense, procure all necessary approvals, permits, or licenses required by
any governmental bodies or public authorities and shall pay all license fee and taxes,
or increase of taxes, assessed against or imposed by reason of the placement and main-
tenance of said advertising.
4. Cost and Maintenance
The Advertising Company shall, at its sole cost and expense and, in a manner
satisfactory to the of the Railway Company,
place and maintain the advertising during the continuance of this Agreement.
If the Railway Company should, in the course of its work in maintaniing. repair-
ing, renewing, altering, relocating or removing the bridge, find it necessary to damage,
deface, obliterate, mutilate or totally remove any advertising, the Railway Company
shall not be liable to Advertising Company or to it ^ advertisers for any such damage
or removal.
190 Contract Forms
5. Removal
Upon notice of termination of the license, the Advertising Company shall at once,
at its own cost and expense, remove the advertising and restore the Railway Company's
bridge to its former condition and to the satisfaction of the
of the Railway Company. If the Advertising Company within days
shall fail to do so, the Railway Company may remove the advertising and restore the
bridge to its former condition at the sole cost and expense of the Advertising Company,
which cost and expense the Advertising Company shall pay upon demand.
6. Rentals
The Advertising Company shall pay as rental therefor $ per
annum, in advance, for each year and at the same rate for any part of a year unexpired
at the termination of this license.
7. Indemnification
The Advertising Company shall not in any way or at any time interfere with the
safe passage of the Railway Company's trains; and Advertising Company agrees to
indemnify, protect and save harmless the Railway Company from and against all loss
of and damage to any property whatsoever (including property of the parties hereto
and of all other persons whomever), and all loss and damage on account of injury
to or death of any person whomsoever (including employees and patrons of the parties
hereto and all other persons whomsoever), and all claims and liability for such loss and
damage and cost and expenses thereof, caused by or growing out of operations of this
agreement or the presence, construction, maintenance, use or existence of said adver-
tising, whether caused by the fault, failure or negligence of the Railway Company or
otherwise.
8. Term
This agreement shall continue in force for years, and thereafter
from year to year until terminated by either party giving to the other day's
notice in writing at the last known address, of its intention so to do, and upon the
expiration of the time mentioned in such notice this agreement shall terminate.
9. Assignment
This agreement shall not be assigned or in any manner transferred without the
written consent of the of the
Railway Company.
Until terminated as herein provided, this agreement shall inure to the benefit of
and be binding upon the legal representatives and successors of the parties respectively.
In Witness Whereof, the parties hereto have executed this agreement in
, the day and year first above written.
Attest By
Secretary
Witness By
Contract Forms 191
Report on Assignment 4
Form of Agreement to Cover Disposal of Surplus
Railway Property
E. W. Smith (chairman, subcommittee), R. F. Correll, E. A. Graham, E. M. Hastings,
Jr., F. M. Jones, F. B. Mallas, J. L. Perrier, J. D. Taylor, J. W. Wallenius.
Last year your committee presented as information a tentative draft of a proposed
"short form" agreement to cover disposal of surplus railway property. This draft, as
presented in Bulletin 567, November 1961, page 174, is now submitted for adoption
and publication in the Manual.
It is planned to present at a later date a more comprehensive form to cover large
or high-value items and structures, or where there is a considerable hazard.
Report on Assignment 5
Form of Lease for Railway Property Used for Unloading
and Storing Liquified Petroleum Gases, Anhydrous
Ammonia and Other Flammable or
Dangerous Materials
F. B. Mallas (chairman, subcommittee), R. F. Correll, F. M. Jones, F. J. McMahon,
P. A. Moffitt, J. L. Perrier, C. W. Smith, J. D. Taylor.
Your committee submits, as a progress report, for information, a draft of the
above-named form.
The Manual at present does not contain a form of lease covering railway property
to be used for these specific products. Generally in use by railways is the industrial
site type of lease form which covers most types of industry, with the purpose of the
lease being written in. The lease as written below is an attempt to separate these
products, because of their dangerous nature, from those covered by the general type
of lease.
Members of the Association are requested to give the committee the benefit of
their suggestions and criticisms.
FORM OF LEASE FOR RAILWAY PROPERTY USED FOR
UNLOADING AND STORING LIQUIFIED PETROLEUM
GASES, ANHYDROUS AMMONIA AND OTHER
FLAMMABLE OR DANGEROUS MATERIALS
THIS LEASE, made this day of
19 . . . ., by and between a corporation
organized and existing under the laws of the State of
hereinafter called the Railway Company and
hereinafter called Lessee.
WITNESSETH:
Whereas, the Railway Company owns certain premises situated in
County of State of
further described as follows:
192 Contract Forms
in accordance with plat hereto attached, marked Exhibit "A" and dated
, 19 . . . . , and made a part hereof, and
Whereas, the Lessee desires to lease said premises from the Railway Company for
the purpose of constructing and maintaining thereon facilities for the unloading, storing
and handling of
and for no other purpose, and
Whereas, the Railway Company is agreeable to such lease, construction and main-
tenance thereon, subject to conditions herein set forth;
Now, Therefore, in consideration of the mutual covenants herein stipulated to be
kept by the parties hereto, it is agreed as follows:
1. Term
Lease shall be effective , 19 and shall extend
to 19 . . . . , unless sooner terminated as
herein provided.
2. Rental
Lessee shall pay to the Railway Company a rental of $
per , payable in advance,
beginning , 19
3. Improvement
Lessee shall, within months of the effective date of
this lease, begin the construction of said facilities and complete same within
months of said date according to plans and specifications
submitted to and approved by the Railway Comapny in advance of construction. In
event of destruction thereof in whole or part, Lessee shall within
months thereafter commence the work of rebuilding or repairing and complete same
within months of said date of destruction.
4. Laws and Regulations
Lessee is permitted to and shall use premises for unloading, storing and handling
of , which product is of a dangerous and
flammable nature, and lighting of premises, pump houses or other enclosures shall be
by electricity. Lessee shall comply with all Federal, State and local regulations and
ordinances and with all regulations prescribed from time to time by any public author-
ity having jurisdiction or by the Railway Company, relating to the unloading, storing
and handling of said product.
5. Clearance
Lessee shall not place or permit to be placed, or to remain, any material, struc-
ture or pole or other obstruction within feet laterally of
the center line of track or within feet vertically from the top
of rail of any track.
6. Unloading Device
Lessee is permitted to construct, maintain and operate at a point opposite the
leased premises near the track serving them, a device for unloading
Contract Forms 193
from railroad cars, together with pipelines
extending from a connection with said unloading device to Lessee's tanks located on
said leased premises, said unloading device to be constructed, maintained and operated
in a manner satisfactory to the Railway Company, and no portion thereof to be closer
than feet to the center line of any track when said device
is not in use.
7. Condition of Premises
Lessee shall at all time keep the premises in a safe, clean and sanitary condition,
and shall not mutilate, damage, misuse, alter or permit waste thereon.
8. Taxes
The Lessee shall pay all taxes, licenses and other charges which may be assessed or
levied upon said premises, including improvements thereon, and upon the business of
the Lessee upon said premises, or against the Railway Company by reason of occupation
or use of said premises by the Lessee.
9. Termination
Either party hereto may terminate this lease at any time, by giving to the other
party days written notice to that effect. Acceptance of rent
in advance by the Railway Company shall not act as a waiver of the right to terminate
this lease.
10. Notice
Any written notice given by the Railway Company to the Lessee shall be deemed
to be properly served if the same be delivered to the Lessee, or one of the Lessee's
agents, or if posted on said premises, or if mailed, postpaid, addressed to the Lessee at
the Lessee's last known place of business.
11. Refund
Rent paid in advance for a period extending beyond the termination of this lease
shall be refunded to the Lessee, unless such termination shall be on account of violation
or non-fulfillment of any of the terms of this lease by the Lessee, or on account of
abandonment of said premises by the Lessee, in which case the amount paid as rental
shall be retained by the Railway Company.
12. Liability
Lessee covenants and agrees to indemnify, protect, and forever hold harmless the
Railway Company from any and all claims, liabilities, and expenses which the Railway
Company shall incur by reason of any real or alleged injury (including injury resulting
in death) to any person or persons whomsoever (including the employees of the parties
hereto), and from all loss, claims liabilities and expenses by reason of any real or alleged
damage to or destruction of property (including the property of the parties hereto)]
arising out of, or in any way attributable to the use of said premises by the Lessee,
or in any way attributable to the unloading, storing or handling of said product by the
Lessee, regardless of whether or not such injury or damage is caused by negligence of
the Railway Company, its agents or employees.
194 Contract Forms
13. Abandonment
The failure of the Lessee to occupy or use said premises for the purpose herein
stated for days at any one time shall be deemed an abandonment
thereof. An abandonment of said premises shall, at the option of the Railway Company,
operate as an absolute and immediate termination of this lease without notice.
14. Removal of Improvements
Upon the termination of this lease in any manner, the Lessee shall deliver to the
Railway Company the possession of said premises to substantially their former state.
Should the Lessee fail, within days after the date of termination
of this lease, to make such removal or restoration, then the Railway Company may,
at its election, either remove said improvement and restore said premises to substantially
their former state at the sole cost of the Lessee, or may take and hold the said
improvements as its sole property.
15. Forfeiture
Any breach of any covenant, stipulation or condition herein contained to be kept
and performed by the Lessee, shall be sufficient cause for the immediate termination
of this lease.
16. Renewal
A lawful continuance of the tenacy beyond said term shall be deemed a renewal
thereof for the further term of to end at
the expiration thereof, without further notice; and every further lawful continuance
shall be deemed a further renewal for a like term, to end in a like manner, and every
renewal or holding over shall be subject to the provisions of this lease.
17. Assignment
This lease shall not be assigned or in any manner transferred, nor shall said prem-
ises or any part thereof be sublet, used or occupied by any party other than the Lessee,
nor for any purpose other than specified herein, without written consent of the Railway
Company.
18. Successors
Until terminated as hereinbefore provided, this lease shall inure to the benefit of
and be binding upon the parties hereto, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors
and assigns.
In Witness Whereof, the parties hereto executed this lease in
, as of the day and year first above written.
Witness
Witness
By
Lessee
Bv
Contract Forms 195
Report on Assignment 7
Bibliography on Subjects Pertaining to Contract Forms
K. J. Silvey (chairman, subcommittee), A. F. Hughes, J. S. Lillie, L. \V. Lindberg,
J. C Miller, W. G. Nusz, C M. Sherman, D. S. Taylor, H. L. Zouck.
Your committee submits the following list of reference books for the guidance of
engineers involved in the handling of contracts:
1. Engineering Contracts and Specifications, 3rd ed., (by R. W. Abbett), pub-
lished by Wiley, New York.
2. Contracts, Specifications, and Law for Engineers (by Clarence W. Dunham
and Robert D. Young), published by McGraw-Hill, New York.
3. The Specifications and Law on Engineering Works (by Walter C. Sadler),
published by John Wiley & Sons, New York.
4. Legal Phases of Engineering — Contracts and Specifications (by Ivan C. Craw-
ford), published by the Macmillan Co., New York.
5. Legal Aspects of Engineering (by Walter C. Sadler), published by John Wiley
& Sons, New York.
Report of Committee 25 — Waterways and Harbors
F. J. Olsen, Chairman
R. J. Clarke,
Vice Chairman
J. G. Miller
M. A. Michel
J. C. Fenno
L. E. Bates
G. W. Becker
E. A. Beekley
G. W. Benson
R. L. Bostian
B. M. Dornblatt
B. Elkind (E)
D. GULLATT
L. W. Haydon
H. F. Kimball
E. S. Laws
Shu-t'ien Li
M. S. Patterson
J. F. Piper
A. L. Sams
Committee
(E) Member Emeritus
Those whose names are set in fold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 25.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your Committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Brief progress statement, submitted as information page 198
2. Current policies, practices and developments dealing with navigation proj-
ects, collaborating with AAR Competitive Transportation Division — Water-
ways.
Progress report, submitted as information page 198
3. Bibliography relating to benefits and costs of inland waterway projects
involving navigation.
Progress report presenting four additional references with annotations .... page 199
4. The use of hydraulic models for the study and resolution of waterway
problems.
No report.
6. Planning, construction and maintenance of rail-water transfer facilities
Progress report submitted as information on the study of roll-on, roll-off,
lift-on, lift-off and conveyor-type operations page 202
7. Relative merits and economics of construction materials used in waterfront
facilities.
Progress report, submitted as information, on high-strength steel and box
sections in heavy-duty fender piling of waterfront facilities page 205
The Committee on Waterways \m> Harbors,
F. J. Olsen, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 574. November 1962.
197
198 Waterways and Harbors
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
J. G. Miller (chairman, subcommittee), A. L. Sams.
Your committee submits as information the following report of progress in con-
nection with revising Parts 2, 3 and 4 of Chapter 25 of the Manual:
Part 2 — Lands Subject to Servitude of Navigation as Affecting Protection
of Roadbeds Built or to Be Built on Proposed Dam Pool Areas
Study is under way looking to revising this part of the Manual to reflect court
decisions since 1941.
Part 3 — Bridges Over Navigable Waterways
Study is being made looking to revising this part of the Manual to reflect the
provisions of the Truman-Hobbs Act.
Part 4 — Clearances
The committee is making a study of the published clearances established by the
Corps of Engineers, U. S. Army.
Report on Assignment 2
Current Policies, Practices, and Developments Dealing
with Navigation Projects
Collaborating with AAR Competitive Transportation Division — Waterways
B. M. Dornblatt (chairman, subcommittee), G. W. Becker, G. W. Benson.
Your committee lists as information the following documents pertaining to naviga-
tion projects which may prove of interest and serve as a guide for future reference:
1. National Transportation Policy, preliminary draft of a report prepared for the
Committee on Interstate and Foreign Commerce, U. S. Senate, by the Special
Study Group on Transportation Policies in the U. S., 1-3-61. U. S. Printing
Office, Washington 25, D. C Price $2.00)
2. Report No. 29. Report of the Select Committee on National Water Resources.
(U. S. Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C.)
3. Committee Print No. 11. Water Resource Activities in the U. S. (U. S. Print-
ing Office, Washington 25, D. C.)
4. Committee Print. Supplemental Information on Subjects Covered by the Com-
mittee's Studies, Select Committee on National Water Resources, U. S. Senate,
Pursuant to Senate Report No. 48, 86th Congress. (U. S. Printing Office,
Washington 25, D. C.)
5. Cross-Florida Barge Canal Project (T. B. Hutcheson, Zone 3, Committee on
Waterways, AAR, chief engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond, Va.)
6. The Economic Prospects of Cross-Florida Barge Canal Project. (Charles A.
Welsh, director, Graduate Program in Business Administration, Rollins College,
Winter Park, Fla.)
Waterways and Harbors 199
7. Hydraulics of River Channels as Related to Navigability, Geological Survey
Water-Supply Paper 1539-W (U. S. Printing Office, Washington 25, D. C.)
8. Senate Document 97, 89th Congress, Second Session, Policies, Standards and
Procedures in the Formulation, Evaluation and Review of Plans for Use and
Development of Water and Related Land Resources, May 1962.
News reports under date of September 16, 1962, indicate that the proposed Tennes-
see-Tombigbee Canal, which would link these already developed rivers, and shorten the
distance between some inland ports and the Gulf of Mexico by 650 miles, has been
apparently by-passed by Congress for actual construction money. This project is esti-
mated to cost $262,244,000 and calls for 253 miles of canalized waterways between the
two rivers. The channel would be partly 9 ft and partly 12 ft deep. The Corps of Engi-
neers has requested $225,000 of additional funds to complete the planning.
A hearing was held on Oct. 4 by the Chicago District, Corps of Engineers, U. S.
Army, on plans to build a deep harbor at Burns Ditch, east of Gary, Ind.
The Florida Waterway Association has actively embarked on a campaign for secur-
ing endorsement of a cross-Florida barge canal above Tampa and below Jacksonville,
Fla. This proposed canal would service Cape Canaveral.
Report on Assignment 3
Bibliography Relating to Benefits and Costs of Inland
Waterway Projects Involving Navigation
M. A. Michel (chairman, subcommittee), G. W. Becker, B. M. Dornblatt, H. W. Kim-
ball, M. S. Patterson.
Your committee submits the following report of progress which presents four
additional references with annotations.
1961
1. January 3, 1961, 87th Congress, 1st Session — Committee Print "National Trans-
portation Policy — Preliminary Draft of a Report Prepared for the Committee on Inter-
state and Foreign Commerce by the Special Group on Transportation Policies in the
United States. (Pursuant to S. Res. 29, 151 and 244 of 86th Congress.)"
This report is commonly known as the Doyle Report and is very ably prepared.
It contains an excellent section on "user charges" and is adequately documented.
2. August 1961, "Economic Evaluation of Inland Waterway Projects", by Shu-t'ien
Li and Eric E. Bottoms. Journal of the Waterways and Harbors Division. Proc. ASCE.
This paper points out that the adverse effects due to displacement of competitive
transportation by diversion of traffic to waterways should be recognized. It also points
out a number of additional negative benefits which should be observed in determination
on a benefit-to-cost ratio. Appended to the paper is a selected bibliography of 220 rein
ences in chronological order, dating from 1874 to 1961.
3. Permanent International Association of Navigation Congress XX th International
Navigation Congress — Baltimore, September 1961. Section 1. Subject 1 "Criteria for
Economic Justification of New Inland Navigable Waterways, etc."
200 Waterways and Harbors
A total of 13 excellent papers were presented which dealt with economic justifica-
tion. They are covered in a brief General Report by Thomas J. Fratar for P.I.A.N.C.
a. Germany (Federal Republic) — The paper lauds the many-sided influence of in-
land waterways on the economic development of the regions through which they pass.
The summary, however, contains the following, which is most interesting (page 29):
"Where, however, the development of the inland waterways is to the economic
advantage of several parties, it is appropriate to regard the internal waterway as an
economic complex and to amalgamate the profit-making capacity of the various interests.
For this purpose the incorporation of joint-stock companies has proved the most
efficient solution."
b. Belgium — This paper is forcefully in favor of public waterways; however, it
does state (page 44) that: "Taxes levied on water traffic in Belgium do not exceed 10-15
percent of freight rates and cover expenses." (This would be equivalent to a user
charge.)
c. Brazil — The use of various cost formulas in the selection of new ways of trans-
portation are indicated. It is pointed out that the waterway improvement results in
multiple benefits, such as flood control, irrigation, municipal and industrial water sup-
ply, hydroelectric power, sewage disposal and recreation. General statements in the
summary (page 79) of interest are:
"It should be remembered that water transport is economical; frequently, however,
the means for rendering transport profitable is expensive.
"When there is no navigable waterway and the area is in course of development
or about to be developed, necessitating the transport of large quantities of ore and coal
and other bulk merchandise, it is the railway which is the preferable means of transport."
d. France — The crux of the economic considerations in the French paper (page 85)
is covered by Reporter Thomas J. Fratar in the General Report (page 8) as follows:
It is concluded that the problems involved in evaluating the economic justification
of a waterway where a major stimulation of industrial development is involved cannot
be solved by simplified patterns that consider only value, but that they involve planning
decisions on the highest level of the State. The large investments involved raise problems
of choice between different areas of the country. The enrichment of a region by the
creation of a new waterway of high capital cost may have as a corollary a decrease in
the gain or even an impoverishment of other regions. A basic question then, is to what
extent an investment considered for one region constitutes an increase in wealth or
merely a displacement of wealth."
e. Great Britain — The British paper deals extensively with improvements to exist-
ing waterway facilities and does not treat on economic justification.
f. Italy — The Italian paper points out that their waterways are fairly straight and
have little rise or fall but that these conditions would result in minimum cost for other
forms of transportation as well. "Due to high cost of transshipment, water transporta-
tion can usually compete only where origin and destination of shipments is along or
extremely close to the waterway." — Fratar General Report, page 10.
g. Poland — The Polish paper considers waterway improvements cheaper than rail-
road construction and of greater capacity. Following are some waterway advantages
mentioned: lower cost labor, better ratio of weight of equipment to weight of load; less
fuel consumption, greater equipment life; lesser maintenance costs; better adapted to
carry fragile and very large articles; better adapted to international trade, enhancing
earning of foreign currency. The principal disadvantages include: dependence on weather
Waterways and Harb o rs 201
and hydrologic conditions; slow speed; greater length of circuitous route; need for
transfer to other means of transportation.
h. Portugal — The following two hypotheses for determining economic project justi-
fication are made:
(1) The annual cost for construction and operation of a state waterway would
be covered by taxes on navigation, tolls and, indirectly, by additional taxes
from expanded economic activities stimulated by the new waterway.
(2) If constructed and operated by a private corporation, repayment for annual
costs would come through tolls or operation of a barge company by investors
and the retention of revenues therefrom.
Economic evaluations note that diversion of traffic would aggravate present railway
deficits. It is recommended that this be considered in waterway project evaluation.
i. Switzerland — The Swiss paper deals principally with the comparison of cost of
shipping petroleum by waterway and by pipeline in Switzerland.
j. Sweden — The Swedish paper describes economic steps suited to a country where
competing transportation systems are government owned, ignoring free enterprise.
k. United States — This paper covers analyses usually adhered to by U. S. Federal
agencies, concluding with the benefit-cost ratio principle as a virtuous method of de-
termining economic justification for waterway projects. It avoids, however, losses to
land carriers through diversion of traffic to the waterways as a negative benefit. It also
falls short on that controversial issue "interest rate", wherein the Federal Agencies use
something of the order of 2l/2 percent to 2% percent, while current market yields in
the financing of long term Treasury Bonds is in the neighborhood of 4 percent. Further,
it indicates that "savings in transportation costs are usually considered as general bene-
fits to the public" — Fratar; although it is factual that the user of the waterway is the
prime beneficiary.
1. Union of Soviet Socialist Republics — This paper presents a socialistic method
of economic comparison studies wherein all means of production, including transport
methods, are state-owned.
m. Yugoslavia — This paper deals essentially with an authorized and proposed in-
land navigation system for an area in the northeastern section of Yugoslavia which
includes portions of the Danube and Sava rivers. Promotion of inland waterway naviga-
tion is a strong national policy in lieu of continued development of the existing railway
system. Major factors in justifying the project were: (1) poor conditions and insuffi-
cient capacity of existing railway network, (2) seasonal agricultural production un-
favorable for economical rail transport and (3) annual maintenance, equipment and
transportation costs on waterways considered to be 30 to 50 percent lower than rail.
The foregoing are not necessarily national policies of the countries represented at the
P I.A.X.C. meeting, but the expression of the authors of the papers. A number of the
authors conclude that to a very large degree the decision to build a waterway is a po-
litical one and involves planning decision at the hitrhest level.
1962
4. May 29, 1962 — Senate Document No. 97, 87th Congress, 2nd Session: "Policies,
Standards and Procedures in the Formulation, Evaluation and Review of Plans for Use
and Development of Water and Related Lund Resources." Prepared under the direction
of The President''; Water Resourcei Council, c S Government Printing Office, Wash-
ington, D. C
202 Waterways and Harbors
This document was approved by President Kennedy on May 15, 1962, for applica-
tion by the Interior, Agriculture, Health, Education and Welfare and the Army Depart-
ments, also, the Bureau of Budget.
Of considerable concern is the section on interest which ". . . shall be based upon
the average rate of interest payable by the Treasury on interest-bearing marketable
securities of the United States outstanding at the end of the fiscal year preceding such
computation which, upon original issue, had terms to maturity of 15 years or more."
The document further indicates that a detailed section on cost bearing factors, which
will include navigation, is in the course of preparation.
Report on Assignment 6
Planning, Construction and Maintenance
of Rail-Water Transfer Facilities
J. C. Fenno (chairman, subcommittee), E. A. Beekley, G. W. Benson, R. L. Bostian,
R. J. Clarke, L. W. Haydon, E. S. Laws, J. G. Miller.
Your committee submits as information the following report of progress on the
study of roll-on, roll-off, lift-on, lift-off and conveyor type operations.
The distinctive feature of roll-on, roll-off, lift-on, lift-off and similar types of ship-
ping services is the transfer between land carriers and ships of loaded rail cars, highway
trailers or containers instead of individual pieces of cargo. Great interest in these types
of operations has developed in recent years as a result of the rising cost of conventional
cargo handling methods. The growth and development of piggyback, containerization
and other special equipment on the railroads, while not devised particularly for tran-
shipment by water, lends itself well to such service. Vessels of special design to handle
prepackaged cargo are being constructed to reduce terminal and ship cargo handling
time and to radically reduce the high cost of manual labor.
The design of facilities for a specialized terminal will be influenced largely by the
variation of the water level in the ship berth. In the United States, for example, mean
high tides vary from 1 ft at Galveston, Tex., to 29.6 ft at Anchorage, Alaska. At New
Orleans, the mean range of river stage is 13 ft and the extreme range, 21 ft. These varia-
tions will obviously affect the design of transfer facilities, particularly for the roll-on,
roll-off type of operation.
Listed below is an outline and discussion for further study.
GENERAL
1. Type of Facility Required
a. Roll-on, roll-off.
b. Lift-on, lift-off.
c. Conveyor.
d. Combinations of the above.
2. Location Considerations
a. Type of terminal.
b. Dock facilities.
c. Rail facilities.
d. Highway facilities.
e. Utilities.
f. Nature of waterway.
Waterways and Harbors 203
DISCUSSION
1. Type of Facility Required
a. Roll-on, Roll-off. This type of facility includes ferries or barge-type operation in
which freight cars are rolled directly onto and off of the water carrier, and transfer of
cargo is not necessary. The major problem is fluctuation in water level with consequent
complications in design of transfer bridges.
b. Lift -on, Lift-off. This type of facility involves the use of cranes of sufficient
capacity to handle the cargo involved. The cranes transfer cargo from freight car to
hold or deck of vessel and vice versa. The cranes could be on shore, on the vessel, or
both. Containers lend themselves well to this type of operation.
c. Conveyor. Where bulk commodities are to be handled, the conveyor system ap-
pears to be the solution. There are in operation today, particularly at large coal han-
dling facilities, terminals employing car dumpers and direct conveyor loading to the
vessel. This type of operation lends itself well to automation. Also under this heading
would be the handling of materials through pipelines.
d. Combinations. A general cargo handling facility would embody the use of several
of the above, and possibly all of the separate types.
2. Location Considerations
a. Type of terminal. Of prime consideration is the nature of the cargo to be
handled. Flammable materials or materials of a corrosive nature would entail special
consideration. The choice of a location would be influenced by several factors, including
the inland origins and destinations of the cargo units moving through the terminal and
the ease of access to the site by land carriers.
b. Dock Facilities. The size and number of vessels, and local conditions of tide, wind-
current and accessibility will influence the type of berth. Ship berthing facilities may be
grouped into five general types: (1) wharves located on slips dredged into the shore,
(2) finger piers projecting out from the shore, (3) marginal wharves paralleling the
shore, (4) ferry-type slips, and (5) offshore berths.
Slip-type wharves and finger piers are suitable for either end or side-loading ves-
sels. Docking is usually difficult, and adequate clearances are required beyond a finger
pier or a slip to permit maneuvering of a vessel. This type of pier makes good use of
restricted water frontage and facilitates docking in strong currents. They are highly
susceptible to silting.
Marginal wharves are suitable for side-loading vessels and can be used for end-
loading vessels if offshore structures or pontoons are provided to support the end transfei
bridge. Docking is rapid. This construction is particularly suitable where the waterway is
relatively narrow. There is less interference with currents and maintenance costs are
reduced.
Ferry-type slips are suitable largely for end-loading vessels. Docking i- rapid. but
adequate clearance is desirable in front of the slip for maneuvering the vessel.
Off-shore berths are suitable for end loading or side-loading vessels, and usually
consist of breasting and mooring dolphins and may be constructed in deep water to
minimize dredging. This construction usually requires a long, over-water approach.
Necessary literage makes for higher cost of operation, but this type of construction may
be required where water adjacent to the shore is shallow. Off-shore berths can well be
used for transfer of liquid materials through pipelines.
c. Rail Facilities. The terminal should be located within the switching district limits
of the port where possible, and with access to all railroad- serving the port M.udialling
204 Waterways and Harbors
facilities are desirable with a sufficient capacity to accumulate rail cars for loading on
ship, and storage for the cars unloaded. The location should be as close as possible to
the ship berth to minimize the number of hauling units needed. The total area for
marshalling is determined by the capacity of the vessels, frequency of sailings and the
shape and arrangement of the terminal area as it relates to the effective use of space
available. The design should follow accepted practices as to grade, curvature, track cen-
ters, etc. Space permitting, it would follow that the rail facilities should be as complete
as possible, including repair facilities, classification yard, fueling facilities, loading ramps,
interchange yard, and possibly offices and warehousing. The latter would not necessarily
have to be located on the terminal itself, but should be in the immediate vicinity. The
number, location and size of transfer bridges and cranes would be a function of the type
of facility, as would be the design of conveyors. Some provision should be made for
weighing cars, but again this need not be on the terminal itself if scales are available in
the vicinity.
The criteria for marshalling facilities and receiving and delivery facilities for roll-on,
roll-off and lift-on, lift-off services is quite similar. The design of conveyor-type opera-
tion should be coordinated with the method by which the cargo is stowed in the ship.
Conveyors can be used for stern, bow, hatch or side loading. Several eastern railroads
employ automated conveyor systems for unloading coal direct from hopper cars into
vessels. These systems embody a hump yard, car dumpers, and miles of conveyors, and
are capable of accommodating several thousands cars per day. Terminals of such capacity
require a thoroughly complete and modern communication system. Similar systems may
well be utilized for the handling of other bulk commodities, such as grain or sugar, pro-
viding sanitation controls are utilized.
Handling of liquid materials, particularly flammable liquids such as petroleum prod-
ucts, introduce special problems. There is not only the constant danger of fire, but con-
tamination of the waterway should be avoided. Large storage areas for the material
itself are desirable, as well as transhipment facilities. The pollution of the waterway
through leakage and spillage should be a matter of particular concern where the facility
is located on inland waters, but is also a major problem in large coastal ports, as evi-
denced by the activity of the commissions of governments all over the world.
d. Highway Facilities. Highway access to the terminal should be adequate for the
rapid movement of trucks to and from the terminal. Special study will be required to
determine the improvements which would be needed to facilitate traffic flow on access
roads, which may include such features as widening, channelization, provision for sepa-
rate turning lanes, traffic light control or grade separations. It is desirable to reduce the
conflict between truck and rail movements. Applicable standards of the American Asso-
ciation of State Highway Officials should be adhered to. Adequate facilities for storage
is desirable, as well as transfer facilities, surfaced with a high-type pavement with ade-
quate structural strength. A classification system should be provided where trailers are
to be rolled or lifted onto the vessel without transfer of cargo. Some sort of a delivery
and receiving area is desirable, including a gate house where trucks are checked and
space for trucks awaiting clearance.
e. Utilities. Adequate public utilities should be available, including power, water,
sewers, communication and fire-fighting equipment. Not to be overlooked are facilities
for replenishing of ships stores.
/. Nature of Waterway. The nature of the waterway will influence to a large extent
the design of the terminal. Tidal range or river stage should be considered in the design
of transfer bridges. Currents, susceptibility to silting, depth of waterway and area avail-
Waterways and Harbors 205
able for maneuvering of vessels will determine to a large extent the design of piers.
Operating costs would be affected considerably by the necessity and frequency of dredg-
ing operations. Depth of waterway will affect the size of vessel and the amount of cargo
which can be carried. Climatic conditions are also a factor, particularly where there is a
possibility of ice closing the waterway. Corrosive effects of salt water, and presence of
marine borers should be considered in the choice of materials for docks and piers.
Report on Assignment 7
Relative Merits and Economics of Construction
Materials Used in Waterfront Facilities
Shu-t'ien Li (chairman, subcommittee), B. M. Dornblatt.
Your committee submits the following report on "Relative Merits of High-Strength
Steels and Box Sections in Heavy-Duty Fender Piling of Waterfront Facilities."
Relative Merits of High-Strength Steels and Box
Sections in Heavy-Duty Fender Piling
of Waterfront Facilities
By SHU-T'IEN LI
Chairman, Subcommittee 7, Committee 25 — Waterways and Harbors
Introduction
The development of "Energy Design Criteria for Fender Piling and Relative Merits
of Different Materials"1 was undertaken by the writer in 1960 and presented at the 1961
Annual Convention of the Association. These criteria were primarily aimed to apply
to general-purpose wharves for berthing general-cargo ships of not much over 20,000
gross-ton displacement capacity.
For much heavier duty wharves requiring much more energy-absorbing capacity
in their fender piling, comparative economic studies for specific projects should take into
consideration the advantages of using high-strength steels and adopting more efficient
box sections, as the spacing of the largest and strongest obtainable natural timber pile,
such as greenheart, becomes too close for efficient driving into, and holding by, the sub-
merged underground, although dolphins of pile clusters may be resorted to.
These concepts are adapted and extended from ideas that came mainly from the
other side of the Atlantic. In their written discussions of the writer's paper on "Opera-
tive Energy Concept in Marine Fendering,'"-' John E. G. Palmer,' MICE., partner of
1 Li, Shu-t'ien: "Energy Design Criteria for Fendering Tiling and Relative Merit- of Different
Materials," AREA-Bulletin, Vol. 62, November 1"60. pp. 394-406; Prm \KI V Vol. <>2, 1961. pp.
394-406.
3 Li, Shu-t'ien: "Operative Energy Concept in Marine Fendering." Proc., ASCE, Vol. 87 \
\V\V3, Journal of the Waterways and Harbor- Division, August 1961, Paper 2875, pp. 1-28.
3 Palmer, John E. G.: Discussion of the above paper by Shu-t'ien Li, Proi VS( 1 Vd U N
\V\V1. Journal of the Waterways and Harbor- Division, February 1962, Paper 3068, pp. 159-160.
206 Waterways and Harbors
Rendel, Palmer & Tritton, chartered consulting engineers of London, England, advocates
the use of high-strength steels and cylindrical or tubular sections for heavy-duty fender
piles; and Paul Leimdorfer,1 head, Department of Quays and Docks, the Harbor Board
of Stockholm, Sweden, stresses the use of steel pipes and box piles, especially with diffi-
cult ground conditions.
In the writer's closure17 responsive to their discussions, the merits of using high-
strength steels and tubular sections in heavy-duty fender piling was further investigated.
The results are summarized as follows under:
A. Theoretical development
B. Inherent demerits of cylindrical fender piles
C. Advantages of using high-strength steels
D. Shortcomings of high-strength steels to be avoided
E. Merits and versatilities of high-strength steel fender piles of box sections
A. THEORETICAL DEVELOPMENT
The maximum kinetic energy due to impact that may be delivered to a fender pile
from a berthing or berthed ship and temporarily stored as internal strain energy in the
former at allowable working flexural stress in conventional rigid-wharf and jetty types
of fender-pile construction may be determined by:
2(12)3 IL.
W
<-f) «>
where W = total internal strain energy of each fender pile as represented by its internal
work in foot-kips due to flexure at allowable working flexural stress,
= maximum limit of kinetic energy due to impact,
/= moment of inertia in feet4 of the cross section of the fender pile about the
neutral plane of bending.
c — most remote fiber distance from the neutral axis in feet.
L = vertical span in feet of fender pile between points of top and bottom sup-
ports for rigid-wharf and jetty types.
£:= Young's modulus of elasticity of the fender-pile material = 418 (10) * kips
per sq ft for all grades of structural steel, and = 461(10)3 kips per sq ft for
greenheart at re-saturation moisture content of 25 percent.
/ = allowable working flexural stress of material in kips per square inch, = 20
ksi for ASTM A 36 steel; 27.8 ksi for ASTM A 242, A 440, and A 441
high-strength steels of SO ksi yield point ; and 6.9 ksi for greenheart under
transient loading.
In Eq. (1), the right-hand member represents the entire internal strain energy due
to flexure alone between points of top and bottom supports of the fender pile, as the
insignificant amount (generally less than 1 percent and rarely more than 2 percent of
internal strain energy due to simultaneous shear deformation has been neglected in the
derivation.
4 Leimdorfer, Paul: Discussion of the above cited Paper by Shu-t'ien Li, Proc. ASCE, Vol. 88, No.
WW2, Journal of the Waterways and Harbors Division, May 1962, Paper 3153, pp. 159-162.
BLi, Shu-t'ien: Author's closure of Paper cited in Footnote 2, Proc, ASCE, Vol. 88, No. WW4,
Journal of the Waterways and Harbors Division, November 1962.
Waterways and Harbors
207
B. INHERENT DEMERITS OF CYLINDRICAL FENDER PILES
Using Eq. (1), the allowable working-energy-storing capacities of each fender
pile of: (1) 12- by 12-in greenheart; (2) 12 WF 190 of A 36 steel, the heaviest of 12 WF
sections of the same nominal overall dimensions as the 12- by 12-in greenheart; and
(3) 34l/2-in diameter by y^-'m wall thickness cylindrical section of A 36 steel, having an
area of 53.41 sq in which is approximately the same as that of 55.86 sq in for the 12
WF 190; all 50 ft long in vertical span between supports, have been computed with the
following results:
Table 1 — Energy Capacity of Cylindrical Pile vs. Some Other Piles
Material
Section
Energy Capacity
in Ft- Kips
Greenheart
12 x 12
6.00
ASTM A 36 steel
12 WF 190 »
4.69
Cylindrical Section2
34 Yi-\r\. dia. by
J4-in. wall thickness
2.98
Sectional areas: 1SS.86 sq in, -53.41 sq in.
Without further calculation, the inherent demerits of cylindrical fender piles may
be stated as:
(1) Much less energy capacity, as shown in Table 1, being less than two-thirds
that of an equal-weight wide-flange section.
(2) Higher mill price due to additional fabrication.
(3) Higher shipping charge on account of its bulky character.
(4) Large exterior and interior exposed surfaces that will be subjected to sea-
water corrosion.
The reason for having much less energy capacity in the large-diameter cylindrical
fender pile of approximately the same area as the wide flange section is obvious from
the flexural formula. It is the "form factor" of the cylindrical pile that offers a signifi-
cant disadvantage, as is evident from the fact that in the wide-flange section a large
amount of material is concentrated in the flanges, while in the cylindrical section the
two most remote fibers are stressed to the allowable working value.
By virtue of its much less efficient form, the use of cylindrical sections in fender
piling must be conclusively removed from further consideration, though such sections
may be advantageously used in long-column piles under vertical loads.
C. ADVANTAGES OF USING HIGH-STRENGTH STEELS
Table 1 shows decisively the superiority of greenheart fender piles. Their use is
definitely recommended for general-purpose wharves that will serve general-cargo or
similar ships. In cases requiring much more energy capacity for much heavier-duty
wharves, the use of greenheart fender piles will be eventually limited by its available
sizes as produced from its existing stands in British Guiana, South America.
At present, greenheart of 16 by 16 in by 40 ft is readily available. Round green-
heart piles are available in lengths up to 75 It. and to 85 ft on an accumulative basis.
Itull. 574
208
Waterways and Harbors
In general, lengths of 80 ft and over are available upon special order, and extremely
long piles can be built up in the field by splicing because of the hi^'li strength possessed
by greenheart.
Beyond these limits of available sizes, or as soon as it becomes less economical to
use greenheart on account of premium for larger sizes or excessive freight in too distant
projects, resorting to steel or high-strength steels may offer better economy. A com-
munication to the writer from G. A. Wilson, chief engineer of the Port cf London
Authority, dated January 2, 1962, states: " — on the last occasion some six months ago
when I considered its use the relative costs of greenheart and steel were such that it was
cheaper to design in steel." Of course, this may not be the case for waterfront facilities
on the Gulf, Atlantic, and Pacific coasts of the United States.
To show the advantages of using high-strength steels of SO-ksi yield point, an allow-
able extreme fiber stress in flexure of 27.8 ksi will be used so that it will provide a
factor of safety of 50.0/27.8=1.8, the same as 36.0/20.0=1.8 for A 36 steel. Thus,
using Eq. (1) and the same 50-ft vertical span length, the following results have been
obtained:
Table 2. — Energy Capacity of High-Strength Steel Wide-Flange
Section vs. That of A 36 Steel
Steel
Section
(Nominal Sizes)
Energy Capacity
in Ft- Kips
ASTM
A 36
12 x 12 WF 190
4.T.9
A 242_
12 x 12 WF 190
A 440
9.0(i
A 441...
A 242
14 x If, WF 426
A440._
16.79
A 441. .-
The pronounced increase in energy capacity of the same 12 WF 190 section pro-
vided by the 50-ksi-yield-point steel over that by A 36 steel is due to the fact that in
Eq. (1), other things being equal, the energy capacities are directly proportional to the
square of the allowable working stress in flexure.
Thus, the use of high-strength steel, wide-flange sections, for fender piles offer such
advantages as:
(1) Ready means of meeting heavy-duty requirements.
(2) Much higher increase in energy capacity, which is proportional to the square
of allowable flexural stress, than the slight increase in mill price for higher
yield point.
(3) Great variety of standard sections available from 8 WF 17 to 14 WF 426,
and again from 16 WF 36 to 36 WF 300.
(4) Being well adapted to welding additional cover plates of desired thicknesses
to increase their energy capacity.
D. SHORTCOMINGS OF HIGH-STRENGTH STEELS TO BE AVOIDED
Despite the advantages of high-strength steels, due heed must be taken, however,
in their use as a material for fender piling. This can be easily comprehended by referring
Waterways and Harbors 209
to the definition of toughness which denotes the ability of the materia] to absorb energy
during plastic deformation. This energy is represented by the area under the tensile
test diagram which shows that in order to have high toughness the material must have
high strength and at the same time large ductility.
Higher-strength steels have smaller plastic deformation before fracture, and hence
they become less tough and more brittle. The use of such materials in structural com-
ponents subject to impact, as fender piles are, may become dangerous if extremely high-
strength steels are used, since fracture may occur suddenly without any noticeable
deformation.
For the above reason, among the commercially produced high-strength steels in the
United States, while the SO-ksi-yield-point ASTM A 242 and A 440 may be used for
rolled fender piles and A 441 for welded fender piles, the writer does not recommend
using heat-treated constructional alloy steel of 100-ksi yield point (0.2 percent offset
strength yield), for the marginal difference between its tensile strength of 115 ksi and
its yield point is only 15 ksi versus a much wider margin of 60 — 36 = 24 ksi for the
ASTM A 36 steel.
Another limitation for high-strength steels is their lower yield point for thicknesses
over yA in. and hence lower allowable stresses. It is, therefore, always an economically
worthwhile precaution to avoid the penalty of using high-strength steel shapes and plates
thicker than the above limit in built-up sections such as large-dimension steel box
fender piles.
E. MERITS AND VERSATILITIES OF HIGH-STRENGTH-STEEL
FENDER PILES OF BOX SECTIONS
For heavy-duty fender piles and dolphins, by combining the noteworthy suggestion
of John E. G. Palmer of London. England, in taking the advantage of high-strength
steels, and of Dr. Paul LeimdOrfer of Stockholm, Sweden, in using steel units of box
piles, a variety of bigh-energy-absorbing fender piling and dolphin clusters may be
economically constructed. High-strength-steel box sections have the following inherent
merits and versatilities:
(1) They possess the advantage of being tubular but are not subject to the low
flexural resistance of the cylindrical form.
(2) They have higher torsional resistance than open sections when the applied
impact load does not coincide with the plane of symmetry of the section.
(3) They may have cover plates of desired thicknesses welded to opposite walls
perpendicular to the direction of loads in order to increase their flexural
resistance and hence strain-energy capacity.
(4) They may be spaced at desired spacings throng!, narrowed-down spaces; even
adjacent to each other in a row, or in matrix cluster, respectively, for
extremely heavy-duty fenders and dolphins.
(5) Their resistance can also be increased by placing more wales as far as flex-
ibility is not much impaired
(6) Their energy absorbing capacity call be further enhanced by stuffing its
inside with resilient rubber material.
(7) Though the maximum size and length of hot-rolled hollow square and ret
tangular structural tubings are governed by the quantitj ol steel in an ingot,
extra-sixe box piles may always be built up from shapes and plates
210 Waterways and Harbors
Since 1961, hot-rolled carbon-steel hollow structural tubings" up to 10 by 10 in
square, and 6 by 10 in rectangular, have become available in the United States, Euro-
pean producers being much earlier pioneers in such products. Standard range of lengths
is 42 ft maximum and under, but longer sections may be had by splicing. Hollow struc-
tural tubing of larger sizes (but necessarily shorter lengths), and of low-alloy, high-
strength steels, may be rolled to order. In fact, the producer has definite plans for the
latter.
POSTSCRIPT, AND FURTHER REFERENCES TO THE WRITERS OTHER
PAPERS ON MATERIALS USED IN WATERFRONT FACILITIES
An exhaustive treatment of the problem of relative merits and economics of con-
struction materials used in marine fendering naturally has to include considerations of
the materials themselves, the form or shape factor, size and length limitations of natural
and manufactured products, longevity of different materials in sea water, and economic
comparison of capitalized or annual costs. While this paper has conclusively revealed:
(1) the demerits of the cylindrical form in fender piling, (3) advantages of using high-
strength steels, (3) shortcomings of high-strength steels, (4) merits and versatilities of
high-strength-steel fender piles of box sections for heavy-duty service; and while eco-
nomic comparison as a common basic deliberation in all engineering projects requires no
special emphasis here, further references to the writer's other papers on materials used in
waterfront facilities are enumerated below:
1. "Method for Ascertaining When a Tie Should be Treated and When It Should
be Protected with Tie Plates and Improved Fastenings"; Proceedings, World
Engineering Congress, Tokyo, Japan, 1929, Vol. 14, pp. 1-11.
2. "A Proposed Method for Ascertaining When a Tie Should be Treated and
When It Should be Protected with Tie Plates and Improved Fastenings";
Engineering, Chinese Engineering Society, Vol. 5, No. 1, December 1929, pp.
18-29.
3. "Relative Merits and Economics of Construction Materials Used in Waterfront
Facilities"; AREA-Bulletin, Vol. 59, No. 539, November 1957, pp. 519, 523-
546; Proc, AREA, Vol. 59, 1958, pp. 519, 523-546, discussion pp. 1159-1160.
4. Discussion of "Use of Concrete in Marine Environments"; Journal, ACI, Vol.
30, No. 6, December 1958, Part II, discussion 54-46, pp. 1327-1336; Proc,
ACI, Vol. 54, 1957-1958, discussion 54-16, pp. 1327-1336.
5. "Greenheart (Nectandra Rodioei) — Its Outstanding Merits, Properties, and
Economics in Waterfront Facilities"; AREA Bulletin, Vol. 61, No. 553, Novem-
ber 1959, pp. 311-330; Proc, AREA, Vol. 61, 1960, pp. 311-330, Convention
presentation and discussion, p. 1077.
6. "Damage to Timber Used for Wharf Construction"; invited paper, Symposium
on Materials for Wharf Construction, ASCE 1960 Annual Convention — Boston,
Mass., October 10-14, 1960.
7. "Recommended Practice of Conducting Periodic Inspection and Maintaining
Progressive Service Performance Records of Piling Materials Used in Water-
front Facilities"; AREA Bulletin, Vol. 62, No. 560, November 1960, pp. 383-
385; Proc, AREA, Vol. 62, 1961, pp. 383-385; adopted as Part 6, Chapter 25
of AREA Manual in 1961, Vol. II, pp. 25-6-1 to 25-6-3.
6 "National Hot-Rolled Carbon Steel Hollow Structural Tubing, The Shape for Things to Come,:
1961, National Tube Division, U. S. Steel Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Waterways and Harbors 211
8. "Mechanical Properties of Greenheart and Determination of Recommended
Allowable Values for Design of Waterfront Facilities"; AREA Bulletin, Vol.
62, No. 560, November 1960, pp. 386-393; Proc, AREA, Vol. 62, 1961, pp.
386-393.
9. "Energy Design Criteria for Fender Piling and Relative Merits of Different
Materials"; AREA Bulletin, Vol. 62, No. 560, November 1960, pp. 394-406;
Proc, AREA, Vol. 62, 1961, pp. 394-406.
10. "Greenheart Timber Has Long Service Record"; ASCE, Civil Engineering,
Vol. 31, No. 5, May 1961, p. 76.
11. "Depredation of Timber in Marine Construction, I — Marine Borers (with Par-
ticular Reference to Their Distribution in USA Waters)"; The Dock & Harbor
Authority (London), Vol. XLII, No. 489, July 1961, pp. 85-89.
12. "Depredation of Timber in Marine Construction, II — Physical and Biological
Damage (Other than by Marine Borers)"; The Dock & Harbor Authority
(London), Vol. XLII, No. 490, August 1961, pp. 127-130.
13. "Operative Energy Concept in Marine Fendering"; Proc, ASCE, Vol. 87, No
WW3, Journal of the Waterways and Harbors Division, August 1961, Paper
2875, pp. 1-28.
14. "Service Performance Records of Greenheart in Docks and Harbors of the
United Kingdom"; AREA Bulletin, Vol. 63, No. 568, December 1961, p. 345;
Proc, AREA, Vol. 63, 1962, p. 345.
15. "Azobe as a Construction Material and Its Comparison with Greenheart in
Waterfront Facilities"; AREA Bulletin, Vol. 63, No. 568, December 1961, pp.
345-350; Proc, AREA, Vol. 63, 1962, pp. 345-350.
16. Discussion of "Berthing and Mooring Forces"; Proc, ASCE, Vol. 88, No.
WW3, Journal of the Waterways and Harbors Division, August 1962.
17. Author's closing discussion of "Operative Energy Concept in Marine Fender-
ing"; Proc, ASCE. Vol. 88, No. WW4, Journal of the Waterways and Harbors
Division, November 1962.
18. "Evaluation of Mooring Forces"; Proc. ASCE, Vol. 88, No. WW4, Journal
of the Waterways and Harbors Division, November 1962.
Report of Committee 6 — Buildings
K. E. Horning, Chairman
J. W. Hayes,
Vice Chairman
D. J. Murray, Secretary
W. G. Harding
H. T. Seal
G. A. Mobison
J. W. GwYN
J. H. Adams, Jr.
J. L. Agee
\V. F. Armstrong
F. R. Bartlett
I). A. Bessey
S. M. Biei.ski
G. J. Bluel
J. R. Bowman
W. L. Burgess
R. R. Cahal
R. L. Charlow
H. M. Church (E)
D. \Y. Converse
J. S. Cooper
F. D. Day
A. G. Dorland (E)
V. E. Elshoff
R. L. Fletcher
I. G. Forbes
C. S. Graves
G. W. Guinn, Jr.
A. T. Hawk (E)
H. R. Helker
W. C. Humphreys
W. R. Hyma
E. J. Hynes
B. J. Johnson, Jr.
S. E. KVENBERG
A. F. Lwi.MI.YER
R. E. LlLLISTON
G. H. McMillan
I. A. Moore
J. D. Moore, Jr.
C. W. Morrison
L. S. Newman
L. J. Nichols
W. H. Pahl, Jr.
W. C. Panarese
C. L. Robinson
J. T. Rowan
J. B. Schaub (E)
T. H. Seep
H. A. Shannon, Jr.
Loren Shedd
E. R. Shultz
R. C. Smith
M. L. Thornbrough
R. C. Turnbell
S. G. Urban
O. G. Wilbur (E)
T. S. Williams
Committee
(E) Members Emeritus.
mitteeh6SC ^^^ "ameS *** ^ '" bold"face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Progress report, with recommendations submitted for adoption page 214
2. Specification for railway buildings.
There were no developments during the year calling for new specifications,
>u the committee has no report
3. Wind loading for railway building structures.
The committee has found it inadvisable to continue its study of this assign-
ment, supplementing its 1960 report presented in the Proceedings, Vol. 62,
1961, page 133, dealing with tests on a 120-ft floodlight tower on the Santa
Fe at Clovis, X. Mix. Accordingly, no report. Subject to be discontinued.
8. Infra-red ray heating, collaborating with Committee 18.
Progress in study but no report.
Tin Committee on Bulpi\..n.
K. E HoRNi \... Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 5 74, November 1962.
213
214 Buildings
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
W G Harding (chairman, subcommittee), J. H. Adams, Jr., W. F Armstrong F R.
' Bartlett, S. M. Bielski, J. R. Bowman, W. L. Burgess, R. R Cahal, R. L Charlow,
D. W. Converse, J. S. Cooper, I. G. Forbes, R. L. Fletcher, G. W. Guinn, Jr.,
H R Helker, W. C. Humphreys, S. E. Kvenberg, A. F. Langmeyer G H .Mc-
Millan, L. W. Newman, W. H. Pahl, Jr., H. A. Shannon, Jr., Loren Shedd, R. C
Smith, R. C. Turnbell, T. S. Williams.
Your committee submits for adoption the following recommendations with respect
to Chapter 6 of the Manual:
Pages 6-4-14 to 6-4-16, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLAY HOLLOW TILE
Delete, substituting therefor the following:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL CLAY TILE-STRUCTURAL
CLAY FACING TILE— CERAMIC VENEER
1. General
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, scaffolding and equipment,
except as otherwise noted, necessary to entirely complete any or all classes of structural
clay tile, structural clay tile facing and ceramic veneer work herein specified and as
shown on the drawings.
2. Materials and Workmanship
Structural clay tile, structural clay tile facing and ceramic veneer shall conform to
the Specifications for Clay Masonry Construction of the Structural Clay Products
Institute, current edition.
3. General Conditions
All materials entering into the work and all methods used by the contractor shall
be subject to the approval of the engineer and no part of the work will be considered
as finally accepted until all work is completed and accepted.
The General Conditions as given in Part 1, this Chapter, shall be considered to
apply with equal force to this specification.
Pages 6-9-34 to 6-9-38, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
Reapprove without change.
Pages 6-9-39 to 6-9-41, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR ASPHALT MACADAM PAVEMENTS
Reapprove without change.
Your committee recommends for adoption and publication in Part 9, Chapter 6,
of the Manual, the following Specifications for Bituminous Road Mix Surface:
Buildings 215
SPECIFICATIONS FOR BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE
1. Description
This work shall consist of the consrtuction of a surface course composed of aggre-
gate and asphalt or asphaltic road oil mixed in place on the prepared subgrade in con-
formity with lines, grades and cross sections shown on the plans.
2. Materials
The class, type and grade of bituminous material to be used will be as specified in
the contract. The aggregates, including the mineral filler, shall be of approved quality
and shall be well graded between limits specified in the contract.
3. Composition and Mixture
The contractor shall furnish representative samples of the aggregate he proposes to
use. The amount of bituminous material to be used in proportion to the aggregate will
then be determined by laboratory or field tests.
4. Construction Methods
The aggregate shall be delivered to the site reasonably free from moisture and shall
be placed in windrows on the subgrade to be surfaced. The bituminous material shall
be added to the aggregate only when air temperature is plus 50 deg F or higher and the
aggregate and subgrade are dry. It shall not be applied when the weather is foggy or
rainy or prior to impending rains in order that the mixture will not be exposed to
moisture prior to final compaction.
The bituminous material shall be applied by means of a pressure distributor. The
application shall be made in successive increments of approximately % to Vk of the
total quantity required for the volume of aggregate. Immediately following each appli-
cation, sufficient initial mixing shall be done so as to leave as little free bituminous
material as practicable on the aggregate.
After the last application of bituminous material, the entire mass shall be mixed by
blading or other approved manipulation until the mass has a uniform color and is sub-
stantially free from balls and uncoated particles. Should the mixture show an excess or
deficiency of bituminous material, the condition shall be corrected by addition of
aggregate or bituminous material as necessary and by remixing.
The mixed material after sufficient drying and loss of volatile elements shall be
spread across the subgrade to the required width to produce a uniform layer of specified
depth and cross section. After the mat has been laid and shaped, it shall be compacted
by means approved by the engineer in charge, commencing at the outer edges and
progressing towards the center.
If the contractor so elects, it will be permissible to mix the materials :tt a mixing
plant; however, before the mixture is spread to final grade, it shall lie examined b> tin
engineer in charge to determine, to the best of his ability, whether all conditions have
been met to permit satisfactory compaction.
5. Defects Before Acceptance
The contractor shall be responsible for tin- work until final acceptance thereof,
Before final acceptance, the contractor shall be required to tear up. rework and replace
all areas which have a tendency to bleed or become displaced under traffii due to Insuffi
cient aggregate or are deficient in bituminous materials and tend towards excessive
216 Buildings
segregation, rough spots or raveling or defects due to improper drying and aeratii n of
the materials before compaction. Such work will he done by the contractor without
extra compensation.
Pages 6-13-1 to 6-13-3, incl.
PAINTS FOR RAILWAY BUILDINGS
Reapprove with the following revisions:
Page 6-13-2: Change Par. 11 to read as follows:
11. When applied, paint should be brushed or sprayed to a smooth coating of
uniform thickness so as to get the maximum spreading capacity of the paint consistent
with a film of the thickness to wear well and give the desired protection. Exterior oil-
base paints applied to give a minimum thickness of 0.005 in provide optimum
durability.
Page 6-13-2: Change Par. 13 to read as follows:
13. Paints should be furnished preferably in cans and mixed to the proper con-
sistency for direct application. Under certain conditions, paints will require some thin-
ning, which should be done only with turpentine, linseed oil, or approved thinners as
recommended by the finish manufacturers.
Delete the Specifications for Sprinkler System, Manual pages 6-14-8 to 6-14-11,
substituting therefor the following rewritten version:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
1. Special Note
The General Conditions as given in Part 1, this Chapter, shall be considered to
apply with equal force to this specification, and the contractor shall consult them in
detail for instructions pertaining to his work.
2. Scope of Work
The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, tools, scaffolding and equipment,
unless otherwise noted, necessary for and reasonably incidental to the furnishing and
complete installation of an automatic sprinkler system as hereinafter specified or as
shown or implied on the drawings.
3. Classification of Sprinkler Systems
The types of automatic sprinkler systems are:
a. Wet-Pipe System — A system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping
system containing water and connected to a water supply so that water discharges imme-
diately from sprinklers opened by a fire.
b. Dry-Pipe System — A system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping
system containing air under pressure, the release of which, as from the opening of
sprinklers, permits the water pressure to open a valve known as a "dry pipe valve.'1
The water then flows into the piping system and out the opened sprinklers.
c. Pre-action System — A system employing automatic sprinklers attached to a piping
system containing air that may or may not be under pressure, with a supplemental heat-
responsive system of generally more sensitive characteristics than the automatic
Buildings 217
sprinklers themselves, installed in the same areas as the sprinklers; actuation of the
heat -responsive system, as from a fire, opens a valve which permits water to flow into
the sprinkler piping system and to be discharged from any sprinklers which may
be open.
d. Deluge System— A system employing open sprinklers attached to a piping system
connected to a water supply through a valve which is opened by the operation of a
heat-responsive system installed in the same areas as the sprinklers. Whin this valve
opens, water flows into the piping system and discharges from all sprinklers attached
thereto.
e. Combined Dry-Pipe and /'re-action Sprinkler System — A system employing auto-
matic sprinklers attached to a piping system containing air under pressure with a supple-
mental heat-responsive system of generally more sensitive characteristics than the auto-
matic sprinklers themselves, installed in the same area as the sprinklers; operation of
the heat-responsive system, as from a fire, actuates tripping devices which open dry-pipe
valves simultaneously and without loss of air pressure in the system. Operation of the
heat-responsive system also opens approved air exhaust valves at the end of the feed
main which facilitates the filling of the system with water which usually precedes the
opening of sprinklers. The heat-responsive system also serves as an automatic fire-alarm
system.
f. Special Types — Sprinkler systems employing limited water supplies, reduced pipe
sizes and other departures from the requirements for standard sprinkler systems shall
not be classified as standard sprinkler systems. The authority having juridiction may.
however, recognize the degree of protection afforded by special types of sprinkler systems
when installed and maintained in accordance with the requirements of the listing thereof
by a nationally recognized testing laboratory.
4. System Selection
The sprinkler system to be used shall be one of the above classifications best suited
to the building in which it is to be installed and the hazard to be protected
5. Preparation of Plans
Before any equipment is installed, in order to avoid error or subsequent misunder-
standing, preliminary layouts shall be submitted for approval to the authority having
jurisdiction. Any material deviation from approved plans will require special permission.
Submission of working plans for approval before starting the installation will avoid
subsequent expensive changes and give owners and contractors the benefit of the latesl
fire protection engineering experience.
6. Design and Installation
Sprinkk-r system layout and installation shall lie entrusted to oo one but fully
experienced and responsible parties. Sprinkler system installation is a trade in itsell
It shall be designed and installed in accordance with the "Standards for the Installa-
tion of Sprinkler Systems" adopted bj the National Fire Protection Association, latest
issue, or the rules and regulations >>t the inspection Bureau having jurisdiction in the
locality in which the sprinkler system IS t" be installed,
7. Tests
The contractor shall conduct the tests required mi the sprinkler system in the
presence of the representatives of the company and ol the underwriters having jurisdii
tion. Equipment required t" make the testa shall be furnished by the contractor.
218 Buildings
The sprinkler system shall be accepted only after all leaks and defects have been
repaired and all conditions of the specifications and requirements of the underwriters
have been fully complied with.
The contractor shall furnish a complete set of written instructions, neatly framed
and glazed, covering operation of the system, for reference purposes.
8. Painting
All equipment and piping installed in connection with the sprinkler system shall be
painted with two coats of paint. Color of paint to be selected by the engineer.
9. Guarantee
Contractor must guarantee the perfect operation of the system heretofore described,
that it will be capable of fulfilling the requirements of the underwriters having jurisdic-
tion. Any omission in these specifications or the drawings accompanying same do not
relieve the contractor of fulfilling his obligations to install the system complete in every
respect, and fulfilling his guarantee.
The guarantee shall be for not less than one year of time after acceptance of the
work by the engineer. The contractor shall furnish and reinstall without cost to the
owners, any part or parts of the work which may prove during that time to have been
faulty or defective.
10. Cleaning
At the completion of the work, the contractor shall remove all construction equip-
ment, scaffolding, staging, erection platforms and all surplus material from the premises,
leaving the premises in a clean and acceptable condition. If any equipment or debris is
not removed promptly, such material may be removed at the expense of the contractor.
11. General Conditions
All materials entering into the work and all methods used by the contractor shall
be subject to the approval of the engineer, and no part of the work will be considered
as finally accepted until all of the work is completed and accepted.
Delete the material on Ice Houses and Icing Stations, Manual pages 6-26-1 and
6-26-2, substituting therefor the following rewritten version:
ICE HOUSES AND ICING STATIONS
A. GENERAL
There are numerous methods of providing icing facilities for refrigerator cars, but
basically they consist of production, storage and loading.
B. PRODUCTION
Modern methods of ice manufacture make the use of natural ice uneconomical
except in locations having cold winters and where harvesting is favorable. For this rea-
son most car icing today is done with manufactured ice, either direct from day storage
of the manufacturing plant or from refrigerated reserve storage of the manufacturiing
plant. Ice houses at manufacturing plants are usually designed for sufficient capacity to
balance off the manufacturing capacity during the months of peak demand. With a
proper balance between manufacturing capacity and storage capacity it is possible to
operate the manufacturing plant year around on an economical basis.
Buildings 219
Ice manufacturing plants generally consist of a machinery room, tank room, day-
storage room and winter storage room. The machinery and tank rooms should provide
for a practicable degree of automatic operation and mechanical harvesting of ice. The
day storage room may be about 12 ft in height and capable of accommodating at least
two days' manufacture.
C. STORAGE
Houses for natural or lake cut ice are seldom mechanically refrigerated. They depend
upon the melting ice for refrigeration. Adequate insulation should be provided.
Houses for manufactured ice storage adjacent to manufacturing plant are always
mechanically refrigerated. When located away from the manufacturing plant they are
usually designed to retain a hauled-in supply to meet requirements between shipments
from the manufacturing plant, and may or may not be refrigerated.
The size and arrangement of the house should be determined by seasonal require-
ments. Houses for natural ice are usually large enough to hold a full season's require-
ments. Otherwise, it becomes necessary to buy and ship in ice at the most expensive
season. Where large capacity is required it is desirable to build the house higher rather
than to spread it out. Heights from 18 to 36 ft are generally used.
To prevent rise of temperature, due to heat passing through the ground, some of
the storage space is usually below the grade line, extending about 1 ft below frost line.
The floor may be located at ground level if the foundation is properly insulated.
Ice houses are generally of frame construction with a gable roof. The side walls
of the storage house should be so constructed as to afford maximum insulation. If a
concrete foundation is not provided the walls should be tied together at the bottom
with rods to prevent spreading. These rods should be below the floor line to avoid
obstruction. The use of interior supporting members should be avoided as they interfere
with the handling of the ice. The floor may be wood plank on sleepers set in a gravel
bed, or concrete on gravel. Floors should pitch slightly toward the center so that when
the house is filled the ice will not cause any stress on the outside walls. A drain tile
should be laid through the center of the house.
A typical sidewall construction consists of 3- by 10-in studs spaced 24 in on centers,
1 in exterior sheathing and corrugated aluminum siding, 1 in interior sheathing, 4 in of
foam-glass-type insulation and Y^ in exterior plywood and 4- by 4-in vertical timbers
spaced 24 in on centers to hold the foam glass in place.
Where ice is delivered to house in cars, a car-floor-height platform is used for
unloading cars. Ice is conveyed and elevated by use of motor-driven handling equipment.
D. loadim;
1. Top Icing
Top icing consists of the use of crushers and stingers to place snow ice directly on
the lading via the doors on the sides of the cars. Cars can be iced bj (a) highway
trucks operating on ground level equipped with crushers and slingers, (b) crusher stinger
machines operating on a car-floor-level platform, or (c) crusher-slinger machines
operating on tracks at track level.
2. Bunker Icing
Bunker icing consists of the placing of cake or crushed ice into the bunker doors
on the roof of the car. This can be done by (a) highway trucks, (b) high-level plat-
220 Buildings
forms, (c) machines operating on high-level platforms, (d) machines operating on car-
floor-level platforms or on track level.
(a) A highway truck with a lift or elevating body provides the simplest type of
icing facility. The truck drives on a roadway parallel to the cars, the ice is raised on
the elevating body and placed into the bunker. An arrangement of this type is satis-
factory where there is not enough car icing done to justify a car top high platform.
It is also an economical way to handle re-icing of cars spotted in yards that require
additional ice because of unloading delays or extremely hot weather.
(b) Most high-level icing platforms have a single level approximately 14 ft to 16 ft
above top of rail and from 12 to 16 ft wide. Platforms are usually of timber construc-
tion and may serve one or two tracks depending on the number of cars to be iced. At
important stations a mechanically operated endless-chain platform conveyor is used to
move the ice to proper locations on the platform. Provisions should be made on the
platforms for a supply of salt. Railings are provided where required.
(c) Bunker icing machines are available that operate on rails on the high-level
platform. These self-propelled machines pick up the ice cakes from the endless chain
conveyor, can crush ice if desired, and place ice and salt in the bunker.
(d) Bunker icing machines are available that operate on rails on a car-floor-height
platform or from rails at ground level that operate in a similar manner to the machines
on the high-level platforms. This type of machine can be obtained with devices for top
icing also.
3. General
Adequate drainage should be provided for the icing facility area. An adequate light-
ing system should be installed for use when icing is to be performed at night. A com-
munication system should be installed so that icing can be coordinated with the yard
operations.
Pages 6-26-3 and 6-26-4
REST HOUSES
Delete in its entirety.
Delete the material on Storehouses for Shops and Locomotive Terminals, Manual
pages 6-26-5 to 6-26-8, incl., substituting therefor the following rewritten version:
STOREHOUSES FOR SHOPS AND LOCOMOTIVE TERMINALS
1. Arrangement
The primary consideration in designing a storehouse is the economical handling of
material. The arrangement should provide for convenient handling and checking of
materials and ease of supervision.
Storehouse floors may be at ground level or car-floor-height level depending on use
and operation of the facility.
Racks should be so located that the handling of materials will be reduced to a
minimum. Main aisles of ample width should be provided to allow for the handling
of material by motorized equipment
A one-story house possesses advantages for easy and short trucking but where very
large floor area is required, a two or three-story building may be more suitable. The
use of multiple stories would also be dependent upon the availability and value of the
Buildings 221
ground area. Where more than one story is used, the upper Boors are general!} used
for offices, for slow-moving and lightweight materials.
The office should be of sufficient size to accommodate the personnel, together with
space for files and possibly a private office for the storekeeper. Office may be con-
solidated with other departments. In one-story buildings the office is usually at one end.
In multi-story buildings the office is generally on an upper floor.
2. Construction
Storehouses should be of fire-resistant construction excepl for small storehouses or
auxiliary buildings which could be of noncombustible construction such as metal.
Interior columns should be avoided in one-story buildings. In buildings of more
than one story the column and rack spacing should be coordinated so as to provide a
maximum of storage space.
3. Floor Loading
Recommended minimum floor loading for first floor is 300 lb per sq ft and for
upper floors, 250 lb per sq ft.
4. Platforms
Concrete platforms are usually provided on the track side along the entire length of
storehouse. Where motorized equipment and trailers are used a 14-ft wide platform is
recommended. Platform should have a ramp at the end with a maximum recommended
slope of 10 percent.
5. Elevators
In multi-story buildings elevators should be of sufficient size and capacity to handle
motorized equipment. The self-leveling type of automatic elevator with push-button
control is recommended. Elevator hatchway should be constructed to meet local code
requirements.
6. Ramps
Instead of elevators, ramps inside of buildings have been found to be satisfactory
in some operations. Maximum recommended slope is 10 percent,
7. Chutes, Conveyors and Pallets
Package chutes or conveyors from upper floors to the lower floor are very con-
venient in the larger-size storehouses. They are generally located near the elevator. Pallet
handling with self-propelled lift trucks for transporting and stacking is desirable in
many storehouse operations.
8. Lighting
Natural lighting may be provided through window- or tool panels. Electric lighting
should be provided, with the lamps over the aisles. Receptacles are often provided at
the ends of the racks.
9. Ventilation
Ventilation should be provided in the storage and office sections. Material should
be kept in a dry location.
10. Fire Protection
An adequate interior automatic sprinkler system is preferable, the nexl choice for
inside the building being water pipe lines with hydrants and hose reds. A sufficient num-
222 Buildings
ber of fire hydrants with hose cart protection should also be installed outside of the
building. Fire extinguishers should be distributed throughout the storehouse in accessible
and plainly marked locations. Fire alarm boxes, where warranted, should be located at
convenient points both within and without the storehouse.
11. Racks
The open type of rack, preferably of steel with adjustable shelves, is recommended.
Delete the material on oil houses, Manual pages 6-26-8 and 6-26-9, substituting
therefore the following rewritten version:
OIL HOUSES
1. General
Oil houses shall be designed and constructed in accordance with local, state or
national building cedes, recommended by the National Board of Fire Underwriters, and
"Standards of the National Board of Fire Underwriters for Storage, Handling and Use
of Flammable Liquids", Pamphlet No. 30.
Page 6-25-9
LUMBER SHED
Reapprove with the following revision:
Add the words: "or metal" following the word "frame" in the first line of the
first paragraph.
MODEL 441
Developed and Built
for Railroad Maintenance
180° BOOM SWING
D0£$ ALL JOBS!
ROOTS AND LOADS TIES
LAYING WELDED RAIL
CUTS MAINTENANCE COSTS
12 FAST CHANGE ATTACHMENTS
• Forks
• IU Cu. Yd. Bucket
• Tote Hook
• 18' Boom Extension
• Fork Tie Baler
• Track Cleaning Bucket
• Back Hoe
• Clamshell
• Back Filler Blade
• Pull Drag Bucket
• 4 Cu. Yd. Snow Bucket
• Pile Hammer
Optional Attachment
Flanged Wheels, Hydraulically Controlled
PETTIBONE MULLIKEN CORPORATION
RAILROAD
141 W. JACKSON
DIVISION
CHICAGO 4, ILL
9' WIDE TRACK CLEANING BUCKET"
80 /ears of Service
to the Railroad Industry
at
your
service
for
all types of cranes
diesel wreckers
pile drivers
buckets
ORTON
CRANE & SHOVEL CO.
608 S . DEARBORN ST.
CHICAGO 5, ILLINOIS
DANIEL A. COVELLI
President
Representatives in Principal Cities
J
Here are the up-to-date facts on the SPENO Ballast
Cleaning and the SPENO Rail Grinding Services.
BALLAST CLEANING
SPENO Engineering and Research has de-
veloped a superior screening arrangement so
that we arc now using an improved Ballast
Cleaner with greater efficiency.
RAIL GRINDING
Our Rail Grinding Service has been so well
received we are now building a THIRD Rail
Grinding Train to take care of the increased
demand
SPENO is constantly developing means for
better service to make sure that the Railroads
receive everything they pay lor — and more
c/^l^~/7s/<> fife £at£z#ads yna^naae usec& as/
Lllllll
FRANK SPENO RAILROAD BALLAST CLEANING CO., INC.
306 North Cayuga Si.
Ithaca. N. V.
. . . to be sure
Today, one rail test service stands out ... for its ability to detect more
known types of defects ... for lowest cost per defect ... for years of experi-
ence . . . and for assurance in the reduction of costly service failures.
Sperry . . . "first in rail testing" . . . invites comparisons of its ability, know-
ing that no other rail service can match it for accuracy and thoroughness.
Sperry Rail Service, Danbury, Connecticut. (203) Pioneer 8-9243.
SPERRY RAIL SERVICE
DIVISION OF HOWE SOUND COMPANY
VEGETATION CONTROL
CHEMICALS
#
READE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, INC.
Jersey City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas
City — Birmingham — Stockton
SERVING RAILROADS OF AMERICA FOR
MORE THAN FORTY YEARS
W
E
E
D
A
N
D
B
R
u
S
H
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
P. O. Box 10378 LOgan 6-7922
GREENHEART, INC.
1431 N. E. 26th Street
FORT LAUDERDALE, FLORIDA
President — John L McEwen — Quarter Century Experience
IMPORTERS:
Greenheart Piles, Lumber, Timbers Long Length
MORA EXCELSA — Lumber and Timbers
Teak and other Woods from Burma, Siam, Australia,
Africa and South America
OO WOODINGS-VERONA TOOL WORKS
^^f Pioneer Manufacturers
of
HIGH GRADE TRACK TOOLS
and
SPRING WASHERS FOR TRACK
Since 1873
VERONA. PA. CHICAGO. ILL.
w
WOODINGS FORGE <& TOOL COMPANY
Makers
oi
WOODINGS RAIL ANCHORS
VERONA, PA.
CHICAGO, ILL.
Model N U Tie Cutter
HERE IS THE WINNING TEAM
The Woolery NU Tie Cutter and the Woolery Tie-end Remover preserve the line and surface
of the track and at the same time reduce the cost of tie renewals. Ties can be removed
without trenching, jacking up track or adzing tops of rail-cut ties. With this team you simply
cut both ends of tie, pry out center piece, insert in its place the tie-end remover and out
go the tie ends pushed by the double acting, double ended hydraulic cylinder of the Tie-
end remover.
FOR HIGHEST EFFICIENCY USE TWO TIE CUTTERS WITH ONE TIE-END REMOVER
WOOLERY MACHINE COMPANY
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.
AREA Publications — Price List
The following include some of the Association publications available from the
secretary's office on order. Prices shown are for Members only:
Member
Price
Manual of Recommended Practice, complete in 2 volumes, including binders
(first copy) $18.00
Extra binders, each 4.50
Annual Supplements (first copy) 1-00
Separate Chapters
1-Roadway and Ballast 1-50
3-Ties 25
4-Rail 75
5-Track 75
6-Buildings I-50
7— Wood Bridges and Trestles 1-00
8-Masonry 100
9-Highways 0.50
11— Engineering and Valuation Records 1-25
13— Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 100
14— Yards and Terminals 1-00
15— Iron and Steel Structures 1-25
16— Economics of Railway Location and Operation 0.75
17— Wood Preservation 50
20-Contract Forms 1.25
22— Economics of Railway Labor 0.50
25— Waterways and Harbors 0.25
27— Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 0.50
28-Clearances 0.25
29- Waterproofing 0.25
Flexible-cover, loose-leaf binder for separate chapters, each 0.40
Portfolio of Trackwork Plans— 119 plans, 8 sheets of specifications, 5 sheets
definitions of terms, complete with leadierette cover $12.50
Track Scale Pamphlet— 109 pages, flexible cover 100
Federal Valuation of Railroads-87 pages, flexible cover LOO
Instructions for Mixing and Placing Concrete-24 pages, flexible cover 0.40
Notes on Railroad Location and Construction Procedures from the School of
Experience-43 pages, flexible cover 0.50
Handbook of Instructions for the Care and Operation of Maintenance of Way
Equipment-149 pages, hard cover 0.85
Instructions for Care and Safe Operation of Welding and Grinding Equip-
ment-23 pages, flexible cover 0.30
Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges (fixed spans) -70 pages, flexible
cover u- ' °
Specifications for Movable Railway Bridges-73 pages, punched sheets 1.00
AUTOJACK
ELECTROMATIC
The only completely
automatic track surfacing
machine on the market
Proven in operation by North America's
leading railroads. Complete and auto-
matic control of surface and cross level
through tangent and curve territory
regardless of height of lift.
• Combination of Autojack and Electromatic
equals or improves production of Electro-
matic alone.
• Precision of lift and uniformity of compaction
controlled automatically.
• All variations in lift, level and run-out con-
trolled from operator's panel.
• Beam "sighting" for utmost precision.
• Front buggy self-propelled ahead of tamper.
TA M P E R I N C. 53 Court St., Pittsburgh, N.Y.
SALES AND SERVICE: 2 147 University Avenue
St. Paul 1 4, Minnesota
Phone: 645-5055
IN CANADA 160 St. Joseph Blvd.,
Lachine (Montreal), P.O.
Phone: 637-5531
Your enquiries for detailed information or brochures on
Autojack Electromatic and other track machines are invited.
Hubbard Super Service Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Super Steel Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Track Tools
Hubbard Tool Division
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
New York Pittsburgh Chicago
%
Unit Rail Anchor
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR DIVISION
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
NEW YORK PITTSBURGH CHICAGO
HYKIL
WEED
KILLERS
• Nationally Available! • Madeto-order!
Now . . . HYKIL Weed Killers are available from distribution points
throughout U.S. Regardless of your local weed problem, HYKIL can solve
it with a made-to-order weed killer and supply you . . . quickly and
economically. Having years of experience in the field of specialized railroad
vegetation-control, HYKIL can supply you with the correct aromatic, oil-
based herbicide for your problem; can apply it for you under contract
. . . using the finest equipment; or can build for your specific needs, the
proper equipment to do the job.
Whatever your weed problem
call, write or wire for a quick solution.
INCORPORATED
1021 FRUIT STREET
SANTA ANA, CALIF.
12406
2200 WEST 75,H STREET
KANSAS CITY 15, MO.
HVKIL
vegetation control
and
railway work equipment
mxmm:
*mmmxx*amxmmmm
Assure lower maintenance costs,
better performance with...
mmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmm.
1
TEXACO
Railroad Lubricants
and Systematic
Engineering Service
TEXACO inc.
RAILWAY SALES DIVISION
135 East 42nd St., New York 17, N. Y.
NEW YORK • C IICAGO • SAN FRANCISCO • ST. LOUIS • ST. PAUL • ATLANTA
RAIL JOINTS
THE STRONGEST
ARE
THE MOST ECONOMICAL
Rail Joint Company
Division of Poor & Company, (Inc.)
New York 7, N. Y.
THE DOUBLE U RAIL ANCHOR
ACHUFF RAILWAY SUPPLY CO.
ST. LOUIS, MO.
with America's most complete line of
special trackwork: For Railroads,
Mines and Industries — A complete
line of frogs, switches and crossings •
Track work for installation in paved
areas • Manganese steel guard rails
• Automatic switch stands • Samson
switch points • Snow- Blowers • Switch
point guards • Rail and flange lubri-
cators • Tie pads • Racor studs • Dual
spike setters • Dual spike drivers •
Car retarders.
with America's most complete track-
work manufacturing facilities: (oust
to coast to serve your needs.
► RACOR PLANTS:
Buffalo • Chicago Heights • Los Angeles •
Niagara Falls, Ontario. Canada • Pueblo
• Superior.
• RACOR SALES AND ENGINEERING
Chicago • Cleveland • Denver • Houston •
Los Angeles • Louisville • New York •
Philadelphia • Richmond • San Francisco
St. Louis • St. Paul. In Canada: Dominion
Brake Shoe Co., Ltd., Montreal, Quebec
• Niagara Falls, Ontario • Winnipeg,
Manitoba • Vancouver, B. C.
* RACOR RESEARCH:
Chicago • Mahwah, N. J.
with America's most complete track-
work engineering service: This lies in
making available to our customers
Racor's engineering experience —
practical experience from years of
designing and manufacturing . . .
advanced experience solving tomor-
row's trackwork problems today in
Racor research laboratories.
Why not let us help you with your
trackwork problems?
-<t22>-
RAILROAD PRODUCTS DIVISION
530 Fifth Avenue, New York 36, New York
Brake Shoe
A COMPLETE LINE
OF SPRING WASHERS
THE NATIONAL LOCK WASHER CO.
Newark N. J . USA
Notes on
Railroad Location and Construction Procedures
from the School of Experience
By J. A. Given
A series of notes, comments, short-cut methods and "tricks of the
trade" written by a railroad location engineer of many years of
practical experience for the benefit of young engineers.
Price $0.50
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
59 East Van Buren Street
Chicago 5, III.
£-x-t-e-n-d f-i-e jL-i-fi-e!
•Hold (faael
USE TIE PLATE
LOCK SPIKES
One-piece Design
LOCK SPIKES hold tie plates firmly in place on
cross-ties and bridge timbers.
LOCK SPIKES are quickly and easily driven,
or removed, with standard track tools.
Driven to refusal, the spread shank is com-
pressed by the walls of the hole. Tie plates are held
against horizontal and vertical movement under
spring pressure. Play between the spike and the
hole is eliminated — abrasion and seating of tie
plates is overcome.
LOCK SPIKES hold their position in the tie,
and redriving to tighten the plate is not required.
They provide a quiet and strengthened track.
Annual cost of ties and maintenance expense is
reduced by extending the life of ties and holding
gage. Here is one answer to conservation of ma-
terials and labor. Write for free folder.
BERNUTH, LEMBCKE CO., INC.
420 Lexington Avenue, New York 17, N. Y.
Actual
Size
6RS Announces ...ROLKODE
WITH SOLID
A New Communication System state units
for centralized
traffic control
for supervisory
control systems
Advantages of the System:
• ROLKODE is up to 50%
faster than time coded sys-
tems.
• When combined with other
services, ROLKODE sim-
plifies line circuit require-
ments.
• ROLKODE operates on line
wire, cable, microwave, or
telephone company facili-
ties.
• ROLKODE eliminates
need for line battery or
stand-by a-c.
- - *»*ffpMMHPHH
Control office solid state counter.
ROLKODE is simple, fast, and
economical. Its advanced electronic
circuitry, solid state units, new and
improved relays, and unusual adapt-
ability will make your next cTc
installation the most efficient avail-
able today.
Typical coding unit.
FOR MORE INFORMATION ASK FOR PUBLICATION D04.0303
3
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL COMPANY
ROCHESTER 2, NEW YORK NEW YORK 17, NEW YORK CHICAGO 1, ILLINOIS ST. LOUIS 1, MISSOURI
THE TRASCO
AUTONOMIC CAR RETARDER
CLAMPS IN PLACE
ANYWHERE IN TRACK
SIMPLE — EFFECTIVE — INEXPENSIVE
TRACK SPECIALTIES CO
GENERAL MOTORS BLDG.
NEW YORK 19, N. Y.
American Railway
Engineering Association— Bulletin
Vol. 64, No. 575 December 1962
REPORTS OF COMMITTEES
8 — Masonry 223
3 — Ties and Wood Preservation 241
22 — Economics of Railway Labor 263
27 — Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 305
30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses 327
28 — Clearances 333
The reports in this issue of the Bulletin will be presented to the 1963 Busi-
ness Meeting of the Association at the Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago, March
15-16. Comments and discussion with respect to any of the reports are solicited,
and should be addressed to the chairman of the committee involved, in writing
in advance of the Meeting, or from the floor during the Meeting.
Copyright 1962, by American Railway Engineering AuoclaHon
BOARD OF DIRECTION
1962-1963
President
C. J. Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
Vice Presidents
L. A. Loggins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Houston 1, Tex.
T. F. Burris, Chief Engineer System, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Huntington, W. Va.
Past Presidents
E. J. Brown, Chief Engineer, Burlington Lines, Chicago 6.
R. H. Beeder, Chief Engineer System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago 4.
Directors
C. J. Henry, Chief Engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
J. M. Trissal, Vice President and Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago 5.
W. B. Throckmorton, Chief Engineer, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, Chi-
cago 5.
J. A. Bunjer, Chief Engineer, Union Pacific Railroad, Omaha 2, Nebr.
J. H. Brown, Assistant General Manager — Eastern District, St. Louis-San Francisco
Railway, Springfield 2, Mo.
J. E. Eisemann, Chief Engineer, Western Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Rail-
way, Amarillo, Tex.
W. H. Huffman, Assistant Chief Engineer — Construction, Chicago & North Western
Railway, Chicago 6.
F. R. Smith, Chief Engineer, Union Railroad, East Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. L. Young, Chief Engineer, Norfolk & Western Railway, Roanoke 17, Va.
T. B. Hutcheson, Chief Engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond 13, Va.
C. E. Defendorf, Chief Engineer, New York Central System, New York 17.
John Ayer, Jr., Vice President — Operations, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad,
Denver 17, Colo.
Treasurer
A. B. Hhxman, Retired Chief Engineer, Belt Railway of Chicago; Chicago & Western
Indiana Railroad, Chicago 5.
Executive Secretary
Neal D. Howard, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Assistant Secretary
E. G. Gehrke, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Secretary Emeritus
Walter S. Lacher, 407 East Fuller Road, Hinsdale, 111.
Published by the American Railway Engineering Association, Monthly, January, February, March,
November and December; Bi-Monthly, June- July, and September-October, at 2211 Fordem
Avenue, Madison, Wis.; Editorial and Executive Offices,
S9 Van Buren Street, Chicago 5, 111.
Second class postage paid at Madison, Wis.
Accepted for mailing at special rate of postage for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917,
authorized on June 29, 1918.
Subscription $10 per annum.
Report of Committee 8 — Masonry
L. B. Boyd L. M. Morris (E)
J. VV. Briscoe L. P. Nicholson
H. C. Brown R. F. Noll
M. W. Bruns M. S. Norris
A. W. Carlson R. E. Pearson
1G. W. Clarvoe R. B. Peck
Maurice Coburn (E) J. E. Peterson
G. W. Cooke Milton Pikarsky
L. F. Currier E. D. Ripple
E. J. Daily W. H. Robertson
B. M. Dornblatt R. I. Rollings
W. J. Eney D. B. Roth
J. A. Erskine F. A. Russ, Jr.
J. U. Estes J. H. Sawyer, Jr.
W. J. Galloway M. Schifalacqua
X. O. Geuder, Sr. Everett Scroggie
J. M. Gilmore B. J. Shadrake
D. H. Dowe, Chairman R. W. Gilmore (E) C. H. Splitstone (E)
T p G. P. Hayes, Jr. S. A. Stutes
J. K. Williams, s fi HoLT Anton Tedesko
Vice Chairman R w HoPK1NS R A Ullery
W. R. Wilson H. R. Hutchens G. R. Vanderpool
I \. Kempe, Jr. J. R. Iwinski Neil Van Eenam
I . \. \I( Leod" A. C. Johnson J. W. Weber
W . E. Brakensiek T. R. Kealey D. V. Wigal
I. \\ . Dolson R. E. Kleist J. M. Williams
R. |. Bin i ski R. J. Klueh S. G. Wintoniak
W. P. Hexdrix A. P. Kouba G. A. Wolf
A. N. Laird (E) K. B.Woods
\ I.. Becker E. F. Manley R. J. Wright
I !< Blewitt P. R. Matthews K. B. Woods
Committee
Member Emeritus.
Died September 21, 1962.
Chose ishn^c names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Committee 8.
in tin- American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following >ul>jo i
l ki \ ision oi Manual.
Progress report, including recommended revisions page 225
Design of masonry structures, collaborating with Committees 1, 5. 6, 7,
15, 28 and 30.
Progress report, including recommended addition to Manual material
covering specifications for elastomeric bearing pads page 225
idations and earth pressures, collaborating with Committees 1, 6, 7,
IS uid 30.
Progress report recommending reapproval with revisions of Manual mate
rial covering specifications for pile foundations page 226
• Deterioration and repair >>! masonry structures.
Progress report, submitted as Information page 237
223
Mull 7.7.-.
224 Masonry
6. Prestressed concrete for railway structures, collaborating with Committee 6.
Progress report, submitted as information page 237
7. Quality of concrete and mortars, collaborating with Committee 6.
Part 1 — Bibliography of important articles from Proceedings relative to
quality of concrete page 238
Part 2 — Revision of ASTM specification references page 239
8. Waterproofing for railway structures, collaborating with Committees 6,
7 and IS.
Progress report, submitted as information page 240
10. Methods of construction with precast concrete structural members, col-
laborating with Committee 8.
A report is being prepared on the various types of connections used to
join the elements in precast concrete construction. This will be presented
as information next year.
The Committee on Masonry,
D. H. Dowe, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 575, December 1962.
MEMOIR
€me£rt Splitter ffltlLtob
Ernest Aylmer McLeod passed away on September 21, 1962, in Detroit, Mich., after
a short illness. He is survived by his wife Alice, a daughter, Mrs. Judith Hlavenka of
Elmhurst, 111., and a son, Daniel, who is a student at Wayne State University.
Mr. McLeod was born in Cleveland, Ohio, on July 12, 1901. He attended Case
Institute of Technology where he received the Bachelor of Science, Civil Engineer and
Master of Science degrees in civil engineering. After graduation he worked successively
for the Nickel Plate Railroad, U. S. Corps of Engineers, and the Union Carbide Co.
In 1937 he entered the engineering department of the New York Central Railroad at
Chicago as an engineering draftsman. He advanced to assistant engineer, assistant engi-
neer of structures, assistant bridge engineer and district engineer of structures, which
position he held at the time of his death.
Mr. McLeod joined the AREA in 1944 and served on Committee 8— Masonry, from
1947 until his death. He was vice chairman from 1955 to 1957, and chairman of the
committee from 1958 to 1960, and since then served as subcommittee chairman.
In addition to belonging to the Methodist Church, he was a member of the Cleve-
land Engineer Society, Sigma Xi honorary fraternity and Phi Kappa Tau.
Mr. McLeod's passing will be a distinct loss to Committee 8; his wise counsel, his
technical knowledge, and his enthusiastic cooperation in all phases of the committee's
work will be missed. The Committee expresses its sympathy and sorrow in his death.
W. R. Wilson,
J. M. GlLMORE,
Committee on Memoir.
Masonry 225
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
W. R. Wilson (chairman, subcommittee), W. E. Brakensiek, R. J. Brueske, G. W. Cooke,
J. W. Dolson, W. P. Hendrix, F. A. Kempe, Jr., J. R. Williams.
Your committee recommends the adoption of the revisions to the Manual as set
forth in the reports on Assignments 2, 3 and 7.
Report on Assignment 2
Design of Masonry Structures
Collaborating with Committees 1, 5, 6, 7, 15, 28, 29 and 30
F. A. Kempe, Jr. (chairman, subcommittee), J. W. Briscoe, H. C. Brown, A. W. Carl-
son, E. J. Daily, J. U. Estes, N. O. Geuder, Sr., A. N. Laird, R. E. Pearson, F. A.
Russ, Jr., E. Scroggie, B. J. Shadrake, A. Tedesko.
Your committee recommends that Part 18, Chapter 8, of the Manual be renum-
bered as Part 19 and recommends for adoption and publication in the Manual a new
Part 18 — Elastomeric Bearing Pads, with the following specifications:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR DESIGN AND MATERIALS OF NEOPRENE
BEARING PADS
1. Design
(a) Unit pressure shall not exceed 800 psi under combined dead load, live load and
impact, and 500 psi under dead load only.
(b) Relationship between the loaded face and side areas expressed as a "Shape
Factor" shall not be less than 1.25.
ab
2t(a + b)
where 5 = Shape factor
a = Length
b = Width
/ = Thickness
(c) The total expected movement at the bearing shall not exceed one-half o! the
pad thickness.
2. Material
(a) Pads shall be made of neoprene cast in molds under pressure and heat in a
single integral layer. To restrain deformation in thick pads, multiple layers bonded to
l>ut separated by nonelastic sheets may be permitted.
I.- Composition shall meet the following requirements, Test specimens shall be in
accordance with \ST\1 Method D 15, Part B.
226 Masonry
Grade (Durumeter)
60 70
Original Physical Properties:
Hardness, ASTM D 676 60 ± S 70 ± 5
Tensile strength, minimum psi, ASTM D 412 2500 2500
Elongation at break, minimum percent 350 300
Accelerated Tests to Determine Long-Term Aging Characteris-
tics. Oven Aged, 70 hr/212 deg F, ASTM D 573:
Hardness, points change, maximum 0 to +15 0 to +15
Tensile strength, percent change, maximum ±15 ±15
Elongation at break, percent change, maximum — 40 — 40
Ozone, 1 ppm in Air by Volume, 20 percent strain, 100 + 2
deg F, ASTM D 1149*:
100 hr No cracks No cracks
Compression Set, 22 hr/158 deg F, ASTM D 395, Method B:
Percent maximum 25 25
Low Temperature Stiffness, ASTM D 797:
At — 40 deg F, Young's Modulus, maximum psi 10,000 10.000
Tear Test, ASTM D 624, Die "C":
Lb/lin in, minimum 250 225
•Samples to be solvent wiped before test to remove any traces of surface impurities.
(c) The variation in thickness measured along either major axis (taper) shall not
exceed 5 percent.
Report on Assignment 3
Foundations and Earth Pressures
Collaborating with Committees 1, 6, 7, 15 and 30
G. W. Cooke (chairman, subcommittee), B. M. Dornblatt, J. A. Erskine, T. R. Kealey,
E. F. Manley, R. F. Noll, R. B. Peck, Milton Pikarsky, W. H. Robertson, Neil
Van Eenam.
Your committee submits for adoption the following recommendations with respect
to Chapter 8 of the Manual:
Delete the Specifications for Pile Foundations, pages 8-4-1 to 8-4-12, inch, sub-
stituting therefor the following rewritten version:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PILE FOUNDATIONS
A. GENERAL
1. Scope
These specifications cover the investigation, design and construction of pile founda-
tions. The design of trestle piles shall conform to the AREA Specifications For Design
and Construction of Reinforced Concrete Trestles For Railway Loading, Part 9, this
chapter.
2. Purpose and Necessity
Pile foundations are used primarily to transmit loads through soil formations hav-
ing poor supporting properties into or onto formations that are capable of supporting
Masonry 227
the loads, or where the possibility of scour or other disturbance of the soil may cause
a change in the underlying foundation condition.
Depending on subsoil conditions the pile loads may be transmitted to the supporting
soil either through end bearing, or friction, or a combination of end bearing and friction.
Piles may also be used to compact loose beds of cohesionless material.
B. DESIGN
1. Loads
Pile foundations shall be designed for that combination of the following forces which
produces maximum load and in accordance with Sec. C.
Primary
(a) Dead
(b) Live
(c) Centrifugal force
(d) Earth pressure
(e) Buoyancy
Secondary
(f) Wind and other lateral forces
(g) Longitudinal forces
2. Increased Load on Piles
When pile foundations are designed for both primary and secondary forces, as de-
fined above, the allowable load on the piles may be increased by 25 percent, but the
number of piles shall not be less than is required for primary forces alone. With a group
of friction piles, the load on the piles from primary forces shall not be increased by
secondary loads beyond the shear value of the soil as determined under Sec. C, with a
reasonable factor of safety.
3. Eccentricity of Loads
The maximum pile load under eccentric loading shall not exceed the allowable load
as determined under Sec. C. The piles shall be spaced so that the eccentric load on the
foundation will be distributed as equally as possible to the piles in the group.
4. Uplift on Piles
In special cases when piles are subjected to continuous uplift, or to uplift from
horizontal loads other than earth and hydrostatic pressures, and sufficient bond and
anchorage can be provided between the pile and the superimposed structure, the uplift
may be considered in the design of the pile foundation. The uplift force considered in
the design shall not exceed the value of friction between earth and pile or the shear
value of the soil, with an ample safety factor. The ultimate uplift value may besl be
determined by jacking test piles of identical type and dimension to be used in the design,
and measuring the pull required per square foot of embedded area to raise the pile
5. Spacing of Piles
Piles shall be spaced to equalize their load as far as possible consistent with eco-
nomical design of the footings. The spacing of piles shall depend upon the type of pile;
that is, whether friction, end bearing or compaction piles; upon their structural and
crushing strength; and upon the type of material sustaining the pile. The spacing ol
228 Masonry
compaction piles can be determined only from test, as provided in Sec. C, Generally,
piles should not be spaced less than two and one-half diameters (or sides of a square
pile), and in friction bearing materials piles should be spaced three to four-and-one-
half diameters of the pile, depending upon the allowable load determined in accordance
with Sec. C. In small groups the piles may be battered to enlarge the area sustaining
the group, thereby increasing the load-carrying capacity of the group without increas-
ing the size of the foundation unreasonably. End-bearing piles may be spaced in
accordance with the capacity of the pile and the end-bearing stratum to carry the design
load. Piles should be spaced far enough apart, or other suitable means used, to prevent
excessive heaving or uplifting of adjacent piles.
6. Batter Piles
Piles may be battered to help resist longitudinal and lateral forces inadequately
resisted by the footing against the soil. Where longitudinal or lateral loads are large,
a sufficient number of piles should be battered to take these loads. Such piles shall be
designed to carry horizontal forces combined with their share of the vertical loads.
Where space permits, piles may be added to the group with a batter making a large
angle between the pile and the vertical to resist large longitudinal or lateral loads.
C. ALLOWABLE LOAD ON PILES
1. Soil Investigation
Test borings or soundings shall be made at enough locations and to a sufficient
depth below the tips of the piles to determine adequately the character of the material
through which the piles are to be driven and of the materials underlying the tips of
the piles. The results of the borings, soundings and soil tests, taken into consideration
with the function of the piles in service, will determine the type, spacing and length
of piles that should be used and whether the piles will be end bearing, friction bearing
or a combination of both types.
Sufficient borings or soundings should be made to determine the thickness of any
material that may provide end bearing. If the bearing stratum is of doubtful thickness,
the exploration should be extended below it to determine the capacity of the underlying
material to support the load transmitted to it.
The borings or soundings should be of such a character as to disclose the loose-
ness or denseness of cohesionless soils and the strength and compressibility of cohesive
soils. The latter shall preferably be determined on the basis of laboratory tests.
2. Allowable Load on End-Bearing Piles
A pile may be considered end bearing when it passes through soil having no ap-
preciable frictional resistance, and has its tip resting on impenetrable material such as
rock or enters other material that offers rapidly increasing resistance to further pene-
tration. The capacity of end-bearing piles depends on the structural strength of the
piles and the bearing capacity of the material underlying the piles. The structural
strength of the pile depends on the pile type and shall be determined in accordance
with the allowable stresses provided by AREA specifications. If the end-bearing stratum
is of sufficient thickness the capacity of a pile in a group is equal to the capacity of a
single pile. When end-bearing piles pass through unconsolidated materials, such as new
embankment, consideration should be given in design to the additional load that may
be imposed on the pile as the material consolidates above the bearing stratum. The
Masonry 229
design load shall preferably be determined by loading test piles unless the end bearing
stratum consists of a sufficient thickness of sound rock. Where end-bearing capacity is
not determined by test piles, the allowable load at the tip of the pile shall not exceed
the bearing capacity of the supporting material, with a reasonable factor of safety.
3. Allowable Load on Friction Piles
A friction pile derives its support principally from the surrounding soil through
the development of shearing or frictional resistance. The capacity of friction piles de-
pends upon the ability of the soil to carry the load distributed by the piles within the
limits of settlement that can be tolerated by the structure.
The design load shall preferably be determined by loading test piles in accordance
with the provisions of Sec. D, Art. 8. Where groups of piles are driven into plastic
materials, consideration should be given not only to the allowable load per pile, but
also to the total load that can be safely assigned to the group. The design load shall
be determined by loading a group of piles or by making an allowance for the differ-
ence between the capacity of a single pile and a group of piles. A single row of piles
shall not be considered as a group provided the piles are spaced not less than two-and-
one-half times their nominal butt diameter.
In many cases a study of the borings will determine the ability of the soil to carry
the distributed loads. In doubtful cases, involving cohesive soils, the load-settlement
relationship should be investigated by recognized soil-mechanics methods and procedures.
4. Combination End- and Friction-Bearing Piles
Where the pile penetrates material having substantial friction value and has its
point driven on or into end-bearing stratum, the pile may be designed for a combina-
tion of friction and end bearing. The allowable load per pile may be estimated on the
basis of the soil exploration. If the information is inadequate, it may be supplemented
by a load test of a group of piles having their points several feet above the end-bearing
stratum and a second group driven to bearing in the stratum. The soil exploration shall
also include an investigation of the material underlying an end-bearing stratum that is
limited in depth. For the purpose of structural analysis of a pile, the dead and per-
manent load may be considered as carried by end bearing if the pile reaches a firm
Stratum, and either all. or that part of live load up to the working value of the -kin
friction tor the soil and pile, may be considered to be carried by friction bearing.
5. Compaction Piles
Piles driven into In, -, granular material for the purpose of compacting the soil are
considered to in- compaction piles. The pile- should be driven to a specified resistance
and will generally have different lengths.
6. Lateral Support
\ pile -hall be considered fully supported laterally except that portion which i.-, or
may be as a result Of scour, in air or water, or which may !><• in muck, peat, thin mud
or fluid material. Where a portion of the pile is not supported lateralis as a short
Column, that portion shall be considered as a long column and proper allowance made
in the design. Wherr conditions warrant, special investigations should be carried out to
determine the extent to which tin- vertical capadt) of the pile i- reduced by the presence
"i -"it materials.
-MO Masonry
7. Pile Formula
When the cost of load tests or laboratory analyses is excessive in comparison with the
cost of the project, the pile capacity in granular material may be determined by the
Engineering News formula, but in any event the value of the material supporting the
pile, as disclosed by the test borings, shall be adequate. Under no circumstances shall
a pile formula be used to determine the capacity of a pile driven to rock, or of a friction
pile in silt or clay.
D. LOADING TESTS
1. Damaged Piles
Shattered, broomed or otherwise damaged pile heads shall be cut back to sound
material before the test is made.
2. Curing Cast-in-Place Piles
Unless otherwise provided, shells or tubes which in service are to be filled with
concrete, shall be filled with concrete with time for adequate curing before the test is
made. High-early-strength cement may be used.
3. Application of Loads
Following completion of driving by not less than 48 hr for tests of Class A, nor
72 hr for those of Class B, the test load shall be applied concentrically as near the
ground as practicable, by direct weight or by hydraulic jack pressure that is auto-
matically maintained. If anchor piles or devices are used to provide reaction, the axis
of the nearest such pile or device shall be located at least S ft from the loaded pile.
The initial and subsequent increments shall be applied gradually. The test load and its
application shall be so arranged that readings can be taken by the engineers directly on
the pile and a record made of the load and settlement simultaneously at any time.
4. Amount of Load
The piles to be tested shall be loaded to at least twice the proposed working load.
The initial load shall not exceed two-thirds and the increments shall not exceed one-third
of the proposed or anticipated working load.
5. Records
Records shall be made of the load, time and settlement as accurately as practicable
immediately before and following a change of load. While noticeable settlement is taking
place, readings shall be at 10-min intervals or less; otherwise at hourly intervals.
6. Loading Tests
Loading tests may be of two classes:
Class A — Construction test to gage compliance with plans and specifications.
Class B — Predesign test, to aid the designer.
Since more time is usually available under Class B, and there is larger opportunity
to make use of revealed data, such tests can justify a more extended procedure than
those under Class A.
Masonry 231
7. Class A Test
In making Class A tests, at least 4 hr shall elapse between the applications of suc-
cessive increments. When the total load equals twice the proposed working load, it shall
be left in place at least 48 hr, the last 24 of which shall be free from settlement. If
after deducting rebound following the total release of this load, the net settlement at
the top of the pile does not exceed % in, the pile shall be considered adequate to support
safely the proposed working load.
8. Class B Test (Predesign)
In Class B tests, the loading shall, if feasible, be carried to failure of the soil or
pile. After reaching the anticipated working load, at least 12 hr shall elapse between
the applications of successive increments.
(a) For at least three values of test load (say 100, 166% and 200 percent of
the anticipated working load), the load shall be released and remain off at
least 6 hr. The previous load shall then be restored and maintained until the
gross settlement equals that existing at the time of the previous release,
whereupon the succeeding increments shall be added.
(b) As the approach of failure is sensed, the load shall be carefully adjusted in
order to obtain gradual settlement, if possible, until failure is complete.
(c) Curves shall be plotted, relating the load, settlement and time for the com-
plete period of the test.
(d) The load value where the load-settlement curve begins to show an accelerated
deviation from its previous trend, may be considered the "yield point" for
the given soil and pile, and one-half of this value or one-half of the value
at which the net settlement is estimated as % in, whichever is the smaller,
may be considered a safe working load for this pile, acting singly.
(e) Where Class B tests are intended to govern the design of pile groups, a test
shall be made on a group which is typical of the contemplated design, if
such a test is feasible. In the absence of such a group test, the capacity of
the proposed group should be studied in the light of the shearing value and
settlement behavior of the soil as revealed by the test of single piles.
9. Rebound
In determining net settlement of a tested pile, deduction shall be made for the
allowable elastic recovery of the pile as indicated by the rebound within 12 hr following
the release of the test load.
E. TIMBER PILES
1. Specifications
Timber piles shall conform to the AREA Specifications for Wood Piles, Chapter 7.
Parts 1 and 3. If treatment is required, it shall conform to AREA Specifications for
Wood Preservation. Chapter 17.
F. STEEL BEARING PILES
1. Types
This type ol piling shall include all steel H section piles and open-end steel pipe
pile-
232 Masonry
2. Material
All steel used for the piles shall conform to the AREA Specifications for Steel Rail-
way Bridges, Chapter 15, Part 1.
3. Size
The minimum depth of a steel H section shall lie 8 in. The minimum thickness i>!
metal in the flange or web shall be •>£ in- The flange width shall be not less than 85
percent of the depth of the section.
The minimum outside diameter of open-end pipe piles shall be 10?^ in. The mini-
mum wall thickness shall be Y% in.
4. Splicing
Full-length piles shall be used wherever practicable, but if splices cannot be avoided,
an approved method of splicing shall be used which will develop the full strength of the
pile. Piles shall not be spliced except by permission of the engineer.
5. Capping
Where steel bearing caps are required they shall be suitably fastened to the top of
the pile so as to avoid displacement and to provide as practically as possible an even
bearing on the pile, with at least 50 percent of the pile top in contact with the bearing
cap. The bearing cap shall be of such size that the pressure on the footing will not
exceed the allowable bearing pressure of the concrete used in the footing.
Steel bearing caps will not be required where piles are adequately bonded to the
concrete by means of a mat of reinforcing bars running through holes in the piles, or
encased by a reinforcing steel cage designed to resist the shearing off of the perimeter
of the footing.
6. Protection Against Corrosion
Piles which will be exposed shall be protected from corrosion by concrete encase-
ment or other suitable means. Protection at ground surfaces or normal water lines shall
be provided and shall extend at least 1 ft above the ground surface or normal water
line and 3 ft below the ground surface or low-water line. Concrete protection, where
provided, shall have a minimum thickness of 3 in.
Structural steel piles shall not be used through active corrosion-inducing material
or where electrolysis may occur without adequate provision for the protection of
such piles.
7. Allowable Stresses
The allowable load per pile shall be determined as specified in Sec. C and D, but
the unit stresses shall not exceed 12,000 psi for ASTM A 7 steel. In computing the
effective area of the steel where corrosion may be expected and protection has not been
provided, the outer tV in of thickness at surfaces subject to corrosion shall be deducted.
Due allowance shall be made for any bending or column action.
G. PRECAST CONCRETE PILES
1. General
The workmanship, material and proportioning shall conform to the requirements
specified in the AREA Specifications for Concrete and Reinforced Concrete, Part 1, this
Chapter.
Masonry 233
2. Design
Piles of constant cross section shall have a least diameter or lateral dimension of
14 in for piles up to 35 ft in length and not less than 16 in for lengths over 35 ft and
not over 50 ft. Piles over 50 ft in length shall be of a size and design approved by the
engineer. Piles may be pointed or not as directed by the engineer.
Piles with a uniform taper shall have a minimum lateral dimension of not less than
8 in at the tip and an average diameter of not less than 12 in for lengths not over
40 ft. Piles over 40 ft shall have a minimum taper of 1 in. in 8 ft and a lateral
dimension at the tip of not less than 10 in.
The reinforcement shall consist of longitudinal bars, supported by lateral reinforce-
ment in the form of hoops or spirals. The longitudinal reinforcement shall be designed
for handling stresses and shall normally consist of 8 bars, uniformly spaced, and not
smaller than Xo. 4 nor larger than No. 11. The cross-sectional area of the longitudinal
reinforcement shall be not less than 1 percent nor more than 4 percent of the average
cross-sectional area of the pile. The lateral reinforcement shall consist of not less than
Xo. 7 steel wire, spaced not more than 8 in center to center throughout the length of the
pile, except that for not less than 2 ft at each end the spacing shall not exceed 3 in
center to center. The reinforcement shall be placed with a cover of not less than \l/2 in
and greater cover as conditions require.
3. Manufacture
(a) Aggregates — The maximum size of the coarse aggregate shall be not more than
1 in nor more than three-fourths of the minimum clear spacing of reinforcement or
the minimum distance from reinforcement to the forms.
(b) Strength of Concrete — The concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength
of 3700 psi at 28 days, using not more than 5^2 gal of water per bag of cement.
(c) Workability and Placement — The concrete shall be of a workable consistency
dependent on the method of placement to insure complete embedment of reinforcement
and to prevent honeycombing. Vibrating equipment shall preferably be used, and it
shall be of a type approved by the engineer.
(d) Curing — Moist curing shall begin as soon as possible after completion of place-
mint of the concrete. The surface of the concrete shall be kept continually wet during
the curing period. Curing shall be continued until the concrete has attained a strength
of 2500 psi. as shown by test cylinders under like curing or as specified by the engineer.
Substitutes for moist curing will be accepted only upon specific permission of the
engineer.
(e) Marking — Each pile shall be Stamped <>r marked with the date of its manufac-
ture. Lifting points indicated on the plans shall be plainly marked.
(j) Handling — Piles may be handled and driven only when the concrete has at-
tained ;i tompressive strength of 3700 psi. unless special provision is made for handling
that will reduce the stresses in proportion to the strength of the concrete as shown by
test cylinders cured under external conditions like those pertaining to the concrete in the
piles. Piles shall be carefully handled, avoiding dropping or severe jarring while in a
horizontal position
4. Cut-Off
Precast pile- shall be driven to or cul off within 2 in of the elevation shown on
the plans, hut in all cases the CUt-off shall he below anv indication of fracture. It piles
234 Masonry
are cut off or driven below the required elevation, they shall be built up to the cut-off
line in a manner satisfactory to the engineer.
5. Allowable Stresses
The allowable load per pile shall be determined as specified in Sees. C and D, but
the unit stresses shall not exceed the allowable stresses specified in the AREA Specifica-
tions for Design of Plain and Reinforced Concrete Members, Part 2, this Chapter.
H. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PILES
1. Types
Cast-in-place piles shall be cast in previously driven metal casings or shells which
shall remain permanently in place. They may be tapered or cylindrical, or a combination
of tapered and cylindrical shapes.
2. Tapered Piles
Tapered piles shall be not less than 8 in. in diameter at the tip and shall be uni-
formly tapered at the rate of not less than 1 in. in 8 ft.
3. Cylindrical Piles
Cylindrical piles shall be of a size and design approved by the engineer.
4. Minimum Butt Dimensions
The butt diameter for tapered and cylindrical piles shall be not less than 1024 in f°r
end-bearing piles, nor less than 12 in for friction piles and combination end- and friction-
bearing piles, as denned in Sec. C, unless otherwise authorized by the engineer.
5. Metal Casings and Shells
The metal casings or shells shall be formed of basic open-hearth steel. The mini-
mum tensile yield strength of the steel in the fabricated element shall be certified as
not less than 35,000 psi.
Shells driven with a mandrel shall have a thickness of not less than No. 18 Usmsg.
Casings driven directly shall have a thickness of not less than No. 7 Usmsg, except that
where fluted casings are used the minimum thickness may be No. 9 Usmsg. The shells
or casings shall be in one integral piece or adequately spliced, and shall be of sufficient
thickness to withstand installational pressures without harmful distortion. The casings
of directly driven piles shall be seamless or butt seam welded tubes.
All piles shall be equipped with approved conical steel driving points or flat plates
welded to the casing. The end closures approved for cylindrical piles shall not project
beyond the diameter of the pile casing when used on friction piles.
6. Placing Concrete
Casings or shells shall be inspected and approved by the engineer immediately before
any concrete is placed. Any accumulated water or foreign matter shall be removed before
the concrete is placed. Concrete having a minimum compressive strength of at least
2500 psi at 28 days shall be used to fill the shell. The placing of the concrete shall be
carried out as a continuous operation from the tip to the cut-off elevation, and shall be
performed in such a manner as to minimize segregation.
No piling shall be driven within 15 ft of a piling that has been filled with concrete
for less than 12 hr. The driving procedure for any particular project shall be discussed
Masonry 235
with the engineer in charge before commencing work; the engineer shall consider the
character of the soil, depth of pile penetration and other factors in determining the best
driving sequence to minimize heaving of the pile, collapse of the shell, and injury to
previously placed concrete.
7. Allowable Stresses
The allowable load per pile shall be determined as specified in Sees. C and D, but
the unit stresses shall not exceed the following:
Concrete: 0.25 of the ultimate compressive unit strength of the concrete used.
Steel: 0.30 of the tensile yield point of the steel in the fabricated casing, pro-
vided that the casing is % in or more in thickness. Where corrosion
may be expected & in shall be deducted from the casing thickness in
computing the effective area of steel.
Where a portion of the pile passes through soils providing inadequate lateral sup-
port, as described in Sec. C, Art. 6, that portion of the pile shall be designed as a
column in accordance with Part 2, Sec. H, of this Chapter.
8. Protection Against Corrosion
(To apply if the steel casing is used in computing the strength of the pile)
Piles that will be exposed shall be protected from corrosion by means of concrete
encasement extending at least 1 ft above the ground surface or normal water line and
3 ft below the ground surface or low-water line. The minimum concrete cover shall be
3 in. As an alternative the section of pile subject to corrosion may be reinforced to
compensate for the expected loss of casing thickness.
If the strength of the steel is considered in computing the strength of the pile, the
pile shall not be used through active rust-inducing material or where electrolysis may
occur without adequate provision for the protection of such pile.
I. DRIVING PILES
1. Equipment
Piles shall be driven with the heaviest hammer that, in the judgment of the engineer,
can l)e used to secure maximum penetration without damage to the pile. The energy
rating of the pile hammer to be used shall be determined by the engineer taking into
account the weight of the pile, type of soil, length of the pile, and any other factors
he may deem important.
The boiler or compressor used to supply steam or air for the operation of a ham-
mer -hall have a capacity sufficient to maintain full rated pressure at least equal to that
recommended by the manufacturer of the hammer being used, throughout the driving
period hi any pile.
2. Cushion Cap
All piles shall preferably be protected with approved cushioning material to prevent
damaue to the pile butt during driving.
3. Splicing
Driving shall be continued until the plan cut-off is reached or until the rate of
penetration specified is obtained. If the proper resistance to driving is not attained at
the plan mi off. the driving -hall he continued and the additional length of pile required
236 Masonry
shall be supplied by splicing in such a way as to develop the lull strength of the section
of the pile. The splice shall be made a sufficient distance, but not less than 6 in, above
the ground or water surface so that the splice can be observed during subsequent
driving.
4. Jetting
Piles may be jetted, when permitted by the engineer, either by use of water jets
alone or in combination with the hammer. The volume and pressure of the water at the
jet nozzles shall be sufficient to freely erode the material adjacent to the pile. Before the
desired penetration is reached the jets shall be withdrawn and the piles driven to
required penetration or resistance.
5. Preboring
Where piles must be installed through strata offering high resistance to driving,
where jetting would cause damage, to prevent excessive heaving of cohesive soils, for
driving through compressible material or for other valid reasons, the engineer may re-
quire or permit holes to be bored with a power auger or other equipment especially
designed for the purpose. Dependent on the reasons for preboring, the diameter of the
hole shall be as directed by the engineer to obtain the proper pile penetration and car-
rying capacity. The pile shall be inserted into the hole immediately after boring and be
driven to required penetration or resistance.
6. Improperly Driven and Damaged Piles
Piles shall be driven within 3 in of the plan location. Variations of more than % in
per ft from the vertical, or from the batter line when batter piles are required, may be
subject to rejection by the engineer. Any pile so out of line or plumb as to impair its
usefulness shall be pulled and redriven or an additional pile driven, as required by the
engineer. Any pile so injured in driving or handling as to impair its structural capacity
as a pile under the conditions of use shall be replaced by a new pile, or the injured
part shall be replaced by splicing or other remedial measures — all as directed by the
engineer.
7. Redriving of Heaved Piles
Previously driven piles shall be carefully checked during the driving of adjacent
piles and, if any uplift occurs, they shall be redriven to the required penetration or
resistance.
8. Interrupted Driving
When driving is interrupted or the rate of blows retarded for any reason, a careful
record shall be kept of the extent of the delay or retardation. Any decrease in the pene-
tration per blow immediately following such instances, shall be disregarded in estimating
by formula the bearing capacity of the pile.
Masonry 237
Report on Assignment 4
Deterioration and Repair of Masonry Structures
\\ I. Brakensiek (chairman, subcommittee), E. R. BIcwitt, L. B. Boyd, J. M. Gilmore,
H. W. Hopkins, R. J. Klueh, P. R. Matthews, J. E. Peterson, J. H. Sawyer, Jr.,
M. Schifalacqua.
Your committee has started revising Part 13, Sec. B — Shotcrete on Masonry, to
include the use of epoxy resin compounds as bonding agents. As soon as this assignment
is completed it is planned to commence work on revising Part 14 — Repairing and
Solidifying Masonry Structures, to include the use of epoxy resins.
Concurrently your committee is studying the various uses of epoxy resins in the
repair of concrete. In this connection Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles, has
published a report on the technology, railroad applications, formulations, and general
instructions for the use of epoxy resins under one of its assignments. The report appears
in VoL 64, Bulletin 573.
Report on Assignment 6
Prestressed Concrete for Railway Structures
Collaborating with Committee 6
J. R. Williams (chairman, subcommittee), L. F. Currier, W. J. Eney, R. W. Gilmore,
H. R. Hutchens. L. P. Nicholson, E. D. Ripple, S. A. Stutes, G. R. Vanderpool,
W. R. Wilson, G. A. Wolf, R. J. Wright.
Your committee is now completing the design and detail drawings of a recom-
mended prestressed concrete trestle. In addition to the drawings, specifications for the
design and construction of prestressed concrete trestles for railway loading using box-
type beams are currently being prepared. These specifications together with the drawings
will be proposed as a new part of Chapter 8.
Report on Assignment 7
Quality of Concrete and Mortars
Collaborating with Committee 6
J VY Dolson (chairman, subcommittee), M. W. Bruns, VV. J. Galloway, S. B. Holt,
A. C. Johnson, R. E. Kleist, L. M. Morris, M. S. N'orris, R. I. Rolling R \
Unerj
Your committee submits the following report in two parts. Pari l i- a bibliographj
on quality ol concrete, submitted as information; Part 2 is a revision oi WI"\I refer-
ences in the Manual, submitted for adoption.
238 Masonry
Part 1 — Bibliography of Important Articles in AREA
Proceedings (Vols. 40-63) Relative to
Quality of Concrete
Volume Page
40 416 Standard Portland Cement Compared with Standard High-Early-Strength
Portland Cement. Discussion page 766.
41 363 Progress in the Science and Art of Concrete Manufacture: Autoclave
Test of Portland Cement, Its Significance and Present Status of Pro-
posed Method of Test and Specification Requirement.
41 378 Progress in Cement Manufacture and Testing. Manufacture and Con-
stitution, Relation of Chemical Composition to Physical Characteristics,
Nature of Hydrated Cement, Classes of Cement, Tests.
42 305 Progress in Science and Art of Concrete Manufacture: Needed Adjust-
ments in Field Practice to Use Present-Day Cements to Best Advantage.
42 310 Progress in Cement Manufacture and Testing. "Revisions in Cement
Specifications"
42 335 Durability of Concrete: Factors Affecting Durability from the Stand-
point of Materials and Manufacture, Principal Defects in Concrete which
Lead to Disintegration, Principal Weathering Actions and Other Disin-
tegrating Forces Affecting the Durability of Concrete Other than design
loads and Abrasion, Tests for Predicting Durability.
43 317 Progress in the Science and Art of Concrete Manufacture. "Revision in
Cement Specifications"
46 438 Progress in the Science and Art of Concrete Manufacture. Design of
Concrete Mixes.
48 454 Air-Entraining Concrete: Principles of Air Entrainment, Materials, Air-
Entraining Portland Cement, Air-Entraining Admixtures, Natural Ce-
ments, Aggregates, Various Effects of Air-Entrainment on the Properties
of Concrete, Air-Entraining Cements or Admixtures — Advantages and
Disadvantages, Design Problems, Precautions.
49 634 Concrete Deterioration, By Dr. Ruth D. Terzaghi.
50 320 Proportioning Concrete Mixes for Field Use, Instructions for Selection
of Trial Mix, Fundamentals of Concrete Making.
51 372 The Influence of Aggregate Characteristics on the Proportioning of Con-
crete, Types of Aggregates, Characteristics of Combined Aggregate Par-
ticles, Effect of Aggregate on the Design of Mixes.
51 389 Guide to Water-Cement Ratio Method of Making Concrete: Basic Prin-
ciples, Proportioning Concrete, Instructions to Field Men; Materials,
Workmanship.
51 899 Concrete Performance, By G. H. Paris, railroad representative, PCA.
52 394 Ready-Mixed Concrete: History, Advantages. Methods of Manufacture,
Quality of Concrete, Measuring Materials, Allowance for Surface Mois-
ture, Mixing and Delivery, Discharging Truck Mixers and Agitators,
Cold Weather Concrete, Inspection and Tests.
53 1051 Durable Concrete Costs Less, by G. H. Paris, railroad representative,
PCA.
Masonry 239
Volume Page
55 486 Alkali — Aggregate Reaction in Concrete: History, Identification of Re-
active Aggregates, Theories on Mechanism of Alkali — Aggregate Reac-
tion, Means of Avoiding Deterioration due to Alkali — Aggregate
Reaction.
55 1010 Alkali — Aggregate Reaction in Concrete, by P. D. Miesenhelder, research
engineer concrete, Engineering Division, AAR.
Bibliography on Admixtures for Concrete: General, Air-Entraining
Agents, Retarders, Pozzolans, Accelerators, Acid and Alkali-Resisting
Agents, Waterproofers, Workability Agents.
59 678 Lightweight Aggregates for Concrete; Classification, Advantages and
Uses, Disadvantages, Types.
59 683 The Measurement of Air Content of Plastic Concrete: Gravimetric
Method, Volumetric Method, Pressure Method.
60 494 Use of Fly Ash in Concrete: Pozzolanic Action, Use, Producers Claims
and Observations, Precautions.
63 690 Use of Lightweight Concrete in Railroad Work, by H. R. Hutchens,
general manager, Concrete Products Division, Carter-Waters Corp.
Part 2— Revision of ASTM References
Your committee offers for adoption the following editorial revisions with respect
to the Manual:
Pages 8-18-1 and 8-18-2
ASTM SPECIFICATIONS AND DESIGNATIONS
Change Part 18 to Part 19.
Make the following revisions and additions to the ASTM specifications and desig-
nations listed:
A 6-61 T to A 6-62 T
\ H-58T to A 15-62 T
\ 16-59 T to A 16-62 T
A 82-61 T to A 82-62 T
A 160-57 T to A 160-62 T
A 408-58 T to A 408-62 T
A 431-59 T to A 431-62 T
\ 432-59 T to A 432-62 T
C 31-59 to C 31-62 T, add "(Tentative)'' after description of specification.
C 76-61 T to C 76-62 T
C 87-58 T to C 87-62 T
(' 144-52 T to C 144-62 T
(' ISO 61 to C 150-62
C 192-59 to C 192-62 T, add "(Tentative)" after description of specification.
C 205-61 T to C 205-62 T
l 60 to C 231-62
r to C 235-62 T
i ' 1 1" 58 T to C 340-62 T
240 Masonry
After "Designation (' 342-61 T" add the following new items:
C 360-55 T Ball Penetration in Fresh Portland Cemenl Concrete (Tentative)
D 15-60 T Sample Preparation for Physical Testing of Rubber Products (Tin
tativ e
After "Designation I) 75 59" add the following new items:
D 395-61 Compression Set of Vulcanized Rubber
D 412-62 T Tension Testing of Vulcanized Rubber (Tentative)
D 573-53 Accelerated Aging of Vulcanized Rubber by the Oven Method
D 624-54 Tear Resistance of Vulcanized Rubber
D 676-59 T Indentation of Rubber by Means of Durometer (Tentative)
D 797-58 Young's Modulus in Flexure of Natural and Synthetic Elastomers at
Normal and Subnormal Temperatures
D 1149-60 T Accelerated Ozone Cracking of Vulcanized Rubber (Tentative)
Report on Assignment 8
Waterproofing for Railway Structures
Collaborating with Committees 6, 7 and 15
R. J. Brueske (chairman, subcommittee), A. L. Becker, G. W. Clarvoe, J. R. Iwinski,
M. Pikarsky, D. B. Roth, D. V. Wigal, J. M. Williams, K. B. Woods.
Your committee makes the following progress report.
Last year the subject matter shown in Part 3, Chapter 29, "Coatings for Damp-
proofing" was withdrawn from the Manual. The material then specified was no longer
available commercially, and the specification did not cover new materials that may now
be available and that may become available in the future.
It is our opinion that a performance test for dampproofing coatings should be
made and also a test for the effect of bacteria and other deleterious substances in the
soil on various dampproofing coatings. One of the results that we expected to obtain
from the tests was the minimum amount of water a dampproofing coating should repel
in order to be considered effective.
Due to the reduced budget funds being allotted, it is not possible to allocate funds
for this work in 1963. Therefore, since there will undoubtedly be a long delay before
any research can be performed, we have decided to revise the specification removed
from the Manual last year to permit the use of available materials. It is hoped that
this can be completed in 1963.
This committee will continue its work on waterproofing qualities of epoxy resins
and related materials. Committee 7 has been requested to continue its investigation of
the waterproofing qualities of epoxy resins during the coming year. In this connection
Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles, has prepared a report on epoxy resins under
its Assignment 6, which appears in Vol. 64, Bulletin 573.
Report of Committee 3 — Ties and Wood Preservation
R. B. Radkey, Chairman
W. E. Fchr,
Vice Chairman
C. S. Burt
H. F. Kanute
W. W. Barger
L. C. G'OLLISTER
W. L. Kahler
P. D. Brentlinger
M. J. HUBBARD
G. A. Williams
\Y. F. Akksey
A B. Baker
R. S. Belcher (E)
R. G. Brohaugh
\Y. Buehler (E)
C. M. Burpkk
W. J. Burtox (E)
G. B. Campbkll*
R. W. Cook
E. M. CUMMINGS
D. L. Davies
C. E.DeGeer
R. F. Dreitzler
H. R. Duncan
K. C. Edscorn
T. H. Friedlin (E)
A. K. Frost
F. J. Fudge
H. M. Harlow
F. F. Hornic
M. S. Hudson
R. P. Hughis
F. S. Hunter
H. E. Hurst
W. R. Jacobson
H. \V. Jenson
I.. \V. KlSTI.KR
W. E. Laird
R. W. Orr
T. H. Patrick
C. A. Peebles
R. R. Poux
A. P. Richards
H. S. Ross
N. A. Salzano
J. T. Slocomb
O. W. Smith
R. B. Smith
E. F. Snyder
L. S. Strohl
H. K. Wyant
R. G. ZlETLOW
Committee
i K ) Member Emeritus.
Died February 10, 1962.
Those who>e names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 3.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subject^:
1. Revision of Manual.
Manual Chapters 3 and 17 were revised last year in considerable detail.
At this time no further revision is required.
2. Cross and switch ties,
a. Extent of adherence to specifications. Report of inspection of an
Arkansas treating plant presented as information page 24.*
b. Study on possible revision (if cross design and or spacing, collaborating
with Committee ;. Progress reporl presented as information page 244
feasibility and economics of re-using recovered ties, with or without
additional treatment, collaborating with Committee 22.
ress reporl presented as information page -'44
H 1 preservath
No i hanges in the current specifications for preservatives have been found
necessary during the lasl year. A new type of Boliden salts (CZA) known
is K i- being studied. This salt contains a copper silt thai is not in
241
242 Ties and Wood Preservation ^^__
the Boliden salts (CZA) or in the copperized Boliden salts (CuCZA). This
study will be continued. A new creosote-coal tar solution specification for
use in marine piles is being studied.
4. Conditioning and preservative treatment of forest products.
Monograph, presented as information page 246
5. Service records.
a. Report on tie renewals and cost per mile of maintained track as furnished
by the AAR, Bureau of Railway Economics, from annual reports of
Class I Railways to the Interstate Commerce Commission was published
in Bulletin 572, June-July 1962, page 831. Members are urged to study
the approach in utilizing this information set forth in the address "Aver-
age Tie Life — An Interpretation" by President C. J. Code as published
in Bulletin 573, September-October 1962, p. 95.
b. Termite control investigation. A report on the inspection of specimens
after 52 months of exposure was published in Bulletin 573, September-
Ocotber 1962, page 19. In 1963 this test will be 5 years old and will be
reported on in detail.
c. Report presented as information on cross tie service records of certain
test-ties installed in the Missouri Pacific and Baltimore & Ohio Railroads page 252
6. Methods of prolonging service life of ties.
Progress report, presented as information page 257
7. Substitutes for wood ties.
Progress report, presented as information page 259
8. Making charcoal from used ties.
Final report, presented as information page 260
The Committek on Ties and Wood Preservation,
R. B. Radkey, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 575, December 1962.
MEMOIR
George JS. Campbell
George Campbell, retired tie and timber agent, Missouri Pacific Railroad, died at
his home in St. Louis, Mo. on February 10, 1962. Committee 3 expresses its sorrow at
the loss of its honored member and friend. He is survived by his widow, the former
Sessie Mae Cowart, who makes her home in St. Louis, and three children: George
Campbell of Tiller Tie & Lumber Company, Inc., Little Rock, Ark.; W. J. Campbell
with Bache & Company, Investments, Tulsa, Okla.; and Mrs. Elizabeth Campbell
Williams of St. Louis, Mo.
George, as he was always known by his friends, was born in Ironton, Mo., on May
6, 1891. Following an elementary school education, he went to work for the Frisco Rail-
road; thence to the Southern Pacific on a branch line with the improbable name The
Ties and Wood Preservation 243
Rabbit. From there he went with a small logging railroad owned by W. T. Carter and
Brothers Lumber Company of Camden, Tex.; then back to the Southern Pacific. Thence,
a short hitch with National Lumber & Creosoting Company, Houston, Tex., and then
to the Gulf Coast Lines. Mr. Campbell became connected with the Missouri Pacific in
1926 as tie and timber agent in Houston. In 1936 he moved to Little Rock as general
inspector for the Missouri Pacific and in 1935 to St. Louis as tie and timber agent with
the same railroad. He retired in 1959.
Mr. Campbell became a member of Committee 17 — Wood Preservation during 1932
and continued membership on that committee through 1960. He was chairman of this
important committee during the years 1949 through 1951. He became a member of
Committee 3 — Ties during 1947 and was an active member of this committee through
1960. He became a member of Committee 3 — Ties and Wood Preservation when these
two committees were consolidated at the beginning of 1961.
In addition to George's capacity for work, he had an attractive and pleasing per-
sonality, plus a keen sense of humor. Truly, it can be said that he lived a full and
useful life, devoted to his family, his church, and his work. His sound knowledge, judg-
ment, counsel, and genial ways will be greatly missed during the years ahead.
Clarence S. Burt, Chairman,
Robert B. Radkey,
H. R. Duncan,
Committee on Memoir.
Report on Assignment 2
Cross and Switch Ties
H. F. Kanute (chairman, subcommittee), W. F. Arksey, P. D. Brentlinger, R. W. Cook,
E. M. Cummings. A. K. Frost, F. J. Fudge, F. F. Hornig, W. R. Jacobson, H. W.
Jensen, L. W. Kistler. W. E. Laird. H. S. Ross. X. A. Salzano, J. T. Slocomb,
H. K. Wyant.
a. Extent of Adherence to Specifications
The following report is submitted as information.
iHning the summer of 1962, Committee 3 inspected cross ties at one treating plant,
and other ties stored in two different railroad yards, all in Arkansas. The ties observed
were nearly all oak and gum, with only a few pine ties in one railroad yard. The ties
ucic produced in Arkansas. Louisiana, and Missouri and all were "I excellent quality.
Wither railroad did any incising nor wire iron- or dowels used in any of the gum
ties. Each railroad used it> own system of marking ties. One railroad purchased oak ties
without anti-splitting devices and did -elective dowelling. This road permitted ties to
be 1 in over the specified length, but none under. The other railroad purchased oak ties
with two "('" iron- in each end of every tie. and permitted the tie- to lie 2 in over
the specified length and 1 in shorter.
Sizing of tie- was L'ood. Ties were neatly -tacked and each tie wa- well -paced in
the stacks. Good housekeeping, good drainage and general cleanliness wen- observed in
both tic- yards.
The committee also observed the construction of treated highwaj crossing sections
which were made up of tie- sized and bolted together.
244 Ties and Wood Preservation
b. Study of Possible Revision of Cross Tie Design and/or Spacing,
Collaborating with Committee 5
Your committee submits as information the following report based on data obtained
from a questionnaire submitted to several railroads represented by Committee 3
membership.
Main Track
The ties being used by the reporting roads are dimensioned 7 in by 9 in by 8 ft
6 in or 7 in by 8 in by 8 ft 6 in, with one road using 7- in by 8-in by 9-ft ties. Spacing
of ties varies from 19^ in to 21 in, with the majority using 19J^-in spacing. One rail-
road reported that it uses 9-ft to 10-ft ties in areas having poor subgrade conditions.
Several reported that they feel they could go to 21 to 2 2 -in centers without increasing
maintenance costs because of the use of heavier rail and less concentration of load by
diesel locomotives than steam locomotives.
Secondary Main Track
The ties being used are 7 in by 9 in by 8 ft 6 in, 7 in by 8 in by 8 ft 6 in, and
6 in by 8 in by 8 ft 6 in, with spacing varying from 19^ to 2 2 ]/2 -in centers, the
majority of the roads using a spacing of 20 to 21J^-in centers.
Branch Lines
The ties being used are 6 in by 8 in by 8 ft 6 in, one railroad reporting uses 6-in
by 8-in by 8-ft 0-in ties. The spacing varies from 19^ to 24 in, with the majority using
21 to 22^ in center-to-center spacing.
Yard Tracks
The ties being used are 6 in by 8 in by 8 ft 6 in; one railroad reported using 6-in
by 8-in by 8-ft 0-in ties; another is using 6-in by 6-in by 8-ft 6-in ties. Spacing varies
from 20 to 25 in, with the majority using 24- to 25-in spacing. Most of the roads
reporting were of the opinion that ties in yards could be spaced at 24- to 25-in centers
without increasing maintenance costs because of the less concentration of load by diesel
locomotives than by the steam locomotive.
One railroad has a test section of 24 ties, 9 in by 12 in by 8 ft 6 in, spaced at 30-in
centers, which appears to be satisfactory. However, the test section has been in service
only one year.
In addition to the test sections of concrete ties previously reported on in Bulletin
568, December 1961, pages 330 to 335, another railroad installed in 1962 one-half mile
of concrete ties spaced at 30-in centers with one-half mile of new wood ties, 7 in by
9 in by 8 ft 6 in, spaced at 22^-in centers, adjacent to and on each end of the con-
crete tie section. The wood ties and the concrete ties arc on both tangent and curved
track. The rail section is 132 RE, welded.
c. Feasibility and Economics of Reusing Recovered Ties, With or Without
Additional Treatment, Collaborating with Committee 22
Your committee submits as information the following report based on information
received from several railroads represented by Committee 3 membership.
All the railroads contacted salvage ties from abandoned lines. Very few railroads
salvage any ties from cycled timber or surfacing operations. Switch ties are also sal-
vaged from abandoned lines and are sometimes salvaged from main-track renewals.
Ties and Wood Preservation 245
Almost never arc they salvaged in connection with branch line or siding or yard track
tie renewal operations.
A few railroads salvage ties with 5 years or more expected life, hut most railroad-
do not salvage ties with less than 10 years expected life, as so judged by the inspector,
who is usually a tie inspector, roadmaster or track supervisor. Jn a few instances the
inspection is left up to the section foreman, hut this is the exception rather than tin
rule. The amount of mechanical wear and extent of decay and splits are the prime
Factors in determining whether a tie should be reused or culled.
Of the 17 railroads reporting, 2 are giving the salvaged ties additional treatment.
A few are adzing and plugging ties, and a few more are adding anti-splitting devices
where needed. However, the majority are culling ties needing anti-splitting devices. Ties
not salvaged are sold where possible, given away or burned. Means of disposal of non-
salvagable ties vary widely with the situation, as each location presents a different prob-
lem; thus no general plan can be worked out. One railroad has contracted removal of
all ties from the rismt-of-way at SO. 26 each and buys back from the contractor after
inspection salvaged ties at $0.85 to $1.00 per tie.
In salvage of ties, one reporting railroad culls only pine ties, the others salvage any
type of wood and base salvage value on the expected life of the ties.
The majority of the reporting railroads use salvaged ties for spot replacements in
any class of track where needed. Salvaged ties are usually used in the same class of
track as they were salvaged from. All railroads reported use of salvaged ties for crib-
bing. Salvaged ties in good condition are usually replaced with normal side up. However,
several roads turn salvaged ties if they are plate cut, and some railroads turn all sal-
vaged ties, thus eliminating the necessity to plug spike holes.
The cost to gather, bundle and pick up ties for salvage ranges from $0.56 to $1.12
per tie. Salvagable tics from abandoned tracks range from 10 to 75 percent of the total
lies. Most railroads report no salvage of ties from surfacing and retimbering cycles for
any class of track.
246 Ties and Wood Preservation
Report on Assignment 4
Conditioning and Preservative Treatment
of Forest Products
L. C. Collistcr (chairman, subcommittee), W. F. Arkscy, D. L. Davies, R. F. Dreitzler.
H. R. Duncan, W. E. Fuhr, M. S. Hudson, F. S. Hunter, H. E. Hurst, R. VV. Orr,
T. H. Patrick, R. R. Poux, R. B. Radkey, R. B. Smith, R. G. Zietlow.
Your committee submits as information the following monograph in which forced-
air drying and covered air seasoning of oak cross ties are evaluated.
An Evaluation of Forced-Air Drying and Covered
Air Seasoning of Oak Cross Ties
By J. B. HUFFMAN and DON M. POST
School of Forestry, University of Florida
Gainesville, Fla.
Following a preliminary study on the forced-air drying of several hundred gum and
oak cross ties in 1959, the School of Forestry, University of Florida entered into an
agreement with the Seaboard Air Line Railroad and several treating companies1 to ex-
plore and compare the seasonal drying of oak cross ties by three different methods,
namely, forced-air drying, air seasoning under covers and conventional air seasoning
without covers.
The purpose of the study was to determine what seasoning improvements would
result if cross ties were protected by covers to prevent wetting by rainwater, and also,
if large quantities of relatively dry atmospheric air were induced to move through
covered stacks of cross ties to accelerate drying. The study was designed to provide
information on numerous factors that affect seasoning times, seasoning defects, preserva-
tive treatment, service life, design of equipment, and costs. It was not expected that the
results of this first study would provide answers to all questions raised.
More complete descriptions of the procedure and results have been given in the
reference list at the end of this report. A brief summary of the work is presented below.
PROCEDURE
A total of 15,493 red and white oak cross ties from the Piedmont area of North
Carolina was shipped to Gainesville, Fla., for processing, seasoning and treating. The
ties were incised, adzed and bored prior to seasoning. Six shipments at two-month inter-
vals permitted an evaluation of seasonal effects on drying. From each shipment three
groups of approximately 500 ties each were selected for seasoning by the three methods
to be tested.
Two of the groups were piled side by side using the l-by-8 method of stacking;
one group was left uncovered, while the other was fitted with a simple, disposable cover
of black polyethylene sheeting fastened to the top layer of cross ties as illustrated in
Fig. 1. The third matching group was piled nearby in a fan-drying unit as illustrated
in Fig. 2.
1 Atlantic Creosoting Company, Eppinger and Russell Company, Koppers Company and Southern
Wood Preserving Company.
Ties and Wood Preservation
247
Fig. 1 — Covered and uncovered test groups of oak cross ties
stacked for air seasoning.
Fig. 2 — A test group of oak ties stacked for forced-air drying. Canva
baffle has not yet been placed on the side of the stacks to control air flow.
Numbers denote the positioning of sample ties.
248
Tics and Wood Preservation
Fig.
3 — A forced-air-drying unit in operation; the unit contains
480 cross ties.
Fig. 4 — Three test groups of oak cross ties being fan dried. The cost
averaged about 6 cents per tie for fan units, covers, baffles and electricity.
Ties and Wood Preservation
249
Fig. 5 — A covered "indicator package" of 64 red oak cross ities being
weighed. Indicator packages representing each of the 18 test groups were
weighed every two weeks during seasoning to determine water loss.
The forced-air drying unit consisted of two stacks of cross ties placed in line with
an 8-ft space between them. Rough-sawn 1- by 4-in stickers separated courses; spacing
between adjacent ties was approximately 3 in. An 8- by 8^-ft portable fan house con-
taining a 42-in fan (]4-hp motor) was placed over the space (plenum chamber) formed
by the ends of the two stacks. The stacks were then roofed and baffled along the sides
Fig. 3) so that the air was drawn across the ties into the plenum chamber and out
through the fan at a rate of 350 ft per min. A humidity controller was employed to
operate the fans only during periods below 80 percent relative humidity. Fan operation
averaged approximately 9 hr per day. Fig. 4 shows three groups or charges of cross ties
being dried in the forced-air-drying unit.
As indicated previously, both red and white oak ties were included in all shipments;
however, detailed data required for this study were collected on red oak species only.
The drying of each group of ties was terminated when the average calculated moisture
content of 64 red oak ties seasoned together in an "indicator package" reached 52.S per-
cent The calculated moisture contents were based on the initial moisture content of bor-
ing taken from each of the 64 tie- and the biweekly weights of each indicator package
(Fig. S).
On reaching the desired moisture content level, each group of cross ties was treated
in a full cylinder charge made up of approximately 500 ties. Insofar as possible the
treating schedule for all IS charge- followed the same pattern; that is, 40 psi initial air
and a 7J/-hr pressure period at 190 psi.
250 Ties and Wood Preservation
In each of the 18 seasonal groups, 32, 7- by 9-in, red oak sample ties were ran-
domly selected and distributed to determine treatment affects, differences in variations
within and between the various groups. A complete physical record was compiled for
each of the 576 sample ties before and after seasoning and preservative treatment. These
ties were placed in a main-line track near Hawthorne, Fla., in April 1962, to permit the
collection of service-life data in future years.
RESULTS
Based on averages, the results of this study indicate that the red oak cross ties sea-
soned by all three methods started with approximately the same moisure content, were
dried to the same final moisture content and received creosote treatments of the same
quantity and quality. Summary drying and treating data are presented in Table 1.
Primary differences between the three groups tested included the length of time
required for seasoning, the number of ties with decay and the number of ties with splits.
Seasoning Time
Seasoning the red oak ties to a common moisture level required an average of 121
days by forced-air drying, 170 days by covered seasoning and 240 days by uncovered air
seasoning. The average difference of 70 days between the covered and uncovered groups
was due to the amount of rain water that fell on the uncovered stacks. Stacked side by
side, the matched groups were exposed to the same temperatures, humidities and wind
movements, but the six uncovered groups were subjected to 20 to 50 in of rain during
their respective seasoning periods. The average difference of 49 days in the drying times
of the covered ties and the forced-air-dried ties was primarily due to greater air move-
ment across the latter, since both groups were under cover.
A wide variation in the length of seasoning periods for all three methods will be
noted in Table 1. The minimum and maximum times were 98 and 154 days for forced-
air drying, 126 and 224 for covered air seasoning and 210 and 280 for conventional air
seasoning. Generally, drying rates decreased during the cooler, wetter months of the
year. For seasoning procedures that depend on weather, and with weather conditions so
variable, it is unwise and uneconomical to select a single optimal seasoning period for
cross ties.
Moisture contents of about 59 percent may seem high for the seasoned sample ties;
however, one should recall that the percentage is not the moisture content of cross ties
but of borings taken from the "wettest" part of the ties (see footnote 1, Table 1). An
indicated moisture content of 59 percent for borings may correspond to actual moisture
contents of 42 percent2 for ties from which the borings are taken. Thus the moisture
content of a boring is only an indicator of the actual moisture content of a cross tie;
relatively speaking, an easily obtained indicator. Numerous moisture determinations of
borings taken from red oak ties seasoned 12 months or longer have shown similar mois-
ture content levels. The preservative treatment of cross ties with indicated moisture con-
tents of 59 percent resulted in retentions and penetrations well within the range of
commercial acceptability.
Decay
After seasoning, the 576 sample ties which had been distributed throughout the
different seasoning stacks were observed and rated for decay. The number of sample
ties which exhibited decay among the uncovered air-seasoned groups averaged 18.7 ties,
2 Based on the density of 1152 seasoned red oak ties and a specific gravity of 0.59.
Ties and Wood Preservation
251
Table l — Selected Drying and Treating Data Averages tor 32 Sampli
Ties In Each Group
\ I inlii r
DaU
Drying
Began
A a mlii r
of Days
l> ied
Muisttiri Content^
CreosoU
h'i h nl inn -'
(Lb/CuFl)
/'. i-ri ni
nl Rings
Treated
X ti lulu i
oj 7
with !>■ cay
Orei n
Dried
>ned :
1
July 6
Aug. 31
Oct. 26
Dec. 21
Feb. i:>
April 12
266
238
210
280
224
22 1
83 . 3
83 i
84.7
88.(1
88.3
87.3
57.9
58. 1
57 . 2
58.8
(ill. 1
61.2
6.92
6. 19
5 . 79
6.22
5 . 28
5.05
75.0
78.3
86.2
86 9
81.0
71 .7
16
26
6
4
5 . -
6
23
19
22
240
224
1S2
182
168
126
140
85 9
84.8
81 .3
85.0
88.9
86.1
83.0
58.9
59 . 1
59.5
59.6
62.3
59 . 1
59.9
5 - 9 1
6.34
6.67
5.83
5. 19
5.70
1.96
79.9
84.7
8(1.(1
81'. 7
78.6
81.5
79 . 3
18.7
( Covered Air Seasoned -
7
8
g
July 6
Aug. 31
Oct. 26
Dec. 21
Feb. 15
April 12
8
1
10..
n
12
1
3
4
170
1 12
112
154
140
112
98
84.9
85.(1
82.4
82.5
87.2
86.9
84.0
59.9
59.3
60.0
56.5
61.4
58.2
(10.0
5.61
6.15
6.22
(1.15
5.61
4 . 85
5.(18
82.2
77. 1
86.9
82.5
84 . 2
85.9
70.(1
4.2
Forced Air Dried :
13 __
1 1
LS -
L6
17
18
Julv 6
Auk. 31
Oc1 26
Dec. 21
Feb. 15
April 12
0
0
0
0
0
0
121
84 . 8
59 . 2
5.78
81.2
0
1 Based on percentage of oven-dry weight of a 3}£-in boring removed from midpoint, broad face of
each tie; oven set at 212 I ■'.
-Based on individual weights and dimensions of each tie before and after treatment.
or 58.3 percent, showed light to heavy decay. The comparable figure for the covered ties
was 4.2, or 13.0 percent. The forced-air-dried ties exhibited no decay. A further analysis
nl" the occurrence of decay reveals the following percentages of ties in each decay-rating
group:
Air Covered
Decay Rating Seasoned Mr Seasoned
1. None (no evidence of fungus decay) 41.7% 87.0%
2. Light (slight but less than 65 sq in) 36.5 11.5 i
3. Medium (between 65 and 130 sq in) 14.5 58.3% 1.5 13.0r;
4. Heavy (over 130 sq in of decay) 7.3 ' 0 J
100.0% 100.0%
An average decay rating of 1.85 for the air-seasoned ties and 1.13 for the covered
ties indicate that for both methods the occurrence of decay was not an extremely serious
problem considering the rating system employed.
End Splitting
The number of sample ties with splits was limited; therefore, the evaluation of split-
tin? was based on all of the red and white oak ties in the different seasoning groups.
Of the 3120 air-seasoned ties without covers, 11.3 percent had splits over J^-in wide and
On -me or both ends; of the 3120 covered tics, 7.1 percent had splits; and of the 2880
252 Ties and Wood Preservation
forced-air-dried tics, 5.3 percent were splitters. These data indicate that less splitting
will occur when the seasoning of oak cross ties is accelerated by employing fans and
covers.
Results still to be gleaned from this study involve an analysis of the variation of
moisture content among the cross ties seasoned by various methods and in different loca-
tions within stacks, an analysis of information on the optimum moisture content for
well seasoned cross ties, recommendations for the length of seasoning periods for oak at
different times of the year, and the possible development of a method to determine when
ties are ready for preservative treatment.
CONCLUSIONS
Information gained during this study shows that the use of covers and fans to
protect and accelerate the seasoning of oak cross ties results in a reduction of seasoning
time and seasoning defects. The study also indicated that during different times of the
year, the seasoning periods required to reach specific moisture content levels will vary
with climatic conditions. More study and information is needed to improve, compare
and fully evaluate these methods of handling cross ties.
REFERENCES
Huffman, J. B. and D. M. Post. 1962. Practical Covers for Protecting Cross Ties Dur-
ing Air Seasoning. University of Florida, School of Forestry, Research Report No. 8.
8 pp.
Huffman. J. B. and D. M. Post. 1962. The Use of Covers and Fans To Improve the
Seasoning of Oak Cross Ties. (Presented RTA Meeting, October 25, 1962, Minne-
apolis, Minn., and to be published in Cross Tie Bulletin).
Huffman, J. B. and Don M. Post. I960. Forced-Air Drying of Gum and Oak Cross Ties.
Southern Lumberman 200 (2500) :33-37.
Report on Assignment 5
Service Records
W. L. Kahler (chairman, subcommittee), A. B. Baker, W. Buehler, C. M. Burpee, C. E.
De Geer, W. E. Fuhr, F. J. Fudge, H. M. Harlow, R. P. Hughes, R. B. Radkey,
A. P. Richards, J. T. Slocomb.
Your committee submits as information the following service records of certain
test ties installed on the Missouri Pacific and Baltimore & Ohio Railroads.
Missouri Pacific Railroad
A service test including 200 7-in by 9-in by 8-ft cross ties was inserted in August
1940 by the Missouri Pacific in the east main track starting at mile post 282-20 in the
vicinity of Leeds, between Kansas City, Mo., and Dodson, Mo. This test included 100
each oak and pine cross ties treated as follows:
Oak
Rueping process. Initial air pressure, 30 lb
Preservative: 50/50 creosote-coal tar solution
Net retention: 0.785 gal per cu ft
Ties and Wood Preservation 253
Pine
Rueping process. Initial air pressure, 100 M>
Preservative: SO 50 creosote coal tar solution
Net retention: 0.746 gal per cu ft
In 1947 four of the red oak and six of the pine ties were removed because of a
derailment.
Three inspections have been made, the most recent on December 8, 1961. This inspec-
tion developed that two of the pine ties were pretty badfj plate cut and probably would
be removed in a short time. The balance o! the pine ties were in good condition, indi-
cating possibly 10 to 12 years or more additional service life. The oak ties were in good
condition, showing only a normal amount of checking, indicating an additional 12 to
15 years or more service life.
Baltimore & Ohio Railroad
In the years 1927 and 1928, a series of 49 test panels of treated wood ties were
inserted under double trackage between Germantown and Barnesville, Md. Some 23,394
ties were involved. All of the better known preservatives of that time (in several mix-
tures and proportions) were used in treating three species groups (in various retentions)
to determine relative longevity. The test was made possible because all ties were to be
renewed in a track-straightening project between Germantown and Barnesville involving
Mime six miles of double track.
Air-dried main-line ties, separated into the three species groups, were treated at the
Green Spring Plant with five different preservatives in the various mixtures, proportions
and retentions. Charge sheets and preservative analyses, describing the treatment in
detail, were carefully prepared and made a part of the test permanent records. In gen-
eral, ties were seasoned ten months to a year and then treated by the Lowry process
to desired retentions. Treating pressure was 175 psi and temperature did not exceed
200 F. Tics were neither bored nor incised. All ties were S-ironed upon arrival at
the plant.
The treated ties, properly identified, were then moved to Germantown for insertion
The physical and environmental conditions at the test site which would influence average
useful tie life were as follows:
1. Grade — 1 percent ascending to 1 percent descending.
2. Kail— 131 lb.
3. Curvature— Not over 1 deg 19 min,
4. Tie plates — 8 by 12 in, three- and lour holed
5. Traffic— 12,500,000 tons per year westbound.
12,800,000 tons pel' year eastbound
6. Precipitation- 33 in annually.
7. Temperature — Minimum, winter, 0 deg F., maximum, summer. OS deg F
8. Ballast — Fairly clean stone, evenly tamped and well drained except in areas
of 50/50 and 70/30 creosote coal tar panels.
9 Soil Red clay and shale.
10. Latitude — 39 deg 12 min. longitude 77 deg 20 min.
11. Elevation- -580 it above sea level.
Tables 1. 2. and 3 presented herewith evaluate each species as of the sear 10(,1.
33 years after insertion.
J 54
Ties and Wood Preservation
QEffi!.AKTCW?3 TC BAKIESVI1.LE, i-'ARYLAND
LEi.'GTH OF Tli T - J3 Yeara
IUjORT FOR 1961 - KiSi.iALS
ITlSTrtl.LED SUW&l 1923
T\T3ITS /■!
nil
Code
S CAK
Treatment
Tio3
Placed
In
Test
Removed
to Date
Mo. %
Average
Life
To Date
Condition
Indicator
Aver .~o
Life
4
5* Creo-Tar 50/50
300
68
232 77
23.8 jrrs
Surfaco Crumble
Split, Chock,
Plate Crush
27 yra
7
7./ Crco-Tar 60/40
300
62
238 79
22.3
Same
27
10
7;/ iVatop-Gaa Tar 1002
300
0
3 CO 100
20.0
-
-
13
7; Crco-?et-7.'G Tar
30/^0/40
300
23
272 91
21.5
Checks, Split
Rett ins "•','ithir.
24
16
13
6// Creosote 1C02
£,!■' Creosote 1002
3 CO
300
9
0
291 96
300 100
19.8
21.2
Crur.ble-Leached 22
Sp.,Ck.,P.ot V/ithin
21
£,; Crco-Y.'.G.Tar 50/50
300
0
3^0 ICO
21.0
-
-
24
27
7ff Greo-VT.G.Tar 40/60
8// Creo-".V.G.?ar 30/70
300
300
29
49
271 91
251 83
21.3
22.7
Cks.,Sp. Hearts 24
Rotting Out
Cks.,Sp., Plate 25
Crush, Sur . Crumble
Rotting '.Vithin
50
5# Creo-Pct .".'.G.
30/50/20
300
0
300 i:o
20.5
-
-
33
33
7,; Crco-Pet.-V,'.G.Tar
40/30/30
41:/ Zinc Chlorido-
2.32J Pet.
300
300
52
0
243 32
300 i;o
22.9
19.0
Plate Crash
Rot Within
Cks.,Sp.
25
40
7# Croo-Tar 30/20
3CO
51
249 33
23.0
Sp.,Cks.,V-Coring 25
Dotor. at Rail
Scat
43
7.5,? Creo-Tar 70/30
300
127
173 53
25.9
Sams
30
45
7.v; Creo-Pct. 50/50
300
39
261 .58
22.3
Saco
23
43
13 Creo-Pct. 40/60
3C0
39
261 38
22.3
Sarao
23
;c o"': - General Charaet
'.rir.tics:
Deep chocking and splitting.
Crashed roil sc :J s
Rotten interior
V— Coring
Surface crunble ;'ron pro: crv.tivc leaching
Decay working back '.vithin center of ties fran spiko
holes and coco checks.
Ties and Wood Preservation
255
..". :1T0 :; TO BV.V. KVILLf, JI.VRYLAND
LEKOTll of r..,T ~ 33 l--ar»
REPORT ?0R 1901 » REM .'ALS
it: tmi,'.:;~- rir?.- a r#3
TASK 2
) OMC
Code Treit-.ent
Ties
Placed
In
Tost
Rc.-aovecl
To D&to
• r.o. 5;
Ave rage
Ufa
Condition,
Indie ::tod
Avora,;e
Iifo
1
S^ Croo-Pot. 50/50
300
23
277 %■
2C.3 yre
Doop Chocks, Plate Crush
25 JT3
2
5
e
9/7 Croo-Pot. 50/50
9/7 Creo-Tar 50/50
10// Crco-Tar 60/40
900
900
900
226
277
116
674 75
623 69
704 87
24.9
24.1
21.3
Splits, Checks, Plate
Crush
Surface Cnrable
Splits & Cliecka
Plate Crush
Sane - Also Knots
Rotting Cut
27
29
25
r.
E; Hater Gas Tor 100?
9C0
0
900 100
17.3
All Gone
-
14
91 Creo-Pot-V.'.G.Tar
3C/3C/40
900
0
900 100
18.9
All Gone
-
19
8^ Creosote 100?
9CO
0
900 100
20 3
All Gone
-
20
ft? Crco-7/.G.Tar 50/50
900
0
900 100
20.8
All Gone
-
23
9,? Crco-VJ.G.Tar 40/60
900
0
900 100
20.0
All Gone
-
26
10J C.5O-::.C.Tar30/70
900
0
900 100
20.9
All Gone
-
29
8# Creo-Pot...'.G.Tar
30/50/20
900
0
900 100
21.6
AH Gone
-
32
100 Creo-Pet.v;.G.Tar
900
0
900 100
21.2
All Gone
-
35
6.!' Crcor.ote ICO?
900
53
847 94
20.9
Crumble, L.ached, Split,
Chocked, Plate Crush
23
36
.47;? Zir.c Chloride -
3.75/ Pot.
600
0
600 100
15.6
All Gone
-
37
.313.,' Zinc C l^rido
4.70/,' Pet.
600
0
600 100
16.1
All Gone
-
39
10,? Crco-Tar CO/20
900
322
573 64.2
25.1
Crunblo, Rotting Knots
Splits ,Chkg., Plate Cut
30
42
9/ Creo-Tar 70/30
9CO
241
659 73.2
23.5
Dad Splits, V-Coring,
Split, Checked, Plate Cut
23
47
9.7 Cr=c-?ct. 43/60
900
40
860 95.5
2>.l
Sana
23
' - . -
■y. - General Character!
.tics:
Docp chec!:in£ al n ; wood rays
Splitting, surface c:.-unble, plato cutting, crushing
Knots rotting
Decay .-orldjig back rr.thin ties doop within from chocks and
especially froa spik.t holes.
Hull. B7B
256
Ties and Wood Preservation
CSRMAMTO i! TO B E Z W1U& , "UiYLAilD
LM.'CTH-OF T.KT - 33 years
RErORT FOR "1961 - ?.:::je.;als
I?.'ST'.U.1S .'i.,;r- :r 1?28
TARI
E |f?
H.i".D
;-;rr-S
Ties
fl.-iced
In
Tnrti
Reaovsd
To D .to
Average
LiTe
Tn n-ta
(VmrilMnn
Indie ;.tcd
CVde
Tre-lfriysft
.".vcrrfea
Ufa
3
S0 Croc-Tar 50/50
300
227
73
2'+
29.7 yrs
Sp.,Ck.,-Good ror Age
30 ;ts
6
BS Crec-Tar 60/40
300
223
77
25
29.6
Hick., Ash, Chorry,
liiplo,-Look Good, Some
35
i
9
93 Water Gas Tar 100*
300
0
300 103
20.4
Chock and Split
-
12
10^ Crco-Pot. W.G.
30/30/40
300
126
174
53
25.4
Som Sorfaco Crunble
Cka. and Splits
31
15
7.6# Creosoto 1C02
300
67
233
11
22.1
Good for Ago
Splits and Chcclis
27
17
8,i? Creosote 100£
300
77
223
74
25.0
Saao
20
22
8fl Croo.W.G.Tar 50/50
294
60
234
7?
22.9
Zz=a - liapla and
Hickory Outstanding
26.5
25
9.5i? Croo-W.G.Tar 40/60 300
74
226
75
23.9
Per: Bocch Decay Within 27
23
10// Crco-W.G.Tar 30/70
300
a
259
86
22.6
Sp.,C!:s., Good Hickory 25
Locust is Excellent
Scao Surface Crucblo
31
9,7 Croc-Pet .W.G. Tar
30/50/20
300
HI
169
63
26.5
Good for ago in this
orders Ash, Hickory,
H. Uapla, Gua, Beech
29
34
9.5// Crco-Pot. Y.'.G.Tar
40/30/30
300
59
241
SO
23.3
S£E3
26.5
41
9;/ Creo-Tar 60/20
300
153
142
47
27.1
Good - $p.t Cks.
32
44
7.5# Crco-Tar 70/30
300
143
152
51
26.6
Scrio. Ferr should be
out
31
46
8j? Creo-Pet. 50/50
300
137
163
54
26.5
Sar.a - Eccch Sobs plato31
cut, Hickory split, under
bridge 10Ctf inl
49
Mij:a<
9-7 Croo-Pct. 40/60
i Hardv.-oods - Gcncr.il Chi
300
-.r-.ctcri
10?
sties
191
64
25.3
Sana - H. l!aplo and
Hickory Outstanding
29
Sor.o Chocking and splitting. Hard'.;ood3 aro not ao much plate cut as oaks. Splitting
and checiting is not as aovcre ao in oak.;. Rot has not set in beneath pi -.to from spiko
holes as much as in tho oak3. .•"pocics lifted in ordor of condition at 33 years
(Best) Hard Maple, ash, hickory, cherry, gum, birch, (Poorest) Beech.
Ties and Wood Preservation 257
Report on Assignment 6
Methods of Prolonging Service Life of Ties
P. D. Brentlinger (chairman, subcommittee), R. S. Belcher, R. G. Brohaugh, C. S. Burt,
L. C. Collister, E. M. Cummings, T. H. Friedlin, A. K. Frost, W. E. Fuhr, F. F.
Hornig, H. E. Hurst, H. W. Jensen, H. F. Kanute, C. A. Peebles, R. B. Radkey,
H. S. Ross, O. W. Smith, E. F. Snyder, G. A. Williams, H. K. Wyant, R. G. Zeitlow.
The following is a progress report, submitted as information:
Splitting of Cross and Switch Ties
The studies on splitting of cross and switch ties are being conducted in collaboration
with the A\R Research Department. In addition to test sections installed by various
railroads, on which reports on splitting have been previously submitted, field tests under
the supervision of the AAR research staff have been installed to measure the effect of
various anti-splitting devices. These tests are too recent to develop factual data, and
will be reported on in the future. The test as a whole comprises 500 ties in the following
categories: (1) control ties, (2) ties with saw kerf, (3) doweled seasoned ties, (4)
doweled green ties, (5) selectively doweled seasoned ties.
The AAR research staff recently tested the holding power of two types of nails in
green oak ties:
1. Heat-Treated Twisted Nails Made from a %-In-Square Rod — -The method of
testing was the same as described in AREA Proceedings, Vol. 61, 1960, pages 1 to 12,
incl. Two nails were driven in each end of a divided tie, 22 in long, that had been sawn
at midwidth and provided with special bolts so the two parts could be pulled apart in
the testing machine, as was done in the earlier tests previously reported. The holding
power of one twisted nail was found to be 2000 lb.
2. Gang Nails, 1962 Design — One gang nail was placed in each end of a divided tie
22 in. in length. The holding power of one gang nail was found to be 9850 lb. We have
two additional specimens prepared with the gang nails which will be tested after the
wood is seasoned to determine what change if any the seasoning has on holding strength.
Failure occurred by the gang nail breaking along the division line in the wood tie rather
than by the individual "nails'' breaking or pulling out of the wood.
Evaluate and Report Data on Tie Coatings
Xo new treatment of ties in track with bituminous coatings was reported to the
committee this year. The AAR-L&X test installed in 1950 near London, Ky., is reported
on periodically. The ties were recoated on August 7, 1958. During 1962 seven of the
coated and two of the uncoated ties in the test were removed because of splitting.
Extent of Use of Incising
A recent poll of railroads to determine the extent, and purpose, ol incising gave
data for the following report:
Of the 17 roads reporting, 8 railroads follow the practice of basing their ties, the
main purpose of the incising being to obtain a more uniform distribution of the preser-
vatve in the tic. Three of these roads reported that they incise their ties before sea-
soning to take- advantage of the reduction of the large checks in the ties during the
oning period, especiall) in the mixed hardwoods.
258 Ties and Wood Preservation
Three of the railroads which reported that they did not incise their ties stated that
in the past they have run incising tests which showed results favorable to incising. One
of these roads stated that their incising test before seasoning showed 20 percent of sea-
soning splits in the non-incised ties against 12 percent seasoning splits in the incised
material. The cost of the incising at the time of the test was 6 cents per tie, and this road
felt that this cost could not be justified by the results obtained.
The second road reported that a test installation of incised ties was made in 1944.
These ties are at the present in track and appear to be in excellent condition.
The third road reported a test on incising of mixed hardwoods, namely, maple,
beech and birch, and concluded that the incising did not materially reduce the checking
of the ties other than distributing the checking more evenly over the surface. Apparently
the incising has increased the life of these ties by deeper and better distribution of the
preservative.
Of the eight roads reporting use of the practice of tie incising, the general conclusion
on incising is that it is definitely beneficial in obtaining a more uniform distribution of
preservative in the tie.
Laminated Ties
This is a progress report submitted as information covering the service test of
laminated wood ties in main track in the Altoona district of the Pennsylvania Railroad.
Introduction
Under the joint sponsorship of the National Lumber Manufacturers Association and
the Association of American Railroads, 120 laminated cross ties 7 in deep, 9 in wide
and 8% ft long were fabricated in the Timber Engineering Company research laboratory.
Fifty of the laminated ties had tupelo gum faces with Douglas fir inner laminations,
and 50 had tupelo gum faces with southern yellow pine inner laminations. For these
ties the gum faces were 1 in thick and the three inner laminations were 1§4 in thick.
The 20 ties made entirely of red oak had seven laminations of 1 in thicknesses. The
laminations were glued with a two-component, rescorcinol-phenol formaldehyde water-
proof resin cured at 150 F for from 6 to 10 hr.
After fabrication the ties were creosote treated and placed in service on the Penn-
sylvania Railroad east of Altoona, Pa. The 20 all-red-oak ties were installed in 1953 in
track No. 1, Middle Division, No. 3 curve at Mile Post 215.6, and the remaining 100
ties were placed in tangent, track No. 2, at Baree, Pa., in July 1954.
Inspection Report
Results of an inspection of the ties by L. W. Neville, assistant engineer of the
Pennsylvania, in May 1962, are given below.
Conditions observed on curve No. 3:
Tie No. Condition
1 Split from end to end
2 Good condition
3 Split from end to end
4 Split from end to center of tie
5 Checked from one end to center of tie
6 Good condition
7 Good condition
Ties and Wood Preservation 259
8 Checked from one end to center of tie
9 Checked from one end to center of tie
10 Checked from one end to center of tie
1 1 Good Condition
12 Checked from one end to center of tie
13 Good condition
14 Good condition
15 Good condition
16 Good condition
1 7 Good condition
18 South end splitting upper west corner from some sort of blow
19 Split from end to end
20 Split one end only
Derailment damage in the center of these ties may have caused some of the condi-
tions listed above to develop prematurely.
At Baree the laminated ties are in much better condition than the comparative ties.
The only exception to the excellent condition of the laminated ties was in tie No. 36
which has a split in the north end which appeared to be caused by some type of heavy
blow, and tie No. 72, which has a split in the north end located under a joint.
Acknowledgment
The Association is indebted to the Pennsylvania for its continued interest in this
investigation and for furnishing the report covering the inspection of the ties.
Report on Assignment 7
Substitutes for Wood Ties
M. J. Hubbard (chairman, subcommittee), W. J. Burton, K. C. Edscorn, W. E. Fuhr.
F. S. Hunter, W. E. Laird, R. W. Orr, C. A. Peebles, R. B. Radkev, O. W. Smith.
L. S. Strohl.
Your committee submitted, as information, in December 1961, Vol. 63, AREA Bul-
letin 568, summary of a report prepared by the Research Department, Association of
American Railroads, covering investigation of prestressed concrete ties. At this time, the
committee has no additional information to report on test installations of prestressed
concrete ties.
A tentative study has been made at the AAR Research Center on the possibility of
using Fiberglas for making ties as a wood substitute. The Fiberglas material itself costs
approximately $70 per cu ft. Since this material would have a strength approximating
that of structural grade of steel, the German steel-trough-type tie design was used as
probably being the most efficient from the standpoint of providing requisite flexure!
strength with the minimum amount of metal. On this basis, the estimated cost of a
Fiberglas tie would be approximately $45 for material alone, exclusive of labor charge foi
fabrication, which eliminates its use from an economical standpoint.
In August 1961, the Illinois Central Railroad installed 24 special experimental 7-in
bj 12-in by 8 ft 6-in ties on a heavy-tonnage freight main. Each tic consisted of two
6- by 7-in timber-- doweled together, using three schemes of 4, 5, and 7 dowels per tie.
260 Ties and Wood Preservation
and then treated. These ties were installed on 30-in centers without any difficulty, using
conventional tie installation equipment. The track was then surfaced using an on-track
production tamping machine with no difficulty due to size of tie. After one year of
service, the ties are in excellent condition, showing no tie plate cutting. There has been
a small amount of tamping required, attributed to rail condition rather than the special
ties, as similar tamping was required on adjoining sections of standard ties.
Report on Assignment 8
Making Charcoal From Used Ties
G. A. Williams (chairman, subcommittee), A. B. Baker, R. G. Brohaugh, L. P. Drew,
W. E. Fuhr, H. M. Harlow, M. J. Hubbard, W. R. Jacobson, W. L. Kahler, R. B.
Radkey, L. S. Strohl
Last year your committee presented as information a progress report on our studies
to determine the feasibility of making charcoal from used ties. Further studies indicate
such a lack of interest on the part of the producers to enter this field, as well as com-
plications which they can visualize if they would enter it, that your committee now
submits this as a final report and recommends that the subject be closed.
There are 253 plants making charcoal in the United States. Considerably more than
half of the producers are farmers or small concerns, each of which manufactures less
than 100 tons a year. Six producers account for more than 60 percent of the entire
production of charcoal, which is produced as a by-product of wood distillation for the
recovery of chemicals.
While it was impossible for your committee to contact all producers, an adequate
sampling was taken of producers in seven states. None of these gave us any
encouragement
Most of the small producers are located in isolated areas primarily in the East,
Southeast, and Midwest, where abundant supplies of good timber are available at low
cost, approximately $2 to $4 per ton.
Most of the kilns of these producers, as well as the larger ones, are constructed to
handle wood of cord-wood size, and cutting and handling of ties would be far too costly.
Of the larger producers whose primary object is wood distillation for the recovery
of chemicals, typical reasons for their lack of interest are indicated in the following
quotes from their replies:
"Creosote is objectionable, but even more so would be the chunks of iron which
inevitably find their way into the process. In our opinion the cost of handling and
cutting to size and eliminating foreign materials would make the use of old ties
uneconomical."
"As far as wood distillation plants such as ours are concerned, use of such ties is
not feasible because the coal tar creosote would contaminate the regular chemical
production.
"A large number of kiln charcoal plants do not attempt chemical recovery, so their
main problems would be residual coal tar odor of the charcoal and the possibility of a
health hazard from the smoke coming off the kiln. The latter factor should not be taken
lightly."
Ties and Wood Preservation 261
Robert Woesner who conducted the experiments on the Pennsylvania Railroad in
1959, when questioned as to his reasons for giving up his experiments for used ties in
large-size, specially prepared kilns, replied:
"Charcoal that I produced was produced at a loss."
For all of these reasons it is evident the production of charcoal from used ties is
impracticable. The negative attitude of producers is so near unanimous that no interest
in the subject can be generated.
Under the circumstances, there appears to be no further point in progressing the
study. Your committee, therefore, recommends the subject be dropped.
Report of Committee 22 — Economics of Railway Labor
Lem Adams (E)
A. D. Alderson
M. B. Allen
J. A. Barnes
J. F. Beaver
O. C. Benson
E. J. Brown
R. F. Bush
J. L. Cann
R. H. Carpenter
J. A. Cay wood
J. L. Chafin
W. E. Chapmw
R. E. Clancy
S. A. Cooper
P. A. Cosgrove
C. G. Crawford
C. G. Davis
M. H. Dick
J. E. Eisemann, Chairman L- E- Donovan
W. M. S. Dunn
J. S. Snyder,
Vice Chairman,
L. C. Gilbert, Secretary
E. J. Sierleja
H. J. Fast
H. W. Seeley
John Stang
T. L. Kanan
W. J. Jones
J. L. Fergus
R. L. Fox
R. R. GUNDERSON
K. A. Hanger (E)
V. C. Hanna
Gene L. Harris
W. W. Hay
K. E. Henderson
Claude Johnston
R. H. Jordan
H. w. Kellogg
H. E. Kirby
L. A. Loggins
J. M. Lowry
V. L. LjUNGRKN
T. D. Mason
R. L. Mays
F. H. McGuigan <KD
J. R. Miller
H. C. Minteer
G. M. O'Rourke (E)
Hal B. Orr*
C. W. Owens
R. W. Pember
C. T. Popma
R. W. Priesendefer
Griffith Ray
M. S. Reid
D. E. Rudisill
R. G. Simmons
N. E. Smith
J. T. SULLrVAN
W. B. Throckmorton-
John T. Ward
G. E. Warfel
H. J. Weccheider
N. H. Williams
H. E. Wilson
F. R. Woolford
C. R. Wright (E)
D. H. Yazell
Committee
• 1 Member Emeritus.
' Died May 9, 1962.
Those whtee names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 22
To the American Railway Engineering Association :
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
In view of the complete overhaul of Chapter 22 last year, there is no report
this year.
2. Analysis of operations of railways that have substantially reduced the cost
of labor required in maintenance of way work.
Progress report, submitted as information page 265
I Labor economies to be derived from work measurement standards for com-
parison of work performance among various gangs or divisions.
Final report, submitted as information page 271
4. bailor economies to be derived from cropping rail in track versus building
up rail ends by welding.
Final report, submitted as information page 274
ibor economics inherent to various methods of taking up track.
Final report, submitted as information page 278
263
264 Economics of Railway Labor
7. Labor economies in track maintenance to be derived through the use of
combination on-off-track equipment vs. on-track equipment only.
Final report, submitted as information page 300
8. Labor economies to be derived from the welding, distributing, laying, and
maintenance of continuous welded rail, collaborating with the Special Com-
mittee on Continuous Welded Rail. Final report, submitted as information page 302
The Committee on Economics of Railway Labor,
J. E. Eisemann, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 575, December 1962.
MEMOIR
J^al IBrarcljam <^rr
Hal Branham Orr, assistant chief engineer, Northern Region, Chesapeake & Ohio
Railway, Detroit, Mich., died suddenly following a heart attack at his home, May 9,
1962. He is survived by his wife, Jessie Taylor Orr; his son, Harry; his daughter,
Margaret; twins, George and Catherine; his mother, Mrs. Harrye Branham Orr, and
his sister, Mrs. R. C. Curtis, both of Muncie, Ind.; and one brother, R. VV. Orr, of
Cleveland, Ohio.
Mr. Orr was born June 10, 1914, in Muncie, Ind., the son of Harry Helm and
Harrye Branham Orr. He received his education in the Muncie public schools, Penning-
ton College Preparatory School at Pennington, N. J., and Purdue University, graduating
in 1936 with a B.S. degree in Civil Engineering.
Mr. Orr entered railroad service in 1936 with the engineering corps, Wabash Rail-
road and in the same year resigned to accept a position as chainman with the Chesa-
peake & Ohio. He was promoted successively to rodman, draftsman, assistant cost engi-
neer, assistant supervisor of track, supervisor of track, assistant division engineer, divi-
sion engineer and assistant chief engineer, which position he held at the time of his death.
He was a member of Saint James Episcopal Church of Birmingham, Mich, and
Masonic Lodge No. 166 of Clifton Forge, Va. He also held membership in the American
Association of Railroad Superintendents, Roadmasters and Maintenance of Way Asso-
ciation, Kentucky Board of Professional Engineers, Economic Club of Detroit and the
Maintenance of Way Club of Detroit.
Mr. Orr became a member of the American Railway Engineering Association in
1939. He was appointed to Committee 16 — Economics of Railway Location and Opera-
tion, in 1941 and was a member of Committee 3 — Ties, from 1957 through 1960. In
March 1962 he became a member of Committee 22. His interest in the work of the
Association as well as his humor and friendliness among its members will long be re-
membered, and it is with a deep sense of appreciation by those who knew and worked
with Mr. Orr that this tribute to his memory is recorded with the American Railway
Engineering Association.
H. W. Kellogg, Chairman,
W. M. S. Dunn,
J. E. Eisemann,
Committee on Memoir,
Economics of Railway Labor 265
Report on Assignment 2
Analysis of Operations of Railways That Have
Substantially Reduced the Cost of Labor
Required in Maintenance of Way Work
E. J. Sierleja (chairman, subcommittee), M. B. Allen, O. C. Benson, E. J. Brown,
J. L. Cann, J. L. Chafin, R. E. Clancy, S. A. Cooper, C. G. Crawford, S. B. Culli-
ford, L. E. Donovan, J. L. Fergus, R. R. Gunderson, Gene L. Harris, K. E. Hen-
derson, Claude Johnston, R. H. Jordan, H. W. Kellog, H. E. Kirby, J. M. Lowry,
F. H. McGuigan, J. R. Miller, H. C. Minteer, H. B. Orr, C. W. Owens, C. f.
Popma, R. W. Preisendefer, Griffith Ray, J. T. Sullivan, H. J. Weccheider, N. H.
Williams, H. E. Wilson, D. H. Yazell.
This report, submitted as information, is the 21st report of a series on this subject,
which has been reassigned annually since 1935.
This analysis is of the rail renewal process currently being used by the Chesapeake
& Ohio Railway. On July 24 the committee inspected the organization renewing rail on
the main line of the Northern District of the Russell Division at a point approximately
15 miles north of the Ohio River. Later, on the same date, the committee rode the track
inspection car, RI-2, on the rear of train No. 6 from Huntington, W. Va., to Clifton
Forge, Va. A description of the track inspection car is not included in this report because
such a description was presented by T. Fred Burris, chief engineer, Chesapeake & Ohio
Railway, at the 1962 AREA Annual Meeting and is printed on pages 758 to 767 in
Bulletin 572, June-July 1962.
Track Specifications
The track before rail renewal had 132-lb RE rail with conventional six-hole joints,
two rail-holding spikes per tie plate, web bonds, hardwood treated ties, 22 per 39-ft
rail, stone ballast section generally at or slightly below top of tie, and rail anchors boxed
on every third tie. The tie plates, 14^4-in double-shoulder, were removed but reused
under the new rail.
The new rail was 1320-ft welded 132-lb RE strings placed with two rail-holding
spikes per tie plate. Insulated joints were installed by cutting rail, and all closure joints
between strings were welded by an aluminum iron-oxide process. Rail anchors were
boxed on each tie for a distance of 200 ties on each side of all insulated joints, and
boxed on alternate ties at all other locations.
Material Distribution and Recovery
The rail strings were pre-distributed in the center ditch and shoulder. Other track
materials were pre-distributed in conventional cans and bags at appropriate intervals.
The rail being removed was placed outside of the distributed new rail. Tie plates
removed were placed in center of track for reuse after adzing. The labor source for
material distribution and recovery after renewal was the division organization.
Labor and Equipment Organization
The rail renewal was conducted by a system organization with minor support from
the division organization. The details of operation descriptions, equipment, and labor are
shown in Table 1. The procedure observed was the renewal of the north rail in the
Westward main track with the renewal of the south rail at a later date.
266
Economics of Railway Labor
M
a>
*
h&
c\t
^*
CM
-*
CN
CN
lu
*
1
3
1$
O a)
1
«
l. ^
o B
fc. 1
s
rH
t>»
H
p
1
© •
1
B
O H
,M
« o
o
s
c5
g
i-i
8.
p
■p
c
C
o
■rt
•
3
D
8
fi
B
o
fi
P
Tj
T3
9
-r-
L
+5 C
■si
a
0 tD
5*8
3
I
■
43
i-.no
E
0
si
i-t
8.
a
rH
n
H
0
a
4 L, aj
o a) B
fe
§>
a
-i
Q
s
8
O
Q
8
o
a
o
a
P
p
Motor
Push
spare
h
c
«
$
o
Ou
43
a
£
■E
0 Li
CO O
1
i
§
3 V
M
33
•- (V
c\t
CM
"
"
3
S
~3
a8
S3
H g
0 T3
■a «
o
1
.
■til
g
M
a
o
^9
p
o
a)
►J
M
O g
Vn
Li
l-t
■l-i
o
p
2S
8 CM
1 —
— 1
s •
Li
«
O
Li
O.
«
■a
S
n
n
o
o
rH
P
Li
0 03
T3 a)
H
3 rH
O -H
u
0
p
B
0
o
P
n
0
O
CO
-C cS
o
JS
c
o c
-P
•g
n L,
•H
C
o
•H O
0
o
o.
o
•rt
P -rH
B
©
Li
5?
*>
00
•H
•P
« P
rH
60
©
+J
a
L, 01
V
r-\
4
p
•H
p
g
t
0 Li
H
>
g
n
s.
5
4
*
O Q.
0 a
0
n
05
L.
1
n
E
•P
C
•H
n
CO
4
n
b3
p 3
1
O
o
2
3
a
c* «
n
O
to
p
•H
a. 0
cd
B
o c
Li
T"3
3
3
n
1
r-t
a)
■
■H O
O
rH
C
P
S -a
n
n -h
X
g
a
B
■H
L, a)
0
0
1"
O
o
B
•H
Li
p
0)
^
a
Li
0
© a
O
T3
<m J3
rH
P
•H
«
<M
«
■H
N 0)
T3
rH
a
n
©
P
O L,
00
l-l »
a
O
a
M
•-<
CO
3t
C?
iH
B
•H rH
J3
3
•5)
p
•H
o
■H
•H
a] -H
0
B
rH
O.
p
at
P
Li q)
•r(
8
a
u
a
3
»H e
L.
5
L,
P
a Lt
3-
*
■° w
Li 0
■a
0
■
«>
o
•H
o o
©
•H
H *
0
53
•r)
Ll o
>
>
Li
43
>
Li
O 0
>
0
P
0 e
o
0
P
c
o
P
B
O
3
>
c l,
a
a
a
11
a
CO
P
a
■o o
•H
P
5 Q
»
c
c
•H
<D
•H
0 <H
0
H J=
Li
0
K
£E
pS
o
03
Q
CO O
a
O 0
a
CO
c
CV
en
-*
UN
>o
O
c-
00
o~-
o
_
2
*~
"~
Economics of Railway Labor
267
i •»
4
-
c\
CM
cm
cm
CM
CM
i^
»j
—
*
-
•
-
-
s
. 1
0
3 £
o
x:
m 0
TJ
S
C
0 -H
C
is
o c
B33|
S
Ih
d*
0 CfJ*
rH P
SI
5
4
r-t
oChc
.*
*>
c
c
1]
9
■P tH O
O TJ 0
§5^
•I
0 X? o
Ih -P
O
4
Ih
c
It*
■H
0 P
O.
3d
3 8.
ij TJ
•P
1
H-
i
M
■a
Id c
Ih no
TJ *H
g
P fi X! 0
4 0 0
c
i
a)
o
XX TJ
is
■P
O 0 Ih XI
o
1
c
0 -H
TJ
•OP©
TJ
XI TJ XI
TJ
I
c
n x!
a
0
i
pr ope lie
cator wi
ne mount
St
0
Ih O
TJ Ih C-
rack rub
rail gui
n power
webs and
0
•A
!
p
1
&
O -J
8.H
28
0.-P
ng and
•d by
ation
0)
rH
0
0
P
8.
1
x>
■H -H
■H
p 0
TJ
C
4
X
■3 5
«3S
<M
l-t
9
CO
Self
appl
mach
O JZ
8.5
<M TJ
0 3
CO -C
Gagi
pull
oper
■s
4
X
Off
with
driv
rail
H
0
CO
1
i
II
-1
B
3 J
*■
en
8
c
a
4)
■g
•rl
o
Ih hH
0 -p
•32
0
•rl
Ih
0
—
9)
* a
P
0
s
Ih
■s°
10
00
x:
■p
•H
-P
8
U
•H P
3
-*
X
C
Ih n
.-(
XI
to
•rl
QO-rH
a
b
C
m
-*
E
•H
• to
0
©
£
-i
8
l
0 •<
n)
o
Ih
c<-\
1
CM
1
£
4
0
D.
CO
0
>
p
CM
J.
Ih m
o
0
0
o
<N
a
3 TJ
a)
0
rH
0
n
TJ
CO
4)
n a
<M
o
c
Ih
&
to 0
5
s
o
g
s
0
n x:
3
3
XI
x:
•H
TJ
o
•iH
s |
•H
•H
■
0
■
•H
00
0
*>
■p tr
■H
P
P
-rl l.
In
3
DO
■
4
P
0.
a)
■H
p 0
T)
■P
rH
3
0
K
4 0
4
o
•
u
H
0
■
a
rH
P
a
o
Ih Ih
E
I
a.
o
5
tj tj
0 «
H
TJ C
4 -h
■
TJ
i
c
0
3
a.
s
i
4
c
8. 0
O 4
c
ID
o
0
TJ
•H
o
s -^
o
a
o n
P
a
■H
O 0
n
•H
n
P 4->
•H
a
0
a
■
o
rH
•H
0
8.
g
•H Ih
0
60
5
E
<tj n
x. o
•H
0 XI TJ
P 0
O 0. U
p
Q.
3
4
>
Ih
4
"E 5
a
8.
X> P
•H
creos
set u
re qui
a.
•H
P
TJ
*
0
8 |
•
•H
g
o o
n
0
0
•rl
&
o
■s
C
8 1
P
•H
p
hH
01
r*
i-i
t>
» o.
P
•
*>
4
p 0
5
> o
>, - m
0
Ml
0
■H
E
5 I
o
O P
0
r-l n «
O
0
o
-P
0
t
5
is
O.P
0.-H -«o
fl
1
to
3
5
■p
0
3
o
Q
« o
«<
■< Xi -
Ou
OU
CO
a z
c
cm
Q
f\
-3"
u-\
vO
(V
o
a
2
"■
•"
"
~"
~
*~
to
""
C4
6h »•
CM
268
Economics of Railway Labor
U
•
*
u
ii
CM
cv
cv
lf\
>o
-»
CV
rr\
vO
"
m -*
1
3
£ l.
n
1 „
»
0 B
6u
■0
€>
■
5£
•3 »►.
09
0 p
C
Supplies
Tools
Extra mach
Joint spra
equipment
a
0
B
Li
a
L,
0
>
*
Each compr
hanism con
er
•
a
0
■H
11
■p
c
I
.3
ti
■H
8L
0
1
Li
Li
13
B
s.
n
' &
3
0
•H
•2
Li
0 >
a -o
•0
0
39
i
B
•
3
•P
0
I
0
rH
rH
31
Q
a u a
a) 0 u 3
a
H
8
0
8
8.
0
h
O
1
Is
Li bC
O CTJ
B -A 3
B rH ©
O H rH
B
rH
8
2
§•1 a
Kl, °
O . • O
-p
■p
O
O
♦»
a
(-. H
*>
Li O
O Li
X O -H X
TJ
»H
C
Li
a
lis
8 L. Li
O 0.*H
T3
<M
*H J5 O
rH O <i
a E 0
co a x
3
.' 1^
•J -P « ■
£££1
s
B
a)
X
I-l
O
co
2
O
X
CO
t
C
a)
X
rH
0
CO
1
IS
0
-3
CV
c\
o
- - (M«0
•"
u>
a
3
p
4
0
n
O
a
%
rH
■H
2
Li
1
0)
C
O
■H
a
1
a
c
•rt
0
a
3
rH
■rt
2
B
O
a
-P
O
T3
H
H
5
s
g
•H
0
■P
■P
L.
■P
a
a
Li
Li
O
5
•rH
■P
■J
•H
5
0.
3
a
8.
0
■a
B
0
JB
0
•P
s
■a
(4
M
0
n)
J=
B
Li OS
s
a
5
-p
c"
a
O
B
0)
1?
O
X r-t
0
5
B
0
B
a
a)
l-i
■H
O Ti
0
O.
«>
a
•H
0
.*
•H
■s
c a
a
j«s
0
a
n
X
•H
rH
a
« Li
■P
5
0
■H
rH
•H
0
•H
a
•H
Li
•H
c
i
■H
■P
a
O
X
&
i
a
B
e
g
B
Li
•O
a a
•H
C
V
0
&
a.
09
rH
■p
c
V
O
O
! 5
•H
<d
O
-p
M
3
•3
u
•H
P
*>
P
1
Li
■P
2
03
rH
■rt
O
5
•rt
a
5
B
-P
•H
m
•P
«
•rt
a
tH
a
■H
Li
0
Li
0
V
Li
L,
?
•
3
*
■P
0
s
>
>
P
1
P
O
■•-»
Li
s
Li
■P
i
•H
a
«
5
■rt -P
•O
■p
O
•rt
O
Li
■H
£
£ c3
X
«<
CO
a
CQ
O
CO
a
a
a
Q
£
SI
CV
tf
cv
»
O
Kr
8
8?
0
Cr\
X
CV CN
i
Economics of Railway Labor
269
H
O €>
I-
I
5
St
It
1*
£ O
3 «,
is " cv -* — — CV-*
3&
~ >
Mr
H—
L, m o 3 Q o £
o m © £ o 5 a
ar
I i
la
270 Economics of Railway Labor
It was noted that the personnel in the organization were well trained and the work
progressed in an orderly unconfused manner. The spacing between operations was main-
tained so that there was little, if any, delay encountered by the various operations.
Planning and Scheduling
The schedule of the work at this particular place was planned to coincide with the
low traffic volume period which resulted because of the miners' holiday. This scheduling
permitted the absolute use of track for 24 hours per day for the duration of the job.
As a result, at the close of work each operation stopped independent of the other
operations and started at the same point the next day with no delay time for opening
and closing.
The camp cars were stored on the westward main track at the west end of the
renewal job, minimizing the distance required to travel from and to the work site.
Production Costs
The organization as outlined is capable of laying 2 miles of welded rail in one day.
The actual average this year has been 1 .52 miles of rail (welded and conventional)
per day.
The current labor cost history of renewing rail in the Southern Region in 1962
through June 8 is as follows:
Production Quantities Cost In
Track Miles Man-Hours
Location Welded Conventional Total Turnouts Per Mile
A 1.4 4.1 5.5 1 1365
B 3.0 3.0 2 1375
C 3.6 3.6 1 1299
D 1.5 1.2 2.7 6 1955
E 5.9 0.3 6.2 6 1501
F 4.2 4.2 3 1700
G 4.2 0.2 4.4 0 1664
The above cost includes the distribution of new material and the picking up of
released material.
CONCLUSIONS
The C&O has a rail renewal organization which is effective and is producing at high
volume and low cost. This may be attributed to:
1. Well trained labor.
2. Effective gang supervision.
3. Maximizing track use by scheduling gang into job during low traffic volume.
4. Development and use of labor saving devices such as:
a. Special hand tools for handling tie plates.
b. Hydraulic-motor-driven brushes which remove dirt and ballast from the
web and base of the new rail as it is being lifted up and guided into the
tie plates.
c. Control device on the spike drivers which enables the lead driver operator
to control the propelling mechanism of the trailing compressor.
d. Propelling mechanism installed on push trucks used for distributing
material.
e. Propelling unit to push and haul the gaging equipment.
f. Self-propelled dual-wheel cribber which operates unattended.
Economics of Railway Labor 271
Report, on Assignment 3
Labor Economies to be Derived from Work Measurement
Standards for Comparison of Work Performance
Among Various Gangs or Divisions
H. J. Fast (chairman, subcommittee), A. D. Alderson, M. B. Allen, J. A. Barnes, J. F.
Beaver, E. J. Brown, R. F. Bush, J. L. Cann, R. H. Carpenter, J. A. Caywood,
\V. E. Chapman, S. A. Cooper, S. B. Culliford, \V. M. S. Dunn, J. L. Fergus,
R. L. Fox, K. E. Henderson, Claude Johnston, R. H. Jordan, Vernon L. Ljungren,
C. T. Popma, R. W. Preisendefer, D. E. Rudisill, N. E. Smith, W. B. Throckmorton,
G. E. Warfel, N. H. Williams, D. H. Yazell.
Definition
The assignment as worded is very broad. On searching into the field of work meas-
urement as applied to maintenance of track and structures by railways in North America,
it soon became evident that it might be more properly re-stated as "Survey of Work
Measurement in Maintenance of Track and Structures on Railways in North America."
Historical Background
The subject of work measurement was dealt with in a report by M. C. Bitner
during the Annual Meeting of the AREA in March 1958 and reported in AREA Pro-
ceedings, Vol. 59, page 1249. The assignment of the subject to Committee 22 was made
in 1961, and a progress report, published in Bulletin 568, Vol. 63, December 1961,
page 268.
Procedure of Investigation
A circular was sent out to chief engineers of 52 railways, of which 33 made a reply.
The circular generally sought a reply to control systems presently employed to assess and
evaluate productivity in maintenance work. It further asked that such control systems
be separately reported on work performed by extra gangs and work by regular track
forces. The replies indicated that considerable progress has been made in assessing pro-
ductivity of mechanized extra gangs, but only a few railways reported on an attempt
at assessing productivity of regular track forces. It was evident that a start had been
made but much was left to be done by way of refinement.
Comments and Analyses Arising out of the Investigation
Before making specific comments on the replies received, a general statement on the
problem of productivity control is indicated. The basic objective in measuring work
must be as a part of a control system aimed at minimizing total cost and maintaining
this minimum in the face of changing circumstances. To do this, measures have to be
established for the performance of the most effective methods of using labor and capital.
These measures can then be used to evaluate present performance and. if necessary,
action taken to raise performance to the required level. The feasibility of this action,
plus the cost of control, will determine the required accuracy of the measurements.
If the organization is already operating at a high level of productivity in a stable
situation, then a simple low-cost control system is probablj adequate. In other situations
it may not be possible, for obvious reasons, to obtain higher levels of productivity.
In general, the more critical the control system, the greater the accuracj required:
272 Economics of Railway Labor
e.g., a labor control system using a monetary incentive scheme requires equitable and
accurate standards. However, since traditionally labor incentives are not employed, it is
not necessary to have as tight a control system and still benefit from measured
productivity.
Basically, control systems must be tailored to the needs of the organization and
within the framework practicality. We all know that maintenance operations vary
throughout the year because of climate and traffic variation. The "within year" variation
is dealt with by the mixture of extra and permanent labor forces. The temporary labor
forces are generally organized in extra gangs and highly mechanized. The labor cost,
when reviewed as part of the total cost, is the smaller portion. Material and machine
costs usually exceed labor costs in such gangs. The regular forces, consisting of section,
bridge and building and various other men are usually responsible for the greater part
of the total maintenance cost, of which labor is the greater portion.
Thus, for extra gangs, the measurement system needs to be aimed at both machine
utilization and labor productivity, but for section and other forces, it must be concen-
trated on examining labor productivity. This latter examination is the most difficult and
in which not too much is being done as of this date.
Now, to be more specific: One large railway established a cost control system in
1926. However, with the advent of mechanization, the system as originally structured
and employed is not being used to its full potential. The railway in question is conscious
of the situation and, at the moment, is measuring performance against historical unit
costs. The information enables this railway to at least check performance that is con-
siderably out of line from historical averages. Employing such a system is better than
none at all, but does require considerable refinement.
Another railway started a cost control system in recent years. It is a smaller railway
and, hence, has the advantage of being able to control costs more readily than would
be the case in a large complex system. Relatively good progress has been made in con-
trolling costs against standards in more than 50 percent of routine track work. The sys-
tem is being reviewed constantly for refinement. One of the difficulties on this road is
the rather short-term adjustment of working forces related to variation in volume of
traffic. Nevertheless, this road is making progress in spite of the somewhat adverse
conditions.
Regardless of the control system employed in measuring work, the first step to be
taken should be a review of methods and organization. Too little would be gained in
measuring performance under methods which have not been reviewed and might be
found lacking in optimum use of labor, material and plant.
Conclusions
(a) Based on formal replies received:
1. Considerable progress has been made in measuring the performance of
mechanized extra gangs.
2. Limited progress was reported on measuring routine maintenance work.
3. Considerable variation exists in reporting systems.
4. No evidence was submitted that a periodic audit of the reporting system is
being made as to the cost of producing information and its real value for
information and control purposes.
5. Limited employment of staff trained and competent in design and supervision
of a meaningful cost and production control system,
Economics of Railway Labor 273
6. No information was submitted on establishing quality standards against
which performance can be measured,
(b) Based on informal conversations with numerous railway officers it would appear
that lack of progress in work measurement and productivity control has been
influenced by situations considered beyond the control of engineering officers.
Repeated statements were made that it is difficult to plan and control a seasonal
or annual work task because budgetary approvals are revised with variations in
traffic volume. Some railway officers stated that they have to adjust their
maintenance expenditures month by month. This situation denies an efficient
design of maintenance work. In addition, some officers reported restrictions as
a result of working agreements. Still others faced the constant problem of
climatic conditions.
Recommendations
As stated in the remarks above under the heading of "Comments and Analyses",
any approach to work methods and work measurement must be structured to meet and
cope with realistic restrictions. It is realized that each company has its own peculiar
problems, but this should not be an excuse to lag in implementing efficient administra-
tive measures. Industry as a whole is too prone to look for "goats" on which to blame
performance which is short of the optimum possible in the face of restrictive situations.
It has been proven over the years that a professional approach in analyzing any problem
has led to negotiations or policy changes which eliminated restrictions and obstacles
thought impossible of correction.
The AREA is a body essentially of professional men and its members must dedicate
themselves to a professional and vigorous attack on situations which deny efficient
maintenance methods.
It is therefore recommended that serious consideration be given to:
(a) Recruiting or training personnel competent in industrial and production engi-
neering. Competency in civil engineering does not necessarily mean competency
in production methods. An industrial engineer trained in production methods
should be teamed up with a civil engineer trained in design and quality
standards.
(b) Whereas considerable progress can be made in a review of methods and engi-
neered performance standards, an optimum control system would require that
quality standards be developed against which performance can be realistically
measured.
(c) A suggested sequence in the field of methods and measurement is as follows:
1. A review and description of methods employed on all significant jobs.
2. A refinement in work methods where indicated.
3. Establishment of realistic performance targets to do the work within the
accepted methods.
4. A simple but effective reporting system to supervise performance and, when
established, the need for immediate and current action in each case where
performance falls significantly below acceptable limits.
5. A constant review of methods with a view toward greater production and
adjustment of measured standards accordingly.
The above is submitted as information with the recommendation that this assign-
ment be discontinued and reconsidered for further study in a few years.
274 Economics of Railway Labor
Report on Assignment 4
Labor Economies to be Derived from Cropping Rail
In Track Versus Building Up Rail Ends by Welding
H. VV. Seeley (chairman, subcommittee), A. D. Alderson, M. B. Allen, J. A. Barnes,
O. C. Benson, E. J. Brown, J. A. Caywood, J. L. Chafin, VV. E. Chapman, R. E.
Clancy, P. A. Cosgrove, C. G. Crawford, C. G. Davis, M. H. Dick, W. M. S. Dunn,
H. VV. Kellogg, H. E. Kirby, V. L. Ljungren, L. A. Loggins, J. M. Lowry, R. L.
Mays, F. H. McGuigan, J. R. Miller, H. C. Minteer, R. VV. Pember, C. T. Popma,
Griffith Ray, M. S. Reid, D. E. Rudisill, R. G. Simmons, J. T. Sullivan, VV. B.
Throckmorton, John T. Ward, H. J. Weccheider, F. R. Woolford.
Your committee submits as information the following report comparing the cropping
of rail in track with the building up of rail ends by welding:
Committee 4 — Rail, on page 4-M-8 of the Manual, under the heading Recondition-
ing Rail Ends, makes the following recommendation: "Reconditioning of rail ends by
welding, grinding or cropping is recommended as good practice."
Building up battered or chipped rail ends by acetylene or electric welding has been
practiced by most railroads for a long time. Some roads have confined this work to
repairing badly chipped or unusually heavily battered rail ends on a "spot" basis. Others
have programmed the out-of-face building up of rail ends over long stretches of track,
much the same as they have programmed rail renewals, tie renewals and surfacing. The
purpose of this work is to upgrade the condition of the joints and extend the economical
useful life of the rail in track. It is this programmed out-of-face rail end welding that
is considered in this report.
The cropping or sawing off of rail ends to eliminate battered ends, worn fishing
space in the joint bar area and other defects in the rail end or joint area, has also
been practiced on some railroads for many years. Primarily it was a method of recon-
ditioning and upgrading rail which had been removed as a result of rail renewal pro-
grams to provide a higher grade relay rail for use in other tracks, usually in secondary
main line and branch lines. Since the rail was out of track, it was not uneconomical to
transport it to a central reclamation or cropping plant where permanently installed
cropping equipment, such as saws, drills, etc., were available.
In recent years, certain developments have caused railroad maintenance people to
look for a method of reconditioning and upgrading rail in track, thus eliminating the
cost of removing the rail from track, loading it, transporting it to and from a central
reclamation plant, distributing it and relaying it. A few of these factors were:
1. The cycle of replacing light-section rail with heavier section rail on most main-
line tracks and many branch-line tracks was completed.
2. Smaller maintenance of way budgets made it necessary to reduce the expendi-
tures for new rail and to use more relay rail.
3. At some locations, deferred maintenance, as a result of lack of funds for rail
renewals, had progressed to the point where it was necessary to extend the
service life of some of the rail in track for a few years until money became
available to replace it.
4. With the reduced mileage of rail renewals on main line tracks, less relay rail
was available for secondary main line and branch line tracks. It became neces-
Economics of Railway Labor 275
sary to find a way to recondition and upgrade the rail in track to avoid the
excessive maintenance costs and unsatisfactory track conditions that result
from badly battered joints and worn joint conditions.
As early as 1937, attempts were made to crop rail in track, using the portable power
saws and drills that were available at the time. The results were moderately good, but
the work was slow. While the costs could be justified under some conditions, the eco-
nomies of cropping rail in track were not sufficient to be accepted by most railroads.
The development of the portable abrasive-wheel rail cutter and the portable multiple-
spindle rail drills, in recent years, resulted in increased production and reduced the
amount of manpower required for the two primary operations in cropping rail in track.
As a result, many railroads have become interested in this method of reconditioning rail.
BUILDING UP RAIL ENDS BY WELDING
Purpose
The purposes of building up rail ends by welding are to correct excessive rail head
batter at the joints, and repair badly chipped rail ends, which conditions cause:
1. Damage to joint bars, bolts and nut locks.
2. Excessive wear in the fishing space at the joint location.
3. Bolt hole failures and rail failures in the joint area.
4. Damage to the joint ties.
5. Disturbance of the track surface at the joints, which results in excessive sur-
facing costs.
6. Surface-bent rail.
7. Muddy ballast in the vicinity of the joint.
The amount of rail end batter considered excessive varies on individual railroads
between 0.020 and 0.048 in, with most roads considering welding when the batter exceeds
0.030 to 0.03S in.
Factors to be Considered
The building up of rail ends by welding may be economically justified when the
following conditions exist:
1. Rail section is adequate for the traffic.
2. General condition of rail is good:
(a) Rail is not surface or line bent.
(b) Rail head wear is not excessive.
(c) Engine burns or other surface defects are not excessive.
3. Wear in fishing space within the limits of the joint bars is not beyond tin-
point where the joint bars do not support the joint; or in excess of an amount
that can be compensated for by the application of new splices, new over-size
splices, or splices reformed to original size or over size.
4. Joint batter is not excessive. The maximum amount of batter that may be
built up varies on the individual railroad. It cannot be above the amount that
can be economically and successfully welded without excessive heating
5. Rail ends have not been previously built up by welding. Mosl railroads rlo not
re-weld joints.
276 Economics of Railway Labor
Cost
Building up rail ends by welding is performed by an organization which consists
of the following:
1 foreman or lead welder
2 to 4 welders
2 to 4 welder-helpers
1 to 2 machine or grinder operators
2 to 4 laborers
This force builds up the joints by welding, surface grinds the welds and slots or
cross-grinds the rail ends. Some roads report that they also have a signalman on the
job to renew rail bonds that may be damaged by the heat. The labor cost varies between
225 and 450 man-hours per mile, depending upon whether a full head weld or strip weld
is used, the length of the individual welds, the number of rail ends per mile to be
welded, the amount of traffic interference, and the travel time to and from the point
of work. The total cost of welding rail ends is in the range of $0.25 to .$0.35 per inch
of weld.
Most roads condition the joints to be welded by surfacing and replacing the worn
splices with new or reformed splices, either ahead of the welding operation or between
the welding and the grinding operations. The labor cost for doing this work is in addi-
tion to the welding force and varies between 100 and 300 man-hours per mile, depending
upon traffic interference and travel time.
CROPPING RAIL IN TRACK
Purpose
The purpose of cropping rail in track is to eliminate the following conditions or
defects in the rail joint area:
1. Rail end batter that is in excess of the amount that can be economically cor-
rected by welding.
2. Rail end batter that has developed in previously welded joints.
3. Worn fishing space in the joint bar area in excess of that which can be com-
pensated for by new, over-size, or reformed splices.
4. Joint defects such as bolt-hole cracks, head-artd-web separations and split-web
failures.
5. Surface bends or "droop" in the ends of rails.
Factors to be Considered
The cropping of rail in track may be justified when the following conditions exist:
1. Rail section is adequate for the traffic.
2. General condition of rail is good except for the ends:
(a) Rail is not surface or line bent.
(b) Rail head wear is not excessive.
(c) Engine burns or other surface defects are not excessive.
3. Wear in fishing space has developed to the point where joint bars do not
properly support the joint and this wear cannot be compensated for by renew-
ing the splices.
4. Rail end batter cannot be corrected by welding or surface grinding.
5. It is desired to change the rail end drilling or to replace splices with longer or
shorter splice bars.
Economics of Railway Labor 277
Cost
A typical organization for cropping rail in track is as follows:
Labor
1 foreman
6 to 7 machine operators
6 to 8 laborers
Equipment
1 or 2 portable abrasive rail cutters
1 portable multiple-spindle rail drill
1 or 2 power wrenches
1 power spike puller
1 grinder for dressing bolt holes and
slotting or beveling rail ends
1 crane or power winch for shifting
rail and placing fill-in rails
Labor cost for the cropping operation varies between 385 and 640 man-hours per
mile, depending upon the amount of actual working time available during the tour of
duty. This includes cutting and drilling the rails, dressing the bolt holes, beveling the
rail ends, shifting the rails, installing fill-in rails, applying the splices and rail anchors,
and replacing the spikes. In addition to this, there must be considered the labor and
other expense to deliver the fill-in rails which most roads crop at a reclamation plant
or other central location and to pick up the cropped rail ends. In track-circuit territory,
signal forces will be required to install rail bonds. Some roads also lubricate the new
joints and end harden the new rail ends.
CONCLUSIONS
While your committee's assignment is to compare the labor economies of "cropping
rail in track" against "building up rail ends by welding", such a comparison is very
difficult, if not impossible, to make. The purpose of both methods of reconditioning
rail ends is to improve the condition of the rail, in order to reduce the cost of main-
taining the track in satisfactory condition for the traffic it is to carry. The determina-
tion of which method to use will not depend upon the relative labor costs, but will
depend upon the condition of the rail and the unsatisfactory conditions that are to be
corrected. Therefore, your committee has summarized the factors that must be con-
sidered to justify each of the two methods of reconditioning rail. We have indicated the
approximate labor costs, and since equipment costs are an important consideration in
cropping rail in track, we have indicated the type and quantity of machines that are
being used for this purpose.
The maintenance people who have the responsibility for making the decision must
consider the individual situation to determine which method of reconditioning rail is
required and economical for that particular location. They must not overlook the fact
that other methods of reconditioning rail, such as rail head surface grinding, are available
and must be considered.
This report is submitted as information, with the recommendation thai the subject
be discontinued.
278 Economics of Railway Labor
Report on Assignment 5
Labor Economies Inherent to Various Methods
of Taking Up Track
John Stang (chairman, subcommittee), A. D. Alderson, J. A. Barnes, J. L. Cann, R. H.
Carpenter, S. A. Cooper, C. G. Crawford, S. B. Culliford, M. H. Dick, L. E. Dono-
van, L. C. Gilbert, V. C. Hanna, R. H. Jordan, L. A. Loggins, J. M. Lowry, T. D.
Mason, F. H. McGuigan, J. R. Miller, H. C. Minteer, C. W. Owens, R. W. Pember,
D. E. Rudisill, R. G. Simmons, N. E. Smith, J. T. Sullivan, W. B. Throckmorton,
G. E. Warfel, H. J. VVeccheider.
In the last 10 years tremendous changes have been taking place on the railroads
of the United States and Canada. There are many forces at work. Some are economic,
others are political, and still others exist because of mechanization, automation, and the
development of new products used in the modernization of the North American rail-
road plant. Changing traffic patterns, reduction of passenger train miles, centralized
traffic control, tax savings, longer trains and consequent reductions in the number of
trains, and mergers, all have had a vigorous effect on the retirement of excess or obsolete
tracks and facilities.
The methods used to tear up track vary widely, depending on the condition of the
material to be retained and the use to be made of it, together with the location of track,
that is, single track, yard track, or one track or multiple tracks. So many different
methods and equipment have been used that it does not seem desirable to list the details
of all of them. Instead, we shall briefly outline the methods used for some
particular jobs.
One railroad states that there are two general methods of taking up track — the
method to be used will depend on the need a particular railroad has for the material
to be salvaged. Below are factors to be considered under these two methods:
Method 1 — Dismantling in Field (Conventional and Ripping)
(a) Where ties, rail, etc., are required for immediate normal maintenance renew-
als, the ties and rail can be shipped direct to the locations where these materials are
required.
(b) Where light rail sections are being retired from abandoned branch line or yards,
and where the material will be sold for scrap. This will permit prompt and immediate sale.
(c) On smaller railroads this method would give quicker utilization of released
material before further deterioration occurs, and eliminates the need to purchase new
material.
Method 2 — Panelized Track
(a) Where extensive yards, new main branch line, or passing tracks are to be con-
structed in the immediate or near future, the track panel method is more economical.
(b) On larger railroads where relatively small retirements are being made and there
is a constant need for new industrial tracks, a certain amount of panel track can be
stored for future use. This is assuming that there would be frequent turnover before
further deterioration occurs.
While each line is confronted with different problems in gang setups, which depend
on the layout of the highway system in the surrounding country, the topography of the
land and the number of bridges and ties that are to be salvaged, the setups of the gangs
mentioned in this report can be considered as representative.
Economics of Railway Labor 279
The price of scrap has a decided influence on the method used in retiring track.
If the price of scrap is high, it would be of advantage to obtain as much scrap as
possible, irrespective of apparent inherent inefficiency in the method used to obtain this
scrap. Also, approaching seasonal weather conditions which could restrict or postpone
actual salvage operations influence the need of expediency in the removal of track.
In this report three methods of taking up track are described — conventional, ripping,
and panelizing.
CONVENTIONAL METHOD
So many railroads use this general method of taking up track that it would be
impossible to describe all the variations. Instead, the operations applicable to three
different situations are outlined. (Figs. 1 and 2).
(a) Single Track Only. Two power spike pullers operated by four laborers remove
the track spikes. Approximately ll/2 miles of spikes are pulled at one time, leaving on
the average 6-10 spikes per rail at joints and centers to hold gage. This is done because
the rail is to be recovered by push cars towed by a heavy-duty motor car to the loading
point. The number of gage-holding spikes left per rail is determined by the track curva-
ture and tie condition. The spike pullers are followed by two laborers burning bolts from
the angle bars. The number of bolts left per joint is governed by the size and curvature
of the rail. The next operation is picking up and loading the rail on two heavy-duty
push cars towed by a heavy-duty motor car. The bolt burner, operated from the motor
car, burns the remaining bolts from the joints just ahead of the motor car. Two laborers
equipped with a claw bar and spike maul, which are carried on the rear push car, pull
the remaining spikes and knock off the angle bars. One of these laborers then positions
the rail tongs on the rail to be removed, and it is loaded by a suitable off-track or
on-track crane. A suitable off-track crane provides the most rapid method of loading,
as it has to move forward only one-half rail length to deposit the rail on the push cars.
Small scrap is piled by three laborers on on side of the roadbed. As the cross ties are
graded, the salvageable ties are pulled to the same side of the roadbed as the scap by
the three additional laborers. A bulldozer then plows the bad ties to the opposite side
of the roadbed, and at the same time builds a roadway for dump trucks to operate
over in removing the salvage material to the loading point. In this operation, involving
18 men, an a%rerage of 1060 lin ft of track per day can be recovered.
(b) Double or Multiple Track. The track to be retired is first jacked out of the
ballast, and the metal materials are completely dismantled and loaded. The scrap ties
are then removed, piled and burned, while the salvageable ties are bundled, banded and
loaded for shipment to a sorting and storage location for future shipment orders. Some
of the equipment used in this operation are: power jack, power spike pullers, bolt
machines, speed swings, etc. The entire field operation requires a gang of 44 men and
results in an average production of 4600 lin ft of track per day.
(c) Bath Double or Multiple Truck <in<l Single Truck. Power spike pullers begin,
one on each rail, pulling all spikes and removing all tie plates. Three ties per rail art-
then respiked to allow machinery and cars to pass over the track. Holt machines and
oxyacetylene burning outfits are used to take off the bolts. If the bolts come off easil}
there will be less need to cut the bolts with a cutting torch. One bolt per angle bar is
left to allow machinery and cranes to pass over this track. One assistant foreman .mil
15 laborers are Used to remove tie plate-, re-spike track and load tie plates .mil hum el
laneous scrap. The tie plates are loaded into the bucket ol a power shovel and then
280
Economics of R a i 1 w a y Labor
«95^
°<
O q;
<
Z
<
o
O
z
<
o
en
o
z
>
o
2
UJ
or
o
co
o
M
wo 5
I- h- *■
>o§<
° z
El
-i er
JO<
3 2 O
0. UJ 2
<f> cc 5
u O u
Sf!5
or ^ <*-
uj 2
^ O
< uj H
o 9,
o
< CO
Z K o
2 a z
u. <
o s
UJ
o o
O U.
<r z
z o
</> <J u.
UJ
E o o
r z w
O 7 CD
o § i
O o o
» k *
? 9 ^
> ►-
<I O o
o <» o
O 2 tt Zff
u. uj S S Jr.
<r <r tr tr <
o o o o 2
CD CD CD 00 |_
< < < <I X
J J J J LU
<T C\J — — —
2
9: O
uj < uj uj i:
O O ut
_ 2
*f? O i S
10 CD z>
O O
*" * h ^*
o a. g to
<d 3 tr co
•looto
J < J Id h <
ro — rO —
NlOlJi/llCNCOcJlO
Economics of Railway Labor
281
£•<*<
-|C
mO
"' ' o
£ »-tou.
Ul bJ _ uj
1
tt 10 > *- _JUJ
s
Q * 2, ,oz
oo Su'z<
< < UJ -J 31
fc
jtito. odo
■ i • .
A
£! * * <r
»-
o
If
o
5
o^<
< _ 10
5 °-
uj - w
5: tr o.
s 5 °- UJ
a oc o r
aco
crx'S*
<fc<£
oosg
houico
<3fe<
V)
Z UJ
o ^
o <
t
fc a ui
</> cr 0.
6 if j
<
I 0- UJ
x 0 1
to
UJ
10 0. |_
1- to 5
-J to
FASTEN -
ONTAINERS
JOINT BARS
TIES GONDO
RAIL HOOK
a. 0
UT BOL
PULL
BAR 0
PICK U
RY TO
OOSEN
STACK
• APPLY
CABLE
0 10 CO
to 5 • to 10 uj
tr S tr tr tr _i
UJ Ul UJ UJ 0
• <r <r
1,1 SEK«
tr cO a: tr tr 7
Q O 0U
LABO
INGS
LABO
LABO
LABO
a HA
J ID 11
UJ < < c
J _) _l(t
CVV
5£
CM CJ fO — CM CM
< <0 _) to
o<r »- .
ZOD«
111 CD O t
to
UJ
or*
uj a.
or to
gu.
< d
_i a
uj a
I K
<
N
Z
<
<r
o
z
<
(9
<
cr
Q.
o
Q.
bx>
< zz
or ui uj
uj 22
CL Q. Q.
0 55
ui"" O O
7 tr uj uj
- UJ
r o * *
o -1 tc <*
4 uj o O
5 * * *
- J^ (M CM fO CM
5*
< UJ
2 cr
ui O
u <C 1- tr
282 Economics of Railway Labor
are dumped into a gondola car. Spikes, bolts, anchors and miscellaenous scrap are
thrown into their respective gondola cars towed by a 150-hp rubber-tired tractor.
Moving back to the rear gang, which consists of 1 extra gang foreman and 10 laborers,
1 mechanic and various machines; the remaining bolts in the angle bars are cut off, and
the remaining spikes from the ties are pulled. Spikes, bolts and angle bars are loaded
on one of two push cars behind a 30-ton crane. The other push car behind the crane
carries the cutting torch and oxygen and acetylene tanks. On the cable of the crane are
two sets of rail tongs and three feet of chain to allow for the picking up of two rails
at a time. The crane swings around and loads rails on a car in front of the crane. In the
salvaging of the ties, the first thing that is done is to pull out the ties that are not
usable. One man does this operation. With forks attached to large power shovels the
operators pick up anywhere from 30 to 60 ties, depending on the size of the shovel.
The operators then go back to the gondola cars situated behind the crane and dump
the ties in these cars. If the ties are to be stockpiled, pre-made cable slings, % in by 30
ft, are placed for each group of 60 ties. This number is handled quite easily by a small
dragline at the stockpile. After the day's work is finished, a work train comes in and
takes out all the loads and respots the empty cars for the next day's program. Approxi-
mately two miles of track are recovered each day, involving an expenditure of 800
man-hours.
RIPPING METHOD
The basis of this method is the use of a specially designed "ripper" or "sled" which.
when pulled by an engine or some other power means, quickly separates the rails from
the ties, and also makes other operations easier. One railroad's operation in track removal
using the above method is described below.
Preparatory to the operation of the rippers, two men with power wrenches remove
two of the four bolts from each joint. They also loosen the other two bolts for expe-
diting complete removal later by hand. At the same time, other trackmen remove all
rail anchors from the rails. When CTC projects are involved, turnouts for passing tracks
are also installed at this time.
The track is now ready for operation of the ripper. The ripper consists of a heavy
structural steel frame from the rear of which a large-diameter round steel bar extends
outward from each side. The frame, which is narrow enough to fit between the running
rails, is open at the top and bottom and has a short nose at the front end to which
towing cables are fastened.
The ripper is used with a work train consisting of a caboose, a locomotive, a work
car on which the ripper is transported, and a 30-ton diesel locomotive crane. The ripper
is placed on the track to be removed, with the frame resting between the rails, and the
towing cables are attached to the crane. Spikes are then pulled by hand from each run-
ning rail for a distance of one-half rail length. A pair of joint bars is removed from each
rail and the rails are raised high enough to permit the side extensions of the ripper to
be pulled beneath them.
The work train then moves ahead at a speed of about 3 mph. The lower flanges
of the frame hold the ties down while the side extensions raise the rails, causing the
spikes to be pulled by the base of the rail (Fig. 3). About 60 percent of the spikes are
pulled out by the ripper. The other spikes, having been driven into ties renewed within
the last few years, resist pulling. This causes the ties to move along and bunch until
the spikes are either ejected or the spike heads bend sufficiently to allow the rails to
be lifted and freed,
Economics of Railway Labor
283
Fig. 3 — Ripping track with a sled.
It is now relatively easy for the trackmen to remove the remaining two bolts from
the joints. They also pull any spikes not already pulled, and pile the bars, bolts, anchors,
tie plates and spikes for magnet loading. A foreman and two trackmen classify and
mark the rails for loading, after which a work train follows and loads the rails and
bars. A second pass of the work train loads the other track materials.
Also, with the ties now up where they can be inspected, the ones found not suitable
for reuse are piled and either burned or given to neighboring farmers. The usable ties
are picked up by a suitable off-track loader equipped with a two-prong fork and piled
on the embankment shoulder. Later, these ties are loaded into cars by a crane and
shipped to other points.
There are numerous other variations on the ripping method of taking up track.
Some of these arc: (1) Use of a rail sled in removing spikes without the aid of an\
type of individual spike pullers. A joint bar is removed and the rail threaded through
the nose and over the roller of the sled. The sled is then pulled along by attaching a
cable to it and a bulldozer. This method is applicable to single-track only. (2) A gang
of approximately 11 men is assigned to prepare the tracks and do the oecessarj hand
work involved with the retirements.
After this preliminary work is completed all of the remaining work is performed
by machine operators and equipment. A bulldozer pulls the sled to loosen the rail from
the tics. The rail so freed is burned into strings "i 10 rail lengths each, which are
284 Economics of Railway Labor
dragged by the bulldozer to a highway grade crossing loading location. At this point
the rails are loaded onto a tractor trailer and taken to a loading site. If the loading site
is adjacent to a track where a gondola car can be placed, the tractor trailer is not
used and the rail is loaded directly into the cars. All of the bolts and bars are burned
off at the loading location and handled into cars via a dump truck to a loading location.
Miscellaneous other track materials are loaded onto a home-made sled, and as the bull-
dozer pulls the sled the small materials are loaded by hand or with a front-end loader.
The operation, which is applicable to single or multiple track, requires a total of 17
men and permits recovery of approximately 2000 lin ft of track per day.
PANELIZING METHOD
Panelizing methods can be considered to be made up of four steps. These are:
(1) panelizing, (2) recovery of the panels, (3) disassembly of the panels, and (4) load-
ing the component parts that make up the panel. After steps (1) and (2) have been
completed, the panels are usually shipped in gondola cars to a central location where
they are either dismantled on the ground or dismantled by means of a mechanized
dismantling operation.
The following is a general description of one panel-track recovery method.
The bolts and joint bars of the abandoned track are removed. The joint bars re-
moved are spiked to the ties on the end of the panel. The rail anchors are removed and
one rail is pulled to square the joints to make a 39-ft panel. The bolts and nuts are
hung on the end of the rail, where the bars are removed with a hand wrench. An as-
sistant foreman and three men, with a power bolt machine, hydraulic spike puller, spike
mall, clawbar, etc., are used in this operation. A bulldozer and an operator are used to
pull the rail to square the joints (Fig. 4). Sixty to 70 panels are prepared per day by
this force, the higher figures being obtained on tangent track and lower figures where
the curvature is heavy.
The actual loading of the panels is done by a gang consisting of a foreman and
four men, one of whom is a crane operator. A 25-ton truck-crane is used to load the
panels in a work train. Three panels are loaded in each gondola car. On one job the
average number of panels loaded per day was 48, while the maximum number loaded
was 90. Track occupancy, which averaged about 2^4 hr per day, was the controlling
factor in this operation. A panel lifting device (Fig. 5) materially speeds up the loading
operations. This panel lifting device automatically clamps on the rails on each panel and
the panel lifter is automatically released when the panel is laid in the gondola car and
the strain on the cable is released. The cars are then sent to a central dismantling plant.
One dismantling plant is set up under an overhead craneway (Fig. 7). The stripping
bed consists of two rows of scrap ties set on the ground workwise, and extends for
360 ft parallel to the craneway and parallel to the track on which the cars are unloaded,
and on which the cars loaded with panels are placed for unloading. A tie-handler ma-
chine sorts and piles the times from the stripping operation. Two classifications of ties
are made, relay and scrap. The gang doing this work consists of a foreman, seven track-
men, a track-equipment operator who operates the tie handler, and an operator for the
overhead crane. This totals 10 men. The gang is equipped with special tools, including
a hydraulic spike puller, electric impact wrenches, and air-operated banding tools. The
work is organized on a production-line basis. The average number of panels being dis-
mantled per day is 29. The tie plates and angle bars recovered are tossed to one side
Economics of Railway Labor
285
Fig. 4 — Squaring joints in a panelizing operation.
Fig. 5 — Loading panels with a 25-ton truck crane.
>86
Economics of Railway Labor
Fig. 6 — (Not referred to in text) — Panelizing single track retirement
using demountable trucks with attached rail rack.
Fig. 7 — Centralized panel-dismantling plant with overhead crane.
Economics of Railway Labor 287
of the stripping bed, while the spikes, bolts, nuts, nutlocks, screw spikes, rail anchors,
etc., are dropped into the stripping bed between the ties in the panel being dismantled.
All other track material is handled by a magnet attached to the overhead crane, and
the relay ties are bundled 10 to a bundle and bound together with a single steel band.
Sorting of other track material is done by the stores department. Material to be
reclaimed is sorted into piles, separating it from usable material that can be used upon
requests. The scrap ties are loaded on a push car by the tie handler and the push car
is towed by the same machine. While panels to be stripped are being placed on the
stripping bed by the overhead crane, the tie handler transfers the scrap ties from the
push car to a dump truck for disposal. The banded relay ties are loaded into drop-end
gondolas by the overhead crane for distribution to locations where tie renewals are
scheduled for the following working season.
Where turnouts are removed, the portion of the turnout from stock rail joints
ahead of the switch points for a distance of 39 ft from these stock rail joints, is sal-
vaged intact. This is so that the switch plates, rods, points, stock rails, etc., can be
salvaged for re-use as a unit.
A recently developed hydraulically operated straddle crane (Fig. 8) is expected to
be used by one railroad for picking up retired single track in panels. Although final
plans have not been completed, tentative plans are as follows:
A crew comprised of an assistant foreman, machine operator and six trackmen will
first square up the joints to form track panels, covering about one mile per day. Two
power wrenches will be used, one for unbolting and the other for rebolting one bolt
per joint. A tractor will be used to pull one of the rails to square the joints, and four
trackmen will restore the bars as well as loosen the spikes on tight ties which resist rail
movement.
The shoulders of the ballast and roadbed section will be plowed down to permit
the straddle crane, with its wheels at about 17J/ ft centers, to straddle the track without
sliding one way or the other and crowd the cars being loaded. The straddle crane will
then lift a track panel and carry it back to a gondola car. A locomotive crane will be
used to move the train of cars as well as for lifting the straddle crane, which weighs
about 7 tons, over bridges. It is anticipated that 48 track panels will be loaded daily
by this method.
The following is a brief outline of another centralized highly mechanized dismantling
operation (Fig. 9).
Panels arrive at a central location, such as the scrap and reclamation plant, on
regularly scheduled trains, and are stored in the yard. The required number of cars are
switched into the scrap and reclamation plant and placed on the proper track at the
dismantling area. This is done each night by a regular yard engine. A 40-ton locomotive
crane, stored at the working site, unloads the panels from the gondola cars and then
flips or turns them over onto the dismantling machine with the rails down (Fig. 10).
The panels, by means of rollers, are then moved toward the front end of the machine
where the movement of the rails are stopped by a steel post. A cable driven spring
loaded accumulator mechanism or "rabbit" (Fig. 11) is then senl out. which travels
under the ties until it reaches the end of the pane] and then is brought back, pushing
the ties with it while leaving the rail in place. The rails t In 1 1 slide down ramps on both
sides ol 'he machine and are later picked up by tin crane and placed in nearby cars.
288
Economics of Railway Labor
Fig. 8 — Handling panels with a straddle crane.
Economics of Railway Labor
289
h-
O
h-
z
O
U
-1
->
1-
U
S
z
<
o\
z
10
z
o
bib
o
t-
<
to
a
or
UJ
UJ
N
a.
o
Z
<
I
o
UJ
2E
in
z
o
o
_l
<
K
290 Economics of Railway Labor
The tics, one by one, are accepted by the dismantling machine which has knife blades
that pry the tie plates from the tics (Fig. 12). The tie plates and spikes fall down onto
a conveyor, while the ties are conveyed and dumped into one of two groups (Fig. 13).
The crane picks up these bundles of ties and places the good ties into unloaded gondola
cars, and the bad ones into a pile where they are later burned toward the end of each
trick (this is a two-trick operation). After each trick there is a general cleaning of the
site and the debris in the gondola cars. This operation uses a total of 13 men for the
2 shifts, and handles an average of over 65 panels a day.
The greater the degree of mechanization in these methods the lower the man-hour
costs. From the sampling of man-hours and unit costs secured from many representa-
tive railroads, the following figures show the range in labor costs for the three methods
described:
Man-Hours/
Method Track-Mile
Conventional 400-1200
Ripping 300- 500
Panelizing 250- 400
Some railroads in their track-removal programs have found it more economical to
put this work out to bid, selling the track in place and retaining certain material for
re-use on the property rather than performing this work with their own forces.
The specifications for the removal of tracks by a contractor vary according to the
amount of material to be retained by the railroad and the number and type of struc-
tures involved within the limits of the retirement. In general, the railroad retains all
rail of sections suitable for relay, and such other track material as turnouts, angle bars,
compromise joints, tie plates, rail anchors, and treated ties, which can be utilized in
normal construction and maintenance of the railroad's tracks. The contractor takes all
scrap rail, unsalvagable ties, and track fastenings of the lighter weight rail sections.
In addition, the contractor normally takes all lumber and bridge timbers of such condi-
tion that reclaiming and treatment would not be economical to the railroad.
In some instances there are decided advantages in selling abandoned lines on the
"as-is, where-is" basis. However, it is suggested that the railroads who sell on an "as-is,
where-is" basis take a good look at the spread in prices between scrap sold on that
basis compared to current prices obtainable for classified scrap.
(Text continued on page 293)
Economics of Railway Labor
291
Fig. 10 — Inverted panels being placed on dismantling machine rack.
Fig. 11 — "Kabbit' separating ties from rail.
292
Economics o 1 Railway Labor
Fig. 12— Prying blades and hydraulic action separate tie plates from ties.
Economics of Railway Labor
29.*
Fig. 13 — Tie sorter at mechanized panel-dismantling plant.
TIE LOADING
Many railroads have devised various ingenious methods for the loading of ties
(Figs. 14 to 18 incl.). In this report one method is described below as a representative
sample.
The tie conveyor-loader is basically a bulldozer without a blade, two hydraulically
driven conveyors and two rooters in front of the machine. The rooters plow up the
cross ties from the roadbed, and then convey them up to a height of approximate^ 12
ft and onto a cross conveyor, which sends them into waiting gondola cars. The machine
is used in conjunction with a work train containing a number of open gondola cars.
The work train is positioned on the track adjacent to the location where the ties are
to be removed and remains stationary. The tie conveyor loading machine is then sel in
motion and loads ties into cars as it travels alongside the work train (Fig. 18). When
the full length of the train has been traversed the tie conveyor-loading machine is then
halted while the work train is positioned once again for loading. When the train is
again ready for loading the tie conveyor-loading machine is set in motion and the opera-
tion is repeated. Approximately 6 to 7 passes are mule before a car is fully loaded.
Approximately 28 to 30 ties are put into each ear on each pass. The average number
of ties loaded per hour is 500. An average of 4 hr of work train time has been obtained
tor an average daily production of -7000 loaded ties. A foreman, one operator, two men
in fronl of the machine to straighten the ties, and three men in the cars are required
for this operation. Salvaged ties are haded in ear-, for 4 percent of the new tie cost.
This includes the cost of classifying, plugging --pike hole- and work train expenses
Text continued on page 2^7)
294
Economics of Railway Labor
Fig. 14 — Tie rooter and bundler.
**. ■■■
Fig. 15 — Tie loading machine.
Economics of R a i 1 w a y L a l> o r
296
E c i) n (i in i ( - o i Rail \\ :i \ L a li o r
Fig. 17 — Rubber-tired tie-loading crane at work.
Fig. 18 — Crawler tie conveyor-loader.
Economics of Railway Labor
297
Fig. 19 — Ballast loader section of ballast reclaimer.
BALLAST RECLAIMING
Because there are many ballast-reclaiming operations now in use by various rail-
roads, it would be impossible to describe all the different methods used. One method
of ballast reclaiming involves the use of three separate off-track pieces of machinery:
(1) a road grader, (2) a ballast loader (Fig. 19), and (3) a ballast cleaner. The grader
windrows the ballast by making two passes. The windrow generally forms a parabola
of material 18 in deep with a base of Al/2 ft, which gives 6.5 cu yd of ballast to the rail
length. The grader can windrow 1 mile an hour with ease.
Basically, the off-track ballast cleaner consists of a vibrating 4- by 8-ft rod-deck
screen which is mounted on a stripped-down truck body (Fig. 20). The power take-off
from the trucks' engine drives variable-volume pumps for the several hydraulic motors.
A set of hydraulic valves for controlling the screen and conveyors is located on each
side of the cleaner.
In operation, the cleaner is towed backwards by the loader which feeds the ballast
into the screen's hopper. After vibrating and shaking out the fouled material from the
ballast, the clean ballast travels up the main elevator conveyor and is placed in the 6-ft
between two adjacent tracks (Fig. 21) or on the outside of the ties across two adjacent
tracks by means of a delivery chute attachment. The reclaimed ballast can also be
loaded into dump trucks or hopper cars. An 8-ft wasting conveyor is used to cast the
<lirt and fines that are screened out to either side. The machine can operate at the rate
of 150 tons per hour.
Placing reclaimed ballast on adjacent tracks produces a saving of approximately
twice the cost of purchasing and distributing new ballast with ;i work train. The savings
298
Economics of Railway Labor
Fig. 20 — Ballast cleaner section of ballast reclaimer.
Fig. 21 — Ballast reclaimer placing screened ballast on adjacent track.
Economics of Railway Labor
299
Fig. 22 — Another type of ballast reclaimer placing ballast in hopper cars.
involved in switching, road haul and other intangible costs make this method of ballast
recovery especially desirable.
Another type of ballast loader-reclaimer with a shaker screen for cleaning the stone
(having a capacity of 200 to 250 tons per hour) is in use on several other railroads
(Fig. 22). A bulldozer windrows the stone, making as many passes as necessary depend-
ing on the depth of ballast to be recovered. The ballast-reclaiming machine powers its
way into the windrowed stone, picking up the stone on belt conveyors, and dropping
it on a shaker screen for cleaning. The machine then places the cleaned stone on a belt
conveyor which discharges the stone into a hopper car. The dirt and fines from the
cleaning operation are wasted on slopes of the roadway adjacent to the remaining track
or tracks. This machine is also utilized to place ballast on adjacent tracks scheduled
for surfacing.
On the basis of new stone costing $1.50 per ton and a labor cost of $3.00 per hour,
the total cost of placing this stone in track amounts to $3.50 a ton. Where the salvaged
ballast can be immediately recovered from an adjacent track, a savings as high as $2.60
per ton can be realized.
This report is submitted as information, with the recommendation that the subject
be discontinued.
300 Economics of Railway Labor
Report on Assignment 7
Labor Economies in Track Maintenance to Be Derived
Through Use of Combination On-Off-Track
Equipment Vs. On-Track Equipment
Only
T. L. Kanan (chairman, subcommittee), J. F. Beaver, 0. C. Benson, R. F. Bush, \Y. E.
Chapman, P. A. Cosgrove, C. G. Davis, M. H. Dick, R. L. Fox, L. G. Gilbert,
R. R. Gunderson, G. L. Harris, K. E. Henderson, H. W. Kellogg, L. A. Loggins,
V. L. Ljungren, T. D. Mason, R. L. Mays, M. S. Reid, R. G. Simmons, N. E.
Smith, J. T. Ward, N. H. Williams, H. E. Wilson, F. R. Woolford.
A number of railroads are realizing the real economies to be gained by replacing
strictly on-track work equipment with combination on-off-track equipment to obtain
diversification and more flexible operations.
On-track equipment, such as rail layers, clam shovels, locomotive cranes, bridge
derricks, pile drivers, etc., are being replaced with combination on-off-track machines
such as special-swing, light- and heavy-duty full-revolving cranes with self-compensating
guide wheels, giving highway mobility on track. Operated by one man, this equipment
has various attachments, including telescoping line hydraulic boom ; positive hydraulic
rail tongs which eliminate all labor in lifting and guiding rail; ditching bucket with
ripper teeth; magnet; forks; tote hooks; snow thrower; fork tie bailer; and rail
threader. Savings of up to 25 percent can be realized with this type of equipment.
As an example, one railroad has the problem of cleaning ditches in mountainous
territory. For years a work train and steam ditcher worked up and down the main line,
loading material which rolled off mountain sides into railway ditches. The time came
when this outfit had an average track occupancy of only 2 hr in a 10 hr day, making
the operation very expensive. Upon consulting with manufacturers, a machine with both
flanged wheels and rubber-tired wheels was designed. The wide axles and larger tires
made it possible for this machine to move along the track, spanning both rails, that is,
the tires move on the ties just outside of the two rails. The larger tires also enabled
the machine to "walk" over the track without the aid of crossing planks. In some in-
sances the retractable flanged wheels were used for locomotion where conditions required.
One operator, a helper, and protection consistent with local conditions and rules are
used. On most sections of mountainous territory, it is permissible to give protection by
train order and thus eliminate manual flagging. To make the machine even more ver-
satile, it was equipped with a telescopic boom which can rotate 360 deg, so it could be
used for rock scaling, shovel, or backhoe work.
Later, trucks equipped with side-dump boxes were acquired to assist the above
described equipment. These trucks are equipped with retractable flanged wheels and can
be used both on and off track. Savings in the neighborhood of $18,000 per year, not
counting the investment in work train locomotives and air-dump cars, were realized.
One man operates the equipment, with remote control when crane is in use. A
portable set-off device is provided for this machine to permit quick set-off for passing
trains. The crane can be used to lay rail, both welded and conventional. Quick-change
attachments provide efficient handling of all types of work assignments. One road states
that one on-off-track crane can replace two on-track machines, paying for itself with
just one year's work.
Economics of Railway Labor 301
Handling of pre-assembled turnouts and panelled track has resulted in reduced labor
to handle materials. Savings of from 30 to 40 percent have been cited.
Trucks of various kinds have been equipped with 4-wheel friction drive and retrac-
table Banged wheels which raise and lower hydraulically ; also aerial work equipment,
a derrick and catwalk make for safer operation. They have been used for clearing train
wrecks quickly, working on or off track, depending on whether a roadway parallels the
track. Sometimes 50 percent of labor is saved by using this type of equipment.
Some railroads have equipped these same trucks with spraying attachments for
bridge painting. In one case two bridges were painted in one day, where this could not
have been done before because of the time necessary to move from one work site to
another. The savings in this instance were stated to be tremendous.
One railroad, recently, with outside technical help, designed a new weed-spray truck
with flanged guide wheels which are hydraulically retractable to permit use on or off
track. Built on a basic truck frame, the outfit is equipped with steel-cord tires, heavy-
duty battery, a maximum-output generator, hydraulic system from power take-off for
activating spray room, and a 3-in, 300-gpm at 16 psi refilling and recirculating pump.
On the truck frame is mounted a 3000-gal-capacity oval steel tank. An expanded-metal
platform was built over the entire top for handling chemicals through an ample man-
hole in the top. A 3-in perforated pipe was run the full length near the bottom of the
tank for jet agitation and recirculating from the pump. Mechanical agitators complete
end-to-end movement of the chemicals in the tank. The boom arrangements, permit
selective spraying over seven areas, controlled by a 12v electric solenoid valve operated
from push-button panels in the truck cab. For brush spraying a turret that swings from
one side of the truck to the other on a universal movement head is used. It has three
pressure trigger-operated guns with an adjustable pattern. Two power-operated hose
reels, one on each side, carry 100 ft of 1 in hose and adjustable pattern guns for off-track
-praying.
The use of weed-spray trucks has enabled railroads to bring under control its weed
problem both on main line and yard tracks because more flexible programs can be set
up, permitting spraying when conditions require. In many instances this has reduced
weed growth to the point that control can be attained by using low maintenance dosages
of chemicals, reducing the cost of the work. One truck driver and one operator are
needed to operate the spray equipment.
Numerous pickup trucks and jeeps have been provided with flanged wheels for on-
or off-track snow-plowing work, producing savings of 25 percent labor in terminals.
The economies in having equipment ready for emergencies in insolated places during
storms has not been ascertained at this time.
SUMMARY
In -ummarizing this report, on-off-track equipment, which can clear for trains in
moments, with the aid of portable setoffs when- parallel roads are not available, has
produced savings up to 50 percent. It can be used interchangeably tor bridge and build-
ing work anfl track work, providing increased efficiency and economies.
Thi> report is furnished :i- information, with the recommendation that the subject
be discontinued.
302 Economics of Railway Labor
Report on Assignment 8
Labor Economies to Be Derived from the Welding,
Distributing, Laying and Maintenance of
Continuous Welded Rail
W. J. Jones (chairman, subcommittee), J. F. Beaver, R. F. Bush, R. H. Carpenter,
J. A. Caywood, J. F. Chafin, P. A. Cosgrove, C. G. Davis, L. E. Donovan, W. M.
S. Dunn, R. L. Fox, R. R. Gunderson, V. C. Hanna, G. L. Harris, C. W. Owens,
T. D. Mason, R. L. Mays, R. W. Preisendefer, M. S. Reid, J. T. Ward, G. E.
Warfel, H. E. Wilson, F. R. Woolford, D. H. Yazell.
Your committee submits the following report on the labor economies to be derived
from the welding, distributing, laying and maintenance of continuous welded rail. This
study was made in collaboration with the Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail.
Foreword
Earlier reports dealing with the economics of welded rail appear in the Proceedings,
Vol. 54, 1953, pages 1170-1173, and Vol. 58, 1957, pages 1064-1066.
To obtain quantitative data essential to the preparation of this report, a question-
naire was sent to 35 committee members. There were 23 returns, representing 20 railroads.
Of those reporting, 65 percent use continuous welded rail. Most of the returns, however,
were statistically incomplete, indicating that not all users of welded rail really know
what it costs them to handle, lay or maintain continuous welded rail. In some cases it
was explained that the railroad reporting had not had welded rail in track, long enough,
or in sufficient quantity, to provide meaningful information. Yet, there is ample evidence
to show that labor economies to be derived from the use of welded rail are real, and
relatively substantial, even if such economies cannot be stated precisely, on an industry-
wide basis, in this report.
General
The returns to the questionnaire contained miscellaenous information which should
be of general interest to anyone making a study of the economics of welded rail.
Selected pertinent items follow:
Approximately one-half the using railroads get their rail welded by contract, off
property. Use of the gas pressure method outnumbers the electric method two to one,
but the trend is toward the electric. Actually, beginning in 1958, a majority of rail welded
annually has been by the electric-flash butt process. New rail (high carbon, silicon, and
alloy steels), as well as second-hand rail, are weldable by either process.
The length of finished welded rail varies among railroads from a few hundred feet
to 2400 ft, with 1440 ft still by far the most common length. At least one railroad field
welds 1440-ft ribbons together. There is no minimum length of rail used in welding,
such length being governed by the "shorts" supplied by the mill.
Welded rail is laid on tangents and light curves, generally up to 3 deg. A few rail-
roads lay continuous welded rail on 6-deg curves, with one road reporting no curvature
restriction. Transposing welded rail on curves presents no unusual problem.
Economics of Railway Labor 303
Welding
Of all computable savings associated with the use of welded rail, the initial savings
are the quickest and simmplest to determine. Furthermore, they are probably the most
accurate. Since they represent the difference in cost of a weld and the joint assembly
replaced, it might be argued that, in the strictest sense of the term, there are no labor
economies to be realized from the sheer act of welding. For the purpose of this assign-
ment, however, your committee considers the initial savings as a credit to labor, since
labor makes up the largest part of the cost of producing a weld and is controllable.
Obviously, the initial savings are not the same for all railroads, due to the differ-
ences in rail sections, joint designs and welding costs. Reported values of joints installed
ranged from $11.34 to $15.75, while welding costs varied from $5.04 to $14.50, with an
unweighted average of $10.32. Correlating welding costs and joint costs, savings were
calculated to be as much as $7.00 or more per weld. We can reasonably expect that
these economies will become even greater as material prices increase on account of wage
push-ups and welding costs decrease through improved welding techniques.
Distributing
Handling continuous welded rail by use of specially equipped cars permits welded
rail to be disrtibuted faster, safer and more economically than conventional rail.
Originally, single-tiered cars carrying twelve 1440-ft strings were the universal design.
Now. multitiered cars of greater rail carrying capacity are commonplace, as it is recog-
nized that labor savings are approximately directly proportional to the number of
welded rails in the load.
Unloading the first pair of strings usually takes 20-30 min ; subsequent pairs half
this time. According to the information received, welded rail can be disrtibuted with 45
to 50 percent fewer man-hours than consumed in distributing 39-ft lengths. All respond-
ents were in very close agreement regarding comparative rail unloading costs and the
extent of labor-reduction possibilities. But wide disagreement appeared, between rail-
roads, in regard to how much labor was used in unloading welded rail, ranging from
JS to 150 man-hours per mile.
Laying
Virtually the same equipment and labor organization arc engaged in laying either
welded rail or conventional rail. The replies indicate that the cost of laying is about
the same in either case, but the extreme variances reported cast doubt upon their reli-
ability. Consequently, no cost figures are given, to prevent misleading conclusions being
drawn.
Maintenance
Maintenance savings were furnished by only three roads. Others explained that they
have not had welded rail in service long enough to produce dependable data. Based
<>n information received, a maintenance saving of around S200 per mile per year is
indicated.
Other Economic Factors
Other economic factors commented on in return- to the questionnaire dealt with
additional rail anchors and bigger ballast section requirement-, reduced joint mainte-
J04 Economics of Railway Labor
nance (cross slotting, rail end welding, cropping, bolt tightening, etc.), increased tie life,
reduced spotting, extended surfacing cycles, reduced hazard of rail end failures, smoother
riding track and decreased equipment wear.
CONCLUSIONS
Real and attractive labor economies result from the use of welded rail, and such
economies are being enjoyed by an increasing number of American railroads. It is
expected that future welds will become better in quality, lower in cost. Economies from
welding will become more substantial as material prices rise and welding costs drop
on account of technological developments.
It is recommended that no further studies be made on this subject until continuous
welded rail has been in track long enough for maintenance cost data to be meaningful.
Further, your committee urges the using railroads to develop significant statistics toward
the end of keeping the railroad industry informed.
Report of Committee 27 — Maintenance of Way
Work Equipment
R. S. Radspinner,
Chairman
R. W. Railey,
Vice Chairman
R. M. Johnson, Secretary
S. E. Tracy
J. O. Elliott
H. E. Keniston
L. E. Conner
M. E. Kerns
R. O. Cassini
R. M. Baldock
T. S. Bean
R. E. Berggren
R. E. Buss
L. B. Cann, Jr.
G. R. Collier
B. E. Cors
D. E. Cowell
J. W. Cum mings
A. C. Danks, Jr.
K. J. De Camp
V. L. Emal
E. H. Fisher
W. T. Friedline
Wm. Glavin
H. D. Hahn
S. E. Haines, Jr.
\V. T. Hammond
E. W. Hodgkins, Jr.
Haynie Hornbuckle
R. A. Hostetter
X. W. Hutchison
\V. R. Jacobs
R. K. Johnson
\V. F. Kohl
\V. E. Kropp
Jack Largent
William Lenco
C. F. Lewis
H. J. Lieser
H. F. Longhi.it
W. M. Lutts
G. J. Lyon
C. E. McEntee
C. F. Montague
A. \V. Munt
V. W. Oswalt, Sr.
H. C. Pottsmith
J. E. Reynolds
T. R. Rigsby
J. W. Risk
G. E. Roberts
F. E. Short
F. N. Snyder
M. M. Stansbury
J. E. Sunderland, Jr.
M. C. Taylor
T. H. Taylor
H. A. Thyng
C. R. Turner
Alfred Wisman. Jr.
F. E. Yockey
G. L. Zippikian
Committee
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, C"iii-
mittee 27.
To The American Railway Engineering Association:
Your Committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Study was continued, hut no report is submitted this year
1. (a) Revision of Handbook of Instructions for Care and Operation of Main-
tenance of Way Equipment.
Progress report, including recommended additions pag<
improvements to be made to existing work equipment.
Committee is assembling information to be included in report lor 191
3. Standardization of parts and accessories for work equipment.
No report this year. Studies are being completed on hydraulic tanks and
their component parts. Other systems are to be studied for the develop
ment of specifications and Manual material.
4. Reclaiming and extending sendee life of machine parts by metallizing,
plating and welding.
Final report, presented as information pag
305
306 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
5. Maintaining, testing and repairing hydraulic equipment and other com-
ponents used on work equipment.
Final report, presented as information page 316
6. Procurement and stocking of parts and materials for the repair of work
equipment.
Final report, presented as information page 324
S. Equipment for the control and performance of jacking in surfacing opera-
tions.
Additional research, including studies of new equipment, is being conducted.
Final report will be presented in 1963,
The Committee on Maintenance of Way Work Equipment,
R. S. Radspinner, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 575, December 1962.
Report on Assignment 1 (a)
Revision of Handbook of Instructions for Care
and Operation of Maintenance of Way
Equipment
S. E. Tracy (chairman, sbcommittee) , T. S. Bean, R. E. Berggren, R. O. Cassinj, D. E.
Cowell, A. C Danks, J. O. Elliott, W. T. Hammond.
Investigation has developed that four more machines now have sufficient distribution
and use to warrant writing instructions covering their care and operation. These
machines are:
1. Ballast Distributor — Cleaner
2. Tie Spacer— Type 2
3. Air Compressors — Rotary Type
4. Tie Tamper — Multi-Tool, Mechanical, Vibratory
It is recommended that these instructions be included in the next edition of the
Handbook.
BALLAST DISTRIBUTOR-CLEANER
1963
DESCRIPTION: A self-propelled, four-wheel, track-mounted unit
consisting of a diesel engine driving an ain brake compressor and
three single pumps (three double pumps with cleaning attachment),
for hydraulic propulsion through 6-speed transmission, two hy-
draulically driven bucket conveyors, and hydraulic cylinders for ver-
tical control of conveyors and ballast hopper. Adjustable scoops
funnel ballast into bucket conveyors which deposit this material in a
1^2-cu-yd-capacity ballast hopper equipped with ports to properly
position ballast and vertical control to obtain desired depth. Controls
are located in a cab for one-man operation. (Cleaning attachment
includes, in addition, two vibrating screens actuated by hydraulic
motors, and a hydraulically driven reversible dirt conveyor belt) .
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 307
USE: To pick up new or exisitng ballast from center-ditch and
shoulder and place in proper position and depth for tamping. To
dress and equalize ballast behind surfacing operation. (To clean
ballast and convey dirt to berm if equipped with clenaing attach-
ment).
APPROXIMATE WEIGHT: 24,000 lb
26,8501b (with cleaner)
DIMENSIONS: Height: 9 ft 0 in (working), 12 ft 0 in (traveling)
Length: 18 ft 0 in
Width: 10 ft 0 in (conveyors retracted)
12 ft 0 in (conveyors working)
SPEEDS: 6, 18 and 30 mph (traveling)
800 to 1500 ft per hr (working)
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SPEED: Engine, 1800
rpm (under load)
CAPACITIES: Ballast hopper: 44 cu ft (standard machine)
33 cu ft (with cleaner)
Hydraulic reservoir: 50 gal
Diesel fuel tank: 50 gal
Sanders: 250 lb each
CARE AND OPERATION:
3.2.50 Daily inspection shall be made of the following:
a Engine water coolant.
b Crankcase oil level.
c Hydraulic oil tank level.
d Air brake compressor oil level.
e Engine air niters.
f Sand level in sanders.
Hydraulic System
3.2.51 Sixty-gallon tank should be filled to sight gage, or 50 gal
of approved hydraulic oil.
3.2.52 Use SAE 10 for temperatures between zero and 30 deg;
SAE 20 for 30-70 deg, and SAE 30 for 70 to 100 deg F.
Pressure Adjustments
3.2.53 Shim relief valve at rear of valve bank to 1200 psi.
3.2.54 Adjust all other relief valves to 1150 psi.
General
3.2.55 Valves in pump intake lines must la- open before starting.
3.2.56 Oil filters should be cleaned when chancing oil or more
often when necessary.
3.2.57 Oil tank vent filter shall lie (leaned weekly.
308 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
3.2.58 Check frequently for loose connections, leaking motor
seals and cylinder packing, and defective hoses.
Transmissions
3.2.59 Fill to proper level with SAE 90 lubricant
Brakes
3.2.60 Check oil level in compressor.
3.2.61 Check belt tension daily.
3.2.62 Keep brake shoes in adjustment to prevent over-travel of
brake diaphragms.
3.2.63 Set parking brake when machine is unattended.
Conveyors
3.2.64 Hard surface or cutting edge of buckets should be renewed
in place on machine by electric welding.
3.2.65 Slack in conveyor chain is taken up at bottom of frame,
and should measure 4J4 to Sy2 in from underside of conveyor frame
at center pin. When take-up exceeds 4 in, one link should be removed.
3.2.66 Keep lower idler sprocket in line with chain. Special tool
furnished for attaching buckets.
3.2.67 Replace wear plates on top side of conveyor frame before
chain wears frame.
Ballast Scoops
3.2.68 Replace wear plates when worn to protect scoops.
Hopper and Chute
3.2.69 Replace wear plates when worn to protect hopper and
chutes.
Lubrication
3.2.70 Apply grease to conveyor bearing, drive chain idler sprock-
ets and hopper guides daily.
3.2.71 Pack journals with wheel bearing grease yearly.
3.2.72 Remove plug and grease transmission jack shaft pillow
blocks yearly.
TIE SPACER— TYPE 2
1963
DESCRIPTION: A self-propelled, four-wheel, track-mounted
unit, hydraulically operated, with independently operating tong as-
semblies, one on each side of the machine. The tong assemblies are
lowered, clamped and raised hydraulically. The spacer is moved by
a hydraulic cylinder connected to an electric rail brake for tie spac-
ing. It is powered by an air cooled gasoline-powered unit, with
an automotive type transmission used to connect the hydraulic mo-
tor to the chain drive axle. Brakes are electric-rail-brake type.
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 309
USE: Spacing ties and correcting slewed tie conditions ahead ol
power jacks or hand jacks in a surfacing gang, where the track
has been skeletonized.
WEIGHT: 8000 lb
LENGTH: 16 ft 0 in. HEIGHT: S ft 10, WIDTH: 8 ft .V/i in
TRAVEL SPEED: 25 mph
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SPEED: Engine, 1800 rpm
GENERATOR CAPACITY: 36 v. 20 amp, 750 w
CAPACITIES: Hydraulic system: 30 gal
Pump pressure: 800 psi
CARE AND OPERATION:
Power Unit
3.30.30 The operator must make daily inspection of:
a Crankcase oil level
b Hydraulic tank oil level
Hydraulic System
3.30.31 Check oil-level sight gage on oil reservoir and keep filled
to middle of sight gage, or as specified by manufacturer.
3.30.32 Hydraulic oil should be changed before each season.
3.30.33 Daily inspection should be made of all hose and connec-
tions and defects promptly corrected.
Brakes
3.30.34 Emergency hand brake must be set when machine is
unattended.
3.30.35 Brake clamping devices are in proper adjustment when
there is y» in between wear strip and top of rail.
Transmission
3.30.36 Keep filled to proper operating level, use SAE 90 below
32 deg and SAE 140 above 32 deg F.
Lubrication
3.30.37 See that machine is properlj lubricated in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations.
Traveling
3.30.38 Make sure that spacer tongs are secured in the raised
position.
3.30.39 Do not apply the electric brake while traveling at or near
the maximum authorized speed.
Electric Generator
3.30.40 The generator should be kept clean.
310 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
AIR COMPRESSORS— ROTARY TYPE
1963
CARE AND OPERATION:
General
3.5.25 Operators and others concerned in the operation of this
type of air compressor shall be governed by the applicable rules
covering Air Compressors — All Types.
3.5.26 After engine has stopped, this type of compressor must
not stand idle with pressure in the separator-receiver.
Starting Engine
3.5.27 Before starting the engine, be governed by the following;
a Open all service and relief valves to relieve pressure in
the separator-receiver.
b Close all service and relief valves immediately after
engine starts to build up full air pressure and provide proper
lubrication.
c Set manual throttle controls for fast idle and leave in
that position until engine and compressor have reached
operating temperatures.
d When the above temperatures have been reached, re-
lease and lock out manual controls, thereby permitting auto-
matic controls to govern engine speed.
e If unit has clutch between engine and compressor, the
engine must be stopped before clutch is engaged to prevent
damage to sliding vanes in the compressor.
Stopping the Engine
3.5.28 When stopping the engine, or if it stops for some reason,
open all service and relief valves immediately.
Safety Devices
3.5.29 Safety valves on separator-receiver shall be operated by
hand every day to insure that it is in operating condition.
3.5.30 Shutdown devices on these units and the power plant which
drives them shall not be disconnected or otherwise made ineffective.
3.5.31 If unit is shut down by such devices, determine cause and
correct it before attempting to operate the unit.
Connecting the Header
3.5.32 This type of compressor must not be connected to a com-
mon header with any other units of any type, or to any other
source of compressed air unless an approved type of check valve is
connected between the header and the compressor.
3.5.33 This type of compressor should not be operated against
zero or low line pressures, except as follows:
3.5.34 When used on pump-up jobs, partially close the service
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 311
valves to maintain a minimum of 60 psi until line pressure is equal
to this pressure, after which the service valve may be fully opened.
Lubrication
3.5.35 It is important that only an approved type <>! oil he used
in the separator-receiver.
Filters — Strainers
3.5.36 Filters and strainers should be cleaned or replaced at regu-
lar intervals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5.37 The secondary oil separator element should be replaced
alter one vear of service.
TIE TAMPER— TYPE 2, MULTI-TOOL,
MECHANICAL, VIBRATORY
1963
DESCRIPTION: A self-propelled, four-wheel, track-mounted unit
consisting of a diesel engine power unit for propulsion and drive
of air compressor and hydraulic pumps. Tamper consists of an in-
dependent unit over each rail forward of the front axle on which
are mounted four hydraulic cylinders which support two tamping
tools each. Mechanical vibration by eccentric action is imparted to
the tamping tools. A pilot air system provides control of the ma-
chine's hydraulic functions. Machine has rail clamps and four hy-
draulic jacks for setting off. The controls are for one-man operation.
A four-wheel hydraulic brake system and a cable-operated hand
brake are provided.
USE: As a production tamper, a spot tamper, or a jack tamper.
WEIGHT: 31,000 lb
DIMENSIONS: Length, 21 ft 4 in
Height, 8 ft 10 in
Width, 8 ft 8 in
TRAVEL SPEED: First gear, 2.74 mph
Second gear, 5.04 "
Third gear, 8.82 "
Fourth gear, 15.10 "
Fifth gear, 23.95 "
MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDED SPEED: Endue. 1700 rpm
I OPACITIES: Fuel tank. 45^ ga]
Tampinc units, 23 gal hydraulic oil each ride
Raising and lowering system, 54.4 nal hydraulic oil
312 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
CARE AND OPERATION
Starting Power Unit
3.31.100 Before starting engine, the operator must make inspec-
tion of:
a Engine water coolant.
b Crankcase oil level.
c Oil level in the three hydraulic oil tanks.
Hydraulic Systems
3.31.101 Reservoirs must be kept filled to operating levels with
approved hydraulic oil.
3.31.102 Oil must be changed once a year, or season.
3.31.103 Daily inspection must be made of all piping and hose
connections and all defects corrected promptly.
Brakes
3.31.104 Emergency brake must be set when machine is unat-
tended, or off track.
Transmission and Gear Boxes
3.31.105 Keep filled to proper level with SAE 90 gear lubricant.
Tamping Head
3.31.106 Safety suspension pins of the tamping units must be
positively secured when machine is in traveling position, or when
men are performing work under the tamping heads.
3.31.107 Tamping heads should be in raised locked position when
traveling, or when machine is being set off track.
Set-Off
3.31.108 Safety pins must be inserted when machine is being set
off the track.
3.31.109 Set-off rail pedestals must be properly blocked to prevent
machine from tipping.
3.31.110 When stored, the machine hand brake must be set and
machine secured to set-off rails with chain and locked.
Lubrication
3.31.111 Manufacturer's lubrication chart outlining points for
lubrication at intervals of 5 hr, 10 hr, 20 hr, 50 hr, 100 hr, and
200 hr must be followed.
While Tamping
3.31.112 Operators, and others, shall keep clear of the work heads
while machine is tamping.
3.31.113 All belt guards and other protective shields must be in
place before tamping is commenced after machine repairs.
3.31.114 Do not actuate tamping units with safety latch removed
when machine is on set-off.
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 313
Cleanliness
3.31.115 Employees assigned to operate this machine must keep
it as clean as consistent with the work being performed in order that
leaks may be detected and bearing temperatures noted to prevent
loss in production speed and premature failures.
Report on Assignment 4
Reclaiming and Extending Service Life of Machine
Parts by Metallizing, Plating and Welding
L. E. Conner (chairman, subcommittee), H. E. Keniston, R. M. Baldock, J. W. Cum-
mings, V. L. Emal, H. Hornbuckle, R. K. Johnson, C F. Lewis, C F. Montague,
T. R. Rigsby, J. W. Risk, F. N. Snyder, F. E. Yockey, G. L. Zipperian.
This is a final report, presented as information.
While several processes or methods are used in the reclamation of various work
equipment machine parts, the three most commonly used are welding, metallizing and
plating. Quite a number of railroads use one or more of these processes in their reclama-
tion work and report considerable savings as a result.
Spray metallizing was first used more than 20 years ago, and the method of appli-
cation has progressively improved to the extent that today very satisfactory results are
obtained. Proper preparation of the surface prior to metallizing has always been
stressed in order to insure a permanent bond.
Industrial hard chrome plating of various parts has been in use for a number of
years, and this process has been found to be economical and satisfactory, and materially
increases the service life of the reclaimed parts many times over.
The welding process has been in use for reclaiming cracked or broken parts of
various machines and castings for just about as long as the art of welding has been in
existence. Welding has also been used extensively in building up and restoring worn parts.
Metallizing
About 25 years ago, a process for reclaiming certain worn parts was developed
which involved the use of coil wire fed through a gun, melted by oxygen and acetylene
gas, and blown onto the part by compressed air. This is known as metallizing by the
spray method. Since the original development of this process rapid strides have been
made in the further development of the equipment and materials used in the process.
It is now possible to obtain metals of almost any desired analysis for application by
this -pray method. In addition to solid wires, there lias also been developed around
this basic principal a group of metal powders in various screen sizes to be sprayed on a
part to the desired dimensions. After the powder is sprayed, it i- bonded to the part by
heating to the diffusion point with an oxyacetylene torch, or heating in a furnace. There
are several grades and analyses of this powder available, primarily of high alloys con-
sisting principally of tungsten carbide aggregate, nickel, chromium, carbon, silicon, boron.
copper and molybdenum.
Particular care must be used in preparing ;i part to be reclaimed 1 > > metal spraying.
There arc two methods of doing this. One involves, first, the reduction of the area ol
the part, leaving a threaded surface, next, shol cleaning the surface with small steel shot,
314 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
then spraying with commercially available molybdenum to a thickness of 0.001 to
0.002 in. On highly stressed parts, reduction in part size must be held to a minimum.
\ good machine finish sprayed with a 0.001- to 0.002-in layer of molybdenum will
usually give a Rood mechanical bond; however, the threaded method is preferred.
When the metallizing spray method is used in the reclamation of crank shafts, it is
entirely satisfactory for babbitt bearings; however, when copper-lead or aluminum bear-
ings are used it is necessary to seal the sprayed metal with a high temperature wax or
plastic material. Plastic material, because of its high melting point, is preferred.
When the metallizing method is used to reclaim piston rods or internal parts subject
to high pressure, as in hydraulic systems, the sealing of these parts with the plastic
material must be done to prevent pressures working behind the sprayed material and
damaging it. Parts subjected to impact should not be metallized.
Chrome Plating
Many parts used in work equipment can be reclaimed by the use of hard chrome
plating. Chrome plating will not only reclaim the part and make it serviceable, but in
practically all instances where chrome plating is suitable as a reclamation process, the
service life of the part will be increased from a minimum of two up to five or six times
its original service life.
The following is a partial list of work equipment parts suitable for reclamation by
plating: hydraulic cylinder piston rods, pneumatic cylinders and pistons, paving breakers,
tamping tools and impact wrenches, worn surfaces on shafting, bearing fits on shafting,
guide bars and shafts subjected to sliding motions, and gasoline and diesel engine crank
shafts of all sizes.
Hard chromium, as differentiated from decorative chromium, is applied for func-
tional reasons, regardless of thickness. If a 0.00005 -in deposit is applied over a part
with a hardness of 63 Rockwell C scale, then it is a hard film only because the base
metal is hard. If this same thickness is applied over a part with an unhardened surface,
then this coating of chromium will not be any harder than the base. If, however, a
deposit of 0.0015 to 0.002 in is applied over this same unhardened part, a really hard
surface will be obtained. In short, a deposit over 0.001 in thick is essential before
chromium will assume its true hardness characteristics when used over unhardened base
metals, whereas, over a hardened base, such thickness is not necessary because of the
substantial backing provided.
Chromium plate is hard and dense, has a lower coefficient of friction than any other
metal, gives good corrosion resistance to most materials, and has good antigalling proper-
ties as long as it is not used against itself. Despite its hardness, it should not be used
as a general substitute for hardening but only when properly engineered for this pur-
pose. Chromium's main attribute is its low coefficient of friction and should be the main
reason for fitting it into most programs.
One of the most frequent and successful uses of hard chromium is on shafts of all
sizes and descriptions. Both new and old shafts can be conditioned by depositing 0.005
to 0.006 in of chromium and regrinding to size, leaving a residual thickness of 0.003 in.
Where salvage operations warrant, it is not unusual to apply 0.060 to 0.090 in of
chromium and regrind.
Applying deposits up to as much as % in thick are now standard procedures in the
salvage of diesel shafts. Some roads are now first applying a heavy nickel undercoat
followed by machining, and then finishing up the last 0.005 to 0.010 in with chromium,
thereby eliminating the heavy pitted conditions that can occur in extra-heavy deposits.
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 315
One of hard chromium's little-discussed attributes is its ability to dampen vibra-
tion. This is more useful in bearing seats in critical operations that must be vibration
free.
Most parts to be hard chrome plated have been either machined or ground, which
means that cold-working stresses and strains are usually present. These should be
alleviated by a heat treatment prior to putting on the hard, brittle chromium deposit
that will greatly accentuate the stress factors. The proper stress-relieving temperature
should be determined by the type and hardness of the metal used in the part. If the
part is made of an unhardened material, then .<50 deg F can be used as a good stress-
relieving temperature. The time of bake can be determined by the cross section of mate-
rial in the part being handled. For example, a small part, say J4 by 2 in, can be uni-
formly heated through very quickly, whereas a large shaft requires up to several hours
before proper heating for the required stress relief. After plating, almost everything
that has a hard chrome deposit of any thickness should be baked at 350 deg F to remove
the occluded hydrogen from the deposit.
Welding
There are several methods of welding by which work equipment parts may be re-
claimed. The oxyacetylene process and the several electric processes, i.e., flux-coated stick
electrodes, hand-held semi-automatic units, submerged arc welding, and inert gas shielded
open arc are among the methods most frequently used.
One or more of these processes may be used in hard facing, or building up and
hard-facing track rails, crawler pads, rollers, sprockets, buckets, bucket teeth, cutting
plates, digging picks, cones, tamper bits, etc.
Many machine parts, such as shafting, turntable rollers, and castings can be re-
claimed by the use of one of the welding processes. However, care should be used when
attempting to reclaim alloy heat-treated parts to keep temperature of part as low as
possible. In some cases low temperature welding rods may be preferable.
A large variety of welding rods is available today, and almost any analysis can be
obtained.
Summary
.Many parts u>ed in work equipment can be reclaimed by one of the three processes
described in this report. Normally these parts may then be put back in service with a
greatly extended service life, in some instances, with a longer service life than when the
part was new.
An investigation should be made by the supervisor or foreman in charge to develop
the most practical and economical method of reclaiming the part involved. In most
instances a part may be reclaimed at a considerable savings over the cost of a new
part; however, there are times when it would be more economical to buy a new part.
The cost and the availability of the new material or COSl of down-time of the machine
on (vhich the part is used would determine whether or not it should be reclaimed or
replai ed.
M6 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
Report on Assignment 5
Maintaining, Testing and Repairing Hydraulic
Equipment and Other Components Used
on Work Equipment
M. E. Kerns (chairman, subcommittee), R. M. Johnson, S. E. Tracy, L. E. Conner,
R. E. Buss, G. R. Collier, K. J. DeCamp, E. VV. Hodgkins, N. W. Hutchinson,
Wm. Lenco.
This is a final report, submitted as information.
In recent years the use of fluid power for railroad work equipment has greatly
increased. Hydraulic systems permit the application of power and integration of machine
functions in a compact, economical manner.
We are now confronted with a maintenance lag that usually follows the introduction
of a new application. The design engineer has found the best solution to his problem,
but the maintenance problems are just coming to the foreground. They can be identified
and acted upon by taking positive steps in the direction of —
(1) Detection
(2) Prevention
The following is a discussion of these steps.
DETECTION
How do we detect the factors that affect the ability of a hydraulically operated
machine to do work?
The visible problems can be located by observation. When the problem is invisible
or obscure, the faulty component or components can be found if flow, pressure and
temperature can be measured by test at every point in a hydraulic circuit.
Such a test can be performed with a portable hydraulic circuit tester. This tool
incorporates in one enclosure flow, pressure and temperature gages, safety devices and
a manual valve to apply a load as desired. Two types of these units are available:
(1) One model employs a fixed orifice. In this type of portable test unit, a pres-
sure drop across the selected orifice is created by the flow that is offered to it.
This pressure drop, in turn, is calibrated on a gage in terms of gallons per
minute with accuracies to ± 3 percent. There are no continuously moving
parts.
(2) The second model employs a hydraulic motor. In this type of portable test
unit, flow is offered to a hydraulic motor, and the varying speed of the motor
shaft is read by a tachometer calibrated in gallons per minute.
(See Fig. 1)
Keep in mind that hydraulic horsepower is equal to flow times pressure.
In a hydraulic circuit the aim is to transmit all available fluid to the work end
of the circuit at the demand pressure. Temperature affects this aim by increasing or
decreasing the ease with which the fluid flows. However, fluids being lazy, when the
resistance to flow is less than demand pressure, as much of the flow as is able will slide
past the clearances that are open to it. As wear increases initial component clearances,
more fluid bypasses.
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
317
Fig. 1.
The "Supply System Test" and "Tee Test" are the basic methods for determining
the loss of horsepower from internal component slippage. The use of this portable tesi
equipment will add to the operating; efficiency of those concerned with machine main-
tenance. It will:
(1) Eliminate unnecessary machine downtime.
(2) Reduce the amount of service time on trouble-shooting; calls, particularly
when there are considerable distances involved between the central shop and
the machine location.
(3) Eliminate the necessity of trial and error component replacement when
hydraulic system problems exist.
It is important to remember when setting up a hydraulic system maintenance pro-
gram based on gages instead of guesses, that one can not depend on memory.
(1) Machines must be analyzed and equipped with suitable fittings to enable
the user to readily connect portable test equipment and perform his test.
Manufacturers should be required to incorporate test "Tees" in their hydrauhi
sj ^tems.
(2) Adequate records must be maintained in a central location showing test
methods and ratings of hydraulic system and components
318 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
(3) When faulty units are located, removed and repaired, establish a shop pro-
cedure for checking the quality of repair before returning the component to
the shelf.
Such a program planned properly will facilitate trouble-shooting and preventive
maintenance tests both in the field and in the shop.
The matter of field testing has been covered above. In shop testing the same prin-
ciples, using portable test equipment, apply when checking out a hydraulic system on
the machine.
Just as important in completing the component test cycle is bench test equipment.
When a component is not mounted on the machine, and its condition is not positivelj
established, either before or after repair, a test bench is required to confirm whether it is
in first-rate condition.
The test bench incorporates the necessary horsepower, mountings and connections
to realistically operate the component in terms of flow, pressure and temperature in its
simulated function on the machine. (See Fig. 2)
There are two forms of hydraulic test bench:
(1) A universal bench which incorporates facilities for testing pumps, valves,
cylinders and pressure switches as well as motors. One of the pumps on this
unit can be used as a load pump. Thus the test bench can be a dynamometer
and motors can be accurately tested. The universal bench includes its own
instrumentation with integral manometer, pressure gages and load valves.
(2) A barrel bench using a portable tester as the instrumentation and loading
device. This unit cannot be used to test motors.
PREVENTION
Because the fluid in a hydraulic system functions both as a lubricant and the means
of transferring power, it follows that the major maintenance efforts should be directed
toward the fluid. The fluid used should, therefore, be carefully considered. Its quality
will have an over-riding effect on all factors of good hydraulic system maintenance.
Poor fluid condition is most commonly caused by water and dirt. Generally, when
water exists the color of the oil will become milky and the water should be removed.
There are three hydraulic system factors that, when present, will help to reduce
problems from water:
(1) Water is evaporating at all temperatures, and at normal operating tempera-
tures (120 to 140 deg F) it will tend to steam off.
(2) Fluids with de-emulsifiers wiil settle the water to the bottom of the reservoir
where it can be drained off.
(3) Filters with absorptive-type elements will contribute to the removal of water.
Dirt, being more frequent, is the more serious problem. A large percentage of system
inefficiency is caused by wear from dirt particles suspended in the fluid. The presence
of dirt results in filter, strainer, separator, reservoir or air breather problems. The specific
benefits and pitfalls of hydraulic system dirt control are realized.
In hydraulic filtration we speak of filters, strainers and separators. The difference is
in the degree they perform their job. A strainer is usually rated in terms of mesh. A
filter is usually rated in terms of microns. A separator usually has a quantitative rather
than qualitative rating.
M a i ntenance of Way Work Equipment
319
1
!
» !
Mag|i
^r^
|
.
!
9 *
ism
gfi
J — J -
*
Fig. 2.
Most hydraulic systems presently have a strainer attached to the suction line with
a probable 100-mesh rating when used with petroleum Quids. They should be sized to
strain more than double the intake capacity of the pump. On occasions the suction
strainer will be eliminated. The reason for this omission is usually that the manufacturer
or user has found that clogged strainers have caused pump failure from cavitation. The
pressure drop in the pump intake line should not exceed S in of mercury al any time.
A recent development in suction-line protection is the magnetic suction separator.
Where medium to heavy dirt loading make- the conventional suction strainer undesir-
able, these separators provide a "superhighway" from the tank to the pump. The "nuts
and bolts" are kept out of the system by the outer screen, and the magnets remove all
of the magnetic particles from the tluid regardless ol size. Magnets are also available for
standard suction strainer-.
Note: Pump cavitation problem ran also be the result of too Small a "Suction
Line"; atl abrupt bend or crease; Of a hole in the Miction line of loose titling* causing
.V20 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
ait entrainment. Still another cause of pump cavitation is the change to fire-resistant
fluids, which have different viscosity indexes and usually higher specific gravities than
petroleum-base fluids. Most manufacturers of these fluids recommend a strainer that is
more coarse than 100 mesh. It is advisable to consult with the fluid manufacturer when
such a changeover is contemplated.
The reservoir also has its part in fluid conditioning. It is usually designed to prevent
the entry of foreign matter with the following specific features as outlined by J.I.C.
specifications: (1) breather holes protected with an air cleaner of sufficient capacity,
and (2) a proper-size strainer to help clean the fluid when the reservoir is filled.
Experience shows that strainers and properly designed reservoirs are frequently not
enough to insure satisfactory hydraulic system life even when they arc regularly in-
spected and cleaned. Dirt continues to be circulated throughout the system, wearing the
hydraulic components. All of it is not selected by the strainer and after having settled
in the reservoir it can be jarred back into the fluid.
This leads to three questions regarding dirt in hydraulic systems:
(1) Where does it come from?
(2) How much dirt is harmful?
(3) How large are the particles that cause wear?
Work equipment hydraulic power systems are commonly operating in a dirty
atmosphere, some considerably worse than others. Although hydraulic systems are
"closed", they are not impervious to dirt. Dirt will find its way into the system from
the outside. In addition, the moving parts will manufacture their own dirt. Each of these
dirt particles also has the potential of creating more dirt through abrasive action.
How much dirt can be harmful? — y> of 1 percent by volume is a lot. For example,
after initial machine cleaning one might expect to find that in one month's service a 25
micro filter element with 1250 sq in of filtering area had collected 2 oz of dirt. This is
sufficient to affect the performance of the system.
The next consideration should be what size contaminant is harmful. In a vane
pump, vane-to-cam-ring clearance is about equal to the thickness of an oil film and
rotor-to-face-plate clearances are approximately 0.001 in. Common valve clearances,
spool to housing, run 0.0002 in.
So, in determining what size of dirt particle is harmful, consideration should be
given to:
(1) The particle that is larger than the mating part tolerances, which may jam
between them.
(2) The particle that is smaller than mating part tolerances but larger than oil
film thickness, which may score the mating surfaces.
(3) The particles that are smaller than oil film thickness. When this size of par-
ticle is present in sufficient quantities the oil film will no longer contain all
of them. The result is a mixture of fluid and dirt that acts on the mating
surfaces like a honing compound.
Still another factor in the consideration of dirt and its effect on hydraulic systems
is the formation of sludge. Certain kinds of solids will cause the hydraulic fluid to
oxidize and form sludge, resulting in sticky valves and corroded components.
There are three ways of filtering hydraulic systems —
(1) Continuous full flow filtration in which all of the oil in a hydraulic system
flows through the filter.
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 321
Continuous bypass filtration in which a percentage of the total oil in a
hydraulic system flows through the filter.
Maintenance cycle filtration in which a portable unit (Fig. 3) is connected to
the hydraulic system on a scheduled basis and the fluid is filtered for a given
period of time.
NoU : Maintenance cycle filtration is very applicable to hydraulic system cleanup
after a machine has been rebuilt and before its return to duty. This will eliminate ma
chine chips, iceld scale and other dirt introduced during the rebuild.
At this point a caution should be put forth regarding filtration on the "suction
line." Thi> should be avoided unless the filter is supercharged with another pump to
prevent the change of cavitation.
Filter elements used in a hydraulic system should not have adsorptive properties.
This type of element will remove chemical additives placed in the oil for better fluid
qualities. Filter elements of the mechanical or absorptive type are recommended. These
element- fall into three general categories:
(1) Surface elements which use an exposed surface as the filter medium, such as
metal cloth.
Depth elements which use the thickness of a mass as the filter medium, such
as felt.
(3) Combination elements which use the characteristics of both surface and depth
elements, such as pleated paper or combination surface and depth media.
A recent addition to element design is the use of magnets. They can be added to
any of the basic categories of elements mentioned above and will improve the quan-
titative and qualitative rating of any given element in the removal of ferrous metal.
Maintenance of filters is an old problem. If hydraulic filters are to remain effective
they must be serviced properly. There seems to be no pattern as to how long an ele-
ment will collect dirt at an acceptable pressure drop. Element life in two machines
running -ide by side may be quite different.
The potential pressure build-up across a filter element is equal to the mechanical
-tren^th of the element, and this strength will vary for different elements. When this
point i? reached the element will collapse and either send its debris into the system or
block it. In addition, the pressure drop before element collapse may be high enough to
interfere with proper machine operation. For this reason any hydraulic system filler
should incorporate a differential relief valve which will bypass the fluid at a sufficiently
low prc-.-ure drop to avoid system interference.
The question still remains — when to change element---' This can be solved in two
wa\ -. First, changeover can be set up on a schedule that is established from experience
record-; or second, "dirt alarms" may be incorporated in the filter housing or remotely
mounted to indicate when the filter element needs changing. These "dirt alarm-" operate
when the pressure drop across the element reaches an established figure and indicate
by the movement of a spinner or an arm. They can also be arranged to activate an
electric -witch which will light a light or even -hut down a motor. "Dirt alarm-" are
becoming more popular. They tell the machine operator when the filter needs to be
changed and also allow tor easj supervisors control. It i- better to mount them where
they are readily visible.
One caution on the use of indicator — thej are set to operate at a pressure drop
based •<--■ i -pecific SSU. When the Quid SSC i- higher than that on which their PS1
322
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
Fig. 3.
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 323
setting was based, such as on a cold morning, they may give a false indication !>ut will
reset when the fluid SSU falls to normal, provided the element does not need changing.
It is good practice to set the point of indication slightly under the pressure figure
at which it is desirable to change the filter element. This gives the operator a little lead
time to accomplish the change.
When selecting a filter, all the factors listed below should be considered:
(1) Flow in gallons per minute
(2) Allowable pressure drop
(3) Fluid viscosities
(4) Amount of dirt
(5) Element life
(6) Degree of filtration required
(7) Pressure requirements
Then choose a filter around these considerations that has sufficient area to give
reasonable element life within practical pressure drops. Keep in mind that all factors
(excepting line pressure) are interdependent and a decision with respect to one will affect
the other.
Flow
Pump output does not always give correct flow data for sizing filters. Return-line
filters are often the most economical selection, but watch for high flow rates back to
tank from:
(a) the large side of double-acting cylinders,
(b) single acting cylinder exhausting to tank at high speeds,
(c) combination of two or more circuits for some function of the machine,
(d) over-riding loads on hydraulic motors where high flow rates may result from
make up lines.
Pressure Drop
The pressure drop across the filter must be considered in the light of its effect on
other circuit components and system efficiency. For instance, motor shaft seals and
valve spool seals frequently will stand little or no back pressure and more frequently no
pressure surges. Return-line filters should be selected with this in mind. Back pressures
of less than 25 psi are frequently required.
Dirt Loading
Element life will vary widely with the amount of dirt already in or introduced into
the circuit. It is desirable to use a filter with a higher flow rating than apparently neces-
sary in order to have greater dirt capacity in the elements.
In any discussion of hydraulic-system maintenance, external leakage mu-t be eon
sidered. This condition usually resolves itself to a fit or fitting problem. Where pipe and
metal tubing are breaking, they should be replaced with flexible hose and fittings.
Manufacturers of work equipment should furnish parts books identifying' all com-
ponent parts of hydraulic systems, and all hydraulic circuits should be printed in color
showing pressures. To accomplish the desired results, however, another ingredient must
be added— Education. Without it the best of plans will go astray. It must penetrate.
to a satisfactory degree, all worker* and supervisory personnel involved in the business
hi operating and maintaining hydraulic equipment.
324 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
Report on Assignment 6
Procurement and Stocking of Parts and Materials
for the Repair of Work Equipment
R. O. Cassini (chairman, subcommittee), B. E. Cors, J. O. Elliot, N. W. Hutchison,
R. M. Johnson, S. H. Knight, G. S. Lyon, H. C. Pottsmith, J. W. Risk, M. M.
Stansbury, T. H. Taylor, C. R. Turner, Alfred Wisman, Jr.
This is a final report, submitted as information.
Of all the problems besetting maintenance of way officers, probably the most frus-
trating, costly and wasteful is to have a key high-production machine break down and
lay idle while efforts are made to secure replacement parts. Of course, the immediate
and absurd answer is to have two of everything. The reduction of this absurdity to the
practical limits dictated by experience and present-day railroad economics requires the
most careful consideration and planning on the part of work equipment supervisors as
well as the full cooperation of the purchasing and stores departments and top main-
tenance officers of the railroad. It is in this area that the benefits of standardization
can be most fully realized.
A study of the problems relating to the procurement and stocking of repair parts
and materials for the maintenance of work equipment must of necessity take into con-
sideration the organization of the repair forces, the number and diversification of the
machines, and the degree to which unit replacement methods are used. Previous studies
indicate that there is a wide variation among the railroads in the organizational setup
for handling machine repairs. The functions of these organizations, however, can gen-
erally be broken down into two basic categories — field or on-line repairs, and shop
repairs.
This report is limited to the study of the problems involved in the procurement
and maintenance of an adequate supply of materials and parts for the typical field
repair forces and for large centrally located shops equipped to handle all types of repairs,
overhauls and conversions commonly undertaken by railroad equipment repair forces.
It is neecssary that work equipment repair parts and supplies be secured to take
care of the following situations:
1. Material that is regularly used and stocked on a consumption basis.
2. Material needed for running repairs and preventive maintenance.
3. Material needed for scheduled or seasonal overhaul.
4. Material needed for on-line-of-road emergency repairs.
In general, annual requirements for the materials in categories 1 and 2 are estab-
lished by experience. Stocks of these materials should be maintained in a centralized
store room and distributed on the basis of requirement to all levels of equipment repair
units. Control of inventory and purchase of these items should be under direct control
of the chief work equipment maintenance officer with the full cooperation of the pur-
chasing and stores departments.
Based on field inspection reports and experience, the requirement of material in
category 3 can, to some extent, be anticipated in relation to the schedule set up. The
superintendent of the shops or corresponding officer should have standing blanket pur-
chase orders on local suppliers and equipment manufacturers to meet his needs. To mini-
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 32S
mize paper work, billing on these orders should be handled <>n a monthly l»a-i- instead
of by individual purchase.
Parts and materials needed for on-line-of-road repairs should be obtained insofar as
possible by furnishing on-line-of-road equipment supervisors with blanket local purchase
orders on suppliers at various points on his territory. He should have unrestricted access
to any parts or materials which may be on hand at storehouses and in addition should
have authority to contact equipment manufacturers direct to obtain parts not available
from local sources.
Every effort must be made in this situation to use the best lines of communication
and the fastest means of transportation to reduce the time that a machine is out of
service.
National credit cards should be used for the purchase of fuels and lubricants re-
quired for automotive vehicles and work equipment, and also for the purchase of tires
and batteries, with the approval of the division work equipment supervisors.
The principal advantages of the procedure for the procurement of parts and
materials outlined above are as follows:
1. Reduces down time on on-line machines needing repairs because the personnel
responsible for making the repairs has the authority to obtain the needed parts
and materials from the closest possible source. Unnecessary paper work is
reduced to the minimum.
2. Eliminates the necessity of maintaining large inventory of repair parts and
materials at central storehouses and other distribution and repair centers.
In a system where widespread use is made of blanket purchase orders to procure
repair parts and supplies, it is necessary that the orders be reviewed periodically to
assure that quality, service and prices are maintained at levels commensurate with pre-
vailing market conditions This is the responsibility of equipment maintenance super-
visorj personnel.
Report of Committee 30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses
J. \V. Davidson,
Chairman,
N. E. Ekrem,
Vice Chairman
E. S. BlRKENWALD
J. A. Erskine
P. L. Montgomery
C. V. Lund
E. R. Andrlik
A. R. Harris
D. S. Bechly
E. R. Bretsciiik
J. S. Carter
K. L. DeBlois
VV. E. Dowlixc
C. E. Ekberg, Jr.
I). J. Engle
R. J. Fisher
A. T. Granger
J. F. Hoss, Jr.
R. E. Kuban
K. H. Lenzen
J. F. Marsh
J amis MlCHALOS
VV. H. Munse
I). W. Musser
C. H. Xt.wux
V M. Xl.WMARK
M. XOyszewski
L. P. Nicholson
A. L. PlEPMEIER
M. J. Plumb
E. W. Prentiss
E. D. Ripple
C. A. Roberts
M. B. Scott
A. P. Smith
C. B. Smith
J. E. South
L. F. Spaine
C. A. Stile
F. \V. Thompson
G. S. Vincent
J. R. Williams
E. X. Wilson
L. W. Wood
J. D. Woodward
L. T. Wvi.v
Committee
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 30.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
2. Steel truss spans.
Progress report, submitted as information
page 328
3. Viaduct columns.
Investigation of these members has generally been handled in conjunction
with tests on other subjects. Due to lack of suitable tests, no progress has
been made on this assignment in 1962.
4. Longitudinal forces in bridge structures, collaborating with Committees 7
8 and 15.
Field tests will have been made by the end of this year on a prestressed
concrete trestle on the Seaboard Air Line Railroad, to evaluate effect of
traction and braking stresses on this type of construction.
5. Distribution of live load in bridge floor- :
(a) Floors consisting of transverse beams.
(b) Floors consisting of longitudinal beams.
The equations developed by the University of Illinois were transmitted
to Committee IS for consideration as specification material. Study continues
on application of these equations to certain unusual types of bridge Boor
construction.
6. Concrete structures, collaborating with Committee 8,
Progress report, presented as information
327
328 Impact and Bridge Stresses
7. Timber structures, collaborating with Committee 7.
There has been no progress on this assignment in the lasl year flue Lo
budgeting limitations on research funds.
8. Vibrational characteristics of bridges affecting deflections and depth ratios.
A method of investigating this problem by using an electronic computer
has been developed by New York University. However, this investigation
has been dormant in the past year due to lack of research funds.
9. Use of electronic computers for railroad bridge problems.
Due to lack of funds, no additional work has been done on plans to
develop a computer program for design and rating of truss spans.
10. Steel continuous structures, collaborating with Committee 15.
Progress report, presented as information page 330
11. Composite design of steel structures having concrete decks, collaborating
with Committees 8 and 15.
Progress report, presented as information page 33 1
The Committee on Impact and Bridge Stresses,
J. VV. Davidson, Chairman.
ARKA Bulletin 575, December 1962.
Report on Assignment 2
Steel Truss Spans
E. S. Birkenwald (chairman, subcommittee), E. R. Andrlik, A. T. Granger, A. R. Harris,
W. H. Munse, D. W. Musser, M. Noyszewski, M. B. Scott, F. W. Thompson,
G. S. Vincent, L. T. Wyly.
A limited number of truss spans have been tested in past years, generally in response
to requests of the owning railroad. A program of additional tests involving varying
span lengths and train speeds is contemplated, but has been held in abeyance due to
restricted research appropriations.
At the request and expense of the Rock Island Railroad the AAR Research Center
staff has been assisting in determining the cause of operational failures of a vertical
lift span. This span has at times become inoperative in an open position, most fre-
quently during the hot summer months. Strain gage oscillograph recordings have been
taken of strain in the main drive shafts during opening and closing of the bridge over
a wide range of temperature conditions.
A 310-ft through truss on the New York Central Railroad having all field connec-
tions made with high-strength bolts was investigated to determine if any slippage of
these joints had occurred in service. Mechanical strain gage readings made immediately
after erection were compared with those after nearly two years of service. These indicated
that no joints had slipped, and levels indicated that there had been no loss of camber
in service.
_^__ Impact and Bridge Stresses 329
Report on Assignment 6
Concrete Structures
Collaborating with Committee 8
P. L. Montgomery (chairman, subcommittee), J. \V. Davidson, \V. E. Dowling, C. E.
Ekberg. Jr.. X. E. Ekrem. J. A. Erskine, J. F. Hoss. Jr., R. E. Kuban. K. H.
Lcnzcn, C. V. Lund. J. Michalos, X. M. Xewmark, L. P. Xicholson, M. Xovszewski,
A. L. Piepmcier, E. D. Ripple, C. A. Still, F. W. Thompson, J. R. William-. J. D.
Woodward.
Field data are urgently needed to form a basis for an impact equation for pre-
stressed concrete design. The current investigations being carried out under this assign-
ment, as well as the previous ones conducted by the AAR, have provided considerable
information, but additional data are needed before a suitable design equation can be
developed to replace that presently specified.
The results of the field investigation by the AAR research staff on two 30-ft 6-in
prestressed concrete spans of a Florida East Coast Railway bridge near Pompano Beach,
Fla., were published in June 1962 as Report Xo. ER-21.* An abstract of this report
was published in Bulletin 573, September-October 1962.
The purpose of this investigation was to compare the static and dynamic effect on
spans with and without shear keys before and after transverse post tensioning under the
passage of diesel locomotives and cars. Each span consisted of six rectangular beams per
track and each span was identical except for the use of shear keys in one span. Trans-
verse post-tensioning was accomplished by use of high-strength steel bars, but these bars
were left loose until a series of runs with the test trains had been recorded. These bars
were then tensioned and another series of runs made with the same test train.
It was concluded from this investigation that:
1. Either shear keys or transverse post tensioning is effective in distributing the
load across the deck.
2. Recorded static strains in all beams after post tensioning were less than cal-
culated, but in several instances before post tensioning the recorded static
strains were more than calculated. The best distribution was for the span with
shear keys and after post tensioning.
3. Above 50 mph recorded strains increased with speed, yet the maximum values
did not exceed the calculated values, which included the AREA impact allow-
ance for masonry structures. A^ain, the best distribution was for the span
with shear keys and after post tensioning.
4. The lowest impact values occurred in the span with shear keys and alter post
tensioning. Maximum recorded locomotive total impact in both -pans did not
exceed that specified by the current AREA Specifications.
A report on another field investigation by the AAR staff on two prestressed con-
crete -pan- on the Southern Pacific near Houston. Tex., was published as Report ER
25*. An abstract of this report wa- also published in Bulletin 573. The 30-ft span con-
-i-t- of 4 I-shaped precast girders with a cast in-place concrete deck, while the Other-
Copies <<i these reports may be obtained from the director of onRinorrinE research, A iatkn
of American Railroad-. A 1 40 South Federal Strict, Chicago in.
330 Impact and Bridge Stresses
wise similar 55-ft span has 5 girders. It was found that composite action occurred be
tween the precast girders and the cast-in-place deck, and that actual recorded strains
did not exceed calculated values. The live load was spread more uniformly among
the 5 girders in the 55-ft span than among the 4 girders in the 30 ft span.
This committee has reported in the Proceedings, Vol. 60, 1959, page 1, on "Statu
and Fatigue Tests on Prestressed Concrete Railway Slabs." This work was performed
at Lehigh University on beams I6y2 in wide, 18 in deep, and 19 ft long. For this study
concrete strength was the principal variable. As an extension of this work, the AAR
conducted a laboratory investigation using similar pretensioned beams to demonstrate
the effect of size of strand and level of prestress on the static and fatigue strength of
the beams.
Twenty-four beams were included in this study. They were furnished by the Port-
land Cement Association and fabricated in its Research and Development Laboratories
at Skokie, 111. Four groups of beams were made, as follows:
1. ->6-in strands with initial tension of 0.7 /'„.
2. i7s-in strands with initial tension of 0.7 /',.
3. y2 -in strands with initial tension of 0.7 /'.,.
4. ^2-in strands with initial tension of 0.5 /'.,.
As was the case with the Lehigh beams, static loading produced compressive failures
and repeated loading produced tensile strand failures.
These data are being analyzed by the Research Center staff and will comprise a
report of this committee early next year.
Additional tests are scheduled to be made late this year on two concrete bridges
on the Seaboard Air Line Railroad. One of these is a 6-span trestle comprised of 24-ft
prestressed concrete slab spans with rectangular voids. A full range of speeds will be
used to determine the recorded impact in this type of span to supply much-needed data
in support of a revised impact equation. In addition to stresses in the slabs, stresses will
be measured in the prestressed concrete piles. The other bridge is a 7-span trestle com-
prised of 15-ft 6-in and 21-ft reinforced concrete slab spans. A full range of speeds will
also be used here to determine recorded impacts.
Report on Assignment 10
Steel Continuous Structures
Collaborating with Committee 15
A. R. Harris (chairman, subcommittee), J. W. Davidson, E. R. Andrlik, E. S. Birken-
wald, J. S. Carter, D. J. Engle, R. J. Fisher, A. T. Granger, J. F. Marsh, VV. H.
Munse, D. W. Musser, M. Noyszewski, E. D. Ripple, C. B. Smith, J. D. Woodward.
A study has been made of the information to be looked for in testing existing
continuous railroad bridges. However, actual testing has been deferred due to restricted
research appropriations.
At the request and expense of Iowa State University the AAR Research Center
staff conducted an investigation to determine the flexural fatigue strength of two pre-
I m pa ct and Bridge Stresses 331
stressed-steel beams. These two beams simulated the negative moment region of a con-
tinuous beam span.
The beams were prestressed by deflecting them under the action <>f a concentrated
load at the center of a simple span, then welding unstressed high strength steel plate- to
the top and bottom flanges to retain a predetermined amount of prestress. The beams
were rolled sections of A S6 steel and the plates were USS "T-l" steel.
Each of the two test specimens were subjected to an identical repeated loading until
a fatigue failure occurred. The loading was designed to produce stresses equivalent to
those which would have occurred in a simulated bridge and amounted to 84 percent of
a standard H-15 live load including impact. One of the beams sustained 2,469,100 repeti-
tions of load to failure and the other sustained 2,756,100 cycles.
Following the fatigue tests, an experimental study was made to determine the state
of stress that had been retained in the prestressed steel beams. This information, upon
which the calculated stresses of the test could be superimposed, provided a method of
correlating the fatigue strength of the beams with the fatigue information available on
the two steels involved.
Report on Assignment 11
Composite Design of Steel Structures Having
Concrete Decks
Collaborating with Committees 8 and 15
N'. E. Ekrem (chairman, subcommittee), E. R. Bretscher, J. S. Carter, C. E. Ekberg,
Jr., J. A. Erskine, R. E. Kuban, K. H. Lenzen, P. L. Montgomery, W. H. Munse,
D. W. Musser, L. P. Nicholson, A. L. Piepmeier, A. P. Smith, C. B. Smith, J. E.
South. L. F. Spaine, J. D. Woodward.
At the request and expense of the Western Pacific an investigation was conducted
by the AAR Research Center staff to determine the stresses in a skewed concrete-encased
steel beam span in Sacramento, Calif. The data obtained will be used to determine the
load distribution to the beams and the effect of the concrete encasement on stresses in
the steel beams. The data indicate that the concrete was acting with the steel to form
a composite section.
At the request and expense of the Seaboard Air Line Railroad field tests will be
made this year on a 60-ft steel girder span having a cast-in-place concrete deck. Stresses
will be measured in the steel beams and in the concrete deck to determine the degree
of participation of the deck in producing a composite section.
Field tests will be made this year on a 28-ft concrete-encased beam span of the
Seaboard Air Line Railroad at their expense. Stresses will be measured in the concrete
and in the steel to determine the composite effeel <>t' the concrete and steel.
Report of Committee 28 — Clearance
H. L. Williams,
C. \V. Hamilton
Vice Chairman
A. R. Harris (E)
"*■ 'BBI^^X
B. Bhistow
W. F. Hart (E)
^Hv
J. F. Smith
C. F. [ntlekofer
^H
E. E. Mills
M. L. Koeiilhk
JjK*^
W. P. KOBAT
J. R. Moore
J. A. Crawford
R. C. X'issi \
M. E. VOSSELLER
J. F. Pearce
J. D. Batch elder
C. E. Peterson
J. E. Beran
R. C. Rankin
C. 0. Bird
W. S. Ray
E. S. BlRKENWAI.D
R. A. Skooglun
I). H. Brown
J. \V. Wagner
S. M. Dun.
J. \V. Wai.i.enius
R. D. Erhardt
H. G. Whittet, Jr.
J. G. Gbeenlee,
J. E. Fanning (E)
M. A. Wohlschlaeger
Chairman
J. E. Good
Committee
i E i Member Emeritus.
rhose whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee !
To The American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
No report. Review of Chapter 28 has been completed.
2. Compilation of the railroad clearance requirements of the various states
Status report, submitted as information page 334
3. Review clearance diagrams for recommended practice, collaborating with
AREA committees concerned, and the AAR Joint Committee on Clearances.
No report this year. This assignment will be discontinued for the lime
being and will be replaced with a new assignment.
5. Clearance allowances to provide for vertical and horizontal movements of
equipment due to lateral play, wear and spring deflection, collaborating
with the Mechanical Division. AAR.
Status report, submitted as information page v^4
(>. Compilation in table form of offsets for overhanging loads on curves.
This assignment has been completed and will be replaced with a new assign-
ment.
s. Review present methods of presenting published clearance information to
determine how this can be simplified and or standardized.
Status report, submitted as information page 335
334 Clearances
9. Review clearance records of various railroads, looking to developing a
standardized method for charting all obstructions.
Status report, submitted as information page 358
The Committee on Clearances,
J. (;. Greenlee, Chairman.
ARKA Bulletin 575. December 1962.
Report on Assignment 2
Compilation of the Railroad Clearance Requirements
of the Various States
J. F. Smith (chairman, subcommittee), J. D. Batchelder, J. G. Greenlee, W. F. Hart,
E. E. Mills, J. R. Moore, W. S. Ray, R. A. Skooglun. M. A. Wohlschleager, R. L.
Williams.
Your committee last year (Bulletin 568, December 1961, pages 338-339) submitted
the clearance requirements for the state of New York, effective April 20, 1961, which
were to be added to the clearance chart dated July 20, 1961. A new canvass is being
made for any recent changes to the clearance requirements of the various states looking
to revising the clearance chart further when deemed necessary.
Report on Assignment 5
Clearance Allowances to Provide for Vertical and
Horizontal Movements of Equipment Due to
Lateral Play, Wear and Spring Deflection
Collaborating with the Mechanical Division, AAR
E. E. Mills (chairman, subcommittee), C O. Bird, J. E. Beran, B. Bristow, D. H.
Brown, J. A. Crawford, S. M. Dahl, J. E. Fanning, J. G. Greenlee, C. W. Hamilton,
A. R. Harris, C F. Intlekofer, W. P. Kobat, R. C Nissen, C E. Peterson, R. C.
Rankin, M. E Vosseller, J. W. Wagner, R. L. Williams.
Your committee presents as information the following report on Effect of Spring
Travel, Height of Center of Gravity, and Speed on Freight Car Clearance Requirements
on Curved and Tangent Track.
An earlier report on this same subject was published in the Proceedings. Vol. 59,
1958, page 305.
The cars used in the tests described in the earlier report were overloaded, which
may have restricted movement of the car bodies. The present report covers tests made
with cars half loaded and with cars fully loaded. The tests were run on the Delaware,
Lackawanna & Western Railroad, now the Erie-Lackawanna Railroad, in October and
November 1959.
Clearances 335
Effect of Spring Travel, Height of Center of Gravity
and Speed on Freight Car Clearance Requirements
on Curved and Tangent Track
Introduction
These tests are a continuation of those run in 1955.' These additional tests were
made to investigate the effects of partially loaded cars and branch-line standards of track
maintenance on clearance requirements. Cars in the 1955 tests were slightly overloaded,
and it was thought that bottoming of the springs might have restricted movement of
the car bodies. This report covers tests on one-half and fully loaded cars, with 70 and
85 in combined center of gravity heights, and empty cars, which were run on the Dela-
ware, Lackawanna & Western Railroad, now the Erie-Lackawanna Railroad, in October
and November 1959. The two 70-ton, 52J/£-ft gondola cars tested were similar to those
used in 1955. The one with short-travel springs (lf^-in travel) was designated as Car A
and the one with long-travel springs (3iJ-in travel) was designated as Car B. The tests
on main line were at speeds from 20 to 60 mph to determine the effect of speed. The
tests on branch line were with 85 -in center of gravity height at 20 or 40 mph to deter-
mine the effect of track quality.
The program was conducted as a part of the research activities of the Association
of American Railroads. Research Department, W. M. Keller, vice president, under the
sponsorship of the Joint Committee on Relation between Track and Equipment (C. J.
Code, chairman) and Committee 28 — Clearances (J. G. Greenlee, chairman). The work
was under the general direction of G. M. Magee, director of engineering research, and
in the direct charge of Randon Ferguson, electrical engineer. This report was prepared
by Ralph Schinke, stress analyst. The tests were greatly aided by the former Delaware.
Lackawanna & Western chief engineer, R. F. Bush, in providing cars, loading them to
the various center of gravity heights and running the special test train. Active participa-
tion by C. M. Segraves, engineer of structures, expedited the work.
Procedure
The different center-of-gravity heights were obtained by varying the heights of rail
loads carried by timber frameworks in the gondolas. Tests were made with a special
train running between Hoboken and Denville, N. J., for the main-line runs and between
Port Morris and Washington, N. J., for the branch-line runs. The Brush pen-writing
oscillographs, driving amplifiers and engine generator power supply were carried in a
combination coach-baggage car.
Static values of average roll angle were obtained on three curves of different ele-
vation by means of plumb lines and scales in the same manner as in the 1955 tests.
Dynamic values of average roll angle were obtained with a gyroscope providing the
necessary vertical reference. Vertical accelerations, and lateral accelerations at floor level
and at 9 ft above floor level, were measured with Statham accelerometers. Dynamic ver-
tical and lateral displacements were derived by double electronic integration of the accel-
eration signals. Roll-angle oscillations were calculated from the difference of the lateral
displacement channels at the two heights.
Fig. 15 shows some details of the method of measuring dynamic vertical and lateral
displacements of a car by means of electronic double integration of accelerometer sig-
nals. This method does not require any fixed reference points attached to the track
1 AREA Proceedings, Vol. 59, 1958, page 305.
336 Clearances
The block diagram shows the novel means of using a signal from the vertical gyroscope
to balance out the error due to inclination of the lateral accelerometer attached to the
car body and the resulting gravity component acting along its lateral axis. Fig. 16
shows the effectiveness of this error-balancing signal. It also shows the very low
frequency response obtained.
Results
Table 1 and Fig. 1 show the relation between average roll angle and unbalance.
Dynamic average roll angle is the steady value of the roll of a car on a curve; that is.
with the roll oscillations averaged out. Table 1 shows poor agreement with the 1955
data. This is no doubt due to instrument errors in the roll-angle data as evidenced by
the wide scatter of points in the average roll angle versus unbalance plots which are
not shown.
Table 2 gives the maximum values of the recorded variables. The values of average
roll angle given are those marked with an asterisk in Table 1, which are considered the
most accurate. The frequency values given for roll and vertical modes of car vibration
were read from places on the recordings where the cars' motion was nearly simple
harmonic. In other words, no attempt was made to read the higher harmonics which
were present at some times.
The relations between roll angle oscillations and speed are given in Figs. 2 to S.
They show that the roll oscillations of both cars with 70- and 85-in center-of-gravity
heights at full load were slightly less than the comparable 1955 loadings. They were
probably smaller because of some attenuation in the integrating circuits at low frequen-
cies. For almost all loadings the maximum roll oscillations of car B were about the
same as Car A. Also, the maximum roll oscillations of the empty cars were about as
large as the loaded cars. The maximum roll oscillations of the 35-ton loads were slightly
larger than the 70-ton loads for the 70-in center-of-gravity height, while they were
about the same for the 85-in height. The maximum roll oscillations of the branch line
runs for 85-in center-of-gravity heights were larger than the comparable main-line runs
except for the 70-ton load in Car B. The maximum roll angle oscillations for Car A
occurred at most any speed above about IS mph, while those for Car B were generally
less above about 25 mph.
Plots of maximum vertical and lateral accelerations are given in Figs. 9 to 12. The
plots of vertical acceleration are not directly comparable with the 1955 plots, which gave
average values, but they appear to be of the same order of magnitude. Figs. 9 to 12
show for both vertical and lateral accelerations an increase with speed — Car A values
greater than Car B values and branch-line values greater than main-line values.
Conclusions
The results of these tests are summarized in Table 3. Due to the wide scatter in
the roll-angle data, a value of 30 percent of the average roll displacement for 6 in un-
balance as found in the 1955 tests has been used for the spread of average roll dis-
placement in this table. Comparison of this table with Table 4 on page 325 of Refer-
ence 1 shows that bottoming of the springs due to the slight overload did not unduly
restrict movement of the car bodies in the 1955 tests. In comparing these tables it
should be kept in mind that Table 3 of this report makes no allowance for lateral play
due to clearance in the truck parts, wear or wheel-to-rail play, while the 1955 table does.
Also, the roll oscillations in Table 3 may be slightly small due to a small amount of
attenuation at low frequencies in the integration circuits. The table shows a larger total
Clearances
!
for the branch-line runs than for the comparable main-line runs except for the 70-ton
85-in loading of Car B, because of the larger roll oscillations on the branch line. The
runs with partial loads show lower totals than the full load runs. The empty runs with
Car B show large roll oscillations.
It is recommended that Table 4 of Reference 1 be considered as representative of
the maximum lateral clearance required for track with a main-line standard of mainte-
nance. As discussed on page Ml of Reference 1. an additional 1 in should be allowed
for badly worn cars. It should be kept in mind that these displacements are due to car
body roll and lateral play movements only, and are requirements for clearance beyond
those due to curvature, track elevation and equipment dimensions.
Table 2 gives values for the vertical clearance (displacement) requirement of 2.2 in
for Car A and 1.8 inches for Car B.
TABLE l
COMPARISON OF AVERAGE ROLL ANGLE VALUES
Ml values are in degrees for 6 inches unbalanced elevation
CAR A
1955 Test
1955 Test
Weight, lbs.
Empty
122,000
127
,000
192,000
214,000
195
,000
221,000
Center of Gravity Height, inches
36.0
71.6
86.9
70.8
70.9
86.8
8 4.7
Roll Angle, Static Lean Test
.038*
. 13
. 18
.12
.35
. 16
.53
Roll Angle, Dynamic
.21
.23*
.24*
.38*
.36
39
.51*
Roll Angle, Theoretical
.030
.20
.28
.32
CAR B
.36
1955 Test
43
.46
1955 Test
Weight, lbs.
Empty
120,000
125
,000
190,000
211,000
193
,000
218.000
Center of Gravity Height, inches
35.75
70.2
85.7
70.2
71. 1
85.4
85.2
Roll Angle, Static Lean Test
.12
.33*
.34
.55
.52
.63
.79
Roll Angle, Dynamic
.062*
.52
.35*
.007
.90*
.65
1. 10*
Roll Angle, Theoretical
.092
.64
.91
1.09
1.26
1.52
1.78
Car A, 1-5/8 in. spring travel, 55, 100 lbs. lightweight
Car B, 3-11/16 in. spring travel, 55, 000 lbs. lightweight
* Considered most accurate
$38
Clearances
> Q
a> h (c 01 n o oo
O rH O O CM* i-J rH
00 O t- O CO 00 ©
r-i H © r-J rH O 1-5
ft
■* in o h oo ^ m
co im' cm' co cm' cm' cm'
t: n n ffl ■* o it
CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM* CM
i< oi oo ^ 't N ^
CM r-i r-I rH CM* CM CM
c- cm co lo o co
g?
O CO
P5
iH o o o o o
o o o o o o o
# CD
CO
0)
>
CO
CD
rH
c^
>*
DO
rH
3
U
o
CM
<M
i
CO
m
l
CD — .
U
be
CD
<
o
O
©
o
g
p
ffi
<
O
TJ
W
■V
rH
CM
-H
-f
CO
CM
pj
en
s
CO
cr
m
-*
CD
cr^
■*
CD CO
IO
O CO
CO
pq
o*
©
K
<
O
, -c* -a co
W -r- ^3 (J)
u
osS
O (D O) 0) CO 00 OO
C- CM C- t> CM Tj< ■*«
> .5
X CO
5 rH H
t> c- c-
ft
c io m io
p co co co
W
CD CD CD "-.
2 S £
'^ U U
;2 .2 .2
'cc! «
c c c c
* '5 '3 "*
to to" co ^ co co £
CD CD CD -T. CD CD -~
C C O rH C C rH
3 Hi WI rg Hi 'k4 rg
c 0 c fl c c c
■I* •*- -r- ^ •*- -^ pj
d ri n ^ co ra ^
g § S « g § «
• r. T-j
e 3
Ed
co co
-H rt
jj
< §
en
Clearances
339
0) OT
So
£o
N H 00 o (C * O
n t- e li oo n oo
n n to h n n n
O) O «> CO CO H
f0 CO N N N N N
t-H LO CO CO CO >-l in
oo t- co o t> r- r-
O O O rH o O O
o o o o o o o
O O O O .-I o o
o o o o o o o
o co O O CM LO o
» C O 1- C CO o
O O O O O O i-l
<
u
o
a
bo
CO
CO
o
CD
in
o
CO
CD
0>
LO
CO
in
33
-J"
LO
-r
LO
-v
-
<
o
o
-
s
o
O
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
©
<
<
u
O
9
K
01
a
rn
CM
CO
-r
in
CO
CN
CO
EC
CO
CN
CO
EC
in
co
CO
cr
co
•*
l, -^ -H to
H '- J! B
<D > bO ^
«os£
O CO Ol O CO CD CO
t— CM t> l> CM -r f
%
CO W C5 l> t* t*
J _1 _) J3 J J JC
o □
e dd oflfl I
rt n r; ^ ^ w ^
~. S £ pq ^ ;? a
C i-J c c
,J J J J= J J J=
o o
C C C C E C =
§n
^ § s
340
Clearances
TABLE 3
MAXIMUM DYNAMIC LATERAL CLEARANCE REQUIREMENTS
Does not include lateral play due to clearances in truck parts or wheel-to-rail play.
Values are given in inches for a point 15 ft. above top of rail.
Three Inches Unbalance
Main Line or Branch Line
Nominal Load, Tons
Center of Gravity Height, Inches
Average Roll Displacement
Spread of Ave. Roll Disp. * +
Maximum Roll Oscillation *
TOTAL
Main Line or Branch Line
Nominal Load, Tons
Center of Gravity Height, Inches
Average Roll Displacement
Spread of Ave. Roll Disp. * +
Maximum Roll Oscillation *
TOTAL
Main Line or Branch Line
Nominal Load, Tons
Center of Gravity Height, Inches
Average Roll Displacement
Spread of Ave. Roll Disp. *•+
Maximum Roll Oscillation *
TOTAL
Main Line or Branch Line
Nominal Load, Tons
Center of Gravity Height, Inches
Average Roll Displacement
Spread of Ave. Roll Disp. * +
Maximum Roll Oscillation *
TOTAL
CAR A
Main
Main
Main
Branch
Main
Main
Branch
Empty
35
35
35
70
70
70
36.0
71.6
86.9
86.9
70.8
86.8
86.8
0.1
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.6
0.7
0.7
0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.4
3.1
2.5
2.1
2.8
1.6
1.6
3.5
3.2
3.1
2.7
3.4
CAR B
2.5
2.7
4.6
Main
Main
Main
Branch
Main
Main
Branch
Empty
35
35
35
70
70
70
35.75
70.2
85.7
85.7
70.2
85.4
85.4
0.1
0.4
0.5
0.5
1.2
1.6
1.6
0.1
0.8
0.3
0.3
0.8
0.9
0.9
2.7
2.4
2.2
2.5
1.8
2.6
2.2
2.9
3. 1
3.0
3.3
3.8
5.1
4.7
ix Inc
hes Unb
alanc e
CAR A
Main
Main
Main
Branch
Main
Main
Branch
Empty
35
35
35
70
70
70
36.0
71.6
86.9
86.9
70.8
86.8
86.8
0.1
0.7
0.7
0.7
1.1
1.4
1.4
0
0.2
0.2
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.4
3.1
2.5
2.1
2.8
1.6
1.6
3.5
3.2
3.4
3.0
3.7
CAR B
3.0
3.4
5.3
Main
Main
Main
Branch
Main
Main
Branch
Empty
35
35
35
70
70
70
35.75
70.2
85.7
85.7
70.2
85.4
85.4
0.2
0.9
1.0
1.0
2.5
3.1
3. 1
0.1
0.3
0.3
0.3
0.8
0.9
0.9
2.7
2.4
2.2
2.5
1.8
2.6
2.2
3.0
3.6
3.5
3.8
5.1
6.6
6.2
Plus and minus values.
Taken as 30 percent of average roll displacement for 6 in. unbalance.
Roll center height taken at top of car spring groups.
Clearances
341
LATERAL DISPLACEMENT IN INCHES AT 15 FEET ABOVE TOP OF RAIL
-2.83 -141 0 1.41 2.83
-3
to
111
X
U -6
CAR A
• EMPTY CAR
o 70 INCH C.G. - 35 TON
x 85 INCH C.G. - 35 TON
* 70 INCH C.G. - 70 TON
o 85 INCH C.G. - 70 TON
■05 0 0.5
CAR BODY ROLL IN DEGREES
FIG. 1 STATIC LEAN TESTS
342
Clearances
\A
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR A
1.2
1.0
•
1
•
•
0.8
• •
'0
<n 0.6
Ul
Id
OL
8 0.4
a
° -
{ 0
•
•
> •
•
•
•
ft
>
°
■H
!
o
>•
0
••
•
•
•
•
•
2
— 0.2
</)
2
O
h o
i-.v
•
•
• •
m
• •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
O
•
<
O
o
• CURVES
© TANG-ENTS
CAR B
L2
Ul
-1
S 10
1
_l
_l
O
& as
•
•
1
0.6
•
1
«
■
>••
••
•
0.4
• •
•
<
1
•
•
• • •
• •
i
•
1
•
V
••
••
• •#
• • •
•
•
•
10
60
70
20 50 40 50
SPEED IN MPH
FIG. 2 RELATION OF ROLL ANG-LE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
EMPTY CAR - MAIN LINE
Clearances
343
\A
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR A
1.2
<
i
0.8
0.6
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
t/>
UJ
Uj o.4
0
UJ
a
•
"
; *
•
•
•
o
• •
'8
II
• 1 , ■ •
<
•
• 4
)
l
i
••
i
• •
i
i
•
•
i
0.2
z
I/)
? n
•
■1
•
<
• •
•
•
•
•
i i
' i
< 1.4
u
CO
o
1.2
UJ
_i
3
z
<
1.0
_i
_i
o
a.
0.8
06
0.4
0.2
• CURVES
0 TANGENTS
">>
CAR B
10
60
3.5
3.0 _J
<
K
2.5 u.
O
a.
P
UJ
>
o
CO
<
U.
<
UJ
I
u
z
3.5
2.0
1.0
5.0
2.5
20 £
1.5
UJ
TO
20 SO 40 SO
SPEED IN MPH
FIG. 3 RELATION OF ROLL ANGLE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
35 TON LOAD, 70 INCH CENTER OF GRAVITY- MAIN LINE
344
Clearances
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.6
06
3
u
0.4
HI
a
2
0.2
to
2
O
(-
O
<
_1
1.4
-1
o
10
o
Ul
1.2
-1
c!>
2
<
1.0
-1
-I
O
a.
as
o.fe
0.4
0.2
I
• CURVES
CAR A
o TANG
ENTS
>
o
i
• •
>18
0
0
•
'
••
o
1
0
P8»
0 1
t
• •
• •
•
»
> o •
0*
•
V
:.
•
2.
•
•
•
•
4
o
1 •
I » i • i ■
1 ■■■■
• CURVES
CAR B
o TANC
JENTS
O
0
0
•
) *°
c
o
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
• •
•
>•
>
o
•
•
•
tt'
••
I*
to
••
t
1
•
•
•
•
10
20 30 40 50
SPEED IN MPH
60
13.5
3.0
2.5 i
Z.O o
1.5
1-0 §
0.5 U.
0 H
hi
Z
3.5 3
3.0
111
25 5
U
o
<
-I
2.0
..5 2
Ul
Sc
1.0 J
0.5
70
FIG-.4 RELATION OF ROLL ANGLE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
35 TON LOAD, 85 INCH CENTER OF GRAVITY - MAIN LINE
Clearances
345
1.4
1.0
as
0.6
0.4
0.2
I o
5 1.4
-I
o
8 u
1.0
0^
0.6
0.4
0.2
30 40
SPEED IN MPH
70
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR A
0
>
i
i
;
*>
o
•
1
1
:
i
••
•
•
o
o
r.
1
0
»
!
•
•
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR B
•
0
i
u
>•
*
<4
[
0
•
o
•
•
•
•
'
•
5:
5j5
SO
2.5
<
or
2.0
o
1.5
0.
1.0
g
CO
<
05
u.
If)
uj
I
o
is 2
3.0 h-
Z
111
<
-i
a.
2.0 <2
a
1.5
FIG. 5 RELATION OF ROLL ANGLE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
35 TON LOAD, SS INCH CENTER OF GRAVITY- BRANCH LINE
346
Clearances
10
20
50
60
!.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
O
III
£ 0.4
t»
Id
a
Z 0.2
«0
0 0
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR A
—
o
•
0
o
• —
■
•
o
I
• •
o o
•
•
•
•
•
1
i
•• •
•: •
•
•
:«
<
•
••
• .
'
$ 14
< I.I
-1
0
K>
° 1.2
u
a!
< 1.0
_i
_i
o
a 0.8
0.6
0.4
0.2
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR B
(
> •
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
o
•
•o •
•
1 • • •
i
• •
*
•
•
• •
•
•
•
•
i
<
•
i
•
•
• •
•
3L5
30
_i
2-5
i
If.
2.0
0
a
o
P
1.5
LU
i
m
1.0
<
05
O
3.5 S
3X3
2.5
2.0
1.5
1.0
0.5
70
30 40
SPEED IN MPH
FIG. 6 RELATION OF ROLL ANGLE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
70 TON LOAD, 70 INCH CENTER OF GRAVITY- MAIN LINE
Clearances
347
1.4
U
IX)
o8
</) 0.6*
u
5
li 04
UJ
a
- 0,2
Z
o
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
14
1.2
< 1J0
d
o
a: as
a6
04
0.2
1A
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
• ••
*r
CAR A
• ° o
A.,
CARB
W
10
20
50
60
£•5
2.5
n
p
2.0 h
U
1.5 O
ID
<
to ^
05
h
3.0 2
Ul
111
25 U
<
2.0 a
LU
I-
<
7C
30 40
SPEED IN MPH
FIG-. 7 RELATION OF ROLL ANG-LE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
70 TON LOAD, 85 INCH CENTER OF GRAVITY - MAIN LINE
348
Clearances
1.4
1.2
1.0
0.8
0.6
a 0.4
DC
0
UJ
° a2
z
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
•
CAR A
•
o
o
•
o
J
• •
p
•
<
• •
• •
'A
1 »o
•
o
1
<
•
•
••
•
_l
-1
O
0 1.2
UJ
-J
li
5 1-0
<* as
a6
o4
a2
• CURVES
o TANGENTS
CAR B
•
<
i •
° .
o
(
oo
• •
U
o
•
*••
8 * o
•
••o ,
•
>•
•
••
•
•
•
•
1
;
10
20
50
60
|5.5
2.5
za
1.5
10
0.5
35
3.0
2.5
70
30 40
SPEED IN MPH
FIG. 8 RELATION OF ROLL ANGLE OSCILLATIONS TO SPEED
70 TON LOAD, 85 INCH CENTER OF GRAVITY - BRANCH LINE
Clearances
349
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0,3
z
2
O
H
<
Ul
_l
u
o
o
<
- 0.5
<
0.4
02
0.1
0.7
0.6
CAR A
:
t #
4
3
□a aV°
)
X
v X
(
*
,
A if"
(
>
J|
■
•
o
□
L X
o
X
r a
A/
• *
ya
D
•
A
0.3
0.2
O.I
CAR B
•
o
X
EMPTY
70 INCH
85 INCH
CAR
C.G.
C.G.
- 35
- 35
TON
TON
* 70 INCH C.G.
o 85 INCH C.G.
a •
- 70 TON
- 70 TON
D C*
*
n * aO
f
•
a ,.
•j
A
SL
o
a
Ux
>
(
s» A
•
10 20 30 40
SPEED IN M.P.H
50
60
70
FIG.
9 RELATION OF MAXIMUM LATERAL ACCELERATIONS
AT FLOOR LEVEL TO SPEED - MAIKJ LlkJE
S50
Clearances
Z
o
h
<
UJ
J
ui
o
o
<
D
I
X
<
5
0.7
CAR A
«■
0.6
X
X
IS
0-5
0-4
X
i a
oB°
a
'x
D
B
a
D
!
0.3
02.
X
0.1
0
0.7
CAR B
X S5 INCH C.G. -
o 85 INCH C.G. -
35 TON
70 TON
0.6
X
0.5
i
j— _j
:
1
•
0.4
]
C
t
1
X
1
IX
6
a
03
j
0.2
0.1
n
0 10 20 30 40 SO 60 70
SPEED IN M.P.H
FIG. 10 RELATION OF MAXIMUM LATERAL ACCELERATIONS
AT FLOOI? LEVEL TO SPEED - BRANCH LINE
Clearances
351
IX
CAR
A
OA
A <f°
• | X"
□ 9»
A A
V *
o.e
o
•
0
X
1 •
jl
A BAX •
X
X
A
0
• 0,
0*
X
OA
•
D
1
X
A
A
A
xx*:
a
a ai
i
Cl9
1
• EMPTY CAR
o TO INCH C.G. - 35 TON
x &5 INCH C.G. - 35 TON
O
* 70 INCH C.G. -
° 85 INCH C.G. •
70 TON
- 70 TON
)X>
OA
0.6
OA
o.z
CAR B
IO
20
60
70
30 <*0 SO
SPEED IN M.RH
FIG.ll RELATION OF MAXIMUM VERTICAL ACCELERATIONS
TO SPEED - MAIN LINE
Hull. 571
352
Clearances
1.0
O.A
0.6
0.2
w
2 o
i.o
z
g
K
Ui 0.8
_l
U
O
0.6
0.4-
0.2
CAR A
i
x ,
1
a
a
°
X 1
* X
(
c
a i
t
i
0
i
a
:
X
X
X
1
{ °
X
;
c
CAR B
x 85 INCH C.G. - 35 TON
a S5 INCH C.G- - 70 TON
^
i
1
X
i a
a
a :
: *
X
X
: *
X
I
:x
:
10
20
60
70
30 AO 50
SPEED IN M.P.H
FIG.12 RELATION OF MAXIMUM VERTICAL ACCELERATIONS
TO SPEED - BRANCH LINE
Clearances
3 S3
Fig. 13 — Car A, 1^8-in spring travel with 35-ton load, 85-in combined
center-of-gravity height.
Fig. 14 — Car B, 3 11/16-in spring travel with 35-ton load,
85-in combined center-of-gravity height.
354
Clearances
CARRIER
AMPLIFIER
LOW- PASS
FILTER
LATERAL
COMPENSATION
SIGNAL
LATERAL
ACCEL
DC
AMPLIFIER
LATERAL
WSP
,
* ERROR OUE TO
INCLINATION OF
ACCELEROMETER)
INTEGRATING
AMPLIFIERS
r~\
CARRIER
AMPLIFIER
SCILLOGRAPH
(H)
V J
►■TO 0
IPEN WRITINGI
v_y
V
OSCILLOGRAPH
GYROSCOPE
INTEGRATING
AMPLIFIERS
OSCILLOSCOPE
DC
AMPLIFIER
VERTICAL
DtSP
VERTICAL
ACCEL
L
1
J
r
CARRIER
AMPLIFIER
LOW- PASS
FILTER
L
VERTICAL
ACCELEROMETER
Fig.
15 — Block diagram of acceleration and displacement
measurement circuits.
1.5
1.0
• NO ROLL
O ROLL, NO COMPENSATION
a POLL, COMPENSATED
1 1 1° ROLL '
15 Q STATHAM ACCELEC0METE1?
g° ±1.19 INCH
DISPLACEMENT
-ERROR DUE TO INCLINATION
OF LATERAL ACCELEROMETER
0.5
0 12 3 4
FREQUENCY IN C.RS.
FIG. 16.. LATERAL DISPLACEMENT CIRCUIT FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Clearances 355
Report on Assignment 8
Review Present Methods of Presenting Published
Clearance Information to Determine How This
Can Be Simplified and or Standardized
I. A. Crawford (chairman, subcommittee), J. D. Batchelder, J. E. Beran, B. Bristovv,
D. H. Brown, R. D. Erhardt, J. E. Good, J. G. Greenlee, W. P. Kobat, R. C.
Xissen. C. E. Petersen, R. C. Rankin, W. S. Ray, R. A. Skooglun, J. F. Smith,
R. L. Williams.
Your committee submits as information the following progress report, together with
a proposed method of presenting published clearance information to be considered for
adoption in the future
The work of this subcommittee was started by canvassing its members as to how
their respective roads make use of present published clearance information, and for
suggestions. We as engineers do not use published clearance information very much as
we are more intimately concerned with the movement of oversize shipments which
exceed the published clearances on our roads. However, other people on our roads (and
also shippers) make extensive use of published clearances in determining whether a
shipment can be moved on our roads. These persons on our roads who use the pub-
lished clearances the most were of great assistance to us in the initial stage of our
assignment by letting us know which representations they find the most, and the least,
helpful, and why.
Analysis and evaluation of the replies of members of the subcommittee with respect
to their thoughts and those of their respective transportation people concerning the
present methods of presenting published clearances and how this can be simplified
and/or standardized indicate the following consensus:
1. A representation like that of the EJ&E is a good and helpful set-up. However,
it is believed that the larger roads could not publish their clearances in this
manner.
2. The method used by the SP is well liked, but it was also suggested that if
each railroad could publish its clearances in a manner like the Southern Pacific's
Line Clearance Circular, issued annually, the publication Railway Line Clear-
ances could be discontinued. However, it was evident that many railroads, es-
pecially the smaller ones, could not justify and/or afford the expense of such
a representation in Railway Line Clearances or the cost of printing and dis-
tributing a publication similar to the SP's Line Clearance Circular.
3. It is apparent the majority are of the opinion that an ideal method should
include (a) clearances (and weight limits) for routes between interchange or
junction or major points on the railroad, (b) an index in alphabetical order
for the routes, (c) a column number assigned to each route, (d) a small map
showing the lines and interchange or junction or major point- involved in the
routes, and (e) clearances based upon cars 55 ft long with truck centers of
44 ft.
A mock-up of a representation for a fictitious railway for Railway Line Clearances
is presented herewith. This mock-up was prepared to illustrate a representation which
includes all five of the items referred to in item 3 above. It was kept relatively basi(
356
Clearances
RAILWAY LINE CLEARANCES jtOl
CLEARANCE AND WEIGHT LIMITS
EXWYEZEE RAILWAY
These clearances are based on single loads, with no overhangs beyond ends of
car. and on using cars not exceeding 55 feet long and having truck centers not ex-
ceeding kh feet. Shipments which are loaded on heavy capacity and/or special type
cars, or shipments of pivoted or rotating or swinging machinery on their own
wheels or loaded on cars, and cars and ladings exceeding published clearances or
weights, or with the height or the combined center of gravity exceeding 8^ inches
above top of rail, or with the center of gravity of the lading not on the longi-
tudinal center line of the car will not be accepted unless authority is obtained
in advance from General Superintendent Transportation, Exwyezee Railway, Aberdeen.
Maxi-
mum
Gross
Weight
of Car t
Ladi ng
LIST OF ROUTES
Use figures shown in col-
umn indicated by numbers
at the right for Points
Between
Col umn
Num-
bered
Maxi-
mum
Gross
Weiqht
of Car 6
Ladi nq
LIST OF ROUTES
Use figures shown in col-
umn indicated by numbers
at the right for Points
Between
Refer
to
Co I umn
Num-
bered
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
THROUGH
Aberdeen an
ROUTES
d Brimestone
Camas
Del ta
Evergreen
Fernwood
Aberdeen
Camas
Delta
Evergreen
Fernwood
Aberdeen
Brimestone
Oel ta
Evergreen
Fernwood
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
220,000
THROUGH ROUTES
Delta and Aberdeen
Br imestone
Camas
Evergreen
Fernwood
Evergreen " Aberdeen
Brimestone
Camas
Delta
Fernwood
Aberdeen
Brimestone
Camas
Delta
Evergreen
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
No. 10
No. 5
No. 5
No. 8
No. 8
ABERDEEN
MAP SHOWING MAIN OR PRIMARY LINES
AND INTERCHANGE OR JUNCTIONS CR
MAJOR POINTS ON
EXWYEZEE RAILWAY
Clearances
357
*+02 RAI LWAY LINE CLEARANCES
CLEARANCE AND WEIGHT LIMITS
EXWYEZEE RAILWAY
Height
Above
Top of
Rai I
THROUGH CLEARANCES
idth
No 6
Width
ft. in.
He ight
Above
Top of
Rai I
Width
ft. in.
No. 3
Width
No. 5
Width
ft. in.
o. 7
idth
No 6
Width
ft. in.
No. 9
Width
ft. in.
No. 10
Width
ft. in.
No. I I
Width
19
9
19
6
19
3
19
0
lb
9
It
6
IS
3
1 1
9
l 1
6
1 1
3
II
0
10
9
10
6
10
3
10
0
1
9
1
6
1
3
1
0
0
9
0
6
0
3
0
0
9
9
tJ
0
1 1
6
1 1
6
1 1
3
1 1
0
1 1
0
10
9
10
6
10
3
10
0
NCTE ; Maximun gross weighr of car and lading is shown in List of Routes
Railway's representation.
358 Clearances
and includes only a small number of routes; however, this method can be used for any
number of routes that might be required for a particular railroad's representation.
The mock-up is illustrative only. If a representation of this method were used in
Railway Line Clearances, the size and style of type would be what this publication nor-
mally uses; thus as many as 44 columns could be printed on one page or 22 if it were
desired to have the columns the full length of the page.
Many railroads are satisfied with their representations in Railway Line Clearances;
also, the governing factors which dictate the representation for each individual railroad
vary greatly. For these reasons it does not seem that it will be possible to develop a
single method of presenting published clearance information which would be acceptable
to all railroads. Also, some railroads because of their personal whims will not consider
using any method except that which they are presently using.
However, it is our opinion that the method illustrated by the mock-up is better
than that now being used by many railroads and that it could be recommended to any
railroad which was interested in making a change in its method of presenting published
clearance information.
Report on Assignment 9
Review Clearance Records of Various Railroads, Looking
To Develop a Standardized Method For
Charting All Obstructions
M. E. Vosseller (chairman, subcommittee), C. O. Bird, E. S. Birkenwald, B. Bristow,
J. A. Crawford, J. G. Greenlee, C W. Hamilton, C. F. Intlekofer, J. R. Moore,
J. F. Pearce, C. E. Peterson, R. C. Rankin, J. F. Smith, J. W. Wagner, R. L.
Williams, M. A. Wohlschleager.
Your committee submits as information a progress report on the status of this
assignment.
A sample clearance diagram has been prepared combining methods used by various
roads. This sample diagram has been sent to committee members for comments and
recommendations. After all recommendations have been received, a final diagram will be
prepared, looking to submitting it for publication in the 1963 report.
TIBON
ROOTS AND LOADS TIES
LAYING WELDED RAIL
MODEL 441
Developed and Built
for Railroad Maintenance
180° BOOM SWING
DOES ALL JOBS!
12 FAST CHANGE ATTACHMENTS
• Forks
• tU Cu. Yd. Bucket
• Tote Hook
• 18' Boom Extension
• Fork Tie Baler
• Track Cleaning Bucket
• Back Hoe
• Clamshell
• Back Filler Blade
• Pull Drag Bucket
• 4 Cu. Yd. Snow Bucket
• Pile Hammer
Optional Attachment
Flanged Wheels, Hydraulically Controlled
PETTIBONE MDLLIKEN CORPORATION
RAILROAD ^^^ll^ DIVISION
141 W. JACKSON "l*'" CHICAGO 4, III
80 Years of Service
to the Railroad Industry
for effective
weed control...
Concentrated BORASCU
POLYBOR-CHLORATE®
UREABOR®
MONOBOR-CHLORATE
These borate weed killers are proving best
for roads in every way . . . efficiency, safety,
economy, convenience, easy application.
Today's use of borates for maximum control of
vegetation began years ago with our pioneer
work in the field. Continued research has
developed the group of herbicides, listed above,
which most roads now favor for every phase of
weed control. These four weed killers are
nonselective. They are widely used for year-
round maintenance of weed-free conditions
about trestles, tie piles, yards, signals, switches,
and rights of way. Find out how you, too, can
do a better job on weeds . . . write today .
AGRICULTURAL SALES DEPARTMENT
>i WW %>>» >»***» V
BORAX
630 SHATTO PLACE • LOS ANGELES 5, CALIFORNIA
Assure lower maintenance costs,
better performance with...
iSSSSSK: WMZM
TEXACO
Railroad Lubricants
and Systematic
Engineering Service
TEXACO inc.
RAILWAY SALES DIVISION
135 East 42nd St., New York 17, N. Y.
NEW YORK • CHICAGO • SAN FRANCISCO • ST. LOUIS • ST. PAUL • ATLANTA
at
your
service
for
a 1 1 types of cranes
diesel wreckers
pile drivers
buckets
ORTON
CRANE & SHOVEL CO.
608 S. DEARBORN ST.
CHICAGO 5, ILLINOIS
DANIEL A. COVELLI
Pr**/rf«nf
R«pr«i«ntaliv«t in Principal CitUi
iPM
Here are the up-to-date facts on the SPENO Ballast
Cleaning and the SPENO Rail Grinding Services.
BALLAST CLEANING
SPENO Engineering and Research has de-
veloped a superior screening arrangement so
that we are now using an improved Ballast
Cleaner with greater efficiency.
RAIL GRINDING
Our Rail Grinding Service has been so we
received we are now building a THIRD Rail
Grinding Train to take care of the increased
demand.
SPENO is constantly developing means for
better service to make sure that the Railroads
receive everything they pay lor — and more
c/ud£~/7St4> ^te &at&UKids y%<2£~na</e uset& as/
CEO
FRANK SPENO RAILROAD BALLAST CLEANING CO., INC.
306 North Coyuqo Si
llhoco. N T
CONTINUOUS RAIL
— Quickly, Economically with the
RAIL WELDING
A typical transformer sub-station furnish-
ing commercial power for NCG Automatic
Rail Welding System.
When "Flashing" stops, the weld upset is
sheared. The weld is then ground with
abrasive belts to a smooth surface.
Now small work crews do a big, fast
job with the continuous, highly
automated NCG Rail Weldirtg System
using commercial electricity.
Time-wasting annealing and
normalizing are eliminated. All
operations are automatic, under
push-button control.
The NCG Rail Welding System brings
the highly desired advantages of
continuous rail to many roads which
previously deemed it beyond budget
acceptance. It may be purchased
or leased. Write for details now.
NATIONAL CYLINDER GAS, DIVISION
OF CHEMETRON CORPORATION
840 N. Michigan Ave., Chicago 11, 111.
NCG
A pusher moves strings of welded rail
onto flat cars ready for shipment.
NATIONAL CYLINDER GAS
7) (Ana con, off- j CHEMETaON J CoY?<yid?Zd7i,
©1961 Chemetron Corporation
VEGETATION CONTROL
CHEMICALS
#
READE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, INC.
Jersey City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas
City — Birmingham — Stockton
SERVING RAILROADS OF AMERICA FOR
MORE THAN FORTY YEARS
W
E
E
D
A
N
D
B
R
U
S
H
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
£-x-t-e-n-d Tie JZ-l-$-*l
11 old. Cfaqe!
USE TIE PLATE
LOCK SPIKES
One-piece Design
LOCK SPIKES hold tie plates firmly in place on
cross-ties and bridge timbers.
LOCK SPIKES are quickly and easily driven,
or removed, with standard track tools.
Driven to refusal, the spread shank is com-
pressed by the walls of the hole. Tie plates are held
against horizontal and vertical movement under
spring pressure. Play between the spike and the
hole is eliminated — abrasion and seating of tie
plates is overcome.
LOCK SPIKES hold their position in the tie,
and redriving to tighten the plate is not required.
They provide a quiet and strengthened track.
Annual cost of ties and maintenance expense is
reduced by extending the life of ties and holding
gage. Here is one answer to conservation of ma-
terials and labor. Write for free folder.
BERNUTH, LEMBCKE CO., INC.
420 Lexington Avenue, New York 17, N. Y.
Actual
Size
The custom-built assembly shown
above and to the right is an all-purpose
rig designed to give maximum flexibility
in coating and painting work. It was
designed for field application of paints,
lacquers, vinyls, cutback asphalts,
creosotes, heavy oils and greases.
- It uses the economical Graco Hydra-
Spray Process, and proves once again,
you get the job done faster and better
with Graco than with any other coat-
ing system.
If speed of coating application, and
material savings are important to you,
write today for all the details of the
Graco Hydra-Spray Process.
FREE!
Graco Engineers are prepared to help you in the design of your
paint and material spray assemblies. Your Graco Railway Rep-
resentative will be glad to explain the many benefits of this
service. Write or call him . . . today.'
Graco
GRAY COMPANY, INC.
MINNEAPOLIS 13, MINNESOTA
RAILWAY DEPARTMENT
JOHN P. McADAMS, Eastern Sales Representative
2304 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia
CHICAGO— (Broadview, III.)
R. D. Worley
3030 South 25th Ave.
CLEVELAND
M. H. Frank Company, Inc.
1202 Marshall Building
HOUSTON
Hous'on Railroad Supply Co.
1610 Dumble Street
PHILADELPHIA
The A. R. Kidd Co.
1036 Suburban Station Bldg.
LOUISVILLE
T. F. & H. H. Going
6308 Limewood Circle
ST. LOUIS
The Carriers Supply Company
81 8 Olive Street
NEW YORK — Newark, New Jersey
R. A. Corley
744 Broad Street
SAN FRANCISCO
The Barnes Supply Company
Rm 504, 74 Montgomery Street
TWIN CITIES — St. Paul, Minn.
The Daniel L. O'Brien Supply Compory
Endicott-On-Fourth Bldg.
WASHINGTON— Arlington, Va.
Southeastern Railway Supply, Inc.
2304 Wilson Blvd.
MONTREAL — Ontario, Canada
International Equipment Co., Ltd.
360 St. James Street West
Hubbard Super Service Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Super Steel Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Track Tools
Hubbard Tool Division
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
New York Pittsburgh Chicago
W> Unit Rail Anchor W
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR DIVISION
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
NEW YORK PITTSBURGH CHICAGO
RAIL JOINTS
STANDARD
COMPROMISE
INSULATED
FIBRE RENEWAL PARTS
* * *
Rail Joint Company
Division of Poor & Company, (Inc.)
New York 7, N. Y.
AUTOJACK
ELECTROMATIC
The only completely
automatic track surfacing
machine on the market
Proven in operation by North America's
leading railroads. Complete and auto-
matic control of surface and cross level
through tangent and curve territory
regardless of height of lift.
• Combination of Autojack and Electromatic
equals or improves production of Electro-
matic alone.
• Precision of lift and uniformity of compaction
controlled automatically.
All variations in lift, level and run-out con-
trolled from operator's panel.
Beam "sighting" for utmost precision.
Front buggy self-propelled ahead of tamper.
TAMPER INC. 53 Court St., Pittsburgh, N.Y.
SALES AND SERVICE: 2 1 47 University Avenue
St. Paul 1 4, Minnesota
Phone: 645-5055
IN CANADA 160 St. Joseph Blvd.,
Lachine (Montreal), P.Q.
Phone: 637-5531
Your enquiries for detailed information or brochures on
Autojack Electromatic and other track ma chines a re invited.
the world's largest
selling rail anchor
876R
IMPROVED
FAIR
RAIL ANCHOR
POWER
DESIGN MEANS
P longer service Hie
/ • Greater holding power
W Faster, easier installation
1±!EP.*M.22:
Division of Poor and Company
CHICAGO. NEW YORK, DENVER, ST. LOUIS, BOSTON, ST. PAUL. WASHINGTON, SAN FRANCISCO. MEXICO CITY
Notes on
Railroad Location and Construction Procedures
from the School of Experience
By J. A. Given
A series of notes, comments, short-cut methods and "tricks of the
trade" written by a railroad location engineer of many years of
practical experience for the benefit of young engineers.
Price $0.50
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
59 East Van Buren Street
Chicago 5, III.
The only man on his feet...
He's the pin puller — uncoupling cars. He
could be in any of the GRS-equipped auto-
matic yards. Once a car is free, its speed is
controlled automatically by Class-Matic*,
the GRS system of yard automation. At
the crest, the conductor pushes a button on
his console for each cut, to route the cars
automatically to the proper tracks. In the
retarder tower, the operator merely moni-
tors the system.
The free-rolling cars are judged individ-
ually as to rollability, weight, route, dis-
tance to coupling, and other factors which
are fed to the analog computer. This con-
trols the retardation automatically so the
cars glide gently to coupling.
What a saving in manpower! And con-
sider the safety factor — only one man near
the cars at any time. The saving in freight
time alone will vindicate your choice of
GRS Class-Matic, the system that pays
for itself in short order.
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL COMPANY
ROCHESTER 2, NEW YORK
NEW YORK 17, NEW YORK CHICAGO I, ILLINOIS
ST. LOUIS 1, MISSOURI
P. O. Box 10378 LOgan 6-7922
GREENHEART, INC.
1431 N. E. 26th Street
FORT LAUDERDALE, FLORIDA
President — John L. McEwen — Quarter Century Experience
IMPORTERS:
Greenheart Piles, Lumber, Timbers Long Length
MORA EXCELSA— Lumber and Timbers
Teak and other Woods from Burma, Siam, Australia,
Africa and South America
OO WOODINGS-VERONA TOOL WORKS
^LJ Pioneer Manufacturers
oi
HIGH GRADE TRACK TOOLS
and
SPRING WASHERS FOR TRACK
Since 1873
VERONA. PA. CHICAGO, ILL.
WOODENGS FORGE <£ TOOL COMPANY
VERONA. PA.
Makers
of
WOODINGS RAIL ANCHORS
CHICAGO, ILL.
but
• cross tamping as Jackson Utility Tampers
use it provides by far the best, most
practical method of spot-tamping. General thinking has been that a secondary
or "spot-tamper" should be small, light and inexpensive. We agree, yet such
machines have to work in really difficult applications where ballast is usually
fouled, cemented and normally difficult of penetration. To really do the job,
power that approaches that of mainline production tampers is needed. And
that is what you will find in the Jackson Utility Tampers. With exceedingly power-
ful motors of the production tamper type and their 3-dimensional vibratory action
they achieve thorough consolidation of the ballast directly under the rail and in
a wide area under the tie. Obviously cross tampers, having half the number of
tampers used in mainline production tampers, are less speedy; but quality of
tamping can be to any standard desired. And by any comparison of quality and
speed, these Jackson Utility Tampers will skin the tail off any lightweight spot
tamper of the 4-face variety. Let us demonstrate under your own conditions.
IflfUHflN VIBRATORS
JflUliUUI I IU0INGT0N MICHIGA
INC
CHIGAN USA
IMFMOVIE©
A COMPLETE LINE
OF SPRING WASHERS
THE NATIONAL LOCK WASHER CO
Newark N. J., V. S. A.
THE DOUBLE U RAIL ANCHOR
ACHUFF RAILWAY SUPPLY CO.
ST. LOUIS, MO.
Model N U Tie Cutter
HERE IS THE WINNING TEAM
The Woolery NU Tie Cutter and the Woolery Tie-end Remover preserve the line and surface
of the track and at the same time reduce the cost of tie renewals. Ties can be removed
without trenching, jacking up track or adzing tops of rail-cut ties. With this team you simply
cut both ends of tie, pry out center piece, insert in its place the tie-end remover and out
go the tie ends pushed by the double acting, double ended hydraulic cylinder of the Tie-
end remover.
FOR HIGHEST EFFICIENCY USE TWO TIE CUTTERS WITH ONE TIE-END REMOVE!
WOOLERY MACHINE COMPANY
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.
Kershaw Trackwork Machines
Designed, Tested, and Proven
on America's Railroads
Kershaw
MANUFACTURING CO. m
M0NT60MERY
ALABAMA
Trackwork Equipment Developed and Proven On the Job
Heavy Duty Ballast Regulator, Scarifier and Plow, Standard Ballast Regulator, Scarifier
and Plow, Track Broom, Super Jack-All, Standard Jack-All Kershaw Kribber, Two-
Wheel Kribber, Tie Bed Cleaner, Track Undercutter-Skeletonizer, Ballast Cleaner,
Multiple (Spot) Tamper, Foreman's Sight Car, Crib-Adze, Rail Re-Layer, Mocar
Crane, Track Crane and Tie Inserter, Utility Derrick, Two-Ton Rail Derrick, Chemical
Spreader Car, Tie Replacer, and Universe' Side Set-Off Assembly.
THE TRASCO
AUTONOMIC CAR RETARDER
CLAMPS IN PLACE
ANYWHERE IN TRACK
SIMPLE — EFFECTIVE — INEXPENSIVE
TRACK SPECIALTIES CO.
GENERAL MOTORS BLDG.
NEW YORK 19, N. Y.
American Railway
Engineering Association— Bulletin
Vol. 64, No. 576 January 1963
REPORTS OF COMMITTEES
15 — Iron and Steel Structures 359
7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles 371
11 — Engineering and Valuation Records 387
24 — Cooperative Relations with Universities 397
18 — Electricity 407
The reports in this issue of the Bulletin will be presented to the 1963 Busi-
ness Meeting of the Association at the Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago, March
15—16. Comments and discussion with respect to any of the reports are solicited,
and should be addressed to the chairman of the committee involved, in writing
in advance of the Meeting, or from the floor during the Meeting.
Copyright 196/3, by American Railway Engineering Asiociation
BOARD OF DIRECTION
1962-1963
President
C. J. Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
Vice Presidents
L. A. Loggins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Houston 1, Tex.
T. F. Burris, Chief Engineer System, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Huntington, W. Va.
Past Presidents
E. J. Brown, Chief Engineer, Burlington Lines, Chicago 6.
R. H. Beeder, Chief Engineer System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago 4.
Directors
C. J. Henry, Chief Engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
J. M. Trissal, Vice President and Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago 5.
W. B. Throckmorton, Chief Engineer, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, Chi-
cago 5.
J. A. Bunjer, Chief Engineer, Union Pacific Railroad, Omaha 2, Nebr.
J. H. Brown, Assistant General Manager — Eastern District, St. Louis-San Francisco
Railway, Springfield 2, Mo.
J. E. Eisemann, Chief Engineer, Western Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Rail-
way, Amarillo, Tex.
W. H. Huffman, Assistant Chief Engineer — Construction, Chicago & North Western
Railway, Chicago 6.
F. R. Smith, Chief Engineer, Union Railroad, East Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. L. Young, Chief Engineer, Norfolk & Western Railway, Roanoke 17, Va.
T. B. Hutcheson, Chief Engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond 13, Va.
C. E. Defendorf, Chief Engineer, New York Central System, New York 17.
John Ayer, Jr., Vice President — Operations, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad,
Denver 17, Colo.
Treasurer
A. B. Htllman, Retired Chief Engineer, Belt Railway of Chicago; Chicago & Western
Indiana Railroad, Chicago 5.
Executive Secretary
Neal D. Howard, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Assistant Secretary
E. G. Gehrke, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Secretary Emeritus
Walter S. Lacher, 407 East Fuller Road, Hinsdale, HI.
Published by the American Railway Engineering Association, Monthly, January, February, March,
November and December; Bi-Monthly, June-July, and September-October, at 2211 Fordem
Avenue, Madison, Wis.; Editorial and Executive Offices,
59 Van Buren Street, Chicago 5, HI.
Second class postage paid at Madison, Wis.
Accepted for mailing at special rate of postage for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917,
authorized on June 29, 1918.
Subscription $10 per annum.
Report of Committee 15 — Iron and Steel Structures
(Nil kki.d. Chairman
G. W. S viMos.
Vice Chairman
J M 11 u ; -. Secretary
I S. Bran \« alu
J. E. SOITH
E. T. Franzes
A. R. Harris
R. C. Baker
H. \\ . GlSTAFSON
J. C. Kl\(.
11 \ BALKE
J. L. Beckei
1.. S. Hi idle
R, S. Hi nnett
J. E. Bernhardt
E. D. Bit. I.MEYER
R. T. Blewitt
H. F. Bober
E. T. Bond, Jr.
J. ('. BRIDGI I ARMI.R
R, \. Hkodie
E. E. Burgh
I. \\ . Davidson
J. G. Clark
R. P. Davis
W. E. DOWLING
C. E. Kkberg
T. L. Fuller
G. K. Gillan
C. D. Hanover, Jr.
Alfred Hedefine
W. C. Howe
W. H. Jameson
E. A. Johnson
B. G. Johnston
E. \V. Kieckers
M. L. Koehler
K. H. Lenzen
Shu-t'ien Li
J. F. Marsh
M. L. McCauley
I). V. Messman
J Wll s MirilALOS
W. G. Mitchell
R. F. Mol.INE
\Y. H. Munse
\. M. Xl.WMARK
J. C Nichols
13. L. NORD
R. D. Xordstrom
T. G. OX li i
Ellis E. Paul
G. H. Perkins
R. A. Peteritas
A. G. Rankin
C. A. Roberts
W. E. Robey
G. E. Robinson
D. D. Rosen-
Henry Seitz
R. I. SlMKINS
A. E. Smith
R. D. Spellman
W. M. Thatcher
L. E. Titlow
H. T. Weltv (E)
H. X. Wilcox
A. R. Wilson (E)
A. J. Wood
M. O. Woxland
L. T. Wyly
Committee
Member Emeritus.
Thii-<- whose namr~ are -t-i in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR. Com-
mittee 15.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Ri \ ision of specifications, submitted for adoption page 361
Anti-friction bearings for movable-bridge applications, submitted as infor-
mation page 363
teel and concrete spans; non-ferrous metal bridges, collab-
orating with Committees 8 and 30.
Final report on composite steel and concrete spans, submitted for adoption, page 364
Final report on Don-ferrous metal bridges, submitted as information page $65
1 urn. -ion of de< k plati
The details of the tests of plate specimens of l-1 different metals at the As-
ition i i American Railroads' Research Center and on the Huey P. Long
bridge al New Orleans, to determine their relative resistance to corrosion,
were reported in I960 Proceedings, Vol. 61, pa Uso, refer to progress
report in 1<>61 Proceedings, Vol. 62, page 549.
lull. "I.
359
360 Iron and Steel Structures
Members of committee present at the meeting in New Orleans, October 24
and 25, visited the Huey P. Long bridge and inspected the test plates
installed at this location. It was the consensus that with the exception of
the aluminum and stainless steel little difference in the condition of the
various types of specimens could be determined by visual examination.
The tests will be continued for future evaluation.
4. Stress distribution in bridge frames.
(a) Floorbeam hangers.
Final report, submitted for adoption page 367
(c) Truss bridge research project
Progress report, submitted as information page 367
5. Design of steel bridge details.
Final report. The Board Committee on Assignments has approved your
committee's recommendation that this subject be discontinued as an As-
sociation assignment. The review of various articles and the investigations
outlined in AREA Proceedings, Vol. 63, page 380, will be continued, how-
ever, and any revisions or additions to Manual material resulting therefrom
will be submitted under Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
6. Preparation and painting of steel surfaces; synthetic resins and other
adhesive materials for protective coating and reinforcement, collaborating
with Committee 7.
Progress report, submitted as information page 368
7. Bibliography and technical explanation of various requirements in AREA
specifications relating to iron and steel structures.
Progress report, submitted as information page 369
8. Specifications for the design of structural plate pipe with diameters greater
than IS ft. Your committee has prepared a list of installations based on
information from various publications reporting on projects in the United
States and Canada. The installations cover structural plate pipes IS ft in
diameter and over, supporting both rail and highway loading, with covers
varying from 3 to 112 ft. The pipes were designed in accordance with the
ring compression theory and the flexibility factor for handling and erecting
the pipe. Data will be secured in connection with construction specifications
and on the behavior of the pipes after a period of service.
10. Effect of continuous welded rail on bridges, collaborating with the Special
Committee on Continuous Welded Rail.
Your committee is continuing its investigations and compiling information
on current practice on foreign as well as United States and Canadian rail-
roads. Such information, together with experience records of actual installa-
tions, will form the basis for a future report.
The Committee on Iron and Steel Structures,
C Neufeld, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 576, January 1963.
Iron and Steel Structures 361
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
E. S. Birkenwald (chairman, subcommittee), J. L. Beckel, R. P. Davis, A. R. Harris,
J. M. Hayes, W. H. Jameson, J. F. Marsh, D. V. Messman, E. E. Paul, D. D.
Rosen, G. VV. Salmon, R. D. Spellmaa
Your committee submits the following revisions of specifications for adoption and
publication in the Manual:
Pages 15-1-1 to 15-1-58, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL RAILWAY BRIDGES
Revise in accordance with the recommendations published in AREA Proceedings,
Vol. 63, pages 387 to 390, incl., except that:
(1) On page 388 in the third and seventh lines the words, "net section", shall be
inserted after the word, "bending."
(2) On page 388, revise the line reading, "bearing on pins and power driven rivets
27,000", to read, "bearing on power driven rivets in single shear
and pins 27,000."
(3) On page 388, insert a new line reading, "bearing on power driven rivets in
double shear 36,000", immediately under the line reading, "bear-
ing on milled stiffeners and other steel parts in contact 30,000."
(4) On page 389, in the line starting, "Carbon, max percent", substitute 0.26 for
0.28 under the column captioned Ladle Analysis, and 0.30 for 0.32 under the
column captioned Check Analysis.
(5) On page 389, in the line starting, "Tensile strength, psi", substitute 58,000
for 60,000 under the column captioned Structural Steel.
Pages 15-7-3 to 15-7-8, incl.
RULES FOR RATING EXISTING IRON AND STEEL BRIDGES
Page 15-7-6, Art. 14:
Revise the first paragraph to read:
The permissible unit stresses resulting from the loads and forces described in the
preceding articles are the following, in which
k = 0.& of the yield point for open-hearth steel; A 7, A 36 and A 141 steels in
accordance with ASTM Specifications; and wrought iron
k := 0.7 of the yield point for bessemer, silicon and high-strength steel
k = 0.65 of the yield point for nickel steel
Revise the third paragraph to read:
Axial tension, net section k
Tension, in floorbeam hangers, including bending, mi section:
using rivets in end connections 0.75*
but not to exceed 21,600 psi
using high-strength bolts in end connections k
but not to exceed 28,800 psi
362 Iron and Steel Structures
Tension in extreme fibers of rolled shapes, girders and built sections,
subject to bending, net section k
Delete the words, "in pounds per square inch", from the first line of fourth para-
graph.
Revise the second line of the fourth paragraph by inserting after the word, "for",
the following: "A 7."
Revise the third line of the fourth paragraph by inserting after the words, "silicon
steel", the following: "or A 36 steel."
Page 15-7-7, Art. 14: Substitute in the first full line for the words, "open-hearth
or bessemer steel", the words "A 7, open-hearth or bessemer steel".
Insert a new third line between the lines beginning, "wrought iron", and "silicon
steel", as follows:
A 36 steel "^OO^17'000- 0J1 ~ ) lo^i17'000-0-43 IT )
In the first full paragraph where /— 1.20, revise the words, "open-hearth steel and
wrought iron", to read: "A 7 steel, open-hearth steel and wrought iron."
In the first full paragraph, insert a new fifth line, as follows: "= 1.18 for A 36
steel."
Delete the words, "in pounds per square inch", from the second line of the sec-
ond paragraph.
In the third line of the second paragraph revise the words, "open-hearth or bes-
semer steel", to read: "A 7, open-hearth or bessemer steel."
Insert a new line in the second paragraph between, "Wrought Iron", and, "Silicon
steel", as follows:
A36steel Ib^O0'000-6"^)
Delete the words, "in pounds per square inch", from the first line of the third
paragraph.
In the third paragraph, third line, add the words: A 7, or A 36 steel.
Page 15-7-8, Art. 14: In the second line insert after the word, "for", the following:
"A 7, A 36 or."
Revise the fifth through tenth lines to read:
Shear in webs of plate girders and rolled beams 0.75&
Shear in rivets and pins 0.9fc
Pages 15-M-27 to 15-M-29, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR STRUCTURAL JOINTS USING HIGH-
STRENGTH STEEL BOLTS IN STEEL
RAILWAY BRIDGES
Revise in accordance with the recommendations published in AREA Proceedings,
Vol. 63, pages 390 to 398, inch, except that:
(1) On page 390, Par. 3, Sec. A, Scope, shall be revised to read:
"3. Joints required to resist shear between their connected parts are designated as
either friction-type or bearing-type connections. Shear connections shall be friction-type
when subjected to stress reversal, severe stress fluctuation or where slippage would be
undesirable."
Iron and Steel Structures 363
(2) On page 392, Par. 2, Sec. D, Allowable Working Stresses, substitute, "18,000",
for "20,000", in the last line;
(3) On page 393, Par. 1, Sec. E, Assembly, substitute the following:
"1. Heavy hexagon structural bolts with heavy semi-finished hexagon nuts shall be
installed with a hardened washer under the turned element.
"When the outer face of the bolted parts has a slope of more than 1:20, a smooth
beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism.
"Where bolt holes are oversize and where bolts are subject to tensile loads, a hard-
ened washer shall be used under both the bolt head and nut."
(4) On page 397, under the caption, "Installation", delete the first paragraph.
Your committee presents as information the following report concerning anti-
friction bearings for movable-bridge applications:
In 1958 one of the manufacturers of anti-friction bearings raised the issue that the
value of 3000 d lb per inch of roller length allowed by the Specifications for Movable
Railway Bridges, Art. 16, Sec. C, is too conservative and results in the use of bearings
that are oversized and unnecessarily expensive.
Since that time members of the committee and major bearing manufacturers have
given this matter considerable study. In summary, ratings recommended by various
bearing manufacturers are as follows:
Manufacturer A(a> C= 1.5 P
Manufacturer B(h) 1 7,500 d
Manufacturer C 5,000 d
Manufacturer D 3,000 d
»' Manufacturer A relates allowable load to dynamic capacity C. This formula gives the required
capacity for which <)7 percent of a group of identical bearings will not fail after 500,000 revolutions
under the applied load P.
'' ' Manufacturer B recommends five times its basic catalog rating of about 3500 d.
Evidently, even among major bearing manufacturers there is a considerable differ-
ence of opinion about the safe load values for anti-friction bearings used in movablc-
bridge applications.
The sheave bearings of vertical lift bridges and the trunnion bearings of bascule
bridges are major components. A failure of these bearings makes the bridge inoperable,
and the replacement of such a bearing is a long, difficult and extremely costly operation.
These bearings must therefore be selected so that there is the least possibility of their
failure during the useful life of the structure.
Anti-friction bearings are industry rated on the probability of survival of 90 percent
ot a group of presumably identical bearings loaded with the rated load for a given num
ber of revolutions. When' the number of revolutions is 1,000,000, the rated load is defined
on the dynamic capacity by the Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturers Association. This
dynamic capacity is the value C shown above in Manufacturer As formula.
Obviously, a 10 percent probability of failure is intolerable for movable-bridge ap-
plications. In its recommendation Manufacturer A has proposed a formula to reduce the
probability to about 3 percent, based on 500,000 revolutions.
For a vertical-lift bridge, for example, which operates on an average of about 6
times a day. the main sheave bearings will make 500,000 revolutions in about 50 years.
ling to the rating suggested by Manufacturer A. one bearing in every 30 could
be expected to fail within this time. It then becomes a question of economics as to
whether the cost of replacing a bearing at that time would be greater than the amount
364 Iron and Steel Structures
plus interest which was saved in the original construction by the use of a bearing which
was rated for this life. The most economic size of bearing will be different for every
bridge and will vary with the importance of the structure to marine and railway traffic,
and to the cost of delays and outages. In most actual installations, the cost of detouring
railway traffic or the cost of demurrage on marine commerce would be many times the
additional cost of using a larger bearing in the initial installation.
It must also be kept in mind that movable bridges will have several major bearings;
a heavy lift bridge could have as many as 16, the failure of any one of which would
put the bridge out of operation. Also, if one bearing in 30 would fail in 30 years, there
is also a probability that a lesser percentage of the bearings would fail at an earlier time
so that the probability of an earlier failure by any one of a large group of bearings is
increased.
There are, of course, bridges which make a greater or a lesser number of openings
than the six assumed above and the life would vary accordingly. Also, particular struc-
tures vary in their usefulness to both the railway and the waterway. Where there are
special or unique applications, it would be expected that the selection of the bearing size
should be influenced accordingly, and that the standard specifications cannot cover every
condition of use.
There is no mathematical relationship between the dynamic capacity C and the load
per inch of roller diameter. However, decreasing the allowable load per inch of diameter
in effect increases the required size of the bearing and therefore increases the dynamic
capacity. If the specified value of 3000 d is used, the dynamic capacity will be about
four to five times the applied load for the large size of roller bearings here considered.
Thus, with the specified allowable load, the expected life of an anti-friction bearing will
be several million revolutions with a probability of failure of a fraction of one percent.
Your committee therefore recommends that no change be made in the current spec-
ifications governing the selection of anti-friction bearings.
Various bearing manufacturers have made other suggestions as to the particular
type of roller bearings which should be used: cylindrical, spherical or tapered. The
AREA movable bridge specifications do not place any restriction on the type of bearing
to be used and the selection of type is left to the discretion of the designer. Because all
types of bearings can be so designed that they will function satisfactorily, the committee
is of the opinion that the specifications should not restrict the selection of the type of
bearing considered most suitable for the particular application.
Report on Assignment 2
Composite Steel and Concrete Spans; Non-Ferrous
Metal Bridges
Collaborating with Committees 8 and 30
Ellis E. Paul (chairman, subcommittee), L. S. Beedle, H. F. Bober, A. Hedefine, M. L.
Koehler, K. H. Lenzen, Shu-t'ien Li, J. Michalos, W. H. Munse, D. L. Nord, R. D.
Nordstrom, T. G. O'Neil, D. D. Rosen, H. N. Wilcox.
Last year your committee presented, as information, tentative Specifications for
Composite Steel and Concrete Spans (Proceedings, Vol. 63, 1962 pages 398 and 399).
Iron and Steel Structures 365
These specifications are now submitted with the recommendation that they be adopted
and published in the Manual as a new Part 8 — Composite Steel and Concrete Spans.
Your committee also submits the following anal report on nonferrous metal bridges.
During the past year our investigation proceeded along the lines set forth in the
Proceedings, Vol. 63, page 380, namely, the correlation of existing information on alum-
inum bridges with reference to railway bridges and the study of data on research to
date on the use of aluminum for structures.
It has become evident ihat a comprehensive program of basic and applied research
on the use of aluminum for railway bridges would need to be carried out before
attempting any economic studies of the problem.
Representatives of the aluminum industry expressed great interest in our studies
but are apparently unwilling to spend money on research. Aluminum railway bridges do
not appear to hold much promise in view of the results of research on other types of
aluminum bridges.
At the Jannary \^b2 meeting of the Highway Research Board in Washington, D. C,
extremely interesting papers were presented on welded aluminum highway structures.
The problems encountered in welding and the strength limitations resulting therefrom
were pointed out. A review of the articles would seem to indicate rather clearly that,
from a cost basis alone, aluminum cannot compete with structural steel on large bridge
structures.
Your committee considered the proposal that some research work might be under-
taken by graduate and undergraduate students at some of our universities and colleges.
University representatives on the committee indicated that this probably was not feasible
since the graduate student expects to be paid for his work, and it was unlikely that
funds would be made available by the AAR for this purpose. Also, it probably would
be difficult to find an undergraduate who was particularly interested in this subject, and
any expenses in connection with the study would have to be paid by someone. In addi-
tion, someone would have to carefully lay out and follow up on the study being made.
In view of the above, it would appear that this subject matter as a whole is not
attractive at this time and that the interests of the members of your committee could
better be served in devoting their time and effort to other matters. Therefore, in Novem-
ber 1962, the Board Committee on Assignments approved your committee's recommenda-
tion that the assignment be withdrawn until such later date when greater interest might
be evidenced and funds are available for carrying out the necessary studies.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
First Welded Aluminum Girder Bridge Spans Interstate Highway in Iowa — Ned L. Ash-
ton (M-ASCE) Civil Engineering, Oct. 1958, Vol. p. 761-762.
Tests of Aluminum and Steel Railway Bridge Girders — E. C. Hartman, R. L. Moore &
F. E. Rebhun; AREA Bulletin 484, Dec. 1949.
Laboratory Testing of Full-size Aluminum Bridge — James Michalos, Gerald G. Kubo
and Charles Birnstiel; Department of Civil Engineering, New York University;
presented at Sixth Congress — International Association for Bridge and Structural
ineering, Stockholm; June 27-July 1, 1960.
Specifications for Structures of Aluminum Alloy 6061-T6, Journal of Structural Divi-
sion, ASCE; Second Progress Report of the Committee of the Structural Division
on Design in Lightweight Structural Alloys, Vol. 82, No. ST 3, May 1956, pa
970-1 to 970-34.
366 Iron and Steel Structures
Specifications for Structures of Aluminum Alloy 2014-T6, Journal of Structural Division,
ASCE; Third Progress Report of the Committee of the Structural Division on
Design in Lightweight Structural Alloys, Vol. 82, No. ST 3, May 1956, pages 971-1
to 971-32.
Aluminum Span for E 60 Railroad Bridge, Engineering News-Record, Vol. p. 714-716,
Nov. 28, 1946.
All-Aluminum Span Carriers Rail Traffic Over Grasse River Bridge — Shortridge Hardesty
(M-ASCE and J. M. Garrelts (M-ASCE), Civil Engineering, Vol. 16, No. 12, Dec.
1946.
Heavy Bridge Floor Replaced with Aluminum— J. P. Growdon (M-ASCE); R. L. Tem-
pli (M-ASCE) and Ross M. Riegel (M-ASCE) ; Civil Engineering, 1934, March,
page 113.
Huey Long Bridge Gets Aluminum Deck — Railway Age, Dec. 9, 1950. Material for ar-
ticle furnished by E. J. Garland, general manager, and E. L. Mire, chief engineer,
of the New Orleans Public Belt Railroad, in conjunction with representatives of
various lines, the Aluminum Company of America, and Frank M. Masters and C. W.
Hanson of Modjeski & Masters.
Design of Welded Aluminum Structures— H. N. Hill (F-ASCE), J. W. Clark (M-ASCE)
and R. H. Brungraber (AM-ASCE). Paper presented at ASCE Annual Meeting,
Washington, D. C, Oct. 19-23, 1959.
Welded Aluminum Structures — J. Robert Stemler, J. W. Clark and G. O. Hoglund.
Paper presented at 1962 Highway Research Board Annual Meeting, Washington,
D. C, January 1962.
Alcoa Aluminum Alloys 6070 and 6071 — Alcoa Green Letter — H. H. Nuernberger, Sales
Development Div., Aluminum Company of America, June 15, 1962. (Not released
for publication).
Relative Maintenance Costs of Highway Hardware and Their Effect on Total Cost —
Rudolph Hofer, Jr., Aluminum Company of America, Dec. 28, 1961.
How and When to Use Aluminum Alloys — R. L. Moore, Engineering News-Record, Vol.
p. 518, Oct. 18, 1945.
Design Specifications for Bridges and Structures of Aluminum Alloy 27S-T — Leon S.
Moisseiff (M-ASCE) deceased, Aluminum Company of America, 1940.
Suggested Specifications for Structures of Aluminum Alloy 6063-T5 and T6 Revised
Draft March 7, 1962, Aluminum Company of America. Will replace Paper 970 of
Structural Division of ASCE. (Not released for publication).
Suggested Specifications for Structures of Aluminum Alloys 6061-T6 and 6062-T6 —
Revised March 7, 1962, Aluminum Company of America. Will replace Paper 970
of Structural Division of ASCE.( Not released for publication).
Alcoa Aluminum Handbook — Aluminum Company of America — A Design Manual for
Aluminum, 1956.
Structural Aluminum Design — Karl Angermayer, chief design engineer, Reynolds Metal
Company, August 1959.
Straight Line Column Formulas for Aluminum Alloys — H. N. Hill and J. W. Clark,
Aluminum Company of America, Technical Paper No. 12, 1955.
Procedure Handbook of Arc Welding Design and Practice, Lincoln Electric Company,
Eleventh Edition, 1957.
Welding Handbook — American Welding Society, Fourth Edition, 1957.
Iron and Steel Structures 367
Cumulative Index of ASCE Publications — American Society of Civil Engineers, 1961, —
ASCE Proceedings, page 6 — Aluminum; ASCE Transactions, page 183 — Aluminum;
Civil Engineering, page 548 — Aluminum.
Research at Alcoa — Aluminum Company of America, 1954. This publication lists the
bibliography of all publications from the laboratories of Alcoa and includes 7 books,
10 technical papers, 14 pages of articles on Aluminum Alloys and 35 pages on
engineering design-.
Progress Reports on a Fairchild type bridge tested at Lehigh University in 1959 — W. J.
Eney, director of Fritz Engineering Laboratory, Lehigh University.
Twelve miscellaneous pamphlets on aluminum products — their welding, riveting, brazing,
etc. Reynolds Metal Company.
Report on Assignment 4
Stress Distribution in Bridge Frames
E. T. Franzen (chairman, subcommittee), L. S. Beedle, E. S. Birkenwald, R. P. Davis,
G. K. Gillan, J. M. Hayes, W. H. Jameson, K. H. Lenzen, J. Michalos, W. H.
Munse, L. T. VVyly.
(a) Floorbeam Hangers
Last year your committee presented as information a tentative draft of an amend-
ment to become new Par. 3 of Art. 1, page 15-7-12, Sec. D. Trusses, of Methods of
Strengthening Existing Bridges, Part 7, Chapter 15. The amendment, as follows, is now
submitted with the recommendation that it be adopted and published in the Manual.
Adoption of this amendment completes the work on this assignment.
"Floorbeam hangers are frequently highly stressed from a combination of bending
and direct axial tension. To reduce the possibility of fatigue cracking in these highly
stressed hangers, sharp copes or re-entrant cuts should be eliminated or modified. The
use of high-strength bolts at the top connections of the floorbeam hangers to replace
all rivets should also be considered to improve the load transfer to the gusset plates."
(c) Truss Bridge Research Project
Your committee submits the following report of progress on work done in the
period November 1, 1961. to November 1, 1962, on the Truss Bridge Research Project
it Northwestern University.
During the past year work has progressed on investigation and testing to deter
mine the ultimate carrying capacity of the truss span with a damaged end post. Two
complete series of tests have now been made of a damaged end post in Truss A (angles
of members turned out). The second series of these tests gave results approximately 6
at lower than the first series, which is good correlation of data. A second series of
tests will be started on Truss B (angles of members turned in) as soon as the damaged
end post in Truss A is replaced with a high-strength steel member. It is anticipated that
the tests on Truss B will be completed in 1962. From the three series of tests on dam-
aged end posts, it has been found that the capacity of the end posts of A and B trusses
ipproximatery equal for the straight condition and for the severel) damaged con-
dition For -mail amounts of initial bend, the A end post showed a greater strength.
368 Iron and Steel Structures
A report is being prepared by Dr. John F. Ely to cover all work on the non-destruc-
tive tests or up to the point at which testing of damaged end posts was started. Be-
cause of the cooperative nature of the investigation, the first report will be submitted
to ASCE for publication. Another report will be prepared on the damaged end post
tests, which report is anticipated to be ready for publication by May 1963. A meeting
of the Advisory Committee is scheduled for Nov. 27, 1962, at which time the report on
non-destructive tests will be reviewed and future testing programs discussed.
Report on Assignment 6
Preparation and Painting of Steel Surfaces; Synthetic
Resins and Other Adhesive Materials for Protective
Coating and Reinforcement
Collaborating with Committee 7
R. C Baker (chairman, subcommittee), E. D. Billmeyer, E. W. Kieckers, M. L. Koehler,
R. F. Moline, G. H. Perkins, R. A. Peteritas, A. G. Rankin, D. D. Rosen, H. Seitz,
R. I. Simkins, A. E. Smith, A. J. Wood.
No paint tests have been initiated this past year.
Progress reports on four projects were mailed to chief engineers of Member Roads
and to members of Committee 15. These were prepared by the director of research
for the Steel Structures Painting Council and are:
1. Protecting Load Bearing Surfaces of Bridges
This test was initiated in 1958 on the Chicago Great Western Railway Bridge C-
87-29 across the Rock River near Byron, 111. This is a 12-span open-deck plate-girder
bridge 786 ft long of shop-welded design ; all field connections were made with high-
strength steel bolts.
Five spans, each 70 ft long, were selected for testing the protective systems. Two of
these spans were sandblasted, two were hand cleaned, and one was hand cleaned and
painted with the specified oil base primer before application of the additional pro-
tective systems. The experimental area was confined to the tops and edges of the top
flange, being 16 in wide. The majority of the protective systems were applied in the
shop with repairs made in the field where damage occurred due to handling.
All of the systems are giving good protection between the ties, but only a few are
still in excellent condition under the ties.
2. Santa Fe Bridge Painting Test
This test was initiated in 1953 by the Santa Fe Railway and the Steel Structures
Painting Council. Several of the most promising bridge paints currently in use on the
Santa Fe were selected with emphasis on those suitable for hand-cleaned steel, and in
relatively mild environments.
Since many proprietary paints and coatings were used on this test, the actual results
cannot be set forth in this report.
Iron and Steel Structures 369
3. Paints for Hand-Cleaned Railroad Bridges
This test was initiated in 1955 by the Seaboard Air Line Railroad and the Steel
Structures Painting Council, with assistance from the AAR. The purpose of this test
was to evaluate the performance of chemically resistant synthetic resin maintenance
paints on the floor systems of steel railroad bridges exposed to brine drippings without
blast cleaning or steam cleaning.
The floorbeams of the Ashley River bridge at Charleston, S. C, and the bottom
chords and end posts of the truss bridge over the Santee River at Jamestown, S. C,
were included in this test.
The report on this test shows that the paint systems have continued to deteriorate
between the fourth and sixth year after painting. Only 1 system out of 8 was giving
protection on the floorbeams, but on the bottom chords 5 of the 16 systems were fur-
nishing proper protection.
4. Brine-Resistant Bridge Paints
This test was initiated in 1953 by the Missouri Pacific Railroad, the Steel Struc-
tures Painting Council, and the AAR on Bridges 69 and 94 near Roots and Chester,
111. The description and purpose of these tests were described by Dr. Joseph Bigos in
his address published in the Proceedings, Vol. 55, 1954, page 1021. A progress report
was published in the Proceedings, Vol. 60, 1959, page 509. On hand-cleaned Bridge 94
it was necessary to retouch the test areas after the first three years of exposure.
On sand-blasted Bridge 59 some of the paint systems gave excellent service for
eight years.
Your committee submits the following brief progress report as information con-
cerning synthetic resins and other adhesives:
The report of Committee 7 on its Assignment 6, Bulletin 573, September-October
1962, pages 1 to 17, incl., is referred to for general information regarding technology
of epoxy resins and application of epoxy resins to structures. Section C of that report
lists several applications under Committee 15 — Iron and Steel Structures, as information.
All projects involving the use of epoxies on steel bridge structures are being
reviewed for a possible future report.
Report on Assignment 7
Bibliography and Technical Explanations of Various
Requirements in AREA Specifications Relating
to Iron and Steel Structures
J. G. Clark (chairman, subcommittee), R. N. Brodie, R. P. Davis, J. M. Hayes, B. (',.
Johnston, D. V. Messman, E. E. Paul, Henry Seitz, J. E. South.
Your committee continues to work toward completing the review of all articles
in Chapter 15 of the Manual. In addition, your committee receives special requests
for explanation of various terms and specification requirements. Among these was B
request to define the basic-oxygen process. The following definition is submitted as
information:
370 Iron and Steel Structures
The Basic-Oxygen Process
In the United States and Canada the term basic-oxygen steel making is used gen-
erically to describe a process in which molten iron is refined to steel under a basic slag
in a cylindrical furnace lined with basic refractories, by directing a jet of high-purity
gaseous oxygen onto the surface of the hot metal bath.
With respect to its essential chemical composition and metallurgical characteristics,
steel which has been made by the basic-oxygen process is quite similar to basic open-
hearth steel of the same grade. The differences between the two processes lie chiefly in
the design of the furnaces employed and in the relative extent to which high-purity
manufactured oxygen is used as a refining agent.
Report of Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles
K. L. DeBlois, Chairman
B. E. Daniels,
Vice Chairman
J. W. Chambers,
Secretary
D. V. Sartore
R. E. Kl'EHNER
W. L. Anderson
A. L. Leach
J. A. GUSTAFSON
L. R. Kubacki
C. V. Lund
J. F. HOLMBERG
C. E. Atwater
R. E. Anderson
J. W. Brent
T. P. Burgess
A. W. Carlson
H. M. Church (E)
F. H. Cramer (E)
D. J. Engle
J. T. Evans
YV. A. Genereux
S. L. Goldberg
S. F. Grear (E)
R. YV. Gunther
F. J. Hanraiian
YV. C. Howe
r. h. hunsinger
Milton Jarrell
\Y'. I). Keen) \
YV. B. Mackenzie
L. J. Mahkwakdi
W. H. Martin
E. A. Matnev
T. K. May
J. YV. N. Mays
I). H. McKlBBEN, Sr.
C. A. Meadows
C. H. Newlin
YV. H. O'Brien
YV. A. Oliver
F. E. Schneider
J. G. Shope
J. D. Tapp, Jr.
YV. A. Thompson, Jr.
YV. D. Turner
D. L. Walker
L. YV. YVood
( 'ommittee
(E) Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division1, AAK. Com-
mittee 7.
'/'<< the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your Committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
No report, since the only items requiring changes are currently under study
by Subcommittees 2, 3, and 5.
2. Grading rules and classification of lumber for railway uses; specifications
for structural timber, collaborating with other organizations interested.
Progress report on proposed grading rules and recommended unit working
stresses for hardwood structural timbers submitted as information, to be
considered for adoption one year hence page 372
3. Specifications for design of wood bridges and trestles.
The present allowable horizontal shear design stresses and positioning oi
loads for maximum shear may require revision as a result of the repeated
loading tests now in progress (Assignment 7), but no changes in the
specifications for design are recommended at this time.
4. Methods of fireproofing wood bridges and trestles, includiim fire retardanl
paints, collaborating with Committees 3 and 6.
Progress report, with specifications submitted for adoption page 373
5. Design of structural glued laminiated wood bridges and trestles.
No report. Progress is being made on plans and tables Eor laminated girders
and trestle members.
371
372 Wood Bridges and Trestles
6. Applications of synthetic resins and adhesives to wood bridges and trestles,
collaborating with Committees 8 and 15.
Advance report, in four parts, presented as information in Bulletin 573,
September-October 1962, pages 1 to 17, incl.
7. Repeated loading of timber structures.
First progress report on a program of tests of full-size bridge stringers in
repeated loading page 383
8. Protection of pile cut-offs.
The committee is not prepared to make a report at this time.
10. Non-destructive testing of wood.
A laboratory investigation on the use of a commercially available device
for determining decay in timber by use of gamma rays was made during
the past year. Field tests on timber trestles dusing this device will be made
in 1963.
The Committee on Wood Bridges and Trestles,
K. L. DeBlois, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 576, January 1963.
Report on Assignment 2
Grading Rules and Classification of Lumber For Railway
Uses; Specifications for Structural Timber
Collaborating with Other Organizations Interested
R. E. Kuehner (chairman, subcommittee), W. L. Anderson, A. W. Carlson, E. M. Cum-
mings, D. J. Engle, S. L. Goldberg, W. C. Howe, W. D. Keeney, A. L. Leach, C. V.
Lund, L. J. Markwardt, T. K. May, W. H. Martin, C. H. Newlin, W. H. O'Brien,
L. W. Wood.
Your committee submits as information a proposed grading rule for hardwood struc-
tural timbers and recommended working unit stresses for the grade in three hardwood
species groups for various conditions. This action has become necessary as a result of
the discontinued publication of the National Hardwood Lumber Association Structural
Grading Rules. The AREA Manual presently uses the discontinued NHLA Grading
Rules as a reference in the tables published on pages 7-1-19, 7-1-20, and 7-2-7.
Next year it is proposed to submit revised tables for the above pages, substituting
the proposed grading rule and working unit stresses where necessary, with the recom-
mendation that they be adopted and published.
HARDWOOD STRUCTURAL TIMBERS— PROPOSED GRADING RULES
Hardwood structural timbers shall comply with the requirements for "Select Car
Stock-Select Dimension or Common Dimension" as described on pages 78 to 80 of the
1960 Rules of the National Hardwood Lumber Association, with the following additional
requirements:
Wood Bridges and Trestles
373
Limiting slope of grain on any face, 1 in 8. The slope of grain is measured over a
distance sufficient to define the general slope, disregarding local deviations, as around
knots.
Knots in narrow faces or at the edges of wide faces at any point in the length of
the piece shall be limited to sizes of 1 in. in pieces 2 or 3 in thick, 2 in. in pieces 4 or
5 in thick, 3 in. in pieces 6 or 7 in thick, 2,]/2 in. in pieces 8 to 10 in thick, and 4J4
in. in pieces 12 in or thicker. Such knots shall be measured and limited between lines
parallel to the edges of the piece.
End shakes or season checks in the center half of the width measured between
lines parallel to the wide faces shall not exceed two-fifths the thickness of the timber in
size. End splits in the center half of the width shall be limited to an average length not
exceeding the thickness of the timber. A combination of maximum shakes, checks, or
splits in either end of any piece will not be permitted.
Recommended Working Unit Stresses
Property
hong-Time Loading
Dry
Decay
Hazard
Ten-Year Loading
Dry
Wet
Decay
Hazard
Black Gum, Red Gum, Tupelo
Bending, tension psi
Shear . psi
Compression perpendicular psi
Compression parallel psi
Modulus of elasticity 1000 psi
Red Oak and White Oak
Bending, tension psi
Shear psi
Compression perpendicular psi
Compression parallel psi
Modulus of elasticity 1000 psi
White Ash
Bending, tension psi
Shear . psi
Compression perpendicular psi
Compression parallel psi
Modulus of elasticity 1000 psi
850
100
330
r,oo
1320
1050
1 25
550
750
1650
1050
125
550
850
1650
850
90
220
550
1200
1050
110
365
700
1500
1050
110
365
750
1500
750
90
220
500
1200
950
110
365
650
1500
950
110
365
650
1500
900
110
365
C50
1320
1150
1 10
605
800
1650
1150
I id
605
•1(10
1650
900
100
240
600
1200
1150
120
400
750
1500
1150
L20
400
800
1500
800
100
240
550
1 200
1050
120
400
700
I :,( >( i
1050
120
Kill
750
1500
Report on Assignment 4
Methods of Fireproofing Wood Bridges and Trestles,
Including Fire-Retardant Paints
Collaborating with Committees 3 and 6
A. L. Leach (chairman, subcommittee), R. E. Anderson, J. W. Brent, B. E. Daniels,
W. A. Genereux, R. W. Gunther, J. A. Gustafson, R. H. Hunsinger, \Y I) KLeeney,
W. B. Mackenzie, C. A. Meadows, L. J. Markwardt, E. A. Matney, J. W. X. Mays,
D. H. McKibben, Sr., F. E. Schneider, W. A. Thompson, Jr., D. L. Walker.
Your committee submits for adoption and publication in the Manual the following
specifications for fire-retardant coatings fur CROSOted wood. These specifications were
published as information in Bulletin 562, January 1961,
J74 Wood Bridges and Trestles ^_^
SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE-RETARDANT COATINGS FOR
CREOSOTED WOOD
A. SCOPE
These specifications apply to:
a. Performance requirements of fire-retardant coating compositions for use with
wood treated with creosote or mixture of creosote with coal tar or petroleum, and
b. Methods for the acceptance testing of such fire-retardant coatings.
These specifications are intended primarily for use with coatings of the film-forming
classification, such as paints and mastics. Any material other than a film-forming type
shall conform to these specifications except where film-forming qualities are required for
fulfillment of the specification.
B. GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
1. Uniformity
a. All component raw materials of the product shall be thoroughly mixed and dis-
persed during its manufacture, unless the product is a multi-component system which
sets or polymerizes rapidly and requires mixing immediately prior to application.
b. The formulation and quality of the product shall be maintained constant by the
manufacturer and shall not be varied without notice.
2. Stability in Storage
The product shall maintain stability at temperatures above 32 deg F, shall not re-
quire unusual storage conditions, and shall conform to the requirements of the following
paragraphs:
a. In a freshly opened container the product shall reveal no curdling, livering, lump-
ing, decomposition, gelling or any other objectionable characteristic within 12 months
after delivery.
b. Separated, settled, caked or thickened materials shall be easily and adequately
dispersable with a paddle without change in the quality or properties of the product.
3. Applied Coating
A dry film of the product shall exhibit the following properties:
a. Adhesion: The product shall be cohesive and shall adhere to the primary surface
or to any secondary supporting surface.
b. Durability: The product shall resist water, brine, creosote, mixtures of creosote
with petroleum or coal tar, sunlight, freezing and thawing, and general temperature
extremes.
c. Foot Traffic: The product shall resist damage when applied on traffic areas.
d. Fire Retardancy : The product shall withstand heat or flames originated by mis-
cellaneous heat sources, including ignited fusees, hot brake shoe splinters, sparks, hot
coals or cinders, drops of molten metal, and burning debris.
4. Flammability of Wet Films
a. The evaporation of solvents or other materials from a wet film of the product
shall cease to constitute a flammable hazard within 4 hr after application.
b. A film of the product, applied so as to achieve the minimum total dry thickness
recommended by the manufacturer, shall cease to support combustion within 48 hr
after application of the final coat.
Wood Bridges and Trestles 375
5. Drying Time
A film of the product, applied at the maximum wet thickness recommended by the
manufacturer, within 36 hr after application and without forced drying, shall be hard
enough to allow firm pressure of the thumb against the coated object without rupture
of the film or adherence of coating to the thumb.
C. APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS AND INSTRUCTIONS
1. Handling Instructions
All precautions for storage and handling prior to and during application of the prod-
uct shall be stated clearly in an accompanying instruction leaflet prominently displayed
on each container, together with complete information and instructions for recommended
equipment and materials for surface preparation, thinning, and application.
2. Product Information
All information and physical measurements not specified elsewhere in these specifica-
tions, which might assist in the proper handling or testing of the product, shall accom-
pany the instructions and shall include the following:
a. Specific gravity, and weight in pounds per gallon, or weight to the nearest 0.1 g
of 1 pint of the coating.
b. Recommended maximum wet thickness and calculated coverage of a single-coat
application of the coating, unthinned and thinned with recommended proportions of
thinner.
c. Measured resultant dry thickness of the recommended maximum wet thickness
of a single-coat application.
d. Recommended minimum dry thickness required for fire-retardancy effectiveness.
e. Drying time required between applications, thinned and unthinned.
f. Duration of solvent fire hazard during the drying time of a single-coat applica-
tion, thinned and unthinned.
g. Drying or curing time required to attain maximum fire retardancy.
h. Recommended spray equipment (gun type, orifice size, spray pattern, pressure,
etc.)
i. Solvents and materials which may be used to clean application equipment.
j. Corrosiveness of product to container and spray equipment.
k. Toxicity to humans and animals of the product in the wet and dried conditions.
3. Working Properties
a. The product shall be applicable by brushing, spraying and, if it is a mastic, by
trowelling, or it shall be adaptable for spraying, without loss of quality, by addition
of a thinner recommended by the manufacturer.
b. A wet film of the product, when applied at the thickness recommended by the
manufacturer, shall not show sagging, running, pinholing or other objectionable features.
4. Surface Preparation
Timber surface preparation or treatment shall not be extensive and shall not require
unusual equipment, materials or operations.
376 Wood Bridges and Trestles
D. TESTING
1. Specimen Preparation
a. Wood Selection: The wood shall be selected from well-seasoned nominal 2- by
6-in boards of Grade B & Btr edge-grained southern yellow pine containing no more
than 10 percent heartwood, at least 14 ft in length, dressed on four sides andj free from
knots, stains, pitch pockets and bark. The maximum width of the annual growth rings
shall be no greater than tV in. Edge-grained shall mean that at both ends of a board,
where the wood has been cut cross sectionally, at least half of the acute angles between
lines drawn tangential to the annual rings and lines drawn perpendicular to the broad
surfaces of the board shall be no greater than 45 deg.
b. Sectioning: The first 6 in of the ends of each board shall be discarded, and the
remainder shall be cut laterally into 18-in sections. Each section shall be identified by
the board number and by its own number from one end of the board. Each section
shall be tested for moisture content at 6-in intervals along its longitudinal axis with an
electrical moisture meter employing metal probes which are no shorter than % in. The
moisture content of a section shall be greater than 8 percent and less than 15 percent.
The sections shall be protected from checking or loss of moisture, preferably by storage
in a cold, humidified atmosphere. A section which has checked shall not be used as a
test specimen.
c. Preservative Treatment: The dimensions of an 18-in section shall be measured
to the nearest 0.01 in and the volume calculated to the nearest 0.001 cu ft. Each section
shall be weighed to the nearest gram before preservative treatment. The creosote solu-
tions and treating methods employed for impregnation of the sections shall be prescribed
by the purchaser. After preservative treatment, each section shall be allowed to drain
freely for 24 hr, wiped clean, and weighed to the nearest gram. The preservative reten-
tion shall be calculated in pounds per cubic foot to the nearest 0.01 lb per cu ft, using
the previously obtained dimensions and volume calculations, and the resultant figure
shall be called "initial retention." The treated sections shall be stored for a minimum
of 30 days or a maximum of 60 days, at approximately 75 deg F and 50 percent relative
humidity, prior to a coating application or any form of testing. Immediately prior to
preparation of a section for use in testing procedures, the section shall be weighed to
the nearest gram, the net preservative retention shall be calculated; the resultant figure
shall be called "test retention." The test retention of any specimen shall be no less than
10 lb per cu ft. All treated or untreated specimens used in a test shall be subjected to
identical pre-test storage conditions.
2. Fire Tests
a. Testing In Fire-Test Cabinet
(1) Apparatus: The fire-test cabinet shall be a rectangular insulated chamber meas-
uring 31 in high, 10 in wide and 12 in deep. In order to suspend the specimen in the
fire-test cabinet, a supporting rod shall be affixed horizontally 1 in from the tops of
opposite walls of the cabinet. For draft control, the 2-in bottom section of the cabinet
shall consist of louvers which can be raised 90 deg. Two pairs of ungalvanized iron pipe
with % in internal diameter, each pair vertically parallel and separated by 3 in between
their longitudinal axes, shall be fastened to opposite sides of the cabinet. Orifices of
3*2 in diameter shall be located in a straight line at 1-in intervals, for 20 in along each
pipe, beginning at y2 in from the cap. The cabinet shall be equipped with a removable
Wood Bridges and Trestles
377
, 5ft 1|, 5ft
'«i
r~u- , r~&_
PIN HINGES
CAPPED ROD
J ANGLE IRON
_ 20 GAUGE UNGALVANIZED
SHEET STEEL
f DIA. NOTCHED HANGER ROD
FOR SUSPENDING TEST
SPECIMENS
~-± ASBESTOS MILLBOARD
— PRESSURE CLASPS FOR
HOLDING DOOR
| ANGLE IRON
T~ V
LOUVER HANDLES
OPENING FOR GAS INLET TUBE
FRONT VIEW
FIRE TEST CABINET
\ ASBESTOS MILLBOARD
I ANGLE IRON
I x i BAR STOCK
PIN HINGES
DOOR HANDLE
TOP VIEW
"4
VIEW PORT COVERED
WITH MICA SHEET
FRONT VIEW
DOOR HANDLE
FIRE TEST CABINET DOOR
{ ASBESTOS MILLBOARD
SIDE VIEW
PRESSURE CLASPS
SIDE VIEW
,U8
Wood Bridges and Trestles
h- - H
O:
J
TOP VIEW
□
*i
p
x=x
: — p
- | O.D. PIPE
CJ^AJ
FRONT VIEW
^ DIA ORIFICES ON INSIDE
OF ALL 4 BURNER PIPES
.1 I
GAS INLET
-*=£
SECTION AA
FIRE TEST CABINET BURNER
METAL STRAPS TO SUPPORT
TOPS OF BURNER PIPES
IT
TOP VIEW
FIRE TEST CABINET WITH DOOR AND BURNER IN PLACE
Wood Bridges and Trestles 379
door fitted with viewing ports covered with mica sheet. A pilot-flame orifice shall be
installed at the bottom of one pipe at each side of the cabinet.
(2) Fuel: Bottled liquid-petroleum gas, with a minimum propane content of 95
percent, shall be supplied to the burner pipes at the rate of 0.4 cu ft per min or ap-
proximately 60,000 Btu per hr during the course of a specimen ignition. The flames shall
extend approximately 4 in horizontally from the orifices and shall be of a definite yellow
color.
(3) Specimen Section and Position: The test specimen shall be selected by the
procedures specified under Sec. D, Art. 1, coated with a film of uniform thickness,
allowed to dry or cure completely, and shall be suspended vertically in the fire-test
cabinet at the initiation of the test. The broad faces of the specimen shall parallel the
two pairs of burner pipes at a distance of 3 in from the orifices, with the top end of
the specimen on a level with the top orifices.
(4) Test Procedure: A specimen shall be positioned in the fire-test cabinet with the
door closed and the pilot flames lit. The ignition of the specimen shall be effected by
quickly opening the fuel valve to the required setting and allowing the flames of the
ignited gas to be directed against the specimen for 5 min. The duration of self-sustained
flaming after ignition shall be recorded and designated as "free-burning time." The
period after which flaming has stopped and glowing occurs shall be recorded and desig-
nated as "glow time." The free-burning interval shall be terminated for one of the
following reasons:
(a) A maximum free-burning time of 30 min shall have passed.
(b) During the 30-min free-burning period it is judged that the flames are merely
flickering or flashing and constitute practical self-extinguishment, or that small
flames are being sustained only at the ends of the specimen.
If at the end of the 30-min free-burning period flaming continues at a rate requiring
the use of an accessory extinguishing agent, the flames shall be extinguished with a fire-
extinguishing gas.
The test may be conducted in a well insulated laboratory fume hood or on a table
placed under an insulated canopy. Both the fume hood and the canopy shall be equipped
with efficient, safe, smoke-exhaust fans. The exhaust fans shall be operating prior to
ignition of the specimen.
(5) Observations: The specimen shall be attentively observed during the ignition
and the free-burning periods, and specimen appearance, coating condition and flame
activity shall be recorded. Relative flame activity during the free-burning period and
at its termination shall be described with the following terminology.
Vigorous — Entire specimen flaming with little or no apparent diminishment of
combustion rate.
Very Strong — Approximately 75 percent of specimen flaming, with apparent com-
bustion rate slowly decreasing.
Strong — Approximately 50 percent of specimen flaming, with apparent combustion
rate decreasing.
Mild— Approximately 25 percent of specimen flaming, with apparent combustion
rate decreasing rapidly.
Scattered — Small areas of flaming win re creosote wricking maj lie occurring <>r
a heat trap may be located.
380 Wood Bridges and Trestles
Torching — Flames occurring with jet-like activity at points of coating rupture
or specimen checking.
Flickering — Small, virtually extinguished, flames at a few discrete points.
Flashing — Spontaneous extinguishment and reignition of an area.
After the free-burning period, the specimen shall be allowed to remain in the fire-
test cabinet, with the door removed, until glowing has ceased. The time required for
the cessation of glowing shall be recorded as "glow time."
The burned specimen shall be weighed to the nearest gram, with the coating re-
moved and wood char intact, not less than 24 nor more than 36 hr after the free-burning
period. The specimen shall be cleaned of char immediately, without damage to the wood,
and weighed again. The differences between the two weighings shall be recorded as the
weight of the char, and shall be calculated in pounds per cubic foot of volume of the
unburned specimen. The difference of weight of the specimen before burning and after
being burned and cleaned shall be recorded as its total weight loss, and shall be calcu-
lated in pounds per cubic foot by volume of the unburned specimen.
The thickness of the burned, cleaned specimen shall be measured to the nearest
b1? in on its longitudinal axis at a point 6 in from the end which was topmost in the
fire-test cabinet. The difference between the thickness of the specimen before and after
cleaning shall be divided by two and recorded as char depth.
Other observations which shall be recorded are.
(a) Coating thickness and weight, wet.
(b) All defects found in a coated or uncoated specimen before a fire test.
(c) Blistering, Assuring, rupturing, intumescence, sloughing or other effects ex-
hibited by a coating during a test, and the elapsed time before their occur-
rence.
(d) Relative extent of preservative bleeding during a fire test.
(e) Relative amount of smoke production during a fire test.
(6) Acceptance Criteria:
(a) The specimen shall be totally self-extinguished within the 30-min free-burning
period, or shall exhibit only flickering flames.
(b) The total weight loss of the specimen, with char removed, shall not exceed
30 percent, or 15 lb per cu ft by volume of the unburned specimen.
(c) The char depth shall not exceed % in. The char shall be evenly distributed
with no occurrence of cupped areas.
(d) The quantity of char shall not exceed 2.5 lb cu ft by volume of the unburned
specimen.
(e) Glowing shall cease within 1 hr after termination of the free-burning period.
(f) The coating shall remain intact upon the specimen throughout the ignition,
free-burning and glow periods, and shall exhibit no sloughing, spalling or
peeling.
(g) The performance of a minimum of three specimens, prepared in an identical
manner, shall conform to the stipulations of the acceptance criteria.
b. Fusee Test
(1) Construction: The fusee test apparatus shall consist of two specimens selected
by the procedures specified under Sec. D, Art. 1, and a section of gypsum or other fire-
proof insulating board measuring 18 by 16 by 1 in. The two wood specimens shall be
Wood Bridges and Trestles 381
coated uniformly with the same thickness used for specimens tested in the fire-test
cabinet, and allowed to dry or cure completely. The coated specimens shall be joined
together lengthwise in the shape of an "L", forming one side and the bottom of a flat-
bottomed trough. The trough shall be completed in a "U" shape by joining the insula-
tion board to the bottom specimen. The specimens need not be nailed or fastened to-
gether. The bottom specimen may be laid flat, with the other coated specimen and the
insulation board standing on their edges and placed flush against the edges of the bottom
specimen.
(2) Procedure: The trough shall be situated in a laboratory fume hood, with the
exhaust fan operating. A 10-min fusee shall be ignited and laid snugly in the corner
formed by the junction of the two coated specimens. When the fusee has been con-
sumed the duration and intensi'y of residual flame activity shall be recorded.
(3) Acceptance Criteria:
(a) Flames shall be totally or virtually self-extinguished within 10 min after the
fusee has stopped burning.
(b) The coating shall not flake, peel, crumble, slough or exhibit any other effects
which result in the exposure of the wood substrate.
(c) Glowing shall have ceased within 30 min after flaming has stopped.
c. Accelerated Weathering Test
(1) Apparatus and Specimens: When a coating shall have conformed to the stand-
ards of the first tests during initial testing, it shall be used to prepare five additional
specimens which shall be approximately identical to those which had been tested. After
thorough drying or curing, the specimens shall be exposed to artificial sunlight and
simulated rainfall in a weathering device described in ASTM Specifications, designation
E 42.
(2) Procedure: Each specimen shall be positioned vertically in the weathering de-
vice, with one of its broad surfaces facing the light source. The same surface shall face
the light throughout the test. The test shall be terminated after an accumulated light-
exposure time of 1000 hr or when, at any prior time, the coating is judged to have
failed. The decision of apparent coating failure shall be subjective and shall be based
on the appearance of excessive blistering or softening, or exposure of wood by slough-
ing, peeling, flaking, cracking or other effects. The test shall be conducted in accordance
with the following program:
(a) The specimen shall be exposed to artificial sunlight at all times during tin
operation of the weathering device, except for such time as shall be re-
required for the restriking of the carbon arc.
(b) The specimens shall be mounted, with a face-to-face diameter of >o in, on a
circular rack which rotates at the rate of I rpm. A water spray in the weath-
ering device shall operate for 18 min at intervals of 102 min, so thai dur-
ing each 2 hr of light radiation the specimens shall be exposed to water for
18 min. In this manner each specimen shall receive approximately 2.5-3.0
min direct water spraj during each 2-hr radiation period.
Exposure ill the artificial weathering device shall be undertaken daily, for a
total of 90 hr within 5 days. At the end of each 00 hr of exposure, tin-
specimens shall l>e allowed to cool at room temperature for a minimum of
2 hr and then placed for 65 hr in a cold chamber adjusted to maintain a
382 Wood Bridges and Trestles
temperature of — 20 deg F. At the end of the cold period, the specimens
shall be allowed to warm at room temperature for a minimum of 2 hr before
again placing them in the weathering device. Extreme caution shall be ob-
served during all handling and transfer operations involving a specimen so as
not to modify its condition.
(3) Acceptance Criteria: At the termination of the weathering program, if failure
has not occurred, the specimens shall be subjected to the fire tests and shall be rated
by the acceptance criteria of those tests.
d. Brine Resistance Tests
(1) Apparatus: An assembly shall be arranged consisting of a stop-cock-controlled
funnel and a small container equipped with an overflow outlet. The container shall
measure 4 in on all sides, with an overflow tube of a minimum % in diameter leading
out from a point 1 in below the top edge, and shall be composed of waterproof and
chemical-resistant materials, such as glass, rubber or plastics. The funnel shall be large
enough to contain a minimum of 500 ml of liquid and shall be placed vertically over
the container.
(2) Specimen Selection and Preparation: An 18-in preservative-treated specimen
shall be selected by the procedures outlined under Sec. D, Art. 1, discarding 4*^ in of
each end of the specimen. The remainder of the specimen shall be sawn laterally at 2-in
intervals, yielding four sections, each of which shall be weighed to the nearest 0.1 g.
A uniform continuous coating film of the same thickness used for the fire-test specimens
shall be applied to all surfaces of the section, beginning at a point 1 in from one end.
The thickness and weight of the wet coating application shall be recorded, and the
coating shall be allowed to dry or cure completely.
(3) Test Procedure: The container shall be filled to the overflow outlet with a 10
percent sodium chloride brine solution. The funnel also shall be filled with the brine
solution. The test shall be conducted at room temperature, 75 to 80 deg F, and the
brine shall be maintained at that temperature throughout the test. The coated end of a
specimen shall be immersed at approximately a 45-deg angle in the container, with the
wider side facing upward, and with the uncoated area of the opposite side resting on
the edge of the container. No more than 4 nor less than 2>y2 in of a coated side shall
be below the surface of the solution. The tip of the funnel shall be positioned 1 in above
the center of the line between the coated and uncoated areas of the specimen. At the
start of the test, the stop cock shall be opened sufficiently to allow drops of brine to fall
at the rate of approximately 10 drops per min, striking the specimen at the midpoint
of the line between the coated and uncoated areas. Dripping and immersion shall be
continuous for 300 hr. The effluent from the specimen container shall be collected in
any suitable container and discarded. At the end of 300 hr, the brine solution in the
specimen container shall be examined for discoloration and for materials which have
separated from the coating. The specimen shall be observed for blistering, Assuring,
crumbling or other effects.
(4) Acceptance Criteria: The specimen shall be examined immediately at the end of
a test and at a time one week after the test. Fissures in the coating shall be no wider
than hairline cracks. Blisters shall be no larger than % in. in diameter. Gentle teasing
of the coating with a knife point shall not result in easy dislodgement of coating par-
ticles. The dry thickness of the coating at any location on the specimen shall not have
Wood Bridges and Trestles 383
decreased by more than l/s, of the original dry thickness. Discoloration of the brine solu-
tion and the presence of coating particles in the container shall indicate possible leaching
or solvation of the fire-retardant constituents of the coating.
e. Foot Traffic Test
A specimen shall be selected and prepared in the same manner as the specimens
used for the fire tests, with the same thickness of coating applied. The coating shall be
allowed to dry or cure completely.
(1) Procedure: The specimen shall be heated for 1 hr at 140 deg F in an electric
oven. The specimen shall then be removed from the oven and immediately laid flat
on one of its broad surfaces on a protected area of the floor. The uppermost surface
shall be stepped upon with one foot by a person weighing no less than ISO lb. His
entire weight shall be concentrated on the specimen for 1 min, at the end of which
time he shall execute a 45-deg twisting movement of the ball of his foot upon the
coating and then step off the specimen.
(2) Acceptance Criteria: The coating shall not exhibit tearing and shall not be
lifted from the wood substrate by adhesion to the shoe used to exert pressure. Should
these or other objectionable effects occur, the test shall be repeated, using mineral
aggregate or similar material spread over the specimen surface while the coating is
still wet.
When a surfacing material is used in conjunction with a coating, it shall not be
sufficiently dislodged to require resurfacing the specimen.
Report on Assignment 7
Repeated Loading of Timber Structures
C. V. Lund (chairman, subcommittee), R. E. Anderson, W. L. Anderson, C. E. Atwater,
A. VV. Carlson, B. E. Daniels, D. J. Engle, W. A. Genereux, F. J. Hanrahan, J. F.
Holmberg, W. C. Howe, L. R. Kubacki, W. H. Martin, T. K. May, W. A. Oliver,
F. E. Schneider, J. G. Shope, J. D. Tapp, Jr., W. D. Turner, L. W. Wood.
Your committee presents as information the following synopsis of Report No. ER-
26* released during the year by the Engineering Research Division, Association of Amer-
ican Railroads. This is the first progress report of a program of tests of full-size bridge
stringers in repeated loading.
Laboratory Investigation to Determine Static and
Repeated-Load Strength of Full-Size Douglas
Fir Glued-Laminated Stringers
In 1960 the AAR Research Center initiated a program of tests on the strength of
full-size timber bridge stringers in -tatic and repeated loading, to obtain needed data for
use in re-evaluating allowable working stresses. The program is being carried out in
cooperation with the lumber manufacturing, fabricating and treating industries, and the
Forest Products Laboratory of the United States Department of Agriculture.
'Copies of the complete report may be obtained from the director of engineering research, \\K.
3140 S. Federal St., Chicago 16.
384
Wood Bridges and Trestles
Testing full-size glued-laminated Douglas fir stringer at
AAR Research Center.
The initial tests were conducted on 24 untreated glued-laminated Douglas fir
stringers 7 in by 16^4 in, 14 ft long, fabricated to a selected commercial standard.
Three stringers were tested statically and 21 in repeated loading. The tests were designed
with particular emphasis on the determination of horizontal shear strengths and the
effect of load position on shear resistance. Two equal loads were applied, spaced 4 ft
8 in apart, on a span length of 12 ft 10 in. The first load was placed at either 1%, 2^,
or 3 times the depth of the stringer from one end support. Tests were carried to failure
or to approximately 2 million cycles of maximum stress, whichever occurred first.
The results of this first series have been published as Report No. ER-26. The report
includes the test data obtained at the AAR Laboratory, also data on the physical proper-
ties of the stringers as determined by the Forest Products Laboratory.
Nine stringers failed in horizontal shear under repeated loading and S in tension;
7 stringers did not fail. Failure of each of 3 stringers tested in static loading at the
several load position was in tensioa
Wood Bridges and Trestles
385
FIG. 1
LABORATORY INVESTIGATION OF CLUED LAMINATED S7R\NGERS
EFFECT OF LOAD POSITION ON STATIC & REPEATED LOAD SHEAR STRENGTH
IOOO
BOO
5
400
200
- 0
T
T"
STATIC LOADS
>T
1 _______
-REPEATED LOADS
i
DESIGN
STREP'S
1.00 d 150 d 2 25 d 3 00 d
POSITION OF LOAD
(V BEING \b INCHES)
NOTE'- VALUES SHOWN FOR REPEATED LOADS ARE THOSE
WH\CH WERE SUSTA\N_D FOR 2,000,000 CYCLES.
.t- TENSION FAILURE
4-OOd
The results indicate that as the loads approach the support and the end shear in-
creases, the unit shear resistance also tends to increase. Conversely, as the loads approach
the center of the span both the end shear and shear resistance tend to increase. This
suggests that horizontal shear may be related to deflection.
The horizontal shear strength of the beams in this series in repeated loading at 2
million cycles is estimated to approximate 350 psi when the first load is located at _5_
times the depth of the beam from the support; 300 psi when located at 2% times the
depth of the beam from the support, and 275 psi when located at 3 times the depth
of the beam from the support, as shown on Fig. 1. Current allowable working stress is
150 psi, based, however, on long-time duration of static loading.
No consistent relationship was found between measured shearing strains and man-
ner of failure in repeated loading, nor was there any change in strain with cycling from
which imminent failure could be predicted.
The tests of physical properties conducted by the Forest Products Laboratory
failed to establish any correlation between strength in repeated loading and rate of
growth (percent summerwood), or spedfii gravity, which properties are known t<> beat
a relationship in static loading. Examination showed that failures in horizontal shear
tended to follow annular growth rings of the wood, as illustrated on Fig. J.
In an Appendix to the main report information is presented on exploratory tests
of 16 similar full-size stringers thai preceded the current program. These tests wen
ducted in like manner, but with loads spaced 3 ft 1 in apart symmetrically about the
386
Wood Bridges and Trestles
0.44
\ 25
0.47
-26
048
|=3§5%J
«.yb*3
0.4/
r
0.46
BEAM 17
LEFT
BEAM 18
Fig. 2 — Ends of beams 17 and 18 as viewed toward center of span.
Both beams failed in shear at the left end in the approximate area indicated.
The figures on the laminations indicate percent summerwood and specific
gravity.
center of span (except for two stringers) to produce increments of design stresses in
both shear and flexure simultaneously, and provided information from which the cur-
rent program was planned. The shear strengths developed in these stringers were gen-
erally lower with but one failure in tension under repeated loading. Examination of
sections of these stringers after testing revealed considerable interior checking in many
of the laminations, the cause for which was not determined, but which may have had
bearing on the shear strengths developed. In these exploratory tests the first load was
located 3.7 times the depth of the beam from the near support, and this also may have
had bearing on the lower shear values. The estimated horizontal shear strength in
repeated loading for these stringers at 2 million cycles was determined to be approxi-
mately 180 psi.
Report of Committee 11 — Engineering and
Valuation Records
fl
M. C. Wolf, Chairman
H. R. Williams,
\7/ce Chairman
W. S. Gates, Secretary
W. A. Krauska
J. Bert Byars
E. W. Smith
W. J. Pease
C. R. Dolan
M. M. Cerber
C. F. Olson
F. A. Rorerts
R. B Aldridge
F. B. Baldwin (E)
G. R. Berquist
B. A. Bertenshaw (E)
H. C. Boley
C. E. Bynane
J. R. Clayton
B. J. Cook
F. O. Crosgrove
F. H. DeMoyer
R. L. Ealy
A. L. Engwall
Morton Friedman
R. F. Garner
E. W. Gibson
\Y. M. Hager
C. C. Haire (E)
H. N. Halper
Nelson Hammond
J. H. Hande (E)
M. J. Hebert
J. W. HlGGINS
J. A. L. Houston
L. W. Howard
R. D. Igou
W. H. Kieiil
R. A. Larivtere
C. E. Lex, Jr.
J. L. Mantiiey
C. W. Meyer
B. H. Moore
B. F. Nauert
F. H. Neely
D. E. Pergrin
C. H. Rapp
H. L. Restall
C. S. Robey
E. J. Rockefeller
H. B. Sampson
R. L. Samuell
R. S. Shaw, Jr.
J. N. Smeaton
Joel E. Stein
J. B. Styles
J. R. Traylor
W. C. Wieters
Louis Wolf (E)
Committee
(E) Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 11.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your Committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Xo recommendations for revision of manual. Study of Chapter 11 has been
completed for the time being.
2. Bibliography on subjects pertaining to engineering and valuation records.
Progress report, submitted as information page 388
3. Office and drafting practices.
A >tudy of microfilming of records and reports is in progress, but no report
is submitted.
5. Use of statistics and data processing in railway engineering.
A study is in progress, but report is withheld pending revision of ICC
requirements for valuation reports.
6. Valuation and depreciation.
(a) Current developments in connection with regulatory bodies and courts.
Progress report, submitted as information page 391
387
388 Engineering and Valuation Records
(b) ICC valuation orders and reports.
No report.
(c) Development of depreciation data.
No report.
7. Revisions and interpretations of ICC accounting classifications.
Progress report, submitted as information page 393
8. Suggested instructions for making field checks and their application to com-
pletion reports.
A study is in progress, but report is withheld pending revision of ICC re-
quirements for valuation reports.
9. Simplification of annual reports on Form 588 to the Interstate Commerce
Commission, and underlying Completion Reports.
No report because this assignment is dependent on the disposition of Valu-
ation Order 30 of the Interstate Commerce Commission.
The Committee on Engineering and Valuation Records,
M. C. Wolf, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 576, January 1963.
Report on Assignment 2
Bibliography on Subjects Pertaining to Engineering
and Valuation Records
J. B. Byars (chairman, subcommittee), C. R. Dolan, M. Friedman, R. F. Garner, H. N.
Halper, L. W. Howard, J. A. Houston, R. D. Igou, B. H. Moore, F. H. Neely,
C. F. Olson, W. J. Pease, E. J. Rockefeller, H. R. Williams, M. C. Wolf.
Depreciation
Railway Age, Nov. 6, 1961, p. 10
"Watching Washington" — Presentation of new depreciation terms to the Government.
Railway Age, April 9, 1962, p. 11
President calls for transport reforms. Review of depreciation, "will be to give full
recognition to current economic forces, including obsolescence, which in their impact
upon the lives of appreciable assets may affect quite differently different modes of trans-
portation and, therefore, their competitive relationships."
Railway Age, July 16-23, 1962, p. 9
What depreciation rules mean to railroads — Rolling stock, communication systems,
signaling facilities, roadway machines, small tools and shop machinery may now be
written off in 14 years for tax purposes.
Modem Railroads, Dec. 1961, pp. 24 and SI
Report from Washington. "Depreciation relief coming?"
Editorial comment. "Turning point on depreciation?"
Engineering and Valuation Records 389
Modern Railroads, Aug. 1961, p. 42
Report from Washington. "Liberalized depreciation here at last."
The Accounting Review, July 1962, p. 452
"A System of Retirement Frequencies for Depreciable Assets" — A general method
for deriving the survival coefficients (or their counterparts, the retirement coefficients)
for depreciable physical property.
The Accounting Review, Aug. 1961, p. 539
"The Tax Depreciation Muddle" — A discussion which primarily concerns those busi-
nesses which require a large investment in relatively long-lived plant and equipment
facilities.
The Accounting Digest, March 1962, p. 147
"Industrial Obsolescence Danger" — Important machines become obsolete long before
the tax life as assigned by the Treasury Department has ended.
The Accounting Digest, June 1962, p. 215
An evaluation of the new rules on depreciation as proposed by the Kennedy Ad-
ministration.
Weekly Information Bulletin (The American Short Line Railroad Association)
July 16, 1962. pp. 291-293.
Depreciation Schedules and Procedures Revised — Summary of Treasury Depart-
ment's new Depreciation Guidelines and Rules as it affects each railroad account.
(Procedure 62-21)
Weekly Information Bulletin (The American Short Line Railroad Association)
July 16, 1962, pp. 293-294.
Reprint of editorial appearing in The Wall Street Journal of Aug. 13, 1962, called
"A Reduction of Absurdity" commenting on the misconceptions of the new reform.
To quote, "The depreciation overhaul is indeed a long-overdue step in the right direc-
tion. It is no depreciation of the Treasury's careful work to say that many more steps
must be taken on the road to sound economic growth."
Standard Federal Tax Reports, No. 32, July 11, 1962
New Depreciation Rules with Explanation. This booklet includes U. S. Treasury
Department IRS Publication No. 456, "Depreciation Guidelines and Rules", for Revenue
Procedure 62-21, with a comprehensive explanation of the new procedure.
Standard Federal Tax Reports, No. 37, August 16, 1962
Official Tables for New Depreciation Rules. This booklet includes U. S. Treasury
Department IRS Publication No. 457, "Tables for Applying Revenue Procedure 62-21"
together with a new complete text of Part III of the new procedure.
Standard Federal Tax Reports, No. 43, Oct. 1, 1962
Additional IRS questions and answers on new depreciation guide lines and rules.
Taxes
Railway Age, April 9, 1962, pp. 8-11
"President Calls for Transport Reforms" — Revision of transportation taxes.
Railway Age, April 16, 1962, pp. 14-15
President Kennedy's Message to Congress.
Discussion of various taxes: excise, property, income.
390 Engineering and Valuation Records
Saturday Review, April 14, 9162, pp. 19-21
A good summary of railroad ills, including an explanation of tax inequalities and
needed changes.
U. S. News & World Report, Sept. 11, 1961, pp. 76-77
"What Will Really Be Done to Help Transportation?" — Recommends giving rail-
roads new tax breaks on money invested in equipment.
Office Procedure
Railway Age, Sept. 4, 1961, p. 15
Kardex filing system for computer instructions for use with electronic data processing
systems.
Railway Age, Nov. 27, 1961, p. 53
Computer Role:
1. Management information and control.
2. Interdepartmental cooperation.
Railway Age, June 18, 1962, p. 31
Cost-cutting tools, methods, and records.
Railway Age, July 9, 1962, pp. 20-21
1. How I.C. Billing System Saves Time and Money.
2. Systems Approach Offers Big Payoff.
Modern Railroads, Sept. 1961, p. 129
New High-Speed "Solid State" Computer.
Modern Railroads, Jan. 1962, p. 44
1. Electronics in data processing.
2. Role of better cost rinding.
3. Why not share computers?
Modern Railroads, July 1962, p. 63
Uses of data processing equipment.
Modern Railroads, Aug. 1962, p. 75
CN's high speed data processing network links officers, regional centers, and system
headquarters.
Reproduction Methods, Dec. 1961
"Microfilm Is in the Cards at ARMA." A card system for storing microfilmed engi-
neering drawings, permitting handling, reproduction and distribution of engineering data
at lower cost and greater speed than conventional methods.
Accounting
Railway Age, June 18, 1962, p. 31
Accounting data provides management with accurate, timely and pertinent infor-
mation on which to base decision-making.
Modern Railroads, Nov. 1961, p. 113
Timely reports from a centralized, mechanized, accounting department provide
Frisco management with needed statistics for sound control.
Engineering and Valuation Records 391
Report on Assignment 6
Valuation and Depreciation
(a) Current Developments in Connection with Regulatory Bodies and Courts
C. R. Dolan (chairman, subcommittee), R. B. Aldridge, G. R. Berquist, J. B. Byars,
J. R. Clayton, C. E. Clonts, F. H. DeMoyer, R. L. Ealy, A. L. Engwall, R. F.
Garner, VV. S. Gates, Jr., E. W. Gibson, H. N. Halper, M. J. Hebert, J. VV. Higgins,
L. W. Howard, R. D. Igou, R. A. Lariviere, J. L. Manthey, B. H. Moore, C. F.
Olson, C. H. Rapp, Jr., H. L. Restall, C. S. Robey, E. J. Rockefeller, J. B. Styles,
H. R. Williams.
ICC Bureau of Accounts
The Section of Valuation was engaged principally during the year in railroad and
pipeline work.. Tentative and final valuation reports were prepared for pipeline carriers,
and by the end of the year statements will be completed showing the elements of value
for all Class I line-haul and switching and terminal companies as of December 31, 1961.
During the year 1961, Class I line-haul carriers charged to Account 459 — Valuation
Expenses, $743,899 contrasted with $824,352 for the year 1960.
As of October 1, 1962, pipeline and rail carriers were delinquent in the filing of
valuation reports with the Bureau as follows: 4 line-haul companies for 1959, and 16
line-haul and 2 switching and terminal companies for 1960. Valuation reports covering
property changes for the year 1961 have been received from 30 line-haul and switching
and terminal companies and 57 pipeline carriers.
The total authorized personnel for valuation and depreciation work in the Section
of Valuation on October 1, 1962 was 30.
During the year the Commission released the Schedule of Annual Indices for Car-
riers by Railroad, and the Schedule of Annual and Period Indices for Carriers by Pipe-
line for the year 1961.
Simplification of BV-588 returns: Further progress in this matter has been sus-
pended pending the outcome of legislation introduced in the 87th Congress amending
the Valuation Act to relieve the Commission of the mandatory reporting by carriers of
quantities in reporting changes in their properties.
Report of the Committee on Valuation,
National Association of Railroad and Utilities Commissioners
In previous reports the committee has presented a review of the annual report
of the Committee on Valuation of the National Association of Railroad and Utilities
Commissioners. A review of this year's report of the Committee on Engineering, De-
preciation and Valuation of the association discloses that the Committee on Valuation
has been combined with the Committee on Engineering, likewise the Committee on
Depreciation. Special subcommittees of the enlarged committee will report on these
two subjects. At the time of the preparation of the report, the valuation group had
not been established. The Committee on Engineering has a rather broad agenda and is
dealing with proposed service rules for gas, electric, telephone and water utilities. Sev-
eral subcommittees are keeping abreast of developments in the fields of gas safety, rail-
road highway grade crossing protection and the use of nuclear energy in power produc-
tion, and sample testing of electric meters. The depreciation group is considering:
1. Review accomplishments of former Committee on Depreciation.
2. Review unfinished plans of former Committee on Depreciation
Hull. 576
392 Engineering and Valuation Records
3. Consider and select:
a. Long-range program for the Subcommittee on Depreciation.
b. Activities for 1962-1963 which will implement the long-range program.
4. Suggested projects for long-range program:
a. Revise and expand the 1943 report of the Committee on Depreciation.
b. Prepare manual for use of commission staff in conducting depreciation
studies. This could include specific methods and examples of accumulation
of data and computation of depreciation rates. It could also include a bibli-
ography of recommended books and articles.
c. Study of historical data required for depreciation studies of group proper-
ties of utilities and preparation of recommended procedures for utilities to
acquire these data.
d. Accumulation of actual mortality data for various classes of group proper-
ties of utilities. This would provide typical life tables that would be used
in depreciation studies of smaller utilities and those that have accumulated
only limited mortality data.
Revision of Depreciation Rules and
Investment Credit for Income Tax Purposes
The U. S. Treasury Department Internal Revenue Service issued Publication No. 456
(7-62), officially denominated I.R.S. Revenue Procedure 62-21, in July 1962. This Rev-
enue Procedure provides basic reforms in the guideline lines for depreciation and in the
administration of depreciation for tax purposes.
The new guidelines for depreciation involve a major departure from past practices.
Most significantly, in pursuing the achievement of the law's objective of permitting a
reasonable allowance for depreciation, they seek a reasonable overall result in measuring
depreciation, rather than approaching depreciation on an item-by-item basis. In lieu of
Bulletin F's 5000 separate categories of depreciable business property, the new guide-
lines and rules group all such property into approximately 75 broad classes of depreci-
able assets, divided among four groups. Use of the new guideline lives is not mandatory,
and depreciation methods and procedures currently in use by any taxpayer may con-
tinue to be used without alteration. Effective, however, for all taxable years for which
a tax return is due on or after July 12, 1962, any taxpayer may voluntarily elect to
compute depreciation in accordance with the new guidelines and rules. Thus, for rail-
roads the new guidelines and rules can first be employed in the Federal income tax
returns for 1962, due March 15, 1963.
Section 2 of the Revenue Act of 1962, which became law on October 16, 1962,
provides for an investment credit.
The investment credit provisions of the Act allow a taxpayer's liability for income
tax, for the year 1962 or any year thereafter, to be reduced by an amount equal to
7 percent of the "qualified investment" in depreciable property for the year.
The amount of the credit so allowed is subject to the limitation, however, that it
may not exceed so much of the taxpayer's liability for income tax for the year as does
not exceed $25,000 plus 25 percent of any liability over $25,000.
The "qualified investment," to which the 7 percent is applied, is determined by
multiplying the "basis" of "new" property, or the "cost" of "used" property, by a
Engineering and Valuation Records 393
specified percentage which depends on the estimated useful life of the property at the
time it is placed in service by the taxpayer. This percentage is 100 percent if the esti-
mated useful life of the property is 8 years or more; 66% percent if the estimated useful
life is 6 or more but less than 8 years; 33 Mi percent if the estimated useful life is 4 or
more but less than 6 years. No investment credit is allowed for an investment in any
depreciable property whose estimated useful life at the time it is placed in service is
less than 4 years.
In the case of "used" property only, there is a further limit which prevents more
than $50,000 of the cost of such property from being included in "qualified investment"
for any one year.
The property with respect to which the credit is allowed — referred to by the Act
as "section 38 property" — must be depreciable or amortizablc property which is either
(A) "tangible personal property," or (B) "other tangible property (not including a
building and its structural components)" which is "(i) used as an integral part of
manufacturing, production, or extraction or of furnishing transportation, communica-
tions, electrical energy, gas, water, or sewage disposal service, or (ii) constitutes a re-
search or storage facility used in connection with any of the activities" just referred to.
Railroad tracks and signals have been determined as being section 38 property.
The Act contains the provision which requires a taxpayer to reduce the basis of
any section 38 property by an amount equal to 7 percent of the qualified investment
with respect to such property. This provision, it should be noted, requires the basis of
section 38 property to be reduced by the full amount of 7 percent of the qualified invest-
ment, even though the taxpayer may not have been able to use the credit because of
the limitations which prevent the credit from exceeding the first $25,000 of his tax
liability plus 25 percent of any such liability in excess of $25,000. Since the amount of
the required downward adjustment in basis may in some cases be larger than the
amount of the credit actually usable by a taxpayer — notably, where the taxpayer has
no tax liability — the Act contains a provision which allows a special deduction for any
portion of the credit which remains unused even after application of the 3-year carry-
back and 5-year carry-forward provisions. Subject to certain exceptions, this deduction
is generally allowed to be taken in the first year after the last year to which the unused
credit could have been carried forward.
Report on Assignment 7
Revisions and Interpretations of ICC Accounting
Classifications
M. M. Gerber (chairman, subcommittee). C. E. Clonts, C. R. Dolan, A I. Engwall,
\V. S. Gates, Jr.. W. M. Eager, C. W. Meyer, H. II. Moore, W. J. Pease, C. H.
Rapp, F. A. Roberts, C. S. Robey, H. B. Sampson. J. R. Traylor.
This is a progress report, presented as information.
The Interstate Commerce Commission by order of November 8, l°6l. adopted a
revised issue of the Uniform System of Accounts for Railroad Companies as amended
to. and effective as of, January 1. 1962, known as the Issue of 1962, This revised issue
incorporates former ICC subject I'm Acquisition of Railwaj Operating Property, and
ICC Subject 471 — Rearrangement and Revision, of the General and Special Instructions
394 Engineering and Valuation Records
in the Uniform System of Accounts for Railroad Companies, which were reported in
the 1960, 1961 and 1962 Proceedings.
The more important changes appearing in the new issue are as follows:
1. Instructions For Proper Accounts
(a) Merger, Consolidation and Purchase of a Railway Operating Entity or System:
Formerly, Account 733 — Acquisition Adjustment, dealt with all costs of railroad
property acquisitions, purchases, mergers, consolidations, reorganizations, receivership
sales or transfers or otherwise, and the amounts recorded in the road and equipment
account were the original costs or estimated original costs.
Account 733 has now been cancelled and a new Account 80 — Other Elements of
Investment, has been added, in which are includible amounts formerly carried in Account
733 and not otherwise disposed of.
The new instructions separate the acquisitions of railway property as between
pooling of interests, purchase or merger of subsidiaries.
Amounts recorded in the road and equipment accounts in connection with pooling
of interests shall be at the amounts shown in the accounts of the predecessor company,
adjusted to conform with the Accounting rules of the Commission.
In regard to purchases, the new instructions specify that amounts includible in the
road and equipment accounts shall be the actual cost to the purchaser of the transporta-
tion property acquired, distributed to the primary accounts (except land) by using the
percentage relationship between purchase price and the original cost of the property as
shown in the valuation records prepared in accordance with the orders of the Commis-
sion. Land is to be recorded, as formerly, at original cost as reported in basic valuation
reports under Valuation Order No. 7. Land reported without cost, except land donated,
shall be computed at its estimated original cost. Land subsequently acquired shall be
added at original cost, at time of dedication, to transportation purposes.
The new instructions provide that acquisitions and merger of property of sub-
sidiaries are to be considered either as a pooling of interests or as a purchase, depending
on whether control was initially acquired through issuance of capital stock, when it is
to be accounted for as a pooling of interests; or if acquired through purchase, when
it is to be accounted for as such.
In the case of consummation of a reorganization or receivership the amounts in-
cludible in the road and equipment accounts shall be recorded (as formerly) at
original cost.
ICC Accounting Series Circular No. 129 issued May 31, 1962, provides that when
property is retired from service, an equitable proportion of the balance in Account 80 —
Other Elements of Investment, applicable to that property arising from a merger, pur-
chase or reorganization, is to be cleared therefrom on a consistent basis.
(b) Construction Projects In Which Governmental Agencies, Individuals, or Others,
and the Carrier Participate:
Formerly only the cost borne by the carrier in connection with construction projects
involving joint use of facilities by the carrier and others, was recorded in the property
accounts; whereas the entire cost of constructing facilities exclusively used and owned
by the carrier, was included in the property accounts without deduction on account
of contributions received from others; the amount representing the value of donations
being credited to account 734 — Donations and Grants.
Engineering and Valuation Records 395
Also, formerly amounts billed against a lessee company for a proportion of the
cost of constructing facilities under a contract which covers the joint use of such facil-
ities but does not transfer title, was credited by the owning company to account 508 —
Joint Facility Rent Income. The entire cost of the facilities was charged by the owning
company to its property accounts.
The new instructions specify that the amount includible in the property account for
construction projects in which governmental agencies, individuals, or others, and tin-
carrier participate, shall be:
(1) The payment made by the carrier for its share of the cost of construction,
plus
(2) The recorded cost (estimated if unknown) of property relinquished as a
direct result of the arrangement and retired from srevice, less the value of
salvage recovered therefrom by the carrier, and less depreciation accrued on
depreciable property, which is part of the carriers cost of the project. The
property account shall not include any cost or value for facilities or land
contributed or paid for by governmental agencies, individuals or others.
Former Account 734 — Donations and Grants, is now eliminated. Balances carried
in this account shall be cleared. ICC Accouting Series Circular No. 128, dated March
20, 1962, provides that amounts carried in former Account 734 — Donations and Grants,
may be transferred, temporarily, to Account 80 — Other Elements of Investment, to be
disposed of later in the manner authorized or directed by the Commission.
2. Instructions for Depreciation Accounts
The new instructions specify that when abandonment of a branch line or other
important segment of the track structure or other part of the plant for which deprecia-
tion charges are not includible in the accounts is foreseeable within a reasonable period
of time due to exhaustion of traffic, obsolescence or other causes, application may be
made to the Commission for authority to create a suitable reserve in anticipation of
probable loss.
3. Property Accounts — Road
Account 9: Former instructions require that when lighter rail is used to replace
heavier rail, this account shall be credited at "current prices at time of removal" of the
replaced rail. The new instructions provide that this account is to be credited the cost,
estimated, if actual is not known, of the excess weight of heavier rails replaced with
lighter rails.
ICC Subject No. 468 — Redistribution of Amounts to Primary Road and Equip-
ment Accounts, is continued on the docket of the General Committee, Accounting Divi-
sion AAR, awaiting advice as to further developments.
Interpretations of the Accounting Classification Accounting Bulletin No. 15. and
amendments thereto, are cancelled effective September 1. 1962, by ICC Order oi Vugusl
2, 1962. The ICC Bureau of Accounts will soon issue a publication of the "A" Cases
and such of Bulletin 15 Cases as are still of current interest, revised or consolidated
where required, to conform to the current Accounting Classification.
Report of Committee 24 — Cooperative Relations
with Universities
W. \V. Hay, Chairman
J. F. Davison,
Vice Chairman
E. J. FlESENHEISER,
Secretary
H. E. Hurst
Jerry Neben
G. B. Pruden
J. L. Ai.VORD
B. G. Anderson
H. C. Archdeacon
YV. S. AUTREV
J. B. Babcock (E)
George Baylor
R. H. Beeder
J. B. Clark
L. B. Clark
R. P. Davis (E)
R. J. Fisher
C. E. R. Haight
C. L. Heimbacii
L. J. Hoffman
R. P. Howell
W. H. HUFFMAN
S. R. Hursh (E)
A. V. Johnston
Claude Johnston
Frank Kerekes
W. S. Kerr
H. E. Kirby (E)
E. C. Lawson
B. B. Lewis
RE. Loomis
R. W. MlDDLETON
G. W. Miller
H. R. Moore
R. C. Nissen
W. A. Oliver
J. F. Pearce
J. E. Perry
R. B. Rice
R. VV. Ripley
V. J. Roggeveen
J. A. Rust
P. S. Settle, Jr.
H. O. Sharp
E. R. Shultz
R. J. Stone
Egons Tons
T. D. Wofeord, Jr.
Committee
( E i Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR. Com-
mittee 24.
To the American Railway Engineering Association
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Stimulate greater appreciation on the part of railway managements of
(a) the importance of bringing into the service selected graduates of colleges
universities, and
(Id the necessity for providing adequate means for recruiting such graduates
and of retaining them in the service.
Progress report, submitted as information page 398
2. Stimulate among college and university students a greater interest in the
science of transportation and its importance in the national economic struc-
ture by
(a) cooperating with and contributing to the activities of student organi-
zations in colleges and universities, and
(b) presenting to students and their counselors a positive approach to the
attractive and interesting features of the railroad industry and the ad
vantages of choosing railroading as a career.
Progress report, submitted as information page ■;''1'
3. The cooperative system of education, including summer employment in rail-
way servit e
Progress report, submitted as information page 401
397
398 Cooperative Relations with Universities
4. Revise the recruiting brochure "A Challenge and Opportunity for Engineer-
ing Graduates — The Railroad Field."
Progress report, submitted as information page 402
5. Ways in which railroads can cooperate with universities in developing re-
search, including the revising of "Suggested Topics for Theses on Railroad
Subjects."
Progress report, submitted as information page 403
6. Procedures for orienting and developing newly employed engineering
personnel.
The procedures for orienting and developing newly employed engineering
personnel will require considerable study and will involve data concerning
procedures now being employed on a variety of railroads within the indus-
try. The ultimate objective, after compilation of data, will be to suggest
training procedures consistent with modern requirements of railroads and
the current trends in engineering education.
7. Stimulate an interest by college and university staff members in current
railroad problems and practices, including AREA membership.
Progress report, submitted as information page 404
The Committee on Cooperative Relations with Universities,
W. W. Hay, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 576, January 1963.
Report on Assignment 1
Stimulate Greater Appreciation on the Part of
Railway Managements of
(a) the importance of bringing into the service selected graduates of
colleges and universities, and
(b) the necessity of providing adequate means for recruiting such
graduates and retaining them in service
J. F. Davison (chairman, subcommittee), R. H. Beeder, L. B. Clark, R. J. Fisher, W. W.
Hay, L. J. Hoffman, R. P. Howell, H. E. Hurst, Claude Johnston, Frank Kerekes,
H. R. Moore, J. F. Pearce, G. B. Pruden, R. W. Ripley.
The current activity of your committee on this assignment is directed toward deter-
mining what common patterns of opinion there may be among graduate engineers em-
ployed in the railway industry. A proposed questionnaire was developed for circulation
among graduate engineers in all departments of the railroads requesting their opinions
on such matters as employment conditions, effectiveness of their university curricula,
post-graduate training requirements and other similar information.
Due to the magnitude of the undertaking, the nature of the information requested
and the cooperative effort required on the part of the railroads if the proposed ques-
tionnaire is to reach all pertinent personnel, the Board of Direction requested an oppor-
tunity to review this project in relation to the benefits which would result. Consequently,
a special submission was made to the Board Committee on Assignments, following which
the Board of Direction gave its consent at its November 1962 meeting, subject to a few
minor changes.
Cooperative Relations with Universities 399
Now that approval in principle has been received, this assignment will be carried to
conclusion. Upon return of completed questionnaires, the information will be transferred
to punch cards so it can be summarized for use in many different assignments of Com-
mittee 24.
This is a progress report, submitted as information
Report on Assignment 2
Stimulate Among College and University Students
a Greater Interest in the Science of Transportation
and Its Importance in the National Economic
Structure by:
(a) cooperating with and contributing to the activities of student
organizations in colleges and universities, and
(b) presenting to students and their counselors a positive approach
to the attractive and interesting feature of the railroad industry
and the advantages of choosing railroading as a career
B. B. Lewis (chairman, subcommittee), J. L. Alvord, B. G. Anderson, J. B. Clark, T. P.
Cunningham, J. F. Davison, W. W. Hay, R. P. Howell, S. R. Hursh, A. V. Johnston,
G. VV. Miller, H. R. Moore, Jerry Neben, J. F. Pearce, J. A. Rust, Egons Tons.
The activities of your committee on this assignment are indicated by the following
excerpts from letters of committee members.
D. B. Jenks, president, Missouri Pacific Railroad, addressed the senior civil engi-
neering students at the University of Illinois on the subject, "Careers in the Railroad
Industry."
R. H. Beeder, chief engineer system, Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fe Railway, ad-
dressed the senior civil engineering students at the University of Illinois on the Skull
Valley line change in Arizona. He illustrated his presentation with a color film of the
project. His subject was "Railroad Engineering Progress."
H. E. Kirby, retired cost engineer system, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, attended
the spring ASCE meeting of the West Virginia Section in Huntington, and while there,
spoke upon the railroad situation and gave a description of a few of the atttractive and
interesting features of the railroad field.
W. W. Hay, professor of railway civil engineering, University of Illinois, reports
that:
(a) Inspection trips were made during the summer by graduate students in railway
civil engineering over the Santa Fe, Southern Pacific, and Pennsylvania railroads.
(b) The AAR's film, "Science Rides the High Iron," was shown to the senior civil
engineering students.
(c) The Illinois Central Railroad cooperated with the Civil Engineering Depart-
ment and the College of Engineering in making exhibits available for the Engineering
Open House held on the Campus each March. The road's on-track exhibit included a
diesel-electric locomotive, airbrake instruction car, coach, caboose, ballast regulator and
rail detector car. It also provided a scale model of a highway flashing signal with an
automatic gate arm.
400 Cooperative Relations with Universities
(d) The Union Switch and Signal Division of Westinghouse Airbrake Company
furnished a CTC panel board and a model of its Train Identification and Automatic
Switching system.
(e) Various pictures, standards and other materials for use in railway engineering
classroom presentation were received from the Pittsburgh & Lake Erie, Canadian Na-
tional, Missouri Pacific, Santa Fe, Quebec North Shore & Labrador, and Chesapeake &
Ohio railways.
R. H. Beeder, chief engineer system, Santa Fe, W. H. Huffman, assistant chief
engineer — construction, North Western, and A. V. Johnston, chief engineer, Canadian
National, members of this committee, gave presentations at the Transportation Engineer-
ing Conference of ASCE at the Statler-Hilton Hotel, Detroit, Mich., on October 9. Mr.
Beeder presented a film on the Santa Fe's 44-mile line change in Northern Arizona; Mr.
Huffman showed a large number of color slides depicting modern mechanized mainte-
nance of way operations; and Mr. Johnston gave an illustrated talk on automated freight
classification yards.
B. B. Lewis, professor of railway engineering, Purdue University, reports that 92
seniors, civil engineering students, inspected the Illinois Central's Markham Yards.
R. W. Middleton, assistant engineer, Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul, & Pacific Rail-
road, addressed the Southwest Section of the Wisconsin Society of Professional Engi-
neers at Madison, Wis., on the subject "New Railroad Transportation Techniques."
J. F. Pearce, office engineer, Western Pacific Railroad, corresponded and discussed
with junior engineers, both in and out of his organization, that at all cost they should
continue their schooling so as to secure their degree in engineering which would be of
immense value to them in their future in the transportation industry.
P. S. Settle, president, Railway Maintenance Corporation, recommended from time
to time certain boys to railroads for their consideration as prospective employees.
Egons Tons, assistant professor of transportation engineering, Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology, reports:
(a) that he had a conference with the members of their Railroaders' Group and
that they have decided to have regular meetings with speakers or movies once every
two weeks. The Railroaders' Group is also considering establishment of regular weekly
seminars.
(b) that he has one student working on a thesis on high-speed track design, and
that Professor Bone has two students who propose to work on railroad theses.
(c) that announcements have been made in classes about student affiliates of AREA.
It is our pleasure to report there are now 35 student affiliates of AREA on 20 col-
lege campuses who have paid the student affiliate fee for the current year — October 1,
1962, through September 30, 1963. It is interesting to note that since the status of stu-
dent affiliates was established in the fall of 1960, we have had, including present mem-
bers, a total of 99 student affiliates to date.
Your committee wishes to report progress on the possibility of establishing a list of
speakers on railway engineering for distribution to colleges and universities. After con-
sideration, it was also decided that the executive secretary, AREA, would write to the
chief engineers and maintenance officers of selected railways requesting permission to re-
fer to them requests from colleges for speakers on essentially railway engineering, main-
tenance, and related subjects.
Cooperative Relations with Universities 401
This procedure was approved by the Board of Direction and a letter was prepared
by the secretary and sent to 49 selected railways. Favorable replies were received from
40 railways, following which the secretary addressed a letter to 50 colleges offering the
service of railway speakers. As this report goes to press, addresses have been presented
before, or lined up for. student groups at the following schools: University of Arizona,
Catholic University, Duke University, University of Kentucky, University of Maryland,
University of Michigan, University of New Mexico, University of Tennessee, and Vir-
ginia Polytechnic Institute.
The committee recognizes that considerable additional work in volume of corre-
spondence and difficulty in lining up speakers for specific dates and subjects is involved.
However, the project is considered highly worthwhile and will, it is hoped, enhance the
professional stature of railroad engineering among students and faculty.
Report on Assignment 3
The Cooperative System of Education, Including
Summer Employment in Railway Service
W. A. Oliver (chairman, subcommittee), J. L. Alvord, H. C. Archdeacon, George Bavlor,
J. B. Clark, R. P. Davis, J. F. Davison, E. I. Fiesenheiser, VV. W. Hav, S. R. Hursh,
H. E. Kirbv. R. W. Middleton, G. W. Miller, R. C. Nissen, R. B. Rice, P. S. Settle,
R. J. Stone.
In fulfilling its assignment in 1962, the committee followed essentially the same pro-
cedures used in the preceding years. A questionnaire was sent to the chief engineering
and maintenance officers of the railroads in late February requesting information con-
cerning their summer employment needs. The replies to the questionnaire were returned
to the subcommittee chairman, the information was tabulated, reproduced in the AREA
secretary's office, and sent to some 125 engineering colleges in late March.
A similar program is planned for 1963. Because of the heavy correspondence in-
volved in answering the many applications for summer employment, the committee is
continuing to attempt to spread this load by having applications sent to several officials
along the railroad rather than to any one individual. It is also endeavoring again to im-
prove the questionnaire.
A brief statement of the response obtained from the railroads for the summer of
1962 shows the following:
Offering employment in 1961 and 1962 6
Offering employment in 1962 but not 1961 4
Offering employment in 1961 but not 1062 9
No employment in 1961 or 1962 31
Total replies 50
It should be noted that a total of 10 railroads offered summer employment in 1962
through the efforts of this subcommittee. Furthermore, it should be reiterated that the
number of college students given summer employment by the railroads as a result of this
Committee 24 project constitutes only a small part of the total number employed. Main
railroads have for a long period of time recruited summer employees directly from the
campuses along their properties.
Committee 24 has indicated by a general expression of opinion among the member-
ship that it considers this project to be worth while. The committee has become aware of
402 Cooperative Relations with Universities
the fact that a number of young engineers have learned from experience obtained
through summer employment with a railroad that there are satisfactory careers to be
had in the railroad field. Consequently, as stated above, the project is going forward
again this year, and the committee requests your continued cooperation.
Your attention is called to an article in the October 1962 issue of the Illinois Central
Magazine entitled, "Blueprinting a Future." The article describes the experience with the
IC of eight engineering students during the summer of 1962. These young men came from
engineering colleges scattered throughout the mid-western and eastern United States. They
all enjoyed the opportunity to experience some of the problems that must be solved by
the practicing engineer, particularly the railroad engineer. This article emphasizes the
value of and justification for the continuation of this project by Committee 24.
Report on Assignment 4
Revise the Recruiting Brochure "A Challenge and
Opportunity for Engineering Graduates — the
Railroad Field"
Jerry Neben (chairman, subcommittee), J. B. Babcock, George Baylor, J. F. Davison,
W. W. Hay, A. V. Johnston, Claude Johnston, H. E. Kirby, B. B. Lewis, J. E.
Perry, R. B. Rice, H. 0. Sharp, E. R. Shultz, T. D. Wofford, Jr., P. S. Settle, Jr.
Your committee submits this progress report as information.
The current second edition of the brochure, produced in 1959, was cited by the
Eastern Colleges Personnel Officers as one of 11 for outstanding material. "American
Railway Engineering Association — 'The Railroad Field' was felt to be a highly effective,
interesting, modern portrait of careers for college graduates in railroading. Contrary to
the concept held by many in the East that the railroad is a decadent industry whose
days are numbered, this brochure depicts railroading as a dynamic, expanding, modern-
growth industry." The text of the brochure may be found in the Proceedings, Vol. 60,
1959, pages 621 to 630, incl.
In developing the basic premise for the revision, it was decided that the original
format and art work remain the same and the only changes, as required, would be in
the text and photographs; the purpose being to keep the high quality of the brochure
intact, the contents up to date and the publication costs down. On this basis the Board
of Direction has authorized the publication in 1963 of 20,000 copies of the third edition
for distribution by the AREA, plus any additional copies the AAR might order for
distribution.
The majority of the recommended changes are in the photographs. Pictures of more
modern equipment and facilities are being contemplated. Text changes will be few and
of an editorial nature. A new section will be added to cover industrial engineering.
The work of Subcommittee 4 will be completed by the printing of the 1963 edition
of the brochure.
Cooperative Relations with Universities 403
Report on Assignment 5
Ways In Which Railroads Can Cooperate With
Universities in Developing Research, Including
The Revision of "Suggested Topics For
Theses on "Railroad Subjects"
H. E. Hurst (chairman, subcommittee), W. S. Autrey, L. B. Clark, J. F. Davison, E. I.
Fiesenheiser, R. J. Fisher, VV. W. Hay, C. L. Heimbach, Frank Kerekes, W. S. Kerr,
H. E. Kirby, R. VV. Loomis, E. C. Lawson, V. J. Roggeveen, H. O. Sharp, Egons
Tons.
Your committee submits the following report of progress as information.
It was felt by your committee that one of the most immediate and effective means
of implementing student interest that might be developed by the "Suggested Topics for
Theses on Railroad Subjects", could best be served by providing a source of funds not
usually available from the student's or school's own resources, or from research funds
earmarked for work in other areas of engineering.
With the assistance of the Association's executive secretary and the director of en-
gineering research of the Association of American Railroads, a request for funds has
been included in the Engineering Research Division Budget for 1963 for consideration
by the AREA Research Committee and Board of Direction.
Your committee believes that a yearly appropriation in the amount of $1000 to
$5000 will provide, on a continuing basis, both financial support and evidence of the
railroads' interest in students.
Obviously, the funds are not being requested to cover major research sponsorship;
rather, the funds are intended to provide a means by which the railroad industry can
provide assistance to students in their study and research activities in connection with
current problems and, thereby, promote the interest of the students and faculty members
in these problems and the railroad story.
It is also expected that funds, readily available, will influence students' interest
towards choosing railroading as a career, in addition to the development of reports and
theses containing material of value to the railroads.
Your committee believes that a notice concerning the availability of a fund, when it
has been provided, may best be brought to the attention of the schools and students by
including such a notice with the distribution of the "Suggested Topics for Theses on
Railroad Subjects."
The notice concerning the availability of the fund will also contain pertinent infor-
mation concerning the rules under which the grants will be handled and administrative
procedure.
Experience may require modification of the rules and procedure for administering
the fund; however, the following requirements and arrangements appear appropriate to
your committee at this time:
1. Students desiring to avail themselves of assistance from the fund will address
a letter of request for a grant to the director of engineering research of the
Association of American Railroads, 3140 South Federal Street, Chicago 16.
Such letters will have an appropriate endorsement by one of the student's
professors.
2. In their letters, students will acree to provide an itemized accounting of the
expenditures involved and a copy or summarized abstract of the report on the
404 Cooperative Relations with Universities
completed study or research project. In addition, the letter of request will in-
clude an agreement to comply with the rules and administrative procedures set
forth in the notice concerning the availability of the fund.
.*. The grants and payments will be made directly to the students, thereby elimi-
nating any necessity for university overhead research charges.
4. Any one grant will be limited to a maximum of $100.
5. Approved letters of request will normally be vouchered for payment within
two weeks when funds are available.
6. Any project related to a "Railroad Subject" will be considered for approval.
7. Funds will not be used to cover the normal expenses associated with the
preparation of theses, such as report typing.
8. The director of engineering research, in handling requests for grants, will be
provided with an advisory committee consisting of one member each from the
professorial and railroad membership of the AREA, to be selected by Com-
mittee 24.
9. The director of engineering research will keep Committee 24 advised of grants
made and such other information concerning them and their administration as
may be deemed appropriate.
In addition to rendering whatever assistance may be required towards establishing
an active Student Aid Research Fund, your committee will continue to consider, evalu-
ate, and develop ways in which railroads can cooperate in the promotion and develop-
ment of interest in study and research oriented towards railroad subjects.
Report on Assignment 7
Stimulate An Interest By College and University
Staff Members In Current Railroad Problems And
Practices, Including AREA Membership
C. L. Heimbach (chairman, subcommittee), B. G. Anderson, J. B. Babcock, R. P. Davis,
J. F. Davison, W. S. Gates, Jr., W. W. Hay, W. H. Huffman, J. E. Perry, R. W.
Ripley, V. J. Roggeveen, J. A. Rust, R. J. Stone, T. D. Wofford, Jr.
Your committee submits the following report of progress as information.
The assignment is interpreted as an investigation into ways and means of engaging
the attention of college and university teachers, and through such attention, to cause
action by these teachers so as to produce an overall beneficial result to the railroads.
Implementation of this objective can be accomplished in a variety of ways. Some are
positive and direct; others are more subtle. But all will accomplish the desired end. Your
committee felt that the following suggestions are worthy of further consideration and
investigation.
1. Faculty Summer Employment Programs — Many faculty members have no con-
cept of the magnitude and scope of the engineering, business, and management prob-
lems facing the railroad supervisor. One of the best ways in which to acquaint teaching
personnel with these problems is to give them a challenging summer assignment in rail-
road industry. To succeed, such employment should be approached by both parties on
the basis that the faculty member would provide a full measure of contribution for the
remuneration involved, and the railroad would provide an opportunity where the creative
Cooperative Relations with Universities 405
talents of the faculty member could be constructively employed — just as is now the case
in consulting work or in many other industries with similar programs.
2. Sponsorship of a Technical Paper and a Prize for a Topic in the Field of Rail-
road Engineering — The cost could be modest and the results potentially worthwhile in
stimulating both faculty and student interest. It might be made especially attractive by
arranging to have the first-prize winner present the paper at an AREA Annual Meeting,
expenses paid, and receiving his prize money there. This would not only give the faculty
and students exposure to railroad engineering people, but would also give the railroad
engineering people attending the meeting an opportunity to hear about current campus
work.
3. Sponsorship of Research on College Campuses — This can be accomplished by
means of a direct grant-in-aid to a specific department within the University, or to a
particular faculty member. When an individual railroad employs this technique, the
monies could be allocated to those colleges located on or near the railroad's physical
property. Topics for consideration should permit participation by contestants from all
branches in colleges of engineering and business administration.
4. Sponsorship of Field Trips and Tours for Faculty Members to Railroad
Installations.
5. Sponsorship of Seminars at Various Universities to Discuss Specific Problems
Facing Railroad Management — Invite faculty participants to speak on these problems.
These and other means as may be later suggested will be examined in depth in later
reports.
Report of Committee 18 — Electricity
P. B. Burley, Chairman
J. J. Schmidt,
Vice Chairman
W. O. MULLER
T. F. Jelnick
E. D. Feak
E. B. Hacer
F. T. Snider
B. D. Allison
L. B. Curtis
E. M. Hastings, Jr.
B. Anderhous
R. J. Berti
L. W. Birch
\V. F. Bovvers
E. H. Brown
H. F. Brown
K. A. Browne
Robert Burn
G. N. Burwei.l
F. J. Corporon
A. B. Costic
H. C. Cross
J. H. Deckert
H. H. Duehne
H. W. Dunn
D. F. Dunsmore
\V. B. Grimes
B. C. Hallow el i
G. B. Hauser
R. E. Hauss
R. B. Hendrickson
R. H. Holmes
R. L. Kimball
P. O. Lautz
D. R. MacLeod
F. B. McConnel
B. F. McGowan
A. B. Miller
J. J. Miller
H. R. Morgan
R. F. Pownall
E. B. Shew
R. H. Stocksdale
C. A. Stokes
C. M. Summers
E. L. Tennyson
E. H. Werner
M. I. Yasuna
Committee
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR, Com-
mittee 18.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual (Electrical Manual, AAR), collaborating with Mechani-
ical Division, AAR.
Recommendations with respect to the Electrical Manual, submitted for
adoption page 408
4. and 8. Power supply, motors and controls, collaborating with Mechani-
cal Division, AAR.
The committee has been assembling information on the newer power sources
such as the fuel cells, magneto-hydrodynamic (MHD) generation, thermo-
electric air conditioning and results of their applications. Also, the commit-
tee has been gathering information on solid-state rectifiers, specifically the
silicon cell, which will be employed on some of the newer Pennsylvania
Railroad electric locomotives. Information should be available for a report
in the near future.
5. Illumination, collaborating with Committee 6 and Mechanical Division.
AAR.
Studies are in progress on lighting for railroad yards, TOFC, tri-level load-
ing, container loading, and closed circuit television installations. A report
should be ready for publication next yen
9. Electrolysis and electrolytic corrosion.
Progress report, submitted as information page 409
407
Hull. 576
408 Electricity
10. Wire, cable and insulating materials, collaborating with Mechanical Divi-
sion, AAR.
Progress report, submitted as information page 409
11. Electric heating, collaborating with Committee 6 and Mechanical Division,
AAR.
Studies are in progress on the application of electric heaters for space heat-
ing, snow melting, car thawing (coal and ore, etc.), water heating and pre-
heating of oil and paint.
13. Railway electrification, collaborating with Mechanical Division, AAR.
Progress report, submitted as information page 414
IS. Relations with public utilities, collaborating with Committee 20.
Progress report, submitted as information page 418
The Committee on Electricity,
P. B. Burley, Chairman.
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual (Electrical Manual, AAR)
Collborating with Mechanical Division, AAR
W. O. Muller (chairman, subcommittee), J. J. Schmidt, B. D. Allison, L. B. Curtis,
H. W. Dunn.
At the 1962 annual meeting of the Association, upon the recommendation of Com-
mittee 18, Section 14 of the AAR Electrical Manual, with the title "Safety", was re-
moved from the Manual, with the understanding that the material in this Section would
be put back in the manual at a later date under a more appropriate heading or headings.
This Section contained the following two documents:
Part 1 — Recommended Practice for the Prevention of Electric Sparks That May
Cause Fire During the Transfer of Flammable Liquids or Flammable
Compressed Gases To or From Rail Equipment and Storage Tanks
page 1-1-1
Part 2 — Recommended Practice for the Prevention of Electric Sparks That
May Cause Fires in Tanks or Tank Cars Containing Flammable
Liquids or Flammable Compressed Gases, Due to Proximity of Wire
Lines page 1-2-1
Your committee now recommends that Section 14, in full, be reinstated in the Elec-
trical Manual, without revision, except to change its title from "Safety" to "Grounding".
Electricity 409
Report on Assignment 9
Electrolysis and Electrolytic Corrosion
E. B. Hager (chairman, subcommittee), B. D. Allison, A. B. Costic, B. C. Hallow til,
R. H. Holmes, J. J. Schmidt, E. H. Werner.
Possible Effects of Cathodic Protection Installations
for Underground Structures on Adjacent
Railroad Signal Systems
The following report is submitted as information.
Your committee circularized its members, requesting them to furnish any informa-
tion available on their respective railroads having to do with interference with signal
circuits caused by cathodic protection systems. Information was received from 11 rail-
roads, three of which had experienced cathodic protection interference. Of the eight
which had not experienced such interference, one railroad uses coded track circuits.
Three others are acutely aware of the possibility of interference and, therefore, work in
close coordination with the installing companies to avoid it. The remaining four had
presumably not been exposed to this interference.
Of the three railroads reporting interference experience, one cited two cases of false
signal indication caused by cathodic protection interference, one resulting in the derail-
ment of a caboose. Another railroad reported having experienced interference from time
to time. Solution of attendant problems ranged from changing track circuit relays to re-
ducing output of the cathodic protection rectifier. The third railroad had signal difficul-
ties when an adjacent pipeline cathodic protection rectifier was increased from 10 to
18 amp. This case was solved by the installation of a pulsing track circuit.
Attention is invited to the AAR Signal Section Proceedings XL, 153A (1942) (Item
19, Selected Bibliography on Cathodic Protection, page 4-6 of Section 9, AAR Manual).
The cases of cathodic protection interference cited emphasize the need for constant
alertness to avoid trouble from this source.
Report on Assignment 10
Wire, Cable and Insulating Materials
Collaborating with Mechanical Division, AAR
F. T. Snider (chairman, subcommittee), B. Anderhous, R. Burn, W. B. Grimes.
Your committee submits the following report on information pertaining to wire,
cable and insulating materials:
A. WIRE, CABLE AND INSULATING MATERIAL STANDARDS
OF INTEREST TO THE AREA
Revisions have been made to numerous standards during the past year. There has
been no complete revision of any major standard and the detailed changes are too
voluminous to list in this report. All changes are available from the various Standards
organizations.
The National Fire Protection Association published in September the 1962 Edition
of the National Electrical Code and copies are available from them. There have been a
410 Electricity
number of changes from the 1959 Code. The following are of particular interest to the
railroads and are identified by article and section reference from the Code.
Art. 210 — Branch Circuits
Sec. 210-5 — Color Code
The use of green-colored insulated conductors has been clarified. In branch circuits
the color green is reserved for use in the identification of grounding conductors only
and it may not be used for any other purpose. This requirement is not intended to pro-
hibit the use of green colored internal wiring of equipment except where such internal
wiring serves also as lead wires to which branch circuit conductors are directly attached.
Sec. 210-21 (b)
The 1962 National Electrical Code will require all receptacles installed on 15- and
20-amp branch circuits to be of the grounding type. While it is not mandatory that
equipment served by these grounding-type outlets must be equipped with a third ground-
ing-wire and a grounding blade in the plug, it nevertheless indicates the trend is toward
greater use of grounding in portable equipment. This will have a bearing on the produc-
tion of portable cords and will automatically eliminate practically all use of two-
conductor-type UF cable. This rule is not retroactive but is applicable to rewiring of
existing occupancies.
Art. 230 — Services
Sec. 230-23
The minimum size of service drop conductor has been increased to No. 8 copper
or equivalent from the previous No. 10 copper or equivalent to be consistent with serv-
ice entrance cable.
Art. 250 — Grounding
Sec. 250-45 (c)
Tools and appliances protected by an approved system of double insulation or its
equivalent need not be grounded. This eliminates the necessity of a third conductor
for grounding. This will reduce the number of tools and appliances requiring three-
conductor cords.
Sec. 250-57 (b) (3)
This permits grounding of fixed equipment by the use of the grounding conductor
in the supply cord when cords are used to provide more mobility or to prevent trans-
mission of vibration.
Sec. 250-91— Table 250-94b and 250-95
Covers aluminum grounding conductor sizes.
Art. 300 — Wiring Methods — General Requirements
Sec. 300-3 (c)
Permits secondary wiring of electric discharge lamps 1000 v or less to occupy the
same fixture enclosure as the branch circuit conductors.
Sec. 300-3 (d)
Permits primary leads of electric discharge lamp ballasts to occupy same fixture
enclosure as the branch circuit conductors.
Sec. 300-19 (a)
The lighter weight of aluminum as a conductor is recognized in the 1962 Code by
permitting aluminum to have greater spacing between the supports of vertically
mounted conductors than is permitted for copper.
E lee t r i c i t y 411
Sec. 300-20
Revision covers induced currents in metal enclosures; now makes reference to
aluminum.
Art. 310 — Conductors for General Wiring
Table 310-2 (a)
Type SB Slow Burning Wire for 90 C. is deleted. This required the eight columns
in Table 300-13 and 300-15 to have the heading changed to "Bare and Covered Con-
ductors."
Table 310-2 (b)
This will now permit Type THW to be used up through 2000 MCM. Former limit
was 500 MCM. It also has a new note which permits outer coverings to be omitted
over rubber insulations which have been specifically approved for the purpose. This note
refers to Types R, RH, RHH, RYV, RH-RvV. and RHYV. This provides for insulations
that do not require any protective covers.
Sec. 310-2 (d) (2) and (3)
"Outer fibrous covering" is changed to "outer-non-metallic covering". This up-dates
the Code to agree with present practice to recognize other coverings, such as neoprene.
Table 310-12, Note 8
For a number of years there have been derating factors for the situation where
more than three conductors are installed in raceway or are assembled together into a
cable. In the 1962 Code this same requirement with the same derating factors is made
applicable to single-conductor or multi-conductor cables which are stacked or bundled
without maintained spacing and where they are not installed in raceways.
Art. 318 — Continuous Rigid Cable Supports
An entirely new article covering Continuous Rigid Cable Supports has been added
to the Code to take care of reported misapplication of cable racks and cable troughs.
Sec. 318-7 specifies the cable types that are permitted. Single-conductor building wire
types are not, such as RHW or THW.
Art. 331 — Aluminum Sheathed Cable
A new article will appear in the 1962 Code covering Type ALS aluminum-sheathed
cable. The material is "a factory-assembled cable consisting of one or more insulated
conductors enclosed in an impervious, closely fitting, continuous, seamless tube of alum-
inum." This cable may be used in both exposed and concealed work in dry and wet
locations. When exposed to strong chlorides, caustic alkalies, hydrochloric acid or chlo-
rine vapors, the cable must have a protective covering. Its use underground is limited;
it cannot be buried directly in the ground. The outer sheath shall not be used as a cur-
rent-carrying conductor. Special approved fittings are required for the connection of
Type ALS cable to boxes or equipment. The ((inductors may be either copper or Type
EC grade aluminum, solid or stranded. In general the conductors and their insulation
are the same as is now permitted for lead-sheathed cable.
Art. 334 — Metal-Clad Cable
Recognizes interlocked armored and corrugated-metal-sheathed power cable as Type
MC. Sizes are 4 AWG and larger for copper. 2 AWG and larger for aluminum. The
article still includes Types AC and ACT armored cable
412 Electricity
Art. 336
Sec. 336-2
Non-metallic sheathed cable previously was limited to No. 4 AWG, The 1962 Code
increases this to No. 2 AWG.
Art. 339 — Underground Feeder and Branch Circuit Cable
Sec. 339-3 (c)
Requires Type UF Cable to be buried at least 18 in. in the ground if supplementary
protection is not provided.
Sec. 339-3 (d)
Permits single conductor Type UF Cable to be used for heating cables (422-27).
Sec. 339-3 (e)
Adds a restriction to the use of Type UF Cable when exposed to sunlight unless
it is specifically approved.
Art. 342 — Non-Metallic Extension
This article covers non-metallic surface extensions, a material not in very wide use.
The scope and coverage of the article has been extended to include a type in which
the assembly of conductors, insulation and jacket is extended to include a messenger
cable so that the assembly may be used as an aerial cable. It can be used when the
building is for industrial purposes and the nature of occupancy requires a highly flexible
means for connecting equipment. Limited to IS- and 20-amp branch circuits.
Art. 347 — Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit
Perhaps the most important new material added to the 1962 Code is rigid non-
metallic conduit for use above ground. This article rather completely cover the per-
mitted uses and installation procedures required for rigid non-metallic conduit made of
fibers, plastics or other non-metallic material. It is prohibited above ground out of doors,
in hazardous locations, in the concealed spaces of combustible construction and may not
be used for the support of fixtures or other equipment. It is permitted to be used at
not over 600 v for direct burial, for imbedding in concrete walls, floors and ceilings, in
locations subject to severe corrosive influences for chemicals for which specific approval
must be obtained, in cinder fill, and in wet locations where corrosion is not a problem.
Of particular interest to the wire and cable application engineers is the fact that in
practically all installations of this new conduit system a grounding conductor will need
to be included with the circuit conductors, for the raceway is no longer available as
the grounding conductor.
Art. 384 — Switchboards and Panel Boards
Sec. 384-9
Type ALS Aluminum Sheathed Cable is included.
Art. 630 — Electric Welders
Sec. 630-11
A multiplying factor is added which recognizes that electric welders do not impose
a single value of current, but impose a varying current depending upon the load cycle.
This will permit smaller conductors, depending upon the rated percent duty cycle.
Electricity 413
Art. 725 — Remote Control, Low Energy Power,
Low- Voltage Power and Signal Circuits
Sec. 725-42 (c)
In previous codes very little attention has been paid to the conductor insulation on
those conductors which are used in remote control, low-energy power, or low-voltage
power and signal circuits. The 1962 Code in considerable detail delineates the dimen-
sions of the insulation and the jacket of cable for remote control and signal circuits
and thereby sets up automatically the listing or labeling of these conductors by Under-
writers Laboratories.
NFPA Standard No. 75— Standard for the
Protection of Electronic Computer Systems
Sec. 4302 for interconnecting cables refers to approved cables which places con-
structions in the hands of Underwriters Laboratories.
A new handbook on current-carrying capacities is now available. It is titled "Power
Cable Ampacities", AIEE-IPCEA: Volume I — Copper, Volume II — Aluminum. These
books can be ordered from the Order Service Department, AIEE, 345 East 47th Street,
New York 17.
B. REPORT ON NEW TYPES OF WIRE, CABLE AND INSULATING MATERIALS
Cross-Linked Polyethylene
A most significant advance in wire and cable technology is the development and
introduction of chemically cross-linked polyethylene insulation. The cross-linking over-
comes the chief weakness of polyethylene — its low melting point — and converts it from
thermoplastic material to a thermosetting material while retaining polyethylene's out-
standing electrical and physical properties.
Chemically cross-linked polyethylene provides a family of insulation that can be
compounded to give excellent heat, moisture, sunlight and flame resisting properties,
and resistance to deformation at elevated temperatures without the use of the protective
covers.
Some typical wire and cable products in which chemically cross-linked polyethylene
has been introduced are:
Power cables up through 15 kv
Control cables
Service drop cable
Type SIS switchboard wire
Type RHW-RHH for general wiring
Type SE service entrance cable
The latter three are recognized and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Inc.
This material appears to overcome some of the disadvantages of rubber insulation
in that it is easier to pull into conduit, requires no protective covering, is resistant to
oils and sunlight, is rated at 90 C and is less costly. It is presently available from
several manufacturers.
C. REVISION' OF MANUAL
Considerable progress has been made on revising the AAR Electrical Manual so
that all specifications and constructions referred to will be standard with the industry.
414 Electricity
Report on Assignment 13
Railway Electrification
Collaborating with Mechanical Division, AAR
L. B. Curtis (chairman, subcommittee), R. J. Berti, L. VV. Birch, W. F. Bowers, H. F.
Brown, K. A. Browne, R. Burn, F. J. Corporon, A. B. Costic, B. C. Hallowell,
G. B. Hauser, R. B. Hendrickson, R. L. Kimball, D. R. MacLeod, F. B. McConnel,
H. R. Morgan, P. F. Pownall, E. B. Shew, E. L. Tennyson. E. H. Werner.
Your committee reports, as information, on the general subject of railway elec-
trification. The work on this assignment is divided among six sub-subcommittees, but,
because of economic pressures and the heavy work load carried by the committee's
members, only one of the six will report this year.
There has been no collaboration with the International Union of Railroads this year.
The report follows.
Report on Assignment 13 D
Developments in the Field of Electrification
(Domestic and Foreign)
L. W. Birch, Chairman
UNITED STATES DEVELOPMENTS
The nation's first silicon rectifier locomotive, No. 4460, was delivered to the Penn-
sylvania Railroad on July 3, 1962. This locomotive was included in an order for 66
units, 60 of which will have ignitron rectifiers. Completion of the entire order is
expected in 1963.
Electric operation on 134 miles of the Norfolk & Western (Virginian Railway sec-
tion) ended on July 1, 1062 . This electrification had been in continuous operation with
11-kv overhead since 1924. The removal of the electrification followed the merger of
the Norfolk & Western and the Virginian railroads.
At the present time the Niagara Junction Railway is electrifying a new yard at
Niagara Falls, N. Y. Light catenary has been installed. The voltage will be 600, d-c.
Commuter and Rapid Transit
Owing to the similarity of equipment and operation of commuter and rapid transit
systems, this committee has been alert to the developments which have taken place in
this field. Presently such communities as will be served by the Delaware River Port
Authority, the San Francisco Bay Area Rapid Transit District, Los Angeles Metropolitan
Transit Authority, and The National Capital Transportation Agency, are under con-
sideration and reports will be made as developments take place.
Electrification an "Angel to U. S. Railroads"
An AIEE paper entitled "Electrification — Devil or Angel?" was delivered by L. B.
Curtis, chairman of Subcommittee 13 of Committee 18, at the Winter General Meeting
of the Institute in New York, February 1, 1962. Based on answers from a question-
naire distributed by Mr. Curtis, inductive reasoning indicated that the least expensive
Electricity
415
Pennsylvania Railroad's silicon rectifier locomotive.
system of electrification is the commercial-frequency high-voltage system. The question-
naire was not limited to the United States but included such countries as England,
Japan, the International Union of Railroads in Europe and other groups.
FOREIGN DEVELOPMENTS
India
The third successive contract since 1958 for electrification of another section 01 the
Eastern Railway System in India called for 23S miles of 25-kv, 50-cycle distribution.
Also, an additional 185-mile route of the Southeastern Railway of India has been opened
for operation of freight service. This system now totals 600 route miles of electrification,
all of which is high -voltage commercial frequency.
Europe
Electrification continues to progress in both Germany and Russia. In Great Britain
the Transport Ministry has approved new clearances to ground, permitting the electrifi-
cation of the London-Midland Region at 25 kv.
During the past year English electrification, as reported previously, continues i"
several sections.
Hull 576
416 Electricity
The Swiss continue to electrify sections of railroad, owing particularly to severe
grades.
For approximately the past year the Trans-European Express Service has been
operating between Zurich and Milan and between Milan and Paris with new 5-coach
electric trains equipped for running on four different systems of supply. Between Milan
and Paris the trains use 3000 v d-c; in Switzerland they are supplied with 15-kv, 16%
cycles a-c; in France they use 25-kv, SO cycles and ultimately are supplied with 1500 v
d-c just before reaching the Paris station.
Japan
Work is progressing on the construction of the new high-speed Tokaido Trunk
Line. This is a standard-gage 25-kv, 50-cycle electrification. A large amount of research
was necessary to coordinate current collection, catenary design, signaling and rolling
equipment, for operation up to 130 mph.
Katanga
The B.C.K. Railroad in Katanga will soon electrify another section in this copper-
producing area. The section is between Kolwezi and Mutshatsha, a distance of approxi-
mately 100 miles. The catenary will feed 25-kv, 60-cycle energy to the trains.
GENERAL ELECTRIFICATION ECONOMICS
(Collaborating with Committee 16 and AAR Mechanical Division Committee
on Electrification Equipment — Rolling Stock)
When considering electrification, emphasis is frequently placed on the additional
investment in fixed property necessary to supply electric energy from central power
stations. There is no economy, per se, in contact systems, substations, or in the type
of electric power supplied, a-c or d-c. The economy is in the motive power. Electric
motive power is the only unit which entirely eliminates the necessity of hauling the
prime mover. This advantage permits larger concentrations of horsepower for faster
accelerations and higher speeds, at lower investment and operating costs. This economy
in motive power must be sufficiently great, not only to prove the superiority of electric
motive power over all other types, but also to pay for the additional investment and
operating costs of the fixed property requirements for its use.
From our more than half-century of experience with electric operation we recog-
nize the basic economic requirements. The two most important requirements for its
application are traffic density and the ability to purchase reliable electric power from
systems of suitable capacity at reasonable rates.
The type of electric motive power which can be built and maintained at the lowest
cost, together with the fixed property system of electrification which also can be built
and maintained at the lowest cost, will show the greatest economy over other types of
motive power, beyond a certain point where traffic on a given line becomes sufficiently
dense. This is the whole theory of railway electrification, or rather, electric motive
power using central-station energy.
CONDENSED REPORT
In an attempt to meet the demand for a condensation of the past seven years of
electrification reports produced by this committee and by Committee 13 of the former
AAR Electrical Section, the fifth draft of the condensation was distributed to the com-
Electricity 417
mittee in September. Many good comments have been received, and it is now planned
that the final draft will be ready for next year's report, the method of printing and
distribution to be determined in the meantime. This brochure will probably be produced
in small form — approximately one-half the size of the regular reports.
SEMI-CONDUCTOR RECTIFIERS FOR RAILWAY ELECTRIC POWER SUPPLY
High-current germanium rectifier cells of the diode type were introduced into elec-
trochemical service in the United States during the year 1952 ; its use in Europe followed
about two years later. Awaiting the refinement of silicon, germanium was promoted
aggressively for rectifier cells until the year 1957, when the development of a satisfactory
silicon product was accomplished. At that time, the technological effort was directed
toward the better development of the silicon power rectifier, and such development is
still continuing as of this time.
The silicon rectifier is a semi-conductor diode having two terminals, the anode (the
stud end) and the cathode (the braided cable end). The device possesses rectifying
characteristics similar to an ignitron tube. A silicon rectifier blocks current in only one
direction and has a low forward voltage drop in the other. High-current silicon rectifiers
have been developed as of today, for example, to a current range of 150 to 250 amp,
600 peak reverse voltage repetitive, and 800 peak reverse voltage transient; such a cell
weighs 8 oz, is less than 7 in long, and can be easily held in the hand.
The foregoing description, incidently, is of the silicon rectifier used in the recently
delivered Pennsylvania Railroad locomotive Number 4460, a picture of which is printed
on page 415.
Silicon rectifier equipment possesses higher overall electrical efficiency than motor-
generator, ignitron, mercury-arc, germanium, or even mechanical rectifiers. Silicon rec-
tifier equipment costs are lower than mercury-arc rectifiers, for instance, because anode
breakers and firing circuits are eliminated. Installation costs for silicon rectifier equip-
ment is less; one reason is that the equipment is small and the space required for both
the rectifier assembly and transformer is less.
Semi-conductor rectifier units are by far the simplest type of conversion equipment
thus far conceived. Vacuum systems, firing circuits, anode breakers, heavy rotating parts,
commutators, brushes, arc-backs, replacement and retiming of contacts are all com-
plicated features of other types of conversion equipment that can be forgotten when
a silicon rectifier is installed. Experience thus far obtained has indicated that silicon rec-
tifiers have the same high degree of service dependability as motor generators and
mercury-arc rectifiers.
A summation of the several distinct advantages inherently realized by the utilization
of silicon rectifiers include the following1.
1. Low first cost
2. High efficiency.
3. Completely static, except for small cooling fan.
4. Minimum control circuitry.
5. Simplicity of operation.
6. Minimum maintenance:
a. Elimination of firing and other excitation circuits,
b. Water cooling not required.
c. Replacement of diodes a very minor operation.
d. Silicon diode failure rate less than l/2 percent per year.
418 Electricity
7. Low installation costs.
8. Less floor space required.
9. Maximum reliability.
This modern trend in power conversion equipment is reflected in actuality by the
installation of silicon rectifier apparatus for power conversion in three transportation
substations presently in service in the United States. The first was installed in July
1961, the second was installed in March 1962, and the third was placed in service in
April 1962. Two of the substations are located in Niagara Falls, N. Y., while the third
is located in Chicago. The two in Niagara Falls are rated at 1500 kw, and the one in
Chicago is rated at 2500 kw. The nominal d-c voltage is 600. Each of the substations
located in the Niagara Falls area contains 480 silicon rectifier cells.
In addition to the above-mentioned substations already in service, three additional
railway transportation service substations are scheduled to be installed within the next
six months; two of these will be rated at 2500 kw, 600 v, d-c, while the third will be
rated 3000 kw, 625 v, d-c.
Operating experience and service requirements for the aforementioned transporta-
tion substations were not available at the time of the writing of this report because of
the short time that has elapsed since these substations were placed in service. It is an-
ticipated that specification standards and testing procedures can be prepared for silicon
rectifier units as applied to transportation service as soon as sufficient operating
experience is acquired.
Report on Assignment 15
Relations With Public Utilities
E. M. Hastings, Jr. (chairman, subcommittee), E. H. Brown, A. B. Miller, R. F.
Pownall, C. A. Stokes, M. I. Yasuna.
For several years your committee has been working on a schedule of fees and rentals
for occupancy of railway property by electric supply lines under 7500 v, that could be
recommended for adoption by the railroads.
It has become evident to your committee that an acceptable schedule of this kind
cannot be formulated because of the many unusual circumstances that prevail in differ-
ent parts of the country on different railroads. It is recommended, therefore, that this
phase of the assignment be discontinued.
at
your
service
for
all types of cranes
d iese I wreckers
pile drivers
buckets
ORTON
CRANE & SHOVEL CO.
608 S. DEARBORN ST.
CHICAGO 5, ILLINOIS
DANIEL A. COVELLI
President
Representatives in Principal Cities
Why not let us help?
Your GRS representative
will be glad to
supply the details.
Any way you do it is fine with us
—a jacknife, a wood chisel,
a new motor-driven gadget.
But how you use your pencil is another matter.
When it comes to classification yard design,
why not let us sharpen OUR pencils— our engineers
can use pencils too— and they have had
lots of experience in the best way to design a yard
—the way that can mean real savings to you.
Y
hmmmI
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL COMPAN
ROCHESTER 2, NEV
MONTREAL 2, CANADA
MODEL 441
Developed and Built
for Railroad Maintenance
180° BOOM SWING
DOBS ALL JOBS!
ROOTS AND LOADS TIES
LAYING WELDED RAIL
CUTS MAINTENANCE COSTS
72 FAST CHANGE ATTACHMENTS
• Forks
• IVi Cu. Yd. Bucket
• Tote Hook
• 18' Boom Extension
• Fork Tie Baler
• Track Cleaning Bucket
• Back Hoe
• Clamshell
• Back Filler Blade
• Pull Drag Bucket
• 4 Cu. Yd. Snow Bucket
• Pile Hammer
Optional Attachment
Flanged Wheels, Hydraulically Controlled
9' WIDE TRACK CLEANING BUCKET'
PETTIBONE MULLIKEN CORPORATION
RAILROAD^fejDIVISION
1 4 1 W. JACKSON^^JM^ CHICAGO 4, III.
80 Years of Service
to the Railroad Industry
AREA Publications — Price List
The following include some of the Association publications available from the
secretary's office on order. Prices shown are for Members only:
Member
Price
Manual of Recommended Practice, complete in 2 volumes, including binders
(first copy) $18.00
Extra binders, each 4.50
Annual Supplements (first copy) 1.00
Separate Chapters
1— Roadway and Ballast 1.50
3-Ties 25
4-Rail 75
5-Track 75
6-Buildings 1.50
7— Wood Bridges and Trestles 1.00
8-Masonry 1.00
9-Highways 0.50
11— Engineering and Valuation Records 1.25
13— Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 1.00
14— Yards and Terminals 1.00
15— Iron and Steel Structures 1.25
16— Economics of Railway Location and Operation 0.75
17— Wood Preservation 50
20-Contract Forms 1.25
22— Economics of Railway Labor 0.50
25— Waterways and Harbors 0.25
27— Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 0.50
28— Clearances 0.25
29— Waterproofing 0.25
Flexible-cover, loose-leaf binder for separate chapters, each 0.40
Portfolio of Trackwork Plans— 119 plans, 8 sheets of specifications, 5 sheets
definitions of terms, complete with leatherette cover $12.50
Track Scale Pamphlet— 109 pages, flexible cover 1.00
Federal Valuation of Railroads— 87 pages, flexible cover 1.00
Instructions for Mixing and Placing Concrete-24 pages, flexible cover 0.40
Notes on Railroad Location and Construction Procedures from the School of
Experience— 43 pages, flexible cover 0.50
Handbook of Instructions for the Care and Operation of Maintenance of Way
Equipment— 149 pages, hard cover 0.85
Instructions for Care and Safe Operation of Welding and Grinding Equip-
ment—23 pages, flexible cover 0.30
Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges (fixed spans)— 70 pages, flexible
cover 0.75
Specifications for Movable Railway Bridges— 73 pages, punched sheets 1.00
3
outstanding
tampers
for the price of ONE!
A YARD TAMPER that is downright
revolutionary in character . . . that
will fulfill the majority of your yard
tamping requirements faster and bet-
ter than it has ever been done before
. . . with just about half of the
normal crew.
A JACK TAMPER: By simply sub-
stituting the regulation double-bar
JACKSON tamping units for the extra
long single units used in the YARD
TAMPER you have a powerful Jack
Tamper that is exceptionally fast,
and accurate . . . that can be used
with existing surfacing devices and
easily keeps ahead of production
tampers. Or, you can leave the long
blades on when jack tamping and
catch your switches as you go.
A UTILITY TAMPER of exceptional
speed and power for spotting and
smoothing in all ballasts in all con-
ditions ... and tamping of finest
quality in all moderate to high raises.
Split workhead permits tamping a
much larger portion of turnouts as
well as maintaining proper adjust-
ment on curves.
Let us demonstrate the multiple
advantages of this machine under
your own conditions.
lAPKCnN VIBRATORS
JflUllUUI I LUDINGTON. MICHIGA
INC.
MICHIGAN, U.S.A.
OCV WOODLNGS-VERONA TOOL WORKS
^^F Pioneer Manufacturers
of
HIGH GRADE TRACK TOOLS
and
SPRING WASHERS FOR TRACK
Sine* 1873
VERONA. PA. CHICAGO. ILL.
w
WOODINGS FORGE & TOOL COMPANY
Makers
of
WOODINGS RAIL ANCHORS
VERONA.
PA.
CHICAGO,
ILL.
Notes on
Railroad Location and Construction Procedures
from the School of Experience
By J. A. Given
A series of notes, comments, short-cut methods and "tricks of the
trade" written by a railroad location engineer of many years of
practical experience for the benefit of young engineers.
Price $0.50
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
59 East Van Buren Street
Chicago 5, III.
fro
RACOR
m
coast
to
oast—
•
*.
igbsciEmi
\
>
stgfiooSlS
with America's most complete line of
special track work: For Railroads,
Mines and Industries — A complete
line of frogs, switches and crossings •
Trackwork for installation in paved
areas • Manganese steel guard rails
• Automatic switch stands • Samson
switch points • Snow-Blowers • Switch
point guards • Rail and flange lubri-
cators • Tie pads • Racor studs • Dual
spike setters • Dual spike drivers •
Car retarders.
with America's most complete track-
work manufacturing facilities: Coast
to coast to serve your needs.
*- RACOR PLANTS:
Buffalo • Chicago Heights • Los Angeles ■
Niagara Falls, Ontario, Canada • Pueblo
• Superior.
* RACOR SALES AND ENGINEERING
Chicago • Cleveland • Denver • Houston •
Los Angeles • Louisville ■ New York •
Philadelphia • Richmond • San Francisco
St. Louis • St. Paul. In Canada: Dominion
Brake Shoe Co., Ltd., Montreal, Quebec
• Niagara Falls, Ontario • Winnipeg,
Manitoba ■ Vancouver, B. C.
* RACOR RESEARCH:
Chicago • Mahwah, N. J.
with America's most complete track-
work engineering service: This lies in
making available to our customers
Racor*s engineering experience —
practical experience from years of
designing and manufacturing . . .
advanced experience solving tomor-
row's trackwork problems today in
Racor research laboratories.
Why not let us help you with your
Hackwork problems?
RAILROAD PRODUCTS DIVISION
-<ZS2>~ 530 Fifth Avenue, New York 36, New York
AMItlCAN
RTake Shoe
S«f*NT
IMF^OVISP HIPOWER
A COMPLETE LINE
OF SPRING WASHERS
THE NATIONAL LOCK WASHER CO.
Newark N. J.. U. S. A.
THE DOUBLE U RAIL ANCHOR
ACHUFF RAILWAY SUPPLY CO.
ST. LOUIS, MO.
for effective
weed control...
Concentrated BORASCU
POLYBOR-CHLORATE
UREABOR®
MONOBOR-CHLORATE
These borate weed killers are proving best
for roads in every way . . . efficiency, safety,
economy, convenience, easy application.
Today's use of borates for maximum control of
vegetation began years ago with our pioneer
work in the field. Continued research has
developed the group of herbicides, listed above,
which most roads now favor for every phase of
weed control. These four weed killers are
nonselective. They are widely used for year-
round maintenance of weed-free conditions
about trestles, tie piles, yards, signals, switches,
and rights of way. Find out how you, too, can
do a better job on weeds . . . write today .
AGRICULTURAL SALES DEPARTMENT
BORAX
630 SHATTO PLACE • LOS ANGELES 5, CALIFORNIA
i
Hubbard Super Service Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Super Steel Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Track Tools
Hubbard Tool Division
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
New York Pittsburgh Chicago
W^ Unit Rail Anchor w^
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR DIVISION
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
NEW YORK PITTSBURGH CHICAGO
Assure lower maintenance costs,
better performance with...
1
TEXACO
Petroleum Products and
Systematic Engineering
Service
;;; A -n.. ,__
TEXACO inc.
RAILWAY SALES DIVISION
135 East 42nd St., New York 17, N. Y.
NEW YORK • CHICAGO • SAN FRANCISCO • ST. LOUIS • ST. PAUL • ATLANTA
m AGK A
ELECTROMATIC
The only completely
automatic track surfacing
machine on the market
Proven in operation by North America's
leading railroads. Complete and auto-
matic control of surface and cross level
through tangent and curve territory
regardless of height of lift.
• Combination of Autojack and Electromatic
equals or improves production of Electro-
matic alone.
• Precision of lift and uniformity of compaction
controlled automatically.
• All variations in lift, level and run-out con-
trolled from operator's panel.
• Beam "sighting" for utmost precision.
• Front buggy self-propelled ahead of tamper.
T A M P E R I N C. 53 Court St., Pittsburgh, N.Y.
SALES AND SERVICE: 2 1 47 University Avenue
St. Poul 14, Minnesota
Phone: 645-5055
IN CANADA 160 St. Joseph Blvd.,
Lachine (Montreal), P.Q.
Phone: 637-5531
Your enquiries for detailed information or brochures on
Autojack Electromatic and other track machines are invited.
VEGETATION CONTROL
CHEMICALS
READE MANUFACTURING COMPANY, INC.
Jersey City — Chicago — Minneapolis — Kansas
City — Birmingham — Stockton
SERVING RAILROADS OF AMERICA FOR
MORE THAN FORTY YEARS
W
E
E
D
A
N
D
B
R
u
S
H
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
Here are the up-to-date facts on the SPENO Ballast
Cleaning and the SPENO Rail Grinding Services.
BALLAST CLEANING
SPENO Engineering and Research has de-
veloped a superior screening arrangement so
that we are now using an improved Ballast
Cleaner with greater efficiency.
RAIL GRINDING
Our Rail Grinding Service has been so well
received we are now building a THIRD Rail
Grinding Train to take care of the increased
demand.
SPENO is constantly developing means for
better service to make sure that the Railroads
receive everything they pay for — and more
c/uj£~/7St4> ZTie '^acfoizds Jn#£~Aat/e useds as.
cfib
Liinr
FRANK SPENO RAILROAD BALLAST CLEANING CO., INC.
306 North Cayuga Si.
Ithaca N Y
THE TRASCO
AUTONOMIC CAR RETARDER
CLAMPS IN PLACE
ANYWHERE IN TRACK
SIMPLE — EFFECTIVE — INEXPENSIVE
TRACK SPECIALTIES CO,
GENERAL MOTORS BLDG.
NEW YORK 19, N. Y.
American Railway
Engineering Association— Bulletin
Vol. 64, No. 577 February 1963
REPORTS OF COMMITTEES
5— Track 419
Continuous Welded Rail 449
A — Rail 497
1 — Roadway and Ballast 543
The reports in this issue of the Bulletin will be presented to the 1963 Busi-
ness Meeting of the Association at the Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago, March
15-16. Comments and discussion with respect to any of the reports are solicited,
and should be addressed to the chairman of the committee involved, in writing
in advance of the Meeting, or from the floor during the Meeting.
Copyright 1963, by American Railway Engineering Attoclation
BOARD OF DIRECTION
1962-1963
President
C. J. Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
Vice Presidents
L. A. Loccins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Houston 1, Tex.
T. F. Burris, Chief Engineer System, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Huntington, W. Va.
Past Presidents
E. J. Brown, Chief Engineer, Burlington Lines, Chicago 6.
R. H. Beeder, Chief Engineer System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago 4.
Directors
C. J. Henry, Chief Engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
J. M. Trissal, Vice President and Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago 5.
W. B. Throckmorton, Chief Engineer, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, Chi-
cago 5.
J. A. Bxjnjer, Chief Engineer, Union Pacific Railroad, Omaha 2, Nebr.
J. H. Brown, Assistant General Manager — Eastern District, St. Louis-San Francisco
Railway, Springfield 2, Mo.
J. E. Eisemann, Chief Engineer, Western Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Rail-
way, Amarillo, Tex.
W. H. Huffman, Assistant Chief Engineer — Construction, Chicago 4 North Western
Railway, Chicago 6.
F. R. Smith, Chief Engineer, Union Railroad, East Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. L. Yotjno, Chief Engineer, Norfolk & Western Railway, Roanoke 17, Va.
T. B. Htttcheson, Chief Engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond 13, Va.
C. E. Deeendore, Chief Engineer, New York Central System, New York 17.
John Ayer, Jr., Vice President — Operations, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad,
Denver 17, Colo.
Treasurer
A. B. Hhxman, Retired Chief Engineer, Belt Railway of Chicago; Chicago & Western
Indiana Railroad, Chicago 5.
Executive Secretary
Neal D. Howard, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Assistant Secretary
E. G. Gehrke, 59 East Van Buren St., Chicago 5.
Secretary Emeritus
Walter S. Lacher, 407 East Fuller Road, Hinsdale, HI.
Published by the American Railway Engineering Association, Monthly, January, February, March,
November and December; Bi-Monthly, June- July, and September-October, at 2211 Fordem
Avenue, Madison, Wis.; Editorial and Executive Offices,
59 Van Buren Street, Chicago 5, 111.
Second class postage paid at Madison, Wis.
Accepted for mailing at special rate of postage for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917,
authorized on June 29, 1918.
Subscription $10 per annum.
Report of Committee 5 — Track
^y
S. II. Poore, Chairman
J. M. Sai MON, Jr.,
Vice Chairman
J. P. Barker, Secretary
R. J. HOLLINGSWOBTH
(.'. E. Peterson
C. J. M< COM UCIIY
I . W. Green
L. A. Pelton
\ ( . Kieffer, Jr.
H.
G.
Garland
R . E. K i > i " \
V.
\l
. Si iiw i\<.
E. J. Lisv, Jr.
L.
II.
Jentoft
J. E. Martin
II
w
'. Jensen
R. E. Mismi;
V.
B.
I III. I.MAN, Jr.
M. P. Moore
T.
L.
BlGGAR
K. J. OSTERMAM
M
. C.
BlTNER
A. C. Parker, Jr.
W
. R
BjORKXTJND
B. E. Pearson
E.
E.
BRADY
A. D. QUACKENBUSH
J.
H.
Brow \
Ross P. Rodin
E.
W
. Caruthers (E)
M. K. RriM'hRT*
G.
P.
Chandler
R. X. Schmidt
\\
. E
Cornell
R. D. Simpson
E.
D.
CoWl.lN
J. F. Smti ii
F.
\\.
Creedle
T. R. Snodgrass
\
1)
De Moss
G. R. Sproles
K.
E.
DUNM
J. R. Talbott, Jr.
J.
W.
FlI.MKR
R. E. Tew
\\
E.
Griffiths
K. H. von Kampen
L.
R.
Hail
C. W. Wagner
M
J
II ASS \\
S. J. Watson
A.
E.
H W WOOD
Troy West (E)
A.
E.
1 ll\SON
I. V. WlLEl
E.
('.
HoNATH
J. B. Wilson
A.
F.
HUBER (E)
G. S. Wooding
C.
II
Johnson
B. J. WORLEY
R.
J.
D. Kei.i.y
M. J. Zeeman (E)
C.
\.
King
Committee
I Member Emeritus.
1 -ased.
Those whose names are sel in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR Com-
mittee S.
To The American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Revisions of specifications for tie plates, both high and low carbon, track
spikes, both high and low carbon, and steel drive spikes are offered for
adoption page 420
l nk tools, collaborating with Purchases and Stores Division AAR.
Progress report, submitted as information page 432
indardization of trackwork plans, collaborating with Communication and
Se< tion, \ \l<
Progress report, submitted a- information page 433
4. Prevention of damage resulting from brine drippings on track and struc-
ture-. Collaborating with Committee Is and Mechanical Division. AAR.
This assignment covers the laboratory phase oi the investigation of brine
orion Work has been temporarily interrupted due to lack oi funds,
I progress to dati see \kl \ Proceedings, Vol. 60, page 793, and Vol.
62, page 663.
419
Hull. .-.77
420 Track
5. Design of tie plates collaborating with Committees 3 and 4.
Final report on the service test on the CNO&TP approximately 12 miles
north of Chattanooga. Tenn., presented as information page 434
6. Hold down fastenings for tie plates, including pads under plates; their
effect on tie wear; collaborating with Committee 3.
Advance report on rail slippage tests on concrete ties was published in
Bulletin 573, page 3°. Progress report on the London, Ky., test submitted
herein as information page 440
7. Effect of lubrication in preventing frozen rail joints and retarding corrosion
of rail and fastenings.
Inspection of the Low Moor, Iowa, test on the C&NW was made July
18, 1962, at which time certain butt welded areas were flame cleaned and
wire brushed and some special coatings were applied. Your committee is
not offering any further report this year, as it has no conclusions.
8. Laying rail tight with frozen joints.
As stated in the committee's 1962 report (Vol. 63, page 486) no work was
done on this assignment in 1962 due to lack of funds. It is hoped that
work can be resumed in 1963.
9. Critical review of the subject of speed on curves, collaborating with the
AAR Joint Committee on Relation Between Track and Equipment.
Progress statement, submitted as information page 446
10. Methods of heat treatment, including flame hardening, of bolted rail frogs
and split switches, together with methods of repair by welding; explosive
hardening of manganese steel trackwork.
Progress statement, submitted as information page 446
11. Practicability of using reflex units for switch lamps and targets, collaborat-
ing with Communication and Signal Section, AAR.
Study in progress; however, the committee does not feel it has sufficient
information at hand to justify a report at this time.
The Committee on Track,
Stuart H. Poore, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 577, February 1963.
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
R. J. Hollingsworth (chairman, subcommittee), L. R. Hall, M. J. Hassan, A. F. Huber,
H. W. Jensen, L. A. Pelton, S. H. Poore, A. D. Quackenbush, J. M. Salmon, Jr.,
G. R. Sproles, M. J. Zeeman.
Your committee has completed the task of collaborating with ASTM Committee
A-l to make ASTM and AREA specifications for low-carbon steel tie plates, hot-worked
high-carbon steel tie plates, and soft-steel track spikes the same in requirements and
similar in format.
Track 421
At the same time it was decided to rearrange the AREA specifications for hiph-
carbon steel track spikes and steel drive spikes (which the ASTM does not have) to
make them conform also to the new format.
In addition to their rearrangement, all these specifications have been revised to
permit the use of steel made by the basic-oxygen process.
The specific recommendations of your committee are as follows:
Delete the Specifications for Low-Carbon Steel Tie Plates, Manual pages 5-1-1 to
5-1-3, incl.. substituting therefor the following revised version:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR LOW-CARBON STEEL TIE PLATES
1. Scope
(a) These specifications cover low-carbon steel tie plates for use in railroad track.
(b) A supplementary requirement, Art. Si, of an optional nature is provided. It
shall apply only when specified by the purchaser.
2. Process
The steel shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open-hearth,
electric-furnace, acid-bessemer, basic-oxygen.
3. Chemical Composition
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Other
Acid- Processes
Bessemer (Art. 2)
Carbon, min, percent 0.08 0.15
Phosphorus, max. percent 0.1 1 0.05
Copper, when specified under supplementary requirement Si. min,
percent 0.20 0.20
4. Ladle Analysis
(a) An analysis of each heat of open-hearth, electric-furnace or basic-oxygen steel
shall be made to determine the percentages of carbon and phosphorus, and also copper,
whin copper is specified.
(b) Carbon and manganese determinations, and copper when specified, shall be
made of each blow of bessemer steel, and determinations for phosphorus and sulfur
shall be at intervals not greater than each 10 blows, and the next previous determination
may be reported.
(c) The analysis prescribed in Arts. 4 (a) and 4 (b) shall be made by the manu-
facturer from a test ingot taken during the pouring of the heat. The chemical composi-
tion thus determined -hall lie reported to the purchaser or his representative, and the
percentages of carbon and phosphorus, and also copper, when copper is specified, shall
conform to the requirements specified in Art. s.
5. Check Analysis
narysis may be made by the purchaser from a finished tie plate representing
• oh heat of open-hearth, electric furnace or basic-oxygen steel, anil each blow or lot
of 10 tons of bessemer steel. The carbon content, and also copper, when copper is
422 Track
specified, thus determined shall not be less than that specified in Art. 3, and the phos-
phorus content shall not exceed that specified in Art. 3 by more than 25 percent.
6. Bending Properties
(a) Bend Tests — The bend test specimen specified in Art. 7 shall stand being bent
cold through 180 deg around a pin the diameter of which is not greater than the thick-
ness of the specimen without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
(b) Optional Bend Tests — If preferred by the manufacturer the following bend test
may be substituted for that described in Art. 6 (a) : A piece of the rolled bar shall
stand being bent cold through 90 deg around a pin the diameter of which is not
greater than the thickness of the section where bent, without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion. The term "thickness" includes vertical height of ribs and shoulder
where they are transverse to direction of pin.
7. Test Specimens
Bend test specimens shall be taken from the finished tie plates, or from the rolled
bars, and longitudinally with the direction of rolling. They shall be rectangular in sec-
tion, not less than y2 in. in width between the planed sides, and shall have two faces
as rolled. They shall be free from ribs or projections. Where the design of the tie plates
is such that the specimen cannot be taken between the ribs or projections, these ribs or
projections shall, in preparing the specimen, be planed off even with the main surface
of the tie plate.
8. Number of Tests
(a) One bend test shall be made from each heat of open-hearth, electric-furnace or
basic-oxygen steel, or from each 25 tons where heats are not identified, or from each
blow or lot of 10 tons of bessemer steel.
(b) If any test specimen shows defective machining or develops flaws, it may be
discarded and other specimen substituted.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
The tie plates shall conform to the dimensions specified by the purchaser, subject
to the following permissible variations:
(a) For tie plates with shoulders parallel to the direction of rolling, a variation of
jfe in. in thickness, l/$ in. in rolled width and & in. in sheared length will be permitted.
(b) A variation of 0.025 in. in flatness of the rail seat will be permitted.
(c) A tolerance of iV in over the minimum dimension specified for distance between
the shoulders of double-shoulder tie plates will be permitted.
(d) A variation of not more than 3*2 in. in the location of spike holes and in the
length of their sides will be permited.
(e) A variation of s"a in under and xh in over in the height of the shoulders will
be permitted.
(f) Tie plates shall be paid for on the basis of actual weight as applied to the entire
order, except that payment shall not be made for any weight in excess of 3 percent
over the weight calculated from the specified dimensions.
10. Finish
The tie plates shall be smoothly rolled and free from injurious warp and other
imperfections in surface and projecting fins of metal caused by shearing and punching.
Track 423
11. Marking
The tic plate section designation, the name or brand of the manufacturer, and the
last two digits of the year of manufacture shall be rolled in raised letters and figures
on the top of the plate to the outside of the shoulders, and a portion of this marking
shall appear on each finished tie plate.
12. Inspection
The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times while
work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufac-
turer's works that concern the manufacture of the materia] ordered. The manufacturer
shall afford the inspector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that
the material is being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests, except
check analysis, and inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to ship-
ment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unneces-
sarily with the operation of the works.
13. Rejection
(a) Unless otherwise specified, any rejection based on tests made in accordance
with Art. 5 shall be reported to the manufacturer within five working days from the
receipt of samples by the purchaser.
(b) Material that shows injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the manu-
facturer's works will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
14. Rehearing
Samples tested in accordance with Art. 5 that represent rejected material shall be
preserved for two weeks from the date of the test report. In case of dissatisfaction
with the results of the tests, the manufacturer may make claim for a rehearing within
that time.
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENT
The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the
purchaser in the inquiry, order and contract.
Si. Copper may be specified as shown in Arts. 3 and 4.
Delete the Specifications for Hot-Worked, High-Carbon Steel Tie Plates. Manual
5-1-4 to 5-1-6, incl., substituting therefor the following:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HOT-WORKED, HIGH-CARBON
STEEL TIE PLATES
1. Scope
IIh ae specifications cover hot-worked high-carbon steel tie plates for use in
railroad tra< k
(b) A supplementary requirement, An Si, of an optional nature is provided. It
shall apply only when specified by the purchaser.
2. Process
(a) The steel -hall be made by one or more of the following processes: open
Dearth, electric-furnace, basic-oxygen.
424 Track
(b) Cold steel accumulated in the form of ingots or billets which conform to the
requirements of Art. 4 may be used.
3. Manufacture
The tie plates shall be punched, slotted, and sheared hot at a temperature which
will give the best results, and immediately thereafter placed in an enclosure to assure
slow cooling from the initial heat.
4. Chemical Composition
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Carbon, percent 0.35 to 0.82
Phosphorous, max, percent 0.050
Copper, when specified under supplementary requirement Si, min, percent .. 0.20
5. Ladle Analysis
(a) An analysis of each heat of open-hearth, electric-furnace or basic-oxygen steel
shall be made by the manufacturer to determine the percentages of carbon and phos-
phorus; also copper when copper is specified.
(b) The analysis prescribed in Art. 5 (a) shall be made from a test ingot taken
during the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall be
reported to the purchaser or his representative, and the percentages of carbon and phos-
phorus, and copper when copper is specified, shall conform to the requirements specified
in Art. 4.
(c) Ladle analysis of cold steel correctly identified by heat number may be taken
from the mill record.
6. Bending Properties
fa) Bend Tests — The bend test specimen specified in Art. 7 shall stand being bent
cold through 30 deg around a pin the diameter of which is not greater than three times
the thickness of the specimen without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
(b) Optional Bend Tests — If preferred by the manufacturer, the following bend
test may be substituted for that described in Art. 6 (a) : A finished tie plate which
may be bent in either direction shall stand being bent cold through 30 deg around a
pin the diameter of which is not greater than three times the thickness of the section
where bent, without cracking on the outside of the bent portion. The term "thickness"
includes vertical height of ribs and shoulder where they are transverse to direction
of pin.
7. Test Specimens
The bend test specimen specified in Art. 6 (a) shall be taken from the finished tie
plate, longitudinally with the direction of rolling. It shall be rectangular in section, not
less than y2 in. in width between the planed sides and shall have two faces as rolled.
It shall be free from ribs or projections. Where the design of the tie plate is such that
the specimen cannot be taken between the ribs or projections, these ribs or projections
shall, in preparing the specimen, be planed off even with the main surface of the
tie plate.
8. Number of Tests
One bend test shall be made from each identified heat, or from each 25 tons
where heats are not identified.
Track 425
9. Retests
Tii' plates represented by bend tests failing to meet the requirements prescribed in
Ail. 6 (a) or 6 (b) may be re-annealed not more than twice and resubmitted. If tie
plates fail to meet the third test they shall be rejected.
10. Permissible Variations In Dimensions
The tie plates shall conform to the dimensions specified by the purchaser, subject
to the following permissible variations:
(a) For tie plates with shoulders parallel to the direction of rolling, a variation
in. in thickness. 's in. in rolled width, and ft in. in sheared length will be
permitted.
(b) A variation of 0.025 in. in flatness of rail seat will be permitted.
\ tolerance of ft in shall be permitted in excess of the minimum dimension
specified for distance between the shoulders of double shoulder tie plates.
(d) A variation of not more than g'a in. in the location of spike holes and in the
length of their sides will be permitted.
A variation of •'- in under and ,;\ in over in the height of the shoulders will be
permitted.
tf) Tie plates shall be paid for on the basis of actual weight as applied to the
entire order, except that payment shall not be made for any weight in excess of 3
percent over the weight calculated from the specified dimensions.
11. Finish
The tie plates shall be smoothly rolled, and free from injurious warp and other
imperfections in surface and projecting fins of metal caused by shearing and punching.
12. Marking
The tie plate section designation, the name or brand of the manufacturer, the last
two digits of the year of manufacture, and the letters "HW" indicating hot worked,
-hall be rolled in raised letters and figures on the top of the plate to the outside of the
shoulders, and a portion of this marking shall appear on each finished tie plate.
13. Inspection
The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry at all times while
work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufac-
turer's works thai concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer
-hill afford the ins|>ector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him that
the material U being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests and
inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless other-
wise specified, and shall l><- so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
i Deration of the works.
14. Rejection
il failing to meet the requirements of these specifications will be rejected
Material that shows injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the manu-
facturer's works will be rejected, and the manufacture! shall be notified.
426 Track
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENT
The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the
purchaser in the inquiry, order and contract.
Si. Copper may be specified as shown in Arts. 4 and 5.
Delete the Specifications for Soft Steel Cut Track Spikes, Manual pages 5-2-1 and
5-2-2, substituting therefor the following:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SOFT-STEEL TRACK SPIKES
1. Scope
(a) These specifica :ions cover soft-steel track spikes.
(b) A supplementary requirement, Art. Si, of an optional nature is provided. It
shall apply only when specified by the purchaser.
2. Process
The steel shall be made by one or mere the following processes: open-hearth,
electric-furnace, acid-bessemer, basic-oxygen.
3. Chemical Composition
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Carbon, min, percent:
Acid bessemer 0.06
Open-hearth, electric-furnace, basic-oxygen 0.12
Copper, when specified under supplementary requirement Si, min, percent 0.20
4. Ladle Analysis
(a) A determination for carbon and copper, when copper is specified, shall be made
of each heat of steel. This analysis shall be made by the manufacturer from a test ingot
taken during the pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall
be reported to the purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements
specified in Art. 3.
(b) When ladle analysis cannot be furnished, the manufacturer shall submit a report
of the chemical analysis made on three spikes selected at random from each 10-ton lot.
5. Tensile Properties
The manufacturer may, at his option, substitute tension tests for the chemical
analysis specified in Art. 3, in which case the finished spikes shall conform to the
following requirements as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, min, psi 55,000
Yield point, min, psi 0.5 tensile strength
Elongation in 2 in, min, percent 25
6. Bending Properties
(a) The body of a full-size finished spike shall stand being bent cold through 180
deg flat on itself without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
(b) The head of a full-size finished spike shall stand being bent backward to the
line of the face of the spike without showing evidence of forging laps on the surface
of the bent portion.
Track 427
7. Number of Tests
(a) When the option in Art. 5 is exercised, one tension test shall be made from
each 10-ton lot or fraction thereof.
(b) One bend test of each kind specified in Arts. 6 (a) and 6 (b) shall be made
from each lot of 5 tons or fraction thereof.
8. Retests
Spikes represented by bend tests failing to meet the requirements prescribed in
Arts. 6 (a) or 6 (b) may be annealed and resubmitted. If the spikes fail to meet the
third test they shall be rejected.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
The finished spikes shall conform to the dimensions specified by the purchaser,
subject to the permissible variations specified in Table 1.
Table 1 — Permissible Variations in Dimensions
Permissible
Variations
From Specified
Dimensions, Inches
Over Under
Cross section ■.'_, ,;' ,
Head & i.
Length, under head to point % %
Angle, under side of head 1 deg 1 deg
10. Finish
The material shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike
finish.
11. Inspection
The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry at all times while
work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufac-
turer's works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufac-
turer shall afford the inspector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy him
that the material is being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests and
inspection shall be made at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, unless other-
wise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
12. Rejection
Material that shows injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the manu-
facturer's works will be rejected, and the manufacturer shall be notified.
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENT
The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the
purchaser in the inquiry, order and contract.
Si. Copper may be specified as shown in Arts. 3 and 4.
Delete the Specification- for Hiidi-Carbon Steel Track Spike-. Manual pagi
and S— 2— 4, substituting therefor the following:
428 Track
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGH-CARBON STEEL TRACK SPIKES
1. Scope
(a) These specifications cover high-carbon steel track spikes.
(b) A supplementary requirement, Art. Si, of an optional nature is provided.
It shall apply only when specified by the purchaser.
2. Process
The steel shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open-hearth,
acid-bessemer, electric-furnace, basic-oxygen.
3. Chemical Composition
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Other
Acid- Processes
Bessmer (Art. 2)
Carbon, min, percent 0.20 0.30
Copper, when specified under supplementary requirement Si, min,
percent . . •. 0.20 0.20
4. Ladle Analysis
A determination for carbon and copper, when copper is specified, shall be made
of each heat of steel. This analysis shall be made from a test ingot taken during the
pouring of the heat. The chemical composition thus determined shall be reported to the
purchaser or his representative, and shall conform to the requirements specified in
Art. 3.
5. Tensile Properties
The manufacturer may, at his option, substitute tension tests for the chemical
analysis specified in Art. 3, in which case the finished spikes shall conform to the
following requirements as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, min, psi 70,000
Yield point, min, psi 0.5 tensile strength
Elongation in 2 in, min, percent 25
6. Bending Properties
(a) The body of a full-size finished spike shall stand being bent cold through 120
deg around a pin, the diameter of which is not greater than the thickness of the spike
without cracking on the outside of the bent portion.
(b) One bend test of each kind specified in Art. 6 (a) and 6 (b) shall be made
angle of 55 deg with the line of the face of the spike, without cracking on the outside
of the bent portion.
7. Number of Tests
(a) When the option in Art. 5 is exercised, one tension test shall be made from
each 10-ton lot or fraction thereof.
(b) One bend test of each kind specified in Arts. 6 (a) and 6 (b) shall be made
from each lot of 5 tons or fraction thereof.
Track 420
8. Retests
Spikes represented by bend tests failing to meet the requirements prescribed in
Art. 6 (a) or 6 (b) may be annealed and resubmitted. If the spikes fail to meet the
third test, they shall be rejected.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
The finished spikes shall conform to the dimensions specified by the purchaser,
subject to the permissible variations specified in Table 1.
Table 1 — Permissible Variations in Dimensions
Permissible
Variations
From Specified
Dimensions, Indus
Over Under
Cross section fa fa
Head fa fa
Length, under head to point Ms %
Angle, under side of head 1 deg 1 deg
10. Finish
All finished spikes shall be smocth and straight, with well formed heads, sharp
points, and be free from nicks, checks, cracks, or ragged edges, and shall be finished in
a workmanlike manner.
11. Marking
A letter or brand indicating the manufacturing and also the letters "HC", indicating
hiyh carbon, shall be pressed on the head of each spike while it is being formed. When
copper is specified, the letters "CU" shall be added.
12. Inspection
The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry at all times while
work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the manufac-
turer's works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The manufacturer
shall afford the inspector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to satisfy himself that
the material is being furnished in accordance with these specifications. All tests and
inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture, prior to shipment, unless other-
wise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere unnecessarily with the
operation of the works.
13. Rejection
Materia] failing to meet the requirements of these specifications will be rejected.
Material that shows injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the
manufacturer's works will be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified.
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENT
The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the
purchaser in the inquiry, order and contract.
Si. Copper may lie specified as shown in Arts. 3 and 4.
Delete the Specification^ for Steel Drive Spike-. Manual pages S M 1 and 5-M-2,
substituting therefor the following:
430 Track
SPECIFICATIONS FOR STEEL DRIVE SPIKES
1. Scope
(a) These specifications cover steel drive spikes.
(b) A supplementary requirement, Art. Si, of an optional nature is provided. It
shall apply only when specified by the purchaser.
2. Process
The steel shall be made by one or more of the following processes: open-hearth,
electric-furnace, acid-bessemer, basic-oxygen.
3. Manufacture
The heads of the spikes shall be formed and the threads rolled hot or cold.
4. Chemical Composition
The steel shall conform to the following requirements as to chemical composition:
Carbon, min, percent 0.18
Copper, when specified under supplementary requirement Si, min, percent 0.20
5. Tensile Properties
The full-size finished spikes shall conform to the following minimum requirements
as to tensile properties:
Tensile strength, psi 60,000
Yield point, psi 0.5 tensile strength
Elongation in 2 in min, percent 18
6. Bending Properties
The body of a full-size finished spike shall stand being bent cold through 90 deg
around a pin the diameter of which is not greater than three times the diameter of the
spike without cracking the outside of the bent portion.
7. Number of Tests
(a) One tension test and one bend test shall be made from each lot of 100 kegs or
fraction thereof.
(b) If any test specimen develops flaws, it may be discarded and another specimen
substituted.
8. Retests
If the percentage of elongation of any tension test specimen is less than specified
in Art. 5 and any part of the fracture is more than Y^ in from the center of the gage
length, as indicated by scribe scratches marked on the specimen before testing, a retest
shall be allowed.
9. Permissible Variations in Dimensions
(a) The purchaser shall specify in the inquiry and order, the plan to which the
spikes are to be manufactured. The following plans cover designs of steel drive spikes:
Plan 1M — AREA cone-neck drive spike
Plan 2M — AREA washer-head timber drive spike
Plan .1M — AREA timber drive spike
Track 431
(b) The finished -pikes shall conform to the dimensions and permissible variations
in dimensions specified in the plan. The design and depth of the threads shall be as
indicated on the plan.
10. Finish
The head shall be concentric with and firmly joined to the body of the spike. The
material shall be free from injurious defects and shall have a workmanlike finish.
11. Marking
A letter or brand indicating the manufacturer shall be located on the top of washer
part of the spike head as shown on plans.
12. Inspection
(a) The inspector representing the purchaser shall have free entry, at all times
while work on the contract of the purchaser is being performed, to all parts of the
manufacturer's works which concern the manufacture of the material ordered. The
manufacturer shall afford the inspector, without charge, all reasonable facilities to
satisfy himself that the material is being furnished in accordance with these specifica-
tions. All tests and inspections shall be made at the place of manufacture, prior to
shipment, unless otherwise specified, and shall be so conducted as not to interfere
unnecessarily with the operation of the works.
13. Rejection
(a) Material that does not meet the requirements of these specifications will be
rejected.
(b) Material that shows injurious defects subsequent to its acceptance at the manu-
facturer's works will be rejected and the manufacturer shall be notified.
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENT
The following supplementary requirement shall apply only when specified by the
purchaser in the inquiry, order and contract.
Si. Copper may be specified as shown in Art. 4.
The following editorial change is recommended in the numbering of plans for drive
spikes on pages S-M-3 and 5-M-4 of the Manual. In order to avoid confusion between
these plans and the sequence of plans covering track tools, the plan numbers should be
changed to read as follows:
Plan 1M — AREA cone-neck drive spike
Plan 2M — AREA washer bead timber drive -pike
Plan <M \Rf. \ limber drive spike
These plans are referred to bj these revised numbers in the bodj of the specifica-
tions for drive spikes.
432 Track
Report on Assignment 2
Track Tools
Collaborating with Purchases and Stores Division, AAR
C. E. Peterson (chairman, subcommittee), T. L. Biggar, VV. R. Bjorklund, E. E. Brady,
W. E. Cornell, A. D. De Moss, C. H. Johnson, C. M. King, J. E. Martin, C. J.
McConaughy, S. M. Poore, J. M. Salmon, Jr., J. R. Talbot, Jr., B. J. Worley.
This is a progress report, submitted as information:
Your committee is making a study of the following subjects:
1. Snap-on Ratchet Track Wrench
From experience gained in the field, it was found that the shoulders on the joint
bars, especially on reformed bars, do not permit the socket of this tool to get up tight.
Also, it has too much allowance for over length of the track bolts. The handle is located
too far from the socket end, resulting in a twisting action which does not allow max-
imum torque to be applied to the nut. It is not durable enough, as the ratchet wears
out too fast. The wrench works well for a specific job, but for general work it should
be redesigned.
The committee suggests that it be designed as a double-end socket wrench having
a thin-wall socket with a single-action ratchet in one direction. The ratchet should be
fitted around the center of the double-end socket where the handle will engage it.
2. Track Jacks — Aluminum Housing
It has been called to the attention of the committee that there have been a number
of failures of aluminum track jacks. Therefore, a canvass is being conducted of the
Class I Railroads to determine the number and kind of failures that have occurred.
From the data received, a study will be made to determine necessary changes in design,
metallurgy, specifications, etc., to correct the situation.
3. Aluminum Track Level and Gage
An investigation will be made on the use of lightweight metals for the AREA track
level and gage.
4. Wear Limit on Striking and Cutting Tools
A study will be made on the economy of reclaiming tools that have worn down to
the specified wear limit.
Track 433
Report on Assignment 3
Standardization of Trackwork Plans
Collaborating with Communication and Signal Section, AAR
C. J. McConaughy (chairman, subcommittee), J. P. Barker, M. C. Bitner, \V. R. Bjork-
lund, E. \V. Caruthers, W. E. Cornell, E. D. Covvlin, F. W. Creedle, A. D. DeMoss,
J. W. Fulmer, M. J. Hassan, R. J. Hollingsworth, E. C. Honath, A. F. Huber, H. VY.
Jensen. C. H. Johnson, R. J. D. Kelly, N. C. Kieffer, Jr., C. N. Kin-. R. E.
Kuston. E. J. Lisy, Jr., R. E. Misner, W. L. O'Dell, E. J. Osterman, A. C. Parker,
Jr., B. E. Pearson. C. E. Peterson, S. H. Poore, B. Post, A. D. Quackenbush, Ross
P. Roden, J. M. Salmon, Jr., R. N. Schmidt, R. D. Simpson, T. R. Snodgrass,
G. R. Sproles, K. H. von Kampen, S. J. Watson, Troy West, I. V. Wiley, G. S.
Woodings, B. J. Worley, M. J. Zecman.
Your committee submits the following report of progress in connection with the
standardization of trackwork plans.
At the 1962 Annual Meeting of the Association, plans for the five new standard
turnouts as covered in Bulletin 570, Parts 1 and 2, were submitted and approved for
recommended practice. These plans have since been published and issued for insertion
in the Manual (Portfolio of Trackwork Plans). Also published and issued for inclusion
in the Manual were the various other AREA plans incorporating revisions in switch
details as outlined in Bulletin 570, which were approved at the March 1962 annual
meeting.
Since the adoption of the five standard turnouts, your committee has approved
the recommendation that the plans in back of the blue divider sheet in the Portfolio
of Trackwork Plans be kept up to date with revisions and changes in construction
details that may be approved for their betterment.
The use of an auxiliary throwing device for 39-ft switch points was discussed.
While the operation of such a device may affect switch maintenance, it is a detail that
is handled by the signal department. An investigation was made by C. J. R. Taylor of
the Erie-Lackawanna, collaborator from the AAR Communication and Signal Section.
He made a complete, detailed report, a summary of which was passed to each committee
member. Xo action was taken as to including it in our plans.
The plans for track crossings, their tie layout, base plate construction, etc., were
investigated and a report was submitted showing what plans would be affected. After
discussion it was decided that further study should be made, as no recommendations
were made as to how to handle this involved problem.
Speeds Through Turnouts
Your committee has made a study of the method used in calculating the recom-
mended maximum speeds of trains through level turnouts as shown in the Manual on
pages 5-3-11 and 5-3-12. For curved switches, this method does not take into consid-
eration the ancle of impingement at the point of -witch, and for straight switches tlii-
angle is used in an empirical formula not based on true mathematical principles. In an
effort to develop a more logical method of using thi- angle a- a criteria in determining
permissible speeds, the AAR research staff mafle a study as a result of our investigation
on standardization of turnout- The results of their investigation is contained in their
Report No KR 14. which was published in AREA Bulletin 566 for September-October
1961. The formula developed by them used this angle and an experimentally determined
maximum lateral acceleration for comfortable riding, to develop the permissible speed
434 Track
through the switch. Speeds calculated by this method for all recommended AREA turn-
outs were compared to the recommended speeds now in the Manual and were found
to be similar. In view of these and other considerations, it was recommended and
approved by your committee that no change be made in the present speeds given in
the Manual. However, the funds approved for this work were recommended to be
applied to the investigation of speeds on curves. Any change in the recommended speeds
on curves would very likely affect our present recommended turnout speeds.
Plan for Switch Stands
Revision of our Plan 251-55 covering switch stands was recommended in view of
the decision of the Communication and Signal Section, AAR, to eliminate from its
Manual Plans Nos. 1440B, 1443B and 1460B pertaining to switch lamps, which plans
are referred to in Note 14 of our Plan No. 251-55. It was also suggested that Par. 7
of Note 11 on this plan be revised to cover the use of reflective sheet material on
targets as an alternate to painting them. Furthermore, a separate proposal has been
made that the three details of the single vane targets now shown be removed and that
Note 11 be further revised to specify that all target details be furnished by purchaser.
Report on Assignment 5
Design of Tie Plates
Collaborating with Committees 3 and 4
L. A. Pelton (chairman, subcommittee), J. P. Barker, G. P. Chandler, J. W. Fulmer,
A. B. Hillman, Jr., R. J. D. Kelly, C. N. King, S. H. Poore, J. M. Salmon, Jr.,
R. D. Simpson, J. F. Smith, C. W. Wagner, G. S. Woodings, M. J. Zeeman.
This is a final report, offered as information, on the service test on the CNO&TP, in
which seven designs of tie plates for the rail base of 6 in were subjected to 379 million
gross tons of traffic.
The investigation was conducted by the AAR research staff under the general direc-
tion of G. M. Magee, director of engineering research, with direct supervision by H. E.
Durham, research engineer track, aided by L. R. Lamport, assistant research engineer
track.
Foreword
The test was installed in November 1944 on Mile 326 of the single-track main line
of the Cincinnati, New Orleans & Texas Pacific Railway (Southern Railway System),
approximately 12 miles north of Chattanooga, Tenn. The installation consisted of 7 de-
signs of tie plates in 22 panels of track laid with new creosoted ties, stone ballast and
131 RE rail. Eight of the panels were on a short 6-deg curve having 6 in elevation, with
the remaining 14 panels on tangent track and equaly divided between oak and pine ties.
Stress measurements under traffic were made in 1945 and published in the Proceedings,
Vol. 47, 1946, pages 491-514. The latest progress report was published in Vol. 59, 1958,
pages 1028-1033.
The curve was relaid in December 1952 and subsequent regaging was done in March
1958 by lining the low rail only with a minimum of adzing on the gage side to permit
shifting of the tie plates. Final test measurements were taken in May 1962 as the
Southern was laying continuous welded 132 RE rail through the test area with heavy
Track 435
tie renewals and adzing of the remaining ties, thereby destroying the basis for further
test data on tie wear, gage and rail wear. The tie plates were restored to their original
position and it is hoped that at some later date some more tie plate deflection readings
will be available for evaluation.
Gross tons of traffic during the last service period, June 1957 to May 1962, increased
from 278 to 379 million. All trains have been hauled by diesel power since June 1953.
Tie Abrasion
A summary of tie plate cutting measurements for the 17.5-year service period,
November 1944 to May 1962, is shown in Table 1. During the last test period of 4.92
years there has been an increase in rate of plate cutting on the 6-deg curve amounting
to approximately 35 percent. On the oak tangent the rate of cutting decreased 11 per-
cent and increased 13 percent on the pine tangent. There was little difference in the
average rate of cutting for all panels in each section compared with the average of the
four panels with 14-in plates. Acceleration of the plate cutting had not been apparent
in prior test periods.
The size of tie plate does not appear to be a factor in the average plate cutting.
Omitting Sec. 405-A with ribbed plates on the 6-deg curve, the average penetration of
seven panels in each test section was practically identical to the average of the 14-in
plates in the same section. This average cutting is probably not significant because of the
limited number of panels involved and the fact that the variation in plate area is only
about 15 percent.
On the inner rail of the 6-deg curve, it will be noted that the tie abrasion was
nearly equallized under the 14^4-in plates in Sec. 831. This plate also gave the best
performance on the outer rail. The average of the four 14-in plate sections and of the
section with 13-in plates shows reasonably good results with the poorest performance
in Sec. 405 with 12-in plates. On the tangent with oak ties there was generally good
uniformity in plate cutting with the best results being obtained in the sections with
13-in and 14-in plates. On the pine ties all sections showed relatively heavy cutting on
the sage end of the plates with the poorest performance being in the sections with
14^-in and 12-in plates.
Tie Plate Bending
Field measurements of tie plate deflection were inconclusive in determining any
appreciable tie plate bending, although a few plates indicated that some deflection had
taken place. Eight such plates, three of which were from Sec. 83 IX of ->4 in thick-
ness, were shipped to the laboratory for careful examination which failed to develop
evidence of bending. As previously stated the test plates were left in track under the
new rail and it is hoped that they may be checked again, but the performance under
379 million tons of traffic is considered very good.
Gage of Track
Figs, 1 and 2 are graphs of track gage for the curve since regaging in March
1958 and for the tangent sections since the beginning of the test, with all intervening
years except 1957 omitted for clarity. The 6-deg curve had an average of 0.37 in wide
gage, of which 0.08 in was due to wear on the high rail, when regaged in March 1958 l>\
shifting the tie plates and lining the low rail. Since regaging, the average widening in
4.2 years was 0.20 in, of which 0.04 in was due to rail wear. The greatest change 0<
(lined in Sec. 405 with 12-in plates, with the minimum in Sec, 831 and U!j in plates,
4.<6
Track
<
a
o
§
2 OS
2 <
S3 M
5£
K U
< 53
U fc-
5 w
o a
« ><
o £
ja j2
/'
CO
CM
CM
^T-
-o to
5 '5
« 03
CO
'
9)
r-
c
<
n
CO
eg
CM
CO
eg
o
•»•
W
m
CO
CO
O
Ji
00
00 CM
o
o
en
01
h-
«l"
CO
CO
CO
BQ
CO
CO
CM
CI
c
X
-/j
0)
is
-o
■0
a
w
in
in
T*
m
CO
CO
(N
o
00
in
^
DO
^
co m
ssfS
O
O
^
0
£
<*
^
■*
"*
<*
■"J"
*
•*
H
CM
eg
eg
CM
C)
CM
eg
Cl
o <~
~ o
3
<e* co
n
s; c
IN
00
T
03
r-
o> o
o
O
00
Q
f-
OS
03
en
o
w
CM
N
OJ
cl
CI
Cg
rt
CO
CM
a
^
eg
**
^
H
W
> in
o o
23 <~
S a
^H
m
o
o
CO
CO
iO
-r
CO
co
o
CM o
n
o
c '2
o c
'S
<
a)
Cl
CM
a
Ci
eg
CO
CO
<u
H
■a
o
CM
Cl
eg
eg
H
CO
2 ™
ii co
D9
w
Cfi
TJ
■a
o
lO
«*
CO
■*
CO
01
c
s
00
O
en
CO
o
oo m
•a
in
in
in
9
c;
CO
c-l
-a
CM
11
a.
0
a
W
cj
CO
CN
CO
eg
CO
CO
«*
XJ
CO
CM
eg
eg
eg
1-1
eg
Tf
■*
in
o
CD
u
O
CO
o
CO
u
o
GO
O
a>
TJ
•a
CO
to
o
Cg
^
■*
r^
t
•H
m
CM
CO
00
en
co m
oi
£
Ul
cm
CM
CM
CO
IN
CN
CM
CO
eg
iH
f-i
I
CM
H
01
"2
bo
3
0
O
CO
&
u
&
H
&
u
M
1-.
H
i-,
u
cVcl
(-■
Ih Ih
gcj
nj
Cl!
cl
cl
Rj
cit
a
cd
rt
3
3
a
3
9
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
o
■I
<■>
O CJ
Fh
Ih
u
Ih
Fh
U
Ch
u
h
u
G
^3
U
U
U
u
u
u
u
U
U
0
u
U
u
U
U
U
O U
«
^
T1
Tl
•n
XI
Tl
TJ
T)
Tl
Tl
Tl
"8
TJ
T3
T3
TJ
Tl
•o XJ
11
cc
o
pq
0
X
O
o
P3
«
0
X
o
«
D
S
a
X
E
o
K
O
K
O
pfl
K
PC
£
S (X
N
CM
CO
CO
CO
CO
v
-s
~v
v.
V
-N.
-N
■v.
V
^>
-v
v.
■v.
CO
CO
CO
r^
CO
r-
I> CO
rt
CO
CO
eg
a
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X X
^
-r
■2 * g
d
CO
T
CO
CO
■^1
^
CO
<#
-t*
f
CO CM
t-H
a
X
X
X
IN
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
eg
eg
X
■0"
•v.
X
X
CM
CM
X
X
X
X X
H
H
CO
CO
H
H
H
H
°?
CO
H
H
■"*
T
'V
t«-
c~
t"
*"
t"
c-
CO
00
'-
*"
l>
t"
o
t>
00
^
l>
t-
i>
^
t- OO
N
><
X
.O
<
N
!x
X
^>
N
^
X
m
o
J!,
^
^
M
in
H
,1,
^
^
D
4
in
H
rH
,!<
H
o
fc «
w Q
S
o
S^i
co
CD
CO
■/j
-V
•#
00
«#
■*
yf
"SI
Track 437
It will be noted in Fig. 1 for the 6-deg curve that the sections divide at the joints in
the outer rail and generally have wider gage at those points. This gage pattern on the
curves prevailed in other service tests. As during previous test periods, Sec. 40S-A with
12-in rib-bottom plates has resisted gage widening better than similar plates without ribs
in Sec. 405, but the difference is due primarily to Sec. 405-A being on the spiral where
the rail wear is practically nil.
On the two tangent sections there has been relatively little change in gage during
the 17.5-year test period. The average reduction in gage is only 0.04 in for the oak tie
section and 0.10 in for the pine tie section.
As a whole the gage has held reasonably well, including the section on the curve
where the operating speeds are predominantly above the equilibrium speed of 38 mph.
Cant of Rail
In connection with the tie abrasion data presented in Table 1, an analysis has been
made of the rail cant change from 1:40 because of the unequal plate cutting at the
ends of the tie plates.
The following table includes the rail-cant data based on the initial 1:40 cant and
the final tie wear measurements. It will be noted that, generally, the cant of the outer
rail was appreciably smaller than 1:40. The 14)4-in plate with y^-'m eccentricity retained
a cant of 1:65. In general, the inner rail retained its initial cant or increased slightly.
On tangent with pine ties the cant for the 12-in and 14^4-in tie plates increased on
both rails. For the same two designs of tie plates on tangent with oak ties there was
an increase in cant but slightly less than on the pine ties.
Rail Cant at Exd of Test
Plate Designation East or
1 :40 Cant Inner Rail
6-Deg Curve, Oak Ties
405 12 in 1:31
831 14-K in 1:39
831-Z 14 in 1:36
402 14 in 1:38
Tangent, Pine Ties
831 14^ in 1:26
405 12 in 1:26
Tangent, Oak Ties
831 14}4 in 1:33
405 12 in 1:35
Tie Renewals
The fir>t Ik- renewals in the test sections were made during March 1°58 after 13.3
years of service, when 11 were in-tailed in the 6-deg curve. 7 in the oak tangent and
23 in the pine tangent. When test measurements were made on May 14, 1062, 39 addi-
tional ties had been renewed on the curve lor a total of 50, or 28 percent of those in
the 8 test panels, Tin- heaviest renewals were in Sec. 405 where 14 of the 22 ties had
been renewed. Many of the lit- remaining in track in all test sections were found to be
(rushing in the plate area and others were splitting badly. New ties distributed indicated
that the Southern Railwaj expected to make heavy renewals following the laying of the
continuous welded rail.
West or
Outer Rail
Eccentricity
1:310
1:65
V2 in
1:110
V» in
1:130
H in
1:27
Vz in
1:31
H in
1:39
V2 in
1:32
H in
438
Track
"-.■"•«
^
Lu lu
OJ
\
k
-l<»row
1
/
<r ■*
<
i
/
\
in
O
X
-<
\
O 0
o *
o
C7>
/
Sp
/
LU UJ
OJ
1
O
O
c
o
V
V
^1
/
toft1
m
o
o
.c
o
V
A
« e
N
o
1-
ft
<
CD —
If) iri
— -»~
~v.
UJ UJ
1
-~x>.
r
r)
in m
if)
c
o
/
0.
/
'
A
a o
(X) N
iri ^"
UJ
OJ
V
\
i
UJ UJ
1
o
s
in to
J*
o
O
OJ
,^-
<*-
<
/
0 0
CO —
■o
a>
If)
7\
m io
o
U)
o
a>
O
V
<s
nV
*4
LU UJ
i
X
>h
m co
1
to
oo
<
0 0
o o
0>
2
*r
/
m in
o
a
"■^
*n
uj LU
V
^ >
r"(»tiola>
CO
i
>-
i
\
s
in u>
CD
c
»>-'*
oo 2d
rO
1
m m
V
M
o
V
7
UJ UJ
-lou
ID LO
fo
03
cvi
c
o
c
o
- o -
1-
<"*
/
5°
a
2
^
o
CD i-
iri id
io|*
" r
^
*X
,\
LU UJ
■ l*>t*
<*•
00
->
' 03
in m
If)
if)
1
-C
//
J»
JZ
jn to
ro
(J
O
rO in
03
o
^
o
m of)
-'
*f m
"ml* !n|a> '-\ot "ro|a> -|» -|» Q *-|"
8P!M
96D9
>pOJJ.
pjopuojs
— a)
2g
£ E S
«2 UJ
1 a"
-E <i> «*-
*- o
>- m
a) O
c
t*:ffl S 3i
0) «> u>
£ c
en 3
ro
JZ •
a; «, £
Q.-^ CO
jt a> I
= o =
o>^ *i
LUOJJ U0IJ0IA3Q
Track
439
— —
V
\ <
v..
45
\
CM
(
t)
m
O
//
ft
f
/
\
4
/
f\
o
C7>
o
S
fJI
1
o
c
o
j
k.
%i
\
■"
\
\
o
o
m
/
\
i)
o
c
o
Q.
^
it
\ <■
*
16
oH:
xs
~~*1
1
O
<#
1 **■
^
CM
\,\
V
X
in
1/
C
0)
)\
J
c
a>
<3>
(1
c
1
<s
o
H
1
*\ )
a
P
V
(D
i-
i
(
0
o
,
'"A
c
CO
V
o
/ y
a.
*
i;
K
T3
0)
O
o
a>
\
-o
a>
o
VI
o
01
\)>
y.
\
V
y
O
/\
\
o
1
>
s
''A'
\
>
f
ro
\
;
./
CD
o
J
(
t
\
<"*
. \
V
L._
CM
V
1
(O
CO
Is
Is
CJ
1
N
o
<M
o
c
c
><
o
S
\
\
k
o
c
(J
%,
>
*"Vl
*
A
>
nK
t
fi
in
\J ■:
f
* /
\
\
.-»)
Jo
CO
,
0>
c
3
->
'Is
Lz
\
I
'
r'
si
-
si
/
\
f
a
a
a
in
•"•
U
-J
_
CJ
U
M
a
<D
r
■a
a
•o
a
en
a>
o
*-
^i
0J
c
(i
o
UJ
a
•*• -1*
-loo O -Ho '-!■» -|~
K>|<D -|«
-1"
tJ -1"
»P!M
8D09 >p0Jl PJ0PU0IS UJ0V(
SP!M
U0||0|A3Q
Wt"l
440 Track
Conclusions
The test results indicate good uniformity in plate cutting under the 14-in and
14^4-in plates on the inner rail of the 6-deg curve, but that the 14->^-in plates with
y2-'m eccentricity had the best performance on the outer rail. Better performance on
the outer rail might be expected from the use of the special 16-in tie plates with lJ4-in
eccentricity for use on curves per AREA Plan 21. The 14-in plate, AREA Plan 12,
with j^-in eccentricity for 6-in rail base, should be adequate for the inner rail of the
curve and also the tangent where it has performed well in the test. The 13-in plates
have performed reasonably well and should be adequate, particularly under medium
traffic or with SJ^-in base rail. The 12-in plate is indicated to be inferior for heavy
traffic, particularly on the curve and tangent with softwood ties.
The test results do not permit any conclusions regarding tie plate bending, but it is
believed that the thickness of the various designs of plates in the AREA Manual are
adequate to provide good service under all traffic conditions. No revisions to the tie
plate designs in the AREA Manual are recommended.
This report supplements the conclusions in the final report on tie plates tested with
the 53^-in rail base on the Illinois Central Railroad (See Vol. 56, page 824).
Acknowledgment
The Association gratefully extends its thanks to the Southern Railway for its coop-
eration and assistance which made possible the obtaining of field data for this report.
Report on Assignment 6
Hold-Down Fastenings for Tie Plates, Including Pads
Under Plates — Their Effect on Tie Wear
Collaborating with Committee 3
N. C. Kieffer, Jr. (chairman, subcommittee), M. C. Bitner, E. W. Caruthers, E. D.
Cowlin, F. W. Creedle, R. G. Garland, L. R. Hall, A. E. Hinson, R. J. Hollings-
worth, L. H. Jentoft, C. H. Johnson, R. J. D. Kelly, E. J. Lisy, Jr., J. E. Martin,
C. J. McConaughy, S. H. Poore, J. M. Salmon, Jr., R. N. Schmidt, T. R. Snod-
grass, R. E. Tew, C. W. Wagner, Troy West, I. V. Wiley.
TESTS ON THE LOUISVILLE & NASHVILLE RAILROAD
This progress report, submitted as information, covers the committee's inspection
of the AAR-L&N installations of tie pads, anchor spikes, etc., near London, Ky., on
June 6, 1962.
Introduction
These tests were begun in 1947 for the purpose of developing information for de-
termining the most effective and economical methods for increasing the service life of
ties by minimizing plate cutting and reducing the frequency of regaging and readzing
curves by the use of special hold-down fastenings, tie pads, etc. All of the test installa-
tions are located in the northbound track carrying loaded coal car tonnage near
London, Ky.
Track
441
The inspection was attended by 20 members and guests, including three representa-
tives of the AAR research staff. Nine tie plates were removed to examine the condition
of the pads, fastenings, etc. (See Figs. 1 to 9, incl.)
Change in Operation of the Existing Double-Track Main Line
The L&N plans to convert to single track CTC and will retain the southbound
track. All of the test sections are located in the northward main. In view of these
changes, it is planned to take readings in all of the test installations in 1963. The
correlating tie wear machine tests of the installations on the L&N will be reported,
as well as the other tests made with tie pads and two species of wood and two sizes
of tie plates.
Acknowledgment
The Association is indebted to the L&N for their cooperation and assistance in
making the inspection and furnishing transportation for the visitors.
Fig. 1 — Control section 37 with 14-in tie plates and 2 each of cut line
and anchor spikes, inner rail 5-deg curve. Plate cutting noted for 143 months
of service, creosoted oak tie: field side 3/16 in, gage side 3/16 in, average
3/16 in. Inner rail plates were removed because the tie wear was greater
than for the outer rail.
442
Track
Fig. 2 — North portion section 46, 14-in Racor tie pad, uncoated, 127
months of service, inner rail, joint tie. Some sand, dampness and wood
compression were noted.
Fig. 3 — South portion section 46, 14-in Racor tie pad, coated, 127 months
of service, inner rail 5-deg curve. There was little difference in the condi-
tions noted for the coated vs. the uncoated pad.
Track
443
Fig. 4 — Middle portion section 41, 14-in by *4-in Fabco pad coated with
asphalt on the bottom side, 131 months of service, inner rail 5-deg curve.
Under-plate area was wet, with some sand present. Pad was in moderately
good condition.
Fig- 5 — South portion section 56, 14-in by J^-in Fabco pad, bottom
coated, inner rail 5-deg curve, 32 months of service. This specimen was
removed primarily to check the seal with the tie. The pad had a strong seal,
most of the coating adhering to the wood.
444
Track
Fig. 6 — Control section 9 with 13-in tie plates and 2 each of cut line
and anchor spikes, outer rail long 4^4-deg curve. Plate cutting measured for
178 months of service, creosoted oak tie: field side, l/% in, gage side 3/16 in,
average 5/32 in. Outer rail plates were removed because of the larger tie
wear under them.
Fig. 7 — North portion section 28, 14-in by 3/16-in Konvex tie pad (tire
carcass) coated both sides, outer rail long 4^2-deg curve, 32 months of
service. This pad had a strong seal and a clean area under it. In a previous
inspection it was found that the seal with the tie plate was almost as strong
as the seal with the tie. A sheet of polyethylene was placed next to the tie
plate to avoid disturbing the seal with the wood.
Track
445
Fig. 8 — South portion section 28, 14-in by 3/16-in Konvex tie pad coated
on both sides, outer rail long 4^2-deg curve, 46 months of service. The bond
with the tie was weaker than in the case of the pad shown in Fig. 7, but
the under-plate area was clean.
Fig. 9 — Section 5, Bird 7-ply 13-in duck-felt coated pad, outer rail long
4!/2-deg curve, 178 months of service. The pad had a strong bond with the
tie, but a little wood compression was noted.
446 Track
Report on Assignment 9
Critical Review of the Subject of Speed on Curves
as Affected by Present-Day Equipment
Collaborating with the AAR Joint Committee on Relation Between
Track and Equipment
L. H. Jentoft (chairman, subcommittee), VV. R. Bjorklund, A. D. DeMoss, R. G.
Garland, L. W. Green, R. J. Hollingsworth, H. W. Jensen, R. E. Kuston, J. E.
Martin. S. H. Poore, J. M. Salmon, Jr., J. R. Talbott, Jr., R. E. Tew, G. S.
Woodings.
For several years field tests had been planned to check the validity of analyses
relative to the design of spiral easement curves, for the purpose of arriving at a more
logical formula for the Manual, but because of various difficulties such tests have had
to be deferred. In June 1962, however, through the cooperation of the Pennsylvania
Railroad, it was possible to make an extensive set of runs on curves up to 7 deg and
at speeds up to 100 mph. A diesel locomotive and a modern passenger car were fur-
nished by the railroad and extensively instrumented by the AAR research staff with
improved types of equipment and circuits not previously used.
Committee members and other interested persons were invited to participate in
the tests and acted as observers to rate the quality of the ride in the coach while
traversing the spiral easements. The large amount of data recorded are being reduced
and will form the basis for a future report and recommendations on the subject.
Report on Assignment 10
Methods of Heat Treatment, Including Flame Hardening,
of Bolted Rail Frogs and Split Switches, Together
with Methods of Repair by Welding; Explosive
Hardening of Manganese Steel Trackwork
H. W. Jensen (chairman, subcommittee), J. P. Barker, M. C. Bitner, F. W. Creedle,
W. E. Griffiths, A. E. Haywood, M. J. Hassan, A. E. Hinson, A. F. Huber, L. H.
Jentoft, C. H. Johnson, R. E. Kuston, E. J. Lisy, Jr., E. J. Osterman, A. C.
Parker, Jr., S. H. Poore, R. P. Roden, J. M. Salmon, Jr., R. D. Simpson, J. F.
Smith, T. R. Snodgrass, C. W. Wagner, K. H. von Kampen, I. V. Wiley, M. J.
Zeeman.
Service Test of Simulated Crossings
The service test of the 24 simulated flangevvay intersection units of bolted rail con-
struction in the Milwaukee Road's westward freight main leading to the Bensenville
hump yard was inspected periodically during the year. From the measurements of the
tread corner batter made in April 1962, some of the units will require welding next
year. There was no grinding on the corners in 1062. The total gross tonnage carried
by the units from April 13, 1954, to April .50, 1962, was 252 million; 91 million prior
to the first welding September 11, 1957, and 161 million after welding.
A subsequent inspection in November 1962 indicated little change in six months
except some surface chipping and fine cracks in the OHCC unit of the west panel.
The defects are not as yet of sufficient magnitude to require immediate repairs.
Track 447
Explosive Hardening of Hadfield Manganese
Steel Trackwork — Service Testa
At East Clinton, 111., the C&NW installed a 115 RE insert (70-deg angle) crossing
at the intersection of its eastward main track and a CB&Q branch line in September
1950. The north half of the crossing was hammer hardened on the treads and the
south half was explosively hardened with one 2-gram, two 4-gram shots on the treads,
and one 2-gram shot in the flangeways. In July 1962 the average batter on the east-
bound receiving corners was 0.085 in for each method of depth hardening. No measure-
ments were taken on the CB&Q receiving corners because of the light traffic.
The object of this phase of the investigation is to determine if the occurrence
of flangeway fillet cracks can be reduced or eliminated in Hadfield manganese crossing
castings having the flangeways explosively hardened. One 2-gram shot was used to
harden the flangeways.
On April 16, 1062, the B&OCT replaced two of the old solid-type (75-deg 48-min
angle) crossings of the AT&SF-B&O double-track main lines at McCook, 111., with U6
RE insert crossings. The new crossings were also hardened on the treads by the same
process. Both crossings carry the fast traffic on the eastward main of the AT&SF. At
present all of the inserts in the Santa Fe's south rail have hardened flangeways and
those in the north rail are not hardened. All of the castings are numbered for
identification.
The test crossings were inspected November 13, 1962, and no cracks were noted
in any of the inserts.
The committee is indebted to the cooperating railroads for their assistance.
Report of Special Committee on Continuous
Welded Rail
M. S. Reid II \\ . Jenkins
C. R. Merriman A. C. Junks, Jr.
J. F. Reaver A. J. Kozak
M. P. Anderson W. Ledyard
S. H. Barlow A. B. Lewis
R. F. Beck C. P. Martini
E. J. Brown A. S. McRae
J. A. Bunjer B. M. Monaghan
J. E. Campbell C. E. Morgan
J. D. Case L. W. Neville, Jr.
C. O. CONATSER W. XlJETZEL
L. S. Crane S. H. Poore
\V. J. Cruse B. R. Prusak
R. E. Dove F. L. Rees
O. E. Fort J. R. Rymer
R. G. Garland R. A. Shaw
B. J. Gordon T. C. Shedd
ht t t~ nv. ' J. H. Greason, Jr. H. W. Smith
W. J. Jones, Chairman -L ,, „ ' J ,, T _,
J J E. M. Hodges G. L. Todd
D. T. Fames, j l Hodgkinson C. W. Wagner
Vice Chairman R A Hostetter C. E. Weller
A. H. Galbraith T. B. Hutcheson Committee
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR Com-
mittee on Continuous Welded Rail.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Fabrication.
Part 1 — Development of specifications for fabricating continuous welded
rail page 450
Part 2 — Investigation of failures of welded rails page 451
Part 3 — Monograph on the future for fixed commercial continuous welded
rail plants page 460
2. Laying.
Part 1 — Statistics page 464
Part 2 — Definition of continuous welded rail, submitted for adoption page 465
Part 3 — Monograph on single- and multiple-track laying, using continuous
welded rail in 1440-ft strings, as done by the Atchison, Topeka &
Santa Fe Railway on new line construction page 465
3. Fastenings.
Recommendations with respect to number and position of rail anchors for
continuous welded rail, submitted for adoption page 47')
I Maintenance.
Progress report, submitted a- information page 480
5. Economics.
Progress report, submitted ;h information page 481
449
450 Continuous Welded Rail
6. Welding second-hand rail.
Progress report, submitted as information page 483
Monograph on continuous welded rail in Europe page 483
The Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail,
W. J. Jones, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 57 7. February 1963.
Report on Assignment 1
Fabrication
A. H. Galbraith (chairman, subcommittee), S. H. Barlow, J. E. Campbell, C. O. Conat-
ser, L. S. Crane, W. J. Cruse, R. E. Dove, D. T. Faries, J. L. Hodgkinson, W. J.
Jones, A. B. Lewis, A. S. McRae, C. E. Morgan, S. H. Poore, B. R. Prusak.
Your committee presents its report on Assignment 1 in three parts, all as informa-
tion. Part 1 deals with the committee's efforts to develop specifications for fabricating
continuous welded rail ; Part 2 describes an investigation of failures of welded rail ; and
Part 3 is a monograph on the future for fixed commercial plants for fabricating
welded rail.
Part 1
Development of Specifications for Fabricating
Continuous Welded Rail
Your committee is continuing its efforts to establish a set of recommended aline-
ment and finishing tolerances for continuous welded rail which are economically possible
to attain with presently used welding and finishing machinery, and using rail as rolled
by the mills under present finishing specifications. It is now the decision of the com-
mittee, after consultation with Committee 4 — Rail, that some investigative groundwork
be done on some of the factors affecting alinement tolerances of continuous welded
rail. Initially, your committee plans to make some inspection trips to rail rolling mills,
in company with AISI representatives, to view the finishing operations and to review
with the steel people the current finishing specifications for rail as they apply to rail
for butt welding.
Continuous Welded Rail 451
Part 2
Investigation of Failures of Welded Rails
By R. E. CRAMER
Research Associate Professor, University of Illinois
Organization and Acknowledgment
This investigation is financed by the Research Department of the Association of
American Railroads, starting January 1, 1962.
Failed Welds Received for Examination
Only six failed welds were sent to this laboratory to September 1, 1962. They arc
all listed in Table 1 with information on size of rail section, mill and date of rolling.
Description of Weld No. 1075
This electric-flash butt weld failed after about two years in service because of a
fatigue fracture starting at near midheight of the rail web. The starting point is indi-
cated by arrows in Figs, la and lb. This small dimple on the fracture was not very
noticeable and would ordinarily be unnoticed on most fractures, but when magnified
about 5l/2 times, as in Fig. lb, it has a different appearance than regular rail steel.
When polished, etched and examined at about 270 X magnification, as in Fig. lc, it is
evident that this small area is burned steel. It is assumed that this was a small ball of
the molted sparks which ordinarily fly away as the rails are being heated but which
in this case became trapped in the weld. This probably happens quite often in electric-
flash welding of rails but has not been the cause of many failures. It should be con-
sidered when examining future failures of electric-flash butt welds
Description of Weld No. 1076
This electric-flash butt weld had also been in service about two years when it
failed because of a fatigue fracture starting in the rail web about 24 m above the rail
base. In Fig. 2 there are some dark oxide spots in this area indicated by the arrows.
These dark spots were found to have no depth in the steel and are thought to be
areas which were not completely fused together during welding.
Discussion of Welds Nos. 1075 and 1076
Both welds 1075 and 1076 failed on the same day when the temperature dropped
to 12 deg below zero. One fracture opened up with a gap between fracture faces of
3)4 inches and the other had a gap of 1 in. Both rails had small ridges of flash metal
on the under side of the rail bases, as shown in Fig. 2c. Most of the contact of the rail
with the tie plate was on these ridges, which on one rail was 0.015 in high and on the
second rail, 0.033 in high.
It appears that these two failures can be attributed to a combination of three
circumstances:
1. High tensile stresses due to cold weather.
2. Stress concentration at the small imperfections in the welds.
3. Stress concentration due to the Hash under the rail bases.
Hull. R77
452
Continuous \V e 1 d e d Rail
O
o2
3 o»
03
~ O ffj
.2 o «
3Z
bo
•D.S
td ?
w-r
^ |
CO 0J
^£
N "
S3
U o3
O U
.3.3
H H
■P Pn
o
E-P
-p _
to t>
H
•S
*£
£-1 "O
<D bO
B
CO 0
•H rt
to
to
Bh
c3
Z
c
«j iS
X)
oa ^
bO
0) bo
— to
C
£.5
3 03
)H
-H O
a: &-
03
«r°,
to xi
Oh U
o c
<U ^
C SP
Q. l-i
u o
-3 c
01 u
a
h£
B. n)
2 Q
13
O 0)
„ >
3 2
Oh a
I*
O c
&0 0)
bo <U
Vh
a ^
l-i >
(II
Vh u
03 O
3^3
O O
HZ
+> a)
to x:
"Ah
a> H
s
-p R)
«) HP
k
■P H
u a>
■8J
■p
x:i?
O 0)
■g •
bD
(0 G
x: h
Eh -H
♦ Co
Li
Continuous Welded Rail
453
Fig. 1— Failed Weld No. 1075.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Arrow shows nucleus at about SJ^X magnification.
c. Photomicrograph of burned steel at nucleus, magnification about 270X?
etched in 2 percent nital.
Description of Weld No. 1079
Fig. 3a shows the fracture of weld 1079 which has a vertical crack in the rail
web indicating that there was a defect in the rail web before welding. Fig. 3b is an
etched cross section of the same rail web showing a fish-tail defect with vertical
cracks. It is obvious that this web defect made a defective weld which failed after six
months of service in track. The failure developed when the temperature was 20 deg
below zero and the fracture opened up 2l/2 in.
Description of Weld No. 1080
Fig. 4 shows the fracture of this weld. The arrow points to a small fatigue spot
in the web which was where the fracture started. This weld was in service 8 months
1-1
Continuous Welded Rail
I
1
i •
^ti^pn
b
1 \
c
Fig. 2— Failed Weld No. 1076.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Nucleus area at about 4X magnification.
c. Flash metal under rail base.
before failing when the temperature was 16 deg below zero. The fracture opened up
3 in. The large dark spot on the base of the rail was a mar caused by a claw bar when
the rail was being pried up for sawing.
There was no nucleus or starting point found for the small fatigue area, but it
maly have started at a trapped spark, as in weld 1075, which was not located. The
cross section of the rail was etched and found to be good quality steel. The exact
cause of this weld failure was not determined.
Description of Weld No. 1081
This failed weld is shown in Fig. 5, a photograph furnished by the railroad labora-
tory. It was an electric-flash butt weld which failed the same day it was laid. The
large dark area in the rail web shows that the rail apparently contained this large
crack, which had developed as the rail cooled after inspection on the weld line, when
Continuous Welded Rail
455
Fig. 3— Failed Weld No. 1079.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Etched cross section showing fishtail defect in rail.
the rail was laid in track. The fracture has a woody appearance at the weld area
Cross sections of the rails were examined and found to be good quality rail steel
The exact cause of the large web rupture could be determined.
Description of Weld No. 1082
The fracture of this weld is shown in Fig. 6, a picture furnished bj the railroad
This electric-flash butt weld also failed 00 the day it was laid. The white arrow points
to an unwelded zone on the top edge of the rail base which was a tt rch-cui area which
had not been removed by flashing during the final welding operation The torch cut
1-56
C o n tinu o us Welded Rail
Fig. 4 — Failed Weld No. 1080. Arrow points to fatigue area. Large black spot
on base was made by claw bar when raising rail for sawing.
Continuous Welded Rail
457
Fig. 5 — Failed Weld No. 1081. Large rupture in web apparently developed
during cooling after welding.
was made to remove a previous unsatisfactory weld. The writer believes the wide black
mar Oil the fracture of the rail base was made by a daw bar in raising the weld for
sawing. It seems that the unwelded area on the top of the rail base should have been
located when the weld was inspected and before the rail was laid in track.
Bend Tests of Welded Rails
Previous reports by the writer have contained the results of bend tests of welded
rails. Eleven more bend tests are given in Table 2. These tests are made on full mi turn
rails on supports 48 in apart and loaded at two places 6 in on each side of the weld line.
The first four specimens wen- basic-oxygen steel welded bj both electrii Bash and
acetylene pressure welds. Three of the tests gave good results. One acetylene weld was
low due to oxidized areas al edge ol rail base
458
Continuous Welded Rail
■
Fig. 6 — Failed Weld No. 1082. White arrow points to unwelded area on
base due to irregular torch cut before final weld. Large black area at middle
of base made by claw bar when raising rail for sawing.
One test was a flame-hardened rail welded by electric flash. Apparently the flame
hardening did not affect the weld.
The next two welds were furnished by Mobil Weld Inc. on standard 140 lb rails.
One gave good results and one was low due to an electrode burn.
The next four welds were in small rails, about 100 lb section, made by a continuous
casting process in France. The two electric-flash welds gave better tests than the
acetylene pressure welds.
Continuous Welded Rail
459
Bend Tebts of Welds Made in 1962
Kind of Specimen
133 lb. Basic Oxygen
Steel Elec. Flash Weld
133 lb. Basic Oxygen
Steel -Elec. Flash Weld
130 lb. Basic Oxygen
Steel -Acetylene Weld
lbs.
Fracture Fracture
Ft. - lb. Inches
485,000 103,333
346,000 23,333
247,000 4,600
Fracture on Weld Line
Good Grain Structure.
Fracture on Weld Line
Good Grain Structure.
Fracture on Weld Line,
Oxidized Area Edge Rail
136 lb. Basic Oxygen
Steel -Acetylene Weld
130 lb. Std. Rail Flame
Hardened-Elect. Flash
Weld
140 lb. Std. Rail
Mobil Weld Electric
140 lb. Std. Rail
Mobil Weld Electric
100 lb. French Cont.
Cast Rail -Acetylene Weld
100 lb. French Cont. Cast
Rail -Acetylene Weld
100 1b. French Cont. Cast
Rati -Elec. Flash Weld
100 lb. French Cont. Cast
Rail-Elec. Flash Weld
195.000
104,000
1 S3, 000
[88,000
33,300
55,400
24,600
r,500
5, 120
Fractured Away from
Welding Good Grain
Structure.
Fracture on Weld Line,
Grain Structure Good.
Fractured on Weld Line,
Grain Structure Good.
Electrode Burn on Base,
Fracture Started at Burn.
Fractured Away from Weld
Line, Grain Structure Good.
Fractured at Weld Line.
Oxide on Edge of Rail Base.
Fractured on Weld Line,
Not Complete Fusion.
Fractured Away From Weld
Line Grain Structure Good.
Tested on supports 4* inches apart and loaded at two place
side of the weld line.
460 Continuous Welded Kail
Part 3
Monograph — The Future For Fixed Commercial
Continuous Welded Rail Plants
By EDWARD T. MYERS
Engineering Editor, Modern Railroads
The future for fixed commercial welding plants looks grim, today. This statement
is not fabricated out of the dark air of pessimism. It is based on the experiences of
three plants that are currently in operation as well as on some that have opened and
closed . . . and on some that were planned but never opened.
To examine the facts behind the current collapse of the fixed welding plant idea,
the author sent a questionnaire to five rail welding companies,1 three leading steel com-
panies, and one railroad. As might be expected, certain information was highly confi-
dential. Nevertheless, the opinions expressed and the more or less concrete data cited
give a very realistic picture of the fixed commercial plant. The future of such under-
takings will depend largely upon the action of the railroads. Suggestions for a course
of action are outlined at the conclusion of this monograph.
Everyone replying plus those interviewed agreed that there was a place for such
fixed plants but that their survival under present conditions depends upon railroad
support. Of the four most successful plants, three2 are still in operation while the fourth
is temporarily shut down. At least two other companies that had planned to enter this
phase of the welding business have dropped the idea. In addition two contractors have
been forced out of the business. From this it would appear that the rail welding busi-
ness in general is rugged and that few, if any, of the fixed plants have been or are
great money makers.
One welding executive had this to say: "I have been informed that there is a
demand for this type of plant, but at this time I would say that the desire of the rail-
roads to have this service has apparently not been sufficient to produce real cooperation
and action. We have tried to persuade the various railroads to act together in pooling
their rail for scheduling purposes with little results. Quite frankly, the smaller railroads
are going to be shut out of the opportunity to obtain low-cost rail welding unless some
concerted cooperative action is taken by the railroads themselves."
Trends in the rail welding business were pointed out by a welder: "Most of the
steel mill people have indicated no desire to enter into the welding business. Further-
more, the trend for the future seems to be toward contract welding on railroad property
in an area centrally located to the rail laying site. It is understandable that such contract
services are attractive to the railroads; however, unless sizable rail welding programs
are planned, the economics are not necessarily in favor of such welding points remote
from fixed welding installations."
Attitudes of the steel companies are generally favorable to fixed commercial plants;
1 Companies queried: Linde Company, Oxweld Railroad Dept., Thermex Metallurgical Co., Inc.,
Matisa Railvveld Inc., N-ti-nal Cylinder Gas. Division of Chemetron Corp., and Mobilweld, Inc., U. S.
Steel Corp., Bethlehem Steel Co.. Colorado Fuel and Iron Corp., and the New York Central System.
- Plants now operating: Harrisburg, Pa., and Ensley (Birmingham}, Ala., by Linde Compnay,
Division of Union Carbide Co., Summit (Argo), III., and Birmingham, Ala., by Matsisa Railvveld Inc.
The latter plant has been temporarily shut down, I understand.
Continuous Welded Rail 461
however, none of the steel companies has expressed an interest in doing welding or in
supplying extra-long rails themselves.
One steel executive says, "Initial concepts of fixed welding plants and, more
specifically, those located at or near a mill source for rail were, in my opinion, excellent
from the standpoint of providing the entire railroad industry with an efficient means
of securing rail welded into lengths longer than 39 ft. This enables each individual road
to meet what is generally considered standard for an economic basic track structure. "
Another steel official states, "We do know that the location of welding plants close
to our mills has been very beneficial to small railroads, contractors, and industrial users
who could not otherwise afford to have their rail welded. This has been an excellent
innovation and without question has increased the amount of welded rail used by the
industry. In summary, we are most pleased with our neighbor welding plants and can
see absolutely no advantage to us or to our customers in establishing a plant of
our own."
A major Eastern railroad has done commercial rail welding at one of the fixed
plants which is still in operation. This welding proved entirely satisfactory, according to
a spokesman for the engineering department of that railroad. It should be noted that
the plant is conveniently located on an affiliated line of the railroad. Currently this
railroad is running a "double-line" gas plant at a central location on its property.
Economics of Fixed Plants
It appears to be unfair to compare the costs at a fixed plant with those of a mobile
plant. Rather, the cost to a particular railroad for a given quantity of rail produced
at the fixed plant must be compared to the cost of a similar quantity produced by any
other method for the same railroad.
According to the proponents of the fixed contract plants, they enable small roads
to avail themselves of continuous welded rail at less cost than would otherwise be
possible. It appears, however, that any fixed plant requires sufficient orders to maintain
volume production. High production keeps costs per welded joint down, thus making
it feasible to operate a fixed plant. Examples are cited of fixed commercial plants that
are said to produce welds at lower costs to the railroad than the railroad's own
mobile plant.
Some steel mill men see a problem in coordinating mill production with the demands
of the welding plant. Offhand this would seem to be a scheduling and storage problem.
Says one steel man, "Obviously, any mill has the ability to provide rail tonnages
exceeding the capacity of the welding plant, and must, to meet the inherent demands
of an integrated steel mill, so schedule its production. While this fact presents problems,
I am sure coordinated planning and scheduling can overcome the difficulties presented
and assure mutual benefits for both operations. Beyond this factor, the transit equip-
ment and AAR loading requirements to which shipments of welded rail are subject
affected the ability of an off-line welding facility to load and ship in a manner similar
to that possible when welding was done on and for an individual railroad."
It seems reasonable to assume that until the railroad industry as a whole can
coordinate their efforts and adjust the car and loading requirements u< adequately sat
isfv intermediate lines, the overall value of a fixed welding plant is limited. Unfor-
tunately, this failure has a major affect on the smaller lines who. by virtue of their
size, are unable to take advantage of welded rail.
The basic problem is in scheduling. The onlj successful way a fixed welding plant
can in- operated i- to have volume spread evenlj over the month- You can not gel
462 Continuous Welded Rail
this unless the railroads are willing to cooperate and schedule both their welding and
their rail deliveries over the year.
"With very few exceptions, the cooperation has been mainly in spirit rather than
in fact," states one man.
"There is a striking disadvantage," says the New York Central, "in-so-far as any
particular railroad is concerned in having a fixed commercial plant on its lines to serve
other railroads. Extraordinary switching service must be provided to serve these com-
mercial welding plants. When a quarter-mile train load of rail has been welded com-
plete, the full train must be switched out and an empty train set in quickly in order to
avoid shutting down at the welding machine. Also the switching of rails from the steel
mill into the contract welder, storing empty train sets one-quarter mile long presents
transportation problems and expense. One particular railroad must stand these expenses
while only receiving a nominal switching charge for the service."
Problems Confronting the Welding Company
Companies which had been interested in fixed plant welding list a number of
reasons for their disenchantment:
1. A fixed plant is tied to a single railroad in which switching service to the plant
leads to rate conflicts.
2. Operating employees at the permanent site become tied to the working conditions
of the nearby large steel mill. The small plant cannot support this.
3. Fixed plants require permanent structures which are more susbtantial and more
costly than the mobile plants. The investment in these can not be overcome by
equivalent increases in welding charges.
4. Real estate and property taxes skyrocket on the fixed plant.
5. Railroads fail to schedule welding over the entire calendar year. Instead they
adhere to seasonal work demands. This policy does not justify fixed plants.
6. The customers of the fixed plant are frequently competitive railroads. All want
their work at the same time. This requires that the welding plant switch alternately
from one job to another with the attendant problems of upsetting production routines.
7. It is said to be uneconomical to build and operate a welding plant large enough
to keep pace with the mill output. Therefore the welding plant must face high demur-
rage and/or high storage costs. At a mobile plant on a railroad, the individual railroad
uses its own cars and lets them wait.
While both a steel producer and a welder mention this item, it appears to be a
storage and scheduling problem. Doubtlessly when the plant is run by the welder using
leased property and leased railroad cars, the operation does become expensive. Presum-
ably, the railroads use their own facilities and their own cars when welding is done on
their own lines. Thus, the railroads absorb a cost that looms significantly large to the
outside fixed welding plant.
8. Excessive cost of welding inspection which must be performed on the welding
site by either a railroad man or a representative of an inspection firm. The representa-
tive must live near the site. Welding companies would not want to assume the
rseponsibility of making the inspections.
9. While the fixed commercial plant works out very well for the smaller railroads,
it poses problems for the larger roads. These must often satisfy their traffic depart-
ments by buying rail from one or more particular steel mills. To prevent excessive
cross hauling, the large road needs more than one welding site.
Continuous Welded Rail 463
10. Railroads have shifted their freight rates after plants have been established,
charging more for one length of rail than for another length. In the case of one plant,
the freight increase was so great as to affect materially the cost-profit ratio.
11. Competition among the mobile plants is said to be so great that the fixed
plants can not charge adequately to meet their added expenses. While the small rail-
roads which require only a relatively small mileage of welded rail in any given year
would gladly pay an extra charge for their welded rail, the economics of welding are
such that only the big orders can sustain the plant.
12. Further upsets in the economics of continuous welded rail are coming as more
and more roads construct CTC (centralized traffic control) installations, releasing quan-
tities of used rail. Much of this rail will be in satisfactory shape for cropping and
welding into long lengths. Mobile welding plants will greatly minimize the cross hauling
of this rail.
Summary
In summary, it can be said that a good mobile plant appears to be more profitable
to its operator than a fixed plant. If the railroads feel there is a need for fixed plants,
they must give some encouragement, even to the extent of helping plants which serve
some other railroad. Aids to the operators and, hence, to the railroad industry take the
form of: (1) Simple, favorable freight rates and switching charges. (2) Cooperation in
scheduling rail to be welded. (3) A method for avoiding per diem, demurrage, and
storage costs. (4) Joint operation of a fixed plant with a group of other railroads,
thus spreading support costs and risks.
In short, inter-railroad cooperation appears to be necessary if all railroads are to
enjoy the maximum benefits of welded rail ... in fact, if fixed commercial continuous
rail welding plants are to survive.
464
Continuous Welded Rail
Report on Assignment 2
Laying
M. S. Reid (chairman, subcommittee), E. J. Brown, R. E. Dove, D. T. Faries, O. E.
Fort, E. M. Hodges, T. B. Hutcheson, H. W. Jenkins, A. C. Jones, Jr., W. J.
Jones, A. B. Lewis, B. M. Monaghan, L. W. Neville, Jr., J. R. Rymer, R. A. Shaw.
Your committee presents its report on Assignment 2 in three parts. Part 1 presents
statistics on mileage of continuous welded rail laid since 1933. Part 2 presents for adop-
tion and publication in the Glossary of the Manual a definition for continuous welded
rail. Part 3 is a monograph on the laying of continuous welded rail on new-line con-
struction as done on the Santa Fe Railway.
Part 1
Statistics
Track Miles of Continuous Welded Rail Laid, by Years, 1933-1962
1933
1934
1935
1936
0.16
0.95
4.06
1.52
1937 31.23
1939
1942
1943
1944
1945
1946
6.04
5.48
6.29
12.88
4.81
3.91
1947 18.70
1948 29.93
1949 33.05
1950 50.25
1951 37.25
1952 40.00
1953 80.00
1954 87.00
Oxy-
1955 194.50
1956 372.33
1957 390.47
1958 148.11
1959 378.65
1960 299.42
1961 94.13
1962 310.59
Electric-
acetylene Flash Total
72
89.10
159.65
312.13
691.92
961.20
926.50
1183.34 1493.93
266.50
461.43
550.12
460.24
1070.57
1260.62
1020.63
7037.55
Break -Down of Continuous Welded Rail Laid in 1962 — Track Miles
Oxyacetylene
Electric Flash
Totals
New
Second-
Hand
New
Second-
Hand
Main Track
151.79
1.21
154.12
3.47
768.19
397 . 66
17.49
1471.76
22.17
153.00
157.59
768.19
415.15
1493.93
Continuous Welded Rail 465
Part 2
Definition of Continuous Welded Rail
Having given the matter considerable study and thought during the past year, your
committee has developed a definition for continuous welded rail which it now submits
for adoption and publication in the Glossary of the Manual.
The definition is as follows:
Continuous Welded Rail. — A number of rails welded together in lengths of 400 ft or
longer. CWR
Part 3
Monograph — Single- and Multiple-Track Laying, Using
Continuous Welded Rail in 1440-Ft Strings,
as Done by the Atchison, Topeka
& Santa Fe Railway on New
Line Construction
By R. A. STANE
Construction Engineer, Coast Lines
Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway
The methods used in the construction of the first track of a double-track railroad
and the second track of a double-track railroad are basically the same as those employed
in the construction of a single-track railroad, modified, however, so as to take advan-
tage of the second-track roadbed which may be used for trucking ties for the first track
and making use of the first track constructed for the distribution of ties for the second
track. The center of the force and equipment organization in either case is a machine
called the "straddle buggy." designed and built by the Santa Fe.
SINGLE TRACK CONSTRUCTION
Distribution of Materials Prior To Track Laying
The Santa Fe anchors its tie plates with studs and has found it to be economical
to secure the plates to the ties at the treating plant. Ties are banded in bundles of 16
and loaded ino gondolas — the bands being of sufficient strength to permit the handling
of the bundles without the use of slings. The tie gondolas are spotted for transloading
the ties to trucks as near the railhead as practicable; 12 bundles of ties are transferred
by a 12-ton crane to each 20-ton flatbed truck. The ties are then trucked along a
maintenance road alongside the roadbed to a ramp beyond the tie head. The truck is
backed down the roadbed to a second 12-ton truck crane which transfers the ties, a
bundle at a time, to a sled which it draws along the roadbed center line marked by
yellow-headed track spikes so spaced as to accommodate .1 bundles between spikes. The
bands are cut. and as the sled is drawn along the center line the ties are crowded off
the sled onto the subgrade. Approximately 16 loads may be placed on the ground in
an 8-hr day. Using .'4 cross ties per 39-fl panel, one force can place 4<i miles of ties
466
Continuous Welded Rail
Distribution of ties for the first track.
Continuous Welded Rail
467
Distribution of ties for the second track.
468
Continuous Welded Rail
Rear view of straddle buggy just before making a pull.
Note roller slide ramps.
each 5-day week. Normally, this will create a bottleneck, as it is possible, with equip-
ment now in use by the Santa Fe, to lay 8 miles of track each S-day week. Therefore,
if a high rate of production is desired, two such tie unloading operations will be neces-
sary. However, in the event the line under construction is comparatively short, it might
be more practicable to permit a single tie-unloading force to start sufficiently in advance
of the track-laying operation to maintain a lead to the end of the job. Consideration
should be given the extended length of haul which may result in this handling.
All other materials are distributed without the use of trucks during the track laying
operation.
Track Laying and Distribution of Remaining Materials
In the future, Santa Fe plans to unload, distribute, space, and aline cross ties with
machines not yet developed, but until this mechanization is possible, ties will be alined
and spaced manually using conventional methods; i.e., tie tongs with spacers and
chalk lines.
Rails welded into 1440-ft strings are pulled off in pairs by the straddle buggy. The
leading rail ends are pulled over an idler car, by means of two ^-in by 80-ft cables,
until the deflection is such that a direct connection can be made at the rear axle of
the straddle buggy. A spreader is then clamped on the rails, approximately 60 ft behind
the rail ends, to hold them at gage distance apart and to prevent them from rolling.
Rollers are carried on the deck of the buggy which are placed on the ties at 50-ft inter-
Continuous Welded Rail
469
.A
General view of straddle buggy pulling two rails from cars. Note men,
about midway between the straddle buggy and cars, attaching spreader to
the rails to prevent their rolling over.
vals and centered on the plates to receive the rails as they are drawn off the cars.
A second spreader, identical in design to the one at the head end, is clamped to the
rails approximately 100 ft ahead of their trailing ends as, otherwise, the rails will roll
just before the rail ends reach the end of the idler car.
Joints are made by pulling each rail slightly past the one previously unloaded and then
pushing it back to a connection. Occasionally the handling will be inadvertently rough;
therefore, neither of the spreaders is removed until the second rail has been pushed
back, to its connection. As the joints are being bolted, the buggy, straddling the rails
and ties, returns to the railhead where it picks up, by means of hydraulic lifts, the
rails resting on the rollers, and as it moves forward a swell is created in the rails
slightly ahead of the straddle buggy, thus making possible the removal of the rollers
by means of "rollerbarrows" designed for this purpose. The rollers are then lifted out
of the rollerbarrows and raised mechanically to the straddle buggy deck where they are
stored for the pulling of the next pair of rails. As this operation is progressed, the rails
descend behind the buggy onto the tie plates where they are spiked at every sixth tie
by two pneumatic spike hammers powered by a 125-cfm air compressor mounted on
the front end of the idler car which precedes the rail car. This car carries a one-day
supply of track spikes for every sixth tie, joints, bolts, and nut locks. The compressoi
also supplies air for the wrench used on the track bolts.
Radio communication is provided, by means of a packset, between the engineer and
the brakeman at the idler car so as to safely control the train's movement over the
newly laid track immediately behind the spiki
The rail train is made up of the idler car; the rail cars; a box car carrying track
spikes in kegs; the engine; the caboose; a gondola carrying joints, kegs of bolts, and
470
Continuous Welded Rail
Rollers carrying rails.
Continuous Welded Rail
471
Buggy moving forward lifting rail to free rollers. Rails descend directly
to the tie plates with the assistance of a laborer.
472
Continuous Welded Rail
Roller freed just ahead of the buggy is removed by a rollerbarrow.
nut locks; and a gondola loaded with rail anchors. The box car carrying track spikes is
equipped with pouches hung from the doors on both sides, and these pouches are loaded
with kegs of spikes while the train is standing as the rails are being pulled off. Spikes
are distributed from these kegs as the train moves forward keeping pace with the spikers
ahead of the idler car. The gondola carrying rail anchors is equipped with two flumes
hung over the trailing end of the car and anchors are cast, by laborers equipped with
ballast forks, into the flumes which discharge onto a side-boarded push car capable of
carrying the anchors needed for 1440-ft of track. The push car is loaded while the
train is standing, and anchors are distributed from the push car as the train is moving
forward behind the spiking operation.
Spikes are driven in the remaining S of each 6 cross ties by 4 pneumatic hammers
powered by a 315-cfm on-track air compressor immediately behind the distribution of
rail anchors.
Four machines fasten the rail anchors directly behind the spiking operation to
complete the track laying.
In order to avoid sun kinks, ballast is unloaded directly behind the last anchor-
setting machine and in such quantity as to provide sufficient ballast for the first 4-in
raise. If light ballast material is used, the track is raised immediately to avoid loss of
alinement resulting from temperature changes.
Continue) u s \V e 1 d e d Kail
47.^
Roller lifted mechanically to deck of buggy.
Force and Equipment
Transloadtng ami Distribution of Cross Ties
1 — Extra gang fonman in charge of tie work.
Transloadinc from Gondolas to Tie Trucks:
3 — Laborers in gondola:
474
Continuous Welded Rail
Driving line spikes in every sixth tie just ahead of the slowly
moving rail train.
1 — Laborer on tie truck.
1 — Crane operator.
Distributing, Spacing, and Alining Ties:
2 — Laborers on tie truck.
1— Crane operator transferring ties from trucks to the tie sled drawn by the crane.
Continuous Welded Rail
475
■:>■'■' : - >
Loading spike pouches while rail train stands during a pull.
2 — Laborers crowding ties off of sled to roadbed.
5 — Laborers rough spacing and rough lining ties.
4 — Laborers close spacing ties.
4 — Laborers close lining ties.
Equipment:
2— Truck Cranes (12 ton)
1— Tie sled.
476
Continuous Welded Rail
Feeding rail anchor flumes while the rail train stands during a pull,
Variable — 20-ton flatbed trucks. The number required is dependent upon the length
of haul.
The above force and equipment will handle 3072 cross ties per 8-hr day.
Track Laying and Distribution of Remaining Materials
1 — Extra gang foreman.
1 — Timekeeper.
1 — Assistant foreman ahead of the rail train.
1 — Assistant foreman directly behind the rail train.
1 — Assistant foreman supervising the unloading of ballast for first raise.
1 — Machine operator on the Straddle Buggy.
8— Laborers with the Straddle Buggy.
While pulling out rails: 2 men on top of Buggy moving rollers from deck to
chutes; 4 men removing rollers from chutes and placing them under rails at
SO-ft intervals; 2 men lining rails into rollers as rails descend. While recovering
rollers: 2 men on rollerbarrows pulling rollers out from rails directly ahead
of the Straddle Buggy ; 2 men operating hooks suspended from mechanical
roller lifting device; 2 men on top of Buggy storing rollers on deck; 2 men
immediately behind the Buggy lining the descending rail into the tie plates.
Co n tin u o u s \V elded Rail
177
Rail anchor flumes loading side boarded push car used for distribution.
4 — Laborers straightening ties.
2 — Laborers with push car distributing spikes fur every sixth tie. Push car
loaded with four kegs of spikes is mounted on unspiked rail ahead of spike
drivers.
4 — Laborers setting up spikes for every sixth tie.
2 — Laborers operating pneumatic spike hammers. (These same laborers place the
track joints and tighten track bolts with an air wrench.)
2 — Laborers nipping ties.
1 — Laborer water boy.
The gang is divided at this point bj the rail work train. The point ol the train
pushes a rail ramp designed to prevent the trailing rail ends from dropping ofi the end
of the idler car. The ramp is equipped with flanged wheel- so that it may be pushed
478 Continuous Welded Rail
along the track. It serves a dual purpose as it carries a pair of pipes which provides air
for the hammers at hose connections 10 ft ahead of the leading end of the ramp — this
lor the safety of the spike drivers and to eliminate the need for hose carriers.
A radio packset is stationed at the idler car to provide communication between
the extra gang foreman and the radio-equipped straddle buggy during the pulling opera-
tion and between the brakeman and the engineer during the spike-driving operation.
1 — Laborer releasing rail tie-down anchors in middle of train. All anchors are
released at once so as to free this man for odd jobs behind the rail train.
2 — Laborers loading spike car pouches and distributing spikes for the remaining
5 of each 6 cross ties.
4 — Laborers transloading rail anchors from gondola to side-boarded push car and
distributing for application.
6 — Laborers straightening ties.
6 — Laborers setting up spikes.
2 — Laborers operating double-headed pneumatic spike drivers.
2 — Laborers nipping ties.
1 — Machine operator with an on-track air compressor.
2 — Laborers operating two double-headed pneumatic spike hammers or twe
single-headed drivers.
2 — Laborers nipping ties.
4 — Laborers positioning rail anchors.
4 — Machine operators with anchor-fastening machines.
1 — Laborer, water boy.
2 — Laborers, camp.
1 — Machine operator with pickup truck refueling and greasing equipment — also
used for starting equipment.
1 — Crane operator for setting equipment on and off at the beginning and end
of each day. Balance of day man fills in at odd jobs.
2 — Equipment maintainers.
1 — Machine operator on spreader.
9 — Laborers unloading ballast.
Equipment:
1 — Straddle Buggy — powered by a diesel engine equipped with power steering
and power brakes. Inside clearance between tires 12 ft 4 in. Minimum clearance
above level ground 2 ft 8 in. Also equipped with two-way radio.
2 — Rollerbarrows.
60 — Rollers (crawler tractor idlers mounted on frames).
1 — Push car for distribution of track spikes
2 — Pneumatic spike hammers.
1 — Air wrench.
1 — Ramp pushed by idler car.
1 — 125-cfm air compressor mounted on idler car.
1 — Radio packset.
1 — Rail train comprised of an idler car; rail cars equipped with rollers; a box
car for track spikes (equipped with pouches); a two-unit diesel engine; a
caboose ; a gondola serving as a supply car ; and a gondola carrying rail
anchors (gondola equipped with two flumes).
1 — Push car for distribution of anchors.
Continuous Welded Rail 479
1 — 315-cfm air compressor.
4 — Pneumatic spike hammers.
4 — Anchor-setting machines.
1 — 40-car ballast train powered by a four-unit diesel engine.
1 — Spreader.
1 — Air wrench for winding up ballast cars.
1 — Truck crane for setting equipment on and off track at the beginning and end
of each day.
FIRST TRACK OF DOUBLE-TRACK CONSTRUCTION
Distribution of materials and construction of the first track of double-track con-
struction is identical to that of single-track construction except that tie trucks may use
the roadbed for the second track as a roadway, thus shortening the haul and eliminating
the back-up movement to the crane on the roadbed.
The first track cannot be given more than its first 4-in raise prior to pulling out
the rail for the second track as, otherwise, the pulling power of the straddle buggy
will be lost to poor traction in the loose ballast spilling over into areas in which it
must operate.
SECOND TRACK OF DOUBLE-TRACK CONSTRUCTION
Distribution of materials and construction of the second track of double-track con-
struction is identical to that of single-track construction except that ties are removed
from the gondolas directly to the tie sled by the crane pulling the sled, thus eliminating
a 12-ton crane and the 20-ton flatbed trucks but requiring an additional work train
to move the tie gondolas alongside the crane. The force, reduced by the number of
laborers who would otherwise work on the trucks, can distribute 8 miles of ties in a
6-day week.
Santa Fe schedules its work to lay 1.6 track miles per day, as its present double-
deck rail trains are equipped to carry twenty-four 1440-ft rails — a 2-day's supply. Other
than 3.2 miles per day, any other schedule would necessitate, on the one hand, returning
to the welding plant with a part load or, on the other hand, attempting to switch rail
trains through the gangs. With minor modifications, the above force and equipment are
capable of laying daily from 1.9 to 2.2 miles of track — the principal modification being
the use of four-deck cars. At the same time the capacity of the welding plant would
be increased from 120 welds per 8-hr shift to the number required to keep pace with
the track-laying operation.
Report on Assignment 3
Fastenings
C. W. Wagner (chairman, subcommittee), M. P. Anderson, J. D. Case, J. E. Campbell,
O. E. Fort, R. G. Garland, B. J. Gordon, R. A. Hostetter, A. J. Kozak, Wolters
Ledyard, C. E. Morgan, G. L. Todd.
Having given consideration to comments and criticisms regarding the AREA recom-
mendation for the number and position of rail anchors on continuous welded rail,
adopted at the 1961 convention, your committee submits the following revision with
the recommendation that it be adopted and published in the Manual, replacing the
present document on page 5-5-4.2.
480 Continuous Welded Rail
RAIL CREEPAGE— NUMBER AND POSITION OF RAIL ANCHORS
(CONTINUOUS WELDED RAIL)
Effective anchorage for continuous welded rail must provide restraint for tempera-
ture stresses and creepage stresses due to train movement. For main tracks carrying one-
or two-direction traffic, it is considered that the anchorage of each rail at alternate ties
to restrain its movement in either direction throughout the length of the continuous
rail will provide effective anchorage. Other methods of providing anchorage have also
given satisfactory results.
Through buffer rails, turnouts, or other special trackwork adjoining continuous
welded rail, the rails should be anchored at alternate ties against movement in either
direction.
Sufficient anchorage should be provided on the conventional rail adjoining continu-
ous welded rail to prenvent creepage of the conventional rail.
Report on Assignment 4
Maintenance
C. R. Merriman (chairman, subcommittee), R. F. Beck, J. A. Bunjer, R. G. Garland,
B. J. Gordon, J. H. Greason, E. M. Hodges, J. L. Hodgkinson, H. W. Jenkins,
A. C. Jones, J.r, C. P. Martini, A. S. McRae, L. W. Neville, Jr., B. R. Prusak,
F. L. Rees, R. A. Shaw, R. E. Dove, D. T. Faries, W. J. Jones.
The information for this report, which is submitted as information was obtained
from a questionnaire on the practices used in timbering and surfacing in conjunction
with the laying of welded rail on the railroads represented by members of the Special
Committee on Continuous Welded Rail.
Timbering seems to be almost universally carried out before the surfacing opera-
tion, with variations in time and methods as developed by individual roads. Some ties
are installed immediately behind a ballast sled, others during an out-of-face lift, still
others by digging them in ahead of the lift and using a spot tamper only on those ties
installed; in this case the track is surfaced right after welded rail laying. One road
reports that they put in their ties during an out-of-face lift one year in advance of
the rail laying. The track is then spot tamped after the welded rail is laid.
Most roads agree on installing ties on a cycle basis with variations in cycles from
3 to 10 years, which does not necessarily coincide with a particular road's resurfacing
time. Also, in some cases the end of a cycle may occur so close to the laying of welded
rail that no ties are installed ahead of the surfacing for this welded rail.
In the matter of spacing, most roads use 24 ties per 39-ft rail, making no attempt
to respace ties, other than those badly slewed, bunched, or coming under a bolted
joint; most roads use a 3-tie joint.
Surfacing on most roads is carried out before the welded rail is laid on the premise
that once the welded rail is put down it should be disturbed only for reasons of abso-
lute necessity and then only when it is impractical to schedule the work in advance
of the rail laying.
The amount of the raise varies from a "skin" lift to a 4-in out-of-face lift, and
seems to be determined by the condition and cleanliness of the ballast, and how long
it has been since the track was last surfaced. The road reporting the 4-in lift does this
after using a ballast sled; they also then follow up their rail relay with a 2-in lift.
Continuous Welded Rail 481
Most roads think that future surfacing m the welded rail will be done at tempera-
tures within plus or minus 20 F of the temperature at which the rail was laid. One
road having a considerable amount of welded rail gives no consideration to the tem-
perature, other than avoiding extremes. As to when the track will again be surfaced,
such things as condition of subgrade, traffic density, maximum train speed, rainfall and
other climatic conditions, are considered, although most agree that it will be at least
5 years before they think it will be necessary. Several roads, however, pick up each year
any low spots that develop, particularly at the conventional joints.
Information on follow-up surfacing after rail is laid indicates that most roads do so
immediately or within 60 days. This may be a skin lift or spot surfacing. One railroad
reported that they set a zero lift on the lead buggy or target, and each tie is tamped
to bring it up to grade and tighten each tie plate.
The size and kind of ballast used in welded rail territory on roads reporting do not
vary from that used on conventional rail. Most roads, however, try to maintain a full
crib to the top of the tie, with the ballast section 6 in beyond the end of the tie, on a
slope of 2 to 1 to the sub-ballast. Generally the ballast is unloaded ahead of the sur-
facing, with more, if needed, being unloaded after the surfacing.
Information gathered for this report, although varying from road to road, shows
a trend toward a general practice that is being followed by most roads in timbering
and surfacing welded rail. This practice is to do most of the work ahead of the rail
laying, including timbering, surfacing, lining, filling cribs and widening the ballast
section, with only touch-up work performed after laying.
Report on Assignment 5
Economics
T. C. Shedd (chairman, subcommittee), S. H. Barlow, J. F. Beaver, R. F. Beck,
W. J. Cruse, J. H. Greason, Wolters Ledyard, C. P. Martini, B. M. Monaghan,
S. H. Poore. F. L. Rees, J. R. Rymer, G. L. Todd, C. E. Weller.
The ultimate, indeed almost the only real, justification for the use of continuous
welded rail is economic. Railroads would not use welded rail if they did not believe
it would produce economic benefits. That the railroads are benefiting is shown by the
rapidly growing use of welded rail. However, the exact extent of those benefits is not
always clear.
With this in mind, Subcommittee 5 was instructed to gather as much detailed infor-
mation as possible on the maintenance costs of continuous welded rail. To accomplish
this, the subcommittee prepared a questionnaire, with items as listed in Table 1.
The intention was to make this questionnaire practicable, but detailed enough so
that the same form could be used to develop consistent and reliable figures in repeated
surveys over a period of years. It was also thought that some railroads not now keeping
welded rail cost records mi^ht wish to start doing so in a manner compatible with this
questionnaire form. To make them as meaningful as possible, labor figures are called
for in terms of average annual man-hours per track mile.
The questionnaire was sent to 80 railroads known or believed likely to have con-
tinuous welded rail in service. Replies were received from 48.
Not very surprisingly, only a handful of the railroads which answered hail kept
482 Continuous Welded Rail
detailed records of comparative stretches of welded and jointed track. Table 1 tabulates
the results from seven railroads which did report in some detail.
In general, these railroads are maintaining welded track with anywhere from 3
percent to 59 percent fewer man-hours than required for similar jointed track. Com-
monly, the saving seems to run about 20 to 30 percent. (One short stretch on the
Western Maryland has, so far, required more man-hours than a similar jointed stretch.)
The Pennsylvania Railroad, although unable to furnish a breakdown as called for
in the questionnaire, did report 382 man-hours per track mile to maintain 6.75 miles
of 133, 140 and 155-lb welded track, compared with 430 man-hours per track mile for
4.84 miles of similar jointed track.
It is also apparent that railroads having welded rail are using less track material
(except anchors) in maintaining welded rail than is required for comparable jointed
track. Out-of-face surfacing cycles are being lengthened, as is the expected life of the
rail in track.
Question 11 requested comment on the differences, if any, in the reasons for failure
of ties in welded track as compared with jointed track. From the comments received,
it appears that ties fail for the same reasons in either type of track ; however, most
roads noted that they have fewer tie failures in welded track due to fewer joint ties,
which usually fail first.
Question 12 solicited any pertinent comments with respect to the maintenance of
welded rail. A number of railroads, including some which could not complete the
questionnaire, did have observations. In general, these comments confirm that welded
track requires less spot surfacing, lining and tie renewals. Bolt tightening, joint bar
and bond replacements are greatly reduced. The problems stemming from rail end
batter are minimized. More attention to anchors is required.
A number of railroads commented on the expected life of welded rail in track and
the anticipated time cycle for out-of-face surfacing. One railroad predicts a 40 to 50
percent increase in the surfacing time cycle ; it expects rail life in the first position laid
to be increased by 50 percent on the average, with a 100 percent increase on tangent
track.
It should be noted that, in most cases, these predictions of rail life and surfacing
cycle can be only informed estimates at this time, due to the relatively short time
welded rail has been in service.
However, the Delaware & Hudson, which has had welded rail in track since the
1930's, states, "We have found that in the welded rail installations which we have, the
life of the rail is at least twice that of rail in jointed track . . . Out-of-face surfacing
is not required as frequently ... It is our opinion that continuous welded rail will go
twice as long between out-of-face surfacings as jointed track."
Several railroads reported that while they do not have figures available at present,
they are now keeping cost comparison records and will make the results available to
the subcommittee for subsequent reports.
It is suggested that this study be repeated in perhaps two or three years, in order
to obtain more complete results and to detect any trend in the relationship between
maintenance costs of welded and jointed track.
The subcommittee plans to conduct a similar survey on rail welding costs, com-
pared with the cost of conventional joint assemblies, during 1963.
This report is presented as information.
American Rat;
Special CommJ
Subcc
MAINTENANCE <F TRAC
COMPARED WITH
1 Track mileage included in
2 Weight of rail
3 Tear laid this location
h New or second hand? If S
5 Gross tonnage this track
6a Date of last out-of-face
6b Amount of lift, inches
7 LABORi ATerage annual —n
7a Inserting tiee
7* Replacing failed rails
7c Checking or repairlnp wel
7d Repairing pullaparts
7e Installing other track mat
7f Placing ballast
7g Spot surfacing
7h Out-of-face surfacing
7i Lining track
7 J Gaging track
7k Adjusting anchors
71 DrlTing down spikes
7«i Tightening and renewing b
7n Welding battered Joints
7o Repairing insulated Joint
7p Oiling Joints
7q Other
7r Equipment (Track machines
8 Materials — Merage an
8a Ties
8b Rail
8c Joint bars
8d Bolts
8« Spikes
8f Tie plates
8g Anchors
8h Ballast
81 Weld battered Joints
9 Estimated life of this
10 Time cycle out-of-face
11 Reasons for tie failure
12 Other comments (See t
No S]
posit
Does
Repaid
Estliu
A»eraC
i XeUiray Knglneerlry?, ,
: SMIUR .'OIjNTKD TRACK
Iwr 1.:
Qross tonnage tbls track has c.
Bmte of Last out-of-faee ballai
7 UBOR; ATerege i
i Inserting ties
BeplaciDg railed rails
i Eepairing _ i;„r?
i Installing otner track ne'
: Placing ballast
Spat surfacing
i Out-of-fece surfacing
| Gaging track
Adjusting anchors
DrlTing down spikes
lightening end renewing t
. Uridine bettered joints
Repairing insulted Joinl
Dlliag joints
Equipment (Track sucnine!
t Materials — "rerage a
SFlkea
! cycle out-->f-f(
Welded J'td
"elded
chrield(a)
Ml
77*1
mi„i
.-72?
W.ld d Jointed
Weld d Jol t d
eatern Maryland
keldad
"£1T
».,*
"LntlT
.3
3.5
Western haryld
'aided 'lolntd
5.0 5.0
12.7
12.7
27.5
25.9
ill
20
6-6
6.6
13.2
10.1,5 10.5
5.15
5.0
1.19
1.0
3.5
2.75 3.0
13! 13!
132
132
115
115
132
132
132
132
115
132 131
115
100
132
132
132
132
112 90
12/17 1/50
59-6!
1957
57.58
53-56
56-57
55-56
1960
1,9-50
1959
1960 1959
1960
50-51
1962
11-19
1961
1950
1961 1936
New New
Ne.
Ne.
Km,
New
Be.
Hew
New
Hew
New
New New
Hew
SH 32-36
He.
New
S.H.
New
SH 1,7
151 119
10.3 f
lh.lt
15 r
15 1
17
17
n
"
31
29.35 ) 29.35 j
5.11 3
5.U J
5.185
p 5.165 p
9.18 r
2.01 r 2.01 r
1951 1951
I960
57 k 61
57-58
53-56
1960
1961
1960
1962
1959
1961
1961
1962
1960
1962
1958
n
81 H
lju.!
lj to 2
6
6
2
2
i
U
6
a a
2i
2j
2i
2i
2i
2j
W6.3(c> 6U7(6j
25.
56.
560.5
6321.0
153
217
58 a
107.
9
623 a 782
651
677
615.
755 .
569.75
.665.5
301 a 179
16.2 9.1
0.3
5.1
1.1 lli.6
20.5
36
38
30 L
5
30
8
3
5
>
55 72
30 30
32
27
32
55
32
32
0.25
37
37
Incl. In 71
"
°
2322
5513
32
1,0
50
10
25
*
151 173
115
210
115
118
219
166
156
112
158
80 128
L52.1 612.6
8.7 1.1
0.6
25
56
56
In 7g
590
"
6
5
8
6
n
5
,
22 37
n 96
12
96
18
16
32
i
37
96
-
18
37
91
61
25 31
6
1.6 3.5
2li
12
6
"
"
5
3 5
3
3
5
0.5
3
0.5
5
6.1, (d>
1
w
160 h
2 m
16 »
30.3 (•) 31.2I.
■
■
36.5
81,
30
9
70
16
26.25
112 119
76 92
39
37
37
96
103
58
81
97
79
39
8 11
338 274
31
271
175
7
232
750
20
30
n
n
119 212
51
13
8
132
19
3
25
250 250
70
117
210
350
37 37
37
37
15
15
37
37
35 28
30
25
35
20
28
»
1,5 u
12-15
21
20
15
IS
17 111
5
3
3 3
_7
1
poelte ihlnking of
id* equipment {item 7r)
Correcting expansion
CHI MAS applied to rail and fittings
lnbor for repairinp pullaparts shoidc
Slotting Joints
No record, or figures rot avelleble
Continuous Welded Rail 483
Report on Assignment 6
Welding Second-Hand Rail
J. F. Beaver (chairman, subcommittee), M. P. Anderson, S. H. Barlow, J. D. Case,
C. O. Conatser, R. E. Dove, D. T. Faries, W. J. Jones.
In the past, the continuous welded rail laid in main tracks has been almost entirely
new rail. However, experience with the welded relay rail in the past two or three years
has revealed that the use of welded rail can be expanded much further than first
anticipated.
Economies in the use of welded relay rail are comparable to those realized from
the welding of new rail. The cost of preparing relay rail for welding is relatively small,
and the amount of new rail needed can be greatly reduced by the use of relay rail.
Once the relay rail is welded, the cost of laying and handling is no more than for
welded new rail
Relay rail has the advantage of being cold-rolled, and if straightened, cropped, and
welded in the same sequence as originally positioned in track, it can be used in high-
speed track. Riding qualities will be equal to that of new rail.
There is a use for most any class of rail in a balanced continuous welded rail pro-
gram, as it will produce maintenance economies in most any class of track, the only
limitation being the amount of rail available for the various classes of track.
Properly handled, the use of welded relay rail makes for an unusually flexible pro-
gram. It is possible to upgrade many miles of main track with the use of a compara-
tively small amount of new rail. Rail released when new rail is laid can be cropped,
straightened, welded and relaid, releasing other rail for reconditioning, welding and
relaying. This process can be repeated until the loss from cropping and culling reduces
the working stock to the point where further laying would not be practicable.
Monograph — Continuous Welded Rail in Europe*
By R. E. DOVE
Associate Editor, Railway Track and Structures
Some of the practices used by European railroads with regard to continuous welded
rails may seem quite unusual to American railroaders. Some may appear to be quite
daring. Many can be attributed to the high traffic density carried and the need to
release tracks for operation as quickly as possible.
WELDED RAIL IS STANDARD IX GERM ANN
The German Federal Railway has carried out service tests of welded rail sino 19 I
and extensive tests in 1949 and 1950. Welded rail was adopted as Standard practice in
1954. At present in excess of one-third of all main lines is laid with continuous welded
rail. The road is adding to it at the rate of 1200 miles of track per year.
* From Information obtained by M. H. I>iik. vice-president and editor, Railway Track and Struc-
tures, (hiriim a visit to three European countries in April 1962.
Hull. .177
484
Continuous Welded Rail
The use of welded rail is standard practice in Germany,
along with concrete ties.
Continuous Welded Rail 485
Fabrication of Welds
Rail for the German railroads is presently being rolled in lengths of 30 meters
(98.4 ft). When these are to be laid in continuous welded rail track, they generally are
joined by the electric-flash butt-welding process into lengths of 120 meters (394 ft).
However, rails 45 meters (103 ft) and 60 meters (197 ft) in length are laid on the
sharper curves.
The rails (49 kg per meter or 99 lb per yard) are welded automatically in modern
welding machines having an upset force of 25 to 3i tons and a gripping force of about
60 tons. The production-line principle is used for welding both the second-hand (80-lb
or heavier) and new rails, and storage areas are provided for each. Gantry cranes un-
load the new rails of conventional length from cars onto storage beds and also carry
them from the storage bed to the production line. In the case of second-hand rails, the
lengths first go to a point where they are straightened by means of a four-sided straight-
ening press. These second-hand rails then go to a machine which removes the burrs,
then to a rail cutter where they are cropped. From this point on, the new and cropped
rails follow the same procedure, another gantry crane being used to move the new
rails from the storage bed to the production line.
The electrode contact points on the rails are ground by a machine, then powered
rollers convey the rail to the welding machine. After being welded, the upset weld
metal is removed from the head, web and base by pneumatic chipping hammers while
still red hot. At this point the welded cropped rails will go through a mobile saw to
cut them into 120-meter lengths. All welded joints then are restraightened in a four-
sided straightening press and mechanically planed and ground at a grinding station.
They are then loaded directly onto a train of flat cars either by means of several gantry
cranes working in unison through a central electrical control, or by pulling the lengths
one by one on the cars by cable winches. The average production of the welding plant
is about 95 welds in an 8-hr shift. Some plants double this output by having two
welders and a double-production line.
Laying the Long Lengths
The rails are unloaded from the flat cars of the rail train by anchoring the ends to
the track and moving the train out from under the rails. They are placed between the
existing running rails.
When the rails being laid are of the same section as those coming out, and the
plates and fastenings are suitable for reuse, a special rail layer device is used. It is com-
prised of two roller dollies, connected by cables about 30 ft apart, which lifts the old
rails and moves them outward to the ends of the ties, and lifts the new rails and places
them on the tie plates. This transposition is done with one pass of the dollies, which
are pulled by a heavy gang motor car at about 2 mph. The leading dolly rides on
double flanged wheels on the existing rail and the second dolly rolls on the new rail.
The rails are placed without joint gaps, regardless of the rail temperatures, and
welded together in lengths of 360 meters (1180 ft). The field welds are made by the
aluminothermit welding process.
Under favorable weather conditions the 360-meter lengths are welded together as
laid, otherwise they are temporarily joined by make-shift joint bars supported by wood
blocking or by special joint connections that require no joint bar bolts. As soon as a
so-called "neutral temperature" prevails, the fastenings on the 360-meter lengths are
loosened and the rails arc hammered by heavy mallets to permit them to elongate natu-
486 Continuous Welded Rail
rally to ''no-stress." The rail sections are then joined by closure welds and the fasten-
ings screwed tight, section for section, almost at the same time. Xo expansion tapered
rails are used where the ends of the long welded rails join the conventional jointed track.
The temperatures in Central Europe range from -30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F). The
mean of these temperatures is 15 C (59 F). The German Federal Railway prefers to
have the rail in a tensile state during the winter weather rather than to chance track
buckling in the summer. For this reason they place the "neutral temperature" 5 C
higher than the mean, i.e., at 20 C, and allow a variation of 3 C above and below this
adjusted mean. In other words, the neutral-temperature zone is established as from 17
to 23 C (62 to 74 F). Its experience has been that when fractures do occur in low freez-
ing temperatures, when the sections are welded at neutral temperature, the pull-apart
^aps with their standard rail fastenings range only from 20 to 22 mm. (51/64 to % in),
which is considered harmless.
When it is not desired to hold up the field closure welds until favorable weather
creates the neutral temperature, the road frequently changes the temperature of the rail
artificially. For raising the temperature two men shove a push-car, holding huge con-
tainers of propane and oxygen gas and towing a heating manifold over each rail, along
the rails while they are in an unloosened condition. For lowering the rail temperature, a
cooling agent of some kind is used.
Recently, a new quick thermit welding process has been introduced that consider-
ably reduces the preheating time. The previous method involved the casting of a mold
of plastic refractory clay for each weld and required 24 min for preheating the rail ends
to 1000 C and 35 min for the entire weld. The new weld method makes use of prefabri-
cated molds and a special preheating burner. With the improved equipment the pre-
heating time is reduced to 4J^ min and total welding time to 12 min. The thermit weld-
ing is carried out by two-man welding gangs with each man carrying out two such
welds simultaneously. Weld failures are reported to be only few in number.
Fastenings Are GEO Type
The German Federal Railway insists upon using a rail fastening that secures the
rail elastically to the tie and with a high resistance to torsion and resistance to longi-
tudinal movement. For this purpose it has adopted the "K" fastening system (known as
GEO in this country) . This fastening includes the tie plate and anchor in one device.
The tie plate is canted, double-shouldered, and is attached to the tie by hold-down screw
spikes in wood ties and pre-set bolts in concrete ties. A U-shaped clip fits over each
tie plate shoulder and bears on the plate on one side and the rail flange on the other.
It is held in place by a bolt with a special head which is inserted into a receptacle in
the tie plate shoulder and turned to have the underside of the head engage the metal of
the shoulder. A nut with spring washer completes the assembly.
The same general type of fastening is used for both concrete and wood ties. With
concrete ties, however, a thin poplar wood pad is placed between the tie and tie plate.
Maintains Full Ballast Shoulders
Welded rail is laid only in track with a stabilized subsoil. The jointed rails are laid
at locations subject to landslides, unstable subsoil and mining areas where subsidence
occurs.
Ties are spaced at about 24.6-in centers, providing 2620 ties per mile. Hard stone
ballast from 1% to 2l/2 in. in size is standard, except in station grounds where gravel
may be used. The ballast section is 12 in deep under the ties, level with the top of ties
Continuous Welded Rail 487
(except in signal territory white ballast is maintained about 1 in below), and has 14-in
shoulders with concrete ties hut heaped shoulders with wood ties. The latest survey
showed that, in January 1959, 51 percent of all ties in track were wood, 40 percent were
steel, and 9 percent concrete. However, the concrete and wood ties are presently being
installed on about a 50/50 basis. The purchase of steel ties was discontinued in 1938,
The German Federal Railway believes that the mere track is disturbed while being
maintained, the more chance there is for it to buckle in summer. The road also insists
that maintenance forces must keep the fastenings tighl and that special care be given to
maintaining the large ballast shoulders.
In the event of a pull-apart during cold temperatures while the rail is in tension,
the maintenance crew installs, over a distance of 5 meters (16.4 ft) on both sides of the
break. 10 anti-creeper devices to witshtand tensile and compressive forces. This is re-
ported to prevent widening of the gap under traffic. If a pull-apart occurs when tem-
perature conditions are neutral, this measure of protection is not considered necessary.
Breaks in rails are welded when a neutral rail temperature is reached. Prior to
welding, however, the fastenings are loosened for a certain distance on each side of the
break. For temporary connections while waiting for the rail temperature to reach the
neutral zone, makeshift joint bars supported by wood blocking or by special connections
that require no bolts through the rail are used.
In general, it is permissible in Germany to lay welded rail on curves down to a
radius of 500 meters (1640 ft or 3 deg 30 min curve). This is considered the limit outside
of the station areas.
Maximum Train Speed to Be Raised
Top train speed is now about 87 mph. It is planned to raise maximum train speed
to 100 mph in 1962 with the objective of setting it at 124 mph in 3 years. This is being
done to compete with the air lines between cities that are about 185 to 310 miles apart.
Because of this, German engineering officers are contemplating stepping up the
surfacing cycle on the lines involved. Present practice is to surface main tracks on a
cycle of two to six years, depending on the amounts of traffic carried. It is expected
that the surfacing cycle will have to be put on a six-month basis when the higher speeds
have been placed in effect.
Rehabilitates Track Completely
It has been traditional practice in Germany to make a complete renewal of main-
line tracks on an average of about 25 years. At this time the rails, fastenings and ties
are replaced with new material and the entire ballast section cleaned. New track i- ex
changed with the old by the track-panel method with the joints left square. However,
because of the greater weight of concrete ties compared with wood ties, and the long
lengths of welded rails, certain modifications in the track-laying method were made.
In rebuilding tracks German engineers may use any one of six different procedures,
depending largely upon traffic and operating conditions. At one extreme is the situation
where complete cessation of traffic is permissible on a section of track between stations
over a distance of about 4 kilometer- (2.S miles). Under these circumstances the rebuild-
ing work can be fully mechanized and is carried oul in two shifts, Production avei
slightly less than one hall mile of track per shift.
\t the other extreme i- the situation where no traffic interruption is permissible,
requiring the work to be done under traffic Under SUCfa conditions it i- not possible to
use much machinery. This procedure i- followed OIUJ in exceptional cases
488
Continuous Welded Rail
Track is completely rebuilt in Germany every 20 to 25 years. After
welded strings are unloaded the ballast is thoroughly cleaned by under-
track ballast cleaner.
According to German engineers, they are able to obtain complete possession of the
track in carrying out about 78 percent of all track-rebuilding work. For 10 percent of
the work they have possession of the track for one work shift. The remaining 12 percent
is rebuilt under traffic.
The K-l System of Rebuilding Track
When they have full possession of the track, German engineers have adopted a
standard procedure which they call the K-l system. The 120-meter welded-rail lengths
are unloaded between the existing running rails. The entire ballast section is then cleaned
by machines. One type of the latter removes the material from underneath the track,
cleans it and returns the cleaned stone to the track. Another type of ballast cleaner
used does its work after the old track has been taken up.
The next work operation is the construction of a working track with the rails at
a gage of 3.28 meters (about 10 ft 9 in). A special machine follows behind the ballast
cleaner and digs holes to receive pedestals for supporting the working-track rails. The
pedestals are adjustable for height and lateral displacement. After the pedestals are in-
stalled, the new 120-meter welded rails are set on them and are carefully positioned as
to gage, line and level. Special manually operated gantries are used to pick up and set
the rails on the pedestals.
With the welded rails out of the way, the old track is taken up. This is done by
separating the track into 30-meter panels which are then lifted, moved back and loaded
onto cars by a series of connected motorized gantries operating on the working track.
The next operation is the preparation of the ballast surface to receive the concrete
ties. A special tractor-bulldozer, guided and positioned by rollers operating on the work-
ing rails, removes the excess ballast from between the work rails. A transverse conveyor
behind the blade of this machine discharges the excess ballast to the track shoulders.
Continuous Welded Rail
489
Hydraulically operated ballast-cleaning machine digs holes for the installa-
tion of pedestals on which to set the 120-meter welded rail strings.
The smoothed roadbed is packed down by a crawler-mounted vibratory com-
pactor. Following this operation the roadbed is prepared for receiving the ties by a
special machine which, operating on the work rails, lays down and compacts two "rib-
bons" of ballast. These are 2Y% in deep and 3.28 ft wide and are separated by a gap
of about 8 in at the center line The machine picks up the ballast it needs from the
track shoulders. By following this roadbed compaction procedure, the road is enabled
to permit train operation at normal speeds immediately after the track renewal is
complete. Xo tamping work is necessary for a year.
The concrete ties are then placed by a tie layer machine, operating on the working
rails, that lowers the ties individually to the roadbed. This machine is served by a tie
transporter which carries 18 ties per trip from a work train to the layer. The trans-
porter, towed by an inspection-type motor car, travels on temporary rails laid at stand-
ard gage on the concrete ties.
The next operation is the transposition of the welded rails from the working track
to their final standard-gage position on the new ties. Manually operated gantries are
used for this purpose. The 120-meter lengths are then joined by thermit welds, this
work being done with due regard to the neutral rail temperature previously described.
A ballast distributor then fills the tie cribs, and another machine, called a ballast rake,
pulls the ballast for rebuilding the shoulders and the slopes.
Another System of Rebuilding Track
Where heavy traffic prevails and the trackmen are allowed possession of the track
for from 3 to 6 hr, another rehabilitation procedure is followed.
Ballast cleaning i- a separate operation and is carried out in advance of other work.
The working track also is constructed.
490
Continuous Welded Rail
Welded rails are carefully positioned on the pedestal supports at an
exact gage of 10 ft 9 in and true surface. These work rails serve as guides
for subsequent work.
Old track panels are picked up by powered mobile gantry cranes, rolled back
and placed on cars of work train.
Continuous Welded Rail
491
Crawler bulldozer removes excess ballast from between the work rails and
deposits it on the sides by a cross conveyor behind the blade.
Ballast is compacted by a vibratory tamper after which two ribbons of
ballast are spread by a machine to provide even bearing for the support of
the concrete ties.
4<> 2
Continuous Welded Rail
Concrete ties are lowered individually onto the roadbed by a tie layer
operating on the work rails.
The ties are distributed by a work train and temporarily stored alongside the track.
A special gantry-type machine, operating on rails on each edge of the flatcar loaded
with the ties, unloads them. The same machine, extended to working-track rail gage,
is used to install the ties later on.
At the first 3-hr train interval after the ties have been distributed, the old track
is removed and packed as described with the K-l system. The gantry-type tie machine
then installs the ties, the welded rails are transposed from the working track to standard
gage, the cribs are filled, and the track is restored to service at a limited speed of 30
mph. Tamping is done during the next interval between trains. Using this procedure,
engineers report that it is possible to lay 500 meters (1640 ft) of track in a 6-hr
traffic break.
Also Uses Track-Panel Method
Still another track rebuilding procedure makes use of the track-panel method. Panels
of track, varying from 39 to 78 ft in length, are preassembled using concrete ties and
temporary rails. They are loaded four panels high on flat cars. Meanwhile, the working
track is built using the long welded rails.
As soon as a traffic interval occurs, a set of gantry cranes starts picking up and
loading the old track panels onto empty flat cars. Right after the first old panel is
removed, a bulldozer and the vibratory packer machine are unloaded from their track
carts and commence working the roadbed. After 60 meters of roadbed have been com-
pleted, the new track panels are laid by a second set of gantry cranes moving on the
working track.
When 240 meters (787 ft) of new track have been laid, the welded working rails
are exchanged for the temporary panel rails. Ballast distributors and ballast rakes
Continuous Welded Rail
493
When welded rail is laid at temperatures below the "neutral" tempera-
ture zone it will be heated artificially and hammered with mauls to make it
assume its normal length. The fastenings are then tightened promptly on
entire string.
When relaying rail in kind, the old rail is lifted off the plates and placed
along the ends of the ties while the new welded-rail strings are deposited
on the old plates in one pass of two transfer buggies.
494 Continuous Welded Rail
complete the ballast section. The track is then listened to traffic under orders restricting
speeds to 20 to 30 mph. The next day, power tampers consolidate the ballast, after
which trains are permitted to operate at full speed. The welded rails are joined by
thermit field welds on the third day.
Uses Shims for Minor Surface Corrections
After the new track has been in service for three weeks, the trackmen find that,
despite the great care used when rebuilding the track, minor errors in level will fre-
quently develop. The size of the stone ballast (1 to 2l/2 in) discourages the shovel
packing method of surfacing refinement so the road uses thin poplar wood shims.
The GEO-type fastening makes use of a wood shim anyway between the rail base
and the rail seat of the tie plate, and the plate is built to retain these shims. Trackmen
merely add another thin shim, from 2 to 10 mm (5/64 to -J 3 in.) in thickness, to cor-
rect any discrepancy in level. This is done by unloosening the nuts of the rail fastenings,
raising the rail, slipping the shim in and retightening the fastening.
Experience on the German Federal Railway has been that the tamping cycle has
been extended from four years required for jointed track to six yars for the continuous
track. Also, engineers estimate that the service life of rail and ties is increased in
continuous track by 20 percent.
MODERN TRACK IN FRANCE
The latest form of track construction in France, called "modern track", consists of
elastic fastenings, concrete or wood ties and continuous welded rail.
Rails are rolled in lengths of 18 meters (slightly more than 59 ft). These are welded
by the electric-flash method into either double lengths or strings ranging up to 945 ft
in length, which is the limit of the space available at welding plants. The double lengths
are installed on sharp curves and at other locations where it is not practicable to install
the longer lengths.
At the end of 1961 the French National Railways Company (Societe Nationale des
Chemins de Fer Francais) had 4500 track miles of continuous rail in the track. The
SNCF system totals about 25,000 miles of line and approximately 35,000 miles of main
track, including about 11,000 miles of secondary mains. French engineers say that the
use of welded rail has cut surfacing costs up to 40 percent and overall track-maintenance
costs 20 percent.
When laying welded rails the long strings are welded together in the field by either
the Boutet or Delachaux systems. Expansion joints are installed at the ends of the
welded sections. If possible, the long rails are laid when the temperature is between
14 and 36 C. If laid when the temperature is above or below these limits, the fastenings
are loosened later, when temperatures are are within this range, to allow the rail to
assume a no-stress condition.
The elastic fastenings are used with both concrete and wood ties. One element of
this fastening is the use of spring clips fastened to the ties by bolts or screw spikes.
Another is the use of a grooved rubber pad, tV in thick, between the base of the rail
and tie. With this form of construction the clips hold the rail tightly on the grooved
pad, which compresses under traffic. French engineers say this construction stops vibra-
tion, slows the decay of the thread in the wood of wood ties, prevents rail creepage and,
with continuous welded rail, deals with the rail stresses raised by variations in
temperature.
Continuous Welded Rail 495
French engineers say this fastening is of such design that a visual inspection quickly
reveals whether or not the fastening is functioning properly. When the spring clip is
placed loosely in position, it has only one bearing on the rail — the outer edge. When
the screw spike or nut of the bolt has been tightened sufficiently to produce a second
point of bearing nearer the edge of the rail base, the correct pressure has been
established.
Surface Adjusted by Shovel Packing
Track maintenance in France involves two important rules: To make corrections
as soon as possible; and to disturb the fastenings as little as possible. A track-surfacing
technique that complies with these rules is the shovel-packing practice. This involves
placing a precise amount of ballast chips under the ties to bring about, after settlement,
the exact level desired with a 1-mm degree of precision.
A special shovel containing a small hopper is used for shovel packing. A measured
amount of chips, determined by the amount of raise, is placed in the hopper. The chips
are then inserted (not tamped) under the tie by movable times actuated by a lever on
the handle of the shovel. To determine the amount of chips needed, the track is first
sighted from high point to high point with an optical instrument, and the amount of
raise is marked on the rail over each tie. The track is then jacked up \y2 in to permit
the chips to be inserted evenly. The first train to pass after the jacks have been lowered
presses down the chips and gives the surfacing its final touch.
ENGLISH ALSO ADOPT WELDED RAIL
The British Railways made exhaustive studies into the merits of using continuous
welded rail. These indicated that a financial advantage, although a narrow one, could
be realized if long welded rails, supported by concrete ties, were installed on many
sections of the system, including the important high-speed lines.
Rails are rolled into 60-ft lengths in England. The British Railways have adopted
the 110-lb T-section rail as standard. All continuous welded rails produced for the BR
are butt-welded by the electric-flash process. A welding plant has been established on
each of the six regions comprising this system. The first of these welding plants produced
the long rails in 300-ft lengths, but some of the others are turning out rails in 600-ft
lengths. One region is aiming at 900-ft lengths.
After being laid in track the welded rails are joined by site welds. Two types of
field welds are used. One is known as the "quick thermit" weld. The other is the Philips
metallic-arc method which is said to require no preparation of the rail ends other than
providing a gap between them and establishing the correct line and level.
If the continuous welded rails are laid in the track at temperatures other than in
the range 65 to 75 F, BR policy is to de-stress them. The original practice was to wait
until the rail temperature came within the desired ramie, release the fastenings and run
an engine slowly over the track to assist in the release of the stress in the rails. Tin
fastenings are then retightened.
More recently the practice lias been adopted on one region oi raising the rail tem
perature the required amount by usinj,' propane-gas burners specially developed for this
purpose. The procedure is to release the fastenings throughout the length to \n- de
stressed except at one end. Then, raising the released portion on special rollers placed
on the rail seats at 10-yd intervals, the rail adjusts it, length. The rollers are then
removed and the fastening retightened. The Hk uses "adjustment switches" at the ends
of the long welded sections.
496 Continuous Welded Rail
The concrete ties used in Great Britain are prestressed and are made 8 ft 3 in long
with canted rail seats. At the center lines of the rail seats the ties are lOJHs in wide at
the bottom, S$s in at the top and are 8 in deep. The width at the bottom is uniform
throughout the length of the tie but at the center the depth is only Sy2 in, giving a top
width there of 9 A in.
At various times the British Railways have experimented with 18 different types
of fastenings for concrete ties. They have now been reduced to five, all of which have
clips or bars that bear on the top of the rail base to prevent creepage. Only one of them
entails the use of a base plate.
In the past when jointed track with wood ties was being replaced with similar
construction by the panel method, the renewal cycle ranged between 16 and 25 years.
With welded rail on concrete ties, it is expected that the life of the rail will be about
20 years and that of the ties about 40 years.
Report of Committee 4 — Rail
W. J. Cruse, Chairman
J. A. BuNJER,
Vice Chairman
O. E. Fort, Secretary
D. T. Faries
R. C. POSTELS
J. C. Jacobs
Embert Osland
L. S. Crane
T. B. Hutcheson
A. P. Talbot
VV. D. Almy
S. H. Barlow
G. V. Begany, Jr.
J. M. Bentham
H. B. Berkshire
T. A. Blair (E)
B. Bristow
C. B. Bronson (E)
R. M. Brown
T. F. Burris
R. E. Catlett, Jr.
J. B. Clark
M. VV. Clark
C. J. Code
J. T. COLLINSON
C. A. COLPITTS
C. O. Conatser
F. L. Etchison
J. H. Greason, Jr.
J. L. Gressitt (E)
C. E. R. Haight
V. E. Hall
C. J. Henry
C. C. Herrick
H. W. Jenkins
K. K. Kessler
R. R. Lawton
Ray Mc Brian
B. R. Meyers
F. R. Miciieal
H. R. Moore
C. E. Morgan
L. T. Nuckols (E)
J. S. Parsons
C. F. Parvin
R. H. Patterson
G. L. P. Plow
R. B. Rhode
J. G. Roney
H. F. Smith
V. R. Terrell
G. L. Todd
J. S. Wearn
D. J. White
H. M. Williamson
W. L. Young
Committee
(E) Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR Com-
mittee 4.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Progress report, including recommendations submitted for adoption page 498
2. Collaborate with AISI Technical Committee on Rail and Joint Bars in
research and other matters of mutual interest
Progress report, including as Appendix 2-a, Report on Investigation of
Failures in Control-Cooled Rails page 499
3. Rail failure statistics, covering (a) all failures; (b) transverse fissures;
(c) performance of control-cooled rail
Progress report, including statistics on rail failures reported up to Decem-
ber 31, 1961 (on net ton basis) page 508
4. Rail end batter; causes and remedies.
Investigation of the welding of battered rail ends by means of different
welding procedures together with evaluation of welding rods and electrodes
has been completed and a condensed report submitted as information . . . page 525
5. Economic value of various sizes of rail.
Progress report, presented as information page 526
497
498 Rail
6. Joint liars: design, specifications, service tests, including insulated joints
and compromise joints.
Progress report, presented as information page 529
8. Causes of shelly spots and head checks in rail: methods for their preven-
tion.
Progress report, presented as information page 529
Appendix 8-a — Report on Service Tests of Heat-Treated and Alloy Steel
Rails page 530
Appendix S-b — Report on Shelly Rail Studies at University of Illinois . . . page 534
9. Standardization of rail sections.
Progress report, presented as information page 542
10. Service performance and economics of 78-ft rail, collaborating with com-
mittee 5 ; specification for 78-ft rail
Progress report, presented as information page 542
The Committee on Rail,
W. J. Cruse, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 577, February 1963.
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
J. A. Bunjer (chairman, subcommittee), H. B. Berkshire, R. E. Catlett, Jr., J. B. Clark,
W. J Cruse, J. T. Collinson, F. L. Etchison, D. T. Faries, O. E. Fort, V. E. Hall,
R. R. Lawton, Ray McBrian, R. H. Patterson, C. F. Parvin, R. C. Postels, G. L.
Todd, J. S. Wearn, H. M. Williamson.
To permit the use of steel made by the basic-oxygen process at the option of the
purchaser in the manufacture of rail, joint bars, track bolts and nuts, and spring wash-
ers, and to change a chemical requirement in the Specifications for Quenched Carbon-
Steel Joint Bars, your committee submits for adoption the following recommendations
with respect to Chapter 4 of the Manual.
Pages 4-2-1 to 4-2-6, inch
SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPEN-HEARTH STEEL RAILS
Reapprove with the following revision:
Change the title of these specifications to read as follows:
SPECIFICATIONS FOR OPEN-HEARTH STEEL RAILS (BASIC-
OXYGEN PROCESS MAY BE USED AT THE OPTION
OF THE PURCHASER)
Pages 4-2-9 to 4-2-11, inch
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HIGH-CARBON STEEL JOINT BARS
Reapprove with the following revision:
On page 4-2-9, change Art. 2. Process, to read as follows: "The steel shall be made
by either or both of the following processes: open-hearth or electric-furnace. (Basic-
oxygen process may be used at the option of the purchaser)."
Rail 499
Pages 4-2-12 to 4-2-14, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR QUENCHED CARBON STEEL JOINT BARS
Reapprove with the following revisions:
On page 4-2-12, change Art. 2. Process, to read as follows: "The steel shall be
made by either or both of the following processes: open-hearth or electric-furnace.
(Basic-oxygen process may be used at the option of the purchaser)."
In Art. 5. Chemical Composition, change the requirement for manganese from "Not
over 1.00 percent" to "Not over 1.20 percent."
Pages 4-2-15 to 4-2-18, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR HEAT-TREATED CARBON-STEEL
TRACK BOLTS, AND CARBON-STEEL NUTS
Reapprove with the following revisions:
On page 4-2-15, change Art. 2. Process, to read as follows:
"(a) The steel for the bolts shall be made by either or both of the following proc-
esses: open-hearth or electric-furnace. (Basic-oxygen process may be used at the option
of the purchaser).
"(b) The steel for the nuts shall be made by one or more of the following proc-
esses: open-hearth, electric-furnace, or acid-bessemer. (Basic-oxygen process may be
used at the option of the purchaser) ."
Pages 4-2-19 to 4-2-21, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPRING WASHERS
Reapprove with the following revisions:
On page 4-2-19, change Art. 2. Material, to read as follows: "Material for spring
washers shall be of steel, manufactured by the electric-furnace, open-hearth, or crucible
process. (Basic-oxygen process may be used at the option of the purchaser)."
Letter ballots covering the above proposals were sent out to all members of the
Rail committee and were approved by more than a two-thirds majority.
Report on Assignment 2
Collaborate with AISI Technical Committee on Rail
and Joint Bars in Research and Other
Matters of Mutual Interest
W. J. Cruse (chairman, subcommittee), J. A. Bunjer, T. F. Burris, C. J. Code. C. A.
Colpitts, L. S. Crane. O. E. Fort, D. T. Faries, C. C. Herrick, T. B. Hutcheson,
J. C. Jacobs, Ray McBrian. B. R. Meyers, Embert Osland, G. L. P. Plow, H. M.
Williamson.
This committee sponsors two research project* at the University of Illinois, both
of which are under the direction of Professor R. E. Cramer. The report on the first
500 Rail
project, entitled "Investigation of Failures in Control-Cooled Rails", is presented below
as Appendix 2-a.
The report on the second project, entitled "Shelly Rail Studies at the University
of Illinois", is presented as Appendix 8-b under Assignment 8.
An investigation of the physical and mechanical properties of rail and joint bars
made of steel produced by the basic-oxygen process was undertaken in conjunction with
the Colorado Fuel and Iron Corporation. A report on this investigation has been pre-
pared by Kurt Kannowski, metallurgical engineer, AAR Research Department. Copies
of the report may be obtained from G. M. Magee, director of engineering research, AAR,
3140 S. Federal St., Chicago 16.
Appendix 2-a
Investigation of Failures in Control-Cooled Rails
By R. E. CRAMER
Research Associate Professor of Engineering Materials, University of Illinois
Organization and Acknowledgment
This investigation is financed by the Research Department of the Association of
American Railroads. Student assistant Jerry Crum has worked on this investigation on
a part-time basis.
Control-Cooled Rails Which Failed in Service
Since our last report of October 1, 1961, reports have been prepared on 16 control-
cooled rails sent to this laboratory as failed rails. These reports are sent to the railroad
engineers supplying the failed rails, and copies go to the rail manufacturer and the
director of engineering research, AAR, for the Association's rail failures statistics.
Table 1 summarizes the failures and Table 2 lists each rail separately.
Table 1 — Summary of Failed Control- Cooled Rails
Transverse Fissures from Shatter Cracks 1
Transverse Fissures from Hot-Torn Steel 5
Transverse Fissures from Inclusions 1
Detailed Fractures from Shelling 4
Fracture from Welded Engine Burn 1
Weeping Cracks from Slot Grinding 3
Detailed Fracture from Porous Bond Weld 1
Total 16
Transverse Fissure from Shatter Crack
One more rail, No. 1070 (see Fig. 1), rolled before 1950 at the Algoma Mill devel-
oped a transverse fissure from a shatter crack. No fissures from shatter cracks have
developed in the rails from this mill rolled since 1950 when changes were made in its
control-cooling process.
Transverse Fissures from Hot-Torn Steel
Five rails, Nos. 1073, 1077, 1078, and 1083 from the Steelton Mill and No. 1074
horn the Algoma Mill developed transverse fissures from hot-torn steel. Fig. 2a shows
Rail
501
Z .
Q
y T3
« o
as —
Q O
X ai =
ja
od
5
I:,
3
X.
X)
—
-!
-1
ei
<u -a
1 1
o *
to a.
fc ^<
t/5 CO CO co CO
O O O
bn
o
■d
bo
b/>
u
u
u
M
u
F
F
c
-
u
c
c
O
o
0
o
0
3
-a
'JZ
2
h
h
h
h
H
u
u
l-l
B
c
E
o
£
r.
.c
o
0
o
0
o
^
^
M
tfl
00
co
CO
X
X
X
X
X
o
n)
cd
o
E
0
E
0
g
o
E
O
E
0
E
o
E
o
E
o
i-i
U
i-<
•-
u
u
(4
M
u
u
in
)H
M
bo
c
bo
c
bo
c
b
b
o
cd
a,
tL,
b
fc,
tL,
tL,
tL,
a,
a
a,
a
<u
<u
a>
Q
H
a.
h
Q
D
H
H
h
H
H
£
&
£
£ bo
— 3
E E
a q
U") ON lO ON
On On m
m co co co ro
ON -- 1 QN >-M ON •— 1 — < QN QN -H
m in on
— < i—i CO — i ^o — I — <
—i oo m in in —i
■>* nO CN ^ ^
W Q < CQ CO
tL, CQ U
tJ 00 \0
^O -h CO
W - -J
ON — I
m in cn
CN CN ^ — i
m co m
00 00 00
u < 9 <
CN cn m 00
Cd
O W J5
— -^ o
_o _o a>
U U to
ri
cd
aj
a
Q
E
o
E
o
E
o
>>
1-1
3fl
bo
bo
•J
Oj_au<U 0) i>.2JJ3i_2;
cococo<:<<Olo
\0 "O vO
00 00 OO 00
O £ O
wtf o# aid
u z u
[L, tL, ■
CO to J
O0 Q# ^
5 5 -
J 7 J O -1
u u o
o3 <
U to
502
Rail
Fig. 1 — Rail 1070, transverse fissure
from shatter crack.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Etched slice from rail head showing shatter
cracks. Etched in hot SO percent hydrochloric
acid.
Rail
503
-*>:
Fig. 2 — Rail 1073, transverse fissure
from hot-torn steel.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Etched slices showing porosity. Etched in
hot 50 percent hydrochloric acid.
the fracture of rail 1073 as received. The large fissure has a porous nucleus and the
etched slices shown in Fig. 2b show more porosity in the rail head.
Transverse Fissure from Inclusion
Rail 1068 from the Edgar Thomson Mill developed a transverse fissure from an
inclusion. Fig. 3a shows the fissure with a small round white nucleus. Fij;. 3b shows
504
Rail
a
Fig. 3 — Rail 1068, transverse fissure from inclusion.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Longitudinal saw cut through nucleus of fissure. Mag-
nification 10X- No etch.
the inclusion at 10X magnification after sawing through the nucleus lengthwise of the
rail head. It is assumed that this inclusion is a small piece of refractory entrapped in
the steel, as it did not elongate much during rolling.
Detail Fractures from Shelling
Four detail fractures from shelling were sent to the laboratory for classification of
the failures. Rail 1067 is shown in Figs. 4a and 4b. In this case the transverse etched
slice pictured in 4b shows the shelling crack. Rails 1071 and 1072 were opened up by
sawing to observe the length of the shelling cracks. Fig. 4c shows rail 1071 with the
Rail
505
;«:.*■••
p
■
Fig. 4 — Rails 1067, 1071 and 1087, detail fractures from shelling.
a. Rail 1067 as received.
b. Etched slice of 1067 showing shelling crack.
Etched in hot 50 percent hydrochloric acid.
c. Rail 1071 with shelling crack opened up.
d. Fracture of Rail 1087 as received.
e. Rail 1087 with shelling opened up.
shelling crack revealed. Figs. 4d and 4c show rail 1087 as received and with the shelling
crack opened up.
Fracture from Welded Engine Burn
Rail 1069 is shown in Fig. 5a. It was n<>t evident from the appearance of the frac-
ture what was the cause of the failure. The etched transverse slice shown in Fig. Sb
proves that the rail had been built up by welding, as the weld -deported metal on the
rail tread is distinctly different from the rail Bteel.
506
Rail
Fig. 5 — Rail 1069, fracture from welded
engine burn.
a. Fracture as received.
b. Transverse slice etched to show weld deposited
metal. Etched in ammonium persulfate solution.
Weeping Cracks in Field End-Hardened Rails 1084, 1085, and 1086
Three caps from the ends of the running surface of three rails, field end-hardened
by oxyacetylene heating, were sent in for examination. Photographs of all three are
shown in Fig. 6. The left column shows the tops of the caps and the right column
shows the under side or fracture side of the caps. All three pieces had been slotted by
grinding on the rail ends. Rockwell tests of the caps showed that the metal was over
400 Brinell hardness. It is believed that grinding cracks were developed on the ends
of the rails during the grinding when the hard metal was over heated and cracks devel-
oped as the metal cooled quickly. These small grinding cracks then spread as weeping
cracks by many heavy wheel loads.
Failures similar to these were described in our "Failed Rail Reports" printed in
AREA Proceedings, Vol. 49, page 494, and Vol. 45, pages 484 to 488. In grinding end-
hardened rails more care is necessary than on rails that have not been end-hardened,
especially when the hardness is above 400 Brinell.
Rail
507
1086
1086
Fig. 6 — Caps off ends of rails that developed weeping cracks.
Left column — Tops of rail heads showing ground ends.
Right column — Under side of caps.
Detail Fracture from Porous Bond Weld, Rail 1088
Fig. 7 shows the fracture as received. The dark areas in the center of the rail head
were caused by the rail ends rubbing together. The failure is the detail fracture starting
at the surface of the bond weld and extending about one third of the way across the
rail head. The black spots in the bond weld are porosity. They occupy about one-half
of the volume of the bond and some holes are very close to surface of the weld metal.
These surface holes acted as stress raisers, causing the weld metal to crack and this
crack then extended by fatigue action into and across the rail head, resulting in a
service rail failure. Visual examination showed that the under side of the weld metal
was all porosity, and could have been seen by visual examination when the bond weld
wus made. This is the first rail failure reported of this type, hut in the future it would
be well to watch for porosity on this type <>i weld and reject those' welds where porosity
can be seen.
Summary
Pictures and discussions are included on the following types of rail failures:
Transverse fissure from shatter crack.
Transverse fissure from hot-torn steel.
508
Kail
Fig. 7 — Detail fracture from porous bond weld, rail 1088.
Transverse fissure from inclusion.
Detail fractures from shelling.
Fracture from welded engine burn.
Three weeping cracks from grinding
Detail fracture from porous bond weld.
Report on Assignment 3
Statistics Covering (a) All Failures,
Fissures, (c) Performance
Rail Failure
(b) Transverse
of Control-Cooled
Rail
D. T. Faries (chairman, subcommittee), S. H. Barlow, J. M. Bentham, G. V. Beganv,
B. Bristow, J. A. Bunjer, J. B. Clark, C. J. Code, C. 0. Conatser, W. J. Cruse,
O. E. Fort, C. E. R. Haight, H. W. Jenkins, K. K. Kessler, F. R. Micheal, Embert
Osland, H. F. Smith, A. P. Talbot, V. R. Terrill, G. L. Todd, J. S. Wearn, D. J.
White, W. L. Young.
These statistics are based on the rail failures reported to December 31, 1961, and
are submitted as information. They include the service and detected failures reported
by SO railroads on all of their main-track mileage which constitutes approximately 90
percent of the main track in the United States and Canada. This report is a technical
service of the Association of American Railroads, Research Department, W. M. Keller,
vice president, and was prepared by Kurt Kannowski, metallurgical engineer, under the
direction of G. M. Magee, director of engineering research.
The track mileage and the failures reported this year remain essentially the same as
in previous years, although the number of roads reporting has decreased from 54 last
year to 50 this year. Railroads such as the B&A, CCC&StL, P&E, DL&W, NC&StL,
T&NO, T&P and the Virginian are not reporting as individual roads anymore, but their
Rail
509
reports are included in those of systems of which they were already a part or have
become a part through mergers. An additional railroad reporting this year is the QNS&L
which has extremely severe traffic conditions and is expected to show interesting failure
incidences in relation to those of other roads.
The accompanying tables and diagrams indicate the extent of control of the trans-
verse fissure problem that has been obtained by the use of control-cooled rail and detec-
tor car testing, give data on the quality of each year's rollings for the various mills, and
show the types of failures that are occurring on the various railroads as related to the
mill producing the rail.
Transverse Fissure Failures
Data on service transverse fissure failures and detected transverse defects are given
in Table 1 and Fig. 1. Table 1 shows this information for individual roads for the 10-
year period 1952 to 1961, incl. Again this year as in the last four years very little change
in the number of service failures can be noted. The downward trend that started in
1943 has apparently leveled off at the low level of about 500. However, this is a grati-
fying reduction from the high of 7795 service failures reported in 1943. The number
of detected failures increased from 19,460 in 1960 to 21,831 in 1961. The number of
track miles tested by detector cars according to data received from reporting roads
decreased from 206,731 in 1960 to 193,516 this year as indicated in the following table.
Year T,st<d
No. of Hands
Reporting
Track Miles
Tested by
1), 1, ctOT Cars
195.3
59
56
56
50
57
54
53
53
48
212 , 280
!'.'•". 1
201 . 134
1955..
186,322
L956
lim.882
1967
212.082
1958.
21(1.731
1859
212. 833
I960
206,731
1961
193,511,
A detailed explanation of the significance of Fig. 1 was given in a previous report
(Vol. 61, page 845) and will not be repeated here.
Mill Performance
The number of service and detected rail failures that occur during the first five years
of service may be considered a good criterion of mill performance and the quality of
rail as manufactured. Fig. 2 shows these failures for 1908 rollings to 1956 rollings, incl.
The large decrease in failures in the rollings from 1908 to 1914 occurred during the
change over from Bessemer to open-hearth production; the further decrease in the roll-
ings to 1937 reflects improvements in mill practice and probably increase in rail size;
the decrease after 1937 rollings reflects the benefits from control-cooling, and since the
1948 rollings, from improved design incorporated in the new rail sections. The low failure
rates in the 1954, 1955 and 1956 rollings an- believed to be due to improvements in
open-hearth practices that have been put in effect in recent years.
Fig. 3 shows the control-cooled rail failure rates cumulatively for the rollings from
1951 to 1960, incl., by the different mills. Because of the difference in service conditions
on roads served by the various mills, these failure data should not lie taken as net es-
510 Rail
sarily indicative of the rail quality. As explained in last year's report, the relatively high
failure rate for the Algoma mill was largely due to VSH, Other Head, Web-in- Joint
and Base failures (Sec Table 6). The high rate of 11.5 for the 1959 rollings reported
last year decreased to 7.3 this year. This was due to the fact that in the first year of
service for this rolling, 7 VSH, 4 Other Head, and 20 Web-in-Joint failures occurred in
100 REHF rail on the Canadian Pacific and in the second year of service 3 VSH, 2
HSH, 3 Other Head, and 3 Web-in-Joint failures occurred. On the basis of track-mile-
years of service, the failure rate was reduced accordingly. Web-in- Joint failures are
considered to be due to service conditions rather than rail quality. The failure rate for
the Carnegie-E. T. rollings was influenced by the relatively high number of CF and DF
failures on the Norfolk & Western, which types of failures are also considered to be due
to service conditions, particularly heavy traffic and wheel loads and sharp curvature.
The Colorado rollings since 1954 show a low failure rate, and the rate for previous
years was influenced to a large extent by the large number of CF and DF failures that
occurred on the Union Pacific due to service conditions. The failure rate for the Domin-
ion rollings to 1955 was due to the relatively high number of Web-in-Joint failures on
the Canadian Pacific. The report for three years ago contained a statement from C. A.
Colpitts, chief engineer of the Canadian Pacific, giving the difference in service and
defect detection conditions of rail from the Algoma and Dominion mills. The high failure
rate for the 1959 Dominion rolling actually represents only 2 Web-in-Joint failures in
10 track miles of rail. The failure rates for the Dominion mill for the years 1952, 1953,
and 1954 are changed somewhat by the inclusion this year for the first time of 345
track miles of Dominion rail laid on the Quebec North Shore & Labrador. The failure
rates for the rollings from the other mills require no comments. Carnegie-E. T. stopped
rolling rail in 1958 and Inland in 1957. Dominion rolled no rail in which failures were
reported for the railroads included in these statistics in 1955, 1958, and 1960; Lacka-
wanna in 1960; and Steelton in 1960.
A comparison of Fig. 3 with corresponding data in the report of 12 years ago shows
a marked reduction in failure rate, most of which is due to the new rail sections intro-
duced in 1947. This is further shown in Fig. 4 which gives the service and detected
failures for 100 track miles that have occurred to December 31, 1961, for each year's
rollings from 1951 to 1960, inclusive. The dashed line shows the corresponding data for
the old sections, 1938-1947 rollings, incl. also control-cooled rail. The drop off in failure
rate for the old sections for the tenth year of service, and to some extent for the ninth
year, should be disregarded because the decrease was due to the fact that considerable
tonnage of the original rollings having the highest failure rate was removed from track.
It should also be pointed out that the record for the new sections is actually better
than shown because many of the failures reported actually occurred in the old rail
sections rolled after 1947, as will be discussed more fully later.
Types of Failures
Table 5 shows the accumulated service and detected failures per 100 track miles in
rollings 1951 to 1960, incl., that have occurred to December 31, 1961, by types of fail-
ures and by mills. This table is helpful in assessing the relative importance of the differ-
ent types of failures. For example, the CF and DF classification comprises 40 percent
of the total failures, and Web-in-Joint failures, 27 percent. Both of these types of
failures are considered to be due to service conditions and to some extent rail design
rather than to mill quality.
Rail
511
To give some indication of the extent to which the "new rail sections" adopted in
1947 have affected the number of failures of each type, the following tabulation shows
the accumulated failures in the "old sections" in the 1938 to 1947 rollings, incl.; in the
1951 to 1960 rollings, incl., which include mostly new but some of the old sections; and
in the 1951 to 1960 rollings, incl., of the new sections only. These new sections include
the 106 CF&I, 112 TR, 115 RE, 119 CF&I, 127 NYC (Mod), 129 TR, 1.32 RE, 133 RE,
136 RE, 136 NYC, 140 RE and 155 PS.
Accumulated Failures Per
100 Track-Mile-Yeara
Old Sections
.1// Stiltons
{1961 I960)
.\ \ a- St ctions
(1961 i960)
0.02
1.73
0.58
0.53
0.52
(1.7.')
3 . 34
1.47
0.30
1 . !.">
0.25
0.14
0.54
0.05
0.99
0.10
0.08
11.01
CF ami DF
1 .69
VSH
0.09
HSU
0.10
Other Head
0.31
0.03
Web-in-Joint. _.
Web -Other
0.12
0.05
0.02
All Types _ _
9.24
3.61
2.40
*Less than 0.01.
It is evident from the above comparison that little improvement has been effected
in the CF and DF classification with the new sections. This does not necessarily mean
that the new rail sections are not equally or even more resistant to shelling, because
there has been a considerable increase in wheel loads between these two periods, and
wheel load is thought to be the most important factor in producing shelling. There has
been a large and gratifying reduction in the number of web failures. In this connection
it should be noted that the substantial tonnage of welded rail being laid in recent years
may be expected to reduce still further the number of Web-in-Joint failures. The
changeover to diesel power has probably also been a factor in the reduction of Web-
Other failures. The substantial reduction in VSH and HSH failures is probably to be
attributed to improved mill practices, and in Broken to the changeover to diesel power,
use of heavier rail, and improved maintenance and operating practices. The gross ton
miles of traffic has been only about 8 percent less in the 10 years period for the new
sections than for the old sections.
A comparison of failures by rail sections is shown in Table 5A. Generally, tin-
failure rates per 100 track-mile-years are quite low. The very high failure rate in the
133 RE section is due to the large number of CF and DF and Other Head failures on
the Union Pacific and it is believed that these are due to service conditions and perhaps
mill quality rather than rail design.
Table 6 is of interest in comparing the failures by type, by mill, and by individual
railroads. It will be noted that most of the failures reported in this table have occurred
on a relatively few railroads. It is suggested that study of service conditions on these
railroads might be worthwhile in an effort to determine whether practical measures
might be found to reduce the failure rate.
Table 7 shows the service and detected failures in the rail web, within joint bar
limits. Comparing these results with those reported last year, it will be noted that the
512
Rail
number of joints reported inspected with defect-detecting instruments increased from
13,208,822 in 1960 to 16,125,298 in 1961. The number of detected defects in control-
cooled rail (rolled after 1937) decreased from 9716 in 1960 to 9218 in 1961, and the
number of service failures decreased only from 3206 in 1960 to 3202 in 1961.
Professor R. E. Cramer at the University of Illinois examines every year rail fail-
ures submitted by some of the railroads which are thought to be transverse fissures.
These are reported in Table 8 as Accumulated Transverse Fissure Failures in Control-
Cooled Rail by mill and year rolled. These failures are classified as transverse fissure
failures from shatter cracks, from inclusions and from hot-torn steel. Transverse fissures
from shatter cracks have been practically eliminated by proper control-cooling. No
transverse fissure from shatter cracks has been reported in the rollings since 1951. The
transverse fissures from inclusions and hot-torn steel are due to mill practices and can
be kept to a minimum by proper quality control.
Table 9 shows the number of welded engine burns and failures that occurred during
1961 for certain roads that make a practice of welding engine burns and were able to
report this information. Although this table does not give a complete picture of the
welded engine burn failures it is felt there is a sufficient sampling of the railroads using
the process to indicate that satisfactory results may be obtained.
\
34O00
I
\
\
30000
—
1
\
/
\
57 roods tmct 1943, Toble 1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
\
/
\
1
\
'B* Unverified Irontverte defects nmiid
\
/
\
i
\
and heod checks- 57 roods ilncl 1943, Tc
I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
bit
1
\
/
■v
\
'C' Transverse fissure service failure* and
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I
!
\
20000
l»000
V Tromvtrie fissure, detected failurei lor
25 roods that broke detected delecte for
\
1
-d
tc
II
9!
8
/
:«
•-c
et
ct
d
tf
/
^
/
/
/
''-
K
*
L-
/
/
■
■-
Ssr
1 T
F
>
/
\
\
/
\
\
y
-/
/
,-
''
'
s
k-
/
"C"- Service IF '
--
!
1
NSVERSE DEFECTS AS REPORTED BY ALL RAILROADS.
Rail
513
YEAR RAIL ROLLED
FIG. 2- SERVICE AND DETECTED FAILURES IN UNITED STATES AND CANADA
YEAR
CONTROL COOLED RAIL FAILURES PER loo TRACK MILL
1LAK
■ EO RAIL FAILURES PER 100 TRACK MTU
MILL
ROLLED
YEARS ALL TYPES EXCEPT ENGINE BURN FAILURES
MILL
"'" "■"
YEARS ALL 1YI-LS EXC1 IT ENONE BURN FAILURES
ltS2
I9S0
13 9
i
ID
3
193-1
ALGOKA
19SS
ItS*
"*a
D g
1
]
im
I 9
!s58
°.?
1
1»S»
;;
)
1951
1 3
I9SI
; .
a
ItW
l] !
\l'£
; ;
3
i
CARNEGEE-E.T.
"»
15 3
LACKAWANNA
a \
! '
ltST
1 3
3
i
1 a
3
its*
! 1
=3
3
ItSt
D
L9SS
1M0
IM
un
H u
itu
.
1
i!u
» '
•
Zl
ltS4
4-6
19 W
l.S
3
COLORADO
ltS5
ltS4
its?
itsa
ii
3
3
1
)
1»S^
:
IMl
21 0
1951
, 2
3
lt&2
3
itu
TO
~ — 1 |
3
DOMINION
ins
ItM
I»S1
its*
;■;
3
3
11 SM M I
im«
IM.
i
3
1*S1
ii
3
[Ml
,
itu
3
A i
ltS3
>\
1
1
GARY
its:
its*
IMO
• »
■ >
1
l
1
1
i
ALL MILLS
II>*
3
3
I
1
3
J
■ CONTROL OX>LI.D RAIL [All I HI I
m m 3i ihi in mii u
I M.IM HI HN I All I hi s
514
Rail
YEARS SERVICE
4 5 6
V
1938-1947 Roll
Old Sections
*
/
\
\
\
\
ngs
\
V
t
\
>
.
/
/
/
t
*
.^'""
New Sections '
Some Old
Sections
YEAR ROLLED
Fig. 4 - Control Cooled Rail Failures to December 31, 1961 Per 100 Track Miles - All Types
Excluding Engine Burn Fractures - Service and Detected.
Rail
515
O «
x w
-J .J
3<
t. >
D«
o S
" J
W O
<<
5 «5
^ O
CO K
3£
■
E
3
£
■o
3
o
H
11297
6709
7254
18
282
CO 1»
en t* to
4308
1738
8657
5844
752
7882
4754
1294
1882
s
3347
3506
781
982
9950
-r cm en cm co ©
f O iO iO h *
©
"<f* CM t» OS
«- s
cm en o
cm cm en cm
© en oo en
s
l- © CM 0O t^.
m i co ^ o en
o
© o en -h cm
~h o
cm co en
<n to m
H Ul 00
•- 3 t- -< f-
en en n co h
H H o O H
en en oo m
c- co en ©
'-
© r- CM rH T
•T CM rH ©
rH 1 CM © in CM
CM f- CM CO
en
CO
t* n S h ^
rH O CO <-t
S2
^ © to
to ^ © r- to
f 0O N l" O
CO rH © CM
© CO rH CM
*r 1-* ©
cm © co m ^ en
o en co cm ©
©
00
en
co m © co oo
** in ©
CO CM
© o m
O H CO
CM tO
c- v co n en
en m co en to
^ H 00 N
en oo «*> © i
© © rH C- CO
rH CO © rH 00
CO © Ci v OO t-
en in « iO
en
rH © en
55
o « V
cm en to
© co m in ©
O iO [- CM ©
CM CM © OO
•»T © -3" rH 1
00 O r- rH
© m c* m cm
co r- oo en ©
cm rH i^ co m CM
oo c- co rH r-
s
o fl1 n h n
N Ol iO CO
ss
CM co to
oo m cm
CM CM ^
co © t» m *r
cm co © en cm
co v o en i
en ■* v h
00 C- rH CM
© rH C» © ©
© in ^» rH © t-
en
CO (D O N U
cm co ©
to i o m ©
OI © c- c-
CO CM CO CM rH
co m t- cm co
co .-< t- en
© CO CO C- 1
rH cm co en
oo in rH
^ © en cm **•
rH t> CM CO rH
m cm r-t en
o CO t- » uo *
n oo tc rH en
CO
'j*
00 H «5 n N
o ift en cm
en oo ©
© i
*• m r-
00 o to
cm © rH © in
© © © *# r-
m cm oo en
00 CM oo if 1
CM rH © rH
en t co co
m en m rj> co
TJ- -M* rH -1
CO © OO © ^« CO
en *h
1
o co to © *r
en co i/)
CO
N t O
en o
cm «n
CO o © co ao
oo in co v> in
© »H oo *J«
P» ' « '
i tn -<»« © cm
co en en co
tj« en
oo in en oo © oo
CO rH CO ©
1
o t- to
£ '
h m o
** t- t- t- CO
oo en «-4 oq in
to oo to
co r- cm r- t-
co co ao © m
t- in rH CO CM
i en © rH m
m co r- cm
■^« in
en to i" co cn m
r- m en rH ©
i
3
i
■
0
3
0
H
m to CO CO CM
t* * CD lO
<-i en
© oo
oo © to
m co ^
rH CM
oo t- r» r- ©
© ao r- cm rH
f* © co o m
CM CM
00 CO rH co r»
rH CO
C» CM © rH r- t-
co © *« *n
0)
go m en co o
r-t m
© 'ft
H 00 o
CO © t- © ©
rH CM rH
m co cm ©
o
© in © © ^*
^ 1 ^T © © rH
o
to
<7>
N Cft rt (O «
f-t ©
© CO
rH tO ©
CO O f- t- ©
© CO © ©
a
© CO © © v
m i © © © to
01
r- to in to ©
© CJ
© O -4
cm o en © ©
CM 00 CO © i
© en © cm co
© O CO O rn CM
1
en ia n en o
©
O pH
r- © ©
© © c- m m*
co co
'O CO rH O 1
in © © oo ©
rH CM
© en cm © rH co
en
e- cm © © ©
to
en © ©
N H X I- C
rH CO © © 1
© CO © rH •*
m m o o cm co
in
m co © cm ©
in to m
•-* CM
en rj* co oo o
rH rH CO
rH rH rH © 1
■f io o en en
O C- CM © © CM
I
u) h en >n o
H -
3S*
8^2°
rH CM © © 1
CM CM
CO © 1" ■* CM
© r» rH © © ao
35
at
CT» **• © M* — <
O 1
- — -
N « -<
o en n t* in
rH rH © rH
© e- cm © i
CO CM
© en © © m
in en ao o cm cm
CM
Oi
CO h O NO
rH ©
m o
N *• **
-H CO CM CO CM
CM rH IT- CM
5? ' •" '
i en © © r-
CO rH © © © 00
1
t -* -h © ©
to en
CM 1
s^:
CO rH -* ao
in o *■ © »n
' «--■
Oft ■*> © rH rH ©
CM rH CM
T3
a
rt
U.
u
■
r-«
u. H §
« O <
fjJOO a
■< < « S fi
u
-J <
-a -a
2 CQ
c
woo
a
• £
w ^ C
~« Z at ,
q w v. +a r*
5 ^ -d « !S
o o o o o
a.
0. 0. J3
g 2 w X
m x -a,.j
O O U Q
Q
M
<i u w h ^
8
yy^33S
516
Rail
-. fH rt o W
-
-r X> -
H
•1* >n en © -r
w (I> CI M
-h CO O 1-
en
o
t"1
*"
I* CO
CM CO LQ
co <o
m t- >n -r
-\
?
lO to *>
i- •-
S S S ' 2
*P M O O «»
SSJ3£
, r- — t-
rH
-
rt
■"*
1
CM
" ■ Q)
C en co **< rH
t rH O O 00
o cm -— ' en
O
■tl CO O OJ
-
^
_
""■
to
2
;J 3 j ^
,—- oo en o r-
1 I- CM O C-
o oo <n i-o
H
H
H
00
CO ^ rH rH O
£- CO CO O l-
i en co o in
r- co en o
■ O rH r- CO
rjD
3
CM rH
u.
n M M
r- r-
rf t- CM CM 00
wO CO CO
1 T 00 O T
en CO CO CO
31 CJ 1" lO
cn
tO CO
t- m CO rH
to
0)
r^
CM Ol ■<!« "T
-1
H
-r
CM
lO
00 CM
1 rH Tf O O)
O ^ CM tO
co ^- c- m
00
s
« n n
*J< r-l
CM O CO tO
CM O CO O CM
r- cm o
o •-*
in
"
H
*r
-r
CM irt 0> ^ CM
i o m o to
-r oo c^ oo
in co rH en
to
3 ^ ~ °>
-1
H
CM
m
m
lO rH <f>
i to m o oo
^. m cm co
o cm en co
00
rH rH Tf [-
H
H
rH rH
**■
CM
m to m
00 cm
t- CO ■* C- 00
i in ^« o o
oo o o en
o c- in to
CO
O tO rH
1-1
"
*
00 00
N ^ H H
Ol CM rH CM
CM
"D
0
oi to
O rH 00 tO CM
CM CO CM CO
CM CM
h f tt n
CO t> rH CO
CO
H
r~
C
CO
O CO CO
* N
rH S CO ' '°
^V O H O
O O O CM O
00 s "= 2
1 O ^ CO
o
m
CJ
w
o
O CO CO
T o
C m o oo o
1 O O CM O
en co o rH
U5 O *H
to
CG
<•
2
H
msrH
1 O O CO TT
m o en t>
CM CO O CO
O
H
00
CM H
SSg^H
^n t- h o
1 Vi O CM rH
c- co to ^
** m © o
o
w
*-* ^
~
j>
oi o m
rH O CO -T CM
* co ^ m o
1 O O ^r CO
2SS°
m rH t- o
en
8
3
to cm m to t*
1 O O CO t-
eo oo o rH
hi
s
CM
rt
en
g
CO
0)
5
in
H ^
CO o o O
-
<8
1
H CM
c-
CO rH <« Oi -*
to -v o to o
i o o cm in
CM CO rH 00
(O 00 O V
„
H
CO
OO CM O CM O
1 O rH CM CO
c- en co m
in co o oo
t.
rH
H
^
CM
o co rH in o
1 o o o o
1- lO O Ol
r- U? *-t <*
o
*
H
"■' ^
r-t r- r- t*
rH rH
•"
H
T3
^,
CO
Q
H
2 .
co
ft h
I j " -5
C --j co V3 «x5
J 55 w <£6 E
I <* u o *;
£ « r* - _J
rf< CU ^ 3 ^
SAL
SP
Southern
9 .
s -
a, hi A
oy 0i .2 ■
H P > ?
<
O
pq
j
* °3 *
w u:
2 O >" ^ >
S z z z z
>> <a Oi « <*
►J
^t
J J 2
»c ^
Z Z 2i ft 0,
© K K K co
<
§5
u a
<u a
f?
cfl c
i!3
s 1 1 i I
5 a°-2?
3 «
3 •°
IS
E S
>£35 =
1) g S rt «
Z := rt PS «
23 S w 1 J
■C S > a> 2 cn
g 5 C3 J2 3
•g « a
n U U V V 4)
z a 3 S 3 s
Rail
517
TONS OF RAILS AND TRACK MILES OF EACH YEAR'S ROLLINGS 1951
REPORTED BY 50 RAILROADS
Year
Rolled
OH CONTROL COOLED ONLY
TONS
TRACK MILES
1951
1952
1953
1954
1955
1956
1957
1958
1959
1960
1,229,261
987,006
1.207,782
823. 831
883,125
865,017
814,723
401,532
458,260
364,097
5,908.58
4,796.63
5,683.69
3,833.60
4,085.60
4.024.40
3,480.30
1,855.90
2,131.10
1,674.60
TOTAL
8,034,634
37,474.40
TABLE 3 - SERVICE AND DETECTED FAILURES OF ALL TYPES EXCEPT ENGINE BURN FAILURES
ACCUMULATED FROM DATE ROLLED TO DECEMBER 31, 1961, PER 100 AVERAGE
TRACK MILES, CONTROL COOLED RAIL ONLY, IN ALL ROLLINGS FROM ALL MILLS
Year
Rolled
YEARS OF SERVICE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
1951
2.0
3.4
5.0
10.4
16.3
21.7
27.5
34.9
42.7
53.6
1952
2.0
2.8
4.3
7.9
13.2
18.7
25.3
32.3
39.3
1953
0.8
2.0
4.0
9.2
15.6
22.5
30.6
33.1
1954
0.5
1.3
3.5
6.1
10.9
15.9
21.9
1955
0.7
1.5
2.3
4.0
6.9
10.4
1956
0.4
1.3
3.3
6.3
10.1
1957
0.5
1.3
2.5
4.3
1958
1.0
1.8
3.0
1959
2.0
2.8
1960
0.5
518
Rail
TABLE 4 - TRACK MILKS AND 1981 FAILURES, ALL TYPES, IN ROLLINGS tSSJ TO I
OPJ N HEARTH CONTROL-COOLED HAIL ONLY
ROAD
TRACK
MILES BY
MILL
I9S1 PA
LURES
ALG
CARN
COLO
DOM
GARY
INLD
LACKA
STLTN
TENN
TOTAL
EBFa EXCL.
EBPa ONLY
AT&SF
ACL
BbO
ll&i iCT
B&LE
300
158]
MS
455
175
48
24 1
717
1 292
42
3
14
3
*
Ban Arooa
1)& M
CP
C Ol 0.1
C&OISys.)
2984
11
11
7 11.
478
■
33
203
74
3708
1483
535
11
1
c&ei
C&NW
CBiQ
CI&L
CMSIP6P
626
689
62
7C2
11
122
129
29
220
100
81
1444
91
13
2
CHI (LP
C&S
D&H
D&RGW
Erie-Lock
126
US
357
298
520
307
152
15
146
817
357
146
510
45
GTW
ON
IC
KCS
495
182
564
807
133
63
198
29
170
15
573
12
274
1442
1380
105
1
5
3
6
L&NE
LV
LI
L&N
51
185
16
37
1410
16
185
37
1401
1
36
2
MStPiSSIM
MKT
MP Lines
NYC
11
29
556
218
614
174
15
103
71
60
10
553
3
95
413
122
1368
1
12
35
NYNH4H
S4W
NP
PRR
P&LE
77
663
273
85
374
307
192
12
58
44
110
221
286
350
951
849
859
97
1
228
9
2
1
1
QNSSiL
Reading
RFSiP
StL-SF
SAL
345
225
118
281
720
602
345
118
720
883
4
4
Southern
UP
W. Md.
90
2458
1395
16
71
707
187
110
1301
2568
2039
1988
277
330
39
343
25
7
TOTAL
3006
1673
8314
IOCI 8768
2191
1528
3548
5802
we"?!
1708
44
NOTE: The following railroads did not report and were omitted from thiB table: 1HB. JCL (NYiLB), NYC&StL, NYC (Western Dl
The NYC Sys. includes the B«iA, NYCSouthern District (CCCiStL, P&E), NYC (NY District) and NYC (Eastern District).
The DLJ.W merged with the Erie Railroad.
The NCSiStL merged with the L&N Railroad.
The TfcNO merged with the SP Railroad
The Virginian merged with the NSiW Railroad.
Rail
519
8?
<o —r
So
SS
§2
Z w
« CJ
W t-
i
■J <o
9 "
5«
•n a
co a
W <=> * r/l
FAILUR
PER IC
TRACK
YEAR
cj r- a> po t-
cm co o — oo
01
OOIIO
W CD C-
t- f- <0 CO
^ CO
«3
<; -J <
en n to u -^
O
O) CO O) iflh
BB
m —i ao
CO
o
«§£
CO CM 1" CD <£>
in
o -* <o
m h io m
H M CO
ts
St" CO
00 CM OO O 00
**• ^ to <$ -^
CO oo to o co
s
H to 00
CM CO 00
<_0
CO
« 2
co ^h ao — ao
c-l
r-l CO lO
p-
co
00 CO CO t>- to
'XJ
in co in
CO
rH «-t t> m ao
LO -*i t>
o
h Ol (O O 't
f-t CO <-H
H
w
3
O (0 A H 00
in
O — 1 CO
ao
CM CO
CM
o
o
m
«
w
ao m i" c- ^
-4"
CO CO o
o
9
-* co ^
CM
»*
2
H
o
""*
CM
s
OQ
0)
w
5
o
en 00 CO rH
e
cm o o
(Tv
X
w
CM -H O rH tD
n
CO CM C-
z
ao m ao
CO
IN
to
55
a>
g
t- N N N H
:s
O Co o
o
in
^*
Q
rH CM CM
,H
CO
M
o
CO
m
O
w
a
o
H
O B
CM -* O — : CO
co iA o ao m
CO IA f-4
ao
r-l
-H 1 C- •-«
in CO CO
a
CO
H
H
B
~i
<
X
pi t« n h u)
LO
-h o in
<t
I
rt H 01 * H
•H CO
CO
CO
Q
3
9
CO
Ol H H t* rt
te
O r-l oO
m
04 l> CO CO
d
CO
<o
s
p
u
<
O °* Q
en oo h to oo
«
ao oo ao
H
LO
O — I -H Co.
a
Co) CO
o
ao Co) -h
CM
CO
—
E* * ~
o
o
p
K
w
2 w
£ CO
o- «
•J
a
a 8 S5
3" < g
2 w « g
Si 9 9£
O « —i « rx
-J 3 o o •?
< O CJ Q O
|
< S w
o 2 Z
< H W
J co H
CO
1 *->
J H W
2 ° «
-S2S
1 s
c3 x
CJ
Co
b a
h
3 CO
to
Co
n
-1
t: 2
s
> a
w
33 fe
520
Rail
u <
2 tv
2 £
„, Q
io Z
2 **
o o
z3
u o
< w
< H
^ Q
CO
w
>
O
X
H
Z
«
K
a
j
W
CO
5
&H
co
8
Q
o>
K
2
O
<
CO
CO
W
K
K
W
on S3
" § *5 CO
10 A tfi w n r- co cm
O O CO
o
FAILl)
PER
TRAC
YEA
a
o
H (O M in IB foCO CO
O CO CM
ooo^o fjin o
O O -1
X co
u W K
=
f in in « io -- r- co
CO CO --r CM t>- u n CO
CO t- CM
cm ~< en
r-J
< J <
w n n h o cj o m
en r-
k a u
O CM CM CO CM CO m CO
CO -H
• s
H «* >"
M t« ,/, W
H
CO
■X CO
O U
e
o o co en -n r-coio
CO O Ol
<J
n
en r» co * h J^ f- cm
v «i « «) n £m »
CM C- ■*
fO
< J
** CM
r~
gs
— O Si CM -l
CM
c-J
■
CO
-1 w
r«OtOM»HHH
CO CM
CO
O
- 0,
*-l © tp H O) 00 N
CO CM
00
»t
lO CO CO
-H CM
*r
P«
W
CO
H CD CN H O0 V *-*
CO
CM
<
'-c
CO
O
03
o
K
W
O CM *J» CO CM
m
if*
X
CO CO r-i
00
o
H
d
£
«
O
w
u
H
Hm«oncONN
CO
.
CM
>"a
e- -h en cm
X
2
CM
o
_
CO
Z
OS
9
co cm in -j-
CO
o
CO
JJ
o
CM CM
CO
©
S
pg
d
Q
« ~
C
H
CO
w
U Q
£ <
o K
oaiHcuMooom
t-H
o n ©en
>H iH CM
CM
m
3
J
<
B
co
8
■CP C- w CO O CM
CM c-
CO
o
t*
tj« o tn
00
""J
Q
W
o
H
3
X
H
CM r-t
co
C- CO H <i N
CO .*
c»
tr>
5
>
m i-<
lO
o
O
O
<
tx .» h
C_> «" Q
CO CO CM CM O CM t-
Oi TT
00
r
CO t-i Oi C-
CM
ip
rH Ol en
— <
CO
m « C
H g °
•<r
CO
o
o
o
o
■o
z
3£
3
En
u
o
S
3 o
hkozhSSk
X W CO
a; « a.
<
H
H
2g
Ho
CO
<
w
><
w
a H
so
CMiOcftt-aiCMCOCO
o o m
tJ
W
o
HHHNNncon
"0 ■<*• CO
s 1
J
Rail
521
Table 6 — Accumulated Failures of All Types for OH Control-Cooled Rail,
Only In Rolling 1951-1960, Incl., Accumulated to December 31, 1961,
Service and Detected, Segregated by Roads and Mills
ROADS
TF
Vcr
CF
&
VSH
HSU
Other
Web
Base
FAILURE T
II AI.S
I-:i5Fs Excl.
EBFa Only
In
Actum.
Accum.
Uof I
DF
Bead
Broken
Jt.
Othor
Total
1961
Total
1901
ALGOMA
CP
1
a
329
13
381
17
829
18
120
1717
328
6
1
CS.0 (Svs )
0
D
1}
n
1
0
0
0
1
0
u
i
TOTAL
1
y
32.'
l:;
352
17
h2'<
in
120
1718
328
B
1
CARNEGIE
BfcO
0
3
0
2
8
0
2
0
2
17
6
4
3
B&LE
0
o
0
5
1
0
0
0
0
6
3
0
B
Erie-Lack
0
0
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
3
0
5
0
XYXHfcH
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
2
0
N&W
0
803
0
a
38
1
9
5
4
868
214
8
1
PRR
0
2
0
J
6
0
4
0
0
14
0
0
0
W. Md.
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
3
0
0
II
. : '.:.
2
BOS
1
17
54
2
18
6
913
223
19
;
COLORADO
ATfcSF
0
5
6
0
10
0
23
8
3
55
3
3
u
CB&Q
0
6
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
8
3
3
2
CRIfcP
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
C&S
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
3
0
28
0
DfcRGW
0
79
4
25
2
0
1
0
0
111
45
0
0
GX
0
0
1
0
4
0
0
0
0
5
0
0
o
MP Lines
0
0
3
0
0
0
2
0
0
5
0
7
0
XP
0
5
4
0
19
2
4
0
0
34
7
2
0
SP
0
140
37
112
176
17
448
139
8
1072
322
111
25
VP
0
1976
15
54
286
3
25
17
3
2379
312
10
6
TOTAL
0
2211
71
193
500
22
503
164
9
3673
692
104
33
DOMINION
CP
0
3
67
4
79
1
807
3
31
995
206
0
0
.■.-•_:.
0
14
0
37
2
1
4
4
0
62
0
0
0
: :.-.l
0
17
07
41
81
2
811
7
31
1057
206
0
0
GARY
AT&SF
0
0
0
0
1
Li
2
0
0
3
0
0
0
BiiO
0
2
3
0
5
1
7
0
0
18
;
12
0
CiO (Sys.)
0
U
3
1
4
2
7
i
1
30
B
2
0
CfcXW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
u
1
1
ii
B
0
CB&Q
0
U
1
3
0
"
2
0
1
7
2
0
0
CMStP&P
0
0
1
I
1
u
0
o
0
3
1
1
0
CItliP
0
0
1
0
0
0
2
1
a
4
1
2
0
Eric- Lack
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
o
0
1
o
s
a
CTW
0
0
4
1
5
5
3
0
0
18
1
0
o
GX
0
47
2
1
62
0
11
0
1
124
2
0
0
IC
0
3
5
0
6
3
9
1
1
28
4
1
0
LAN
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
u
1
0
0
0
MSlP&SStM
0
0
2
0
0
2
3
0
l
8
3
0
0
MP Lines
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
u
u
1
0
0
0
NYC (Sys.)
0
2
2
0
3
2
2
b
u
24
5
2
0
NP
0
u
4
1
11
3
5
2
0
26
2
4
o
I"RH
0
2
1
1
U
3
3
0
g
10
1
6
0
Southern
0
u
0
0
0
B
1
0
B
1
1
0
0
UP
0
111
3
0
53
0
2
1
«
178
23
l,
1
TOTAL
0
178
33
15
156 j
21
61
14
?
486 ]
61
41
1
522
Rail
TADLE C - CONTINUED
ROADS
TF
Ver
CF
&
VSII
IISH
Other
Web
Base
FAILURE TOTALS
EBFS Excl.
EBFs Only
In
Ac cum.
Accum.
Uof I
DF
Head
Broken
Jt.
Other
Total
19G1
Total
19G1
INLAND
B&OCT
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
C&O (Syr.
2
24
2
1
2
1
5
0
1
38
8
0
0
CSiEI
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
C&NW
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
CB&Q
0
12
0
0
2
0
2
0
0
16
8
0
0
CMStP&P
0
0
0
0
2
1
1
0
0
4
2
0
0
CRI&P
0
0
0
1
1
2
1
0
0
5
0
0
0
GTW
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
2
0
0
0
GN
0
11
1
0
7
0
0
0
2
21
1
0
0
MStP&SStM
0
1
3
0
0
7
12
0
2
25
9
0
0
MP Lines
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
0
NYC (Sys.)
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
2
0
4
1
0
0
NP
0
1
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
5
0
0
0
PRR
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
UP
0
52
0
2
3
0
0
1
0
58
8
0
0
TOTAL
2
104
6
5
18
12
30
4
5
186
37
0
0
LACKAWANNA
CP
0
0
1
0
2
0
1
0
4
8
1
0
0
C&O (Sys.)
0
4
0
0
2
0
0
0
0
6
1
0
0
GTW
0
0
16
1
0
1
2
0
0
20
1
0
0
GN
0
P
0
0
5
0
0
0
1
6
0
0
0
LV
0
0
U
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
Me. Cent.
0
0
1
0
1
0
2
0
0
4
1
0
0
NYC (Sys.)
0
4
12
0
40
G
23
6
15
106
29
2
0
NP
0
0
0
0
1
0
3
0
0
4
0
1
1
TOTAL
0
8
30
1
51
7
32
6
20
155
34
3
1
STE ELTON
ACL
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
0
0
B&O
4
5
5
0
12
1
2
0
0
29
4
8
2
Ban & Aroos
0
0
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
4
0
0
0
C&O (Sys.)
0
0
0
0
5
0
1
0
0
6
1
0
0
D&H
0
1
4
1
0
0
0
1
0
7
2
1
0
GN
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
2
0
0
0
LI
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
NYNH&H
1
0
5
1
0
0
3
0
0
10
1
12
0
N&W
1
119
2
1
12
0
3
1
1
140
14
1
0
PRR
0
3
5
0
5
1
0
1
0
15
1
24
0
RF81P
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
SAL
0
0
4
2
0
0
0
0
0
6
1
1
0
Southern
0
0
2
1
0
3
9
0
0
15
8
0
0
W. Md.
0
0
2
1
0
2
0
0
0
5
0
1
0
TOTAL
6
128
31
10
37
7
20
3
1
243
32
53
2
TENNESSEE
ACL
0
0
1
2
2
1
4
0
0
10
0
3
0
C. of Ga.
0
0
1
1
0
10
0
0
0
12
11
0
0
FEC
0
0
2
0
0
0
1
0
0
3
1
0
0
IC
0
11
4
4
5
1
3
1
0
29
2
2
0
L&N
0
25
18
14
9
4
23
17
2
112
36
17
2
MP Lines
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
2
0
1
0
StL-SF
0
0
2
3
1
5
0
1
0
12
4
0
0
SAL
0
1
4
1
1
1
0
0
0
8
3
0
0
SP
0
0
1
4
0
0
5
1
0
11
8
0
0
Southern
0
1
11
C
13
8
33
0
1
73
30
9
0
TOTAL
0
38
45
35
31
30
70
20
3
272
95
32
2
ALL MILLS
11
3301
613
330
1310
120
2374
241
203
8703
1708
318
■11
Rail
523
TABLE 7
RAIL FAILURES IN THE WEB WITHIN THE JOINT BAR LIMITS FOUND IN 1961
ON RAIL OF 100 LB. AND ALL HEAVIER SECTIONS
Railroad
Rail Rolled Previous to 1937
Rail Ro
lied in 1937 and Af
er
Joints Inspected with Defect
Detecting Instruments
Detected
"ailures
Service F
allures
Detected Failures
Service Failures
Bolt Hole
Other
Bolt Hole
Other
Bolt Hole
Other
Bolt Hole
Other
ATSiSF
36
23
22
0
210
195
131
0
2.310.047
ACL
316
608
90
136
215
153
43
29
37,857
B&O
726
26
1006
84
17
3
44
15
-
BfcOCT
0
0
23
7
2
4
7
0
19,500
Ban & Aroos
1
0
1
1
1
0
6
0
-
B&LE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
B&M
70
12
65
6
11
3
4
0
381,353
CP
211
136
36
7
451
710
285
120
2,196,611
C of G
0
0
0
0
342
0
0
0
-
C&O (Sys.)
19
19
26
12
11
4
7
10
306.180
C&EI
0
0
15
0
0
0
22
0
0
CfcNW
658
94
464
45
175
180
192
37
1,597,740
CB&Q
24
4
60
9
54
29
65
67
423.182
CI&L
0
0
45
14
0
0
1
0
-
CMStPiP
318
3
150
1
23
0
22
1
413,445
CRI&P
77
104
97
101
8
0
70
35
-
C&S
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
D&H
2
0
8
0
2
0
3
3
62,742
D&RGW
20
7
3
6
20
18
6
4
282,150
Erie-Lack
142
100
27
18
9
20
6
5
754.668
FEC
13
1
1
0
1
2
5
4
-
GTW
12
2
48
0
5
0
13
0
28.603
GN
53
0
18
0
215
0
44
0
148,943
IC
36
8
13
9
85
61
41
17
274,015
KCS
3
0
D
0
6
1
0
4
0
L&HR
13
0
11
0
9
0
7
0
9,600
L&NE
0
0
4
0
0
0
0
2
-
LV
13
12
41
3
10
10
2
2
40,360
LI
50
23
0
0
0
5
0
0
1,728
L&N
600
476
139
0
200
257
54
0
-
Me. Cent
1
2
8
16
0
0
0
3
-
MStP&SStM
156
0
27
0
15
0
15
0
165,040
MKT
208
25
15
4
6
3
16
1
-
MP Lines
7
23
3
11
13
57
8
40
1.500.000
NYC (Sys)(A)
193
882
70
87
282
511
121
113
151,273
NYNHfcH
2
94
0
147
73
345
6
45
-
NiW
9
11
5
2
7
35
1
0
-
NP
3
0
136
9
0
1
230
60
-
PRH
777
236
2353
329
602
304
290
136
1,378,841
PfcLE
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
QNSSiL
0
0
0
0
4
1
0
0
47,520
Reading
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
-
RF&P
0
0
0
0
4
18
0
1
-
Rutland
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
StL-SF
24
16
125
66
10
22
97
129
56.312
SAL
30
0
12
4
11
0
27
2
Southern
799
422
0
0
712
1410
0
0
2,728.000
SP
130
5
9
48
542
413
121
27 5
809.588
UP
75
59
0
1
35
42
19
8
-
W. Md
0
0
0
0
3
0
3
0
-
Totals
5.827
3.433
5.177
1.183
4.401
4.817
2.034
1,168
16,125.298
(A) Includes BfcA, NYC Southern District (CCCtiStL; PI.E), NYC (New York District) and NYCfEastcrn District).
524
Rail
<
cm
J
in
<
'"■'
K
Q
U
It
J
W
R
g
O
H
0
8
EC
o
K
H
n
u
w
u
p
7,
-i
u
71
ft
W
X
P
-J
ft
<
<
i
en
•4 en
cm en
o
m
en
ea
-
in
en
eg
-
en
m
en
2
CO
d
CM
m
en
en
CO
t-
23
CO
CO
en
-
o
m
05
62
CO 0)
en
en
en
O
A
23
«r
GO
en
A
eo
CO CO
>h en
us
en
A
a
CO CO
CO CM
-
CO
"Cf
en
CM
CM
cn
CO
in
O)
a
CO
CM
en
a
ft
ea
$ 2
CO
en
•"Ji
en
23
co
CO CO u
CM CO CM
CO
CM
■»<
en
«
CO CO
co in
CM
CM
en
3 3
a
CO
CO o
CD i-l
CO
o
Ol
CM
X) CO
r5 en
o
CO
m
CM
en
CO
en
JO co o
CM ^ •-<
at
en
&
t-
CO
en
a
s
CM
e'-
en
en
u
5 en
en
CM
CO
CO
en
1>
CO x>
CM .H
CM
©
en
m
en
en
•
CO
CO
m
CO
CO
p
U
a> o
Sf 1
o P o
^r a o
< O O
□
o
8 v
c h a
C b CO
O 01 rj
CO
5 o M
# o M
CO -S CB
a o c
3 w H
<
S
§ a
8-2
M •
J! tx
u •
2 H
CJ CO
* 2
II
*j
£ 6
||
ft, _.
w ^
K H
U CM
I
CO £
2 CO
6 H
O CM
w '
W 3
U W
09
Si =3
H o co
P h
El a
Rail
525
TABLE 9
WELDED ENGINE BURNS AND FAILURES
Engine Bums
Bums
Failed Welded
Welded Prior
Welded
Engine Burns
Railroad
To 1901
In 1961
During 1961
AT&SF
106,099
7,487
0
B&O
1,441
3,350
1
C&O
45,028
3, 113
3
C&NW
15,224
1,503
0
D&H
7 , 984
33
3
EJ&E
55,154
1,280
0
IC
32,433
11,562
0
PRR
321,985
15,300
4
RF&P
17,941
0
0
StL-SF
3,432
303
0
SAL
21,698
1,949
1
Southern (Sys. )
No Record
Did Not Report
Southern (West. Div.)
145,591
Discontinued Keeping This Information
SP
543
1,566
0
Total
774,553
47,446
12
Report on Assignment 4
Rail End Batter; Causes and Remedies
R. C. Postels (chairman, subcommittee), J. M. Bentham, B. Bristow, R. M. Brown,
J. A. Bunjer, R. E. Catlett, Jr., M. W. Clark, W. J. Cruse, F. L. Etchison, O. E.
Fort, J. H. Greason, C. C. Herrick, K. K. Kessler, J. C. Jacobs, R. R. Lawton,
H. R. Moore, J. S. Parsons, C. F. Parvin, R. B. Rhode. J. G. Roney, A. P. Talbot.
The building up of battered rail ends by means of different welding procedures and
the evaluation of welding rods and electrodes used in these procedures is of considerable
importance to the railroads. An investigation on this subject using 12-in-stroke rolling
load machines at the Research Center of the Association of American Railroads has
been carried on under the general direction of G. M. Magee, director of engineering
research, by Kurt Kannowski, metallurgical engineer.
A definite program was outlined and followed in this investigation. For this pro-
gram the Pennsylvania Railroad supplied 50 matched battered rail ends of 131 RE
section. All of the joints had at least 0.040 in batter when they were removed from
track. The identity of the rail ends in the relation to each joint in track was maintained
during the test. New oversize head-contact 6-hole joint bars were used to give a good
fishing surface fit. A bolt tension of 15,000 lb was maintained throughout the test.
These joints rested on a 2-in white-pine plank which was supported solidly on the bed
of the 12-in-stroke rolling-load machines. A 30,000-11) wheel load was applied after an
original rail profile was obtained of each joint after it had been built up by welding. This
526 Rail
profile was checked every 1,000,000 cycles up to and including 5.000,000 cycles, which
was considered a run out. Any joint that developed 0.040 in or more batter prior to
the 5,000,000 cycles had to be removed because of the damage it caused to the
equipment.
The program in this investigation covers oxyacetylene and electric-arc welding
methods and variations of procedures of both. All of the previously described joints
were welded by experienced railroad welders using the standard methods prescribed by
their railroad for the methods and welding materials. Duplicate joints were used for
each step of the investigation.
The data in this investigation indicate that, in spite of variations in rods and weld-
ing procedures, the oxyacetylene welding method performs well in building up battered
rail ends. The occurrence of porosity near the interface of the weld and rail metal as
well as the sharp demarcation line between the rail and weld metal have caused the
failures of electric arc welds rather than the practice of not pre- or post-heating.
The failures of electric-arc welds are often caused by a variable that was not given
consideration in this investigation. These welds are subject to variations due to differ-
ences in the welders depositing the metal. This effect on the quality of the weld is
gradually being eliminated by use of the automatic feed and wire electrode welding
process. Welds produced by this method are now under rolling-load test as well as an
extensive service test on the New York Central System. Results from both show
considerable promise.
A complete report describing the method of making the tests, preparing the speci-
mens, the results obtained, and metallurgical examinations of the specimens after the
rolling load tests is contained in an engineering report prepared by the AAR Research
Center and a copy of this report will be furnished on request.
Report on Assignment 5
Economic Value of Various Sizes of Rail
J. C. Jacobs (chairman, subcommittee), W. D. Almy, S. H. Barlow, H. B. Berkshire,
T. A. Blair, C. B. Bronson, J. A. Bunjer, T. F. Burris, M. \V. Clark, J. T. Collin-
son, C. O. Conatser, W. J. Cruse, D. T. Faries, O. E. Fort, J. H. Greason, Jr.,
J. L. Gressitt, C. E. R. Haight, R. R. Lawton, F. R. Micheal, H. R. Moore, C. E.
Morgan, R. H. Patterson, C. F. Parvin, H. F. Smith, D. J. White.
Your committee submits the following report as information. It is a continuation
of Study "A" reflecting changes in the test mileage and computed to show averages for
18 years. The labor and material averages are computed to compensate for the decrease
in track mileage.
Rail
527
STl 1>\ \
Results of Study of Illinois Central Railroad Northward Track, Mattoon to
Savoy, III., Test Sections of 112-Lb and 131-Lb Rah
lU-Lb Hail
tSl-IA) Rati
MP L52.24 -172.00 laid in 1942 and 19
MP 132.00 152.24 hud in 194 1
< Iriginal t »•- 1 included :
( Original test included:
19.70 track milee
20. -' t track miles
18 turnouts
21 turnouts
1 railroad crossing
:-i railroad cros
22 public road ctobe
_'_' public roa
2 private made croat
ii pii\ ate grade crossings
2 1-in joint bars
36-in joint bars
Changes in rail mileage:
( Shanges in rail mileage:
1950— MP 152.09-152.24 laid in 115-lb,
1950- MP 152.09 152.24 laid in 115-lb,
0.15 milee added to test.
0. 1 5 miles dropped from test .
L952— MP 155.87 -160.52 relaid in 132-lb,
1 Ml' 1 12.82 152.09 laid in L32-lb,
t.ii"i milee dropped from test.
fi.27 miles dropped from test.
1953— MP 160.52-163.55 relaid in 132-lb,
3.03 miles dropped from trst.
1954- MP 152.09 155.87 relaid in 132-lb,
3.78 milee droppe 1 from test.
1956— MP 170.79-172.00 relaid in 132-lb,
1.21 milee dropped from b st.
1957— MP 170.79-163.55 relaid in 132-lb,
7.24 miles dropped from test.
(completing removal of 112-lb rail)
Average Annual Traffic Density — 28,000,000 gross tons
Comparison of the Two Sections — Cost of Investment, 1944 Prices
/.'' lit
/
argi s pi i Mil
-Lb
131-Lb
Gross cost — rail and other track material
Less estimated salvage
643
i 28 1
Ci
$14,413
5,011
S 8.359
1.338
S 9, in '
I . 173
$ 9,097
L5 years
S 557
839
$10,875
Estimated life — based on 1960 condition-
Annual cost — Hail and other track material
Labor to lay
Interest al 6' , *
20 years
1 17(1
71
953
Total annual investment cos!
S 1,485
S 1,497
*< >n gross outlay for laboi and material.
528
Rail
Maintenance Labor and Material Per Mile
US-Lb
tSl-Lb
Year
\tiles
Main-
tained
Man-
Hows
Cross
Ties
Cv Yd
Ballast
Year
1/ ili
Main-
lain i il
Man-
Hours
Cross
/'■■
Cu Yd
Ballast
L943
L9.76
19.70
19.70
19.70
19.70
19.70
19.76
19.91
19.91
15.20
1 2 . 23
8.45
8. 15
7 . 24
7.24
2, ISO
113
701
1 ,166
045
1 .005
1 .574
094
667
748
1,110
543
239
401
274
12,000
710
5
230
410
208
ISO
541
174
48
30
91
44
32
8
40
2,775
628
17
25 1
579
273
294
423
159
1 93
140
292
83
159
0
0
3.491
19 11
20 . 2 1
20.24
20.21
20 . 2 1
20.24
20 . 21
20.09
20. OS
20 . 09
20.09
20.09
2(1.09
20.09
20.09
20 . 09
20.09
10.82
10.82
2,606
131
370
748
245
670
1 ,642
614
1 . 1 14
1 .(IS9
392
031
535
39 t
242
53
97
448
12,051
1,065
0
5
172
38
LO
402
59
02
139
0
91
10
0
78
0
20
314
2,471
194 1
647
L945
1915
1946
1917
30
1940
1947 _
1 1 1
301
1948
1948
185
1949
19 19
1 L6
1950
1 950
323
1951..
1951 .
52
[952
L952
304
1953
1953
I'll
1 954
1954
1955
21
04
1956
1957
L956
1957
52
0
1958 .
214
1959
1960
1901
0
0
200
Total 18 Years.
2.743
Average of 15 Years for 112-Lb and 18 Years for 131 -Lb Rail
112-Lb
t31-Lb
Savings by Use of
131-Lb
Chargi
Percent
i 'hargt
Percent
Charge
Percent
844
$1,055
185
$ 014
233
$ 233
56
32
12
669
$ 830
137
$ 455
152
$ 152
57
32
11
175
$ 219
48
$ 159
81
$ 81
Cost at $1.25*
47
Cost at $3.32*
35
Ballast (stone and slag) cu yd
Cost at $1.00*
18
Total maintenance
Percent .
$1 . 902
$1,485
$3,387
100
$1,443
$1,497
$2 , 940
100
$ 459
$ 12 Cr.
$ 447
100
13.1
* Average prices 1943 1961.
SUMMARY
The greater savings realized through the use of 131 -lb rail have been in labor and
cross ties, partially due to the use of longer joint bars, larger tie plates, and greater rail
rigidity.
Similar maintenance standards have been practiced on both test sections.
Rail 529
Report on Assignment 6
Joint Bars: Design, Specifications, Service Tests,
Including Insulated Joints and
Compromise Joints
Embert Osland (.chairman, subcommittee), G. Y. Begany, Jr., J. M. Bentham, R. M.
Brown, J. A. Bunjer, R. E. Catlctt, Jr., J. B. Clark, C. O. Conatser, W. J. (ruse.
O. E. Fort, C. J. Henry, H. W. Jenkins, K. K Kessler, Ray McBrian, J. S. Parsons,
R. C. Postels, J. G. Roney, A. P. Talbot, V. R. Terrill, G. L. Todd, J. S. Wearn,
\V. L. Young.
As mentioned in last year's report, the insulated joint designed by the Research
Department of the AAR has been installed on a number of railroads and it is hoped
to submit a report on its performance next year. Research and testing are being con-
ducted on several materials in an attempt to develop an insulation with a longer life
than the conventional fiber, and also better adapted for use with welded rail.
A pilot model has been constructed of a hydraulic rail expander and contractor for
closing or expanding the gap between the rail ends of welded rail at insulated joints to
facilitate the replacement of insulation. The prospect of joining strings of welded rail
in the field with thermit welding is being tried out on several railroads, and a clamping
arrangement to hold the gap between rail ends at the proper distance during the fusion
of the thermit mixture has just been completed. It will be subjected to laboratory tests
early in 1963 and possibly service tests later in the year.
The final field inspection of test joints installed on the Chicago & North Western
Railway and the Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway in 1949 will be made sometime
this summer.
Report on Assignment 8
Causes of Shelly Spots and Head Checks in Rail:
Methods for Their Prevention
L. S. Crane (chairman, subcommittee), \Y. D. Almy, B. Bristow, J. A. Bunjer, T. F.
Burris, J. B. Clark, C. J. Code, C. A. Colpitis, C. O. Conatser, W. J. Cruse, F. L.
Etchison, D. T. Faries, O. E. Fort, C. J. Henry, C. C. Herrick, T. B. Hutcheson,
Ray McBrian, B. R. Meyers, G. L. P. Plow, R. B. Rhode, H. M. Williamson.
W. L. Young.
During the past year this investigation was progressed both bj the Research
Department. AAR, and the University of Illinois.
An account of the work conducted by tin- AAR research staff i- included in this
report as Appendix 8-a. It gives the results of the latest inspection of service test instal-
lations of heat-treated and alloy steel rail on various railroads. In this inspection a
significant difference in tin- performance of high-silicon steel rail compared with standard
carbon-steel rail was observed the former showing ;i greater resistance to shelling. An
additional installation consisting of rail made bj the basic-oxygen process was inspected
and will be reported on next year.
The AAR research staff also conducted metallurgical and physical examination- of
rails flame-hardened by the Santa Fe Railway and the Union Pacific Railroad Reports
530 Rail
describing the processes and presenting the test results have been prepared by Kurt
Kannowski of the AAR research staff. Copies of the reports may be obtained from
G. M. Magee, director of engineering research, AAR, 3140 S. Federal St., Chicago 16.
The investigation of shelly rail conducted at the University of Illinois by Professor
R. E. Cramer is presented herein as Appendix 8-b.
Appendix 8-a
Report on 1962 Inspections of Service Tests of Heat-
Treated and Alloy-Steel Rail
By K. H. KANNOWSKI
Metallurgical Engineer, AAR Research Department
Chesapeake & Ohio Railway Service Test of 132 RE Heat-Treated Rails
This test installation is described extensively in the AREA Proceedings, Vol. 57,
page 833.
The 12 heat-treated (oil-quenched) and the 12 non-heat-treated, end-hardened 132
RE rails near Martha, W. Va., were inspected May 9, 1961. These rails were laid in the
high and low sides of the northbound (loaded) track in a 3-deg 6-min curve on May 2,
1949. The test rails had carried approximately 321,000,000 gross tons of traffic to
May 1, 1961.
Comparatively speaking, progression of the service developments in these test rails
had been slow through the 1959 inspection. However, an increase in the gage corner
service developments, particularly in the non-heat-treated rails, was noted at the time
of both the 1960 and 1961 inspections.
One June 12, 1961, after more than 12 years of service and after carrying approxi-
mately 325,000,000 gross tons of traffic, the test rails were transposed. The rails from
the high side of the curve were laid in the low side while the low side rails were turned
end for end and laid in the high side of the curve. Flow of the head metal toward the
field side in the low rails had resulted prior to transposition in a mild fin on the corner
of the head in the heat-treated rails and a much heavier fin in the case of the non-
heat-treated rails. However, in each case the flow was less toward the gage side. The
rails were therefore turned around so as to use the corner of the rail head showing the
least fin for the new gage side.
At the time of the May 1962 inspection the rails in their new locations had carried
approximately 25,000,000 gross tons for a total of about 350,000,000 gross tons. In each
case the rails appeared to be in excellent condition and taking the transposition in
good order.
A more extensive coverage of each test rail will be made next year after watjehing
them in their transposed positions.
Norfolk & Western Railway Service Test of 132 RE Heat-Treated
Rail at Kermit, W. Va.
A final report on the service test of the 132 RE heat-treated rail at Kermit, W. Va.,
was given in 1957 and may be found in the Proceedings, Vol. 58, pages 1030-1032.
Since 8 of the original 12 heat-treated rails on the high side and 10 of the original 11
Rail 531
in the low side of the curve are still in service, an inspection was made on May 11,
1960. The rails in this test, which originally consisted of 23 heat-treated and 24 non-
heat-treated rails laid in both the high and low sides of the curve, were installed May
3, 1949.
The original test of fully heat-treated versus non-heat-treated rails in the 6-deg
curve just west of Kermit was partially concluded as of May 23, 1960. As mentioned
in the report of the May 11, 1960, inspection the remaining 7 of the original 12 fully
heat-treated rails in the high side of the curve were removed on May 23, 1960, after
more than 11 years of service, having carried 449,600,000 gross tons of traffic. They
were replaced with new, regular, non-heat-treated rails, thereby, in effect, establishing
a new comparative cycle between heat-treated and non-heat-treated rails in this service;
the third set of comparative non-heat-treated rails were installed during the life of the
original heat-treated high-side rails.
Ten of the original 11 heat-treated rails remained in the low side of this curve.
One rail was removed from service in October 1953 because of a bad engine-wheel
burn, and two other rails were badly marked by wheel burns but remained in service.
By May 1, 1962, these low-side heat-treated rails had carried 495,100,000 gross tons of
traffic. Their appearance is better than the adjacent fifth set of non-heat-treated com-
parative rails.
Because this curve is included in a rail laying program, it was decided that, for all
practical purposes, the test could be concluded, and it is expected that the low-side
heat-treated test rails will give way to new fully heat-treated rail in the near future.
Approximately 500,000,000 gross tons of traffic will have passed over these low-side
heat-treated rails by the time they are removed from service, just a little over 13 years
after installation. This reflects a service life ratio approaching 6 to 1 in favor of the
fully heat-treated rails over non-heat-treated rails in this location.
Pennsylvania Railroad Service Test of 140 RE High-Silicon Rail
This test installation of high-silicon 140 RE rail is located in the Pennsylvania
Railroad Altoona District No. 4 track, east of Mifflin, Pa., between M.P. 152 and M.P.
153 + 2530. The test rails are installed in the 5-deg Mifflin Reverse Curve in the 3-deg
15-min Stone House Curve and in the 2-deg Casners Curve in alternating groups of
three high-silicon and three standard high-carbon rails on both the high and low sides
of the curves. This installation has been previously reported in the AREA Proceedings,
Vol. 63, page 539.
During the June 1962 inspection it was noted that at 201,000,000 gross tons of
traffic there was no difference in gage corner developments comparing the high -silicon
and the high-carbon rail steels in the 5-deg Mifflin Reverse Curve and in the 3-deg
15-min Stone House Curve. Considerably more curve wear was observed in equal
amounts on both types of rail. The 2-deg Casners curve had gage corner developments
of interest in that no shelling could be observed on the high-silicon rails whereas one
high-carbon rail had one shell observed last year, one high-carbon rail had two small
shells, two high-carbon rails had one small shell each and another high -carbon rail
had three small shells. It is of interest that at the above tonnage a distinct difference
between the high-silicon and high -carbon rails could be observed in that the high-silicon
rails had no shelling and the high-carbon rails had ;i total of five rail- with shells. No
lubrication could be observed on any of the above curves
532 Kail
Pennsylvania Railroad Service Test of 155 PS High-Silicon Rails
The 155 PS high-silicon rails were produced at Steelton in September 1953 and
installed by the PRR. This installation is extensively described in the Proceedings, Vol.
53, page 1029.
The rails were laid October 5-8, 1953, in the No. 1 eastbound track in the 2
37-min Bixler Curve, M.P. 164, east of Lewiston, Pa. Alternate groups of 5 high-
silicon rails and 5 rails of standard analysis (blue ends) were installed in the high and
low sides of the curve.
The previous 152 PS rails in this curve had shown light to medium flaking with
some shelly spots in the high side rails after 12 years of service.
At the time of the May 1958 inspection light to medium flaking was common to
both the high-silicon and the standard rails in the portion of the curve at full elevation.
The test rails throughout the curve were transposed in conjunction with the regular
rail program in January 1959. The high-side rails were moved to the low side and vice
versa. A total of 184,770,000 gross tons of traffic had been carried by the test rails to
January 1, 1959.
During the June 1962 inspection, after 88,000,000 gross tons of traffic since the
transposition on the curve, all of the rails showed light to medium flaking continuously
throughout their lengths. There were a few spots of heavy flaking but no noticeable
difference could be seen between the high-silicon rails and the standard analysis (blue
end) rails. Some flange wear was noted on the high rail but it did not appear as exten-
sive as that noted before the rails were transposed. The track gage was found to be
Y% to Yd, in wide. There was no noticeable lubrication on the high rail in this curve.
Norfolk & Western Service Test of 132 RE Heat-Treated Rail
at Maher and Looney's Curve
These installations are on a 6-deg curve near Maher, W. Va., at M.P. 481 + 210 ft
and on the 4-deg, 7-deg, 12-deg Looney's Curve at M.P. 455+ 582 ft, and are described
extensively in the AREA Proceedings, Vol. 57, pages 834-835.
Sixty-six heat-treated rails were installed in both the high and low sides of the
6-deg curve at Maher on August 2 and 9, 1954. On September 21, 1959, after the rails
were in service over five years and had carried 168,900,000 gross tons of traffic, they
were transposed, high rails to the low side and low rails to the high side of the curve.
As reported previously 3 of the 66 original high-side rails were removed from
service prior to the transposition because of the development of detailed fractures frcm
shelling. Thus only 63 heat-treated test rails were relocated to the low side of the curve.
Two low-side rails were not reinstalled in the high side during the transposition. They
were used elsewhere. By the time of the May 23, 1962, inspection the rails in their
transposed positions had carried an additional 86,100,000 gross tons of traffic, making
a total of 255,000,000 gross tons.
The field-side corner of the head of the former low rails had developed a mild fin
of plastically deformed metal which, of course, has been considerably worked on since
the transposition. This fin has for the most part been ground away by the wheels and
the gage corner is assuming a contour normal in high-side rails.
At the time of the 1960 inspection 34 of the 64 rails in the high side were clear
of gage corner service developments. Light flaking in 20 and medium flaking in 10 was
noted in the other 30 high-side rails. By the time of the 1961 inspection, curve wear
had changed these conditions so that 46 rails appeared free of gage corner service
Rail 533
developments, and light flaking was noted in 17 rails and medium Baking in one. By
the time of this 1962 inspection further "cleaning up" of the gage corner of the high-
side rails had occurred so that only a few rails were noted to contain flaking areas.
There was no evidence of shelling in any form.
Previously there had been little protection from wear for the rails in this curve,
as the curve oilers had been ineffective. However, the oilers appeared to be operating
properly at the time of this inspection.
It now appears that the transposition will considerably extend the life of these fully
heat-treated rails which, prior to the transposition, had given better than two times
the life of previous regular rails in this curve.
Fifty-five fully heat-treated rails were laid in the high side and 54 in the low side
of the compound Looney's curve on August 2 and 9, 1954. The report of the May 11,
1961, inspection reflected progression of the service developments, particularly in the
high side of the curve.
In September 1961 the test rails in the high side of the curve were replaced with
new fully heat-treated rails. Thus, after carrying approximately 215,000,0000 gross tons
of traffic in 85 months, the service life of these heat-treated test rails came to an end
in this location where previously installed non-heat-treated rails lasted only 15 to 18
months (a high-side service-life ratio approaching 5 to 1).
I'p to the time of the 1961 inspection, about half of the heat-treated rails in the
low side of the curve had resisted the heavy crushing common in such locations, while
others showed deformation. There appeared to be little change in these low rails to the
time of the May 24, 1962, inspection. Approximately 233,600,000 gross tons of traffic
have passed over these rails in the 93 months since installation. Previously installed non-
heat-treated rails lasted about 6 to 9 months in this curve (a low-side service-life ratio
of over 10 to 1 to date).
Great Northern Railway Service Test of 115 RE Columbium-Treated Rail
The test of the 115 RE columbium-treated rail on the Great Northern Railway
Curve 22 is extensively described in AREA Proceedings, Vol. 63, pages 533-535. This
4-deg curve had a previous history of shelling with standard rail. Eight of the colum-
bium-treated rails were installed on the high side and seven on the low side. At the
September inspection only 15,000,000 gross tons of traffic had passed over this curve
and no service developments were observed.
Great Northern Railway Service Test of 115 RE Heat-Treated Rails
This installation of 115 RE fully heat-treated rail on the Great Northern Railway
Curve 20 is extensively described in the AREA Proceedings, Vol. 57, pages 837-850 and
Vol. 63, pages 540-543. On May 17, 1961, after 384,000,000 gross tons of traffic, tin-
heat-treated rail on curve 20 was transposed. The low rail had a very light head flow
to the field side and the high rail had gage corner wear. During the September 1962
inspection it was observed that in the transposed position a good-as-new condition of
both the high and low rail bad been established. In this condition they should carry
at least the same gross tons of traffic as in the original position.
Duluth, Missabe & Iron Range Railway Service Test of Chrome-
Vanadium Alloy Rail
This test of 115 RE chrome-vanadium alloy rail on the Duluth, Missabe & Iron
Range Railway has been described extensively in AREA Proceedings, Vol 57, page 833,
534 Rail
and Vol. 63, pages 535-536. The inspection on October 1962 showed that no substantial
change in the rail conditions had taken place at either the Proctor Hill or the Two
Harbor installations after 160,000,000 gross tons of traffic.
Appendix 8-b
Shelly Rail Studies at the University of Illinois
By R. E. CRAMER
Research Associate Professor, University of Illinois
Organization and Acknowledgment
The shelly rail investigation at this laboratory is financed by the Research Depart-
ment of The Association of American Railroads. Jerry Crum, student test assistant, has
worked on a part-time basis, and Marion Moore, mechanic, has repaired and operated
the rolling-load machines.
Rolling-Load Tests to Produce Shelling in S-64-KG
(132-Lb) Abrasion-Resistant German Krupp Rails
When the writer attended the world metallurgical congress in Dusseldorf, Germany,
in 1955 a very interesting paper on railroad rails was given by Dr. Walter Janiche,
director of research of a subsidiary of the Krupp Steel Co. in Rheinhausen, Germany.
This paper was reported in detail to the members of the rail committee at that time.
In November 1957, Dr. Janiche attended the world metallurgical congress held in Chi-
cago at which time he visited with the writer, Mr. Kannowski and Mr. Magee at the
AAR Central Research Laboratory. He has read the AREA reports on shelly rail re-
search for many years and said he would be interested in having rolling-load tests made
of their intermediate manganese abrasion-resistant rails, and offered to furnish sufficient
specimens for such tests.
We recommended that he furnish their S-64-kg section which is quite similar to
AREA 132-lb section. It was not until late November 1961 that the test rails arrived.
Mechanical tests are listed in Table 1 on two of these specimens, Nos. 1215 and 1216.
Rolling-load tests are completed on two specimens from rail 1215 giving 1,787,700 and
1,843,200 cycles for failure. These are too few test results to draw any conclusions, and
more rolling-load tests will be made when cradle rolling machines are available.
So far the rolling-load tests of these specimens show results that are not much better
than for our last few standard steel rails, two of which are listed in Table 1, Nos. 1222
and 1228. The writer would point out that the carbon content of the abrasion-resistant
rails is only 0.57 percent, and all our previous tests have indicated that if there is excess
ferrite around the pearlite grains, as could be the case with this steel, we would expect
early failures in our rolling-load tests to produce shelling failures. The cross sections
of these two specimens showing the shelling cracks produced are at the top of Fig. 1.
Metallographic examination of one specimen from rail 1215 shows excessively large
non-metallic inclusions in that one specimen, but the grain structure was much finer
than in standard American rail steel. We appreciate the cooperation of Dr. Janiche and
his company, and if he should ever make a heat of rails of intermediate manganese
with higher carbon content we would certainly like to make some rolling-load tests
of that composition.
Rail
535
a K o -
3 ?r~
^Z o
o 6?
2 MS 3
!> g O Q-
<
_ c
t 2
to «•
hi c*
* 3 ft
c S '~
o o
o o
in o
f» cm
cs —
r^" CO
I X
E_
< t/5
5 2
2 til
- O E
i x
s
oa o
536
Rail
. T3
o o
o o
O O
O O
o o
o
oo
•2 °- S
o o
o o
o o
O O
o o
o
—1 .«•
CN O
O co
1> 3 O nj
O "H
CN CN
oo r~-
V o
o ■*
CO
-"iff
— -3 o jj
o ^r
GO CO
CO **
— « r^
O
o -
U U. !?> S
O CN
ON v©
r» (n
^T in
ao CN
CO 00
IT) «^
o
asg.
o
o
o
o
O
o
o
o
O
o
8
O
O
8
in
o
o
o
o
IT)
i-j
t>
aT
<s
K
w
•o
<Q
00
OO
•o
•a
m
V >, 0)
3»o
CN
vO
o>
""'
o
CN
Ov
o
« ^ i
o
TT
■*
>
>> _
°- ■S
Boa
3 z o
rt
CO
00
_
^O
r^-
h*
o
T
o
o
o
6 z
-*
"-1
CO
CO
"*
M
"■
fc,«
o
•o JJ
OS <
-
Ov
-
o
■*
-
-
o
t>
r^
CO*
■*
2
o*
h»
°0 ^o
en
CO
vO
o
o
r>
o
o
3.5 .s
00
00
2
2
r^
r-^'
oo'
00
v £
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
8
~ bo
O
o
o
o
o
o
o
M c _
r^
r~-
CO
r^
o
CO
O
c <u m
,<u b a
H co
o
V
co"
o
r^"
CN
■*
co"
CO
CO
*o
*x>
CO
~
rt
"
-
"
5 , S
2 bofc| a
•a So-
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
8
o
o
8
g
r^
o
r^
co
> b e§ M
"*
CO
o
_r
*
^:
in
CO
CO CN
r~
r^
CN
00
r^
r-
r^
<U .5 K
o
^O
o
o
o
a-
o
O
3 ^ .3
o
•o
CO
r^
o
r^
■»
ao
< co X
CN
CO
CO
CO
CN
(N
CO
s
05
o
O o
m
w u
K
u u
a c
•a
a>
c
i)
■p
h
u
c
u
■a
CO
tu
CO
— °8
2<
c
01
00
>.
X
o
§Z
XI •
13"
Jz
^ ■
co O
u '3
•a
e
c
c
■a 2
co "t!
jj
xi to
I-
. «
-a os
CO
XI 2
X-
• 3
c ^
— OJ
Xl' 9J
d -a
° "S
u «
. x:
XI f»
p
oa o
•a
a 2
■6 .
c55 ^
. O
xj u
. o
■a **
in £•
3 °
c u
O V
xi u
u 5
xi u.
- e
— c
o
a- S.
O Q,
^O CB
" "3
IT) •-
o J)
•^ ^ °-
~ n
Zi a
o u
CO ™ .
CO
_i x
-i OS
-H 11.
- u
_ OS
_ OS
a [I.
— OS CO
5 to
*o
OO
CO
2
<-»
o
2
r~-
in
o
~" :
T
r-J
c
< _
"3 §
en
00
r~
CN
OO
S
r--
00
LA
o
CO
6
2u
u
lO
r^
S
•J)
r-
•^,
1-7
8.d
to Z
< CQ
< cq
< do
< m
< CQ
< oa
< CQ
< 00
V0
< CO
CO
-<r
lO
■o
s
O
CN
CN
(N
s
CN
CN
3
CN
CN
CN
co
Rail
537
Fig. 1 — Shelly failures produced in rolling-load tests.
Specimen
S umber Size and Kind of Rail
1215A S 64 Kg (132-Lb) Abrasion
1215B Resistant German Rail
1219A 136-Lb Basic-Oxygen,
1219B Colorado Mill
1220A 119-Lb Basic-Oxyucn.
1220B Colorado Mill
A verage
Brinell
Hardness
Cycles of
50,000-Lb
Wheel Load
286 ..
1,787,700
1,843,200
. 266 . .
1,403,000
1,575,700
. 257 ..
918,800
1.107,200
Rolling-Load Tests to Produce Shelling in
Basic-Oxygen Steel Rails from the Colorado Mill
In our last report printed in AREA Proceedings Vol. 63, 1962, pages 546-8, we
described six rolling-load tests of basic-oxygcn-steel 112-lb rails produced and supplied
by the Algoma Mill. The data from the* tests, rails Nos. 1206-08, arc repeated by
request in Table 1, to compare them with the results of six new rolling-load tests made
538
Rail
Fig. 2 — Shelly failures produced in rolling-load tests.
Average Cycles of
Brinell 50,000-Lb
Hardness Wheel Load
5,090,200
269
2,241,100
1,982,100
266
1,632,400
Specimen
Number Size and Kind of Rail
1221A 136-Lb Basic-Oxygen,
122 IB High-Si, Colorado Mill
1222A 115-Lb Std. Carbon Rail
1222B Steelton for LIRR
on three basic-oxygen-steel 136-lb and 119-lb rails, Nos. 1219, 1220 and 1226, funished
by the Colorado Fuel and Iron Corp. The Algoma rails averaged 3,106,600 cycles and
the three Colorado rails averaged, 1,389,300, 1,013,000 and 2,542,000 cycles. The etched
cross sections of rails 1219 and 1220 are all shown in Fig. 1, and rail 1226 in Fig. 3.
It will be noted that there is some segregation shown in both specimens of rail 1220
which may account for the two low rolling-load tests of this rail. This test emphasizes
what the writer has contended for many years, namely, that segregation of nonmetallic
impurities which are rolled out into small inclusions in the heads of rails play a very
important role in the development of internal-type shelling.
Rolling-Load Tests to Produce Shelling
In Basic-Oxygen High-Silicon Steel Rails
The Colorado Mill also furnished one 136-lb basic-oxygen rail, No. 1221 in Table 1
and Fig. 2, of high-silicon, 0.62 percent, carbon 0.69 percent, composition. This rail has
269 Brinell hardness with good tensile properties and a relatively high endurance limit
of 68,500 psi. The two rolling-load tests ran 5,090,200 and 2,241,100 cycles.
From all the tests the writer has made and others he has seen, and bend tests of
welded basic-oxygen steel rails which will be reported on by Mr. Kannowski, the writer
Rail
539
1226A
0
1227A
1229A
I230A
Fig. 3 — Shelling failures produced in rolling-load tests.
Average Cycles of
Specimen BrineU 50,000-Lb
S umber Size and Kind of Rail Hardness Wheel Load
1225A 136-Lb Flame-Hardened by AT&SF 350 4,738,200
1226A 133-Lb Basic-Oxygen, Colorado Mill 274 2,814,000
1227A 115-Lb Std. Carbon, Colorado Mill 269 2,300,000
1229A 100-Lb Continuous-Cast French Rail 248 1,163,200
1 230A 136-Lb Flame-Hardened for S.P. Co 3S0 1 .561 ,400
floes not hesitate to recommend the use of basic-oxygen steel rails for all types ol rail
road service.
Rolling-Load Tests to Produce Shelling of Two
115-Lb Standard Carbon-Steel Rails
The AREA Rail committee requested that rolling-load tests be made on time 115 II'
rails of recent rollings from three different milk to compare with recent tests ol basic-
ozygen steel rails. Two tests have been completed on rails 1222 and 1227 (see Table 1
540 Rail
and Figs. 2 and 3) supplied by the Long Island Railroad and the Great Northern Rail-
road. The two specimens from rail 1222 ran 1,982,100 and 1,632,400 cycles. The second
rail No. 1227 ran 2,300,200 and 2,840,000 cycles. One rail No. 1228 remains to be tested.
Two More Induction-Hardened Rails Supplied from Japan
In our report printed in AREA Proceedings Vol. 61, pages 874-7, rolling-load tests
are reported to produce shelling in 50-kg (100-lb) rails induction-hardened by a process
described in that report, which was developed in Japan by the Japanese National Rail-
ways. Those rolling-load tests ran only 512,400 and 718,300 cycles to develop shelling
failures. Those small rails contained only 0.65 percent carbon, and the writer recom-
mended that better results would be obtained on larger rails with higher carbon con-
tent. Recently, the same company, The Yawata Iron and Steel Co., Ltd., of New York,
submitted two more specimens of 119-lb section, with 0.72 percent carbon content.
They were induction-hardened throughout the rail head the same as the previous speci-
mens. Brinell tests and mechanical tests on both specimens are shown in Table 1, speci-
mens Nos. 1223 and 1224. Rockwell hardness tests are shown in Fig. 4, specimens 1223
and 1224. Whenever a cradle rolling-load machine is available, rolling-load tests will be
made on these new test specimens.
Tests of Flame-Hardened Rails
In last year's AREA Proceedings, Vol. 63, page 548, rolling-load tests are described
of rails flame-hardened by the Union Pacific Railroad. Six tests averaged about 5 mil-
lion cycles to produce failures in the rolling-load machines. This year, one flame-
hardened rail was supplied by the Santa Fe Railway No. 1225 in Table 1, and Figs. 3
and 4. The first rolling-load test on this rail failed at 4,738,000 cycles and the second
test at 5,247,000 cycles. These results are very encouraging for the Santa Fe method of
flame hardening. A description of their hardening method and further tests of their
flame-hardened rails will be presented by Kurt Kannowski.
Recently the Southern Pacific Company furnished two flame hardened rails, one
of standard carbon rail steel and the second of high-silicon rail steel. These rails were
flame-hardened by a commercial firm. Etched cross sections of them, with Rockwell C
hardness readings, are shown as specimens 1230 and 1231 in Fig. 4. The first specimen
of the standard carbon rail failed at 1,561,400 cycles, as shown in Table 1. Other rolling-
load tests on these specimens are in progress.
Rolling-Load Tests of 100-Lb Continuous-Cast Rails from France
Mr. Kannowski furnished a rail, No. 1229 in Table 1, which is about 100-lb section
with 248 Brinell hardness. It was made from a continuous-cast ingot produced in France
and sent to Germany to be rolled into rails. The first specimen from this rail failed at
1,163,200 cycles. Other rolling-load tests will be made on this rail when rolling machines
are available.
Summary
1. Rolling-load tests are reported of German abrasion-resistant rail.
2. Rolling-load tests are reported of ten specimens of basic-oxygen standard carbon-
steel rails.
3. Rolling-load tests are reported of two specimens of basic-oxygen high-silicon
steel rails.
4. The writer recommends the use, when desired, of basic-oxygen steel, for railroad
rails for all types of railway service, including continuous welded track.
Rail
541
,,.,.i4jtit <l, k :
M. « .1*
3« !]MII|I>I>1 1435
1224
1230
1231
Specimen
Number
1223
1224
1225
1230
1231
Fig. 4 — Rockwell C hardness of flame-hardened rails.
Size and Kind of Rail
119-Lb Induction-Hardened Rail from Japan
119-Lb Induction-Hardened Rail from Japan
136-Lb Std. Carbon Rail, Flame-Hardened by AT&SF
136-Lb Std. Carbon Rail, Flame-Hardened for SP Co.
136-Lb High-Si Rail, Flame-Hardened for SP Co
5. Rolling-load tests are reported of two 115-lb standard carbon steel rails.
6. Mechanical tests are reported of two Japanese induction-hardened 119-lb rails.
7. Rolling-load tests are reported on rails flame-hardened by the Santa Fe Railway
and others flame-hardened by a commercial firm for the Southern Pacific Company.
8. One rolling-load test was made of B rail rolled in Germany from a continuous
cast ingot produced in France.
542 Rail
Report on Assignment 9
Standardization of Rail Sections
T. B. Hutcheson (chairman, subcommittee), S. H. Barlow, B. Bristow, J. A. Bunjer,
T. F. Burns, M. W. Clark, C. J. Code, C. A. Colpitts, L. S. Crane, W. J. Cruse,
O. E. Fort, C. E. R. Haight, C. J. Henry, C. C. Herrick, B. R. Meyers, E. Osland,
G. L. P. Plow, H. F. Smith, H. M. Williamson.
Following approval by the Association of the Rail committee's recommendation
that Member Roads be requested to restrict purchases of new rail to the eight sections
listed on page 4-M-2 of the Manual of the Engineering Division, AAR, Subcommittee 9
of the Rail committee informed the Purchases and Stores Division of the Association
of American Railroads of the action of the Association, and requested that the Pur-
chases and Stores Division bring this matter to the attention of the purchasing depart-
ments of Member Roads.
In November 1962 the Purchases and Stores Division advised the subcommittee
chairman that the Rail committee's action had been brought to the attention of each of
its regional committees at regional meetings held during 1962, and further that the Pur-
chases and Stores Division was fully in support of the recommendation that purchases
be restricted as indicated. The Purchases and Stores Division is further of the opinion
that purchasing departments of Member Roads will require the full cooperation of chief
engineering officers in furthering this program, and requests such cooperation.
Report on Assignment 10
Service Performance and Economics of 78-Ft Rail;
Specifications for 78-Ft Rail
Collaborating with Committee 5
A. P. Talbot (chairman, subcommittee), W. D. Almy, S. H. Barlow, H. B. Berkshire,
R. M. Brown, J. A. Bunjer, R. E. Catlett, J. T. Collinson, W. J. Cruse, O. E. Fort,
J. H. Greason, V. E. Hall, J. C. Jacobs, H. W. Jenkins, F. R. Micheal, H. R.
Moore, C. E. Morgan, R. H. Patterson, R. C. Postels, R. B. Rhode, J. G. Roney,
D. J. White.
This is a progress report, submitted as information.
Cost data are being kept on the three test stretches of 78-ft rail on the Pennsylvania
Railroad. As noted in last year's report the bars were renewed in 1961 on the 140-lb
rail at Coshocton, Ohio, after approximately 303 million gross tons of traffic.
In 1962 the bars were renewed on the 155-lb rail at Ryde, Pa., after approximately
412 million gross tons of traffic.
Inspection of the joint bars on the 133-lb rail near Hamlet, Ind., indicates that bar
renewals will not be required for several more years.
Field measurements of joint gap openings and rail end batter on the test stretches
are scheduled in 1963. Cost figures will be compiled to the end of 1962, which will be
after a little more than 12 years of service, and will be included in the next report.
Report of Committee 1 — Roadway and Ballast
F. N. Beighley.
Chairman
L. J. Deno,
Vice Chairman
R. H. Hi Km ii. Secretary
G. B. Harris
W. P. ESHBAl'GH
G. W. Becker
G. D. Mayor
K. W. Schoeneberg
G. F. Nigh
K. W. Bradley
H. G. Johnson
R. D. Baldwin
T. W. Creighton
C. E. Webb
W. T. Adams
R. A. Anderson
C. VV. Bailey
A. S. Barr
K. \Y. Bauman
C. R. Bergman
L. H. Bond
J. G. Campbell
H. \V. Clarke
R. E. Clemons
D. H. Cook
I. P. Cook
M. \V. Cox
B. H. Crosland
A. P. Crosley (E)
H. F. Davenport
G. VV. Deblin
J. W. DeMoyer
W. M. Dowdy
J. B. Farris
J. S. Felton
J. K. Fisher
J. E. Gray
M. B. Hansen
F. VV. Hillman (E)
H. O. Ireland
R. J. Kemper
H. \V. Lec.ro (E)
A. E. Lewis
R. R. Manion
A. Mansun
P. G. Martin
W. C. MCCORMK K
E. W. McCuskey
H. E. Moore
Paul McKay (E)
W. G. Murphy
F. R. Naylor
J. E. Newby
S. J. Owens
F. S. Patton
G. W. Payne (E)
F. L. Peckover
VV. F. Petteys
S. R. Pettit
J. W. POULTER
L. G. Reichert
X. B. Roberts
E. L. Robinson
R. W. Scott
G. E. Shaw
W. M. Snow
S. \V. Sweet
VV. 0. Trieschman
A. J. Wegmann
R. D. White
E. L. Woods
Committee
(E) Member Emeritus.
Those whose names are set in bold-face type constitute the Engineering Division, AAR Com-
mittee 1.
To the American Railway Engineering Association:
Your committee reports on the following subjects:
1. Revision of Manual.
Progress report, including recommendations submitted for adoption page 545
2. Physical properties of earth materials:
(a) Roadbed. Load capacity. Relation to ballast. Allowable pressures.
(b) Structural foundation beds, collaborating with Committees 6 and 8.
Progress report covering both (a) and (b), submitted as information .... page S46
3. Natural waterways; Prevention of erosion.
Research is being done to revise present Manual material, updating it t c .
reflect more recent data in determining size of waterway openings and
prevention of erosion.
4. Culverts.
(a) Erosion control for outlet structure^.
Research on this assignment was Started in 1958 at Colorado State
543
544 Roadway and Ballast
University as a three-year project. Budget curtailment in succeeding
years forced cancellation of the project without having obtained
enough data for a progress report. It is felt the project is of enough
importance so that appropriations will be forthcoming to resume the
work at the University,
(b) Repair of short pipe sections that have pulled apart.
Further study indicates that a final report will be submitted in 1964.
5. Specifications for pipelines for conveying flammable and non-flammable
substances, collaborating with Committees IS and 20.
Your committee is also collaborating with ASCE and AWWA (American
Water Works Association) on specifications for these Associations.
6. Roadway: Formation and protection:
Report on grading problems encountered during relocation of Santa Fe
Railway's main line between Williams and Crookton, Ariz., presented as
information in Bulletin 573, September-October 1962.
(a) Roadbed stabilization.
Data are being assembled for a progress report to be presented as
information at a later date.
(b) Slope protection.
Manual material being reviewed to up date it in line with present-day
material and methods.
(c) Performance of filter material in subdrains.
Third progress report on performance of filter materials, submitted
as information page 554
(d) Gypsum and lime treatment for subgrade improvement.
No additional data have been developed on this subject since the last
report published in Bulletin 570, Part 1.
7. Tunnels.
(a) Ventilation, changes necessary for operation of diesel power.
Your committee has previously submitted a progress report on this
assignment, and is continuing its study to develop recommendations
for Manual material.
(b) Clearance; methods used to increase, collaboration with Committee 28.
Pertinent information is being assembled for preparation of progress
report to be submitted for Manual material.
(c) Methods of open cutting.
Studies are being made of past experiences to assemble pertinent data.
8. Fences.
(a) Metal fence to check drifting snow and sand.
This being a new assignment, not enough data have yet been assembled
to make a report.
9. Roadway Signs:
(a) Reflectorized and luminous roadway signs, collaborating with Com-
mittees 5 and 9, and with the Communication and Signal Section,
AAR.
Roadway and Ballast 545
Research has been discontinued temporarily due to curtailment of
funds; however, the committee feels the subject should not be
dropped as new products are constantly being developed, some of
which might be adaptable for this purpose.
(I)) Develop standard close clearance warning sign, collaborating with
Committee 28.
This work has been completed and the assignment will be replaced
with a new one for the coming Association year.
10. Ballast:
(a) Tests.
Advance report on conductivity tests of open-hearth slag ballast was
presented as information in Bulletin 573, September-October 1962.
(c) Special types of ballast.
Progress report, submitted as information page 565
11. Chemical control of vegetation, collaborating with Communication and
Signal Section, AAR.
Progress report, submitted as information page 570
The Committee on Roadway and Ballast,
F. N. Beighley, Chairman.
AREA Bulletin 577, February 1963.
Report on Assignment 1
Revision of Manual
G. B. Harris (chairman, subcommittee), R. D. Baldwin, G. W. Becker, K. W. Bradlev,
T. W. Creighton, W. P. Eshbaugh, H. G. Johnson, G. D. Mayor, G. F. Nigh,
K. W. Schoeneberg, C. E. Webb.
Having completed its study of Chapter 1 of the Manual, your committee submits
for adoption the following additional recommendations:
Pages 1-1-8 to 1-1-15, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE FORMATION OF THE ROADWAY
Reapprove without change.
Pages 1-6-10 to 1-6-14, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR RIGHT-OF-WAY FENCES
Reapprove without change.
Pages 1-4-6 to 1-4-10, incl.
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CORRUGATED METAL CULVERTS
In making its study of Chapter 1 of the Manual, your committee discovered an
error in these specifications. On page 1-4-8, Art. 9 — Gage Determination^ and Tolei
546 Roadway and Ballast
ance, line 5, reference is made to "Section 11" of the specifications. Since there is no
longer any Section 11, this reference should be changed to read "Sec. B, Art. 2."
Your committee also submits the following definition with the recommendation
that it be added to the Glossary under the definition of "Slag."
— Open Hearth. — A slag formed simultaneously when producing and refining steel in
open hearth furnaces and consisting essentially of a fused mixture of oxides and
silicates. 1
Report on Assignment 2
Physical Properties of Earth Materials
(a) Roadbed. Load Capacity. Relation to Ballast. Allowable Pressures
(b) Structural Foundation Beds
W. P. Eshbaugh (chairman, subcommittee), H. F. Davenport, M. B. Hanson, H. W.
Legro, R. R. Manion, F. L. Peckover, J. W. Poulter, S. W. Sweet.
Under this assignment your committee presents as information a report on the
comparison of soil density and water content determinations with conventional and
nuclear equipment. It contains material which applies to both assignments (a) and (b).
The work reported is the result of a cooperative project between the Canadian
National Railways and the Association of American Railroads Research Department.
Comparison of Soil Density and Water Content
Determinations with Conventional and
Nuclear Equipment
Compaction control of earth fills and grades is based on density and water-content
measurements at the site of the work. For many years such measurements have been
made by standardized methods, using sand-cone or water-balloon equipment. The recent
introduction of nuclear apparatus has provided an alternative means which may be
particularly valuable on large-scale projects. To assist in appraising the relative useful-
ness to the railway construction engineer of both conventional and nuclear equipment,
this report presents the results of an investigation in which their performance and
economics are compared.
It should be mentioned that several similar investigations have been made by other
agencies since nuclear equipment was introduced on the market in the late 1950's. Some
of these studies were on a considerable scale and their results were subjected to a very
detailed analysis. An engineer making a serious study of inplace soil density and water
content test procedures should review some of the existing references on the subject
(1) (2) (3)*.
The field portion of the investigation was made in the vicinity of the new Toronto
Terminal Project of the Canadian National Railways near Concord, 10 miles north of
Toronto, Ont. This project involves the construction of a new hump yard and 34 miles
of new access line, and upgrading of 43 miles of existing line. Placement and compaction
of some 16,000,000 cu yd of fill are required.
The references indicated by the numbers in parenthesis are listed at the end of this report.
Roadway and Ballast 547
Conventional field tests were made bj -•oil technicians \V. E. Cowie and T. Loghi-
ade, under the supervision of VY. VY. Wong, project soil engineer, Canadian National
Railways. Comparative nuclear tests were made by G. L. Hinueber, engineering labora-
tory manager, and T. C. Madigan, engineering test assistant, of the Association of
American Railroads engineering research staff. Tests were made through the cooperation
of J. L. Cann, project director, and this report was prepared by F. L. Peckovcr,
engineer of soils and foundations. Canadian National Railways.
Equipment Used
The two conventional types of tesl mosl commonly used to find soil density and
water content to control fill compaction wen- used in this investigation.
The sand-cone method is a tentative ASTM standard (4). The procedure involves
digging a hole in the ground, finding its volume by filling it with calibrated sand and
weighing the soil removed from the hole. The volume-weight relationship of the original
soil in place is thus measured. Results are affected by many factors relating to equip-
ment, its operation, and the soil being tested. However, if the test is carefully done,
results are generally considered well within the range of accuracy needed for compaction-
control purposes.
The water-balloon method of test is also commonly used and a standard procedure
has been suggested (5). As with the sand-cone test, it involves digging a hole in the
ground. The volume is found by expanding a balloon into the hole by the pressure of
water from a calibrated cylinder. The unit weight of the original soil in place is found
as before. Test results are considered adequately accurate for control purposes.
In both the sand-cone and water-balloon tests, soil-water content is found by oven-
drying a representative sample of the soil removed from the hole. Apparatus for both
test methods is readily available for purchase or rent and each can be operated efficiently
by a team of two technicians.
The nuclear method has been developed in the past few years and more than one
type of equipment is now available. In AREA Proceedings, a description of the appara-
tus, its theory and operating procedure have been described (6) and a particular appli-
cation of the apparatus reviewed (7). The test method for the use of the surface mois-
ture gage or surface density gage invokes placing the instrument which contains the
radioactive source and detector <>n the leveled surface of the ground, depressing a handle
which removes the radioactive source from its shield and places it in position where
its rays may penetrate the soil, and measuring the radiation backscattered to the detector
per unit of time. The backscattcr count is electrically timed and recorded automatically
by a portable scaler which is used in ((injunction with the gages. Soil density and water
content are read directly from calibration curves. As with the conventional test methods.
two technicians are usually used to operate the apparatus efficiently.
Equipment used in this investigation for the three methods of tesl is listed at tin-
end of the report under "Test Equipment Used."
Procedure
The basic soil in the Toronto area i- a silly, sand} ida.ial till with -mall amount-
of gravel and clay sizes On the surface ol the till, posl glacial -and-, silts and clays
are occasionally found. The range of available -oil types i-. of course, not typical for
all geographical area-, but i- perhaps representative ol soils found in glaciated areas
of the United State- and Canada To gel a comparison ol tests, eighl particular loca
lion- were chosen for testing, Four sites were in various till -oil- and four in other -dl
548 Roadway an d Ballast
types used for fill. At each location between three and six complete tests were run
within a distance of a few feet.
Each test was planned to measure soil density and water content with all three
types of equipment under as identical conditions as possible. A complete test consisted
of the following steps:
(1) The test area was leveled to a depth of up to 6 in below ground surface
when considered necessary. All tests require an even, flat surface.
(2) Nuclear tests for density and water content were run on the prepared area.
No soil sampling was necessary.
(3) The plate for the water-balloon test was seated, the initial base reading
obtained, the hole dug and test run. A soil sample was retained for water-
content determination.
(4) The plate for the sand-cone test was seated, the hole deepened and the test
run. A soil sample was retained for water content.
(5) Water-content samples were dried over night and weighed.
(6) Calculations for the nuclear method were made at the time of test. Calcula-
tions for the other tests were made when the dry weight of the soil was
available.
The procedure of testing at a depth varying to as much as 6 in below the surface
of compacted grade is used to get below surface disturbance and irregularities caused
by compaction equipment during construction. Smoothing of the test area is important,
particularly for the nuclear test, and takes considerable time in soils containing stones.
Analysis of Results
Results of all tests are shown in Table 1, grouped according to soil type.
Inspection of the results shows that the range of soil density and water content
may vary considerably for each soil type in spite of the fact that tests were closely
grouped at the various sites. On this particular project the compacted soils were subject
to this variation in much the same degree as the natural soils, and ranges of 12 lb per
cu ft in density and 5 percent in water content were not unusual. From the test results,
it is apparent that construction control should always be based on the average of more
than one test whenever possible.
On account of these variations, test results are compared at each specific location
rather than for each soil type. In this comparison, results from conventional methods
of test are taken as a base or datum because of their general use, and results from the
nuclear method evaluated accordingly. It is recognized, of course, that the conventional
test methods involve some degree of error.
The results of this comparison are shown in Table 2. At each location, the results
for both density and water content determinations from the water-balloon and sand-
cone methods are compared (Cols. 1 and 4). If the results show reasonable agreement,
the average of each pair of values (Cols. 2 and 5) are compared with the results from
the nuclear method (Cols. 3 and 6). For purposes of this comparison, a "reasonable"
agreement of results is arbitrarily defined as being within 4 lb per cu ft. for soil density
and within 1 percent for soil water content. In Table 2, where water-balloon and sand-
cone test results are not in reasonable agreement as defined, the figures for that com-
plete test are marked with an asterisk and omitted from further consideration.
For purposes of this investigation it is assumed that the average of two conventional
test results in reasonable agreement is a true value. Of 34 complete tests, the results of
Roadway and Ballast
549
I 3 3
H H -
V 0>
( 3 o-
I -J t> sO vri 00 *
■ tc ^t ia to a'
■o -J a- -J cr- oo co
3dS
f~\ C"\ -4 en -J
00 CO O ~J ir O i
O 0^ 0> O O 0s 0
oo -J cr> r-
3!
\ w\-0 r^
O^Oir
33:
4 Jn-4-i
> t> vO -o r>
CO o o c- o
^•AO -* -4
rH H r-j rH rH
CO* 00 CO* O t> 00
t>- H O CO CM
rvnno n
rH rH »-4 rH rH
\HHHH
o o*> oo o w
«^" oo oo" o
o o
O sO*
34
-4N 40h
3 3-s
to oo i^ c\ cn. o r
ccVooVdc
lrfji
HH rH rH
C\ CN CV rH OJ
■ CO -4 rH I
vO O
O C^OiACVJ
O CO o o -i to
^5 c£ ^ 5s B
rH -^ O
>-i rH rH rH
vOO^eocio
t> oo *o r- o
i: ■-.
5
« o
>. >-
5 .
«rH
>, o ■
rH T3
31
Sis-
rH > >%"
U I. I.
> U
gft
:•> a
" >: h
L s
va
3 O (fl
"rl.
£l«
t. O «J
no n «
I
<
a
rH CM On O H (
HNnffln J'A-.O
CO On o f"\ -4 w>
' h tvrj rj n
550
R o a (1 w a y a n <l Hall a s t
TABLE 2
Analysis of Results of Soil Density and Water Content Teata
Columns
(1)
(2)
(3)
(M
(5)
(6)
Test
Soil
Wet
Density Values (p.
c.f.)
Water
Content Values
Biff.
Av' ge
Diff.
Diff.
At' (to
Diff.
No.
Type
(w- s)
£f*)
N - At' Re
(W- S)
£f3)
N - Av'ge
1
1
- li.9*
lULi.U*
+ 2.6*
-2.0*
9.8*
-2.3*
.2
Till
+ 3.6
lUi.6
♦ 2.1,
0.0
9.8
-l.U
o
♦ 9.1*
11,7.5*
+ 1.2*
+0.7
10.2
+U.5
10
♦ 7.5*
iue.7*
- 0.5*
♦ O.li
10.1
♦ 5.5
21
- o.),
139.3
+ 7.2
-0.1
9.U
-0.9
22
♦ 3.2
11,3.1
- 3.1
♦1.2*
10.1*
-1.3*
11
2
♦ 0.3
135.3
+ 6.5
+0.5
8.8
-1.2
12
Till
♦ 9.5*
123.8*
+17.7*
♦ 0.2
9.3
-0.9
17
- 3.0
121.7
+10.8
0.0
13.8
-1.9
31
3
- 5.5*
U3.8*
+ 8.7*
-o.a
9.7
-1.3
32
Till
♦ 2.8
150.0
♦ 9.5
♦1.9*
8.6*
-3.7*
33
-
-
-
-
-
-
8
♦ h.l*
11*7.8*
- 1.8*
-0.1
9.0
-1.2
13
h
- 3.9
120.2
+ 2.8
-0.5
16.1,
-1.2
111
Till
-ho. 3*
117.6*
+ 0.9*
0.0
16.7
-1.1
K
- 7.3*
99.2*
+ 3.8*
-li.O*
111. 3*
+1.9*
16
♦ 0.9
106.8
+ 2.7
-5.9*
15J,*
-1.8*
26
5
♦ 1.5
133.6
+ 6.9
-0.7
6.0
-1.3
27
Sand
+ 0.7
136. h
♦ 5.1
-0.3
7.0
-2.3
28
and
- 0.5
133.8
♦ 5.7
-0.3
6.6
-2.0
29
gravel
- 1.7
130.8
♦11.7
0.0
6.9
-3.6
30
- 2.0
11,3.0
♦ 1.0
+0.9
8.2
-2.9
3
6
+ 1.5
121.2
♦ li.3
-0.1
6.2
-1.1,
b
Sand
- 0.7
117.6
♦10.6
+ 0.2
6.3
-1.1,
5
♦ 1.5
130.2
+ 3.3
-0.8
5.3
-0.7
6
- 7.5*
122. 2»
+11.8*
+ 0.8
5.3
-l.U
7
+ 2.7
125.8
+ lu5
+0.3
5.0
-1.0
18
7
- 1.9
127.0
+ 8.5
+0.8
18.7
-3. a
19
Sand
- 0.7
131.2
+ 5.3
+0.2
18.7
-3.0
20
and
+ li.O
112.0
+ 3.0
-0.2
8.8
♦0.7
?3
silt
- 0.2
108.1
+16.3
-0.2
10.0
-5.0
2li
+ 0.9
133.0
+ 5.1,
+0.7
18.2
-3.8
25
♦ 8.7*
126. h*
+12.8*
-0.1,
18.7
-I..3
3h
8
-2.9
128.6
+ 5.h
♦3.3*
23.6*
+7.7*
35
Silt,
-17.1*
137.1,*
- o.5»
-2.3*
22.0*
-5.7*
36
-
-
-
-
-
-
57
-
_
_
_
_
_
38
-
-
-
-
-
-
Avera
pe Values:
12^.3 p.c.f.
+ 5.9 p.c.f
10.3?
-l.lt*
W m value from water replacement test.
S » value from sand replacement test.
N » value from nuclear tent.
* indicates result, not considered valid and not used in analysis.
R o a d w a y and Ballast
551
Breakdown of Tine Taken for Density and Water-Content Tests
Soil
Type
No. of
Testa
Recorded
Steps in Test
w
Total
Time
S
N
Preparing
for Test
W S
N
Reading
Apparatus
TV S N
Weighing and
Calculations
W S N
1
5
22i50 29:50
12:16
2:2h 3:21* 9:55
bi2l| 5:35 1:1*5
29:38
38:1*9
23:56
2
1
17:01* 22:38
9:25
3:58 3:17 7:25
1*:33 5:11* 0:al
25:1*5
31:09
17:31
t|
2
12:57 16:11!
7:17
3:28 3:57 7:1*0
1*:1C 5:1:1 1:00
20:35
25:53
15:51*
6
1
3:08 L:32
1:25
2:52 3:15 10:10
3:1*5 1*:30 1:20
9:1*5
12:17
13:25
7
1*
6:36 9:13
2:09
2:01 3:07 6:39
1*:1*9 5:09 1:15
13:26
17:29
9:1*1*
Weighted Average Time
21:25
27:37
17:10
Kotes: W = ".Vater-Palloon Tests, S = Sand-Cone Tests, K = J!uclear Tests.
Times are given in minutes and seconds of elapsed time-
For TYater-balloon and sand-cone tests, time "preparing for test"
includes that for excavating holes. For nuclear tests, time
taken for occasional "standard count" to check calibration
is not included.
68 percent of conventional density tests and 7<) percent of water-content tests are
retained for consideration by this procedure.
Applying the same criteria of reasonable agreement, it is found in Table 2 that
30 percent of the density values and 19 percent of the water-content values obtained
from nuclear tests are comparable with the average values from usable conventional tests.
Results show no trend that can be ascribed to soil type.
Results from the nuclear tests are generally higher in density and lower in water
content than the averages from the other two methods when in a reasonable agreement.
The average differences amount to 5.9 lb per cu ft and 1.4 percentage points, respect ivelj .
The standard calibration curves supplied with the nuclear apparatus were used for
all tests. Some thought has been given to the use of calibration curves prepared on the
basis of actual field comparisons with conventional tests to possibly produce better
agreement. The variations in density and water content between conventional tests and
nuclear tests are not always consistent, however, a- shown in this investigation. Unless
comparisons are planned and made with a great deal of care, this lack of consistency
may cancel any advantage of field calibration. It should be understood, also, that the
conventional tests which would be used in field calibration can involve errors
Time Required for Tests
The time taken to perforin about a third of the tests ol all types wa- recorded.
Table 3 shows the results according tn -nil types and operations required for the various
test method- Elapsed time- only were recorded.
Table s -how- that the average time taken for nuclear, water replacement and -and
replacement tests, respectively, i^ in the ratio of ; to '> to s it also -how- th.it the
time for an) of the three tests can Vary by a- much a- .' or 3 to 1 in various -"il-
As this difference was found to be due mainly to the lime taken in preparing for test,
and the essential difference in preparing for conventional tests a- compared with nuclear
is in excavating the hole required for the former, it follows thai the time saved by the
Hull. .'.77
552 Roadway and Ballast
use of nuclear as compared with conventional apparatus is almost entirely due to
eliminating the need for digging a hole in the ground. Total time required for all other
operations is much the same for all three types of test.
These comments are based on records of elapsed time only and are a valid com-
parison where density and water-content tests are taken for purposes of record and
for other than immediate use in the control of fill-compaction operations. In the latter
instance which is the most common, the nuclear test gains a considerable time advan-
tage, as all results are available on the spot. The results of conventional tests are not
available until soil samples are dried to find water content. The total time taken is,
therefore, at least 4 or 5 hr and usually over night. However, rapid methods of deter-
mining soil water content are being improved in accuracy (8) and this advantage ol
the nuclear method may be reduced.
Cost and Other Factors
As expected, a complex piece of equipment like the nuclear apparatus costs a great
deal more than conventional density and water-content test equipment. Present costs
for the three types of equipment are approximately as follows:
Sand-cone apparatus $ 100
Water-balloon apparatus $ 100
Nuclear apparatus $5,000
The nuclear apparatus is designed as a piece of field equipment. However, on ac-
count of its complexity it requires careful handling. Repairs are expensive and may
involve interruptions to the work. It should be mentioned that the nuclear equipment
used in this investigation required servicing during the test. As service was available in
Toronto, the delay amounted to one day.
Many other factors could be reviewed in making a more complete comparison ol
the various types of equipment. Test techniques, representative nature of results, size
of job and programming of tests, could all be discussed, some favoring one type of test
and some another. These factors are considered beyond the scope of this investigation
in view of other references available.
Discussion of Various Methods
Results of this investigation of interest to railway engineers concerned with earth
fill operations may be summarized as follows:
(1) Control measurements of soil density and water content can be made by
conventional tests or by relatively new nuclear equipment.
(2) Conventional test equipment is of low first cost and simple construction.
Nuclear test equipment is of relatively high first cost and requires more rare
in handling; special servicing is required in the event of breakdown.
(3) The nuclear method of test has the advantage of giving final test results on
the site. Conventional methods of tests, although requiring little extra elapsed
time to perform, require at least a few hours for final results due to the need
for drying soil samples. However, this disadvantage may be reduced by recent
test developments.
(4) It appears that the density and water-content results obtained with nuclear
and conventional equipment may possibly be brought into closer agreement
by the use of carefully developed field calibration curves. It should be noted
that these conclusions are based on a limited number of tests.
Roadway and Ballast 553
Recommendations
The investigation shows that the method of test for control purposes should be
chosen according to the needs of each individual earth fill project. Conventional tests
will continue to serve satisfactorily for routine fill operations, particularly those involv-
ing a variety of soil types. Potential advantages of the nuclear apparatus merit its
consideration on large projects.
Further investigation into relative agreement between conventional and nuclear
methods of determining soil density and water content may prove to be of value.
Another approach would be to run nuclear and conventional tests on carefully prepared
and controlled laboratory samples of known density and moisture content.
Those particularly interested in the subject of tests for the control of earth fills are
referred to existing literature.
Test Equipment Used
Sand-Cone Test: Sand density apparatus (6^-in cone), similar to Cat. No. CN-
992, Soiltest Inc., Chicago.
Water-Balloon Test: Yolumeasure soil density apparatus, similar to Cat. No. CN-
980, Soiltest Inc., Chicago.
Nuclear Test: Model P21 surface moisture gage, Model P22 surface density gage,
Model 280OA portable scaler, manufactured by Nuclear-Chicago Corporation, Des
Plaines, 111.
References
(1) "Symposium on Nuclear Methods for Measuring Soil Density and Moisture", Sp.
Tech. Publ. No. 293, ASTM, March, 1961.
(2) "A Study of In-Place Density Determinations for Soils", Tech. Memo. No. 3-415,
Waterways Experiment Station, U. S. Corps of Engineers, October, 1955.
(3) A. W. Johnson and J. R. Sallberg, "Factors That Influence Field Compaction of
Soils", Bui. 272, Highway Research Board, 1960.
(4) ASTM Designation D 1556-58T, Tentative Method of Test for Density of Soil in
Place by the Sand-Cone Method.
(5) "Suggested Method of Test for Density of Soil in Place by the Rubber-Balloon
Method", Procedures for Testing Soils, ASTM, April 1958.
(6) "Nuclear Moisture and Density Measurements", AREA Proc, Vol. 61: 652-658;
1960.
(7) "Use of Nuclear Soil Moisture and Density Equipment for Determination of Volume
Change from Cut to Fill", AREA Proc. Vol. 62: 697-685; 1961.
(X) J. R. Blystone, A. Pelyner and G. P. Steffens, "Moisture Content Determination by
the Calcium Carbide Gas Pressure Method", Public Roads, 31: 177-181; June 1901.
554 Roadway and Ballast
Report on Assignment 6
Roadway: Formation and Protection
(a) Roadbed Stabilization
(b) Slope Protection
(c) Performance of Filter Materials in Subdrains
(d) Gypsum and Lime Treatment for Subgrade Improvement
G. F. Nigh (chairman, subcommittee), E. W. Bauman, I. P. Cook, B. H. Crosland.
J. B. Farris, J. E. Grav, H. O. Ireland, W. G. Murphy, J. E. Newbv, S. R. Pettit.
J. W. Poulter.
Under Assignment 6 (c), your committee submits as information the following
report on performance of filter materials.
Third Progress Report on Performance of Filter
Materials
By JOHN C. GUILLOU
Research Associate Professor of Hydraulic Engineering, University of Illinois
INTRODUCTION
This is the third and final progress report dealing with the use of concrete sand
around subsurface drainage pipes. The first report considered the hydraulic capacity
of perforated corrugated metal pipe, both with and without bituminous coating; the
general operating characteristics of concrete sand filters; and the results of a question-
naire survey of subdrainage practices and problems (1).* The second report presented
the concept of "optimum compaction" of the filter material; indicated a calculation
procedure for determination of maximum rate of inflow to a given subdrain, based on
precipitation and subsurface conditions; and developed a hypothesis of filter readjust
ment and particle migration (2).
The purpose of this report is to present further substantiation of the filter read-
justment hypothesis, to compare the action of corrugated metal subdrains with perfora-
tions located at the top of the pipe with drains having the holes at the bottom of the
pipe, and to indicate the hydraulic capacity of various types of subsurface drain pipes.
The cooperative research program "Performance of Filter Materials" was activated
July 1, 1958, with the purpose of evaluating the requirements of filter materials around
subsurface perforated or open-joint drains. The ultimate aim of the project was the
development of definite design information for field conditions. Because of monetar)
considerations the scope of the project has been limited to evaluation of general operat-
ing characteristics of concrete sand filters with different pipe materials. The project is
sponsored by the Association of American Railroads and is being conducted in conjunc-
tion with Committee 1 — Roadway and Ballast, of the AREA.
Information gained from earlier phases of the program indicate that stability of the
filter adjacent to the pipe opening is not created by removal of fine materials and
bridging of the remaining larger grain sizes. The mechanics of stable filter development
* Numbers in parentheses indicate reference listed in the bibliography at the end of this report.
Road w a y and Ballast
555
has been studied in some detail. Freeze tests have been performed using the original
test tank, and special apparatus has been constructed to demonstrate that particle
readjustment does take place within the filter.
Principal conclusions obtained from the present test program include:
1. Initial compaction is a major factor in the development of filter stability.
Over-compaction of a concrete sand filter may lead to failure of the bed, and
will materially reduce the infiltration capacity of the system.
2. Stability of the filter at the pipe opening is not established by washing out
the fines and bridging of the remaining large particles. Stability is established
by the binding of pore spaces near the opening with tine particles which were
moving toward the opening.
3. Corrugated metal subdrains should be installed with perforations at the bottom
of the pipe for maximum security from filter failure.
4. Concrete sand may suitably be used as filter material with either clay drain
tile or plastic pipe if the conduit is properly installed.
TESTS WITH CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
Apparatus used in this phase of the work is described in detail in the earlier reports
(1. 2). In general the test tank consists of a filter section 24 in wide, 36 in deep, and
48 in long. The filter section is bounded by water surfaces on the sides and bottom,
but not at the ends. Flow is introduced to the water chamber through a constant head
device, and outflow from the subdrain is measured over a 10-deg Y-notch weir.
Studies conducted during 1961 included tests of an 8-in-diameter corrugated metal
drain pipe installed with perforations upward and symmetrical about the vertical. This
pipe orientation was selected for two reasons: (1) When the perforations are upward
the longitudinal flow through the drain pipe cannot affect filter stability, and (2) it is
difficult to compact filter material beneath the spring line of the pipe, and compaction
was of major interest at the time of the study
Tests have recently been completed with the drain pipe perforations in the down
ward position. This has been done to permit comparison with the earlier work. As with
the 1961 work the pipe section was located midway between the sides of the filter sec-
tion, and the pipe invert was 8 in above the bottom of the filter section.
Ten separate test runs were conducted usin^' commercially available concrete sand
with moisture content adjusted to 5 percent. Pertinent data resulting from the work are
shown in Table 1.
Table i — O.S-Fi Head
Flow
( 'ompat
Peak
I nl a in, ' i
Vo ,.- Blou
It eight
Flint
Flow
in : .' lu-
h'i mat I- -
PC/
0.0157
O.OI t 1
ffs-iir
(i
M •
0.0
No failure
■i
88 :;
6. 1
0.0181
0.0101
0.90
68. 1 H> sand lost
.-,
92. I
9. 1
O.OI7.'.
0.0107
0 96
lb Band lost
to
94.7
i j . :.
0.0163
o.otiio
1.02
13.3 11' sand lost
12
96 8
15.0
0.0139
0.0087
0 71
1 7 lb Band lost
-'■"i
98 i
16.9
0.0119
0.0090
0.72
No failure
♦Kate after 7-' In.
♦♦Total volume in 7-' In.
556
Roadway and Ballast
Each of the flow tests was continued for 72 hr to permit evaluation of filter
stability. Four of the tests were reruns conducted to insure reproducible results, or were
conducted to obtain material samples from the filter.
A general characteristic of the run was very turbid flows at beginning of the test.
After 4 or S min the turbidity cleared and the filter material moving through the pipe
was clearly visible. In all cases the movement of filter material virtually ceased after
the first 20 or 30 min of operation.
Comparison of filter stability for the "holes up" and "holes down" positions show
that for compactive rates less than about 15 percent, the "holes up" position is most
stable. When the compaction is over 15 percent (specific weights of 97 lb per cu ft or
greater) the "holes down" pipe orientation leads to a more stable filter bed. This action
is attributed to the characteristics of the test equipment.
When sand is compacted in the filter section it is virtually impossible to obtain
adequate compaction beneath the drain pipe. Thus, when water is introduced to the
filter any "packing" of the sand beneath the pipe, which is restrained at both ends,
causes the sand to move vertically downward from the pipe and a small cavity is
created. The cavity carries flow at a low velocity, when compared to pore velocity,
and as a result little material is carried into the drain pipe. This characteristic places a
limitation upon quantitative applicability of the sand movement data.
Comparison of the flow data in Table 1 with corresponding data from the "holes
up" tests indicates that perforated corrugated metal drains have substantially more inter-
ception ability when the perforations are at the bottom, rather than the top, of the
pipe. This corresponds with the results obtained by Shafer (3).
As indicated on Fig. 1 — Optimum Flow Curves, the "holes down" pipe orientation
intercepted almost 100 percent more flow than the "holes up" orientation. The very
substantial increase in discharge is attributed to three major factors:
30
0.004
OPTIMUM FLOW CURVES
8"CORRUGATED METAL PIPE
CONCRETE SAND FILTER
DECEMBER 1962
008 010 .012 014 016
MAXIMUM DISCHARGE -CFS
Fig. 1.
Roadway and Ballast
557
Fig. 2— Surface pattern of concrete sand filter after 72 hr of test with
holes at bottom of pipe. Head, 0.5 ft; compaction, 6.1 percent; specific
weight, 89.3 pcf. Compare with Fig. 3b in 1961 report (2)
558
Roadway and Ballast
1. When the holes arc at the bottom of the pipe substantially more filter is avail-
able to transmit flow from the water chamber to the pipe perforation.
2. Settlement of sand away from the drain pipe results in effectively greater inter-
ception ability. Such settlement does not affect the flow geometry when the
holes are at the top of the pipe.
3. In the present test program the contact area between the filter bed and water
chamber was 4.7 sq ft per foot of length with the "holes down" pipe position
and was 2.7 sq ft per foot of length with the "holes up" pipe position.
The optimum flow curve for the "holes down" position also indicates that maximum
flow interception will be realized from a concrete sand filter compacted to a specific
weight of about 90 pcf. Compaction causing unit weights either greater or less than
this amount will decrease the filter efficiency. It is apparent from the data that over-
compaction has a more serious effect on the filter than under-compaction.
The "holes up" curve on the figure indicates an optimum compaction of about 15
percent, or unit weight of 96.5 pcf. Thus, the test data indicate different optimum unit
weights for the two pipe positions. It is believed that the different figures are the result
of inability to properly compact the filter material beneath the pipe and not by differ-
ence in flow action. Lack of proper compaction beneath the pipe yields a lower unit
weight figure because unit weight is computed as the total sand weight divided by
volume occupied by the sand before flow is introduced to the filter.
It is significant that in both test series an optimum unit weight is indicated and
that over-compaction causes more serious reduction in flow than under-compaction.
Table 2 has been prepared to aid in comparison of flow and unit weight values
for the two test series. The insert on Fig. 1 is a graphical representation of the two
compaction relationships.
Coincident with study of the corrugated metal subdrain, efforts were made to fur-
ther substantiate the hypothesis of particle migration. After several of the flow tests
were completed a portion of the filter bed was frozen by packing the discharge pipe
with dry ice. After the sand around the pipe was solidly frozen the loose sand was
removed and the frozen sample was broken from the pipe.
Examination of the sample showed that fine materials had been removed from the
filter immediately adjacent to the pipe not only in the vicinity of the holes, but also
all along the underside of the conduit. Removal of fines was most marked along the
depressions in the frozen cake caused by the pipe corrugations. Apparently the removal
of fines was limited to the layer of filter material within l/% in from the pipe surface.
Efforts to obtain photographic records of this surface were only partially successful.
Tablk 2 — Summary Flow Data
No. of Blows
Holes t 'p Position
Holes Down Position
Unit Weight
Peak Flow
fii it Weigh 1
Peak Flmt
0
8
10
25 - -
84.0 pcf
91 .11
94.6
96.5
98.5
100.8
0.0075 cfs
0.0092
0.0095
0.0098
0.0083
0.0048
83.8 pcf
89.3
92.5
94.7
98.4
0.0170 cfs
0.0181
0.0179
0.01(53
0.0119
R o a d w a y a n d B a 1 I a .- t
550
'. . ' .
Am.v,,.,k»tWU»\«>A«,tWAuA»wl««VA*m\rtuW>A*ti«\wW
Fig. 3— Sample of filter material from frozen section of filter near pipe
opening. All material was located within 2 in of the pipe perforation.
Ll.Ii. I i I, i I i 1 i.l.i li> 1 i \ i \ i i* \ i
Fi&- 4 — Sample of filter material from frozen filter cake located about
6 in from pipe wall.
560
Roadway and Ballast
As the filter cake thawed, material from close to a pipe perforation was removed
with a spatula and a sample was accumulated. Fig. 3 is a photograph of the accumulated
sample. Comparison of Fig. 3 and Fig. 4, which is a similar sample, but taken some
distance from the pipe perforation, shows a definite increase in fines in the near-hole
sample. Efforts to obtain sufficiently large samples to permit sieve analysis were aban-
doned because of interference with the test program.
COMPARISON OF TYPES OF CONDUIT
It was decided to conduct calibration tests on at least two additional types of
subdrainage conduit in order to obtain maximum results with the laboratory apparatus
prior to termination of the study.
The subsurface drainage conduit used most frequently by Member Roads of AAR
is corrugated metal pipe. The second most frequently used material is clay drain tile (1).
In accordance with this finding tests were conducted using 4-in-diameter clay drain
tile in lengths of 12 in. Since the test tank was 48 in long it was necessary to have
four tile joints within the filter bed. The tile was supported from a thin longitudinal
bar within the filter bed, to simulate the rigid trench bottom, and was backfilled after
binding top third of each joint with roofing felt. Two flow tests with sand, with head
on the pipe equal to 0.5 ft, and one variable head test without sand were conducted.
The filter test data are summarized in Table 3.
In addition to the drain tile tests a sample of plastic drain pipe was prepared.
The inside diameter of the pipe was 2 in and the wall thickness was "%. in. The bottom
of the pipe was perforated with 5 holes per cross section and the sections were 1.5 in,
center to center. Within any section rV-in holes were drilled at the horizontal diameter
points, at the bottom of the pipe, and on each side of the pipe midway between the
bottom and horizontal diameter holes. The net result was 40 holes per foot of pipe or
160 holes in the 48-in test specimen. Determination of hole size was originally calculated
by the Bertram (4) criteria, but was later increased to fn in diameter to obtain greater
flow area. The results of the plastic pipe filter tests, again with head equal to 0.5 ft,
are presented in Table 3. Also included is information abstracted from the corrugated
metal pipe studies.
Table 3 — Comparison of Drain Materials
( 'ompac-
Specific
Peak
Flair*
Sum!
Test No.
tur
Weight
Flow
Volumi
Last
Pipe Mat* rial
Blows
pcf
cfs
cfs-hr
lb
1
,
94 . 3
0.0103
(1.593
107
8"cm.p. — holes up
■>
25
100.8
0 . 0048
failed
8" cm. p. - holes up
3
5
92.8
0.0183
0.904
22
8" cm. p.— holes down
t
25
98. t
0.0119
0.720
0
8" cm. p. holes dow n
,i
.)
96.0
0.0153
0.77(1
2
4" clay tile
i;
25
97 . 3
0.0118
0.623
0
4" clav tile
i
.>
97.9
0.0163
0.887
0
2" plastic pipe
8 . .
25
100.2
0.0125
0 . 769
0
2" plastic pipe
Total volume in 72 hr.
In addition to tests with the concrete sand filter, calibration tests were conducted
to permit comparison of the interception ability of the several conduit materials without
the influence of the sand filter. Data resulting from these tests, and material presented
Roadway and Ballast 561
INFILTRATION RATING CURVES
SELECTED SUBDRAIN CONDUITS
30 DECEMBER 1962
8" CMP WITH
CONCRETE SAND FILTER
1.0
07 u
/
05 Z
0.4 O
<
PLASTIC PIPE f <J
i
01
RATE OF FLOW - CFS
0002 003 005 001
CLAY DRAIN TILE-
4 JOINTS
WITHOUT rll TER
MATERIAL
02 S? / 8"C0RRUGATED METAi IMP!
/ / Ob 07 0.10 2 3 4 5.7
Fig. 5.
earlier for the corrugated metal pipes, arc indicated in Fig. 5. It is noted that the three-
conduits exhibit a similar head-discharge relationship. When the head on the pipe is less
than 0.5 ft the corrugated metal pipe has a substantially larger interception capacity.
Comparison of the calibration curves for conduits without filter material and the
single curve for corrugated metal pipe with filter material indicates that all three con-
duits have adequate interception ability. Study of the peak flow rates listed in Table 3
further verifies the conclusion.
SYNTHETIC SAND STUDIES
Special test apparatus was constructed to obtain detailed qualitative information
about particle movement using a synthetic sand mixture. The equipment consisted of an
entrance-head tank. 8 in by 11.5 in by S\ in high, equipped with a constant-head over-
Bow weir, and a horizontal sand chamber 24 in long and 2 in by 6 in. in cross section.
The outlet end of the test section was fitted with a bevelled slot extending across the
full width of the section. The clear opening of the slot was fa in vertically and 2 in
horizontally. (See Fig. 6.) The arrangement of the test section caused flow through the
sand to be virtually two-dimensional. Since the slot was located at mid-height of the
test section, flow paths converged on the slot from botb the t < >p and bottom of the
section.
The synthetic sand used in the experiment was a blend of two grades of Wausiu
quartz. As indicated on Fig. 7, both the coarse and fine sands were gap-graded, Analysis
of the two samples indicated that a mixture composed of 55 percent fine sample and
45 percent coarse sample would yield the most dense mixture and would most closel)
satisfy the distribution requirements of concrete Band. Because of the gradation of the
two parent materials it was impossible to simulate the concrete sand main sj/(- ,|jv
tribution. The size distribution curve for the synthetic sand is shown on Fig. 7.
562
R o a d \v ay and Ballast
Fig. 6 — Test apparatus for synthetic sand. Flow is introduced through
hose at lower right of entrance tank. Horizontal test section bolts to
entrance tank. Note keeper grid inside the right end of test section.
SIEVE NUMBER
200 100 50 40 30 2 0 16
GRAIN SIZE DISTRIBUTION CURVES
DECEMBER 1962
ASTVI LIMIT FOR
CONCRETE SAND
02 03 05 07 0.10 .2 3 .5 .7 10
GRAIN SIZE - MILLIMETERS
Fig. 7.
Roadwav and Ballast
563
SAND LOSS - POUNDS
2 3 4 5
0.010 Oil 012 013 014 015 016 .017 018
PERMEABILITY -CM. PER SEC
SYNTHETIC SAND PERMEABILITY AND LOSS CURVES
Fig. 8.
13 o.
10 o
After the sand samples were initially blended in a Lancaster Type PC Batch Mixer
the moisture content was raised to 2 percent and blending was continued for 3 min. The
sand mixture was then loaded into the test chamber in 6-in layers. The test chamber
had been removed from the entrance tank and placed in a vertical position in a specially
made compactor. Each 6-in layer was compacted to the desired degree, and the process
was repeated until the test section was filled. After filling, a keeper grid was bolted in
place to prevent sand from spilling out of the test section, the section was reinstalled
<>n the entrance tank and the experiment was ready to proceed.
Water was introduced to the tank at the rate of 5 gpm until the overflow was main-
tained at about 1 gpm. Flow tests were conducted for a period of 16 hr and rates ol
flow through the filter were determined volumetrically.
The effect of compaction on operating characteristics of the Biter is illustrated on
Fig, 8. As should be expected the permeability decreases with increasing compaction
The figure also indicates that sand loss, the amount of material carried out of the test
section, decreases as compaction increases A minimum value IS reached al 14 percent at
compaction. This figure is comparable to the values obtained in the two large scale
corrugated metal pipe tests. (See Fig. 1 and Table 1)
The particle migration curve. Fig. 9, is based on data from the 50 blow compaction
test using the synthetic sand. The curve shows the change in grain size distribution
effected by water passing through the filter section for 16 hr. The filter sample obtained
after the test is composed of all material in the test section S in or less from the slotted
end plate. The particle migration curve is obtained by plotting the algebraic difference
between the percent of sample passing a given sieve before the test and the corresponding
value after the test
Hull. .177
564
R o a d \v a v and Ballast
SIEVE NUMBER
3,0 5,0 40 30
PARTICLE MIGRATION CURVE
SYNTHETIC SAND
DECEMBER 1962
COMPACTION - I4PCT
SPECIFIC WT- 75.3
.3 3
GRAIN SIZE
T^ 1.0 TO"
- MILLIMETERS
Fig. 9.
The curve shows a marked increase in percent of sample smaller than 0.3 mm and
a marked decrease in percent of sample larger than 0.3 mm. It is apparent that the
after-test sample contains more fines than the pre-test sample. This appears to be con-
clusive demonstration of the particle migration hypothesis for this particular sand
mixture.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
This study is being conducted on a cooperative basis by the Association of Amer-
ican Railroads and the University of Illinois. The contact officer for the AAR is G. M.
Magee, director of engineering research, and for the University, Professor Ross J. Mar-
tin, director of tbe Engineering Experiment Station.
Technical and operating supervision of the study is provided by Rockwell Smith,
research engineer — roadway, AAR, and by John C. Guillou, associate professor of
hydraulic engineering. Special appreciation is due Mr. Smith for his interest and coop-
eration in the prosecution of the program.
Roadway and Ballast 565
The project has been conducted in the Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory under
the direction of the writer. Special mention is due Lonny R. Hoover who performed
the experimental work with synthetic filter mixtures as a special problem in his under-
graduate academic program.
BIBLIOGRAPHY
(1) Guillou, John ('., First Progress Report on Performance of Filter Materials, Pro
ceedings AREA, Vol. 61, pp. 677-602, 1960.
(2) Guillou, John C. and Lanyon, Richard F., Second Progress Report on Performance
of Filter Materials. Proceedings AREA, Vol. 63, pp. 27-38, 1962.
(3) Shat'er, George E., Investigation of Position, Size and X umber of Holes in Hel-Cor
Subdrains, Armco Drainage Products Association, Middletown, Ohio. Sept., 1944.
(4) Bertram, G. E., An Experimental Investigation of Protective Filters, Soil Mechanics
Series No. 7, Harvard University, Cambridge, Mass., Jan. 1940.
Report on Assignment 10
Ballast
(a) Tests
(c) Special Types of Ballast
T. W. Creighton (chairman, subcommittee), E. W. Bauman, J. G. Campbell, J. E. Gray,
W. C. McCormick, E. VY. McCuskey. E. L. Robinson, C. E. Webb, E. L. Woods.
Under Assignment 10 (c) — Special Types of Ballast, your committee presents a
progress report on the 1962 condition of the asphalt-treated-ballast and asphalt-treated-
bridge-deck test sections on various railroads. These treatments were applied in 195°
and 1960 under a cooperative project between the Asphalt Institute, the Research De-
partment of the Association of American Railroads, and participating railroads. This
report is presented as information.
The 1959 applications were reported in some detail in the AREA Proceedings.
Vol. 61, 1960, page 715. A progress report on these projects and on the 1960 work was
published in abstract in AREA Proceedings, Vol. 62, 1961, page 707, and in more detail
in Report ER-10 of the AAR Research Department. A second progress report covering
the 1959 and 1960 applications was published in AREA Proceedings, Vol. 63, 1962,
page 593.
The report was prepared for the committee by G. L. Hinueber, engineering labora-
tory manager, AAR.
Asphalt Treatments of Ballast and Bridge Decks
All of the asphalt-treated-ballast t » - 1 sections applied in 1959 and 1960 mi various
railroads and a representative number of the bridge-deck treatments on the Pittsburgh
& West Virginia Railway applied in i°59 and 1960 wen- inspected during the summer
and fall of 1962 by representatives of both the Vsphall Institute and the Association
of American Railroads. The results of these inspections are included iii the following
report.
566 Roadway and Ballast
1959 BALLAST TREATMENTS
Santa Fe Railway
Daggett-Bar stow, Calif. — The general condition of this test section varied from fair
to good. Spotting has been required at joints and in signal areas at the west end of the
job and in several other areas, chiefly for line. The asphalt coverage and the adherence
of the asphalt and cover aggregate to ties and tie plates were somewhat spotty, although
generally fair. Some little disturbance was noted in cribs, although most cribs were
fairly tight. There was also some disturbance at tie ends where the asphalt coated ballast
was working up in a number of places.
Maintenance records show that a nominal amount of spotting and lining has been
required on both the treated section and the adjacent untreated control section. The
total maintenance required on the test section to date has been slightly higher than that
on the control section.
It is believed that a much better job could have been obtained if the quantity of
the asphalt applied had been somewhat greater.
Peach Springs — Traxton, Ariz. — The condition of this test section was fair to good.
There was considerable disturbance of the asphalt-treated ballast in the cribs and at
tie ends. Pumping was evident in a number of places, some of which had to be spotted
three to four times during the past winter. The adherence of the asphalt and cover
aggregate to the ties and tie plates was only fair.
The maintenance records show that the treated section required some spotting and
lining during the past year but the untreated section required none. The total spotting
and lining requirements to date, however, are somewhat greater for the control section
than for the treated section, although they are relatively low for both.
It is evident that an insufficient amount of asphalt was applied on this job.
Suwanee-Marmon, TV. M. — The treated section on the eastward track exhibited
severe pumping and instability and was removed from test early in 1961. The treated
section on the westward track was removed from test in January 1962 for similar rea-
sons. The ballast had apparently become fouled with wind-blown fine sand and silt
prior to the asphalt application. Water which entered the poorly draining ballast both
before and after the asphalt application caused severe pumping and subsequent
instability.
The quantity of asphalt applied seemed deficient, although it is very doubtful that
the asphalt treatment could have been successful under prevailing conditions.
Maintenance records show that the asphalt-treated section required about twice as
much maintenance as the untreated control section before the test was discontinued.
The maintenance cost on the test section includes a cost for digging out asphalt to allow
drainage in addition to the required spotting and lining costs.
Lecompton-Topeka, Kans. — In 1961 a one-mile stretch of the asphalt-treated-ballast
test section was removed and the track was relined and surfaced. This stretch is along
a river and has long been an area of chronic instability. A curve near the west end of
the job has required spotting and lining for a length of about 0.4 mile. It is not known
if the track at this location was out of line before application of the asphalt or if it
kicked out of line following the test application. With these exceptions and some minor
cracking along the shoulders, the general condition of the remainder of the treated
section was good. The adherence of the asphalt and cover aggregate to the ties and
track fittings was very good.
The maintenance costs on this test section have run quite high. This is due chiefly
to the spotting and lining required on the unstable section alone the river before it was
Roadway and Ballast 567
removed from the test. Despite this, it will be noted that the total maintenance cost
to date on the adjacent conrol section has been \l/z times that on the test section.
BuckUn-Marcetine, Mo. — The condition of this test section was very good. There
was a small amount of disturbance at the tie ends in a few scattered places, but the
cribs were fairly tight. A small amount of pumping has occurred in some cuts and at
road crossings. The line and grade appeared to be good. The adherence of the asphalt
and cover aggregate to the ties and tie plates was excellent.
The maintenance costs to date on the test section have been very low. The only
maintenance of any consequence has been around insulated joints. The maintenance costs
on the adjacent control section have been chiefly for spotting and, although relatively
low, have run three times as much as for the test section.
II illiainsfield-Dahinda, III. — This test section was in excellent condition. The cribs
were tight and only a small amount of disturbance was noticeable at the tie ends. The
line and surface were good. The adherence of the asphalt and cover aggregate to ties
and track fittings was excellent. The only maintenance required on the test has been
around insulated joints.
The maintenance costs for the control section have been double those for the test
section to date. However, the maintenance costs were low for both test and control
sections.
Yictorville and Oro Grande, Calif. — These test sections were treated for the purpose
of keeping dust from adjacent cement mills from fouling the ballast. Both sections were
in excellent condition and indications are that the treatments have been very successful
for the purpose intended.
The eastbound track at Oro Grande has been surfaced on the west end for about
200 ft. The condition was believed to have existed at the time of the asphalt applica-
tion. There has been some movement in the vicinity of the switch at the east end of
the Yictorville job which has required some maintenance.
Both tests had excellent adherence of asphalt and cover aggregate to ties and tie
plates. The cribs were generally tight and there was little or no disturbance at tie ends.
This was a special treatment and no control section could be set up for similar
conditions.
I960 BALLAST TREATMENTS
Norfolk & Western Railway
This asphalt-treated-ballast test section was in excellent condition. A small amount
of disturbance was noted at tie ends but there was little or no disturbance at the insu-
lated or other joints.
The section is favorably shaped for good lateral drainage. Cribs were tight and ties
and track fittings have retained excellent coverage of asphalt and cover aggregate. The
test track has ribbon rail except for curves, which have 78- and 117-ft rails. It was in
excellent condition at the time of application and no maintenance has been required
since.
The control section has 39-ft rails. It has required spotting but was in good shape
at the time of the inspection. The control track was not up to full standard of the test
section at the time of treatment, and therefore, the difference in maintenance COStS i-
shown in the accompanying table does not entirely reflect the merit of the asphalt
treatment.
568 Roadway and Ballast
Monon Railroad
This test section was in excellent condition. The adherence of the asphalt and cover
aggregate to the ties and track fittings were very good. The cribs were tight and there
was little or no disturbance at tie ends. The section was well dressed and crowned
before treatment and gives excellent lateral drainage. The line and surface were good.
No maintenance has been required on either the test section or adjacent control
section since application.
Texas & Pacific Railway
The general condition of this asphalt-treated-ballast test section was very good.
There was little evidence of disturbance in the cribs or on the shoulders. There were a
few pumping ties in some of the shallow cuts. The test section was apparently holding
line and surface well. The adherence of the asphalt and cover aggregate to the track
fittings and ties was good.
No maintenance has been required on either the test section or the adjacent control
section.
Chicago & North Western Railway
This test section appeared to be in generally good condition. The line and grade
were good. The cribs were tight and there was very little disturbance at the tie ends.
There was good asphalt coverage and adherence to the ties and track fittings was good.
The distribution of the cover aggregate was poor, with little or no coverage between
the rails.
There has been no maintenance work performed either on the section treated with
asphalt or on the untreated control section.
1959 AND 1960 BRIDGE DECK TREATMENTS
Pittsburgh & West Virginia Railway
About five miles of bridge decks on this railway were treated with an asphalt and
cover aggregate application in 1959 and 1960. A representative number of these bridges
were inspected in 1962.
The 1959 treatments were generally very good except for the stripping of the asphalt
from the base of rail, the tie plates and track fittings. The asphalt coverage and the
adherence of the asphalt and cover aggregate to the ties were satisfactory for all bridges
inspected. The treatments which were applied in two passes at 4 mph were better than
those applied in a single pass. Those applied with two passes at 2 mph were superior.
The 1960 treatments inspected generally showed good asphalt coverage and good
adherence of the asphalt and cover aggregate to the ties, base of rail, and track fittings.
The poor adherence of the asphalt to the metal surfaces in the 1959 treatments was
probably due to an accumulation of rust and dirt as well as low temperatures at the
time of application. The metal surfaces were primed with kerosene prior to the I960
applications and the air temperatures were considerably higher during the 1960 treat-
ments. As a result better adherence was obtained.
Most of the 1959 treatments were on bridges with older ties and were made with
two passes. The 1960 treatments were on bridges with newer ties and a single application
treatment was used and proved to be adequate.
Very little maintenance has been required on either the treated sections or adjacent
untreated control sections of bridge decks. The decks that were chosen for treatment
were in fairly good condition and any bridge decks where work was programmed for
the near future were not coated.
Roadway and Ballast 569
Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad
The test bridges on this road treated in 1960, were not inspected this year by the
Asphalt Institute and AAR representatives. A report from the railway, however, indi-
cates that the treatments were generally in good condition. To date a few treated ties
which were in poor condition at the time of treatment have been replaced. None of
the ties in the adjacent untreated control sections have been removed.
DISCUSSION'. AND COST DATA
It was noted that two of the original asphalt-treated-ballast test sections and part
of a third have been removed from the test. The failures of these sections are not
attributable to the failure of the treatment as such, but rather to conditions that existed
at the time of application, such as fouled ballast and unstable subgradc. This points up
the necessity of having the track in good condition at the time of treatment, especially
as far as line, surface, ballast and subgrade are concerned. It is not only desirable to
have the ballast relatively clean but the ballast section should be shaped to give good
lateral drainage.
Several of the jobs are deficient in asphalt. These applications are all on cinder
ballast which absorbs the asphalt more readily than most other types of ballast. This
was apparently not taken into consideration when required quantities were estimated.
A greater quantity of asphalt was required than was estimated and applied. This has
not contributed directly to any of the failures, but is definitely a factor in the relatively
poor performance of several of the test sections.
The condition of the test sections in general, with the few exceptions noted, was
very good and results are encouraging.
Sufficient time has elapsed since the installation of the asphalt-treated-ballast test
sections to give some preliminary maintenance cost data. The cost-of-application data
are also now available and arc shown in the accompanying cost-data table.
The cost of application of the various asphalt-treated-ballast test sections varies
from a minimum of $880 per mile to a maximum of $1385 per mile. The average cost
of the test sections is $1028 per mile.
The total cost of installation of an asphalt-treated-ballast test section includes work
train and labor expenses as well as material costs. Delays due to malfunction of equip-
ment increased work train and labor expenses on some of the jobs. Lower unit cost of
asphalt on some jobs decreased the materials cost.
The maintenance costs for the test sections and the adjacent control sections as
shown in the cost-data table reflect a general trend toward lower maintenance require-
ments on the treated sections, with a few minor exceptions. These maintenance costs
cover a period of two to three years and at this time can only be considered as giving
preliminary indications
The average cost of bridge treatments on the Pittsburgh & Wesl Virginia ran 52.7
cents per tie for the 1959 work and 45.2 cents per tie for the i960 work. Difficulties
were encountered with the asphalt-spreading equipment in 195(> which necessitated
delays and additional expense for reheating the asphalt. This resulted in the higher
cost of treatment in that year.
The only maintenance cost incurred to date on the Pittsburgh & Wesl Virginia
treated bridge decks is a total of $280 for replacing 1 J ties which were in such pool
condition at the time of treatment that no benefit could have been realized in coating
them. There has been no maintenance required on the adjacent control sections
570
Roadway an d Ballast
Tabic of Installation and Maintenance Costs for Asphalt Treatments
Ballast Treatments
Length
Location of
of
Kailroad
Test Section
Test
AT&SF
Daggett-Barstow.
California
2 mi.
AT&SF
Peach Springs -
Truxton, Arizona
5.2 mi.
"AT&SF
Suwanec-Marmon,
New Mexico
4.5 mi.
Year Cost of
Treated Treatment/mi.
Cost of Maintenance
to August 1962
Test Sec. Control Sec.
Lecompton - Topcka ,
Kansas
1959 $l,080.39/mi. $ 758.08 $ 579.84
1959 1,014.75/mi. 394.72 935.04
1959 976.06/mi. 3,818.64 1,793.84
♦Note: MP 50. 5-53. 0 test section destroyed March 1961
MP 53.0-55.0 test section destroyed January 1962
4 mi. 1959 1,008.81/mi. 3,967.11 6,142.28
♦Note: MP 41.4-42.4 removed from test 1961
AT&SF Bucklin-Marceline, 4.15 mi. 1959
Missouri
AT&SF Williamsfield- 3.5 mi. 1959
Dahinda, Illinois
AT&SF Victorville, Calif. & 4.5 mi. 1959
Oro Grande, Calif.
N&WRy. Crewe, Virginia 2.8 mi.
Monon Monon, Indiana 4. 8 mi.
♦L&N North of Horse Cave, 2 mi.
Kentucky
T&P Big Spring, Texas 4 mi. 1960
945.54/mi.
879.70/mi.
983.58/mi.
435.01
319.15
1,308.86
595.69
2,883.20 No control sec.
1960 1,204.68/mi. 0 1,185.00
I960 Not yet available 0 0
1960 1,025.00/mi. ♦Removed from test 1961
1,164.50/mi.
0
Bridge Deck Treatments
P&WVa.
Pennsylvania
12,780 lin.
ft.
1959
52. It /tie
$280.00
P&WVa.
Pennsylvania
12,990 lin.
ft.
1960
45.2£/tie
0
CRI& P
Arkansas and La.
36,372 lin.
ft.
1960
42.9^/tie
0
The average cost of treatment of the Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific bridge decks
ran about 42.9 cents per tie. No maintenance of any consequence has been required to
date on either the treated or adjacent untreated control section.
Report on Assignment 11
Chemical Control of Vegetation
Collaborating with Communication and Signal Section, AAR
C. E. Webb (chairman, subcommittee), C. W. Bailey, J. W. DeMoycr, R. J. Kemper
S. J. Owens, W. F. Petteys.
Because of budget restrictions affecting the work of the AAR research staff, it
not been possible to gather sufficient data on this subject to prepare a report of nation-
wide significance. However, certain information on new products and chemical com-
binations is being assembled, and it is expected that a significant report can be presented
later this year.
Taitf"
AUTOJACK
ELECTROMATIC
The only completely
automatic track surfacing
machine on the market
Proven in operation by North America's
leading railroads. Complete and auto-
matic control of surface and cross level
through tangent and curve territory
regardless of height of lift.
• Combination of Autojack and Electromatic
equals or improves production of Electro-
matic alone.
• Precision of lift and uniformity of compaction
controlled automatically.
• All variations in lift, level and run-out con-
trolled from operator's panel.
• Beam "sighting" for utmost precision.
• Front buggy self-propelled ahead of tamper.
TA M P E R I N C. 53 Court St., Plattsburgh, N.Y.
SALES AND SERVICE: 2 1 47 University Avenue
St. Paul 1 4, Minnesota
Phone: 645-5055
IN CANADA 160 St. Joseph Blvd.,
Lachine (Montreal), P.Q.
Phone: 637-5531
Your enquiries for detailed information or brochures on
Autojack Electromatic and other track machines are invited.
Kill more weeds per mile.. .per dollar
,„ , Liquid UROX !
Liquid Urox Weed Killer is the first liquid — substituted
urea-type herbicide ever developed for railroads. It's fast-
acting . . . withers annual and perennial grasses as well as
broadleaved weeds within 12 hours after application, re-
gardless of weather. It's long-lasting . . . just one applica-
tion wipes out weeds and brush for 8 to 18 months. What's
more, control can be continued economically each year
with small "booster" doses.
Liquid Urox is ideal for railroad spray trains . . . doesn't
need continuous agitation . . . won't clog spray nozzles . . .
won't settle out . . . can be mixed with fuel oil, diesel oil or
ordinary weed oils. Write today for the complete story on
railroad-proved liquid Urox Weed Killer.
GENERAL CHEMICAL DIVISION
P.O. Box 353. Morristown, M. J.
CONTINUOUS RAIL
—Quickly, Economically with the
RAIL WELDING
A typical transformer sub-station furnish-
ing commercial power for NCG Automatic
Rail Welding System.
When "Flashing" stops, the weld upset is
sheared. The weld is then ground with
abrasive belts to a smooth surface.
Now small work crews do a big, fast
job with the continuous, highly
automated NCG Rail Welding System
using commercial electricity.
Time-wasting annealing and
normalizing are eliminated. All
operations are automatic, under
push-button control.
The NCG Rail Welding System brings
the highly desired advantages of
continuous rail to many roads which
previously deemed it beyond budget
acceptance. It may be purchased
or leased. Write for details now.
NATIONAL CYLINDER GAS, DIVISION
OF CHEMETRON CORPORATION
840 N. Michigan Ave., Chicago 11, 111.
NCG
A pusher moves strings of welded rail
onto flat cars ready for shipment.
NATIONAL CYLINDER GAS
©1961 Chemetron Corporation
BIG BENEFITS
of the GRS Wheel Thermo-Scanner Unit
Viewing the wheel hub gives you . . .
The truest indication of bearing heat
— at the natural heat sink. By focus-
ing on this hub area, abnormal heat
caused by dragging brake shoes can
also be detected, as well as — and these
are actual instances — defective trac-
tion motor suspension bearings, and a
wheel loose on its axle. These are
extra benefits not available with systems
that scan the journal box.
Right angle scanning of the rolling stock
gives you . . .
Operation with traffic in both direc-
tions. No additional track mounted or
wayside equipment required. No costly
duplication.
3
No special analysis required for cars with
roller bearings . . .
A normal bearing — plain or roller —
presents the same indication on the
recording. All types of bearings reg-
ister the same relative amount of pen
deflection, eliminating confusion be-
tween plain and roller bearings.
The Wheel Thermo-Scanner Unit is
built for railway use by a railway
equipment manufacturer. It com-
bines more practical beneficial fea-
tures than any other hot-box detector.
Install Wheel Thermo-Scanner Units
now, at strategic points along your
line — you'll find them the best choice
for dependable protection. Ask your
GRS representative for full details.
.
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL COMPANY
ROCHESTER X NEW YORK
NEW YORK 17, NEW YORK
CHICAGO I, ILLINOIS
ST. LOUIS 1, MISSOURI
for effective
weed control...
Concentrated BORASCU
POLYBOR-CHLORATE
UREABOR®
MONOBOR-CHLORATE
These borate weed killers are proving best
for roads in every way . . . efficiency, safety,
economy, convenience, easy application.
Today's use of borates for maximum control of
vegetation began years ago with our pioneer
work in the field. Continued research has
developed the group of herbicides, listed above,
which most roads now favor for every phase of
weed control. These four weed killers are
nonselective. They are widely used for year-
round maintenance of weed-free conditions
about trestles, tie piles, yards, signals, switches,
and rights of way. Find out how you, too, can
do a better job on weeds . . . write today .
AGRICULTURAL SALES DEPARTMENT
BORAX
630 SHATTO PLACE • LOS ANGELES 5, CALIFORNIA
Model N U Tie Cutter
W\ h. ffijfc/WHM
r 1
m
1
~*JSm
-^#_H
fJ__H
» -H-SD
'■■ _1rV____H_r___l
' :' *; Sag r . • '• ^ «P<_i
Jj^
*^r»»" ' '--if ^»
5" ,^™11
la ■ _S___i^
>*v. JH
- — —
sap • _
■j^S
jri
J
U!^'^' "- -•^■^ff ,
1 ■ nil
5?_j
2L i
'"*" _■ _■
... M
1 Ijg&L^
g 1 B
■■' i H _P^
"■**£- ^^____H
V t
^"^*~i**«j_^^_^, 1,
-ffflfll
HERE IS THE WINNING TEAM
The Woolery NU Tie Cutter and the Woolery Tie-end Remover preserve the line and surface
of the track and at the same time reduce the cost of tie renewals. Ties can be removed
without trenching, jacking up track or adzing tops of rail-cut ties. With this team you simply
cut both ends of tie, pry out center piece, insert in its place the tie-end remover and out
go the tie ends pushed by the double acting, double ended hydraulic cylinder of the Tie-
end remover.
FOR HIGHEST EFFICIENCY USE TWO TIE CUTTERS WITH ONE TIE-END REMOVER
WOOLERY MACHINE COMPANY
MINNEAPOLIS, MINN.
ROOTS AND LOADS TIES
LAYING WELDED RAIL
MODEL 441
Developed and Built
for Railroad Maintenance
180° BOOM SWING
D0£S ALL JOBS!
CUTS MAINTENANCE COSTS
12 FAST CHANGE ATTACHMENTS
• Forks
• IK Cu. Yd. Bucket
• Tote Hook
• 18' Boom Extension
• Fork Tie Baler
• Track Cleaning Bucket
• Back Hoe
• Clamshell
• Back Filler Blade
• Pull Drag Bucket
• 4 Cu. Yd. Snow bucket
• Pile Hammer
Optional Attachment
Flanged Wheels, Hydraulically Controlled
WIDE TRACK CLEANING BUCKET'
PETTIBONE MULLIKEN CORPORATION
RAILROAD .^gj^DIVISION
141 W. JACKSON^s^"!?*^* CHICAGO 4. Ill
80 Years of Service
to the Railroad Industry
m m
Hubbard Super Service Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Super Steel Alloy Spring Washers
Hubbard Track Tools
Hubbard Tool Division
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
New York Pittsburgh Chicago
ft Unit Rail Anchor w.
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR DIVISION
UNIT RAIL ANCHOR CORPORATION
NEW YORK PITTSBURGH CHICAGO
Assure lower maintenance costs,
better performance with...
TEXACO 1
Petroleum Products and
Systematic Engineering
Service
H
iwmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmmsm
TEXACO inc.
RAILWAY SALES DIVISION
135 East 42nd St., New York 17, N. Y.
h )RK • CHICAGO • SAN FRANCISCO • ST. LOUIS • ST. PAUL • ATLANTA
The custom-built assembly shown
above and to the right is an all-purpose
rig designed to give maximum flexibility
in coating and painting work. It was
designed for field application of paints,
lacquers, vinyls, cutback asphalts,
creosotes, heavy oils and greases.
It uses the economical Graco Hydra-
Spray Process, and proves once again,
you get the job done faster and better
with Graco than with any other coat-
ing system.
If speed of coating application, and
material savings are important to you,
write today for all the details of the
Graco Hydra-Spray Process.
FREE!
Graco Engineers are prepared to help you in the design of your
paint and material spray assemblies. Your Graco Railway Rep-
resentative will be glad to explain the many benefits of this
service. Write or call him . . . ioday!
Graco
GRAY COMPANY, INC.
MINNEAPOLIS 13, MINNESOTA
RAILWAY DEPARTMENT
JOHN P. McADAMS, Eastern Sales Representative
2304 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia
CHICAGO — (Broadview, III.)
R. D. Worley
3030 South 25th Ave.
CLEVELAND
M. H. Fronk Company, Inc.
1202 Marshall Building
HOUSTON
Houston Railroad Supply Co.
1610 Dumble Street
PHILADELPHIA
The A. R. Kidd Co.
1036 Suburban Station Bldg.
LOUISVILLE
T. F. & H. H. Going
6308 Limewood Circle
ST. LOUIS
The Carriers Supply Company
818 Olive Street
NEW YORK — Newark, New Jer.ey
R. A. Corley
744 Broad Street
SAN FRANCISCO
The Barnes Supply Compony
I 41 Eleventh Street
TWIN CITIES — SI. Paul, Minn.
The Daniel L. O'Brien Supply Company
Endicott-On-Fourth Bldg.
WASHINGTON — Arlington, Vo.
Southeastern Railway Supply, Inc.
2304 Wilson Blvd.
MONTREAL — Ontario, Canada
International Equipment Co., Ltd.
360 St. James Street West
I POWER
A COMPLETE LINE
OE SPRING WASHERS
THE NATIONAL LOCK WASHER CO
Newark N. J., V. S. A-
THE DOUBLE U RAIL ANCHOR
ACHUFF RAILWAY SUPPLY CO.
ST. LOUIS, MO.
The illustration above very closely approximates the results obtained by the Jackson Track Maintainer.
>
ballast
drastically cuts
maintenance cost
. . . and JACKSON tampers are the only tampers that truly KEY the ballast
components! Percussion alone won't do it. Vibration plus squeezing
doesn't do it. Only the powerful, vibratory, 3-dimensional tamping action
of JACKSON TAMPING so thoroughly consolidates the ballast, so com-
pletely and tightly KEYS the ballast components together that the tie bed
resembles a mosaic floor. And it does so right in the vital load bearing
area directly under the rail and in a wider supporting area than provided
by any other tamper.
Tamping of this character is bound to last longer . . . bound to drastically
reduce maintenance expense . . . one of the major reasons why most
track chiefs prefer the JACKSON TRACK MAINTAINER.
Let us give you
the complete details.
JACKSON
VIBRfltORS. ~
LUDINGTON, MICHIGAN, U.S.A
OO WOODINGS- VERONA TOOL WORKS
^X Pioneer Manufacturers
of
HIGH GRADE TRACK TOOLS
and
SPRING WASHERS FOR TRACK
Since 1873
VERONA. PA. CHICAGO. ILL.
w
WOODINGS FORGE <& TOOL COMPANY
Makers
of
WOODINGS RAIL ANCHORS
VERONA. PA.
CHICAGO.
ILL.
Notes on
Railroad Location and Construction Procedures
from the School of Experience
By J. A. Given
A series of notes, comments, short-cut methods and "tricks of the
trade" written by a railroad location engineer of many years of
practical experience for the benefit of young engineers.
Price $0.50
AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
59 East Van Buren Street
Chicago 5, III.
at
your
service
for
all types of cranes
d iesel wreckers
pile drivers
buckets
ORTON
CRANE & SHOVEL CO.
608 S . DEARBORN ST.
CHICAGO 5, ILLINOIS
DANIEL A. COVELLI
President
Representatives in Principal Cities
£-x-t-e-n-d T-i-e JI-l-^-q!
4-fold Qaae!
USE TIE PLATE
LOCK SPIKES
One-piece Design
LOCK SPIKES hold tie plates firmly in place on
cross-ties and bridge timbers.
LOCK SPIKES are quickly and easily driven,
or removed, with standard track tools.
Driven to refusal, the spread shank is com-
pressed by the walls of the hole. Tie plates are held
against horizontal and vertical movement under
spring pressure. Play between the spike and the
hole is eliminated — abrasion and seating of tie
plates is overcome.
LOCK SPIKES hold their position in the tie,
and redriving to tighten the plate is not required.
They provide a quiet and strengthened track.
Annual cost of ties and maintenance expense is
reduced by extending the life of ties and holding
gage. Here is one answer to conservation of ma-
terials and labor. Write for free folder.
BERNUTH, LEMBCKE CO., INC.
420 Lexington Avenue, New York 17, N. Y.
Actual
Size
jjtjiwa a>
Here are the up-to-date facts on the SPENO Ballast
Cleaning and the SPENO Rail Grinding Services.
BALLAST CLEANING
SPENO Engineering and Research has de-
veloped a superior screening arrangement so
that we are now using an improved Ballast
Ceaner with greater efficiency.
RAIL GRINDING
Our Rail Grinding Service has been so well
received we are now building a THIRD Rail
Grinding Train to take care of the increased
demand.
SPENO is constantly developing means lor
belter service to make sure that the Railroads
receive everything they pay for — and more
c/ud^~/7s^> ^te '^aSz&zds y^z^~nac/e xseds as/
CEO
Ui 1111
FRANK SPENO RAILROAD BALLAST CLEANING CO., INC.
Clark Street
Eatt Syracuse, N Y
306 North Cayuga St.
Ithaca. N. Y.
THE TRASCO
AUTONOMIC CAR RETARDER
CLAMPS IN PLACE
ANYWHERE IN TRACK
SIMPLE — EFFECTIVE — INEXPENSIVE
TRACK SPECIALTIES CO.
GENERAL MOTORS BLDG.
NEW YORK 19, N. Y.
American Railway
Engineering Association— Bulletin
Bulletin 579 June-July 1963
Proceedings Vol. 64*
CONVENTION ISSUE
CONTENTS
Report of the 62nd Business Meeting, March 15-16,
1963, Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago, including Ab-
stracts of All Discussions, All Formal Action on
Manual Material, Specific Papers and Addresses
Presented in Connection with Committee Reports,
and Other Official Business of the Association 579
Report of the Executive Secretary 706
Report of the Treasurer 725
Constitution 726
Tie Renewals and Costs per Mile of Maintained Track _ 738
Index of Proceedings, Vol. 64, 1963 739
* The contents of this Bulletin and the other Bulletins of the Association
from Bulletin 573, September-October 1962, to and including Bulletin 579, June-
July 1963 (except Bulletin 578, March 1963), constitute the Annual Proceedings
of the Association.
Copyright 1963, by American Railway Engineering Asiociation
BOARD OF DIRECTION
1963-1964
President
L. A. Loggins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas and Louisiana Lines,
Houston 1, Tex.
Vice Presidents
T. F. Burris, General Manager of Construction and Maintenance of Way, Chesapeake
& Ohio Railway — Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, Huntington, W. Va.
A. V. Johnston, Chief Engineer, Canadian National Railways, Montreal, Que
Past Presidents
R. H. Beeder, Chief Engineer System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago 4.
C. J Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia 4, Pa.
Directors
J. H. Brown, Assistant General Manager — Eastern District, St Louis-San Francisco
Railway, Springfield, Mo.
J. E. Eisemann, Chief Engineer, Western Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway,
Amarillo, Tex.
W. H Huffman, Assistant Chief Engineer — Construction, Chicago & North Western
Railway, Chicago 6
F. R. Smith, Chief Engineer, Union Railroad, East Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. L. Young, Chief Engineer, Norfolk & Western Railway, Roanoke 17, Va.
T. B. Hutcheson, Chief Engineer, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, Richmond 13, Va.
C. E. Defendorf, Chief Engineer, New York Central System, New York 17, N. Y.
John Ayer, Jr., Vice President — Operations, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad,
Denver 17, Colo.
A. L. Sams, Assistant Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago 5.
J. F. Beaver, Chief Engineer, Southern Railway System, Washington 13, D. C.
V. C. Hanna, Chief Engineer, Terminal Railroad Association of St. Louis,
St. Louis 3, Mo.
H. M. Whxiamson, Chief Engineer System, Southern Pacific Company, San Francisco 5,
Calif.
Treasurer
A. B. Hhxman, Retired Chief Engineer, Belt Railway of Chicago; Chicago & Western
Indiana Railroad, Chicago.
Executive Secretary
N. D. Howard, 59 East Van Buren Street, Chicago 5.
Assistant Secretary
E. G. Gehrke, 59 East Van Buren Street, Chicago 5.
Secretary Emeritus
Walter S. Lacher, 407 East Fuller Road, Hinsdale, HI.
Published by the American Railway Engineering Association, Monthly, January, February, March,
November and December; Bi-Monthly, June-July, and September-October, at 2211 Fordem
Avenue, Madison, Wis.; Editorial and Executive Offices,
59 Van Buren Street, Chicago 5, 111.
Second class postage paid at Madison, Wis.
Accepted for mailing at special rate of postage for in Section 1103, Act of October 3, 1917,
authorized on June 29, 1918.
Subscription $10 per annum.
AMERICAN RAILWAY
ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
We greatly appreciate your cooperation arranging your 1963 meet-
ing schedule to coincide with the American Railway Progress
Exposition to be held in McCormick Place October 9-16, 1963.
Exhibit
An important part of this exposition will be the largest, most
comprehensive exhibit of labor-saving equipment, new and im-
proved materials and advanced proven innovations in maintenance
practices.
Complimentary Bus Service
Frequent free bus service has been arranged for you from your
hotel headquarters to your meeting rooms in McCormick Place.
We extend a most cordial invitation to your entire membership
to visit our extensive exhibits as your time permits.
G. R. BETTS
President
National Railway Appliances
Association
332 South Michigan Avenue
Chicago 4, Illinois
PROCEEDINGS
OF THE
SIXTY-SECOND ANNUAL CONVENTION
OF THE
American Railway Engineering
Association
Engineering Division, Association of American Railroads
HELD AT
CONRAD HILTON HOTEL, CHICAGO
March 15 and 16, 1963
VOLUME 64
S71
OFFICERS, 1962-1963
C. J. Code
President
Asst. Chief Engr.
Penn. RR.
-Staff
L. A. Loggins
Sr. Vice President
Chief Engr.
S. I'. Co., Tex. &
La. Lines
T. F. Burris
//'. Vice President
Gen. Mgr., Const. &
M.W..C.&0. Ry.-
B.&O. RR.
E. J. Brown
Past President
Chief Engr.
Burlington Lines
R. H. Beeder
Past President
Chief Engr. Sys.
A.T.&S.F. Ry.
A. B. HlLLMAN
Treasurer
Ret. Chief Engr.
C.&W.I. RR.
Neal D. Howard
Executive Secretary
572
DIRECTORS, 1962-1963
C. J. Henry
1960-63
Chief Engr.
Penn. RR.
1ST
J. A. BUNJER
J0r50-<53
Chief Engr.
Union Pacific RR.
J. M. Trissal
1960-63
Vice Pres. & Chief Engr.
111. Cent. RR.
J. H. Brown
1961-64
\ i ('.en. Mgr.-
East. Lines
St. L.-S. F. Ry.
W. B. Throck-
morton
1960-63
Chief Engr.
C.R.I.&P. RR.
J. E. ElSEMANN
1961-64
Chief Engr.. West.
Lines
A. T. & S. F. Ry.
W. H. Huffman
F. R. Smith
W. L. Young
1961-64
1961-64
1962-65
Asst. Ch. Engr. -Const.
Chief Engr.
Chief Engr.
C.&N'.W. Ry.
Union. RR.
N.&W. Ry.
T. B. Hutchesoh
1962-65
Chief Kngr.
- \ I RR.
C. E. Defendorf
1962 65
Chiii Engr.
J i ii i\ A\ i.r, Jr.
1962 65
Xu i
D.&R.G.W RR.
573
NUMERICAL INDEX TO COMMITTEE REPORTS
i — Roadway and Ballast Bu
3 — Ties and Wood Preservation Bu
4 — Rail Bu
5— Track Bu
6 — Buildings Bu
7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles Bu
8 — Masonry Bu
9 — Highways Bu
n — Engineering and Valuation
Records Bu
13 — Water, Oil and Sanitation
Services Bu
14 — Yards and Terminals Bu
15 — Iron and Steel Structures Bu
16 — Economics of Railway Location
and Operation Bu
18 — Electricity Bu
20 — Contract Forms Bu
22 — Economics of Railway Labor Bu
24 — Cooperative Relations with
Universities Bu
25 — Waterways and Harbors Bu
27 — Maintenance of Way Work
Equipment Bu
28 — Clearances Bu
30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses Bu
Special Committee on Continuous
Welded Rail Bui.
Report
577- P
575- P
577, P
577, P
574, P
576, P
575, P
574, P
543
241
497
419
213
37i
223
131
574, P- i39
574, P- 159
576, P- 359
574, p. in
576, p. 407
574, p. 187
575- P- 263
576, P- 397
574, p. i97
575- P. 305
575, P- 333
575, P. 327
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
576, p. 387 Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Bu
Discussion
• 579, P- 675
■ 579, P- 669
• 579, P- 690
■ 579, P- 682
• 579, P- 636
• 579, P- 620
• 579, P- 623
. 597, p. 648
• 579, P. 592
• 579, P- 638
• 579, P- 601
• 579, P- 630
. 579, p. 606
• 579, P- 644
■ 579- P- 590
• 579, P- 655
• 579, P- 613
• 579, P- 574
■ 579- P- 664
• 579, P- 589
• 579, P- 626
577, p. 499 Bui. 579, p. 694
S74
PROGRAM
Sixty-Second Annual Meeting
Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago
March 15-16, 1963
Friday, March 15
Waldorf Room — 9:30 to 12:00
Invocation — Dr. Kenneth Hildebrand, Minister, Central Church of Chicago.
Introductions.
Greetings from the National Railway Appliances Association, G. R. Betts, President.
Greetings from the Combined Railway Suppliers Exhibit, J. P. Kleinkort, President.
President's Address — C. J. Code, Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad.
Report of Executive Secretary — Xeal D. Howard.
Report of Treasurer— A. B. Hillman, Retired Chief Engineer, Chicago & Western Indiana
and Belt Railway of Chicago.
Bulletin
Reports of Committees Numbers
28— Clearances (10:05) 575
11 — Engineering and Valuation Records (10:25) 576
20— Contract Forms (10:40) 574
25 — Waterways and Harbors (10:55) 574
14— Yards and Terminals (11:10) 574
16 — Economics of Railway Location and Operation (11:35) 574
Association Luncheon, Williford Room — 12:00 Noon
Announcement of results of election of officers.
Waldorf Room — 1:25 to 5:15
Bulletin
Reports of Committees Numbers
24 — Cooperative Relations with Universities ( 1 : 25) 576
7— Wood Bridges and Trestles ( 1 : 50) 576
8— Masonry (2:10) 575
30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses (2:30) SIS
15 — Iron and Steel Structures (2:46) 576
S7S
6— Buildings (3:05) 574
13— Water, Oil and Sanitation Services (3:17) 574
18— Electricity (3:48) 576
9— Highways (4:03) 574
22 — Economics of Railway Labor (4:23) 575
27 — Maintenance of Way Work Equipment (4:53) 575
Saturday, March 16
Waldorf Room — 9:00 to 12:00
Bulletin
Reports of Committees Numbers
3— Ties and Wood Preservation (9:00) 575
1— Roadway and Ballast (9:25) 577
5— Track (9:55) 577
4— Rail (10:30) 577
Continuous Welded Rail (10:50) 577
Closing Business
Installation of Officers.
Adjournment.
576
Nominating Committee — 1963 Election
Past Presidents Elected Members
Ray McBrian, Chairman A. L. Sams
Dir. of Research, D.&R.G.VV. RR. Asst. Chief Engr., I.C. RR.
B. R. Meyers J. F. Beaver
Vice Pres. and Chief Engr., C.&N.W. Ry. Chief Engr., Southern Ry. Sys
F. R. VVoolford B. B. Lewis
Chief Engr. VV.P. RR. Prof, of Ry. Engrg., Purdue Univ.
E. J. Brown J. J. Schmidt
Chief Engr., Burl. Lines Asst. Dir. of Research, D.&R.G.W. RR.
R. H. Beeder E. M. Hastings, Jr.
Chief Engr. Sys., A.T.&S.F. Ry. Wire Crossing Engr. Sys., C.&.O. Ry.
The foregoing committee, the consist of which includes the five latest living past
presidents of the Association and five elected members of the Association who are not
past presidents, formulated their official slate of nominations at a meeting in Chicago
on September 10, 1962, which nominations were presented to letter ballot vote of the
membership with the January-February 1963 issue of the AREA News.
Report of the Tellers
March 15, 1963
We, the Committee of Tellers, appointed to canvas the ballots for officers and
for members of the Nominating Committee, find the count of ballots as follows:
No. of
Votes
For President
L. A. Loggins, Chief Engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas and
Louisiana Lines, Houston, Tex 1,531
For Senior Vice President*
T. F. Burris, General Manager, Construction and Maintenance of Way,
Chesapeake & Ohio Railway and Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, Hunting-
ton, W. Va.
For junior Vice President
A. V. Johnston, Chief Engineer, Canadian National Railways, Montreal,
Que., Can 1,516
lor Directors (first four men elected)
A. L. Sams, Assistant Chief Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago . . 867
J. F. Beaver, Chief Engineer, Southern Railway System, Washington,
D. C 845
V. C. Hanna, Chief Engineer, Terminal Railroad Association of St. Louis,
St. Louis, Mo 836
577
No. of
Votes
H. M. Williamson, Chief Engineer System, Southern Pacific Company,
San Francisco, Calif 810
B. B. Lewis, Professor of Railway Engineering, Purdue University, Lafay-
ette, Ind 801
D. T. Faries, Chief Engineer, Bessemer & Lake Erie Railroad, Greenville,
Pa 662
S. E. Tracy, Superintendent of Work Equipment, Chicago, Burlington &
Quincy Railroad, Chicago 637
A. S. Krefting, Chief Engineer, Soo Line Railroad, Minneapolis, Minn. . . 584
For Members of Nominating Committee (first five men elected)
J. S. Parsons, Chief Engineer, Erie-Lackawanna Railroad, Cleveland,
Ohio 1,045
V. E. Glosup, Assistant Vice President— Chief Engineer, Chicago, Milwau-
kee, St. Paul & Pacific Railroad, Chicago 885
W. A. Oliver, Professor of Civil Engineering, University of Illinois, Urbana,
111 879
E. M. Hastings, Jr., Wire Crossing Engineer System, Chesapeake & Ohio
Railway, Huntington, W. Va 850
F. N. Beighley, Roadway Engineer, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway,
Springfield, Mo 780
C. E. R. Haight, Chief Engineer, Delaware & Hudson Railroad Corpora-
tion, Albany, N. Y 774
D. V. Messman, Assistant to Chief Engineer, Southern Railway System,
Washington, D. C 695
E. C. Harris, Engineer of Tests, Missouri Pacific Railroad, St. Louis, Mo.. 682
M. C. Wolf, Valuation Engineer, Northern Pacific Railway, St. Paul,
Minn 535
L. W. Howard, Land and Tax Commissioner, Belt Railway Company of
Chicago, Chicago 364
0 Under the provisions of the Constitution, T. F. Burris advances automatically from junioi
vice president to senior vice president.
The Committee of Tellers,
J. E. Wiggins, Jr., Chairman.
Office Engr., Southern Ry. Sys.
R. A. Bard well H. E. Graham R. W. Middleton
H. Beckmann V. E. Hall D. J. Moody
D. A. Bessey W. R. Hyma C. Muelder
J. E. Beran J. E. Inman W. J. Murdock
F. Brandon F. M. Jones R. E. Pearson
T. W. Brown T. D. Kern H. L. Read
J. Budztleni R. A. Mather D. C. Teal
L. A. Cerrone C. A. Meadows W. S. Tuinstra
578
Proceedings
Running Report of the 62nd Business Meeting of the American
Railway Engineering Association (Engineering Division, Asso-
ciation of American Railroads), March 15-16, 1963, Conrad
Hilton Hotel, Chicago, Including Abstracts of All Discus-
sions, All Formal Action on Committee Presentations,
Specific Papers and Addresses Presented in Connection
with Committee Reports, and Other Official Business
of the Association
Opening Session, March 15, 1963
President C. J. Code*, Presiding
The opening session of the 62nd Business Meeting convened at 9:30 am.
\Y. M. Keller (vice president — research, AAR) : Mr. Chairman, may I have the
privilege of the floor?
Gentlemen, pood morning. I have the happy privilege of performing a little cere-
mony, and I want to describe it to you. E. J. Brown, one of your past presidents,
expressed the thought that it would be nice if President Code, in addition to all of the
gavels that he possesses from his various activities over the years, had one more, and
suggested that Mr. Code's friends on the Pennsylvania Railroad and at the AAR Re-
search Center, with whom he has collaborated so effectively on many research projects,
might like to give him one.
In thinking this over, we decided that Mr. Brown had made a good suggestion.
Is Mimetimes happens, however, the fellow that does the suggesting does the work.
His tie man, C. S. Morton [superintendent of timber preservation, Galesburg, 111.], fur-
nished us with a piece of a walnut tie, from which we made the head of the gavel.
When it came to making the handle, we found that the piece of walnut wasn't long
enough ; so we got a piece of Permali from Randon Ferguson at the AAR Research
Center from which we formed the handle. This is a laminated resin-impregnated wood
ire tested for use as material for insulated rail joints. Hence, the gavel symbolizes both
a railroad tie and an insulated rail joint.
This is a pretty husky gavel, so if President Code needs to get order he can cer-
tainly gel it with this. He can develop a lot of foot-pounds of energy when he throws it
around in an arc.
Mr. Code, it gives me gnat pleasure to present to you this gavel. We hope you
will have much pleasure in using it. [Applause]
Prksident Code: Thank you, Mr. Keller. I can't tell you how much I appreciate
the thought and effort that went into the preparation of this emblem and instrument
of office. As you well know, the officers and men of the Research Department occupy
a warm place in my heart. Their cooperation and assistance over the past years have
been most helpful and inspiring. The same can be said for my friends on the Penn-
sylvania Railroad, where I first made your acquaintance
1 Assistant Chief Engineer — Staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadelphia, Pa.
S79
580 Opening Session
That the head of the gavel was made from a Burlington tie is also most appropriate
since, as some of you know, my father spent a considerable part of his railroad career
on the Burlington. Thanks again. I shall be pleased to open the meeting with this gavel.
Gentlemen, will the meeting please come to order. [One rap with the gavel] No
matter what this meeting may have been called as plans for it have been changed dur-
ing the past year — annual meeting, business meeting, restricted meeting, executive session,
convention, and so on — in the AREA News, and by you, this is, for the record, the
constitutional Sixty-Second Annual Convention of the American Railway Engineering
Association and concurrent Annual Meeting of the Engineering Division, Association
of American Railroads. Accordingly, I declare the meeting officially opened for the
transaction of Association business.
While this convention will be curtailed in many respects as compared to our tradi-
tional conventions, one thing we don't want to omit or curtail is our usual practice
of beginning our convention with an invocation. We have invited Dr. Kenneth Hilde-
brandt, minister of the Central Church of Chicago, which holds regular Sunday morning
services in the Towers of this hotel, to bring this invocation. Dr. Hildebrandt.
Invocation
Reverend Kenneth Hildebrandt: Will you stand, please. Let us unite our hearts
in prayer.
O Lord our Lord, how excellent is Thy Name in all the earth. Before the moun-
tains were brought forth or ever Thou hadst formed the earth and the world, even
from everlasting to everlasting Thou Art God.
And yet Thou art as near as our deepest need. Therefore we turn to Thee in
quietness and new confidence at the beginning of these sessions, invoking Thy presence
and offering Thee our praise.
We are met in strangely tangled times, O God, and we need a wisdom beyond our
own. We who gather here are used to planning, to projection, to thinking things
through, and yet our own thought and planning can take us only so far. Therefore,
we ask that light, that guidance, which comes only from Thee, that it may illumine
our minds and motivate our spirits and raise our sights and give us hope.
Let us do those things needful in these sessions, that Thy larger purpose may be
fulfilled, that purpose under which all men live and labor, that tests our work, whether
it be enduring or as the chaff which the wind driveth away. Keep us ever aware of our
larger opportunities and obligations; and if we feel that in these days of tension we are
under too much pressure, let us remember that it is pressure that produces the diamond.
So may it be for our leadership and our work.
To Thee, O God, be the glory and majesty, dominion and praise, both now and
forever more. Amen.
President Code: Thank you, Dr. Hildebrandt. We appreciate your very meaningful
and appropriate invocation. Through your ministry and your having met before with
railroad groups on a number of occasions, you are not unknown to many of us; but
this, I believe, is the first time you have met with our Association. We appreciate your
coming, and hope that we may have the pleasure of your meeting with us on another
occasion.
Address of President Code 581
While it is hardly necessary, I would like to present to you those here with me at
the speaker's table. Here again, as at last year's meeting, we have "cut corners." Instead
of being flanked by all of our officers and directors, past presidents, and a number of
special guests, as has been our usual custom, there are here with me today only one
vice president, your executive secretary and your treasurer.
First, I would like to present your senior vice president, L. A. Loggins, chief
engineer, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines. [Applause]
Next, I had hoped to introduce your junior vice president, T. Fred Burris, until
recently chief engineer, system, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, and now general manager,
construction and maintenance of way, C&O-B&O. Mr. Burris is tied up with floods on
his railroad. He called me on the phone yesterday afternoon and told me he has about
300 miles of railroad either washed out or in the river, 1 train and 17 cars in the water,
and the worst flood condition he has ever seen. He said he hoped he could get here
Saturday morning but that it was doubtful. I am sure all of us are sorry Fred can't
be with us.
Next, your executive secretary, Neal Howard. [Applause]
Your treasurer, A. B. Hillman, retired chief engineer, Chicago & Western Indiana
Railroad and Belt Railway of Chicago. [Applause]
I am sure I will have occasion to call on all of these men for reports and assistance
throughout our meeting.
In limiting the number here with me this morning at the speaker's table, I would
not have you feel that we will completely overlook members of our Board of Direction
and those of our past presidents who can be with us at this convention. Along with
several special guests, they will all be at the main speaker's table at our General Lunch-
eon this noon, when I will have the pleasure of presenting them to you. Incidentally,
if you have not already purchased your tickets for this luncheon, may I ask that you
excuse yourself from the room and do so without further delay. The chairman of our
Luncheon Committee tells me that he has to make a firm commitment to the catering
department by 10 o'clock.
The first item of official business on our program is approval of the minutes of
our 1962 Annual Convention, which were published in the June-July Proceedings Issue
of the AREA Bulletin, No. 572 — a copy of which was furnished to each member. Unless
I hear some objection or correction to these minutes, we will dispense with the reading
of the 220 pages contained in them.
Hearing no objections or corrections, I declare the minutes of the 1962 Annual
Convention of our Association approved as presented in the Proceedings.
Address of President C. J. Code
It is my somewhat doubtful privilege this year to preside over a different type of
annual meeting of our Association, different in many respects from the traditional type
of AREA convention, and different in some respects from the restricted meeting we
held in 1962. For various reasons that meeting was curtailed in length and in attendance.
For slightly different reasons, this meeting is also curtailed in length, in attendance,
in type of program, and in some of those supplementary sources of enjoyment which
have been traditional in connection with our conventions.
However, in this case, the features customarily expected in connection with our
annual convention are being postponed rather than eliminated. We are, in effect, carry-
ing signals today for the full-scale membership meeting which will be held in October
582 Opening Session
in connection with the 1963 American Railway Progress Exposition. We are running in
two sections. This is the advance section at which the important and necessary business
of the Association will be accomplished; the second section in October will carry the
special features which we have all learned to look forward to, the social features and
entertainment, and the glamor which will be missing to a large extent from our meetings
today and tomorrow. We are carrying the mail and the coaches. The diner, the private
room cars, and the club car will follow on the second section.
I will probably go down in history as the first, and I hope the only, president of
the AREA who ever invited the supply men, other than those having important business
to transact, to stay away from our meeting. This was done for the sole purpose of
keeping total attendance down to the point where it would not be the subject of criticism,
while permitting the fullest possible attendance of those who are vitally concerned with
the business to be transacted.
As most of you know, consideration was given to postponing our entire meeting
until October 1963 ; however, unless we were to make a permanent change to October
meeting dates, such a procedure would have made a hopeless scramble of the scheduling
of committee operations and publication of reports and Bulletins, and would have
extended the term of one president to one-and-one-half years, while limiting the term
of the next to six months. Many of us think that a permanent change to fall meeting
dates would be inadvisable. Hence, all things having been considered, we arrived at the
present plan of running, so to speak, in two sections. An even more restricted type
of business meeting was suggested but rejected.
I am pleased and proud to say, that despite the interruption of the normal course
of our conventions for two successive years, committee work has continued on schedule.
While there have been a few less meetings than in previous years, a sign, no doubt of
the straitened economic circumstances of many railroads, the enthusiasm of the com-
mittees has shown no sign of slackening, and our committees continue to put out a
volume and quality of progress and final reports, of information, and of Manual
material of which we can all be proud.
The mark which we leave on history as an Association will largely be the printed
word. The Association also leaves its mark on men's minds, and on their hearts, but
men pass on and the printed word remains.
My first acquaintance with the AREA was in a study of its Proceedings for the
purpose of preparing a college seminar paper. A review of 10 years of the work of one
subcommittee was a liberal education in the subject I had chosen and has been of value
to me in later years. I have since had many occasions to direct younger men to this
same source of almost unlimited information. No railroad engineering library is complete
without a full set of AREA proceedings, and I know of no more important reference
work. The duty and obligation of maintaining this source of information complete and
up to date in the face of a rapidly changing industry falls on our committees. The more
than 1100 men who serve on these committees are the bones and muscles and the brains
of this association, and I know of no group of men that is more important to the rail-
road industry. Committee members, and committee chairman in particular, I salute you,
and urge you to continue to carry on the traditions of more than 60 years, as you
have done this year, annual meeting or no annual meeting.
Again with respect to annual meetings, or conventions, the future looks brighter
than the present. There seems to be every assurance of a full iy2 day meeting in 1964
and a full 2|J^ day meeting with an exhibit in 1965.
Report of Executive Secretary 583
A few words more about our sessions today and tomorrow. I have made a strenu-
ous, and I hope successful, effort to generate some discussion from the floor in con-
niption with committee reports. My fear now is that we may lack time for all the
discussion that may be offered. Nevertheless, whether you have been specifically re-
quested to present some discussion or not, please feel free to ask questions or to com-
ment at the proper time to the fullest extent that the schedule permits.
President Code [continuing] : The next order of official business of this meeting
is the report of our executive secretary, Neal Howard. Mr. Howard, we shall be
pleased to hear your report at this time.
Report of Executive Secretary-
Mr. President, members of the American Railway Engineering Association, and
guests:
The report of your secretary was completed more than a month ago, with the
completion of membership figures and other data as of February 1, in accordance with
past practice, and as a whole, covering 19 pages, appears in the March Year-Book Bul-
letin of the Association, which was mailed to members at the earliest possible date, early
during the current week. Presumably, few of you have received your copies, and thus
have not seen the report, but I have a copy before me and I would like to take a few
minutes to highlight some of the secretary's report.
As a whole the report covers, in quite some detail, for the record, all aspects of
Association activity during 1962, and comments on the prospects for the year ahead.
It says that in all respects, except one, the state of your Association at the close
of 1962 — its 64th year — was good. But having said that, it would be less than honest
not to say that, with better economic conditions generally, and especially in the railroad
industry, things could have been better. The one exception, and it is an important one,
\ssociation membership, which was down appreciably for the second successive
year. To me, this is so important that I want to comment on it a little later in more
detail.
That the Association had a good year generally in 1962 is documented throughout
the report. Membership, although down, remains relatively high; the activities and
production of committees, even without the desired financial support for research activi-
ties, continued at a high level; the Association's service to members was in no way
reduced, and its cooperation with other groups and with the colleges was actually
expanded; and even though the Association had a deficit year financially — to achieve
certain desirable ends — as will be reported to you by your treasurer, its total assets
remain relatively hi^h. Most important, as the year ended, the interest of committees
and the membership generally remained high ; the Association was looking forward to
two important meetings in 1963 — this one, and its participation, in October, in the
American Railway Progress Exposition; and as President Code has just told you, your
Board has made firm plans for a 2^-day convention in March 1964, to be held at the
Pick-Congress Hotel, Chicago, and for another 2IX-day convention in 1965 — we hope
at McCormick Place. Chicago, accompanied by an exhibit of the National Railway
\|>pliances Association.
So. the Association did have a good year in 1962, anil i- planning ahead in a big
way, but as I stated earlier, then- wa> one exception to the generally favorable record
of 1962 — a drop in membership — which must be dealt with in the year ahead.
584 Opening Session
For several years your secretary, along with many others, I am sure, has been
concerned about the future growth of the Association — even sustaining the current mem-
bership level. What has happened during the last two years has proved that concern
was justified. After an unbroken record of growth in membership from 1944 through
1957 — a total of 14 years — the membership of the Association has slipped backward in
three of the last five years — 1958, 1961, and 1962 — and might have slipped backward
in the other two years had losses in these two years not been overcome by special
circumstances or by special recruiting effort on the part of a number of our members
on their respective railroads.
As of February 1, 1963, the total membership of the Association stood at 3261 —
a net loss of 86 members — compared with the membership of 3347 one year earlier,
and a net loss of 146 from the membership total two years earlier. This net loss of
membership during the past two years has resulted primarily from the enrollment of
too few new members, in conjunction with increased losses through deaths, resignations,
and being dropped for non-payment of dues. During 1962, for example, the Association
took in only 153 new members, while losing 263 members through various causes.
Obviously, this trend must not continue. The maintenance of a high level of mem-
bership is essential to the well being of the Association and to the contribution which
it can make to supervisory officers in the engineering and maintenance of way depart-
ment, and to the railroad industry. The only alternative to the maintenance of the past
high level of membership is reduced member services to hold down costs, or higher
annual dues — neither of which would be desirable.
With the reduction taking place in the total number of technically trained employees
in the engineering and maintenance of way departments of the railroads — a trend which
can be expected to continue with further increased technology, and railroad reorganiza-
tions and consolidations, the answer to the Association's membership maintenance prob-
lem undoubtedly lies in the enrollment of a larger percentage of the remaining engineering
and maintenance of way department personnel, both old employees and new employees.
This solution can and should have the enthusiastic endorsement of all members of the
Association, and of their railroads, because it is to the benefit of all concerned.
That this solution offers a fertile field is indicated in the fact that Association
memberships on many railroads represent a relatively small percentage of the total
number of supervisory employees in their engineering and maintenance departments
who are eligible for membership. It is also evident in the fact that many who do apply
for membership do not do so until they have accumulated far beyond the number of
years of experience required to entitle them to membership.
In this connection, I would remind you that full membership in the Association is
available to railway officers and engineering and maintenance-of-way employees who
have had anything more than five years' experience in location, construction, operation
or maintenance (an engineering degree counting for three of these years), and that every
young college graduate taken on by your railroad in its engineering department is imme-
diately eligible for the grade of junior member — without entrance fee, and at dues of
only $5 a year. Furthermore, junior membership may be had or retained until the end
of the year in which a man becomes 30 years of age.
Please make these facts known on your respective railroads and disabuse any of
your associates of the thought that they must have a "special invitation" to acquire
membership. It is true that, at our highest level, we are a specification-writing Associa-
tion, which requires members of wide knowledge and experience, but we are also an
Association which develops younger men into specification writers. Thus, the Associa-
Report of Treasurer 585
tion has a place in its membership for men of proper caliber anywhere along the line
in their railroad careers — from assistant on tht- engineering corps, on up.
The essential high level of Association membership in the future can be obtained
if these facts are made known — and if we can secure a higher degree of membership
saturation on many railroads. This, I contend can be secured, to the benefit of all con-
cerned, by interested effort on the part of the present membership, and especially those
in higher supervisory capacity. It was done before — in the Golden Jubilee Year of the
Association between February 1, 1948, and February 1, 1949, when through the con-
certed effort of its officers and members, 802 new members were enrolled, putting the
Association on the solid basis it has retained to this date. It can be done again in 1963,
at least to the extent of recouping the membership losses of the past two years, and
of offsetting the inevitable losses that will occur during the year due to deaths and
other causes.
If this is done, and if the Association can continue to merit the continued encourage-
ment of railroad managements that it has had for many years in the past, its future
will be secure — with a continued high level of service to its members and to the rail-
road industry — and I might add that membership application forms are available to you,
in any number desired, at the secretary's desk out in the corridor. Thank you. [Applause]
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Howard. We are glad that your report of Asso-
ciation activities during the past year is so generally favorable, because we are all aware
that this has been another year of considerable stress on many of our members and some
restriction on our activities. I share your concern with the further loss in membership
during the year, if only because we, as an Association, cannot do the most good for the
railroads unless there is the greatest possible saturation of membership among those on
the railroads qualified for membership — and I am sure that situation does not prevail.
Without sustained membership, too, we would not long have the necessary funds
to continue all of our present services to members — which would be most unfortunate.
Unquestionably, this matter will be given top priority by our new Board of Direction
in the year ahead. Thank you again for your report.
The next order of business is the report of our treasurer, A. B. Hillman, retired
chief engineer, Chicago & Western Indiana and Belt Railway of Chicago. Mr. Hillman.
we will be pleased to hear your report at this time.
Report of Treasurer
Mr. President, members and guests: I will not attempt to detail the various items
of receipts and disbursements of the Association during 1962, suffice it to say that they
are all set forth in the financial statement for the year, which appears in the March
Bulletin, and have all been vouched for by our Association's auditors. However, I would
like to comment briefly on the finances of the Association for the past year, and on the
prospect for the year ahead.
Last year at this time I said that the year ahead presented a difficult financial prob-
lem flue to the necessity of reprinting the Manual in its entirety in order to replenish
a depleted stock on hand, and at the same time the issuance oi i large Supplement to
the Manual, even larger than the large Supplemenl published in 1961. In fact, it was
estimated at that time that the Association would incur a deficit of some $13,000 in
1962. I also stated that if the then anticipated extensive Supplement to the Portfolio
of Trackwork Plans should become a reality in 1962 and it did -then the anticipated
deficit would be considerably larger,
586 O p e n i ng Session
Now I am happy to say, if one can be happy in reporting a deficit, that through
a fortunate series of circumstances, such as extensive drafting assistance made available
b) three railroads and two trackwork manufacturers, which materially lessened the cost
oi completing the Track Plan Supplement, sharp printshop economies, and most im-
portant, an immediate demand by non-member holders of both the Portfolio and the
Manual for the large 1962 Supplements — with subsequent higher revenues to the Asso-
ciation than expected — the 1962 deficit was appreciably less than anticipated, and
amounted to $11,246.84. This is by no means a small deficit, but under less favorable
circumstances it could well have been some $15,000 to $16,000.
While this deficit was brought about largely by unusually heavy publication costs
as explained, it was also influenced by some $3000 lower receipts due primarily to the
smaller total 1962 convention registration fees of $1197, compared to a total of $4469
collected at our full 2J^-day convention in 1961 ; also by some $760 smaller receipts
in our membership account. To the extent that these lower receipts reflect less member
interest, fewer applications for membership, and a smaller number of dues-paying mem-
bers in 1962, this is an unhealthy situation, as pointed out by your secretary.
But, thanks to the large build-up in inventory of saleable publications on hand
as the result of the reprinting of the Manual during the year, I hasten to add that as
of the end of 1962 the total assets of the Association were only some $2000 under those
of a year earlier, and that the Association is in a sound financial condition.
As for 1963, your Board of Direction has approved a balanced budget by curtailing
some expenditures and deferring others, but I would point out at the same time that
this desirable situation contemplates a continued heavy demand for the publications
of the Association, at least the continuation of our present level of membership, and
continuing interest in and support of the activities of the Association by the American
railroads. To the extent that each of you can in any way influence favorably these three
important factors, your fullest cooperation is earnestly solicited. [Applause]
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hillman. We are not unaware that this is the
eleventh year that you have served as our treasurer, and we are deeply appreciative
of this long service. I am sorry you had to report a substantial deficit during my year
as president, but I am sure this was to be expected in a year of exceptionally high
publications costs to update our Manual and Portfolio of Trackwork Plans, and to
replenish our stock of these publications for future sales.
We are pleased to hear that the prospects are for a balanced, or near-balanced,
budget in the year ahead — which would appear to be a real possibility if we can sustain
our membership. Thank you again, Mr. Hillman.
Gentlemen, you have heard the reports of our secretary and our treasurer. I shall
be glad to entertain a motion that these reports be accepted.
[A motion that the reports be accepted was made, was seconded, was put to a vote,
and carried.]
President Code: The keynote of our meeting this year is "Business" — the official
business winding up our Association year. It being unnecessary for anyone to elaborate
on or stress this, other than your officers, we have no keynote speaker for this meeting;
but there are two men in our audience this morning whom I do want to present and
give an opportunity to bring us a few words of greetings from their respective Asso-
ciations. I refer to G. R. Betts, president of the National Railway Appliances Associa-
tion, and to J. P. Kleinkort, chairman of the recently organized Combined Railway
Greetings from Supply Associations 587
Suppliers Exhibit, which will sponsor the exhibit aspects of the American Railway
Progress Exposition this fall.
Mr. Betts, if you will come to the microphone, we would be pleased to hear a
lew words from you.
Greetings from NRAA
G. R. Betts: President Code, directors of AREA and members:
It is certainly a pleasure to represent the National Railway Appliances Association
and its 156 members, and to wish you well in your deliberations that will be held in
the next day and a half. It is always a pleasant duty to be with you and get better
acquainted.
While this is an abbreviated meeting, I am sure you can accomplish a great deal
in a short space of time; and I say that partly because, from my own observation,
railroad men have uncanny ability to reduce their communications to an absolute mini-
mum. So, if you are hard put I am sure you will get an awful lot done in this next
day and a half.
We also are very happy to know that you are going to return to a somewhat more
normal schedule of meetings in 1964 and 1965. We feel this is a constructive and worth-
while thing. If I may add one thought, I would say that we all need to think more
positively and aggressively, and be sure that out of these problems we have created, or
that have been created for us, we don't develop a negative attitude. I think it is en-
couraging and stimulating that you are going to try to go back to full sessions. I believe
I can definitely assure you that in 1965 there will be a National Railway Appliances
Exhibition in conjunction with your meeting. In the meantime we will be supporting
you at your meeting next year, and will look forward to a full-blown session, rather
than the 1*2 -day affair which has been forced on us at this time.
Thank you very much, gentlemen. [Applause]
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Betts. We have had a long and pleasant rela-
tionship with your Association. We recall with pleasure the oustanding exhibit put on
by your group at McCormick Place in connection with our 1961 convention. We look
forward with anticipation — beyond the combined exhibit this fall — to another exhibit
by your Association in conjunction with our convention in 1965. Thank you, Mr. Betts,
for meeting with us here this morning, and for your good wishes.
We would now be pleased if Mr. Kleinkort would say a few words to us, possibly
bringing us up-to-date on plans being formulated for the combined suppliers' exhibit
this coming fall.
Mr. Kleinkort, who is a past president of NRAA, was honored in his selection as
chairman of the Combined Railway Suppliers Exhibit which will put on the exhibit
thK fall, and which, if I am correctly informed, will be the largest railroad exhibit
ever staged in the United States.
Mr. Kleinkort, I am pleased to turn the microphone over to you.
Greetings from Combined Railway Suppliers Exhibit
J. P. KLEINKORT: Mr. President, officers, numbers and guests:
I speak for four railroad supply associations and bring their best wishes for a
successful convention, even though it will be short.
588 OpeningSession
The important aspect of our fall show is to try to develop a real, sound impact
on the general public, to create a strong feeling that in the future the railroads are
going to grow rather than recede.
As you all know, there is a possibility of further reduction in employment in the
railroad industry. However, we are going to do a lot more with less people; this will
have a beneficial effect on the financial welfare of the railroads and eventually will
create more employment in the railroad industry and in the supply industry that serves
the railroads.
The size of the exhibit has been pointed out by several people. We are quite cer-
tain it will have great size, but more important is the fact that you will see more than
you have ever seen in your life at this type of show. We do hope that you will take
advantage of the opportunity, because the possibilities for further development of
machinery, parts and supplies can be enhanced and expanded by the kind of con-
tribution you can give in learning to use the material that will be exhibited there, and
in offering suggestions for its improvement.
This kind of an activity cannot be offered frequently. A large exhibit like this is
quite costly. It is possible that as much as $1,500,000 might be spent to put it on,
when you consider the expense of renting the space, getting the equipment there, and
getting the people to man the exhibits. It is therefore quite important that the exhibitors
get the full benefit of the investment they make to bring this equipment together. We
feel that many of you here in the railroad industry can have great impact on the way
this educational exhibit will be received, for your own benefit and for the benefit of the
suppliers who will be there.
I sincerely hope you will make it possible for as many people in your employ as
possible to attend. The educational advantages will be worth while, and I am sure they
will reach farther down into your ranks than ever before.
Thank you for this opportunity to speak. [Applause]
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Kleinkort. We appreciate your greetings, your
comments on the October exhibit, and your invitation to our members to participate
in it. In conjunction with our one-day full membership meeting on October 9, I can
assure you that we will view your exhibit in full force.
We are sorry that we could not encourage more members of NRAA and your
group to meet with us here during this March business meeting, but we hope to make
up for that in October.
Gentlemen, at this point in our program we turn to the meat of our business
meeting — the presentation of the reports of our standing and special committees, and
consideration of their specific recommendations.
We do not know how many members of each committee are here or will be here,
but we have tried to make it clear that there was no restriction on the attendance of
any committee members; so we have, we hope, provided enough seats here at our two
speaker's tables to take care of all committee members who may be present. We hope,
therefore, that as the different committees are called, all members present will take their
places here at our two speaker's tables.
However, in the interest of saving time, may I ask that the chairmen, vice chair-
men, secretaries, and all subcommitteee chairmen — especially those to present reports —
take their places at the main speaker's table, and that other members of committees first
fill out the main speaker's table and then overflow, as necessary, at the lower speaker's
table. This will shorten the time necessary for subcommittee chairmen to come to the
microphone to present their reports.
Discussion 589
Discussion on Clearances
[For report, see Bulletin 575, pages 333-358]
President Code [continuing] : Again this year our first committee to report is
Committee 28 — Clearances, the chairman of which is J. G. Greenlee, clearance engineer,
Pennsylvania Railroad. Mr. Greenlee, I shall be glad if you and the members of your
committee will come to the platform — you and your vice chairman to take places imme-
diately at my left, where a microphone has been provided for you.
Mr. Greenlee, I now turn this microphone over to you.
Chairman J. G. Greenlee: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
Your Committee 28 reports on seven assignments for the year 1962. Only the high-
lights of the reports will be given now. The details can be found in the Association's
Bulletin 575, December 1062, page 334.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Greenlee: There is no report on this assignment, as our review of
Chapter 28 has been completed and no further revisions are required at this time.
B. Bristow, principal assistant engineer, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific, is subcommittee
chairman.
Assignment 2 — Compilation of the Railroad Clearance Requirements
of the Various States.
Chairman Greenlee: In Bulletin 568 of December 1961, pages 338-339, this com-
mittee submitted the clearance requirements for the State of New York, which were
effective April 20, 1961, to be added to the clearance chart dated July 20, 1961. A can-
vass is now being made for any recent changes in the various states, and the clearance
chart will be revised accordingly when deemed necessary. J. F. Smith, inspector, Illinois
Central Railroad, Chicago, is subcommittee chairman.
Assignment 3 — Review Clearance Diagrams for Recommended Practice.
CHAIRMAN Greenlee: This assignment has been discontinued and replaced with a
new assignment dealing with electronic devices for recording clearance measurements
of structures along the right-of-way and of cars and loads in yards and at interchange
points. C. W. Hamilton, engineer of design, Wabash Railroad, St. Louis, will direct
this new assignment.
Assignment 5 — Clearance Allowances to Provide for Vertical and Hori-
zontal Movement of Equipment Due to Lateral Play, Wear and Spring
Deflection, Collaborating with the Mechanical Division, AAR.
Chairman Greenlee: E. E. Mills, design draftsman, Pennsylvania Railroad, Chi-
is subcommittee chairman. Due to the fact that Mr. Mills has recently had an eye
operation, he has asked me to present his report.
Your committee submits as information a report on "Effect of Spring Travel,
Height of Center of Gravity and Speed on Freight Car Clearance Requirements on
Curved and Tangent Track." It can be found in Bulletin 575, Vol. 64, pages 335 to 354.
These tests are a continuation of those run in 1955 and reported in the AREA Pro-
ceedings Vol. 59, 195 c These additional tests were made to investigate the
effect of partially loaded cars and branch line standards of track maintenance on clear-
ance requirements. Cars in the 1955 tests were slightly overloaded, and it was thought
that bottoming of the springs might have restricted movement of the car bodies. This
report covers tests on one-half and fully loaded cars with 70 and 85 in combined center
590 Clearan ces
of gravity heights, and empty cars, which were run on the Delaware, Lackawanna &
Western Railroad, now Erie-Lackawanna Railroad, in October and November 1959.
The two cars tested were equipped with different types of springs, car "A" having
short-travel springs (1-^ in travel) and car "B" having long-travel springs (3li in
travel) .
The long-travel springs for freight cars were put into service to reduce vertical and
lateral impacts and vibration on lading at higher operating speeds. As of January 1.
1956, the short-travel spring was abandoned, and all new or rebuilt cars were to have
long-travel springs. It is estimated that as of January 1, 1963, 50 percent of all freight
cars have long-travel springs with travel of more than \% in.
The clearance requirements of the various roads were established at a time when
all equipment was using the old short-travel springs, therefore it is imperative that we
know what additional clearance is required for equipment with the long-travel springs.
The results of these tests are summarized in Table 3 of the report. Due to the wide
scatter in the roll angle, a value of 30 percent of the average roll displacement for 6 in
unbalance as found in the 1955 tests, has been used for the spread of average roll dis-
placement in this table. Comparison of this table with Table 4 on page 325 of the
earlier report shows that bottoming of the springs due to slight overloading did not
unduly restrict movement of the car bodies in the 1955 tests.
It is recommended that Table 4 of the 1958 report be considered as representative
of the maximum lateral clearance required for track with a main-line standard of main-
tenance. As discussed on page 321 of the 1958 report, an additional 1 in should be
allowed for badly worn cars. It should be kept in mind that these displacements are
due to car body roll and lateral play movements only, and are requirements for clear-
ance beyond those due to curvature, track elevation and equipment dimensions.
The additional clearance required for equipment with long-travel springs has been
discussed, on the basis of these reports, with members of this committee and with
clearance men of various roads, and to date we have been unable to discover a single
incident that has been brought about because of the long travel springs; however, this
situation may change as the equipment becomes older and approaches the worn condi-
tion limits. This committee intends to give further study to this subject in order to
make some recommendation in the near future as to additional clearance required for
long-travel springs, as the situation progresses.
In addition to the above, tests have been run on certain piggyback equipment.
In May 1961, tests were made on the Burlington with an 85-ft TTX car with two
40-ft trailers mounted on the car and an 85-ft 3-level auto-carrier. It is intended to
make further tests on this type of equipment, and the results of these tests will be the
subject of future reports.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Mills. Your report is accepted as information.
Assignment 6 — Compilation in Table Form of Offsets for Overhanging
Loads on Curves.
Chairman Greenlee: Assignment 6 has been completed and will be replaced with
a new assignment under which we shall try to formulate a more complete method for
reporting loads of excessive dimensions for use of the transportation departments. J. E.
Beran, draftsman, Chicago, Burlington & Quincy, Chicago, is subcommittee chairman
for the new assignment.
Discussion 591
Assignment 8 — Review Present Methods of Presenting Published Clear-
ance Information to Determine How This Can Be Simplified and/or
Standardized.
Chairman Greenlee: J. A. Crawford, assistant engineer, Chesapeake & Ohio Rail-
way, Richmond, Va., subcommittee chairman, will give his report.
J. A. Crawford: Mr. President, Mr. Chairman, members of the Association and
guests:
A glance through the Railway Line Clearance publication will show that there are
almost as many methods of publishing clearance information as there are railroads. You
can also readily see how difficult it would be for a clearance man to check the clearance
possibilities of a shipment from coast to coast over the various railroads involved. Yet
on all of our roads today there are clearance men spending many hours every day doing
just that. The purpose of this assignment is to devise a method to eliminate this waste
of valuable man-hours.
It has been concluded that any standardized clearance publication must contain the
following five items:
1. Clearance and weight limitations for routes between interchange or junction
points on the railroad.
2. An index in alphabetical order for the routes.
3. A column number assigned to each route.
4. A small map showing the lines with interchange and junction points of the
various routes.
5. Clearances based on cars up to 55 ft long with truck centers up to 44 ft.
The proposed method illustrated by a mock-up in our report in Bulletin 575 for a
fictitious railroad in the Railway Line Clearance publication, is our opinion for a pro-
posed method far superior to that now being used by many railroads.
Many railroads are satisfied with their representation in the Railway Line Clear-
ance publication, and many of them are very good. The governing factors which dictate
the representation for each individual railroad vary greatly. For these reasons it does
not seem possible to develop a single method acceptable to all roads.
The proposed method is submitted as information for any road interested in
improving their method of publication.
This committee would be pleased to receive any comments or criticisms of this pro-
posed method in order that we might present with next years report an optimum
method that can be adopted as recommended practice.
I'm -mount Code: Thank you, Mr. Crawford. Your report is accepted as information,
and I hope you yet some suggestions from the members during the coming year.
I- t ru re any discussion of Mr. Crawford's report, or a question? Mr. Greenlee.
Assignment 9 — Review Clearance Records of Various Railroads, Look-
ing to Developing a Standardized Method for Charting all Obstructions.
Or \iR\i\v Gbeeztlzx: Sample clearance diagrams of structures along the right-
of-way were obtained from various railroads. From these diagrams a simple clearance
diagram has been prepared, combining the most desirable methods used by the various
roads. This simple diagram lia^ been sent to all members of Committee 28 for com-
ments and recommendation- After all recommendation-, have been received a final
diagram will be prepared, looking to submitting it for publication, as information, in
the 196.? report, for consideration b) the Association as recommended practice. M. E.
592 Engineering and Valuation Records
Vosseller, draftsman, Central Railroad of New Jersey, Jersey City, is subcommittee
chairman.
Chairman Greenlee [continuing] : Mr. President, this concludes the report of
Committee 28. Since this is my final report as chairman of Committee 28, I would like
to introduce the new chairman and vice chairman of this committee. J. A. Crawford,
assistant engineer, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Richmond, Va., is the new vice chair-
man. R. L. Williams, office manager, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago, is the new
chairman.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Greenlee and members of your committee, for
the increasingly important work which your committee has carried on during the last
three years under your direction. With piggyback operations, bigger and longer cars on
the increase, the work of your committee becomes increasingly important. We wish
that time permitted a more detailed description of some of the work which has been
carried out by the AAR research staff for and in behalf of your committee.
Are there any questions? If not, we thank you, Mr. Greenlee, for your very able
direction of the work of Committee 28 during the past three years. We welcome Mr.
Crawford as the new vice chairman of your committee and Mr. Williams as the new
chairman, knowing that they will carry forward aggressively the unfinished work of
your committee.
Mr. Williams, if you will step up to the podium I would like to present you with
your official chairman's gavel. The band on it reads: R. L. Williams, Chairman, Com-
mittee 28 — Clearances, 1963-1965. I am sure you will use it effectively and wisely in
directing the meetings of your committee in the years immediately ahead. [Applause]
Thank you again, Chairman Greenlee. Your committee is now excused with the
thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Engineering and Valuation Records
[For report, see Bulletin 576, pages 387-395]
President Code: The second committee to make a report to this meeting is our
Committee 11 — Engineering and Valuation Records, the chairman of which is M. C.
Wolf, valuation engineer, Northern Pacific Railway. Mr. Wolf, if you and the members
of your committee will come to the platform, I shall be glad to turn this meeting
over to you.
Chairman M. C. Wolf: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
The report of Committee 11 — Engineering and Valuation Records, appears in Bul-
letin 576, January 1963, pages 387 to 395, incl. This committee has eight assignments,
upon which I should like to comment briefly.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Wolf: An extensive revision of the Manual was submitted at the Annual
Meeting of March 1962, where it was approved for adoption. No further revisions of
our chapter of the Manual now are proposed. I should like to have the subcommittee
chairman rise and be recognized. He is John L. Manthey, auditor of capital expenditures,
Elgin, Joliet & Eastern Railway.
Assignment 2 — Bibliography on Subjects Pertaining to Engineering and
Valuation Records.
Chairman Wolf: The report on this assignment will be given by the subcommittee
chairman, J. Bert Byars, assistant to chief engineer, Denver & Rio Grande Western
Railroad.
Discussion 593
J. Bert Byars: The report on this assignment appears on pages 388 to 390 of Bul-
letin 576. It is a list of currently published articles dealing with valuation, depreciation,
office procedures and railroad accounting, with brief comments regarding their content.
This list and the lists of recent years are recommended to the attention of all
officers and supervisors whose concern with economy of operation results in their need
for information on valuation subjects.
Assignment 3 — Office and Drafting Practices.
Chairman Wolf: A study of microfilming of records and reports is in progress,
but no report is made. I should like to have the subcommittee chairman rise and be
recognized. He is Walter A. Krauska, assistant engineer, Missouri Pacific Railroad.
Assignment 5 — Use of Statistics and Data Processing in Railway
Engineering.
Chairman Wolf: A study is in progress, but report is being withheld pending revi-
sion of Interstate Commerce Commission requirements for valuation reports.
This subcommittee has two co-chairmen. I should like to have co-chairman William
J. Pease, assistant general auditor, Illinois Central Railroad, rise and be recognized.
I regret that the other co-chairman, Howard R. Williams, valuation engineer, Union
Pacific Railroad, is unable to be here today. Mr. Williams also is vice chairman of
Committee 11.
Assignment 6 — Valuation and Depreciation.
Chairman Wolf: The report on this assignment will be given by the subcommittee
chairman, C. R. Dolan, engineer — capital expenditures, Missouri Pacific Railroad.
C. R. Dolan: One of the items covered in the report on Assignment 6 is the Ele-
ments of Value for all Class I line haul and switching and terminal companies as of
December 31, 1961, issued by the ICC Bureau of Accounts. The Elements of Value
Statements were completed and issued in January 1963.
Another item mentioned in the report referred to the 1962 Revision of Deprecia-
tion Guidelines and Investment Credit for Income Tax Purposes. One of the salient
features of the new guidelines for depreciation is the radical reduction from Bulletin
F's 5000 item-lives to Revenue Procedure 62-21 providing for approximately 75 guide-
line classes and lives divided among four groups, which in itself is going to lend itself
to greater simplicity. In addition, it is noted that the guidelines have taken into account
and are based upon a new approach; that is, economic life rather than physical life
of property has been emphasized. This new approach is borne out in that the test for
reasonable depreciation allowances will be determined by the relationship between those
allowances and future replacement practices. This relationship will be determined by
the ratio of the accumulated depreciation reserve to the depreciable basis of the assets
being depreciated.
Another item covered in the report is the 7 percent investment credit. The 7 per-
cent investment credit as provided for under Section 2 of the Revenue Act of 1962
will have a significant impact on the industry in that it has both favorable and unfavor-
able effects. The investment credit provisions allow a taxpayer's liability for income tax
for the year 1962, or any year thereafter, to be reduced by an amount equal to 7 per-
cent of the "qualified investment" in depreciable property for the year. The investment
credit is applicable to the cost of tangible personal property— Otherwise known as Sec-
tion 38 property — with a useful life of four years or more, not including B building
or its structural components. Railroad tracks and signals have been determined as being
Section 38 property.
594 Engineering and Valuation Records
The Act contains the provision which requires that the basis of any Section 38
property be reduced by an amount equal to 7 percent of the qualified investment with
respect to such property. Particular note should be made of this provision wherein a
carrier even though it has no tax liability must reduce the basis of the Section 38
property by the 7 percent investment credit, which will have the effect of reducing
depreciation allowances in subsequent years.
In connection with these revisions it should be pointed out that it will be very
important that unit records of costs and useful lives be maintained on all property
subject to the investment credit despite the fact that a carrier may be using a more
generalized depreciation treatment such as recommended under Revenue Procedure
62-21.
The report is submitted as information only.
G. S. Sowers [Missouri Pacific]: May I ask a question at this time? If these new
laws and regulations permit increased charges to depreciation, won't this result in
greater charges to operating expenses and also increase your operating ratio?
Chairman Wolf: Thank you, sir. That is a question that has raised a great deal
of concern among operating people — whether the tax experts will ruin the operating
ratio by greatly increasing the depreciation allowances or deductions. The tax is some-
thing entirely separate from the books and budgets. It merely represents an expediting
of the depreciation recovery for tax purposes.
A couple of months ago the Interstate Commerce Commission did reconsider its
policies on book depreciation, and the subject was tabled for the time being. I think
we can be confident that this guideline proposition will have no effect at all on the
book accounting.
Assignment 7 — Revisions and Interpretations of ICC Accounting
Regulations.
Chairman Wolf: The report on this assignment will be given by the subcommittee
chairman, M. M. Gerber, who until recently was accounting engineer, Baltimore & Ohio,
Chicago Terminal Railroad, and who now is associated with Westenhoff and Novick,
consulting engineers.
M. M. Gerber: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
The report on Assignment 7 presents the more important changes appearing in the
revised issue of the Uniform System of Accounts For Railroad Companies as amended
to, and effective as of, January 1, 1962, known as the issue of 1962.
The ICC Bureau of Accounts has issued: "Interpretations of the Uniform System
of Accounts for Railroad Companies — Accounting Series Circular No. 130 — Issue of 1962,
effective September 1, 1962." These interpretations represents a reissue of and supersede
cases contained in Bulletin No. IS cancelled by Commission order effective September 1,
1962 and in Accounting Case Series.
ICC Notice of Proposed Rule Making, Docket No. 32 153, dated January 7, 1963,
advises that the Interstate Commerce Commission has under consideration amendment
of the Uniform System of Accounts For Railroad Companies requiring that amounts
now carried in primary accounts for cost of road and equipment property shall be
redistributed to the appropriate primary accounts based on the original cost of property
as shown in valuation records of each carrier and summarized in the Bureau of Ac-
counts of the Commission, subject to exceptions described therein with respect to land,
rails, other track material, and ballast.
Railroad companies and other interested parties were invited to present written
views or comments for consideration on or before March 1, 1963. After consideration
Discussion 59S
of all such responses and presentations, an order, as may be found appropriate, will
be entered.
The proposed rule requires that journal entries distributing the amounts to primary
accounts pursuant to the foregoing instructions shall be submitted to the Commission
for consideration as soon as practicable and not later than December 31, 1963.
This report is presented as information.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Gerber. Are there any questions or remarks on
Mr. Gerber's report?
J. H. Robinson [Burlington Lines]: The report on Assignment 7 briefly makes
reference to ICC Subject 468, Redistribution of Amounts to Primary Road and Equip-
ment Accounts. Isn't this a very important subject at the present time?
Chairman Wolf: Thank you, sir. I believe it is a question of importance because
some roads don't realize what they might have ahead of them. Our report on Assign-
ment 7 merely mentioned that the subject was still under consideration at that time,
which was true; but on January 7, I believe, this new Notice of Rule Making, already
discussed — Docket 32153 — proposes the ICC's synthetic cost on your books in place
of the amounts that are now carried in the property accounts.
Careful reading of that indicates that there may be a great deal of work to be
done in the engineering department if the redistribution is handled there. It may be
extremely expensive, and I venture to say that hardly anyone would be able to finish
it by the end of this year. However, the final orders may defer the date of filing.
The amount of work could be tremendous, depending on your situation. The mere
fact that yours may be a reorganized road does not mean you would be out of trouble.
There may possibly be a great deal of trouble for everyone. Many roads don't care
particularly what happens to the total amount of their investment account. It may not
require parts adjustment, but for many it is a serious problem that concerns other than
engineers. The amount of engineer's record keeping necessary may stun them when they
find out what they are up against.
Chairman Wolf [continuing] : Mr. Gerber has tendered his resignation from the
subcommittee chairmanship, effective at the beginning of the current business year. His
resignation was accepted regretfully by Committee 11. We believe that there has been
no better way for an engineer to keep abreast of the effect of accounting changes on
engineering estimates and studies than to read the reports on Assignment 7, prepared
under the direction of Mr. Gerber.
I should like to introduce the new chairman of this subcommittee, Robert D. Igou,
engineer — capital expenditures, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad. Mr. Igou is
a modest man, but we know he will continue the good work.
Assignment 8 — Instructions for Making Engineer Field Checks and
Their Application to Completion Reports.
Chairman Wolf: A study is in progress but report is being withheld pending the
revision of ICC requirements for valuation reports. Unfortunately, the subcommittee
chairman cannot be with us today. He is Carlton F. Olson, valuation engineer, Great
Northern Railway.
Assignment 9 — Simplification of Annual Reports on Form 588 to the
Interstate Commerce Commission, and Underlying Completion Reports.
Chairman Wolf: Xo report is made because tlii- assignment is dependent on the
disposition of Valuation Order 30 of the Interstate Commerce Commission. I might add
that the proposed changes in requirements for reporting have been under discussion for
596 Contract Forms
a long time, and this subcommittee has made some valuable contributions to these dis-
cussions. I do not see in the audience the subcommittee chairman, Frank A. Roberts,
valuation engineer, Erie-Lackawanna Railroad.
I should also like to have our very resourceful secretary rise and be recognized.
He is William S. Gates, Jr., assistant to auditor — valuation, Chicago & Illinois Midland
Railway.
Mr. President, this concludes the report of Committee 11.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Wolf. You have taken hold of the work of Com-
mittee 11 in fine shape in your first year as chairman, and I know that your committee
is alert to the important changes which have come about and which are in prospect in
accounting requirements, practices and procedures. I am sure that you have some inter-
esting work ahead of you.
We thank you and your committee for keeping us abreast of these matters. If there
are no further questions from the floor, I will now excuse your committee with the
thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Contract Forms
[For report see Bulletin 574, pages 187-195]
President Code: We will hear next from our Committee 20 — Contract Forms, the
chairman of which is D. F. Lyons, office engineer, Chicago South Shore & South Bend
Railroad, at Michigan City, Ind. I shall appreciate it if Mr. Lyons and the members
of his committee will come to the platform at this time. Mr. Lyons, I am pleased to
turn the microphone over to you.
A few weeks ago I served as chief range officer of a pistol range, and so if I get
mixed up and say, "Will the next relay come to the firing line", don't be too much
surprised.
Mr. Lyons, you have the floor.
Chairman D. F. Lyons: President Code, fellow members and guests:
Committee 20 has six assignments to report on at this time. We shall ask for action
on one of the assignments, and present progress reports on the remainder.
Our preliminary report is in Bulletin 574, beginning on page 187. If you have any
questions during the presentation of the reports, please feel free to ask them. We can't
guarantee to answer them now but at least we shall take note of them and try to answer
them later for you.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Lyons: The chairman of the subcommittee handling this assignment is
C. L. Gatton, engineer of construction, Louisville & Nashville Railroad, DeCoursey, Ky.
Mr. Gatton has informed me that he is unable to be present because of other com-
mitments, so I shall ask J. L. Perrier, division engineer, Chicago & North Western
Railway, Chicago, to give the report on Assignment 1.
J. L. Perrier: Mr. President and gentlemen:
This committee completely reviewed all the Manual material in Chapter 20 in 1961
and 1962. We have no further Manual revisions to recommend this year.
Assignment 2 — Form of Agreement Covering Purchase and Application
of Weed-Control Chemicals on Railway Property, Collaborating with
Committee 1.
Chairman Lyons: The chairman of Subcommittee 2 is J. F. Halpin, assistant
designing engineer, New York Central System, New York. Mr. Halpin is not here today,
so again I ask Mr. Perrier to present the report on Assignment 2 for him.
Discussion 597
J. L. Perrier: Mr. President and gentlemen: This assignment is to develop a form
covering the application of weed-control chemicals by contract.
As indicated on page 188 of Bulletin 574, it appears that few railroads have their
own forms for this situation, so we can perform a valuable service if we can come up
with a form that any railroad could use as is or as a pattern for making up their own.
We shall continue to work on this assignment.
Assignment 3 — Form of Agreement for Placing Commercial Advertising
on Railway Bridges.
Chairman Lyons: The chairman of Subcommittee 3 is R. C. Heckel, assistant
engineer grade crossings, New York Central System, Chicago. Mr. Heckel.
R. C. Heckel: President Code, Chairman Lyons, and members of AREA and
guests:
The assignment of Subcommittee 3 is to write a form of agreement for placing
commercial advertising on railway bridges. A tentative draft of such an agreement is
given on page 188 of Bulletin 574 as information. We would appreciate any comments,
either written or oral.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Heckel. Does anyone have a comment from the
floor? Continue, Mr. Lyons.
Assignment 4 — Form of Agreement to Cover Disposal of Surplus Rail-
way Property.
Chairman Lyons: The next assignment is the one that requires Association action.
The chairman of the subcommittee, E. W. Smith, has retired from his position as assist-
ant to chief engineer of the St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, and is not here, so I shall
ask a member of the subcommittee, F. M. Jones, assistant engineer, Chicago, Milwaukee,
St. Paul & Pacific Railroad, Chicago, to present the report for Mr. Smith.
F. M. Jones: Mr. President, members and guests:
Last year your committee presented as information a tentative draft of a proposed
"short form" agreement to cover disposal of surplus railway property. This year the
draft, as presented in Bulletin 567, November 1961, page 174, is submitted for adoption
and publication in the Manual.
Mr. President, I move that the Association accept this agreement as Manual
material and that it be published in the Manual.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Mr. Jones: During the coming year this subcommittee will continue its study of a
"long form" agreement for the disposal of surplus railroad property.
Assignment 5 — Form of Lease for Railway Property Used for Unload-
ing and Storing Liquified Petroleum Gases, Anhydrous Ammonia and Other
Flammable or Dangerous Materials.
Chairman Lyons: The chairman of Subcommittee 5, F. B. Mallas, division engineer,
Northern Pacific Railway, is not present, and again I shall call upon Mr. Perrier to
present the report on this assignment.
J. F. Perrier: Mr. President, gentlemen:
It is considered that the use by others of railroad property for unloading and
storing dangerous materials warrants a lease form separate from the standard industrial
type lease.
598 Waterways and Harbors
We have prepared a draft of such a lease form which appears on pace 191 of
Bulletin 574. We submit this draft as information at this time. Study of this assignment
will be continued.
Assignment 7 — Bibliography on Subjects Pertaining to Contract Forms.
Chairman Lyons: K. J. Silvey is chairman of Subcommittee 7 ; he is area engineer
of the Pennsylvania Railroad. He is not present, so Mr. Perrier will make the report.
J. L. Perrier: Mr. President and gentlemen:
Your committee has compiled a list of several references pertaining to contract
forms. You will find these on page 195 of Bulletin 594.
Chairman Lyons: Committee 20 wishes to express its appreciation to its officers
who served during 1962 but have relinquished their posts for the coming Association
year — D. G. West, general industrial agent of the Detroit, Toledo & Ironton Railroad,
Dearborn, Mich., who served as secretary; and J. F. Halpin, assistant design engineer,
New York Central System, New York, who served as chairman of Subcommittee 2.
As I mentioned before, E. W. Smith, retired assistant to chief engineer, St. Louis-San
Francisco Railway, was chairman of Subcommittee 4.
At this time I would like to recognize the new subcommittee chairmen who are
present: E. A. Graham, assistant chief engineer of the Colorado & Southern Railway
and the Fort Worth & Denver Railway; and F. M. Jones, assistant engineer, Chicago,
Milwaukee, St. Paul & Pacific, who is going to take over Subcommittee 7.
Mr. President, this concludes the report of Committee 20.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Lyons. Your committee continues to carry
forward a very important phase of our Association's work. We appreciate the diligence
with which your committee has kept its chapter of the Manual up to date, and its
interest in developing new agreement forms as the need for additional forms arises.
The two tentative forms which your committee has submitted this year will, I am
sure, prove very helpful to the railroads in dealing with the matters covered; and I hope
that, as requested, interested members will give you the benefit of their comments and
criticism on these proposed agreements, looking to their submission and adoption, in
the best possible form, a year hence.
I am personally looking forward to the results of your efforts to coordinate the
various types of contracts used for weed control, and I know you will not let the
complications and difficulties of the subject divert you from your goal.
Thank you again, Mr. Lyons. Your committee is now excused, with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Report on Waterways and Harbors
[For report, see Bulletin 574, pages 197-211]
President Code: Our next committee to report is our Committee 25 — Waterways
and Harbors, the chairman of which is F. J. Olsen, resident engineer, Baltimore & Ohio
Chicago Terminal Railroad, with headquarters at Blue Island, 111. Mr. Olsen, if you
and the members of your committee will please come to the platform, I shall be glad
to turn the meeting over to you.
Chatrman F. J. Olsen: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
Your committee is reporting briefly on all but one of its assignments, and work
is in progress on the other assignment. The report of Committee 25 is published in
Bulletin 574, starting on page 197.
Discussion 599
In the absence of the subcommittee chairmen I shall present the reports on Assign-
ments 1, 2, 3 and 7.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Olsen: J. G. Miller, resident engineer, Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, is
chairman of this subcommittee, which is reviewing Parts 2, 3 and 4 of the Manual, and
will submit recommendations for adoption with next year's report.
Assignment 2 — Current Policies, Practices and Developments Dealing
with Navigation Projects, Collaborating with AAR Competitive Transporta-
tion Division — Waterways.
Chairman Olsen: B. M. Dornblatt, of B. M. Dornblatt and Associates, is chair-
man of this subcommittee, which submits as information, eight additional documents
pertaining to navigation projects, which may prove of interest and serve as a guide
for future reference. These documents are listed in Bulletin 574, beginning on page 198.
Assignment 3 — Bibliography Relating to Benefits and Costs of Inland
Waterway Projects Involving Navigation.
Chairman Olsen: M. A. Michel, special representative — staff, Pittsburgh & Lake
Erie Railroad, Pittsburgh, Pa., is chairman of this subcommittee, which has been anno-
tating references relating to benefits and cost of inland waterway projects. Four such
annotated references are published in Bulletin 574, starting on page 199.
Assignment 6 — Planning, Construction and Maintenance of Rail — Water
Transfer Facilities.
Chairman Olsen: J. C. Fenno, assistant engineer, Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul &
Pacific Railroad, Milwaukee, Wis., is chairman of this subcommittee and will give the
report. Mr. Fenno.
J. C. Fenno: Your committee submits as information a report of progress in the
study of roll-on, roll-off, lift-on, lift-off and conveyor-type operations.
The distinctive feature of roll-on, roll-off, lift-on, lift-off and similar types of
shipping services is the transfer between land carriers and ships of loaded rail cars,
highway trailers or containers instead of individual pieces of cargo. The development
of piggyback, containers and other special equipment on the railroads, while not designed
particularly for trans-shipment by water, lends itself well to such service.
The design of a specialized terminal will be influenced to a large extent by the
variation of the water level. This variation would obviously affect the design of transfer
facilities, particularly for the roll-on, roll-off type of operation.
The study will be divided into two parts:
1. Type of facility required, including roll-on, roll-off, lift-on, lift-off, conveyor,
and combinations of these types.
2. Location considerations, including type of terminal, dock facilities, rail facil-
ities, highway facilities, utilities, and the nature of the waterways.
Roll-on, roll-off facilities would include ferries or barge-type operation in which
rail cars are moved directly onto and off of the water carrier.
Lift-on, lift-off facilities involve the use of cranes of sufficient capacity to handle
the cargo involved. Containers lend themselves well to this type of operation.
Conveyor facilities are particularly adapted to the handling of bulk commodities.
This would also include the handling of materials through pipelines.
Combinations of the above types of facilities would be embodied in a general cargo
handling terminal.
600 Waterways and Harbors
The nature of the cargo to be handled would influence the type of terminal. The
inland origins and destinations, and access from land and sea, will influence the choice
of location.
The size and number of vessels, and local conditions of tide, wind, current and
accessibility, will influence the type of ship berth. Ship facilities may be grouped into
five general types: (1) wharves on slips dredged into the shore, (2) finger piers project-
ing out from the shore, (3) marginal wharves paralleling the shore, (4) ferry type slips
and (S) offshore berths.
Rail facilities should be as complete as possible, and of a capacity sufficient to
handle the inbound and outbound cargoes with a minimum of delay and additional
switch moves. It follows that accepted practices as to grade, curvature, track centers,
etc., should be followed. The criteria for the roll-on, roll-off, lift-on and lift-off facil-
ities would be quite similar in so far as storage, classification and other rail facilities
are concerned. A conveyor type of operation would probably require radically different
rail facilities, such as hump yards and car dumpers, and lend itself well to automation.
Pipeline facilities, particularly with respect to petroleum products, introduce special
problems, including fire protection and contamination of the waterway.
Highway access should be adequate, with special emphasis on reducing the conflict
between rail and truck movements, and may involve widespread improvements of
access roads.
Adequate public utilities would be required, including power, water, sewer, com-
munication and fire-fighting equipment.
The nature of the waterway will influence the design of the terminal. Conditions of
tides, current, depth of water, silting and water area available will affect the type of
piers, design of transfer bridges, and other loading facilities, as well as controlling the
size of the vessels using the terminal. Climatic conditions are a factor, particularly where
ice is encountered, and corrosion and marine borers influence choice of construction
materials for docks and piers.
Because of the scope of the assignment, there still remains a great deal of work
to be done by your committee, and it is our opinion that the study should definitely
. be continued, resulting in eventual inclusion in the Manual.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Fenno. Your report will be received as
information.
Assignment 7 — Relative Merits and Economies of Construction Mate-
rials Used in Waterfront Facilities.
Chairman Olsen: Dr. Shu-t'ien Li, professor, Department of Civil Engineering,
South Dakota School of Mines and Technology, Rapid City, S. Dak., is chairman of
Subcommittee 7.
To conserve convention time, Chairman Li has requested me to report to this con-
vention the salient features of this year's progress report, centered on "Relative Merits
of High-Strength Steels and Box Sections in Heavy-Duty Fender Piling of Waterfront
Facilities", authored by Dr. Li.
This report, published in Bulletin 574, pages 205-211, extends Dr. Li's development
of "Energy Design Criteria for Fender Piling and Relative Merits of Different Materials",
presented at the 1961 Annual Convention, to the domain of heavy-duty fender piling
necessitated by the rapid growth in size and tonnage of general-cargo ships and tankers.
The body of the report consists of (a) theoretical development based on the maxi-
mum kinetic energy due to impact, (b) inherent shortcomings of cylindrical fender piles,
Discussion 601
(c) advantages of using high-strength steels, (d) shortcomings of high-strength steels
to be avoided, and (e) merits and versatilities of high-strength-steel fender piles of box
sections. It also lists 18 other papers and articles, published by the same author, having
bearing on the subject matter of Assignment 7.
Mr. President, this concludes Committee 25 's report, and your committee invites
comments regarding this presentation. We will be glad to reply to any questions raised
thereon.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Olsen. Are there any questions from the floor
concerning the report of Committee 25? Thank you again, Mr. Olsen.
We were glad to see your committee strengthened by some 16 new members for
the year ahead, representing 13 additional railroads, because we continue to believe there
is an important place in our Association for your committee, handling the engineering
and construction phases of waterway and waterfront problems. With the hundreds of
millions of dollars which the railroads have invested in waterfront properties, the newer
types of shipments to be handled, and new developments in handling methods, your
committee has the responsibility to keep the Association and its members currently and
fully informed concerning the latest developments in this field, and we hope it will.
We hope, too, that during the coming year your committee will clear up any
questions which may have been raised with respect to the propriety, or adequacy,
of the material presently in Parts 2, 3 and 4 of your chapter of the Manual.
Thank you again, Mr. Olsen. Your committee is now excused, with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Yards and Terminals
[For report, see Bulletin 574, pages 159-186]
President Code: Our next committee to report is Committee 14 — Yards and Ter-
minals, the chairman of which is D. C. Hastings, general manager, Clinchfield Railroad,
at Erwin, Tenn. Mr. Hastings, if you and the members of your committee will come
to the platform promptly, we would like to hear your report at this time. Again, I
hope that all members of your committee present will take their places at our speaker's
table, your vice chairman, secretary, and subcommittee chairmen taking their places
here at the main speaker's table. Again I would remind everyone present that they have
the privilege of the floor to comment on or ask questions with respect to any of the
recommendations or reports presented by the committee.
Mr. Hastings, you may proceed.
Chaibman D. C. Hastings: Mr. President, members of the Association, and guests:
Committee 14 during the year 1962 was actively engaged in the study of seven very
important and timely subjects. Reports on six of these have been printed in Bulletin
5 74. beginning on page 159.
The chairmen of the various subcommittees have worked faithfully throughout the
year in order to present reports to the Association, and I am happy that they are here
to make their presentations.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Hastings: There are no recommendations for revisions to Chapter 14
of the Manual, with the exception of those that are being presented under Assignment-
2b and 6a.
602 Yards and Terminals
The chairman of this subcommittee, F. E. Austerman, chief engineer, Chicago Union
Station Company, is still actively engaged in the job of keeping Chapter 14 up to date,
as was evidenced by the work performed under his chairmanship in 1961. Mr. Auster-
man will continue as chairman of this subcommittee in 1963.
Assignment 2 — Classification Yards: a. RoIIability of Freight Cars.
Chairman Hastings: Committee 14 has by no means lost interest in the subject
of rollability of freight cars. The work that should have been done in 1962 was not
accomplished due to the fact that no funds were allocated for research and testing.
Request for these funds has been included again in the budget in 1963 for the Joint
Committee on Relation Between Track and Equipment.
b. Design of Classification Yard Gradients.
Chairman Hastings: The report on this assignment will be presented by Subcom-
mittee Chairman R. O. Balsters, assistant engineer, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe
Railway.
R. O. Balsters: Recent developments in the design of classification yard gradients
indicate that revisions should be made in portions of the data, design formulas and
criteria now set forth in the Manual in Chapter 14, Part 3, under Sec. D, Art. 3, page
14-3-7 to page 14-3-12.1.
The present Manual material is the result of a report on Assignment 7, Design Data
for Classification Yard Gradients, published in the Proceedings, Vol. 59, and adopted
for publication in the Manual. This material was reviewed and brought up-to-date in
1961 by adoption of Manual recommendations presented in March 1961 by Subcommittee
1 — Revision of Manual.
Full automation has brought about various changes in the design of modern classi-
fication yards. In his address to the annual Association meeting in March 1962, A. V.
Johnston, chief engineer, Canadian National Railways, stated that body track gradients
of 0.1 percent or less (predominantly 0.08 percent) were used in four major fully auto-
matic classification yards on the Canadian National Railways. The trend is toward a
flat body track gradient except in areas where severe winter conditions prevail. Tests
indicate that 0.15 percent resistance more nearly represents the average resistance be-
tween the crest and the leaving end of the group retarder for the easiest running car
under most favorable weather conditions. The average resistance formerly used was
0.30 percent.
Following a study of current trends and practices, your committee recommends
that the present Manual material be further modified again this year. Continuing
progress in research and practical application of various theories will undoubtedly bring
about more changes in the near future.
Accordingly, your committee submits for adoption the proposed changes with respect
to Part 3 — Freight Terminals, appearing on pages 161, 162 and 163 of Bulletin 574.
Mr. President, I so move.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Assignment 3 — Scales Used in Railway Service, Collaborating with
Committee 18.
Chairman Hastings: Although no reports will be presented by the Scale Subcom-
mittee, we feel that the work that has been accomplished by them in 1962 is of such
importance that the Association should be advised of the current status of the subjects
being studied. I would like to ask W. P. Buchanan, supervisor of scale inspectors, Penn-
sylvania Raflrdad, to comment on the status of the work of his subcommittee.
Discussion 603
\Y P. Buchanan: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
During the past year our committee has been studying three rather lengthy
assignments:
a. Specifications Governing the Manufacture and Installation of Electronic Track
Scales — This assignment will require considerable research and will be presented in more
than one part. Part 1, Introduction, is expected out of the subcommittee later this year
and it is hoped that a final report on this matter will be presented in 1964.
b. Specifications Governing the Manufacture and Installation of Automatic Indi-
cating and Recording Devices for Large-Capacity Scales — Considerable work has been
done on this assignment, and with the fine assistance on the part of the Scale Manu-
facturers Association, a progress report on this assignment is expected next year.
c. Study of the Accuracies of Weights Obtained in Motion Weighing — Data have
been received from different methods of motion weighing from various sections of the
country. It is our plan to present an information report on each mode of motion
weighing as the data are compiled.
In addition, our committee during the latter part of the year, requested the execu-
tive Secretary of the National Conference of Weights and Measures to present to their
Committee on Specifications and Tolerances, a letter of protest to the suggested change
of the National Code, shown in National Bureau of Standards Handbook H.44. This
change would reduce the present maintenance tolerance applicable to railway track scales
from 0.2 to 0.1 percent. This protest was made by our committee because we feel that
an accuracy within 0.1 percent for railway track scales is not realistic, it is not uni-
formly obtainable and cannot be economically maintained by the railway industry.
Furthermore, we feel that such a tolerance for railway track scales will discourage the
developments of new modes of weighing and devices which may be even more economical
than those currently in use.
Assignment 4 — Facilities for Freight-Car Cleaning and Washing.
Chairman Hastings: The report on Assignment 4 will be presented by Subcom-
mittee Chairman M. H. Aldrich, senior civil engineer. New York Central System.
M. H. Aldrich: The report of your committee on Assignment 4 appears in Bulletin
574, November 1962.
Several railroads have recently installed facilities for freight car cleaning in which
cuts of from 10 to 35 cars are moved through a concentrated working area by means
of a car puller. This report describes in detail a few of these installations. One railroad
has built a mechanized facility where a single operation is performed at each of four
successive locations. The cuts of cars are advanced one car length at a time on a definite
time schedule. Refuse is handled by belt conveyors, cleaning is done with vacuum clean-
ers having nozzles up to 60 in wide, and washing is accomplished by an air-operated
telescopic boom equipped with a multi-nozzled washer head and operated by remote
control.
Another railroad has installed a facility using very little special equipment. Cut^ ol
about 35 cars are handled by a car puller and moved about Q car lengths at a time along
a 400-ft working platform where cleaning operations are performed. Cleaning, inspection,
minor repairs and necessary washing arc completed on the 9 or 10 cars before the cut
is moved ahead.
The actual rate of clean car production varies with the size and character of the
facility and the extent of the repair work done. Where comparisons with former methods
of car cleaning are practicable, a substantial increase in production and economy of
operation is reported for the one-spot method.
Hull. 570
604 Yards and Term i ii ;i I •<
This report is presented as information, with the recommendation that the subject
be discontinued.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Aldrich. The report is so received and your
recommendation accepted.
Assignment 5 — Mechanized and Electronic Mail-Handling Facilities.
Chairman Hastings: The report on Assignment S will be presented by Subcom-
mittee Chairman C. E. Stoecker, special engineer, Louisville and Nashville Railroad.
C. E. Stoecker: Mr. President, Mr. Chairman, members of AREA and guests:
Our report on mechanized and electronic mail-handling facilities can be found in
the November 1962 Bulletin No. 574, pages 168-172.
Our study revealed that such a mail-handling system cannot be a factory-made
package deal but must be planned, developed and more or less tailor-made in order to
satisfy the needs peculiar only to that particular mail handling site.
Your committee submits the report as published as information with the recom-
mendation that the subject be discontinued.
President Code: The report will be so received, Mr. Stoecker.
Assignment 6 — Facilities for Loading and Unloading Rail-Truck Freight
Equipment.
Chairman Hastings: The report on Assignment 6 will be presented by Subcom-
mittee Chairman F. A. Hess, maintenance of way engineer, Indiana Harbor Belt Railroad.
F. A. Hess: Mr. President, members and guests:
The two reports being submitted: Assignment 6a — Facilities for Loading and Un-
loading Rail-Truck Freight Equipment, and Assignment 6b — Facilities for Loading and
Unloading Multi-Level Automobile Cars, cover the present methods of handling these
items. Because of the many variations, the layouts shown in the reports are of a very
general nature. However, we should not become complacent and accept these as the
ultimate, but rather use them as a springboard for better and more efficient arrangements.
Surely someone will develop an idea that will permit faster loading and unloading
of cars, trucks and containers; someone will design an improved container; and some-
one will come up with an idea that will reduce the pavement widths required in some
of the schemes so as to allow more tracks in a given area and consequent handling
of more cars, trucks or containers.
Coal is being loaded and shipped in integral trains and unloaded at destination as
the train moves through the terminal plant. Why not work to this end in our piggyback
operations ?
Before expanding your facilities based on present designs, may I suggest you
explore plans for more advanced operations. You may otherwise find yourself behind
the times.
The report on Assignment 6a appears on pages 173-177 in Bulletin 574. This assign-
ment covers the four types of facilities described in the Manual on pages 14-3-17 and
14-3-18 which are: end loading, side loading, overhead loading and the combination
rail-highway vehicle. Your committee recommends that the drawings appearing in the
Bulletin illustrating the four types of facilities — Figs. 4 to 7, incl., on pages 174 to
177 incl. — be adopted and published in the Manual, adding them after the present
material on page 14-3-18.
Mr. President, I so move.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Mr. Hess: The report on Assignment 6b, covering facilities for loading and unload-
ing multi-level automobile cars, appears on page 173, Bulletin 574, and the drawings
Discussion 605
showing the supporting facilities are shown as Fig. 1 on page 178 and Fig. 2 on page
179 of the Bulletin.
This report is submitted as information, with the recommendation that the subject
be continued.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hess. Your report will be so received.
Assignment 7 — Waterfront Terminals.
Chairman Hastings: The report on Assignment 7 will be presented by W. H. Pol-
lard, division engineer, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway.
W. H. Pollard: Mr. President, Mr. Chairman, members and guests:
Your committee presents as information under Assignment 7 a report covering
ship loading and unloading facilities for ore on the Great Lakes and the St. Lawrence
River, including its rail movement, which is published in Bulletin 574, page 180,
November 1962.
The report describes briefly the primary components and operation of one ship
loading and two unloading facilities, including the rail movement of ore from mine to
dock site of the loading facility. Also included is a table which provides pertinent
information on ore loading docks on the Great Lakes and two of importance on the
Canadian side of the St. Lawrence River.
The report is presented as information with the recommendation that the subject
be discontinued.
President Code: The report will be so received, and your recommendation has
been referred to the Board Committee Thank you.
Assignment 8 — Present Trends in Yard Maintenance.
Chairman Hastings: The report on Assignment 8 will be presented by Subcom-
mittee Chairman F. S. King, district engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad.
F. S. King: President Code, members and guests:
The report of Subcommittee 8 appears in Bulletin 574 and is presented as informa-
tion with the recommendation that the subject be discontinued.
Improved maintenance of yard tracks is being accomplished by the use of better
track materials and increased mechanization of maintenance operations, which was the
subject of a previous report; and more programming of maintenance work, better de-
ployment of yard maintenance forces and fuller cooperation from operating personnel,
which are covered in this year's report.
Many railroads, in an effort to obtain safe and efficient yard operation and main-
tenance are programming most, if not all, of their major yard maintenance work. These
programs may include such work items as raising and tieing of body and running tracks,
turnout renewals, rail renewals, surfacing and lining, welding and grinding, weed con-
trol and other miscellaneous maintenance operations. They are usually set up on an
annual basis with enough flexibility to meet emergencies and changing conditions.
During the past few years the organization of yard maintenance forces has under-
gone considerable change. Economical necessity has resulted in smaller forces. Section
gang sizes have been reduced and territories extended. In some yards, section gang
type maintenance has been entirely eliminated.
Mechanized gangs organized specifically for the work to be performed are being
utilized on the heavy type work. Day to da\ emergencies and routine small work items
are being handled by small properly equipped gangs. Augmenting these forces are spe-
cialists such as welders, grinder operators, lampmen, etc. Careful planning to obtain
optimum utilization of available forces is necessary to achieve maximum results.
606 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
Top efficiency of the present-day yard maintenance organization depends, to a great
extent, on cooperation from operating personnel. As an example, a mechanized raising
and tieing gang requires absolute use of at least one track and preferably two. Most
operating department officers are aware of this situation and are permitting maintenance
forces to hold one or more tracks in a yard for limited periods of time, and in some
cases, from the time a job is started until it is completed.
Reduced budgets and mechanized forces require full cooperation between the oper-
ating and maintenance departments in all matters related to yard maintenance.
Chairman Hastings: Mr. President, we made up three minutes on our schedule.
This concludes the report of Committee 14.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hastings. We appreciate the making up of time
You have done a good job in directing and progressing the work of your committee
during your first year as chairman, which is evidenced by the reports that have been
presented here this morning, and the progress reported on your other assignments.
With yard and terminal operations of all kinds becoming increasingly critical in
the efforts of the railroads to provide the most expedited, dependable and damage-free
service possible, your committee has a heavy responsibility in keeping our members
fully apprised of all latest developments in designs, methods and practices to that end.
I know it will continue to do this, and I hope that it will make; real progress on its
four new assignments during the coming year.
Thank you again, Mr. Hastings. Your committee is now excused with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Economics of Railway Location and Operation
[For report, see Bulletin 574, pages 111-129]
Presdent Code: The last of our committees to make a report this morning is our
Committee 16 — Economics of Railway Location and Operation, the chairman of which
is C. L. Towle, vice president — operations, Detroit, Toledo & Ironton Railroad, at
Dearborn, Mich.
Due to the recent serious illness of Mr. Towle, of which we have just learned
with deep regret, the presentation of the report of this committee will be conducted
by the capable vice chairman of the committee, T. D. Wofford, Jr., staff engineer,
Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago.
Mr. Wofford, if you and the other members of Committee 16 present will come
to the speaker's table, I shall be happy to turn the meeting over to you. Again, I solicit
constructive comments and questions with respect to any of the reports presented by
this committee.
Mr. Wofford, you may proceed.
Vice Chairman T. D. Wofford: Mr. President, members of the Association and
guests:
Your committee is reporting on three of its eight assignments. These are presented
on pages 73 through 94 of Bulletin 573 and pages 111 through 129 of Bulletin 574. These
three reports are progress reports submitted as information. Your committee invites
your comments regarding its presentations, and will be glad to reply to any questions
raised thereon.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Vice Chairman Wofford: Subcommittee 1 is continuing its work with the aim of
completing new Manual material for the 1963 report.
Discussion 607
Assignment 2— Study of Methods of Analyzing the Economics of Rail-
way Engineering Projects Designed Primarily to Improve the Quality of
Transportation Service.
Vice Chairman W'offord: Subcommittee 2 is progressing Assignment 2 through
assignment of its various phases to the subcommittee membership.
Assignment 3 — Determination of Maintenance of Way Expense Varia-
tion with Various Traffic Volumes and Effect of Using Such Variations, in
Terms of Equated Mileage or Other Derived Factors, for Allocation of
Available Funds to Maintenance of Way, Collaborating with Committees
11 and 22.
Vice Chairman W'offord: L. E. Ward, senior industrial engineer, Pennsylvania
Railroad, Philadelphia, will present the report on Assignment 3.
L. E. Ward: Your attention is called to the progress report on Assignment 3
which your committee submitted and which was published as information in Bulletin
574, pages 113, 114, and 115.
Some of the factors, other than traffic, which effect costs fall under the general
categories of (A) Geographical, (B) Constructional, (C) Political, (D) Operational, and
(E) Managerial.
Without specifically defining the relative importance for each factor, track costs
per mile of track was plotted against traffic density over a wide range of conditions to
plot a curve from which the formula is derived.
Test data applied against the formula has given encouraging results to date. Still
more checks are desirable, and your committee would appreciate having the benefit of
any analysis you may make.
You will note the formula reflects track maintenance costs only. Your committee is
now attempting to incorporate signal and communication costs and bridge and
building costs.
There are several practical applications to which this information can be used if
properly understood. For instance, in estimating the economics involved in a line change,
the relative effect of increasing or decreasing tonnage over a given trackage could be
projected. Budgets could be more accurately adjusted with change in traffic volumes
and variances from normal would be pointed out.
The formula was developed through analysis of over five years of data which
related costs to areas of known traffic density or cost centers. It has also been tested
on a limited basis on several other railroads. As I indicated previously, we would like
to have the benefit of more test applications.
Assignment 4 — Potential Applications of Electronic Computers to
Railway Engineering and Maintenance Problems in Research, Design, Inven-
tory, etc.
Vice Chairman Wofford: L. P. Diamond, assistant engineer — research, Chesapeake
& Ohio Railway, Huntington, W. Va., will present the report on Assignment 4.
L. P. Diamond: This is a summary of two papers which are a part of the progress
being made on Assignment 4 in Committee 16. These papers were published in Bulletin
5 73 of Volume 63 of the Proceedings and appear on pages 73 through 94. The first
"i these papers is entitled "Train Performance Calculator", whose author is Charles
Sankey, and the second is "A Computer Simulation of Railroad CTC Operations" by
C. J. Hudson. Both authors are associated with the Operational Research Branch of the
Research and Development Department of the Canadian National Railways.
608 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
These papers are being presented as information consistent with the objective of
Assignment 4, which concerns potential application of electronic computers to railway
engineering and maintenance problems. I would like to emphasize that both of these
reports involve procedures intended for planning, administrative and research purposes
and are not designed for operation of trains over a railroad in real time. It is inter-
esting to observe how they highlight the importance of studying train operations in
detail in order to solve complex problems in the design, construction and maintenance
of the railway plant which facilitate such operation.
Although recognition of this relationship is not new — A. M. Wellington wrote
about it nearly a century ago — the use of high-speed digital computers which enable
rapid study of the complexity of overall railroad operations in practical detail is
relatively new.
Since digital computers are efficient tools to simulate actual operations, they are so
employed in the procedures described in the published papers. Perhaps an easy way
to look at the process of simulation is to consider it as mirroring reality.
The Train Performance Calculator as developed by the Canadian National is a pro-
gram which results in the simulation of a train's movement along a railroad. This
simulation consists of introducing into the computer, via punched cards, such informa-
tion as tractive forces, train resistance, speed limits, track profile in the form of eleva-
tions and curvature, temporary slow orders, stations at which information is required
and train stops. The computer involved in the case described is an IBM 650 with an
accessory IBM 407.
A program which processes the input information takes into account, the full length
of the train, the effect of track curvature and elevation on train retardation, fore-
casting brake applications for reduced speeds or stops and flexible methods for calcu-
lating locomotive tractive forces and train resistance. This processing is performed by
means of a step-by-step solution of a differential equation expressed in energy terms.
Resulting therefrom are outputs such as the velocity profile which graphs the speed
of the train at various stations along the railroad, tables of running times, station-to-
station times, and locomotive power factor. These results can be put to good advan-
tage in planning optimum routes, grades, and curvatures for new lines, for efficient train
scheduling, in assignment of power to accomplish train runs in specified times, to deter-
mine the cost of extra stops, to assess the effects of speed restrictions, and to determine
the effects of rolling stock and power on schedules, service and costs.
The Train Performance Calculator is also used in the larger program described in
the paper on computer simulation of CTC operations. Among the important results of
this simulation is the determination of the most economic number, length and locations
of signalled sidings to handle present and future traffic.
The principal reason for a computer simulation rather than a manual determination
is the rapidity with which an optimum answer can be obtained rather than a workable
answer not yielding its full economic potential that is too often obtained by the
laborious and slow manual method.
In evaluating various proposals for siding configurations, the computer program
simulates actuality in a CTC district by moving trains, predicting meets, deciding train
priorities on the road, arranges meets at sidings, evaluates the delays to trains, and
initiates and terminates trains.
The logic in the computer program is that which a good, experienced dispatcher
would use in his every-day work. The input data into the program involves complete
specifications of all trains to be run over a sample period, detailing such information
Discussion 609
as schedules, number of cars, running characteristics, run task- enroute, and track and
train running time data. Track data are supplied in detail sufficient to specify location
of signalled sidings, electric lock sidings, and the car capacity and switch arrangement
of sidings as well as the track data necessary for the Train Performance Calculator
previously described.. The Train Performance Calculator outputs arc used in the CTC
simulation figuratively to move the trains over the road and to extract other information
typical of that program.
Due to the nature of the available digital computer, the logic of the program de-
signed to process the input information is subdivided into three parts. The first is an
optimum path program which is the theoretical trip the train would lake, performing
its usual work along the way, assuming no interference from any other trains. Second,
is the dispatching program initially derived from the optimum path program, which
initiates and terminates trains at the proper stations. At first, a non-conflicting path
for a train is assumed until a conflict is anticipated. By setting horizons, which are the
earliest times any train in the system will reach its destination, detecting earliest con-
flicts and moving all trains prior to these conflicts, deciding which train to be held and
resetting horizons, the dispatcher's program logic is organized. The logic of meets in-
volves, among other things, determination of train occupancy of adjacent sidings, the
availability of adequate intermediate sidings, and train priorities. This logic, which is
complex, is performed and evaluated with the help of the computer quite quickly.
The capacity of the computer determines the number of sidings and trains over
the district that can be considered in the CTC simulation. The particular program for
the IBM 650 described in the paper can handle a maximum of 38 sidings and 10 trains
at any one time. These limitations could be exceeded by programming for a more
powerful computer.
The third part of the CTC simulation program involves a statistical evaluation
of the results by mathematical distributions of the number and duration of delays at
sidings, delays in initiation and termination of trains, traffic peaking, average delay
per meet or pass, distribution of system activity, and distributions of interference to
each class of train.
The program yields a quick evaluation of proposed siding configurations. Deter-
minations can also be made of the economic significance of various aspects of invest-
ments in CTC.
The proof of the practicality of the programs described in both papers summarized
lies in the fact that the computer can match actual operation very closely. It is thus a
tool for rapid evaluation of many complex railroad proposals for the best and most
economical aspects without interference with current operations and the expenditure
of relatively small sums of money.
The committee wishes to extend its appreciation to Messrs. Sankcy and Hudson for
their cooperation in making their reports available for AREA use.
Any questions or comments from the floor on these papers would be appreciated.
If any of you wish to contact the authors of these papers direct, I am sure they would
be glad to answer any questions or furnish information you might desire,
Assignment 5 — Engineering Methods of Reducing Time of Freight Cars
Between Loading and Unloading Points.
Vxce Chaikm w WOiioko: Subcommit tee S has received approval ol the Hoard of
Direction to continue their assignment as amended, and is now engaged in preparing
a program of investigation and report, for assignment of various phases to the
subcommittee membership.
610 Economics of Railway Location and Operation
Assignment 6 — Features of Economic and Engineering Interest in the
Study, Design, Construction and Operation of New Railway Line Projects,
or Major Line Relocations, Proposed, in Progress or Recently Completed.
Vice Chairman Wofford: In the absence of Chairman H. L. Woldridge of Sub-
committee 6, the report on Assignment 6 will be presented by G. S. Sowers, research
engineer, Industrial Engineering Department, Missouri Pacific Railroad, a member of the
subcommittee.
G. S. Sowers: Under this assignment your committee presents three papers, as
follows: Photogrammetry as Applied to Railway Location, by J. L. Charles; Keystone
Dam Relocation-St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, by H. L. Woldridge, assistant chief
engineer of that road; and Abra-Skull Valley Relocation in Arizona-Atchison, Topeka &
Santa Fe Railway, by George Rugge, assistant engineer, Santa Fe. These papers are
published with our report in Bulletin 574.
[Mr. Sowers then read abstracts from each of the three papers, concluding as
follows:]
Mr. Sowers: The committee wishes to extend its appreciation to Members Charles,
Woldridge and Rugge for submitting these fine papers for our report. Are there any
questions from the floor on these three monographs? If you wish to contact the authors
direct, I am sure that they would be happy to answer any questions or furnish any
information you might desire.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Sowers, for your interesting summary of these
reports. Are there any questions on these reports? Mr. Wofford.
Assignment 8 — Innovations in Railway Operations.
Vice Chairman Wofford: Subcommittee 8 is currently engaged in assembling data
for a progress report covering various aspects and ramifications of containerization.
Assignment 11 — Review of Developments in New Methods and Modes
of Transport.
Vice Chairman Wofford: Subcommittee 11 is gathering data and studying material
for possible future reports on the economic features of pipeline operations, air-flow
vehicles, and high-voltage transmission.
Vice Chairman Wofford [continuing]: I would like at this time to thank the sub-
committee chairmen responsible for these assignments for their efforts.
R. L. Gray, engineer maintenance of way, Great Lakes Region, Canadian National
Railways, Toronto, Ont.
K. A. Werden, assistant to chief engineer — staff, Pennsylvania Railroad, Philadel-
phia, Pa.
W. J. Dixon, director of industrial engineering, Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, Balti-
more, Md.
A. L. Sams, assistant chief engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago.
F. J. Richter, Publisher, Modern Railroads, Chicago.
It is recommended that all the current assignments of Committee 16 be continued.
President Code: Your recommendation will be accepted.
Vice Chairman Wofford: Mr. President, this concludes our presentation of the
report of Committee 16. This convention concludes the term of C. S. Towle, vice
president — operations, Detroit, Toledo & Ironton Railroad, as chairman. It is most
regrettable that illness prevents his presence here today. Mr. Towle has given out-
standing leadership to Committee 16. He has worked diligently and tirelessly to further
Association Luncheon 611
the progress of committee assignments and the best interest of the Association. The
members of Committee 16 especially want to express their appreciation for his leader-
ship, and look forward to many more years of working with him.
Mr. Towle asked me to express his appreciation to the officers and directors of
AREA, to the executive secretary, Neal Howard, and to all members of Committee 16
for their fine assistance and cooperation.
As the incoming chairman of Committee 16, I should like to introduce the new
vice chairman of the committee, who is unfortunately unable to be present today —
A. S. Lang, director of data systems, New York Central System.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Wofford. We deeply regret the illness which has
prevented Chairman Towle from meeting with us here today, because he has been an
exceptionally good chairman, while assuming heavy and enlarged responsibilities on his
railroad, and I wanted to tell him so. But your committee is fortunate in having you
readily available to step in and conduct this presentation this morning, and you have
done so very ably.
We are pleased with the appointment of Mr. Lang as the new vice chairman of
Committee 16, and welcome you as the new chairman for the next three years. Mr.
Wofford, as the symbol of your office and new responsibilities, I am pleased to present
you with this chairman's gavel.
Thank you again, Mr. Wofford. Your committee is now excused with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
President Code [continuing] : This completes the program of our morning session
today. The next feature of our program, in which I hope all of you will participate,
is the General Association Luncheon in the Williford Room, directly across the corridor
from this room. Before you leave, I would like to remind you that our afternoon ses-
sion will reconvene in this room at 1:25 pm, to continue a long afternoon of committee
reports, beginning with the report of our Committee 24 — Cooperative Relations with
Universities.
I now declare the morning session recessed.
[The meeting recessed at 12:10 pml
General Association Luncheon
Friday, March 15, 1963
[The General Association Luncheon was held in the Williford Room, beginning at
12:15 pm. At the main speaker's table were seated the officers and directors of the
Association and several special guests. At a long table immediately in front of the main
speaker's table were seated the chairmen of the Association's 22 standing and special
committees. In greeting those at the luncheon, President Code spoke as follow^: |
President Code: Members of the American Railway Engineering Association and
guests: like the size of our business session this year, the size of this general group
luncheon is a "far cry" from the size of our usual Annual Association Luncheons, but
I am sure you will agree that it provides a convenient and pleasant interlude between
our morning and afternoon sessions. If it does this and satisfies the "inner man," it will
have served entirely as intended at a meeting, every social phase of which has been
strictly limited or eliminated in deference to our full and whole-hearted participation
in the American Railway Progress Exposition this fall.
612 Association Luncheon
Rut we have chosen this occasion to recognize here at our speaker's table our
officers and directors, those of our past presidents who could he present, and a few
others within the family, as it were; also to honor our committee chairmen at the
forward speaker's table as the "real special guests" on this occasion. At the expense of
an immediate start of your meal, I know you will want me to present all of these men
to you — which I shall now do as rapidly and informally as possible — and you will help
if you will refrain from applause until the last guest at each table has been introduced.
May I ask that our guests rise when presented and remain standing until all have been
introduced so we can get a good look at them.
[President Code then introduced those at the two speaker's tables.]
President Code [continuing] : Under the Constitution of the Association as amended
last year, the polls for the election of officers for the enusing year were closed at 12:00
noon today, and before we adjourn this luncheon I hope to be able to announce to you
the results of that election. Awaiting this information, I hope you will enjoy our
luncheon together.
[Luncheon was served. After the luncheon President Code spoke as follows:]
President Code: During the course of our luncheon there was presented to me by
J. E. Wiggins, office engineer, Southern Railway System, and chairman of our Tellers
Committee, an official copy of the Report of the Tellers [Printed in full elsewhere in
this issue of the Bulletin] on the results of our 1963 Election of Officers. I hold this
report before me, and I would like to read therefrom the names of those whom you
have selected to direct the overall policies of our Association for the coming year.
As I read their names I would appreciate their standing and remaining standing until
the last of the names on the list have been read.
[President Code then read the names of the newly elected officers and directors,
continuing as follows:]
President Code: I would now like to read the names of the five elected members
of the Nominating Committee, who, together with the five most recent living past
presidents, will constitute the Nominating Committee as a whole for the 1964 election.
[President Code then read the names, continuing as follows:]
President Code: Our new officers will be installed at the Closing Business Session
of our meeting tomorrow, which we expect to get under way about 11:30 am and finish
about noon. I hope that many of you will be present for that ceremony. Before adjourn-
ing this luncheon, I would like to remind you that our afternoon session will reconvene
immediately in the Waldorf Room. We have a long program ahead of us this afternoon,
which includes hearing the reports of 11 of our committees, so I ask you to assemble
promptly. The luncheon is now adjourned.
Afternoon Session, March 15, 1963
[The meeting reconvened 1:30 pm, President Code presiding.]
President Code: The meeting will please come to order. We have a long program
and much to accomplish in this afternoon session, so it is important that we get started
without further delay.
Discussion 613
Discussion on Cooperative Relations with Universities
[For report, see Bulletin 576, pages 397-405]
Chairman Code: The first committee to report this afternoon is our Committee 24
—Cooperative Relations with Universities, the chairman of which for the past three
years has been VV. W. Hay, professor of railway civil engineering, at the University
of Illinois. If Professor Hay and the other members of his committee present will come
to the speaker's table, I shall be pleased to turn the meeting over to them.
Again, I would remind you that you have the privilege of the floor to make com-
ments or ask questions, and I hope that you will take advantage of this to the extent
you have questions to ask or can add to the deliberations of this meeting.
Professor Hay, you may proceed.
Chairman W. VV. Hay: President Code, members and guests:
The report of Committee 24 is found in Bulletin 576, pages 397 to 405, incl. The
committee is working currently on seven subjects. I am sure that the reporting subcom-
mittee chairmen will welcome questions or comments on their reports.
Assignment 1 — Stimulate Greater Appreciation on the Part of Railway
Managements of (a) the Importance of Bringing into the Service Selected
Graduates of Colleges and Universities, and (b) the Necessary for Provid-
ing Adequate Means for Recruiting Such Graduates and Retaining Them
in Service.
Chairman Hay: The chairman of this subcommittee, J. F. Davison, assistant to
the system chief engineer, Canadian National Railways, will present the report. Mr.
Davison.
J . F. Davison: The current activity of your committee on this assignment is di-
rected toward determining what common patterns of opinion there may be among grad-
uate engineers employed in the railway industry. A questionnaire has been developed
for circulation among railway-employed engineers requesting their opinions on such
matters as employment conditions, effectiveness of their university curricula, post-
graduate training requirements and other similar information.
Due to the magnitude of the undertaking, the nature of the information requested
and the cooperative effort required on the part of member railway organizations, if the
proposed questionnaire is to reach all personnel in Engineering and Maintenance Depart-
ments, the Board of Direction requested an opportunity to review this project in rela-
tion to the benefits which would result. Consequently, a special submission was made
to the Board Committee on Assignments, following which the Board of Direction gave
its consent at its November 1962 meeting, subject to a few minor changes being made.
Now that approval in principle has been received, this assignment will be carried
to its conclusion. Upon return of completed questionnaires, the information will be
transferred to punch cards so it can be summarized for use in a number of different
assignments of Committee 24.
This progress report on Assignment 1 is submitted as information.
B. Bristow [Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific]: I would like in ask Mi. Davison
a question. What are the benefits that will be derived from the <|iic>tionnaires after
they have been received and analyzed?
Mr. Davison: In eliciting the support of the AREA Board of Direction, Committee
24 listed the following benefit s:
614 Cooperative Relations with Universities
1. Provide a sound background for Committee 24 activity, particularly those
connected with Assignments 1 and 2.
2. Determine the type of industry training required to adapt graduate engineers
to industry requirements (Part of Assignment 6).
3. Determine any common characteristics which may identify engineers interested
in railway work.
4. Determine what incentives caused engineers to accept and remain in railway
employment.
5. Establish any pattern of opinion which may be associated with age group,
type of engineering training received, etc.
6. Establish the range and extent of promotional opportunities for engineers in
the industry.
This is an incomplete list, but does indicate some of the purposes for which the
information will be used. Committee 24 requires these data if it is to be in a position
to recommend the action which should be taken to improve the reputation of the rail-
road industry as an employer of graduate engineers.
President Code: Are there any other questions? Thank you, Mr. Davison.
Chairman Hay: For many years the railroad industry has been represented in the
Relations with Industry Division of the American Society for Engineering Education
by one man representing jointly the Association of American Railroads, the American
Railway Engineering Association, and Committee 24.
J. F. Davison ably filled that role until recent travel restrictions made his represen-
tation difficult to continue. He was represented at the 1962 meeting of ASEE, held
last June at the Air Force Academy, by E. A. Graham, assistant chief engineer of the
Colorado & Southern and the Fort Worth & Denver Railways through the courtesy
of the Burlington Lines, which hold a membership in their own name. Mr. Graham
has kindly consented to present a brief report on that meeting to our Association.
Mr. Graham.
E. A. Graham: The 70th annual meeting of the American Society of Engineering
Education was held during the week of June 17, 1962, at the United States Air Force
Academy near Colorado Springs, Colo.
The program theme for this meeting was Interdisciplinary Challenges in Engineering
Education. The total registration for the meeting reached almost 3200 men, women and
children, which made it the third consecutive ASEE annual meeting to break attendance
records. The heavy attendance last year was due to two reasons: first, ASEE activities
and the programs presented at its annual meetings are becoming more and more vital
to engineering educators, and, second, the attractions of the host institution, the Air
Force Academy, encouraged ASEE members to bring their families and tie in attendance
at the meeting with vacation plans.
Due to the imminent departure of Major General W. S. Stone, Academy superin-
tendent, the dean, General R. F. McDermott, was the host of the meeting.
One of the highlights of the activities connected with the Relations with Industry
portion of the program was a briefing on the North American Air Defense activities.
This program was originally scheduled to include a tour of NORAD headquarters at
Ent Air Force Base in Colorado Springs, but due to the extremely large attendance
at the briefing, the tour of the headquarters was cancelled. Following the briefing, the
Relations with Industry annual dinner and business meeting was held at the Ent Air
Force Base.
Discussion 615
There were many other interesting and constructive meetings on engineering educa-
tion, and attendance at this meeting was time well spent.
The 71st annual meeting of the ASEE will be held June 17-21, 1%.$, on the
University of Pennsylvania campus at Philadelphia, Pa.
Assignment 2 — Stimulate Among College and University Students a
Greater Interest in the Science of Transportation and Its Importance in
the National Economic Structure by (a) Cooperating with and Contributing
to the Activities of Student Organizations in Colleges and Universities,
and (b) Presenting to Students and Their Counselors a Positive Approach
to the Attractive and Interesting Features of the Railroad Industry and the
Advantages of Choosing Railroading as a Career.
Chairman Hay: Assignment 2 will be reported on by its chairman, B. B. Lewis,
professor of railway engineering, Purdue University. Professor Lewis.
B. B. Lewis: This committee has been active, and with the cooperation of the
members and the officers of the Association, much has been accomplished. There have
been several formal talks by members to student organizations at various universities.
Inspections of railway property have been arranged for students, and there have been
displays of railway equipment set up on university campuses.
A system has recently been set up by the committee to help student organizations
obtain good speakers. Our executive secretary, Mr. Howard, in his usual efficient man-
ner, has made this project possible by: (1) contacting and obtaining speakers from
various railways, (2) advising these prospective speakers of the type of talks the com-
mittee had in mind, and (3) advising the deans of SO selected schools as to the avail-
ability of speakers. The response to this project has been encouraging.
To date, 12 railroad addresses have been arranged on 12 different campuses. Eight
of these addresses have already been made, with the other four to be made in the next
couple of months. Each railroad requested to provide a speaker has agreed without
exception. I would like to extend the thanks of the subcommittee to these railroads for
this splendid cooperation.
It is a pleasure to report that there are 43 student affiliates of the AREA on 22
college campuses who have paid their fees for the current year. Since the status of
student affiliates was established in the fall of 1960, including present members, there
have been a total of over 100 student affiliates to date.
President Code: Thank you, Professor Lewis. Are there any questions or com-
ments in connection with Professor Lewis' presentation? Mr. Hay.
Assignment 3 — The Cooperative System of Education, Including Sum-
mer Employment in Railway Service.
CHAIRMAN Hat: The report on Assignment 3 will be given by Subcommittee Chair-
man YV. A. Oliver, professor of civil engineering, University of Illinois. Professor Oliver.
\V. A. Oliver: The report of this subcommittee will be found in Bulletin 576.
1 propose making here just a brief statement as to the method this subcommittee has
used in carrying forward its assignment.
The subcommittee has followed essentially the same procedures that have been
used during the several years that the projed has been a part of the committee's activity,
with only minor changes from year to year, marie in the hope of improvement.
616 Cooperative Relation s with Universities
A questionnaire has been sent to the chief engineering officers of the railroads,
requesting information concerning their summer employment needs. The replies were
returned to the subcommittee chairman, and the information was tabluated, reproduced
in the AREA executive secretary's office, and sent to some 125 engineering colleges.
The student applying for the employment sent his application directly to the railroad.
I want to take this opportunity to thank the railroads that have been cooperative
in this project.
B. Bristow [CRI&P]: I would like to ask Prof. Oliver if he has any statistics or
information as to the percentage of summer employees who finally wind up as regular
railroad employees.
Prof. Oliver: I am afraid I can't give you an accurate answer to that question,
Mr. Bristow. I can only speak in generalities. We do know that many of these young
men who have had this experience during the summer months with the railroads have
accepted permanent employment upon completion of their work at college. I am afraid
that is about as exact an answer as I can give you.
E. J. Brown [Burlington Lines]: I would like to ask Prof. Oliver what benefits
the railroads derive from such a cooperative program.
Prof. Oliver: Mr. Brown, I think I can give you a little better answer to this
question than I was able to give to Mr. Bristow. As a matter of fact, in answering
this question I can use comments obtained from the railroads themselves with regard
to the benefits which they have obtained through this program.
As a result of this annual cooperative venture, many embryo engineers have ob-
tained their first introduction to railroad work and now some have become permanent
employees. Furthermore, the project has shown these young men that there are excellent
opportunities for an engineering career in the railroad field. This, of course, has increased
the interest of the engineering colleges in encouraging this type of employment among
their students.
Summer employment also gives the railroads an opportunity to observe the boys and
determine whether or not they want to offer them employment after they graduate.
I might add here a statement which is primarily my own — that any activity of this
kind is in the direction of good public relations.
President Code: Thank you. I would like to attempt to answer Mr. Bristow's
question. We have used summer men off and on for a good many years, and my guess
is that 50 to 75 percent of them wind up as permanent employees. I started out as a
summer man myself some 43 years ago.
Pat King, would you say that is a fair estimate on our railroad — that 50 to 75
percent of the summer men stay with us?
F. S. King [Pennsylvania]: Yes, sir, judging from the young fellows I work with.
President Code: How about you, Jim Snyder?
J. S. Snyder [Pennsylvania] : I would say that figure is very close.
Prof. Oliver: I would say these answers are in support of the opinion of this
committee that this program should go forward.
President Code: Thank you, Prof. Oliver.
Assignment 4 — Revise the Recruiting Brochure, "A Challenge and
Opportunity for Engineering Graduates — The Railroad Field".
Chairman Hay: This assignment represents one of Committee 24's most important
responsibilities. The progress on the latest revision was to have been presented by the
Discussion 617
assignment chairman, Jerry Nebcn, supervisor — track. New York Central System. Mr.
Neben unfortunately is unable to be here today, and in his stead I wish to read a few
sentences from his report, which appears on page 402 of Bulletin 576.
Chairman Hay [for Mr. NebenJ: In developing the basic premise for the revision,
it was decided that the original format and art work remain the same, and the only
changes, as required, would be in the text and photographs, the purpose being to keep
the high quality of the brochure intact, the contents up to date, and the publication
costs down. On this basis the Board of Direction has authorized the publication in
1963 of 20,000 copies of the third edition for distribution by the AREA, plus any
additional copies the AAR might order for distribution.
The majority of the recommended changes are in the photographs. Pictures of
more modern equipment and facilities are being contemplated. Text changes will be few
and of an editorial nature. A new section will be added to cover industrial engineering.
Chairman Hay [continuing] : I am not sure of the exact status of Mr. Neben's
work on photographs, but I would imagine he would still welcome any photographs
that anyone can make available to him, portraying maintenance of way and other
engineering activities.
This is presented as information, Mr. President.
President Code: I am sure additional photographs are still in order. I don't know
whether Prof. Hay has been informed, but the Board has decided to postpone until
1964 the republication of the brochure, the secretary's office having found a stock of
some 1800 copies. That will give the committee a little more time to complete their
review of the brochure.
Chairman Hay: Thank you, Mr. Code.
Assignment 5 — Ways in Which Railroads Can Cooperate with Univer-
sities in Developing Research, Including the Revision of "Suggested Topics
for Theses on Railroad Subjects".
Chairman Hay: H. E. Hurst, division engineer, The Milwaukee Railroad, and
chairman of Subcommittee 5, will report on Assignment 5. Mr. Hurst.
H. E. Hurst: Mr. President, members, and guests:
We are happy to report that our efforts to establish a petty student research grant
fund has been accomplished, largely through the assistance of the Association's executive
secretary and the director of engineering research of the Association of American
Railroads.
The following rules and procedure have been established for administering the fund:
1. Students desiring to avail themselves of assistance from the fund will address
a letter of request for a grant to the director of engineering research of the
Association of American Railroads, U40 South Federal Street, Chicago 16.
Such letters will have an appropriate endorsement by one of tin- student's
professors.
2. In their letters, students will agree to provide an itemized accounting of the
expenditures involved and a copy or summarized abstract of the report on
the completed study or research project. In addition, the letter of request will
include an agreement t<> comply with the rules and administrative procedures
set forth in the notice concerning the availabititj ot the fund.
618 Cooperative Relations with Universities
3. The grants and payments will be made directly to the students, thereby
eliminating any necessity for university overhead research charges.
4. Any one grant will be limited to a maximum of $100.
5. Approved letters of request will normally be vouchered for payment within
two weeks when funds are available.
6. Any project related to a "Railroad Subject" will be considered for approval.
7. Funds will not be used to cover the normal expenses associated with the
preparation of theses, such as report typing.
8. The director of engineering research, in handling requests for grants, will be
provided with an advisory committee consisting of one member each from
the professorial and railroad membership of the AREA, to be selected by
Committee 24.
0. The director of engineering research will keep Committee 24 advised of grants
made and such other information concerning them and their administration as
may be deemed appropriate.
We feel that experience may develop a requirement for some modifications or addi-
tions to the present rules, and it is for this reason that I have taken the time to bring
them to your immediate attention for possible discussion or suggestions at this or a
later time.
This is a progress report offered for your information.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hurst. You may be interested to know that we
are making a very modest start on this program, with an appropriation of $1000 in
the research budget. Thank you.
Assignment 6 — Procedures for Orienting and Developing Newly Em-
ployed Engineering Personnel.
Chairman Hay: Work on this subject is continuing under the chairmanship of
G. B. Pruden, general industrial agent, Seaboard Air Line Railroad. Mr. Pruden unfor-
tunately is not able to be with us today. The ultimate objective, after compilation of
data, will be to suggest training procedures consistent with modern requirements of
railroads and the current trends in engineering education.
Assignment 7 — Stimulate an Interest by College and University Staff
Members in Current Railroad Problems, Including AREA Membership.
Chatrman Hay: C. L. Heimbach, lecturer, Department of Civil Engineering, Uni-
versity of Michigan, is the Chairman of Assignment 7. Mr. Heimbach advised me by
wire that his train from Ann Arbor may be delayed. There may be some connection
between his absence and that of Mr. Neben. I have a copy of Mr. Heimbach's report
which I will read at this time.
Chairman Hay [for Mr. Heimbach]: The purpose of Assignment 7 has been
specifically interpreted by the subcommittee to include ways and means of engaging
the attention of college and university teaching personnel, and through this attention
to cause action on the part of the teachers that will result in a beneficial effect to the
railroad industry. Your subcommittee, in considering the numerous ideas advanced, felt
that the five suggestions listed in the report were worthy of further consideration in
implementing the subcommittee assignment. These five suggestions included: (1) the
instituting of faculty summer employment programs: (2) sponsorship of a technical
Discussion 619
paper and prize for college students writing on a topic in the field of railroad engineer-
ing; (3) sponsorship of research on college campuses; (4) sponsorship of field trips
and tours for faculty members to railroad installations; and (5) sponsorship of seminars
at universities to discuss specific problems facing railroad management.
Mr. Chairman, this is presented as a report of progress.
Chairman Hay [continuing]: This concludes the presentation of reports by Com-
mittee 24. This also concludes my three-year tenure as chairman of Committee 24.
I wish to express my sincere appreciation to the membership of the committee, especially
the subcommittee chairmen of the past three years, for their loyal support, cooperation,
and willing labors. I also wish to express deep appreciation for the close and whole-
hearted cooperation and support from Secretary Howard and his staff. The several
projects of Committee 24 require an intimate association of effort and planning with
the secretary. He has been unsparing in his efforts to carry out his portion of these
responsibilities.
My remaining duty is a pleasant one, to introduce the new officers of this com-
mittee. First I would like to present the secretary, Professor E. I. Fiesenheiser, director,
Department of Civil Engineering, Illinois Institute of Technology. Professor Fiesenheiser:
Our new vice chairman is R. H. Beeder, chief engineer — system, Atchison, Topeka
and Santa Fe Railway. Mr. Beeder.
Our new chairman is a man of many offices and works in Committee 24. He ad-
vances from vice chairman to chairman with my grateful thanks for the services he has
rendered in the past. He is J. F. Davison, assistant to the system chief engineer,
Canadian National Railways. Mr. Davison.
This concludes the report of Committee 24 and I hereby relinquish my chairmanship.
President Code: Thank you, Professor Hay and your committee, for another year
of constructive work, and another group of interesting and helpful reports, which
clearly evidence that your committee is in close tune with its fundamental purpose —
cooperation between the railroads and the colleges, to their mutual benefit. We par-
ticularly appreciate the continuing interest of the professorial members of your com-
mittee, and would hope that a way could be found to interest representatives from a
number of other campuses in your work.
During your term as chairman, your committee has initiated a number of highly
worthwhile projects, which I am sure it will continue to carry forward in the future.
In this — to the extent that it calls for assistance from our membership generally in
answering questionnaires or taking the "railroad story" to college campuses — I urge
fullest cooperation.
We deeply appreciate the able leadership which you have given to your committee
during the past three years, and are sorry to see your tenure come to a close. But we
have every confidence in your successor, Mr. Davison, and think your committee is
especially fortunate in its selection of Pa-t President Beeder as its vice chairman. Cer-
tainly Committee 24 will be in good hands for tin1 years immediately ahead.
Mr. Davison, if you will step here, I would like to present JTOU with this chairman's
gavel as the official symbol of your office.
Thank you again, Professor Hay, for your many services to our Association and to
Committee 24. Your committee is now excused wiih tin- thanks "i the Association
[Applause]
620 Wood Bridges and Trest les
Discussion on Wood Bridges and Trestles
[For report, see Bulletin 576, pages 371-386]
Presidknt Code: In the next scries of reports we shall hear from our structural
committees, beginning with our Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles. The chairman
of this committee is K. L. DeBlois, senior structural engineer, New York Central System,
at Chicago. If Mr. DeBlois and the members of his committee present will come to the
platform, I shall be glad to turn the meeting over to them. Throughout their presenta-
tions, please keep in mind that you have the privilege of the floor to comment or raise
questions.
Mr. DeBlois, you may proceed.
Chairman K. L. DeBlois: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
During the past year your committee received notice of the death of R. P. A.
Johnson, who was a technical adviser to Committee 7 for many years and a member
of the committee from 1944 until shortly after his retirement from active service in
1958. Mr. Johnson died on April 22, 1962, at the age of 74.
He had been associated with the U. S. Forest Products Laboratory at Madison,
Wis., since 1918, and at the time of his retirement was chief, Division of Physics and
Engineering.
As a recognized authority on structural properties of wood, Mr. Johnson guided
the work of our committee with respect to working stresses. He was most pleasant and
cheerful, and enjoyed numerous associations throughout the wood engineering profession
and the lumber industry.
Your committee regrets the passing of an outstanding engineer and a warm friend.
Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles, has reported on three assignments in
Bulletin 576, commencing on page 371, and on one assignment in Bulletin 573, com-
mencing on page 1. One of these assignments includes material for adoption and pub-
lication in the Manual. I shall call upon the chairmen of the subcommittees, if present,
to give the reports. Your questions and comments are invited at the end of each
presentation.
Assignment 2 — Grading Rules and Classification of Lumber for Rail-
way Uses: Specifications for Structural Timber, Collaborating with Other
Organizations Interested.
Chairman DeBlois: The subcommittee chairman, R. E. Kuehner, structural de-
signer, New York, Chicago & St. Louis Railroad, could not be here today, so I shall
present the report.
Chairman DeBlois [for Mr. Kuehner]: Subcommittee 2, reporting on Grading
Rules and Classification of Lumber for Railway Uses, submits for your information
proposed grading rules for hardwood structural timbers and recommended unit stresses,
as shown on pages 372 and 373 in Bulletin 576. This action became necessary because
the National Hardwood Lumber Association has discontinued publication of its
Specifications for Structural Stress Grades of Hardwood.
In preparing the proposed grading rules, the committee chose two standard grades
from the 1960 rules of the National Hardwood Lumber Association and applied addi-
tional rules for selection to make them stress grades. This was acceptable to the NHLA.
In accordance with ASTM Specification D 245, tables of recommended unit working
stresses for the new grade were prepared in three hardwood species groups. The tables
Discussion 62j
were published as information in our report, with the intention of submitting the new
tables for pages 7-1-19, 7-1-20 and 7-2-7 of the Manual at the 1964 convention. We
invite any comments you may have to offer.
President Code: I wonder to what extent hardwood is used for structural pur-
poses nowadays.
Chairman DeBlois: It is used a good deal in bridge decks, President Code, and
for bridge ties, and it is generally used in trestles in the northeastern and central parts
of the country. Since the National Hardwood Lumber Association has discontinued
publishing its stress grade data, we have been in the position of not being able to assign
unit stresses for structural grades of hardwoods. Subcommittee 2, I think, has done a
very fine job. Lyman Wood, of the U. S. Forest Products Laboratories, has worked
very closely with us in assigning these stresses.
President Code: Thank you. Are there any questions from the floor?
F. R. Woolford [Western Pacific] : Mr. DeBlois, I attended one of your meetings
a couple of years ago in New Orleans. At that time I brought up the question of
whether we could increase the spacing of our bridge ties on open-deck bridges. Has
there been any study or any consideration given to that matter since the meeting in
New Orleans?
Chairman DeBlois: I don't believe there has, Mr. Woolford.
Mr. Woolford: I think we have been carrying for many years the same old spacing
for open-deck bridge ties that was applicable for light rail even though we have gone
to heavier rail sections and better grades of timber. It appeared at the time of your
meeting that we should get into a study to see if we could eliminate some bridge ties
by spacing them wider on open-deck trestles.
Chairman DeBlois: That is a worthwhile subject, Mr. Woolford, and we shall
put it on the agenda. On our road we use the 12-in spacing, and have for years, on
steel beams and deck girders. We also use 4-in brine blocks.
The objection our people have to widening the tie spacing is that if the ties are
too far apart, the wave motion in the rails becomes more pronounced, which tends to
make the ties rock more, causing increased wear.
Mr. Woolford: I think those brine blocks are an old carry-over. I polled most of
the railroads a number of years ago to find out whether to retain the brine blocks or
not. The majority of those I got answers from had abandoned the brine blocks because
of the increased fire hazard they cause.
Assignment 4 — Methods of Fireproohng Wood Bridges and Trestles,
including Fire-Retardant Paints.
Chairman DeBlois: Our next report is on Assignment 4 and will be presented by
Subcommittee Chairman A. L. Leach, assistant engineer of bridges. Illinois Central
Railroad.
A. L. Leach: Your committee submits, for adoption and publication in the Manual.
Specifications for Fire-Retardant Coatings for Creosoted Wood, published in Bulletin
576, pages 373 to 383, incl. These specifications were orginally published as information
in Bulletin 562, January 1961. This material has received the endorsement of the com-
mittee by letter ballot in compliance with the regulations of the Association,
Mr. President, I move that these specifications be adopted and published in the
Manual.
[The motion was duly seconded, was pul to a vote, ;<n<] was carried I
622 Wood Bridges and Trestles
Assignment 6 — Applications of Synthetic Resins and Adhesives to
Wood Bridges and Trestles, Collaborating with Committees 8 and 15.
Chairman DeBlois: Our next report is on Assignment 6. It will be presented by
the Subcommittee Chairman L. R. Kubacki, area engineer — structures, Pennsylvania
Railroad.
L. R. Kubacki: The uses for synthetic resins and adhesives covered in this report
were selected from construction and maintenance applications which could not be com-
pletely solved with other available products.
In the epoxy compounds we have a versatile chemical which can provide products
with a wide range of properties. When accurately proportioned and applied in accordance
with recommended practice they can be useful to our industry.
This committee will continue its study to secure additional formulations to meet
our construction and maintenance requirements.
Assignment 7 — Repeated Loading of Timber Structures.
Chairman DeBlois: Our last report is on Assignment 7 and will be presented by
C. V. Lund, assistant to chief engineer, Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul & Pacific Railroad.
C. V. Lund: Bulletin 576 contains a synopsis of tests conducted at the AAR Re-
search Center on 24 full-size glued laminated Douglas fir stringers in repeated loading,
with particular reference to strengths in horizontal shear. These tests developed average
shear strengths at 2 million cycles in the range of 275 to 350 psi for varying position
of loads, as compared to 150 psi currently allowed in design, based however on long
duration of static loading. A preceding exploratory group developed average shear
strength of about 180 psi when symmetrically loaded. The results indicate that unit
shear strength varies with load position, and is not a definite value as currently assumed
in design.
The beams used in these tests were fabricated to a selected commercial standard.
Beams of higher quality, fabricated to more rigid specifications, appear to be needed
for economical railway trestle construction.
A similar series of tests of 24 southern pine stringers is nearing completion. Both
series of tests are part of a more extensive program planned in cooperation with the
lumber industry and the Forest Products Laboratory. Your committee regrets that due
to lack of funds this important program is being suspended.
During the past year your committee received the report of the Forest Products
Laboratory on its research on basic strengths and behavior of ^4 -scale-size fir and pine
stringers in repeated loading. This extensive investigation was initiated in 1953, in coop-
eration with the AAR Research Center, and completed in 1961. Report No. 2236 of the
United States Department of Agriculture, Forest Products Laboratory, dated January
1962, presents the results, and will be offered for AREA publication. Your committee
wishes to extend its appreciation to the Forest Products Laboratory for this outstanding
constribution to original research in the strength properties of wood.
Mr. Lund [continuing] : I wish to call attention to an error in the report on Assign-
ment 7 as printed in Bulletin 576. The last word in the second sentence of the first
paragraph appearing on page 385, should be "decrease" rather than "increase". The
sentence should read: "Conversely, as the loads approach the center of the span both
the end shear and shear resistance tend to decrease."
This completes my report, Mr. President.
Discussion 623
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Lund. Your report will be received as information
and the correction noted.
Chairman DeBlois: Mr. President, this concludes the reports on our assignments.
President Code: Thank you. Mr. DeBlois. Wood bridges and trestles still represent
a vast investment and responsibility on the railoads, and we are fortunate that over
the years we have had your committee to keep us informed relative to the design,
construction, maintenance and protection of these vital structures.
We trust that your committee will continue its good work of the past, and keep us
up to date on all new developments in your field. Your committee is now excused with
the thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Masonry
[For report, see Bulletin 575, pages 223-240]
President Code: We will next hear from our Committee 8 — Masonry, the chairman
of which is D. H. Dowe, assistant engineer of bridges, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, at
Richmond, Ya. Mr. Dowe, if you and the other members of your committee present
will come to the platform, I shall be glad to turn the meeting over to you.
Chairman D. H. Dowe: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
Before proceedings with the presentation of our reports, Committee 8 wishes to
express its sorrow at the death of one of its members and past chairman, Ernest A.
McLeod, who passed away on September 21, 1962. His memoir is included in Bulletin
575 with our annual report.
Your Committee on Masonry has reported on six assignments in Bulletin 575,
pages 223 to 240, incl. Two of these reports include Manual revisions.
Assignment 2 — Design of Masonry Structures, Collaborating with Com-
mittees 1, 5, 6, 7, 15, 28 and 30.
Chairman Dowe: Subcommittee Chairman F. A. Kempe, Jr., assistant bridge engi-
neer, Northern Pacific Railway, St. Paul, Minn., is unable to be here today, and in his
absence I shall give his report on Assignment 2.
Chairman Dowe [for Mr. Kempe]: With the increasing use of prestressed concrete
spans it became apparent that a specification for elastomeric bearing pads was necessary.
Your committee, accordingly, prepared this specification, which is published on pages
22$ and 226 of Bulletin 575.
Mr. President, I move that Part 18, Chapter 8, of the Manual be renumbered as
Part 19 and that a new Part 18, entitled "Elastomeric Bearing Pads", with specifications
as included on pages 22> and 226 of Bulletin 575. be adopted and placed in the Manual
[The motion was duly seconded.]
President Code: I have a question. Is the specification for elastomeric bearings pads
specifically for a pad to be used where there is longitudinal motion? If no motion Is
contemplated, is this type of pad still the best? It seems to me somewhat different from
the traditional type of pad, including fabric.
Chairman Dowe: The AAR Laboratory has made tests, including longitudinal
motion tests, on various types of pads, and this specification was based on their findings.
This is not the final answer. Other specifications, no doubt, will be written.
624 Masonry
I am sorry Mr. Kempe is not here today, because I am not too familiar with the
subject myself.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Dowc. Are there any other questions or com-
ments on this item?
[The motion was put to a vote and was carried. |
Assignment 3 — Foundations and Earth Pressures, Collaborating with
Committees 1, 6, 7 , 15 and 30.
Chairman Dowe: Subcommittee Chairman G. W. Cooke, consulting engineer,
Columbus, Ohio, will report on Assignment 3.
G. W. Cooke: Mr. President, members and guests:
Your committee has completed the revision of Part 4. Pile Foundations, of Chapter
8 of the Manual and recommends that the revised version, as published in Bulletin 575,
be approved by the Association.
I so move.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried.]
Assignment 4 — Deterioration and Repair of Masonry Structures.
Chairman Dowe: W. E. Brakensiek, assistant engineer, Missouri Pacific Railroad,
St. Louis, Mo., chairman of this subcommittee, is unable to be present today, and in
his absence I refer you to the progress report on Assignment 4 as shown on page 237
of Bulletin 575.
Assignment 6 — Prestressed Concrete for Railway Structures, Collabo-
rating with Committee 6.
Chairman Dowe: Subcommittee Chairman J. R. Williams, assistant engineer of
bridges, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, Chicago, will report on Assignment 6.
J. R. Williams: Mr. President, Mr. Chairman, members and guests:
Your committee has completed the design and detail drawings of a recommended
prestressed concrete box beam trestle. In addition to the drawings, specifications for
the design and construction of prestressed concrete trestles for railway loading have
also been prepared. The specifications and plans for this trestle will be published as
information this year.
The drawings include the details of 28-ft-long single prestressed box beams in both
3 -ft and 4-ft widths. Your committee is now proceeding with the design and prepara-
tion of detail plans of double-box beams for 28-ft spans.
Are there any questions?
F. R. Woolford [Western Pacific] : I have one question. At a meeting you had a
couple of years ago the question came up about standardizing prestressed beams so that
when we wanted one we could order it as a standard piece of bridge material. Has any-
thing further been done about such standardization?
Mr. Williams: We are standardizing in that the geometry of the block sections
conforms with actual standards; that is, the wall thicknesses, sizes of the voids, and
depths, are all AASHO standards, so anyone who can cast beams for a highway depart-
ment can also cast them for railroads. The number that will be stockpiled will depend
Discussion 625
on how many the railroads will he buying. The pile sections als nform to \\SHO
standard prestressed piles.
Mr. Woolford: Have you any idea whether thi^ standard will be adopted and
used by the railroads?
Mr. Williams: Unfortunately, the few prestressed concrete trestles constructed
since we started to prepare these plans have all deviated some place or other from the
plans we have set up. Apparently the double-box section appears to be the most eco-
nomical, but we steered clear of it at first because there were many casting yards that
couldn't handle it. However, 1 understand that in the Southwest and Southeast we are
getting them quite economically. This is one reason why we are now preparing plans
for the double-box section.
Mr. President, this concludes the report of Subcommittee 6.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Williams. Apparently the Rail committee is not
the only one having trouble with its standards, Frank.
Assignment 7 — Quality of Concrete and Mortars, Collaborating with
Committee 6.
Chairman Dowe: Subcommittee Chairman J. W. Dolson, assistant to chief engineer,
Missouri Pacific Railroad, St. Louis, Mo., will report on Assignment 7.
J. W. Dolson: Mr. President and gentlemen:
Your committee has prepared a "Bibliography of Important Articles in AREA Pro-
ceedings (Vols. 40-63) Relative to Quality of Concrete." This bibliography was published
as information in Bulletin 575, page 238.
This subcommittee has the continuing assignment of maintaining references to
ASTM specifications and designations in Manual Chapter 8 up to date. Necessary
editorial revisions have been made and were published in Bulletin 575, pages 239 and
240. Mr. President, I move that these revisions be accepted.
[The motion was regularly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Subcommittee 7, at the direction of Committee 8, prepared a nomenclature and
glossary of terms and symbols appearing throughout Chapter 8 of the Manual with the
thought that it might be desirable to have such material at the beginning of the chapter.
However, the list was so voluminous and would require such extensive revision of tin-
chapter that it was decided to defer action for the present.
Currently, subcommittee 7 is revising the AREA pamphlet, "Instructions for Mixing
and Placing Concrete."
This completes the report of Subcommittee 7.
Assignment 8 — Waterproofing for Railway Structures, Collaborating
with Committees 6, 7 and 15.
Chairman Dowe: Subcommittee Chairman R. J. Brueske, assistant division engi-
neer, Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul & Pacific Railroad. La Crosse, Wis , will report on
\-iu'nment 8.
R. J. Brueske: Mr. President, fellow members, and guests:
Last year, your waterproofing subcommittee withdrew the specifications i"i damp-
proofing included in Part 3, Chapter 29, ol the Manual The material specified was no
longer commercially available, and the specification did not cover new materials I hat
became available.
626 Impact and Bridge Stresses
We requested funds for the 1963 budget to prepare a performance test for damp-
proofing coatings and to study the effect of bacteria and other deleterious substances in
the soil on various dampproofing coatings. One of the results we hoped to achieve from
the tests was the minimum amount of water a dampproofing coating should repel to be
considered satisfactory.
Unfortunately, due to the reduced budget, funds will not be available in 1963. Since
it appears there will be considerable delay before the tests can be made and results
obtained, we are in the process of revamping the specification for interim use. The
revised specification will most likely be of a more general nature.
We are also continuing our investigation of the use of epoxy resins as a water-
proofing material in collaboration with Committee 7.
For 1963 we are adding a new assignment: The Investigation of Membrane Water-
proofing Joint and Edge Sealers. We hope to be able to do some preliminary inves-
tigation on this assignment during 1963.
Mr. President, this report is presented as information.
Chairman Dowe: Are there now any further comments, questions or suggestions
regarding our report? If not, Mr. President, this concludes the report of Committee 8.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Dowe. Your committee has presented a number
of very informative reports, which indicate that it is keeping abreast of all new devel-
opments relating to masonry structures. We appreciate, too, the continuing interest of
your committee in keeping its chapter of the Manual up to date.
If there are no further questions with respect to the reports and recommendations
of your committee, we must move along, so I will excuse your committee with the
thanks of the Association. [Applause!
Discussion on Impact and Bridge Stresses
[For report, see Bulletin 575, pages 327-331]
President Code: Our next structural committee to report is Committee 30 — Impact
and Bridge Stresses, the chairman of which is J. W. Davidson, engineer of bridges,
Chicago, Burlington & Quincy Railroad, with headquarters here in Chicago. Mr. David-
son, we shall be glad to hear the report of your committee at this time.
Chairman J. W. Davidson: Mr. President, members of the Association and guests:
Unlike most AREA committees, Committee 30 is not responsible for preparation
of specifications or other material to be submitted to this Association for adoption and
publication in the Manual. This committee is instead primarily concerned with coordi-
nating research, and testing of existing structures of all types of construction. The results
of such field testing and analysis are reviewed by this committee. When tests and
analysis have progressed to the point where they appear to provide information which
can be incorporated in specifications, the information is submitted to the three other
structural committees for their consideration.
As all members of the AREA are aware, its research is financed by the Association
of American Railroads out of railroad earnings, unlike our competition whose research
is largely done by the Government with tax money. The AAR has found it necessary
to reduce expenditures in recent years, and this has, of course, been reflected in the
fact that it has been necessary to defer much of the research with which this committee
is concerned. Most of the available money has been devoted to testing prestressed con-
Discussion 627
crete spans, since it is the committee's feeling that research in that area of rapidly
developing construction techniques should be given preference.
This committee is reporting on five of its ten assignments at this time. These arc
presented in Bulletin 575, pages MS through 331. All of these are progress reports and
are presented as information. I shall also comment briefly on some of our other
assignments.
Assignment 2 — Steel Truss Spans.
Chairman Davidson: The AAR research staff investigated the bolted field connec-
tions in a 310-ft truss span on the New York Central for evidence of slippage. This
span, over the Cal-Sag canal south of Chicago, was one of the earliest long-span rail-
way trusses to be assembled using high-strengtb bolts. Strain-gage readings showed that
no slippage had occurred after two years of service, and there has been no loss of
camber.
The AAR staff also assisted the Rock Island Railroad in investigating a vertical
lift span which tended to become lodged in the open position during hot weather. Strains
were meausured in the main drive shafts during operation of the span in all kinds of
weather.
Assignment 4 — Longitudinal Forces in Bridge Structures.
Chairman Davidson: In the last year tests were made on a prestressed concrete
trestle on the Seaboard Air Line which included determination of traction and braking
stresses. The AAR research staff is presently preparing an analysis of these strain record-
ings, to be published sometime later this year.
Only a limited amount of work has been done in experimental determination of
stresses resulting from braking and traction forces acting on piers and pile bents, gen-
erally in connection with other tests. Evidence so far available indicates that the present
specification requirements for longitudinal forces may be overly conservative. Further
tests are necessary to prove the validity of these data but, if correct, important savings
in design of piers and abutments could result.
Assignment 5 — Distribution of Live Load on Bridge Floors.
Chairman Davidson: The University of Illinois study of this problem, based upon
the data presented in AAR report ER-S, developed equations for use in designing steel
bridges having monolithic concrete slab decks. This report and the proposed equations
have been transmitted to Committee 15 for consideration in preparing a revision of
the design specifications.
Assignment 6 — Concrete Structures.
Chairman Davidson: Beginning in 1957 this committee has periodically reported
on field tests of prestressed concrete girder spans ranging in length from 20 to 72 ft.
The purpose of these tests is to develop a basis for an unpad equation for design of
prestressed concrete structures, to study the load distribution to the individual girders
of such spans and to determine the distribution of stresses. As a continuation of this
program, the results of a field investigation on two SO-ft 6-in prestressed concrete spans
of the Florida East Coast bridge near Pompano Beach, Fla., appeared in report ER-21
628 Impact and Bridge Stresses
and Bulletin 573. The purpose of this investigation was to compare the static and
dynamic effect on spans both with and without shear keys and both before and after
transverse post tensioning under the passage of diesel locomotives and cars. Each span
consisted of six rectangular hollow beams per track. The two spans were identical
except for the use of shear keys filled with cement mortar near the top of the beams
in one span. Transverse post tensioning was accomplished by use of high-strength steel
bars which were left loose until a series of runs with the test train had been recorded.
The transverse bars were then tensioned and another series of runs made with the same
test train. This investigation showed the following:
1. Either shear keys or transverse post tensioning is effective in distributing the
load across the deck.
2. Recorded static strains in all beams after post tensioning were less than cal-
culated. Before post tensioning, the recorded static strains in some beams were
more than calculated while the outer beams without shear keys carried very
little load. The best distribution was for the span with shear keys and after
post tensioning, although the improvement over use of shear keys alone was
small.
3. Above 50 mph the recorded strains increased with speed, yet the maximum
recorded values were less than the values calculated using the present AREA
impact formula for masonry structures.
4. The lowest impact values occurred in the span with shear keys and after post
tensioning. The maximum recorded total impact for the locomotive in both
spans was less than that specified by the current AREA specifications.
Another investigation by the AAR research staff covering tests on 30- and 55-ft
prestressed concrete spans on the Southern Pacific near Houston, Tex., is also presented
in report ER-25 and Bulletin 573.
The 30-ft span consists of four I-shaped precast girders with a cast-in-place con-
crete deck. The 55-ft span has five girders of the same cross section, also with a cast-
in-place deck. It was found that composite action occurred between the precast girders
and the cast-in-place deck, and that actual recorded strains did not exceed calculated
values. The live load was spread more uniformly among the five girders in the 55-ft
span than among the four girders in the 30-ft span.
Except for the 72-ft prestressed concrete girders on the Santa Fe covered in Bul-
letin 566 and the 55-ft spans on the Southern Pacific just mentioned, almost all our
tests on prestressed concrete bridges have been limited to span lengths of around 30 ft.
This committee would like to make additional tests of longer spans, particularly in the
40- to 50-ft range, subject to high-speed train operation, but so far has been unable
to locate bridges suitable for testing. Any information on such spans would be
appreciated.
This committee has previously reported on "Static and Fatigue Tests on Prestressed
Concrete Railway Slabs" based on work performed at Lehigh University. For this study
concrete strength was the principal variable. As a continuation of this work, the AAR
staff conducted a laboratory test using similar pretensioned beams to investigate the
effect of three different sizes of strands and two different levels of prestress on the
static and fatigue strength of the beams.
As was the case with the beams tested at Lehigh University, static loading produced
compressive failures in the concrete and repeated loading resulted in failure of the
prestressing strands.
Discussion 629
The results of these tests are being analyzed by the Research Center staff and will
be the subject of a report by this committee later this year.
Assignment 7 — Timber Structures.
Chairman Davidson: In 1961 the AAR research staff prepared report ER-1 cover-
ing tests on a 60-ft glued laminated wood girder span, which at that time was the
longest such span carrying railroad traffic. Since that time, progress in "glu-lam" con-
struction has been rapid.
A 132-ft glu-lam girder bridge has since been built on a railroad in British Colum-
bia. It is hoped to make a series of tests on this structure later this year.
Assignment 10 — Steel Continuous Structures.
Chairman Davidson: At the expense of Iowa State University the AAR research
laboratory investigated the fatigue strength in bending of a two-span continuous pre-
stressed steel beam. The rolled beams were prestressed by welding on high-strength cover
plates while the beams were held in a deflected position. The prestressed beams carried
well over 2 million cycles of loading before failure, carrying stresses equal to those
which would occur in a bridge.
Assignment 11 — Composite Design of Steel Structures Having Concrete
Decks.
Chairman Davidson: In the past year tests were made of a concrete-encased steel
beam span on the Western Pacific to determine the load distribution to the beams, which
showed the concrete encasement to be acting with the steel as a composite section. A
similar test was made on a beam span on the Seaboard Air Line. Stresses were also
measured on a 60-ft girder span having a cast-in-place concrete deck to determine the
degree of participation of the deck in carrying bending stress. Analysis of these tt"-tv
has not yet been completed.
This completes the resume of this committee's current work, and I should know
like to introduce the subcommittee chairmen. Will each chairman please stand and be
recognized as I read his name.
E. S. Birkenwald, engineer of bridges, Western Lines, Southern Railway, chair-
man of Subcommittee 2.
J. A. Erskine, assistant bridge and building engineer, Gulf, Mobile & Ohio Rail-
road, Subcommittee 4.
Professor \. M. Xewmark, University of Illinois, Subcommittee 5.
P. L. Montgomery, division engineer, New York, Chicago & St. Louis Railroad,
Subcommittee 6.
C. V. Lund, assistant to chief engineer, Chicago, Milwaukee, St Paul & Pacini
Railroad, Subcommittee 7.
Professor James Michalos, New York University, Subcommittee 8.
K. K. Andrlik, bridge designer, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Subcom
mittee 9.
\. E. Ekrem, assistant bridge engineer, Greal Northern, Subcommittee 11.
| Vice President L. A. Loggins assumed the Chair. |
Vice President Loggins: Are there any questions from the floor reganlinu tin-
report ?
630 Iron and Steel Structures
Voice: In the prcstressing of those continuous beams you were talking about, was
that deflection upward before you welded on the cover plates?
Chairman Davidson: The centers were deflected upward. I believe a description
and photograph of the operation are shown in the AAR Research Center Annual Report
for 1961-1962.
Vice President Loggins: Are there any other questions? If not, we thank you,
Mr. Davidson. Your committee, with its personnel of specialists in structural design,
both railroad men and college professors, and with the help of the AAR research staff,
continues to render invaluable assistance to our other structural committees, which they
could get in no other way.
I know that the college representatives on your committee make a vital contribution
to your work; and while I am sure you are fully aware of this, and that it is appre-
ciated, I would like to take this opportunity to say "thank you" to these men on behalf
of our Association as a whole.
I note, in several places in your reports, references to restriction of research activities
because of a lack of funds. This is certainly to be regretted, but it is something we are
all faced with. The special investigations financed by individual railroads have certainly
been helpful. I hope we can look forward to better times in financing of research work,
but I must confess that I do not see much sunshine in the immediate future.
Thank you again, Mr. Davidson. Your committee is now excused with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Iron and Steel Structures
[For report, see Bulletin 576, pages 359-370]
Vice President Loggins: Another of our important structural committees is our
Committee IS — Iron and Steel Structures, which we will hear from next. The chairman
of this committee is C. Neufeld, engineer of bridges, Canadian Pacific Railway, at Mon-
treal. Mr. Neufeld, I shall be glad if you and the other members of your committee
present will come to the platform and present your report at this time.
Chairman C. Neufeld: Mr. Vice President and members of the Association:
The report of Committee IS is published in Bulletin 576, pages 359 to 370, incl.
The reports on Assignments 1, 2, 4, 6 and 7 include either Manual revisions or material
to be published as information; and I shall call upon the chairman of each subcom-
mittee, if present, to present these reports. Brief progress reports on Assignments 3, 5,
8 and 10 are published on pages 359 and 360.
In compliance with the regulations of the Association, all material being presented
for adoption and publication in the Manual has received the endorsement of the com-
mittee by letter ballots, in the form of an affirmative vote of at least two-thirds of the
voting membership.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Neufeld: E. S. Birkenwald, engineer of bridges, Southern Railway
System, chairman of Subcommittee 1, will present the report.
E. S. Birkenwald: Mr. Vice President and gentlemen:
Your committee submits for adoption Manual material found in Bulletin 576, pages
361 to 363, incl., and presents as information on pages 363 and 364 a report concerning
antifriction bearings for movable bridge applications.
Discussion 631
The committee submitted to the Association in 1962, as information, revisions to
the Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges so as to permit the use of A 36 steel in
place of A 7 steel. The A 36 steel has a higher yield point, permitting use of 20,000 psi
instead of 18,000 psi basic unit stress, and costs no more than A 7 steel. Hence, adop-
tion of these revisions, found in the Proceedings, Vol. 63, pages 387 to 390, incl., will
reduce the cost of steel railway bridges.
Since this material was presented as information in Bulletin 569, review developed
the necessity for making the five minor revisions listed on page 361 of Bulletin 576.
The first revision resulted from an omission; the second and third revisions, from lump-
ing too much together; and the fourth and fifth revisions, from changes made by the
ASTM in its specifications for A 36 steel.
The revisions published in Bulletin 576 for Rules for Rating Existing Iron and Steel
Bridges are necessitated by the use of A 36 steel in the Specifications for Steel Railway
Bridges.
In 1962 the committee also submitted to the Association, as information, the sub-
stitution of Specifications for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Steel Bolts in Steel
Railway Bridges for the Specifications for Assembly of Structural Joints Using High-
Strength Steel Bolts in Steel Railway Bridges. This material can be found in the Pro-
ceedings, Vol. 63, pages 390 to 398, incl.
After further consideration, the committee feels that the Specifications for Structural
Joints, presented as information in 1962, should be amended as outlined in Bulletin 576,
pages 362 and 363.
Revision (1) is for clarification, while Revision (2) provides a unit stress con-
sistent with friction-type joints. Revision (3) resulted from the fact that it is cheaper
to use a hardened washer under the turned element of the bolt than to omit such a
washer. The balance of Revision (3) is an editorial change. Revision (4) results from
requiring the use of a hardened washer under the turned element of the bolt.
Mr. President, I move that the revisions to the Specifications for Steel Railway
Bridges, presented as information in 1962 and amended in Bulletin 576, page 361; the
Rules for Rating Existing Iron and Steel Bridges, published in Bulletin 576, pages 361
and 362; and the Specifications for Structural Joints Using High-Strength Steel Bolts
in Steel Railway Bridges, presented as information in 1962 and amended in Bulletin
576, pages 362 and 363, be adopted for publication in the Manual and that, with these
revisions, these parts of Chapter 15 of the Manual be reapproved.
[The motion was duly seconded.]
V|ce President Loggins: Is there discussion of this motion?
D. S. Bechlv [Illinois Central |: Mr. Chairman, A 36 steel is supposed to be a
stronger steel than A 7, and this presumably is the reason for increasing the allowable
design stress from 18,000 to 20,000 psi. At the same time this revision propose- to
decrease the minimum ultimate tensile strength of A 36 steel to 58,000 psi as compared
to 60,000 psi for A 7 steel. This appears to me to be a discrepancy, and I wonder i! it
can be explained.
Mr. Birkenwald: First, I should like to say that the ASTM specifications for A 7
steel, which we use in the AREA, guarantee a 33,000 psi yield point. It is true that
over the years we have found by making tests that actually the yield point of the
steel may range somewhere between 36,000 and 40,000 psi, depending on the thickness
of the material. There is some hardening due to rolling on thin material that ha- the
effect of increasing the strength of relatively thin steel.
I don't think we would find that greater strength it we were to take a coupon
out of the flange of a 36-in 300-lb beam, which is V/2 in thick. I think we would get
632 Iron and Steel Structures
very close to the 33,000 psi guaranteed. If it is more, that is to our advantage. We
have that advantage if we have made tests and we want to take the higher yield point
found into account when we rate a structure.
The A 36 steel is guaranteed to have 36,000 psi yield point. This is a higher guar-
antee. If it should turn out that we would get some steel that would have a yield point
less than 36,000 psi, using the A 36 specifications, then we would have a right to go
back to the manufacturer and get some redress. We feel that as long as the steel is
being guaranteed as having a 36,000 psi yield point, then we are justified in increasing
our basic unit stresses.
Now, as to the ultimate tensile stress being reduced from 60,000 to 58,000 psi: it
really doesn't make a great deal of difference, since our factors of safety are based on
the yield point and not on the ultimate strength. As a means of comparison between
A 7 and A 36 steel, the factor of safety for the A 7 steel in tension is 1.83 according
to our present specifications. We are proposing for A 36 steel to make it 1.80. The only
reason there is a slight decimal difference is that we want to establish the figures for
our basic unit stresses in even thousands.
For compression, the factor of safety for A 7 steel which we are using now is 1.76.
For the A 36 steel it will become 1.69.
I trust that answers the question.
Vice President Loggins: Thank you, Mr. Birkenwald. Does that answer your
question, Mr. Bechly?
Mr. Bechly: Well, it answers it insofar as the yield point is concerned. It still
doesn't answer it as far as the ultimate is concerned. Probably it is an unaswerable
question. I don't know what the reason was for lowering it.
Mr. Birkenwald: The reason for lowering it was simply that some of the manu-
facturers felt they could not guarantee 60,000 psi. As a matter of fact, the ASTM
specification gives a range up to as much as 80,000 psi. I am quite sure we are going
to find, when tests are made, that the ultimate strength will be well over 60,000 psi,
judging by the chemistry of the steel that is provided by the specifications.
Vice President Loggins: Is there any further discussion?
D. F. Lyons [Chicago South Shore & South Bend]: How do you go about making
a test of the steel in existing bridges for rating purposes? What procedure do you use?
Mr. Birkenwald: Most of the steel in existing bridges was tested when the bridge
was initially bought, and we have kept the test records. At least that is true on our
railroad, and I am quite sure it is true on most of the other railroads.
Mr. Lyons: It is not true on ours.
Mr. Birkenwald: Somebody thought, back around 1900, that it would be a good
idea to find out what we were buying and to see what we were getting. Tests were
made and we have them on record. So we know what the yield points are, and because
we know we are able to take advantage of what was originally found.
If you do not have any record, then it is necessary for you to follow what is in
the rating rules, which provide for about a 10 percent reduction in the yield point,
which necessarily affects the allowable stress that you can use.
Vice President Loggins: Thank you, Mr. Birkenwald. Is there any further
discussion ?
[The motion was put to a vote and was carried. |
Mr. Birkenwald: On pages 363 and 364 your committee presents as information
a report concerning anti-friction bearings for movable bridge applications. Exception
Discussion 633
to the Association's Specifications for Movable Bridges in regard to anti-friction bearings
was taken by one of the manufacturers of this product. A thorough review was made
over a period of several years, with the conclusion that no change should he made in
the Association's specifications. The report outlines the reasoning for this conclusion.
Mr. Chairman, this concludes the report on Assignment 1.
Assignment 2 — Composite Steel and Concrete Spans: Non-Ferrous
Metal Bridges. Collaborating with Committees 8 and SO.
Chairman Neufeld: Ellis E. Paul, partner, Howard, Needles, Tammen & Bergen-
doff, Consulting Engineers, chairman of Subcommittee 2, is unable to attend this meet-
ing. I will ask the secretary of the committee. Professor Hayes of Purdue University,
to present the report.
Prof. J. M. Hayes [reading Mr. Paul's report |: Last year your committee pre-
sented, as information, tentative Specifications for Composite Steel and Concrete Spans
(Proceedings. Vol. 63, 1062, pages 398 and 399). These specifications are now submitted
with the recommendation that they be adopted and published in the Manual as a new
Part 8 — Composite Steel and Concrete Spans.
Mr. Chairman, I so move.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried. |
Prof. Hayes [reading Mr. Paul's report |: Your committee also submits its final
report on non-ferrous metal bridges, page 365, Bulletin 5 76. In view of the committee's
findings, it would appear that this subject matter as a whole is not attractive at this
time, and that the interests of the members of your committee could better be served
in devoting their time and effort to other matters. Therefore, in November 1962 the
Board Committee on Assignments approved your committee's recommendation that the
assignment be withdrawn until such later date when greater interest might be evidenced
and funds are available for carrying out the necessary studies.
I would like to bring to your attention a correction which should be made in the
report. On page 366, Bulletin 576, the third reference reads, "All-Aluminum Span Car-
riers Rail Traffic Over Grasse River Bridge". The word "Carriers" should be changed
to "Carries".
Are there any questions or comments from the floor? If not, Mr. Chairman, this
concludes the report on Assignment 2.
Assignment 4 — Stress Distribution in Bridge Frames.
Chairman Neufeld: E. T. Franzen, engineer of bridges, Chicago. Rock Island &
Pacific Railroad, chairman of the Subcommittee for Assignment 4, will present the report
on "Stress Distribution in Bridge Frames: (a) Floorbeam Hangers; (c) Truss Bridge
Research Project."
E. T. Franzen: Mr. Vice President and members:
The work on Assignment 4 (a) — Floorbeam Hangers, is complete with the presen-
tation of the amendment as shown on page 367 of Bulletin 576, which amendment
will be new Par. 3 of Art. 1. page 15 712, Sec. I), Trusses, of Methods of Strengthening
Existing Bridges, Part 7, Chapter 15.
Mr. Chairman, I move that this amendment be adopted.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried.]
Mr. Franzen: Assignment 4 (c) pertains to the Truss Bridge Research Project at
Northwestern University. During the past year work has progressed on investigation
634 Iron and Steel Structures
and testing to determine the ultimate carrying capacity of the truss span with a
damaged end post.
Two complete series of tests have been made of an end post in Truss A, which is
of the old style, having the angles of the member turned out. The second series of
tests of an end post in the Type A truss gave results which are approximately 6 per-
cent lower than the first series of tests. This is good correlation of data, considering
the difficulty of controlling the damage to the specimen.
A second series of tests is now in progress on an end post in Truss B, which is
of a modern type, with angles turned in and having a perforated bottom cover plate.
From the three series of tests on the end posts, it has been found that the capacity
of end posts of Type A and B Trusses was approximately equal for the straight condi-
tion and for the severely damaged condition. For intermediate conditions of initial
bend or damage, the A end post showed a greater strength.
A report has been prepared by Dr. John F. Ely, project director, to cover all work
on the nondestructive tests or up to the point at which tests of damaged end posts
were started. As this project is a joint venture involving several organizations in addi-
tion to the AREA, this first report will be submitted to the American Society of Civil
Engineers for publication. A second report will be prepared to cover testing of the end
posts, which report is anticipated to be ready for publication by the middle of this year.
The future work of the Truss Bridge Project will depend upon availability of
funds. Dr. Ely has prepared three proposals covering work that will give much new
information concerning stresses and function of members of a truss span. This work is
estimated to cost $160,000. Committee IS voted at a recent meeting to request the AAR
to continue to support the project with contributions of $10,000 per year for two years.
Other supporting organizations are being canvassed to obtain firm commitments for
the balance of the money needed.
Dr. E'y is attending our meeting this afternoon, and I would like to take this
opportunity to introduce him. Dr. Ely, director of the Truss Bridge Research Project
at Northwestern University. If there are any questions pertaining to this project, either
Dr. Ely or I will be glad to answer them.
Vice President Loggins: Thank you, Mr, Franzen. Are there any questions from
the audience?
K. L. DeBlois [NYC]: I would like to ask Mr. Franzen a question. From a bridge
engineer's standpoint, what practical use can be made of this research data in the case
of an end post of a two-truss span that has been damaged by a derailment?
Mr. Franzen: I wouM like to refer the question to Dr. Ely. He is probably much
more able than I to answer it.
Dr. Ely: I would say, as I have just learned, that there already has been some
use made of the information we have obtained. I believe up to this time the decisions
were based on how the bridge engineer felt that day, and on no real analytical data
whatsoever. There was no experimental verification that could help you decide whether
you were one-half off or that, you were just at the ultimate capacity of the bridge.
However, I think we have demonstrated that for the type of truss bridge which
has bolted connections, that is, not a pin-connected structure, the damaged truss as a
whole has an ability to carry loads which most people who have observed the tests felt
were much larger than was previously thought possible.
As far as solving the problem analytically and exactly is concerned for the torsion
bending and inelastic range of a member that is damaged, I would say this is going
to have to wait for several years.
Discussion 635
Assignment 6 — Preparation and Painting of Steel Surfaces: Synthetic
Resins and Other Adhesive Materials for Protective Coating and Reinforce-
ment, Collaborating with Committee 7.
Chairman Xeufeld: R. C. Baker, assistant chief engineer, Chicago & Eastern
Illinois Railroad, chairman of Subcommittee 6, will present this report.
R. C. Baker: Mr. Vice President: The report on Assignment 6 is published on
pages 368 and 369 of Bulletin 576 and consists of a brief status report based on reports
prepared by the director of research of the Steel Structures Painting Council, covering
paint tests on four bridges. These tests were initiated between 1953 and 1958.
Your committee is aware of the limited funds available for research, but due to
the large expenditures which are being incurred annually by the railroads in the United
States and Canada in the preservation and restoration of steel structures, it is the view
of your committee that substantial savings would result if research could be sponsored
and continued on this assignment.
The portion of the assignment dealing with synthetic resins and other adhesive
materials is a joint assignment with Committee 7. Your committee is in the process of
assembling information on the use of epoxies on steel bridges and would appreciate
receiving suggestions and experience records from Association members so that these
can be studied.
Assignment 7 — Bibliography and Technical Explanation of Various
Requirements in AREA Specifications Relating to Iron and Steel Structures.
Chairman Neufeld: J. G. Clark, of Clark, Daily and Deitz, Consulting Engineers,
and chairman of Subcommittee 7, will present the report on this assignment.
J. G. Clark: A progress report published in Bulletins 576, pages 369 and 370 is
submitted as information. It includes a definition of the basic-oxygen process which
defines the process as steelmaking in which molten iron is refined to steel under a basic
slag by directing a jet of high-purity oxygen onto the surface of the hot metal bath
to produce a steel similar to basic open-hearth steel.
Chairman- Xeufeld: I would like to introduce the other subcommittee chairmen
responsible for the assignments of this committee.
J. E. South, system engineer — structures, Pennsylvania Railroad, chairman of Sub-
committee 3 on Corrosion of Deck Plates.
R. W. Gustafson, bridge engineer, Great Northern Railway, and chairman of Sub-
committee 8 on Specifications for Design of Structural Plate Pipe with Diameters Greater
Than 15 Ft.
A. R. Harris, retired engineer of bridges, Chicago & Ninth Western Railway, chair-
man of Subcommittee 5 on Design of Steel Bridge Details.
J. C. King, assistant engineer of bridges and structures, Canadian National Rail-
ways, chairman of Subcommittee 10 on Effect of Continuous Welded Rail on Bridges,
Collaborating with the Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail.
Mr. Vice President, this concludes the report of Committee 15.
Vice President Locgins: Thank you, Mr. Neufeld, and your committee, lor your
work of another year, and another series of valuable reports and Manual recom-
mendations.
We necessarily look to your committee to keep our Association and the railroads
completely up to date with respect to new developments in steel structures, design,
Bull. 579
636 Buildings
construction and maintenance — and not only our own railroads, because it is a well-
known fact that railroad bridge engineers on many railroads throughout the world look
to your chapter in our Manual as a guide in the solution of their problems.
Thank you again, Mr. Neufeld, for the continuing good work of your committee
under your direction. You are now excused, with the thanks of the Association.
[Applause]
Discussion on Buildings
[For report, see Bulletin 574, pages 213-222]
Vice President Loggins: We still have one more structural committee to hear
from — our Committee 6 — Buildings. The chairman of this committee is K. E. Hornung,
architect, Milwaukee Road, at Chicago. Mr. Hornung, I shall be pleased if you and
the other members of your committee present will come to the platform and present
your report at this time.
Chairman K. E. Hornung: The report of Committee 6 on the activities of the
past year is not exactly glamorous, as our efforts have been concentrated on revision
of the Manual. Other than completing revision of the section on passenger stations, all
of Chapter 6 of the Manual has been reviewed and revised, deleted or supplemented.
This tremendous task has been accomplished under the spirited leadership of
W. G. Harding, architect of the Wabash Railroad, with the assistance of almost every
other member of Committee 6.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Hornung: We will now have the report of our Subcommittee on Revi-
sion of Manual. In the absence of Mr. Harding the report will be presented by J. W.
Hayes, vice chairman of Committee 6.
J. W. Hayes [for Mr. Harding] : Mr. President, members of the Association, and
guests:
In accordance with its assignments, the committee has continued to review Chapter
6 to bring up to date those specifications not completed in time for last year's
reprinting of the Manual.
Our recommendations are printed in Bulletin 574, pages 213 to 222, and may be
briefly stated as follows:
In Part 4, delete "Specifications for Clay Hollow Tile" and substitute therefor
"Specifications for Structural Clay Tile — Structural Clay Facing Tile — Ceramic Veneer."
In Part 9, reapprove without change "Specifications for Asphaltic Concrete Pave-
ments" and "Specifications for Asphalt Macadam Pavements." Add "Specifications for
Bituminous Road Mix Surface."
In Part 13, revise wording of paragraphs 11 and 13 of "Paints for Railway Build-
ings," as written in Bulletin S74, page 216.
In Part 14, delete the present "Specifications for Sprinkler Systems" and substitute
the rewritten version on pages 216-218 of Bulletin 574.
In Part 26, delete the material on "Ice Houses" and "Icing Stations" substituting
therefor the rewritten version appearing on pages 218 to 220; delete the material on
"Rest Houses"; delete the material in "Storehouses for Shops and Locomotive Ter-
minals", substituting therefor the rewritten version on pages 220 to 222; delete the
material on "Oil Houses" substituting the rewritten version on page 222 and reapprove
the material on "Lumber Shed" with the revision on page 222.
Discussion 637
Mr. President, I move the adoption of the foregoing deletions, additions and
revisions to the manual.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried.]
Assignment 2 — Specifications for Railway Buildings.
Chairman Hornung: Subcommittee 2, whose assignment is the preparation of new
specifications, has as its chairman W. F. Armstrong, engineer of buildings, Chicago &
Xorthwestern Railway. There is no report to be made on this assignment at this time.
Assignment 8 — Infra-Red Ray Heating, Collaborating with Com-
mittee 18.
Chairman Hornung: Leadership of Subcommittee 8 has just been assumed by
D. A. Bessey, assistant architect, Milwaukee Road, who will now report.
D. A. Bessey: A previous report on this assignment, published in Bulletin 560,
briefly describes various uses for infra-red ray heating in railway buildings. To date,
operational experience to determine design data and operational cost has not been too
readily available, either from railroads or from manufacturers. However, additional
installations are being made and additional design information is being developed by
manufacturers, which will permit your committee to ultimately formulate another
report.
Chairman Hornung: For the coming year Committee 6 has been given five new
subjects which will be of particular interest to the membership of our committee and,
we believe, to the entire Association.
New Assignment 3 will involve a study of the use of synthetic resins for adhesives
and coatings in railway buildings. This subcommittee will be headed by G. J. Bleul,
engineer of buildings for the Baltimore & Ohio.
Under new Assignment 4 we shall review new advances in paint products for
railway buildings, under the leadership of A. F. Langmeyer, architect for the Illinois
Central.
Under new Assignment 5 we shall collaborate with Committee 8 on the study of
prestressed concrete; the chairman will be YV. R. Hyma, assistant engineer of the
Santa Fe.
New Assignment 6 involves studying the development and use of plastics in build-
ings, and will be under the chairmanship of H. R. Helker, assistant engineer, Missouri
Pacific.
New Assignment 7 is about the application of curtain wall construction to railway
buildings, and will be appraised under the chairmanship of I. G. Forbes, engineer of
buildings, Illinois Central.
Chairman- HoRNTTNG [continuing]: Mr. Vice President, I believe we stayed within
the 10 min allotted to Committee 6 for its report. This concludes our report.
Vice President Loggins: Thank you, Mr. Hornung; and thank you, Mr. Harding,
chairman of the Subcommittee on Revision of Manual, which seems to have headed up
much of the work of your committee again this year.
It is unfortunate that the further Manual recommendations you have presented
this year could not have been incorporated in the Manual before it was reprinted during
the past summer; but with the largest chapter in the Manual and, I suspect, the largest
638 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
number of documents in any chapter, I know your committee had a tremendous job
of review and updating, and did the best possible to complete this work earlier.
May I ask, Mr. Hornung, how much more of Chapter 6 requires review and up-
dating, and when do you expect this additional work will be completed?
Chairman Hornung: Presently we are rewriting the remaining material on pas-
senger stations. I would say that by June we will have completed everything.
Vice President Loggins: Reviewing your report in Bulletin 574, I was somewhat
surprised to find that specifications for bituminous paving come under Committee 6,
and by reference to the Manual that you have a rather complete set of paving specifica-
tions. Possibly I should not thus display my ignorance, but maybe there are others
who did not know where to look for this material. I think our "General Subjects
Index" could be more complete in this respect, and I am going to suggest its review
some time in the not-too-distant future.
I note, as you have stated, that your committee has five new assignments for the
year ahead. No doubt this reflects its plan to get its teeth into some new subjects, now
that Manual review is largely behind it. I hope so.
Thank you again, Mr. Hornung. Your committee is now excused, with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
[For report, see Bulletin 574, pages 139-157]
Vice President Loggins: Moving on to the next item on our program, I would
like to invite to the speaker's table the members of our Committee 13 — Water, Oil, and
Sanitation Services. The chairman of this committee, serving for his first year, is E. C.
Harris, engineer of tests, Missouri Pacific Railroad, at St. Louis. Mr. Harris, if you
and the members of your committee will come to the platform, we will be glad to
hear your report at this time.
Chairman E. C. Harris: Mr. Vice President, members of the Association and
guests:
The complete report of Committee 13 — Water, Oil and Sanitation Services, for the
year 1962 appears in Bulletin 574, pages 139-157.
One of Committee 13's most esteemed members, Robert M. Stimmel, died on July
8, 1962. We express our deepest sorrow for his passing. His memoir appears on page
140 of Bulletin 574.
Formal reports have been prepared on 5 of the 10 subjects which our committee
has had under study during the past year. One of these reports will be recommended
to the Association today for approval as Manual material.
It is now my pleasure to introduce the chairmen of our subcommittees who are
present today for presentation of their reports.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Harris: I will call first on our vice chairman, T. A. Tennyson, engineer
of tests, Cotton Belt, for his report on Revision of Chapter 13 of the Manual. Mr.
Tennyson, will you please take the podium?
T. A. Tennyson: Mr. Vice President, Mr. Chairman, members and guests:
In conformity with the assignment, your committee continues to review the material
published in Chapter 13 of the Manual. This year the recommended revisions, which
have been duly approved by the membership of Committee 13, are described fully on
Discussion 639
pages 141-143, of Bulletin 574. Unless request is made otherwise, these revisions will
not be read in detail at this time. I would, however, like to comment briefly on their
nature.
"Water for Drinking Purposes", Manual page 13-8-1, has had some minor revisions
in wording to bring it in line with current practice. Two paragraphs have been added
to show authoritative references and tie the subject more closely with the regulatory
agencies involved.
"Railway Sewage Disposal Facilities", Manual pages 13-8-2 through 13-8-20 has
been revised to delete certain material no longer needed in the text of this section, two
new paragraphs have been added to cover new developments in this field which are
applicable to railroad situations.
Mr. Vice President, I now move that the Manual Revisions described on pages
141-143 of Bulletin 574, involving Manual pages 13-8-1 through 13-8-20, be approved.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried.]
Assignment 2 — Prevention of Corrosion in Hot and Cold Water
Systems.
Chairman Harris: A very comprehensive and informative report on "Corrosion
Prevention in Hot and Cold Water Systems" has been prepared by J. J. Dwyer, chair-
man of Subcommittee 2. Mr. Dwyer is chief chemist — system, Chesapeake & Ohio. Mr.
Dwyer, will you please take my place on the speaker's stand ?
J. J. Dwyer: Mr. Vice President, members of AREA and guests:
The report under discussion at this time is Corrosion Prevention in Potable Hot
Water Systems. It is found on page 143 of Bulletin 574 for November 1962.
This report has been written for railroads, but it will be of interest to most indi-
viduals because it has to do with just such water systems as will be present in the home.
Our paper today is restricted to potable hot-water systems.
Chemical treatment, as a corrosion deterrent, of potable or drinking water supplies
has not been too common, mainly because of the tastes imparted to the water by chem-
icals. But increasing costs of replacing water lines have necessitated our taking another
look — a good look — at the corrosion problem.
Copper water tube has been found generally to last longer than other common
types, and is now in general use for the smaller pipe sizes. But even copper tube fails
under certain conditions. The more important of these are (1) dissolved oxygen, (2)
increased carbon dioxide, (3) increased temperature, (4) increased velocity, and (5) soft
water.
Another cause of hot-water system failure is the galvanic couple. This occurs when
two different metals are connected to each other in the system, causing a current to
flow, and one of the metals to go into solution.
Sometimes the use of different metals cannot be avoided. There are ways to get
around this, however, such as using rubber or plastic couplings, so-called dielectric
unions, bushings, nipples, or gaskets placed between the two different metals to separate
them, and opening any electrical circuit which may have been present.
Corrosion in hot-water tanks has been stopped by the use of magnesium anodes.
If the magnesium bar is connected to the tank shell through a high resistance, a current
will flow from the anode to the tank, protecting it. In larger tanks, an impressed cur-
rent anode may be used, and in this case may be of mild iron, which will last much
longer than magnesium.
640 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
Dissolved gases, such as oxygen and carbon dioxide, are very damaging to hot-
water lines. Deaerating the water to remove these gases is a means of extending the
life of such lines.
Temperature is most important in corrosion processes. Each 17-deg rise in tem-
perature, up to about 180 deg, will double the corrosion rate. This is why corrosion
damage is much more frequent in hot-water systems than in cold. Extremely high
temperatures throughout hot-water systems may be avoided by installing booster
heaters for extra high temperatures just at the points where required.
Chemical treatments which may be used are sodium silicates at about 8 ppm, and
the metaphosphates at 2 to 5 ppm. A mixture of these two is said to be better than
either separately.
The causes of hot-water-system corrosion may be summarized as follows:
1. Corrosive dissolved gases.
2. Dissolved copper.
3. High temperature.
4. High velocity and turbulence.
5. Galvanic couples.
6. Softwater.
The remedies may be summarized as follows:
1. Use deaerators where practicable.
2. Use air release valves at high points in system.
3. Do not use pneumatic tanks in hot-water systems.
4. Use Type K copper tube for temperatures up to 140 deg F.
5. Confine temperatures to the range 130-140 deg F.
6. Where higher temperatures are required, use 90/10 cupro-nickel alloy.
7. Confine velocities to 5 fps, and preferably 4 fps.
8. Insulate galvanic couples.
9. Use cathodic protection in hot water tanks when practicable.
10. Use appropriate chemical treatment.
[President Code resumed the Chair.]
Mr. Dwyer [continuing] : Mr. President, your committee feels that the foregoing
information should be useful to railroad engineers as recommended practice. Therefore,
Mr. President, I move that this report be adopted for inclusion in the Manual.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried. 1
Assignment 3 — Design, Construction and Operation of Coach-Servicing
Facilities to Comply with Regulations of U. S. Public Health Service.
Chairman Harris: One of our better known standing subcommittees is that on
Coach-Servicing Facilities, Subcommittee 3. C. F. Muelder, assistant to engineer of
buildings, Chicago, Burlington & Quincy Railroad, chairman of Subcommittee 3, has
constantly kept abreast of new federal regulations and developments in this field. He
will now give his report of progress.
C. F. Muelder: President Code, Mr. Harris, members, and guests:
This committee reports to the Association on coach servicing facilities, presenting
information relating to laws, ordinances, regulations, and decisions of various govern-
mental agencies having jurisdiction over public health and sanitation.
Discussion 641
A new food service sanitation manual was released in July 1962 by the U. S.
Public Health Service. It is designated as Public Health Service Publication No. 934.
It supersedes the 1959 revision of the Handbook on Sanitation of Dining Cars in
Operation. The new manual is not restricted to railroad facilities but covers all phases
of food service and sanitation regulated by the U. S. Public Health Service. It applies
to other forms of transportation and those engaged in interstate commerce.
In our report to you last year, we informed you of the revision of the drinking
water standards and outlined the major changes. The "1962 Drinking Water Standards"
were published in February 1963, and are now available as Public Health Service Pub-
lication No. 956. In addition to the standards, this booklet contains a valuable appen-
dix, which includes such significant items as the reasons and discussion behind the
decisions to change the standards and an explanation of the standard itself. There is
no attempt at legal interpretation.
A completely revised "Manual of Individual Water Supply Systems" is now avail-
able. It is designated as Public Health Service Publication No. 24. This new manual is
quite comprehensive. Information is mere complete on water treatment, particularly
on chlorination. Recommended practices incorpcrate the latest developments.
Revision of the handbooks on (a) Roadway Servicing Areas, (b) Railway Pas-
senger Car Construction, and (c) Sanitation of Dining Cars in Operation is now pro-
ceeding. It is our understanding that it is hoped to have these revisions ready for
review in October of this year. This committee will no doubt be asked to participate
in the review.
There have been no new developments or requirements in the design, construction,
or operation of railroad coach servicing facilities. Prime emphasis on the part of gov-
ernmental authorities has been shifting from that of equipment to inspection of the
final facility. While regulations on equipment have not been relaxed or changed, major
inspection efforts are being put on the drinking water, food, and services as they are
offered and made available to the public. Any unacceptable conditions found result in
immediate complaint and request to take the equipment or facility cut of service until
the defects are corrected.
This committee would welcome advice from the membership as you become
acquainted with any new regulations pertaining to public health and sanitation if it is
of significance to the industry. I have reference to state or county laws and ordinances.
This will aid us in our assignment to keep the association advised.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Muelder. Are there any questions in connection
with Mr. Muelder's report? Is there any discussion? The report will be received as
information.
Assignment 4 — Cathodic Protection of Pipe Lines and Steel Storage
Tanks.
Chairman- Harris: A study begun in 1956 on the prevention of corrosion of steel
tanks and pipelines by the use of expendable metals in an electric circuit was completed
this year by Subcommittee 4. W. F. Arksey, engineer water service and fuel facilities.
Great Northern Railway, St. Paul, Minn., will now give his report on this ingenious
method of preventing steel from rusting.
W. F. Arksey: The committee presents its final report on this subject. We plan to
consolidate the information presented in all reports next year for insertion in the
Manual in 1965.
642 Water, Oil and Sanitation Services
The report this year gives results of an installation of cathodic protection on two
underground steel tanks using magnesium anodes. A practical method of sizing anodes
according to the type of soil encountered is given for use by those starting out in this
field. We are only covering the small frequently encountered type of installation, as we
feel that large installations justify contracting services of corrosion engineers specializing
in cathodic protection work. One can obtain a good working knowledge of the prin-
ciples involved by installing anodes on a structure and then measuring results. Each
succeeding installation will benefit from experiences on preceding ones.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Arksey. Are there any questions or comments
concerning this report ?
I would like to ask you a question myself, Mr. Arksey, and that is whether there
are any special precautions necessary to secure adequate protection for large surface
tanks resting on a gravel bed directly on the ground. I am thinking of large oil storage
tanks.
Mr. Arksey: I don't believe you would get protection from a cathodic protection
system in such a situation, as you would not have enough current actually flowing
through the gravel bed; but it would not be too difficult to actually measure the voltage
between the tank and the soil, and see what the actual conditions are.
President Code: You think, then, that the gravel bed would itself constitute
considerable protection ?
Mr. Arksey: I would say so. If you remember our report, we put our anodes in
sandy soil, and we had difficulty detecting much current flow just for that reason.
Measuring these currents gave us good experience, however. This is something we
were new at, and it gave us a good working knowledge which we can use in checking
an installation at some remote point and save paying out several thousand dollars to a
consulting firm.
President Code: What sort of structures did you have in mind when you referred
to "large" structures?
Mr. Arksey: I was thinking of long pipelines, and even very large tanks where a
rectifier type of system would be required.
President Code: Thank you. Are there any other questions? Proceed, Mr. Harris.
Assignment 6 — Railway Waste Disposal.
Chairman Harris: Subcommittee 6 is another of our standing subcommittees that
works in collaboration with the U. S. Public Health Service and state authorities on
public health services. Chairman F. O. Klemstine, supervisor water service, Pennsylvania
Railroad, reports that progress is being made on the study of systems for removing
solids and oil from railway waste water, with special emphasis being placed on the
disposal of the impurities removed from such water.
Assignment 7 — Practical Methods for Removing Iron and Manganese
from Small Water Supplies.
Chairman Harris: A new subject, concerning methods of economically removing
iron and manganese compounds from small domestic water supplies, has been under
study during the past year by Subcommittee 7. One of our younger members of Com-
mittee 13, W. E. Billingsley, mechanical engineer, Seaboard Air Line, accepted the chair-
manship of this subcommittee. Unfortunately Mr. Billingsley was unable to be here
today to present the report, so I shall give a brief resume of its contents.
Discussion 643
The presence of iron and manganese in domestic water supplies causes discoloring
stains in laundered clothing, cooking utensils, etc. These impurities also give the water
an unpalatable taste.
Removal of these objectionable compounds may be accomplished by controlled
additions of proprietary water-treating chemicals consisting of polyphosphates and
sodium silicate. If excessive amounts of the impurities are present, it is then necessary
to add oxidizing agents, such as sodium hypochlorite, for their removal.
Methods of introducing these chemicals into the water, including the systems of
removing the impurities by filtration through small resin filter beds, are described in
detail in the report, which is recommended for reading by all those present.
Assignment 8 — Methods of Controlling Spillage of Fuel Oil at Diesel
Fueling and Unloading Stations.
Chairman Harris: Another of our subjects of continued study during the past
few years has been that of Subcommittee 8, on methods of preventing spillage of fuel
oil at diesel locomotive fueling stations by the use of automatic shut-off fueling nozzles.
V. C. Barth, chief metallurgist and engineer of tests, Chicago & North Western Railway,
Chicago, who is chairman of Subcommittee 8, will now give his report of progress.
V. C. Barth: Mr. President, members and guests: At the committee meeting held
on May 9, 1962, this subcommittee was directed (1) to investigate new automatic cut-
off fueling nozzles being developed by a certain manufacturer, and (2) to establish
greater interchangeability between the various types of nozzles available. To date we
do not have any basic information that any new devices have been developed; however,
our investigation is still under way.
The subcommittee was also directed to make a survey of the performance of
various types or designs of automatic shut-off diesel fueling nozzles and designs now in
service, also (if possible) the savings realized through their use. This is now being
pursued and information is still coming in. But it is entirely too early to have drawn
any conclusions to report on at this session.
Assignment 10 — Railroad Aspects of Radioactive Substances.
Chairman Harris: The problems involved in the shipping of radioactive materials
on railroads have been under study by Subcommittee 10 for the past five years. Since
most of the technical data on the handling of radioactive substances are closely guarded
by the Atomic Energy Commission for reasons of national security, it has been decided
to conclude our study of this subject. VV. C. Harsh, chief chemist, New York Central,
who accepted the chairmanship of this subcommittee in 1962, will now present this
concluding report.
W. C. Harsh: Radioactive materials have come into use on the railroads during
the past few years. The committee's report indicates the radioactive materials now in
use, the types of radiation likely to be encountered, and the rules to be followed in
handling these materials. Your committee feels that its report is adequate for present
Deeds and submits it as a completed assignment.
Chairman- Harris: Before leaving the platform, I wish to extend my thanks to
the subcommittee chairmen, our secretary, and ill th< members of Committee 13 who
have worked faithfully with me during the pasl year. President Code, I wish to thank
you and all members and guests of the Association for the attention you have given
to the reports and discussions today.
644 Electricity
Mr. President, this concludes the report of Committee 13.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Harris. Your committee, with its broadened scope
in recent years, continues to have an important place in our Association, and we appre-
ciate the informative reports and Manual recommendations which you have presented
this year.
If there are no comments or questions from the floor, I shall now excuse your
committee, with the thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Electricity
[For report, see Bulletin 576, pages 407-418]
President Code: We shall next hear from our Committee 18 — Electricity, the chair-
man of which is P. B. Burley, superintendent communications and electrical engineer,
Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago. You will recall that this committee was re-established
early in 1961 to take over the fixed-property work of the former Electrical Section,
Engineering and Mechanical Divisions, AAR, which was discontinued as of the end
of 1960.
Mr. Burley, we will be pleased if you and the other members of your committee
present will come to the platform promptly and present your report.
Chairman P. B. Burley: Mr. President, members and guests:
The report of Committee 18 will be found starting on page 407 of Bulletin 576,
Vol. 64. Committee 18 has had eight assignments during the past year.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Burley: The first assignment is Revision of Manual. In the absence
of W. O. Muller, electrical engineer, Missouri Pacific, and chairman of Subcommittee 1,
I shall comment on this matter.
It has come to the attention of the committee recently that Parts 1 and 2 of Sec.
14 of the AAR Electrical Manual, both relating to recommended practices for the pre-
vention of electric sparks and referred to in our report on Assignment 1, are not up to
date with respect to several details of importance. Therefore, at this time Committee 18
is withdrawing its published recommendation that Section 14 be reinstated in the Elec-
trical Manual, so that appropriate revisions may be made to both Parts 1 and 2.
Assignments 4 and 8 — Power Supply, Motors and Controls, Collabo-
rating with Mechanical Division, AAR.
Chairman Burley: T. F. Jelnick, electrical engineer — line property, Burlington
Lines, and chairman of this subcommittee, is not present today. His report of progress
deals particularly with studies that are under way on such subjects as fuel cells, mag-
neto hydrodynamics, thermoelectric air conditioning, and several others of interest. It is
expected that this subcommittee will have material to be offered to the full committee
later this year.
Assignment 5 — Illumination, Collaborating with Committee 6 and
Mechanical Division, AAR.
Chairman Burley: E. D. Feak, assistant signal and electrical engineer of the South-
ern Railway, is chairman of this subcommittee. He also is not present today. Studies
are in progress on recommended lighting standards for railroad yards, TOFC and for
Discussion 645
other uses around railroad property. A report will be ready for publication next year
on this assignment.
Assignment 9 — Electrolysis and Electrolytic Corrosion.
Chairman Burley: This assignment is being handled by E. B. Hager, assistant
engineer, Illinois Central. Mr. Hager is present, and I shall ask him to comment on
the subject.
E. B. Hager: Mr. President, Mr. Chairman, members and guests:
Under its assignment — Electrolysis and Electrolytic Corrosion, your committee
presents a report for information entitled: "Possible Effects of Cathodic Protection
Installations for Underground Structures on Adjacent Railroad Signal Systems."
The use of cathodic protection to prevent corrosion of underground metallic struc-
tures such as pipes, cable sheaths, and so on, is increasing constantly. The report calls
attention to the need for testing before permitting installations of cathodic protection
in the vicinity of railroad track circuits so that interference, if present, may be detected
and corrected.
Assignment 10 — Wire, Cable and Insulating Materials, Collaborating
with Mechanical Division, AAR.
Chairman Burley: Assignment 10 has been in the charge of Fred Snider, foreman,
Office of Electrical Engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad. Mr. Snider is present and will
present comments on the work of his subcommittee.
Fred T. Snider: Your committee submits the following report as information on
wire cable and insulating materials:
Revisions in electrical standards of interest to the AREA have been many this year
— too many to try to summarize now, so, for all the various changes I refer you to
the individual standards organizations.
The National Fire Protection Association published last September the 1962 Edition
of the National Electrical Code, and copies are available from that association. There
have been a great number of changes from the 1959 Code. Changes of particular interest
to the railroads are shown on pages 410-413 of Bulletin 576. I would like to stress one
change in the Code. It now recognizes rigid non-metallic conduit made of fibers, plastics
and similar materials.
A new handbook on current-carrying capacities is now available. It is entitled,
"Power Cable Ampacities", and is published in two volumes, one for copper and the
other for aluminum. These should prove quite valuable to anyone designing cable instal-
lations. They provide for the various variable factors such as temperature, loadings, etc.
The next subject covered in our report is a new insulating material that is now
available from certain manufacturers — chemically cross-linked polyethylene, a most
significant advance in wire and cable technology. The cross-linking overcomes the chief
weakness of polyethylene — its low melting point — and converts it from a thermoplastic
material to a thermosetting material while retaining polyethylene 's outstanding electrical
and physical properties.
Chemically cross-linked polyethylene provides a family of insulation that can be
compounded to give excellent heat, moisture, sunlight and flame-resisting properties, ami
resistance to deformation at elevated temperatures without tin- use oi tin- protective
covers.
This material so far appears to overcome some of the disadvantages of rubber
insulation, in that it is easier to pull into conduit, requires no protective covering, is
646 Electricity
resistant to oils and sunlight, is rated at 90 C, and is less costly. We believe it has a
brilliant future.
Mr. Chairman, this concludes the report of Subcommittee 10.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Snider. Are there any questions concerning the
report of Subcommittee 10? It will be received as information.
Assignment 11 — Electric Heating, Collaborating with Committee 6 and
Mechanical Division, AAR.
Chairman Burley: There is no report on Assignment 11. Progress was being made
on several items under the chairmanship of B. D. Allison, who met with an untimely
death earlier this year.
Assignment 13 — Railway Electrification, Collaborating with Mechanical
Division, AAR.
Chairman Burley: L. B. Curtis, assistant engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, who
was chairman of Subcommittee 13, retired recently. He has been succeeded by one of
his co-workers in this activity, B. C. Hallowell, engineer of electric traction, Long
Island Railroad. Mr. Hallowell is here today and will present the report of Subcom-
mittee 13.
B. C. Hallowell: Mr. President, members and guests:
Under this assignment one of our subjects is Developments in the Field of Elec-
trification (Domestic and Foreign) and our report on this subject states that the nation's
first silicon rectifier locomotive, No. 4460, was delivered to the Pennsylvania Railroad
on July 3, 1962. This locomotive was included in an order for 66 units, 60 of which
will have ignitron rectifiers. Completion of the entire order is expected in 1963.
The report also states, to our regret, that electric operation on 134 miles of the
Norfolk & Western (Virginian Railway section) ended on July 1, 1962. This electrifica-
tion had been in continuous operation with 11 -kv overhead since 1924. The removal
of the electrification followed the merger of the Norfolk & Western and the Virginian
railroads.
At the present time the Niagara Junction Railway is electrifying a new yard at
Niagara Falls, N. Y. Light catenary has been installed. The voltage will be 600, d-c.
In connection with commuter and rapid transit, the subcommittee is investigating
a number of projects that are taking place at the Delaware River Port Authority, the
San Francisco Bay Area Rapid Transit District, Los Angeles Metropolitan Transit Au-
thority, and the National Capita] Transportation Agency, all of which are under con-
sideration, and reports will be made as developments take place.
Our former chairman, L. B. Curtis, presented an AIEE paper entitled, "Electrifica-
tion— Devil or Angel?" at the Winter General Meeting of the Institute in New York
on February 1, 1962. Based on answers from a questionnaire distributed by Mr. Curtis,
inductive reasoning indicated that the least expensive system of electrification is the
commercial-frequency high-voltage system. The questionnaire was not limited to the
United States but included such countries as England, Japan, the International Union
of Railroads in Europe, and other groups.
The section of our report entitled "Foreign Developments", states that in India,
Europe, Japan and Katanga there are a number of extensive electrification systems
being installed, most of them at 25-kv at commercial frequency.
Our report also includes data on "General Electrification Economics." When con-
sidering electrification, emphasis is frequently placed on the additional investment in
Discussion 647
fixed property necessary to supply electric energy from central power stations. There
is no economy, per se, in contact systems, substations, or in the type of electric power
supplied, a-c or d-c. The economy is in the motive power.
Electric motive power is the only unit which entirely eliminates the necessity of
hauling the prime mover. This advantage permits larger concentrations of horsepower
for faster accelerations and higher speeds, at lower investment and operating costs. This
economy in motive power must be sufficiently fireat not only to prove the superiority
of electric motive power over all other types, but also to pay for the additional invest-
ment and operating costs of the fixed property requirements for its use.
A condensed report will be presented next year to cover the past seven years of
electrification reports produced by this committee and by Committee 13 of the former
AAR Electrical Section. The fifth draft of the condensation was distributed to the
subcommittee in September. Many good comments have been received, and it is now
planned that the final draft will be ready for next year's report.
Our report deals with one other subject — "Semi-Conductor Rectifiers for Railway
Electric Power Supply." I should like to point out some of the advantages in the use
of the silicon rectifier such as is being used on the locomotives on the Pennsylvania
Railroad, and in substations in many locations, such as right here in Chicago, on the
Chicago Transit Lines.
In summing up the advantages, we have the following:
1. Low first cost.
2. High efficiency.
3. Completely static, except for small cooling fan.
4. Minimum control circuitry.
5. Simplicity of operation.
6. Minimum maintenance:
(a) Elimination of firing and other excitation circuits.
(b) Water cooling not required.
(c) Replacement of diodes a very minor operation.
(d) Silicon diode failure rate less than 0.5 percent per year.
7. Low installation costs.
8. Less floor space required.
9. Maximum reliability.
Mr. Chairman, this concludes the report of Subcommittee 13.
Assignment 15 — Relations with Public Utilities.
Chairman- Burley: Next, E. M. Hastings, Jr., chairman of subcommittee 15, is
present and will give a progress report. He is wire crossing engineer system, Chesapeake
& Ohio.
E. M. Hastings, Jr.: Mr. Code, Mr. Burley, members and guests:
Subcommittee 15 for a number of years has been studying the possibility of estab-
lishing a system of uniform rates for occupancy of railway property by electric supply
lines and crossing of railway property. We ran into B -real deal of difficulty trying to
find something that would be usable by the railroads generally, because of differences
in terrain, methods of operation, etc., amonn the various roads. We concluded that
setting up a system of uniform rates was not feasible, so we are a-king that this subject
be discontinued and that the matter of rale- be lefl to the individual railroads.
648 Highways
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hastings. Any questions or discussion? Your
recommendation is accepted.
Please continue, Mr. Burley.
Chairman Burley: Mr. President, this concludes the report of Committee 18;
it also concludes my term of office as chairman of this committee. I want to take this
opportunity to express my thanks particularly to the staff, who have helped both me
and my committee get our roots down and feel at home here in the AREA in these
first three years of our operation.
At this time I would like to present to you the new chairman of Committee 18,
J. J. Schmidt, assistant director of research, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railway.
Mr. President, this concludes our presentation.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Burley. We are glad to have your group in our
Association as our Committee 18, and appreciate the reports which it has already
brought to us. Just as your group was an important part of the former Electrical Sec-
tion, we want it to be a very important part of the AREA, keeping us fully abreast
of all developments in electrical matters affecting the fixed properties.
We appreciate your service as chairman of Committee 18 for the past two years
and your help in getting the committee oriented in our Association.
We are pleased to welcome, as the new vice chairman of your committee, F. T.
Snider of the Pennsylvania Railroad; and as the new chairman, Mr. Schmidt, knowing
that they will make a good team in carrying forward the work of the committee in
the years immediately ahead.
Mr. Schmidt, if you will please step here, I would like to present you with a chair-
man's gavel as the symbol of authority of your new office. I congratulate you on your
selection as chairman, and wish you success in directing the work of the committee.
Mr. Burley, your committee is now excused, with the thanks of the Association.
[Applause J
Discussion on Highways
[For report, see Bulletin 574, pages 131-137]
President Code: We shall next deal with a very important field of railroad work
in which several groups within the AAR have an interest — possibly more than neces-
sary— the Communication and Signal Section; the AAR Grade Crossing Committee;
the Grade Crossing Unit of Train Operation Control and Signals; in addition to the
AREA. I refer to highway-railway grade crossings and their protection.
This work, insofar as the AREA is concerned, is under the jurisdiction of our
Committee 9 — Highways, the chairman of which is R. W. Mauer, assistant engineer, At-
chison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway. Mr. Mauer, if you and the other members of your
committee will come to the platform, we would like to hear your report at this time.
You may proceed.
Chairman R. W. Mauer: Mr. President, members of the AREA and guests:
I regret to announce the death of a long-time member of Committee 9, Member
Emeritus Maro Johnson, retired principal assistant engineer, Illinois Central Railroad,
who passed away on September 29, 1962. A memoir to Mr. Johnson is being submitted
for publication.
Discussion 649
MEMOIR
jfttaro Johnson
Maro Johnson, retired principal assistant engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, passed
away in Dolton, 111., at the age of 84 years and 10 months.
Mr. Johnson was born November 27, 1877, at Iowa City, Iowa. He was graduated
from the University of Iowa with a B.S. degree in Civil Engineering in 1898, and
received a C.E. degree in 1909. Mr. Johnson began his career with the Illinois Central
on October 13, 1898, as a masonry inspector at Oilman, 111., and was appointed principal
assistant engineer in the vice president and chief engineer's office on January 1, 1932.
Between those dates he held a number of different positions, including rodman, drafts-
man, instrumentman, assistant engineer, assistant engineer bridges and buildings, engineer
bridges and buildings, and resident engineer, being located at various points on the rail-
road and in the bridge and building departments in Chicago. He worked on a number
of important construction projects, such as the Albert Lea, Minn., track extension, the
St. Charles Air Line bridge and the Grand Crossing track elevation in Chicago. Mr.
Johnson retired from the Illinois Central on November 30, 1947, at the age of 70.
Mr. Johnson was an active member of the AREA, joining the Association in 1911
and becoming a life member in 1947. He became a member of Committee 9 — Highways
in 1914 and was elected Member Emeritus in 1953. He served as vice chairman of
Committee 9 in 1920 and 1921, and as chairman 1922 through 1924. He also was a
member of Committee 4 — Rail, 1937 to 1948, and Committee 26 — Standardization,
1922 to 1924.
Mr. Johnson was preceded in death by his wife, Helen, and is survived by two
sons and one daughter.
Mr. Johnson, a gentleman of the old school, was respected and greatly admired
by all who had the privilege of working with him and will be remembered by his
associates and friends for his devotion, loyalty and genial personality.
J. M. Trissal
R. E. Skinner
Committee on Memoir
Chairman Mauer: The report of Committee 9 is published in Bulletin S74, starting
on page 131. Your committee is reporting on seven assignments; six are progress reports,
and one is final. As these reports are presented, your comments or questions are invited.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Mauer: Subcommittee Chairman E. R. Englert, cost control engineer,
Louisville & Nashville Railroad, will present the report on Assignment 1.
E. R. Englkrt: The Communication and Signal Section, AAR, has eliminated from
its Manual drawings showing the vertical STOP sign on flashing-light and wig-wag
types of crossing signals. This was done because these signs are no longer being used
for new installations or replacements. Your committee believes that these signs should
remain in the AREA Manual for the time being to protect those railroads which still
have them. However, since they are no longer in the Signal Manual, the notes referring
to the Signal drawings on the AREA plans should be deleted. The following changes
are therefore recommended:
650 Highways
Page 9-3-18, Fig. IS — Highway Crossing Signal, Flashing-Light Type with Stop
Sign. Delete note reading "Details shown on Signal Drawing 1654."
Page 9-3-20, Fig. 17— Highway Crossing Signal, Wig-Wag Type with Stop Sign.
Delete note reading "Details shown on Signal Drawing 1652."
Are there any questions?
Mr. President, I move that these recommendations be adopted.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and was carried.]
Assignment 2 — Merits and Economics of Prefabricated Types of
Highway— Railway Grade Crossings.
Chairman Mauer: Subcommittee Chairman J. T. Hoelzer, regional engineer, Cen-
tral Region, Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, will present the report on Assignment 2.
J. T. Hoelzer: Your committee continues to assemble information on installation
and annual maintenance costs of the various types of prefabricated crossings for further
study and evaluation of their merits and economics. From studies to date, it appears
that full-depth creosoted-timber-panel crossings may, in many circumstances, result in
the least annual expense.
Assignment 3 — Merits of Various Types of Highway-Railway Grade
Crossing Protection.
Chairman Mauer: Subcommittee Chairman J. A. Jorlett, structural engineer, New
York Improvements, Pennsylvania Railroad, will present a report on Assignment 3.
J. A. Jorlett: Your committee has previously reported on the completion of the
report "Analysis of Railroad Crossings and Accident Data for the State of Ohio During
the 10-Year Period, 1949 through 1958", prepared by the Armour Research Foundation
of the Illinois Institute of Technology, with funds provided through the Research
Department of the Association of American Railroads.
To guard against misuse of the report and acceptance of the formulas as infallible
when it is released, your committee has prepared a foreword to be bound in the report
which points out the danger of using the formulas without careful consideration. The
recommended foreword is as follows:
FOREWORD
"This analysis covers 6011 accidents that occurred at 7416 highway crossings of 12
railroads in the State of Ohio during the 10-year period 1949 through 1958. While it
includes more data than had been available for previous similar studies, it must be
understood that information on several important items was missing from the accident
reports. Deficiencies in the available data include the following:
(1) Highway and rail traffic were not recorded by hour of day or night. As a
result, it was not possible to relate properly rail-highway traffic conflicts,
or exposure to accident, in the analysis.
(2) The accident reports do not cover such important elements as season of the
year, weather conditions, pavement surface condition, and whether accidents
occurred in daylight or darkness.
(3) Data were not available on the speed of highway traffic — an important
characteristic.
(4) Apparent mental and physical condition of drivers of highway vehicles in-
volved in accidents was not recorded. This omission is characteristic of prac-
Discussion 651
tically all accident reports because of the obvious difficulty or impossibility
of determining driver condition.
"Because of these and other deficiencies in the data available for study, it is em-
phasized that while the relationships and conclusions developed by the study are accept-
able as representative of the Ohio Data, they cannot be assumed to be completely reliable
when applied to other railway-highway grade crossings. If used as a guide to judgment,
they may be of some assistance in evaluating risks at other crossings."
The committee wishes to correct the statement on page 186 of Bulletin 567, Novem-
ber 1961, to the effect that the report was distributed to AAR Member Roads. Dis-
tribution of the report has been confined to the membership of Committee 9.
Your committee feels that continuing statistical studies should be made with addi-
tional data as enumerated in the foreword and for crossings where the type of protection
has been changed during the study period.
Assignment 4 — Factors to Be Considered for Determining the Advan-
tages of Highway Overpasses as Opposed to Underpasses.
Chairman Matjer: Subcommittee Chairman C. A. Christensen, engineer of public
improvements, Chicago, Burlington & Quincy Railroad, will present a final report on
Assignment 4.
C. A. Christensen: Because of the expanded highway program, more and more
grade separation structures are being built at railway-highway intersections. These struc-
tures permanently affect the railroad, and the type of structure to be installed should
be carefully considered.
Generally, the selection of the type of structure will be governed by physical con-
ditions at the site. If the normal grade line of a highway were above that of the rail-
road, the highway would go over the track. Conversely, if the highway grade were
much lower, the highway would be carried under the track in a subway. Where grade
lines are the same, or nearly so, a choice of type of structure exists, and the advantages
of overpass construction should be considered.
Overpasses often can be built at less cost than underpasses because of the lighter
loads carried. Simpler construction procedures resulting in cost savings are possible with
overpasses as they can be built with a minimum of interference with rail traffic and
involve no expensive falsework construction.
An overpass offers a better opportunity for stage construction with minimum im-
pairment of the original facility. This is true whether the original structure is merely
widened or if additional structures and roadways arc constructed for a divided lane
highway. If additional tracks will be needed, they can be provided for in the original
overpass design, often without additional cost. If an underpass requires widening to
provide increased track capacity or space for off-track maintenance equipment, extra
sive rebuilding and loss of a great part of the original facility is seldom avoidable.
Troublesome drainage problems may be avoided by construction of an overpass.
In some locations a subway would require expensive drainage systems with pumping
plants costly to maintain and operate and subject to failure during storms. This alone
may be sufficient reason to choose an overpass.
Lateral clearances can readily be provided tor railroad-' off-track equipment when
an overpass is built, but provision tor such equipment at an underpass i- much more
difficult, and usually must be at railroad expense under existing policy of tin- Rurcau
of Public Roads.
652 Highways
There are, of course, some disadvantages in overpass construction. In yard areas,
overpass structures may interfere with free use of the area for track rearrangement.
Piers may obstruct the view of switching crews, thus hampering their operation. Vertical
and lateral clearances, although sufficient for operation of trains, may limit the use of
cranes and pile drivers. This is especially serious in shop areas and in the vicinity of
bridges.
This is a final report submitted as information. Your committee recommends that
the subject be discontinued.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Christensen. Your report will be received as
information.
Are there any questions from the floor?
W. R. Wilson [Santa Fe] : Mr. President, I haven't any questions, but I do have
a comment.
I agree with the premise of the committee that overpasses are better from a rail-
road point of view in many cases. However, when the railroads receive plans from
the state highway department on these overpasses for review, there are a few things
that should be noted particularly.
One is that many times the plans will call for scuppers through the curb to drain
the deck, which permit the water to fall on the track and erode the ballast section.
That should be watched for. Secondly, where concrete piles or columns are placed fairly
close to the track, crash walls or some other provision should be installed to prevent
the overhead structure from coming down on top of a derailment.
In some cases plans for skew structures might call for a single column with a rocker
shoe on top of it. I have seen a 20-in column 20 ft high and about 14 ft from the
track, with no horizontal support at the top. If a derailment or wide load should strike
such a column, the overhead structure is in danger of collapsing. In such a situation
the column should be greatly strengthened.
Finally, there should be adequate railings and curbs on the highway structure to
prevent cars from coming off the structure down onto the railroad track. We have had
cases where that has happened.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Wilson. Do you care to add anything, Mr.
Christensen ?
Mr. Christensen: No, Mr. President.
President Code: I have a question concerning your premise that overpass con-
struction is the better deal for the railroads. How does this apply in a settled community
where grade separation involves a series of streets with property adjacent to the right-
of-way fully developed?
Mr. Christensen: That would be more or less a special case. Our report considered
the case where there is a choice.
President Code: Thank you.
Are there any other questions or comments?
D. F. Lyons [CSS&SB]: I have a comment that might be of interest. We have
an overhead structure paralleling our track carrying a toll road. We are having a prob-
lem with salt being sprayed onto our telephone and signal lines during the winter when
salt is sprayed on the highway. It causes our poles to catch fire, and we have to
replace them.
President Code: Do you have a solution for that problem?
Mr. Lyons: Not yet.
President Code: Any other comments? Please proceed, Mr. Mauer.
Discussion 653
Assignment 5 — Recommended Method of Developing Annual Mainte-
nance Cost of the Various Types of Highway-Railway Grade Crossing Pro-
tection, Collaborating with Communication and Signal Section, AAR.
Chairman Mauer: In the absence of Subcommittee Chairman F. C. Cunningham,
division engineer, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, due to flood conditions in his area in
Kentucky, Vice Chairman Raymond Dejaiffe, chief engineer, Toledo Terminal Railroad,
will present the report on Assignment 5.
R. Dejaiffe [for Mr. Cunningham]: The brief progress report on this assign-
ment published in the Bulletin was, of necessity, prepared in October 1962. That report
outlines your committee's continuing collaboration with Committee 8 of the Communica-
tion and Signal Section, AAR.
Signal Committee 8 has now completed its assignment of conducting an actual cost
record study, and has compiled the actual costs which were furnished by 41 representa-
tive railroads of the United States and Canada, covering 27 states and 3 provinces, for
a period of one year, from July 1, 1961, to June 30, 1962. Its report has been approved
by the members of Signal Committee 8 and the Communication and Signal Section
Committee of Direction and will be published in the Advance Notice as information
at its meeting in October 1963.
From the cost data supplied, Signal Committee 8 has found that the average annual
maintenance cost of flashing-light signals, including installations on single track, multiple
tracks, signaled and non-signaled territory, is $581 ; also that the average annual main-
tenance cost of flashing-light signals and gates, grouped in similar manner, is $1099,
based on the year 1961 costs; and recommends that these costs be trended to subsequent
years by ICC Indices.
Representatives of AREA Committee 9 and Signal Committee 8 held a joint meet-
ing on March 14, 1963, and discussed this subject. Those present concurred with Signal
Committee 8's findings as to the overall average costs and method recommended for
future adjustments.
Your committee acknowledges with appreciation the fine cooperation and assistance
received from Signal Committee 8.
These average annual maintenance costs are submitted as advance information.
Your committee recommends that the assignment be continued.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Dejaiffe. The report will be received as
information.
Are there any questions or comments concerning this report? If not, you may
proceed, Mr. Mauer.
Assignment 6 — Methods of Providing Additional Advance Warning to
Highway Traffic Approaching a Highway-Railway Grade Crossing.
Chairman Mauer: Subcommittee Chairman C. W. Traister, grade crossing engi-
neer, Erie-Lackawanna Railroad, will present the report on Assignment 6.
C. W. Traister: Your committee is actively engaged in obtaining and assembling
data reflecting the methods of the various states for providing additional advance warn-
ing to highway traffic approaching a highway railway tirade crossing. In response to a
questionnaire dated November 1, 1962, we have received replies from 44 Btate highway
departments, some of which have been very pertinent and instructive.
It is evident from our preliminary studies th.it the interest in this subject, gen-
erated by the various public agencies and railroads, warrants a comprehensive and
654 Highways
thorough analysis. We solicit your suggestions as to how and what your committee
should investigate.
President Code: Thank you. I hope you will receive some suggestions.
Assignment 7 — Conduct Study With the View Toward Developing
Alternate Types of Automatic Crossing Protection.
Chairman Mauer: Subcommittee Chairman C. I. Hartsell, division engineer, Chesa-
peake & Ohio Railway, will present the report on Assignment 7.
C. I. Hartsell: Your committee has submitted its preliminary findings on this
subject, which indicate that a great many people are attempting to develop crossing
protection of various types for different purposes such as:
1. Auxiliary protection to standard crossbuck signs, such as octagonal highway
stop signs with or without lights, rectangular "Railroad Crossing" signs with
or without lights, continuously flashing overhead lights and regular highway
traffic signals.
2. An intermediate protection between standard crossbuck signs and automatic
flashing lights. One proposed type is the so-called Ohio sign which consists of a
special 30- by 48-in red reflectorized-background sign with white reflectorized
letters "RR and X", with continuously flashing amber lights above and below
the sign which is placed in close proximity to the crossing.
3. Substitution of an electronic system for the normal insulated-joint track-circuit
system for automatic crossing protection.
It appears to your committee that considerable reduction in future investment and
maintenance may be obtained if the present awakening and development of crossing
protection facilities can be encouraged. We solicit your suggestions as to possible
alternate types of protection and fields of investigation.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hartsell
Are there any questions or comments from the floor?
E. F. Snyder [Illinois Central] : We have a few of these regular highway traffic
signals at highway intersections with railroads. I wonder if the committee has developed
any information as to the number that have been installed throughout the country,
and whether the committee plans a survey to gage their efficiency.
Mr. Hartsell: You are raising a "hot potato." There are scattered installations,
as you say. I know of others up in our own area in Michigan,
Actually, we had not planned to make such a survey. We find considerable opposi-
tion from various organizations to that type of installation. For instance, the Uniform
Traffic Control Committee wishes to keep certain signs and signals for certain things.
However, we do understand that there is a joint committee that will be formed and
that will make a study of the relative efficiency of various kinds of protection for the
prevention of accidents at railroad-highway grade crossings. That is a joint committee
between the AAR and the Association of American State Highway Officials. That is
about all I can answer you on that question.
Chairman Mauer: Mr. President, that concludes the presentation by Committee 9.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Mauer. I don't know that I gave the committee
a chance to comment on Mr. Lyons' remarks.
Does the committee have any suggestions or comments to make in connection with
Mr. Lyon's difficulty with the material being thrown onto his wires?
Discussion 655
Chairman Mauer: I would like to ask Mr. Lyons a question: What was the result
of your vigorous protest to the highway department?
Mr. Lyons: The protest has been recent, and we have had no results yet.
Chairman Mauer: How close is that structure to your tracks?
Mr. Lyons: About 25 to 30 ft. It even extends over onto our right-of-way, and
an agreement has not been drawn up. This has given us another problem.
Chairman Mauer: You do have a problem. [Laughter]
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Mauer. Your committee has a number of most
interesting and important studies under way, and we hope you will progress them
through to completion as rapidly as possible, in the interest of all concerned. I am sure
we will all agree that there should be the closest uniformity possible between the rec-
ommendations contained in the Signal Manual, the AREA Manual, and the revised
Bulletin 5 of TOC&S, and I am sure your committee is working to that end.
Thank you again, Mr. Mauer. Your committee is now excused, with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Economics of Railway Labor
[For report, see Bulletin 575, pages 263-304]
President Code: From the important matter of highway-railway crossings we shall
next turn our attention to the all-important matter of economics of railway labor,
handled by our committee bearing that name — Committee 22 — Economics of Railway
Labor. The chairman of this committee is J. E. Eisemann, chief engineer, Western Lines
of the Santa Fe System, who is located at Amarillo, Tex. I am sure this committee has
several interesting reports to present, and we shall be glad to hear them at this time.
Mr. Eisemann, when you are ready you may proceed.
Chairman J. E. Eisemann: Mr. President, members and guests:
Committee 22 reports are to be found in Bulletin 575, starting on page 263, issued
in December 1962.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Eisemann: Assignment 1 is handled by W. W. Hay, professor of railway
engineering, University of Illinois. In view of the overhaul of the chapter completed
last year, there is no report this year.
Assignment 2 — Analysis of Operations of Railways That Have Sub-
stantially Reduced the Cost of Labor Required in Maintenance of Way
Work.
Chairman- Eiskmann: Under this assignment we visited the Chesapeake & Olvo
Railway last summer at Huntington, W. Va., and saw rail relaying and related work
that was very interesting. The details of the operation are given in the report of Sub-
committee 2 prepared under the direction of Subcommittee Chairman E. J. Sierleja,
industrial engineer system, Pennsylvania Railroad, who is unable to be here today.
Assignment 3 — Labor Economies to Be Derived from Work Measure-
ment Standards for Comparison of Work Performance Among Various
Gangs or Divisions.
Chairman Eisemann: H. J. Fast, area manager, Canadian National Railways,
and chairman of Subcommittee 3, could not be present today. His report is submitted
as information, with the recommendation that the subject be discontinued for at least
656 Economics of Railway Labor
a few years until further studies can be better warranted. For the present report we did
not get enough information to make as good a presentation as we thought we should.
Assignment 4 — Labor Economics to Be Derived from Cropping Rail in
Track Versus Building up Rail Ends by Welding.
Chairman Eisemann: Assignment 4's subcommittee chairman is H. W. Seeley,
chief engineer, Detroit, Toledo & Ironton. Unfortunately he could not be here today.
His report is submitted as information, with the recommendation that the assignment
be discontinued.
Assignment 5 — Labor Economies Inherent to Various Methods of
Taking up Track.
Chairman Eisemann: The report on Assignment 5 was prepared by Subcommittee
Chairman John Stang, industry planning analyst of the New York Central. It is being
submitted as a final report, but it was so interesting and had so many things in it that
we thought it might be well to have Mr. Stang give a summary of the report, along
with a series of slides showing the various methods of taking up track. As Mr. Stang
talks, you might pay particular attention to the labor figures that he might quote for
each method.
Mr. Stang, will you kindly give your report?
John Stang: Mr. Code, Mr. Eisemann, members of AREA and guests: we should
like to present some of the highlights of Subcommittee 5 report with slides.
Modern technology has revolutionized many railroad practices, particularly in the
methods applied to track retirement, construction and maintenance. Bold original think-
ing has developed techniques that have provided for greater flexibility and speed in
meeting the demands of traffic changes. These techniques have achieved important and
substantial labor economies. Centralized traffic control installations on a broad scale
have enabled the railroads to decrease their physical plant while creating a transportation
network of greater capacity.
One Eastern railroad during the last 10 years has physically retired in excess of
4200 miles of track. This required the handling of approximately 170 million pieces of
material weighing approximately 3l/2 million tons. Many more tons of ballast were
recovered. There are approximately 40,000 individual pieces of track materials in each
mile of track. These individual components may have been handled as many as five or
six times before being reused, or salvaged. By developing efficient methods of salvaging
the material, the railroads have adopted the philosophy of Benjamin Franklin that "a
penny saved is a penny earned." As a result, millions of dollars worth of usable
materials have been salvaged and reused economically.
Retirement methods were categorically divided by the committee into three groups:
1. Conventional
2. Ripping
3. Panelizing
The greater the degree of mechanization in these methods, the lower the man-hour
costs. From a sampling of man-hours and unit costs secured from many representative
railroads, labor costs for these three methods are as follows:
Man-Hours Per
Method Track Mile
Conventional 400 to 1200
Ripping 300 to 500
Panelizing 250 to 400
(Text continued on page 626)
Discussion
657
Skeletonized track, with good second-hand ties and scrap ties piled
adjacent to the track.
The diesel crane pulls the strings of 20 rails 1200 to 1500 ft along the
skeletonized track. One rail string is pulled into the 6-ft and the other on
the outside of the ties on the field side. Production rate for this method
was 3300 ft per day, using 450 man-hours per day (50 men).
658
Economics of Railway Labor
This slide shows another type of ripper. The distance from the top of
the roller to the bottom of the girder is 8 in to allow for complete extrac-
tion of the track spikes.
The most economical number of rails to be handled at one time
was determined to be six.
Discussion
659
This stoneboat and magnet-equipped tractor-crane were used for
handling other track material and scrap. The stoneboat can be pulled from
either end.
This slide shows a freight car truck being set on the track preparatory
to loading panels.
660
Economics of Railway Labor
A mobile, centralized dismantling plant was devised, and was con-
structed on top of four steel box cars, which could be moved over the road
as required, thus reducing the length of haul of the track panels.
Track panels are lifted from gondola cars by a hydraulic, transverse
traveling crane, as shown here, and are set on a chain conveyor on the roof
deck of the first box car. The diesel engines, hydraulic pumps and genera-
tors required to power most of these operations are in the first two box cars.
Discussion
661
Clamps grasp the tie plates of a tie and hold them while the "stomper"
at each end of the tie pushes the tie down. By pressing a button the operator
can direct the falling tie to the right or left, depending on whether it is
scrap or second hand.
The tie plates and spikes fall on to a chute that slides them into a
spotted gon. The rails continue ,o move forward on rollers on the third
and fourth cars where they are removed by a specially built gasoline-
powered hydraulic crane.
662
E c o n o mics of Railway Labor
The crane operator loads the rails into any one of four gons by himself,
without any assistance. The crane has a telescopic boom and a specially
designed swivel head with two rail clamps. The mobile plant is capable of
dismantling 55 panels per day, using 72 man-hours (nine men).
The method of track retirement depends to some extent on the end use of the
material. For instance, the ripping method is usually used when the rail is sold for
scrap or reroller. Since any one of these methods may be used, a comparison of all
the cost factors should be made to determine the most economic one.
[Mr. Stang then showed and commented on 36 slides, only 11 of which are
presented herewith. Other photographs of the various methods of taking up track are
reproduced with the committee report on pages 278 to 299 of Bulletin 575. After
showing the slides, Mr. Stang continued as follows:]
Mr. Stang: No doubt you gentlemen have developed methods or adaptions of
these methods that are equally satisfactory, but these slides, I hope, will stimulate us
to further thinking.
Now what does the future hold in the track retirement area? Briefly, I think we
can look for an expansion in the use of panel track and the handling of track retire-
ments in larger units, even, perhaps, quarter-mile lengths of welded rail panels. Such
long panels, of course, will require equipment capable of handling them. The size of
the unit and the way it is removed, transported, or installed depends upon the boldness
and the creative thinking we apply to this end.
Before I close, on behalf of Mr. Eisemann and the members of Committee 22, I
would like to thank all the railroads and their people for the splendid cooperation and
information they provided to our committee.
In closing let us bear in mind: The most successful industry or railroad company
is the one which holds on to the old just as long as it is good and grasps the new just
as soon as it is better.
Discussion 663
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Slang, for a very interesting group of slides and
presentation.
Are there any questions or remarks from the floor on this important subject?
C. L. Holman [Santa Fe] : Since your report seems to have shown that the panel-
ing type of removal is the most economical thus far devised, what preparatory steps
are required? Do you have to hit your spikes down to avoid delaying your organ-
izations by ties falling when you lift a panel?
Mr. Stang: I didn't show any of the squaring-of-thc-joints operations preparatory
to actually making the panels, because I didn't have any slides. I wonder if there is
anyone in the audience who would care to answer the question.
J. S. Snyder [Pennsylvania]: I think the question is: What do you do with the tie
that doesn't come up with the rail? The answer is that you leave it. If you lift a panel
of track up and you have only four good ties that hold onto the rail, that is still the
panel, as I understand it. You don't attempt to try to fasten the old ties onto the rail
when you take up your panels.
President Code: In other words, if they fall off it's good riddance.
Mr. Stang: Yes. You could knock the spike heads down onto the rail to help
them hold the ties onto the rail, but if a tie does fall off you just have to pull it off
to the side.
D. F. Lyons [CSS&SB]: You mentioned four gons in which you set the rail after
it is dismantled. What are those classifications?
Mr. Stang: Mr. Kerns, would you venture to say?
M. E. Kerns [New York Central] : It is a little out of my category.
Mr. Stang: This is the man responsible for the development of the dismantling
plant.
Mr. Kerns: Although I built the machines, I can't answer that question. However,
as I understand it, the classifications vary depending upon the quality of the track
panels. We have relay rail, and rail that is going to be cropped and welded together,
side track rail and scrap rail. Wc can have more than four classifications, but usually
we don't have more than four out of a particular quality of track panels. In other
words, if the track panels are bad you classify them from scrap upward, and if they
are good they fall into the various classifications of relay rail.
President Code: Any further discussion? Thank you, gentlemen, for your dis-
cussion. You may proceed, Mr. Eisemann.
Assignment 7 — Labor Economies in Track Maintenance to Be Derived
Through the Use of Combination On-Off-Track Equipment vs. On-Track
Equipment Only.
Chairman Eisemann: This assignment is headed by T. L. Kanan, assistant engineer
of track, Colorado & Southern Railroad. Will Mr. Kanan please stand and be recog-
nized? Thank you.
This report is submitted as information, with the recommendation that the subject
be discontinued for the time being.
Assignment 8 — Labor Economies to Be Derived from the Welding.
Distributing, Laying and Maintenance of Continuous Welded Rail.
Chairman Eiskmaw: This subcommittee is collaborating with the Special Com-
mittee on Continuous Welded Rail. The report was written by Chairman W. J. Jones,
engineer maintenance of way and structures — system. Southern Pacific. Mr. Jones, will
you please stand and be recognized? Thank you.
664 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
This report has been under study by Committee 22 for a three-year period, and
it is offered as information, with the recommendation that the assignment be discon-
tinued for the time being.
Chairman Eisemann [continuing]: Mr. President, this completes the presentation
of the report of Committee 22 for the current year.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Eisemann, for the continuing good work of your
committee in bringing us information and recommendations for constantly improving
the efficiency of carrying out our various maintenance operations.
I note that your committee has four new assignments on its agenda for the year
ahead, which I am sure will assure us of another group of interesting and valuable
reports a year hence.
Your committee is now excused, with the thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
[For report, see Bulletin 575, pages 305-325]
President Code: Closing our program for today, we shall next and last — but not
least — hear from another one of our important committees, Committee 27 — Maintenance
of Way Work Equipment, a committee which has become increasingly important over
the years with the extensive developments and widespread use of machines and equip-
ment in our maintenance of way and structures operations.
The chairman of this committee is R. S. Radspinner, assistant superintendent, work
equipment and reclamation system, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, at Barboursville, W.
Va., who is completing his second year as chairman.
Mr. Radspinner, if you and the other members of your committee will assemble
quickly here at our speaker's table, I shall be glad to turn the meeting over to you.
Chairman R. S. Radspinner: Mr. President, members of the association, and
guests:
We are reporting on eight assignments; one is a progress report, four are continuing
subjects, and three are final.
Our presentation will be confined to a brief summary of the published reports; but
due to the technical nature of these reports. I suggest that much can be gained by read-
ing the complete report in the Bulletin. Several reports include good pictures to illustrate
the equipment or items discussed.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Radspinner: The chairman of Subcommittee 1 is R. W. Bailey, engineer
— scales and work equipment, Chicago & North Western Railway. Study and discussion
was conducted by the subcommittee, but no report will be submitted this year.
Assignment 1 (a) — Revision of Handbook of Instructions for Care and
Operation of Maintenance of Way Equipment.
Chairman Radspinner: This is a progress report, including recommended addi-
tions. The report will be presented by Subcommittee Chairman S. E. Tracy, superin-
tendent work equipment, Burlington Lines.
S. E. Tracy: Since the Handbook was revised in 1957, your committee has found
that 18 units of equipment had reached sufficient distribution and use to warrant the
publication of instructions in this and past Bulletins.
Discussion 665
It is thought that the manner in which this material is arranged in the Bulletin
will simplify the task of revision if and when authorized by the Board of Direction.
It is the intention of the committee to recommend deletion of obsolete material from
time to time further to simplify revision.
The material as published in Bulletin 575 is presented as information, but it is
recommended that it be included in the next edition of the Handbook.
Assignment 2 — Improvements To Be Made To Existing Work Equip-
ment.
Chairman Radspinner: J. O. Elliott, division engineer, St. Louis-San Francisco
Railway, is chairman of Subcommittee 2, which is assembling information to be included
in the report for 1963.
Assignment 3 — Standardization of Parts and Accessories for Work
Equipment.
Chairman Radspinner: This is a continuing assignment to study various com-
ponents or accessories used in mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic and electrically oper-
ated work equipment. Xo report will be given this year. Studies are being completed
on hydraulic tanks and their component parts. Other systems are to be included for
development of specifications and Manual material.
Assignment 4 — Reclaiming and Extending Service Life of Machine
Parts by Metallizing, Plating and Welding.
Chairman Radspinner: This is an excellent final report presented as information.
L. E. Conner, supervisor work equipment, Seaboard Air Line Railroad, subcommittee
chairman, was unable to attend. His report will be read by R. M. Johnson, supervisor
work equipment. Western Maryland Railway.
R. M. Johnson [for Mr. Conner] : While there are several processes or methods
used in the reclamation of various work equipment machine parts, three commonly
used are welding, metalizing and plating. Quite a number of railroads use one or more
of these processes in their reclamation work and have reported considerable savings
in their use.
Spray metallizing was first used more than 20 years ago, and insofar as method
of application is concerned, has progressively improved to the extent that today very
satisfactory results are obtained. Proper preparation of the work prior to metallizing has
always been stressed in order to insure a permanent bond.
Industrial hard chrome plating of various parts has been in use for a number of
years, and this process has been found to be very economical, very satisfactory, and
materially increases the service life of the reclaimed parts many times over.
The welding process has been in use for reclaiming cracked or broken parts of
various machines and castings for just about as long as the art of welding has been
in existence. Welding has also been used extensively in building up and restoring
worn parts.
There arc many parts used in work equipment that can be reclaimed by one of the
three reclamation processes mentioned in this report. Normally, these parts ma\ then
be reclaimed for service with a greatly extended service life and in some instances, a
longer service life is obtained than when the part was new.
An investigation should be made by the supervisor or foreman in charge to develop
the most practical and economical method of reclaiming the part involved. In must
instances, a part may be reclaimed at a considerable saving over the cost of a new
666 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
part; however, there are times when it would be more economical to buy a new part.
The cost and the availability of the new material or cost of down-time of the machine
on which the part is used would determine whether or not it should be reclaimed or
replaced.
Assignment 5 — Maintaining, Testing and Repairing Hydraulic Equip-
ment and Other Components Used on Work Equipment.
Chairman Radspinner: This is also a final report presented as information. It is
a very complete report on hydraulics as used by our railroad work equipment depart-
ments. M. E. Kerns, superintendent maintenance of way equipment — system, New York
Central System, is subcommittee chairman and will present a brief summary covering
this subject.
M. E. Kerns: The growth in the use of hydraulic power in maintenance of way
equipment requires that we take the necessary steps to equip ourselves for the detec-
tion and prevention of problems in these power circuits so that we get maximum use
of the dollars we are investing in our maintenance of way equipment.
With respect to detecting our problems, portable and bench type test equipment
will give us the necessary data in terms of flow pressure and temperature to analyze
the problems that exist in our hydraulic circuits that we can't see. Most commonly
these problems are caused by the loss of power due to internal wear.
Having identified the problem the next step is to prevent future occurrence to the
best of our ability through the elimination of external leaks, and proper conditioning
of the hydraulic fluid on a continuous basis. External leaks are a fit-and-fittings prob-
lem and require analysis of the available fittings, and seals for use in hydraulic systems.
Fluid conditioning is a circuit-and-filter problem including the choice of quality
hydraulic fluid.
The circuit should be analyzed with an eye to keeping its temperature within
proper limits. Also the reservoir should be so constructed that it will keep out atmo-
spheric dirt and provide a proper flow of fluid from discharge to inlet lines, dissipating
heat and settling the dirt in the process. The intake line should also be designed so
that the pressure drop between the reservoir and pump will not exceed 5 in of mercury
and frequently includes a strainer or separator in the line to keep the larger dirt
particles from entering the pump.
Hydraulic component clearances are commonly as fine as 0.0002 in. We should
therefore take additional steps to provide cleanliness over and above that provided by
the common strainer on the intake line, which passes particles as large as 0.0OS9 in.
Particles of this size in the systems scratch, jam and wear the mating component sur-
faces and provide the "seed" for additional particles.
To remove particles of this size, filters with micronic ratings are necessary, designed
to be used in hydraulic circuits and including a bypass valve for system protection and
an indicator to tell when to change the filter element. A 25-micron rating is a practical
beginning point, using finer ratings when required. Magnets will also help in improved
particle selection.
Overall, a preventative maintenance program such as outlined above will only be
as successful as the education that accompanies it, reaching all the workers that are
working with hydraulic equipment.
Assignment 6 — Procurement and Stocking of Parts and Materials for
the Repair of Work Equipment.
Chairman Radspinner: This is a final report presented as information. Subcom-
mittee Chairman R. O. Cassini, assistant engineer, Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, was
Discussion 667
unable to attend. His report will be summarized by R. W. Bailey, engineer scales and
work equipment, Chicago & North Western Railway.
R. W. Bailey [for Mr. Cassini] : In order to eliminate costly delays in the procure-
ment of repair parts and supplies needed by the equipment repair forces, the report
outlines a system based on the widespread use of local purchase orders, blanket orders
and national credit cards by equipment repair forces. Only minimal stocks of materials
needed on a consumption basis and those needed for running repairs and preventive
maintenance would be kept at centralized storehouse for distribution according to need.
The principal advantages resulting from such a system would be to reduce down
time on on-line machines needing repairs because the personnel responsible for making
the repairs has the authority to obtain the needed parts and materials from the closest
possible source. Unnecessary paper work is reduced to the minimum. This system also
eliminates the necessity of maintaining large inventory of repair parts and materials at
central storehouses and other distribution and repair centers.
Assignment 8 — Equipment for the Control and Performance of Jack-
ing in Surfacing Operations.
Chairman Radspinner: The final report on this assignment will be presented in
1964.
Chairman* Radspinner fcontinuing] : I would like to mention two important sub-
jects that keep coming up whenever Committee 27 meets. Most of us on Committee 27
deal directly with work equipment on our respective railroads. We are aware of our
responsibility to the Association and to our own managements on this important sub-
ject, and we feel that realistic opinions expressed by the committee might be of more
use to railroads when new equipment is being purchased than just specifications. The
listing of various types of equipment is fine, but if we could rate each one according
to its performance or maintenance, our reports might be of greater value to all con-
cerned. We would not necessarily criticize, but would give credit to the most efficient.
Now. turning to the other subject: You have all noticed lately, in several of the
current trade journals, articles on the growth of work equipment on most railroads.
Each year the number of units and size of the equipment increases. We hear about
utilization, automation and machines used for several operations. What bothers us is
what appears to be a lack of interest in the organization and facilities to maintain
this equipment.
I should like to read part of the report on Assignment 5 — Organization, Machinery
and Tools, and Repairing Maintenance of Way Work Equipment, as found in Bulletin
456, Vol. 47, dated December 1045.
"In its investigation of this subject, your committee found it necessary to consider
the matter of organization to be used in operating and maintaining the equipment
Therefore, a considerable portion of this report is devoted to the organization necessary
for the proper application of machinery and tools in the repair of work equipment.
"The work equipment in use on the average railroad today for maintenance of
way and structures represents a very large investment. In order to secure the proper
return from this investment, the equipment must be kept in serviceable condition and
properly operated; it must be assigned to secure the maximum use. and the righl
machine used for a given job.
"The use of maintenance of way work equipment has increased tremendous!) in
the past few years, but the organization and facilities to handle the operation and
maintenance of the machines have not kept pace with this rapid expansion, As a result,
much equipment has been damaged due to improper operation and maintenance.
668 Maintenance of Way Work Equipment
"Equipment is idle for long periods awaiting repairs. Inadequate repairs are made
due to lack of facilities and trained men. Much idleness and abuse of the appliances
have resulted from a failure to program the work and the use of the machines for
purposes other than originally intended."
Edgar Bennett, who was chief engineer, maintenance of way and structures, South-
ern Railway System, spoke on "Organization Needed to Handle Work Equipment" at
the AREA 49th Annual Meeting in 1950. Here is part of what he said at that time:
"Organization to correctly manage the use and repair of maintenance of way work
equipment is essential if economy is to be realized from the equipment. We are indeed
glad of this opportunity to stress again the need of ample organization, with the hope
that you who are charged with this responsibility will see that equipment placed under
your direction is efficiently handled to produce expected results.
"Equipment must not be permitted to remain idle for long periods as a result of
abuse, the lack of a work program, or the lack of essential facilities and trained men
to make repairs. In these days of low earnings and restricted forces, let us illustrate
our point.
"Suppose you hired a man at a fixed salary, to be paid whether he worked or not.
You would certainly so plan his work that he would have little idle time. If a machine
is idle, you are losing money just as surely as though your hired man loafs on the job.
If a machine is being operated inefficiently, you not only are losing money invested in
the machine, but a portion of the wages paid to its operator as well.
"The many benefits to be derived from the investment in work equipment and its
intensive use are lost unless there is an adequate and suitable organization to supervise
its operation and maintenance. Investing huge sums in work equipment and then failing
to provide an organization to supervise it may be likened to buying an ocean finer and
failing to provide a captain and other officers."
Gentlemen, this was important in 1945, in 1950, and is even more important now,
due to the increased number and the complexity of the machines being manufactured.
Now is the time for action if the work equipment departments are to provide the
service expected of us
Mr. President, this concludes the presentation of reports of Committee 27.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Radspinner and your committee, for these addi-
tional reports to our Association. Maintenance officers all over the country look to your
committee for guidance and recommendations with respect to all aspects of power tools
and machines used in their work — from purchase and operations through maintenance
and repair, and we look forward to continuing valuable reports from your committee
in the future.
E. R. Englert [Louisville & Nashville] : I think what Mr. Radspinner just said
points up the need for getting the Handbook of Instructions for Care and Operation of
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment in shape promptly. In 1957, when it was last
revised, I was very thrilled to receive it. I know that the operator has probably more
to do with the success or failure of a machine than anything we can do in the selection
and repairing of it. But I found that the 1957 revision wasn't too practical.
Do the committee members thing it is suitable the way it is now written ? I think
we need a bible, a good guide for the operators. We ought to get on the ball and get
the handbook in shape so that it is really worth while.
Chairman Radspinner: Mr. Tracy has been handling this particular subject. Mr.
Tracy, would you care to comment on that?
S. E. Tracy [Chicago, Burlington & Quincy]: The question you bring up has been
brought up before. If I understand your criticism, it is that the book does not satisfy
the requirements of your particular railroad. It is quite obvious that it would be
impossible for a committee, representing all the railroads in the United States and
Canada, to make a set of rules that would be satisfactory to each and every railroad.
Discussion 669
What we had in mind when we wrote the handbook was to formulate a set of
instructions upon which each individual road could base its own instructions, using the
handbook as a part of or as a guide for them to write their own book.
Mr. Englert: I misunderstood the use of this book. It makes sense to me if I can
use this book to design something that fits our road. The point I wanted to make is
that the operator is very important, and wc should not overlook getting instructions
to him.
I started to ask if anybody on the committee uses this book as a guide for their
operators. Mr. Tracy, of course, killed the question when he said it is a guide for me
to work up something for my operator. [Laughterl
President Code: A guide from which you can make a guide.
Mr. Englert: Yes. I didn't mean to be critical of the committee, however.
President Code: Your comments are very much appreciated, Mr. Englert.
Chairman Radspinner: When we have our material accumulated and when we
feel the present book warrants replacement, we shall do what we can. However, many
railroads do use it as an operator's manual.
Mr. Englert: That is what happened to me. It was sent to me and I proceeded
to get it out to all operators, and the first thing I knew I didn't want it because it
didn't fit.
Chairman Radspinner: One trouble is that the machines are not identified with
respect to their manufacturers.
President Code: You are not permitted to call things by their right names, and
that is one of the difficulties faced by this committee. [Laughter]
Are there any further questions or comments from the floor? If not, Mr. Radspin-
ner, your committee is now excused, with the thanks of the Association. [Applause]
President Code [continuing] : Gentlemen, this concludes our program for today.
We shall go back at it again tomorrow morning in this room at nine o'clock sharp to
hear, in order, the reports of our Committees on Ties and Wood Preservation ; Road-
way and Ballast ; Track ; Rail ; and Continuous Welded Rail. This should be a most
interesting session. I will expect you all here right on time in the morning.
The meeting is now recessed until tomorrow morning.
[The meeting adjourned at 5:40 pm]
Morning Session, March 16, 1963
[The meeting reconvened at 9 am, President Code presiding!
President Code: The meeting will please come to order. With a busy schedule
still ahead of us, ending with our closing business session about noon, it is important
that we get started on time and move right along,
Discussion on Ties and Wood Preservation
[For report, see Bulletin 575, pages 241-261]
President Code: Our first committee to report this morning is Committee 3 — Ties
and Wood Preservation, the chairman of which is R. B. Radkcy, engineer of ties and
treatment, Illinois Central, at Chicago. Mr. Radkcy. if you will escort the numbers
of your committee up here I -hall turn the meeting over to you.
670 Ties and Wood Preservation
Again, as I reminded you repeatedly yesterday, anyone present may have the
privilege of the floor throughout our morning session to ask questions or supplement
the committee presentations, and I hope you will avail yourself of this privilege.
You may proceed, Mr. Radkey.
Chairman R. B. Radkey: Mr. President, members and guests:
Committee 3 — Ties and Wood Preservation, is responsible for Chapter 3 and Chap-
ter 17 of the Manual. Our 1962 report has been printed in Bulletins 572, June-July;
573, September-October, and 575, December. We shall limit the presentation here to
the high points.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Radkey: Assignment 1 is headed by C. S. Burt, assistant to vice presi-
dent, purchases and stores, Illinois Central Railroad. Manual Chapter 3 — Ties, and
Chapter 17 — Wood Preservation, were revised last year in considerable detail. No fur-
ther revision is required at this time. In all possibility some revisions will be made
next year.
Assignment 2 — Cross and Switch Ties.
Chairman Radkey: The report on Assignment 2 will be presented by H. F. Kanute,
engineer layout and design, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway.
H. F. Kanute: Mr. President and gentlemen:
Subcommittee 2 has been active on three subjects, and is submitting reports on them
as information.
1. Extent of Adherence to Specifications — During the summer of 1962, Committee 3
inspected cross ties at an Arkansas treating plant which serves two different railroads.
The ties were of excellent quality. Good housekeeping, good drainage, general cleanliness,
and good preservation practices were being observed. One of the functions of Com-
mittee 3 is to visit treating plants to keep abreast of latest developments and to make
our observations of local practices available to managements. These inspection trips
will be continued insofar as practical, being limited by the current economic situation.
2. Study of Possible Revision of Cross Tie Design and/ or Spacing — During the
year, we circulated a questionnaire amongst our own committee membership concerning
cross tie size and spacing and developed that:
a. Main-track cross ties vary in size from 7 in by 8 in by 8 ft 6 in to 7 in by
9 in by 9 ft. Spacing varies from 19^ to 21 in. Several members reported
that 21- to 22-in centers might be feasible without increasing maintenance
cost because of the use of heavier rail.
b. Secondary main-track ties vary from 6 in by 8 in by 8 ft to 7 in by 9 in by
8 ft 6 in, spaced from 19^ to 22% in, the majority of roads spacing at 20
to 20]/2 in.
c. Branch line ties vary from 6 in by 8 in by 8 ft to 6 in by 8 in by 8 ft, 6 in,
spaced from 19J^ to 24 in.
d. Yard track ties vary from 6 in by 6 in by 8 ft 6 in to 6 in by 8 in by 8 ft
6 in, spaced from 20 to 25 in. Most members feel that yard-track ties could
be spaced 24 to 25 in.
3. Feasibility and Economics of Reusing Recovered Ties with or Without Addi-
tional Treatment — We developed the following information from our own committee
membership. All railroads salvage ties from abandoned lines. Very few railroads salvage
Discussion 671
ties from cycled timber or surfacing operations. Switch ties are salvaged from abandoned
lines and sometimes from main-track renewals. Generally, ties are salvaged on the basis
of their having at least 10 more years of life. Mechanical wear, decay, and splits are
the prime factors involved. At least two railroads were giving salvaged ties additional
treatment. Most salvaged ties are used for spot replacements in any class of track where
needed. In some instances they are used in construction work. Salvaged ties from aban-
doned tracks range from 10 percent to 75 percent of the total ties, with a cost to
gather, bundle, and pick up ranging from $0.56 to $1.12 per tie.
All three of these studies are of continuing interest, with further work anticipated
next year.
Mr. President, this report is submitted for information.
President Code: It is so accepted. Thank you.
Are there any questions concerning the report of this subcommittee?
F. N. Beighley [St. Louis-San Francisco]: I wonder, in view of the economies
that might be realized in the greater spacing of ties in main-line track and secondary
main track, if the committee is considering making Manual recommendations to increase
the spacing.
Mr. Kantjte: The information we have developed from our studies indicates that
with the heavier rail we might increase the spacing of the ties. However, I feel we don't
have enough information as to what the greater spacing might do to our maintenance
cost and we should continue our studies further before making any recommendations.
Assignment 3 — Wood Preservation.
Chairman Radkey: Assignment 3 is headed by W. W. Barger, chief inspector, Tie
and Timber Treating Department, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway. A new type
of Boliden salts is being studied and may be offered for inclusion in the Manual next
year. A new creosote-coal tar solution specification for use in marine piles is also being
studied. There are no changes in the current specifications for preservatives.
Assignment 4 — Conditioning and Preservative Treatment of Forest
Products.
Chairman- Radkkv: Assignment 4 is headed by L. C. Collister, manager, Tie and
Timber Treating Department, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway.
This year we included in our report a monograph by Professor Huffman of the
University of Florida, which evaluates forced-air drying and covered air seasoning oi
oak cross ties. Information gained during this study shows that the use of covers and
fans to protect and accelerate the seasoning of oak cross ties results in a reduction of
seasoning time and seasoning defects.
This study also indicated that during different times of the year the seasoning
period- requited to reach specific moisture content levels will vary with the climatic
conditions. More study and information is needed to improve, compare and fullj
evaluate these methods of handling cross ties.
Assignment 5 — Service Records.
Chairman k\nkii: Assignment ; Servici Records, was headed by W. L. Kahler,
general inspector, forest products and treatment, Missouri Pacini Railroad. Mr. Kahler
has retired from active railroad service, and the committee wishes to take this oppor-
tunity to thank him for his most generous efforts in our behalf in the years past.
W. F. Arksey, engineer water service and fuel facilities. Great Northern Railway,
who will head this subcommittee next year, will presenl the report
672 Ties and Wood Preservation
W. F. Arksey: Your committee report this year again included the annual statistics
on tie renewals worked up by the AAR Bureau of Railway Economics. These statistics
indicate a still further reduction in the average tie renewals per mile of track, which
can be attributed to improved treatment and track structure and to the financial situa-
tion on the railroads.
The termite stake test being carried out at Gainesville, Fla., a joint venture between
the AAR Research Department and the University of Florida, is now 64 months old
and beginning to show trends. The annual inspection was carried out February 4 and 5,
1963, the results of which will be published by the Engineering Research Division, AAR,
later this year.
The results of tie tests by the Missouri Pacific Railroad and the Baltimore & Ohio
Railroad are given in the December issue of the Bulletin. The first test was started in
1940 with oak and pine ties and at the present time indicates tie life of 34 and 32 years,
for these species, respectively. The latter test was started in 1927 and 1928 with over
23,000 ties of white oak, red oak and mixed hardwoods treated with a large variety
of solutions. The results, as given in our published report, are very interesting, and
I would draw your attention to them.
President Code: Are there any questions?
F. R. Woolford [Western Pacific] : Mr. Arksey, don't you think the life of the ties
is being prolonged more by better protection against physical damage than from any
benefits derived from better treatment?
Mr. Arksey: I think it is a combination of the two, actually. Probably the treat-
ment has not been improved greatly in the last few years, but 25 years or so ago there
were a lot of railroads that weren't using as good methods of treatment as they do now.
Mr. Woolford: Don't your studies show that most of the ties are now being taken
out for reasons other than destruction from decay?
Mr. Arksey: I am not positive of that, but I think that is true. I believe there is
a larger percentage that do come out from other causes.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Arksey. Any other questions? Continue, Mr.
Radkey.
Assignment 6 — Methods of Prolonging Service Life of Ties.
Chatrman Radkey: Assignment 6 — Methods of Prolonging Service Life of Ties,
is headed up P. D. Brentlinger, forester, Pennsylvania Railroad, but in connection with
our published report, I feel I must eat a little crow. In the report on laminated ties
on the Pennsylvania Railroad printed on pages 258 and 259 of Bulletin 575, the
nomenclature used in describing the defects that are developing is misleading.
The report shows 11 ties either checked or split, using the teminology "split from
end to end." In cross tie inspection work a split is usually defined as an opening in
the wood extending through the piece from one face to another face. A check is usually
an opening starting on one face but not reaching through the piece to any other face.
In order to present a more accurate picture, six ties were re-examined, with the
following results:
Discussion 673
Tie Dimensions of Defect
No. Width Depth Length
1 H" Va" 8' 6"
3 Vs" 2" 4' 0"
3 Vs" Va" 4' 6"
4 Vs" Va" 4' 0"
18 Corner broken off— V/s" x Ya" x 8^"
10 y2" 2" 4' 0"
10 Vs" VA" 10"
10 Vs" W 4' 6"
20 V2" 2" 10"
Actually, none of the ties are split. Most of the surface checks involved arc rela-
tively shallow, only one surface check penetrating most of the way through a tie. Thus,
these ties after nine years of service are in considerably better condition than our
inspection report could be interpreted to indicate.
I might say that the error in the printing should be placed on my shoulders, not
on Mr. Brentlinger, the subcommittee chairman.
Assignment 7 — Substitutes for Wood Ties.
Chairmax Radkey: This subcommittee is headed by M. J. Hubbard, assistant chief
engineer — system, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, and reports for your information that
the AAR Research Center has considered the possibility of using fiberglass in making
ties. Strength characteristics are excellent, but material cost alone would be $45 per tie.
The 24 experimental 7-in by 12 -in by 8-ft 6-in timber ties in track at 30-in centers
are in excellent condition after one year of service.
Next year, we hope to have some data regarding maintenance costs of prestressed
concrete ties.
Assignment 8 — Making Charcoal from Used Ties.
Chairman- Radkey: Assignment 8 — Making Charcoal from Used Ties, is headed by
G. A. Williams, regional engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad. This subcommittee has made
a comprehensive study of the possibility of making charcoal from used ties and finds
it impractical at this time, thus recommending that this subject be closed. Reasons
precluding this use for old ties include:
1. Other supplies of good timber are available at lower cost,
2. Present kilns are not constructed to handle cross tie lengths and the cutting
and handling of ties would be too costly.
3. The presence of creosote is quite objectionable.
4. In tests using old ties as raw material, charcoal was produced at a loss. The
negative attitude of the charcoal producers is so near unanimous that no
interest in the subject can be generated.
Chairman Radkey [continuing!: George B. Campbell, retired tic and timber agent,
Missouri Pacific Railroad, died at his home in St. Louis, Mo.. during February 1962.
Mr. Campbell had been associated with Committee 3 and Committee 17 sine*
and we feel the loss of this honored member and friend. A memoir in hi- behalf i-
included with our published report.
This report terminate- my chairmanship of this committee. It has been a pleasure
to work with and tor its members. My sincere thanks and appreciation i- tendered to
each and every member of Committee 3 for their very fine assistance and just plain
hard work for the past two years.
674 Ties and Wood Preservation
W. E. Fuhr, assistant chief engineer, signals and communications, Chicago, Mil-
waukee, St. Paul & Pacific Railroad, will be the new chairman of Committee 3. We are
looking forward to our work under his leadership and know the committee will be in
good hands. Mr. Fuhr is asked to stand up and be recognized.
K. C. Edscorn, tie and timber agent, Missouri Pacific Railway, will be our new
vice chairman, and he is asked to stand and be recognized.
Mr. President, this ends our report.
President Code: Are there any questions?
F. R. Woolford [Western Pacific] : Mr. Code, before Mr. Radkey sits down I
would like to ask a question.
There has been a lot of development work in the research laboatory on dowels.
Your committee handles dowels for ties, I take it? Are you in a position to make a
recommendation from your studies as to the proper length and flute pattern of dowels?
Chairman Radkey: I can't answer that from a committee standpoint. The specifica-
tion for dowels was rewritten for the Manual last year. The length from a practical
standpoint is a rather hard thing to establish, because in purchasing ties there is such
variation in tie size. If you make the dowel too short, you lose too much strength, as
it takes about y2 in along the dowel to develop strength. If you make the dowel too
long so that it sticks out the side of the tie, you have a personal injury hazard in
handling it.
It is a problem to hit at a length which will practically serve all of the ties.
Mr. Woolford: What about the flutes:
Chairman Radkey: I can't answer that, sir. I am sorry, but I don't know.
G. M. Magee [AAR] : Mr. Woolford, we have made some withdrawal tests on the
three-flute dowel and the four-flute dowel, and the tests indicated that the three-flute
dowel has a somewhat greater withdrawal resistance, so we would assume that in service
the same benefit would obtain. We would be inclined, therefore, to recommend the
three-flute rather than the four-flute dowel.
As to the length of the dowel, it is like the answer attributed to Abraham Lincoln
when asked about how long a man's legs should be. He said they should be long enough
to reach the ground. I think the dowel should be long enough to reach through the tie.
Chairman Radkey: One thing about the strength of the dowel that we have
noticed from a practical standpoint is that a dowel placed in a green tie seems to hold
much better than a dowel placed in a dry tie. Whether the natural juices of the wood
corrode the metal and set up a better bond, I don't know; but on our railroad we are
of that opinion.
Mr. Woolford: I think that is only reasonable. But you have to take into con-
sideration the cost of doweling all unseasoned ties as compared to a selected portion
after seasoning.
Chairman Radkey: We need a nice little electronic indicator that we could hold up
to the green, unsplit ties, which would indicate whether or not splitting would occur
during seasoning.
Mr. Magee: Mr. Woolford, isn't what you have in mind whether you would dowel
on a selected basis after seasoning? At that time, of course, you will know which ties
have split.
Mr. Woolford: That is what we are doing now. I would like to dowel before
seasoning, but it is purely a matter of cost.
Chairman Radkey: We think the dowel put into the tie before it starts to split
is a much better proposition than a dowel that is put in after it splits. But how you
can pick the one that is going to split, is beyond me.
Discussion 675
Mr. Woolford: If you are going to dowel before seasoning you must dowel 100
percent — you never know which ones arc going to split. Mr. Magee should come up
with that electronic device you mentioned.
President Code: Thank you. Mr. Radkey. Your committee has been well reor-
ganized to carry forward the former work of Committees 3 and 17, and is doing a fine
job in keeping the Association informed both with respect to ties and wood
preservation.
We welcome Mr. Edscorn as the new vice chairman of your committee, and Mr.
Fuhr as the new chairman, confident that they will see that your committee continues
its good work in the future.
Mr. Fuhr. I congratulate you upon your appointment as chairman of Committee 3,
and would like to present you with this chairman's gavel as the symbol of your
authority for the next three years.
Thank you again, Mr. Radkey. Your committee is now excused with the thanks
of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Roadway and Ballast
| For report, see Bulletin 577, pages 543-570]
President Code: Moving on with our program, we shall next hear from our Com-
mittee 1 — Roadway and Ballast, which is also well organized and which carries a lot
of responsibility. The chairman of this committee is F. N. Beighley, roadway engineer,
St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, at Springfield, Mo. Mr. Beighley, I am sure your
Committee is "rarin' " to go, so as soon as you and the other members of your com-
mittee present get up here, I shall be glad to turn the meeting over to you.
Chairman F. X. Beighley: Mr. President, members of the association, ladies and
guests:
During the past year Committee 1 held two regular meetings, during which each
of our 11 subcommittees reported progress on their 21 assignments. We are submitting
this year reports on only 6 of the assignments. Information is being gathered on all
of the remaining 15, but sufficient data have not as yet been collected for preparation
of reports covering them. As the individual reports are presented, we invite your
comments, criticism and questions.
Due to floods and other things, our subcommittee chairmen are conspicuous b\
their absence. Six of them are unable to be present today.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Beighley: Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual, has as its subcommittee
chairman G. B. Harris, assistant engineer of the Chesapeake & Ohio Railway. Because
of flood conditions on the C & 0, Mr. Harris is unable to be present. His report will
be presented by L. J. Deno, staff engineer maintenance, Chicago & North Western
Railway, vice chairman of Committee 1.
L. J. Deno [for Mr. Harris]: Your committee for the past three years has been
making a study of it* chapter in the Manual, and now submits it- final recommenda-
tions for approval. These an- found on pages 545-546 of Bulletin ^77.
Two documents: "Specifications for the Formation of the Roadway" ami "Specifics
tions for Righl of \V.i> Fences", arc recommended for reapprova] without change. Under
"Specifications for Corrugated Metal Culverts", we have discovered a slight error in
676 Roadway and Ballast
one of the references made in these specifications. This is spelled out in the subcom-
mittee report. It is the recommendation of this committee that the action referred to
be approved.
Mr. President, I so move.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Mr. Deno: In addition, your committee submits a new definition for the Glossary.
This covers open-hearth slag, which we feel should be adopted. This definition is:
" \ slag formed simultaneously when producing and refining steel in open-hearth
furnaces and consisting essentially of a fused mixture of oxides and silicates."
Mr. President, I move that this definition be adopted.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Assignment 2 — Physical Properties of Earth Materials.
Chairman Beighley: Assignment 2 — Physical Properties of Earth Materials has
as its subcommittee chairman W. P. Eshbaugh, chief engineer, Genesee & Wyoming
Railroad. Due to conditions beyond his control, Mr. Eshbaugh is unable to be present,
so I will present a resume of the report.
Under this assignment, your committee presents as information a report on Com-
parison of Soil Density and Water Content Determinations with Conventional and
Nuclear Equipment. It contains material which applies to both Assignments (a), Road-
bed, Load Capacity, Relation to Ballast, Allowable Pressures, and (b), Structural
Foundation Beds.
The work reported is the result of a cooperative project between the Canadian
National Railways and the Association of American Railroads Research Department.
It is a very concise report and is well worth everyone's reading of it.
Assignment 3 — Natural Waterways: Prevention of Erosion.
Chairman Beighley: The subcommittee chairman for Assignment 3 is G. W.
Becker, special engineer, drainage, Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad, and he will
comment on this assignment.
G. W. Becker: The subcommittee in the past year has been active principally
in procurement of material relating to subjects under its jurisdictional needing revision
in the Manual.
In that part of the chapter covering determination of wave heights, some modifica-
tion is indicated in view of recent developments reported by members of the Beach
Erosion Board and the Corps of Engineers. Some Districts of the Corps are making use
of newer recommendations at this time, but consideration of a change in Manual mate-
rial on the subject should await a more general acceptance of findings being offered by
government researchers.
There is also a trend away from the requirement for filter blankets under riprap
by some Districts of the Corps on dams, levees and embankments. Your committee is
following this trend as it relates to present Manual material on the subject.
Progress in the field of determination of runoff for waterway openings is being
furthered by governmental agencies and universities. We are endeavoring to keep up
with these advances for later use in offering recommendations for changes believed to
be desirable.
Revision of the material on check dams also is under consideration in view of new
information being developed on the subject by several universities and the Bureau
of Reclamation. It is felt that present Manual material should be revised and possibly
Discussion 677
expanded to include the more common use of check dams for preventing gullying and
progressive erosion upstream which may endanger bridge foundations.
The subcommittee will continue its efforts to consolidate information being devel-
oped on subjects relating to our assignments for eventual use in making constructive
reports and recommendations to the Association.
Preshdent Code: Thank you, Mr. Becker. Are there any questions?
T. B. Hutcheson [Seaboard Air Line] : I am interested in what you said about
filter blankets under riprap. I would like to use these blankets under certain circum-
stances. Our opinion has been that their elimination was an economy move on the part
of the Corps of Engineers, where they were paying part of the cost.
Has the committee made any investigation into why the Corps is insisting, in some
instances, on eliminating filter blankets?
Mr. Becker: I know of one district, the Rock Island District, which is not using
filter blankets on the entire Red Rock project on the Des Moines River in Red Rock,
Iowa. They are working on the assumption that the material which is being protected
is fairly non-erodable and the use of the filter blanket is not needed if good graded
material is used as protection.
They are not using filter blankets on the dam proper, and they are not using it on
the levees and the embankments being protected down there, on the basis of that
assumption..
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Hutcheson and Mr. Becker.
Assignment 4 — Culverts.
Chairman Beighley: The chairman of Subcommittee 4 is G. D. Mayor, engineer
maintenance of way standards, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway. Due to high water on the
C & O, Mr. Mayor is also not present this morning. I would like to read a brief
summary of this assignment.
On erosion control for outlet structure, research on this assignment was started in
1958 at the Colorado State University as a three-year project, but curtailment in suc-
ceeding years forced cancellation of this project without having obtained enough data
for a progress report. It is felt that the project is of enough importance so that
appropriations will be forthcoming to resume the work at the University.
Assignment 5 — Specifications for Pipelines Conveying Flammable and
N on-Flammable Substances, Collaborating with Committees 15 and 20.
Chairman Beighley: K. \V. Schoenebcrg. chief engineer, Akron, Canton & Youngs-
town Railroad, is subcommittee chairman. Mr. Schoenebcrg is unable to be present
at this convention, and therefore I shall give his report.
Chairman Beighley [for Mr. Schoenebcrg]: Study and consideration of certain
items of the rewritten Specifications for Pipelines for Conveying Flammable and Non-
Flammable Substances, looking to their revision, is being conducted by your committee,
and it is anticipated that by next year the study will be completed and any necessary
revisions will be presented for adoption.
Your committee has been continually active in its collaboration with the American
Society of Civil Engineers' Committee on Pipeline Crossings of Railroads and Highways,
and as a result of this organization's most recent meeting, it is anticipated that within
several months, an interim cro^int' specification will be published and sent to the
sponsoring organizations, of which AREA is one, for their consideration. It il hoped
678 Roadway and Ballast
th.ii tin- document, as well as several research reports, will he received and studied
in time so (hat your committee can present a progress report on it next year.
Your committee has also just recently completed arrangements for collaboration
with the American Water Works Association in its endeavor to write specifications for
non-flammable pipeline crossings of railroads and highways, with particular emphasis
"ii i (instruction methods therefor.
As stated several years ago to this convention, the goal of these organizations in
their pipeline studies, particularly the American Society of Civil Engineers, is a specifica-
tion for pipeline crossings of railroads and highways that will be acceptable, adopted,
and used by all the parties involved.
Assignment 6 — Roadways: Formation and Protection.
Chairman Beighley: Assignment 6 has a new subcommittee chairman: G. F.
Nigh, division engineer, New York, Chicago & St. Louis Railway. There are five
subtopics for this subcommittee to work on. Mr. Nigh will give the report for this
subcommittee.
G. F. Nigh: Your committee this year presents reports as information under
Assignments 6 (a) — Roadbed Stabilization, and 6 (c) — Performance of Filter Material
in Subdrains.
The report under Assignment 6 (a) appears in Bulletin 573, pages 25 to 34. In it
R. A. Stane, construction engineer, Coast Lines, of the Santa Fe, describes grading
problems encountered during relocation of the Santa Fe Railway's main line between
Williams and Crookton, Ariz. The construction of this 44-mile relocation was completed
in December 1960 and involved the movement of 8^2 million yards of rock, as well as
5 million yards of common material. Rock as large as 3 to 4 ft in diameter was used
in embankments and required special compaction. Although special provision was made
for culvert backfill, there were difficulties encountered in the case of culverts with
minimum cover.
The report under 6 (c) appears in Bulletin 577, pages 554 to 565. This is the third
and final progress report of Professor John C. Guillou of the University of Illinois
concerning the use of concrete sand for filter material and was prepared from research
at the Hydraulic Engineering Laboratory at the University as a cooperative research
program between the AAR and the University of Illinois. The first progress report was
published in the 1960 AREA Proceedings. The second progress report, in which Richard
F. Lanyon assisted Professor Guillou, was published in the 1962 AREA Proceedings.
This third and final report concludes that:
1. Initial compaction is a major factor in the development of filter stability
and that over-compaction will reduce the infiltration capacity and may cause
failure of the bed.
2. Stability is established by the binding of pore spaces near the opening with
fine particles.
3. Perforations should be placed on the bottom.
4. Concrete sand may be used with clay drain tile or plastic pipe.
This subject will be continued for other types of materials.
Under 6 (b) — Slope Protection, your committee is in the process of reviewing pages
1-1-34 and 1-1-35 of the Manual with the view to bring it in line with present day
materials and methods for action at the 1964 convention. It has also started work on a
new Assignment 6 (e) — Hydraulic Fills, in collaboration with Committee 25.
Discussion 679
There is nothing to report this year on Assignment 6 (d) — Special Treatment for
Subgrade Improvement.
Assignment 7 — Tunnels.
Chairman Beighley: This subcommittee also has a new chairman, K. W. Bradley,
design engineer, Denver & Rio Grande Western Railroad. Mr. Bradley is unable to be
present today on account of pressing work on the D&RGVY. However, he advises under
subtopic "Ventilation" that the Rio Grande has recently constructed a 7000-ft tunnel
on its Moab line, which will be operated with drag tonnage ascending a 1.2-percent
grade through the tunnel. It is their belief that adequate cooling will be provided by
radiator spray. No definite data have been compiled as yet. Under "Clearances" and
"Methods of Under Cutting", data are being collected for information reports.
Assignment 8 — Fences.
Chairman Beighley: We have still another new subcommittee chairman, P. G.
Martin, district engineer, Union Pacific Railroad, and he will comment on Assignment
8 — Fences.
P. G. Martin: Your committee is currently reviewing the Manual with respect to
Part 6, Fencing, pages 1-6-20 to 1-6-23, incl., "Methods of Protecting the Roadway
against Drifting Snow."
A new type of snow and sand fence being manufactured commercially has been
reviewed and studied by this subcommittee. This fence consists of galvanized corrugated
perforated steel panels &Y> in wide and 8 ft 4 in long, and %-h\ by 3^-in steel posts
in lengths from S ft 6 in to 8 ft 4 in. The posts are driven into the ground approxi-
mately 25 in, depending on the distance wanted below the lowest panel and top of
ground. The distance between posts varies from 8 ft 2 in to 8 ft 4 in. The panels are
inserted in slots in the posts. The distance from the bottom panel to the ground is
recommended to be from 3 to 12 in, depending on how closely the drift must be placed
and the velocity of the wind.
This type of fence has been erected by several railroads up to the present time and
comments received by this subcommittee have been favorable as to initial cost of
material and cost of erection.
Holes in the panels and posts permit the material to be secured by chain and lock
to prevent pilfering if the material is stacked during the off season.
This subject is being studied with the view of preparing a report for information
in the near future.
President Code: Are there any questions or comments on this report, gentlemen?
Mr. Woolford: Mr. Martin, I would like to ask if the committee has made any
economic study concerning use of the slat fence for sand protection.
Mr. Martin: We haven't at this time. We shall report on it in the future, though
Mr. Woolford: Do you have any idea of the life that ran be expected from a
metal fence?
Mr. Martin: Not at the present time.
Assignment 9 — Roadway Signs.
Chairman Beighley: Assignment 9 — Roadway Signs, has R. D. Baldwin, super-
intendent, maintenance of way, New York City Transit Authority, as subcommittee
chairman. Mr. Baldwin is unable to attend the convention, and therefore I would like
to read a few remarks on this subject.
680 Roadway and Ballast
Research on reflectorized and luminous roadway signs has been discontinued tem-
porarily due to curtailment of funds; however, the committee feels the subject should
not be dropped, as new products are constantly being developed, some of which might
be adaptable for railway purposes.
We have a new assignment for the coming year: "Layout of Shop for Roadway
Sign Construction." This subject has been progressed to the point that a suggested plan
will be- submitted to the convention in 1964 for inclusion in the Manual.
Assignment 10 — Ballast.
Chairman Beighley: T. VV. Creighton, regional engineer, Canadian Pacific Railroad,
is chairman of Subcommittee 10 — Ballast, and will present the report.
T. W. Creighton: Your committee presented, under assignment 10 (a) — Tests, an
advance reports on conductivity tests of open-hearth slag ballast as information in
Bulletin 573, September-October 1962. Further tests on the suitability of this material
as ballast in other respects will be undertaken as funds become available.
Under assignment 10 (c), a progress report on test sections of asphalt-treated bal-
last and asphalt-treated bridge decks appears as information in Bulletin 577, February
1963.
The subcommittee is actively engaged in revision of the ballast sections illustrated
on pages 1-2-7 to 1-2-12 of the Manual. These ballast sections were adopted in 1938
and 1939 and have been reapproved without change since that time. During the inter-
val, track maintenance procedures have been revolutionized by the introduction of
labor-saving machinery which dictates that the old design standards based on hand
labor be modified to reap the advantages of these machines. Consideration must be
given to the increased stresses introduced into the track structure in the use of con-
tinuous welded rail in areas with a wide range of temperature. The use for other pur-
poses of materials which have hitherto been readily available as ballast has made it
advisable to ensure that, while ballast sections are adequate, they are not over-designed.
It should be pointed out that it is anticipated, in preparing the standard plan, that
ballast will be maintained reasonably close to the theoretical section and will not be
allowed to become depleted. This applies especially to the sections designed for con-
tinuous welded rail.
The proposed sections, which will be considerably simplified and reduced in number,
will be suitable for use with both continuous welded rail and jointed rail and for all
types of ballast on both tangent and curved track. It is anticipated that the revised
sections will be recommended for inclusion in the Manual in 1964.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Creighton. Any questions?
W. E. Fuhr [Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul & Pacific] : One of our assignments
concerns the feasibility of increasing the spacing of timber cross ties. I don't know if
you have gotten into the subject, but I wonder if you have investigated it and, if so,
whether you have reached any conclusions as to the possibility of overloading the
ballast or subgrade.
Mr. Creighton: We haven't made any progress on that as yet.
F. R. Woolford [Western Pacific] : I think one assignment your committee has
had, Mr. Creighton, is the comparative desirability of ballast from the steel mills versus
precious metal ballast. Are you in a position to give any opinion as to the conductivtiy
and holding power of open-hearth and blast-furnace slag from the steel mills compared
to ballast from precious metals smelters.
Discussion 681
Mr. Creighton: As far as open-hearth ballast is concerned, the conductivity tests
conducted last year indicate that it has a slightly higher conductivity when dry com-
pared with the other types that are in common use, including limestone and blast-
furnace slag, and about the same conductivity as other common types of ballast
when wet.
We have not made any comparisons so far with smelter slag. The holding power
of the various types has not been tested; but from observation of places where it is
in use, the holding power of smelter slag appears to be superior to the holding power
of blast-furnace slap.
H. F. Kantjte [Frisco]: In your report you speak about treating ballast with
asphalt, and also you speak of maintenance of spotty track that has developed in the
asphalt-treated sections. Do you have any technique of preserving that treated ballast
when you have to spot the track, or is your treated ballast section destroyed when you
have to go in and do your spotting?
Mr. Creighton: To the best of my knowledge, it is destroyed when you have to
surface the track. I can't give you too definite an answer to that because I wasn't able
to participate in the inspections, but I don't see how you can preserve it.
G. M. Magee [AAR]: May I comment on that? On the first installation put in
on the Illinois Central where spotting had to be done, the asphalt ballast was dug out
at the end of the tie and the rail was jacked up a little above the desired height. The
tie was nipped up against the rail, and then fine material was shoved in under the end
by the so-called saw blade or paddle method, that is, you take a long, thin blade and
put fine material on it, and put it under the tie, and then pull it out quickly so that the
inertia of the ballast keeps it underneath. Enough material was put in under the tie end
to bring it up to the desired height, and then emulsified asphalt was poured at the end
of the tie to re-seal it.
If you spot just an occasional tie on one end, it would be economical to do it
that way. If you have any extensive amount, that method gets pretty expensive, and
it probably would be cheaper to surface the track and tamp the asphalt mixture
underneath it and re-coat if desired.
Mr. Woolford: Mr. Creighton, has your committee given any thought to using
asphalt-impregnated ballast under railroad crossings?
Mr. Creighton: Xo, we have not.
Mr. Woolford: It is being done on the Southern Railway. Going to Atlanta, Ga. to
a committee meeting, I had occasion to ride over some. We were having tremendous
problems with our railroad crossings. After seeing what they had done down there,
I did some experimenting on my own road, and I find that we can maintain railroad
crossings far easier and in a far better condition by using asphalt-impregnated ballast
under the ties, rather than standard ballast
Chairman Beighley: Mr. Woolford, was that railroad with railroad, or railroad
with highway?
Mr. Woolford: Railroad with railroad.
Assignment 11 — Chemical Control of Vegetation.
Ciiaikmw Hi ii. in ia: The chairman of Subcommittee 11 is C. E. Webb, engineer
of tests, Southern Railway. Mr. Webb is unable to be here today; however, he advises
that because of budget restrictions affecting the work of the AAR research staff, it has
not been possible to gather sufficient data on this subject to prepare a report of nation-
682 Track
wide significance. Certain information, though, on new products and chemical combina-
tions is being assembled, and hi- thought a significant report may be presented next year.
Chairman Biiciii.i.y [continuing | : Mr. President, this concludes the report of
Committee 1.
Mr. Woolford: Mr. Beighley, before you sit down may I ask another question.
On your last subject, on chemical control of vegetation, has your committee given
any study to supplementing bulldozed fire guards through forest areas with chemical
treatment? If so, what do you recommend in the way of chemical treatment through
such areas?
Chairman Beighley: Mr. Woolford, we haven't as yet gotten into that subject,
but it is one that is of much interest at the present time. On railroads all over the
country it seems that diesel engines throw out fire just as much as the old steam
engines did. On our railroad we make fire guards with a bulldozer, and I myself don't
think it is very satisfactory, because you get regrowth in a very short period of time.
I believe the Santa Fe has done some work with regard to chemical eradication
of vegetation for fire guards, and I think we shall get actively into the matter in con-
nection with this assignment.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Beighley, and your committee for these addi-
tional valuable reports. From your comments with respect to some of your assignments,
it is evident that your committee has a lot of unfinished business to progress or clean up
in the year ahead. We know it will do this to the fullest extent possible.
I know your committee is sorry to lose its very efficient secretary for the past two
years — Rudy Beeder — but your loss is a great gain for our Committee on Cooperative
Relations with Universities, as Mr. Beeder takes over the vice chairmanship of that
committee.
Thank you again, Mr. Beighley, for the good work of your committee during the
past year. You are now excused, with the thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Discussion on Track
[For report, see Bulletin 577, pages 419-447]
President Code: Quite logically, after hearing the report of our Committee on
Roadway and Ballast, we turn to the report of our Committee 5— Track, which is the
next feature on our program. The chairman of this committee for the past three years
has been Stuart Poore, office engineer of the Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, and I would
like to welcome him and the members of his committee to the platform at this time.
Mr. Poore, you may proceed.
Chairman S. H. Poore: Mr. President and members of the AREA:
The report of the Track committee will be found in Bulletin 577, of February
1963. We have 11 assignments. Progress reports on 3 of them, namely, hold down fas-
tenings for tic plates, review of speed on curves, and methods of heat treatment of
frogs and switches, are in the Bulletin. I do not believe a formal presentation is war-
ranted at this time.
N. C. Kieffer, Jr., assistant to director of industrial development of the Louisville
& Nashville Railroad, was chairman of Subcommittee 6 — Hold Down Fastenings for
Tie Plates. Mr. Kieffer is resigning from the committee because of a change in jobs
and could not make this convention.
Discussion 683
L. H. Jentoft, assistant chief engineer maintenance of way of the Erie-Lackawanna,
is chairman of Subcommittee 9 — Speed on Curves. I will ask him to stand and be
recognized. Incidentally. Mr. Jentoft is retiring from railroad service.
H. W. Jensen, maintenance engineer of the Chicago & North Western, is chairman
of Subcommtitee 10 — Heat Treatment of Bolted Rail Frogs and Split Switches. Will
you please stand, Mr. Jensen.
Somewhat more detailed reports on revision of the Manual, standardization of
Hackwork, plans, design of tie plates, and track tools, are offered at this time. No report
is offered on prevention of damage resulting from brine drippings on track and struc-
tures, effect of lubrication in preventing frozen rail joints and retarding corrosion of
rail and fastenings, the practicability of using reflex units for switch lamps and targets,
and laying rail tight with frozen joints.
We turn now to the assignments on which we are making detailed reports.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Poore: R. J. Hollingsworth, engineer roadway, track and equipment,
Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, is chairman of Subcommittee 1, but he is not present. It so
happens that I am familiar with this work, however, and I shall undertake to present
the report myself.
The subcommittee on Revision of Manual was approached a year or more ago
with a proposal to revise the format of the specifications for tie plates and track spikes,
to bring them into line with the comparable specifications of the ASTM. This revision
has been accomplished. There were modifications both in the ASTM and the AREA
specifications.
At the same time we included in the specifications provisions to permit use of
basic-oxygen steel in the production of these items.
First, I move that the Specifications for Low-Carbon Steel Tie Plates, printed
beginning on page 421 of Bulletin 577, be approved for adoption and printing in the
Manual.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Chairman Poore: Since the printing of this Bulletin my attention has been called
to some editorial changes. Mr. Hollingsworth has the record of these, and my notes
do not cover them at the moment, but I shall advise the secretary's office of them prior
to the printing of the Manual Supplement.
The next specification is for hot-worked, high-carbon steel tie plates and may be
found on page 423 of Bulletin 577.
I move it be adopted and printed in the Manual.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Chairman Poore: The next specifications offered for approval cover soft-steel track
spikes and high-carbon steel track spikes. The first of these specifications is printed
beginning on page 426 of the Bulletin and the second on page 428.
I move they be adopted and printed in the Manual
[The motion was duly seconded. |
President Code: The motion covers two different specifications for track spikes.
Is there any discussion?
[The motion was put to a vote, and carried |
Chairman Poore: The nexl specification, on page 430 of the Bulletin, for steel
drive spikes, has no ASTM counterpart. However, at the time we were revising the
aforementioned specifications we brought the one for steel drive spikes into the com-
mon format, including permission to use basi< oxygen steel.
684 Track
I move its adoption.
[The motion was duly seconded, was put to a vote, and carried.]
Assignment 2 — Track Tools.
Chairman Poore: Assignment 2 — Track Tools, will be presented by C. E. Peterson,
assistant engineer, Santa Fe, Chicago.
C. E. Peterson: Mr. President, members and guests:
This is a progress report, submitted as information.
Your committee is making a study of the following subjects:
1. Snap-on Ratchet Track Wrench — From experience gained in the field, it was
found that the shoulders on the joint bars, especially on reformed bars, do not permit
the socket of this tool to get up tight. Also, it has too much allowance for over-length
of the track bolts. The handle is located too far from the socket end, resulting in a
twisting action which does not allow maximum torque to be applied to the nut. It is
not durable enough, as the ratchet wears out too fast. The wrench works well for a
specific job, but for general work it should be redesigned. The committee suggests that
it be designed as a double-end socket wrench having a thin-wall socket with a single-
action ratchet in one direction. The ratchet should be fitted around the center of the
double-end socket where the handle will engage it.
2. Track Jacks with Aluminum Alloy Housings — It was called to our attention that
there have been a number of failures of aluminum alloy track jacks. Therefore, a canvass
has been conducted of the Class I Railroads to determine the number and kind of
failures that have occurred. From the recent data received, a study is being made to
determine the necessary changes in design, metallurgy, specifications, etc., to correct the
situation.
3. Aluminum Track Level and Gage — An investigation will be made on the use of
light-weight metals for the AREA track level and gage.
4. Wear Limit on Striking and Cutting Tools — A study will be made on the econ-
omy of reclaiming tools that have worn down to the specified wear limit.
Assignment 3 — Standardization of Trackwork Plans.
Chairman Poore: At this time C. J. McConaughy, track designer, of the Southern
Pacific, San Francisco, Calif., is asked to report on Assignment 3.
C. J. McConaughy: Mr. President and gentlemen:
I assume all of you have read the article in the AREA News of November-Decem-
ber 1962 entitled "1962 Trackwork Portfolio Supplement," on the five new standard
turnout plans which are self-contained in all details necessary for ordering the material
and installing it in the field. However I would like to briefly review the event leading
up to the adoption of these plans. It took considerable time and hard work by your
committee to develop them to the point where they were acceptable, making it possible
to proceed with the preparation of the basic drawings. After their adoption in March
1962, a great deal more work was required to put them into the form necessary for
printing them in accordance with the requirements of the Portfolio.
In 1959 the Track committee was given a directive to standardize the AREA plans.
At the May 1959 meeting this matter was thoroughly discussed and found to cover
too great a scope for action by the entire committee. Consequently, a special com-
mtitee was appointed to make a study and recommend what turnouts should be used.
In order to arrive at some logical basis, the special committee considered the fact
that most railroads base their turnouts on various speed requirements. To meet the
Discussion 685
conditions of high, medium and slow speeds, the committee recommended the No. 20,
No. 15, and No. 10 turnouts with 39-ft curved switch points, 26-ft curved switch
points, and 16-ft 6-in straight switch points, respectively, as covered in detail in the
Proceedings, Vol. 61 of 1960. It was their considered opinion that these turnouts were
equally divided to meet the speed requirements and were balanced, with respect to
both switch point angle and closure curvature. The committee's recommendations were
presented to the convention in March 1960, at which time they were thoroughly dis-
cussed and reviewed. This included a round-table discussion by various members of the
track committee, followed by an open question and answer period, before the recom-
mendations were approved.
In the ensuing two years there were many controversies, changes and reapprovals,
but your committee finally presented the completed plans at the March 1962 convention,
which were unanimously approved. With additional minor editorial changes and cor-
rections, these plans were finally printed for the Trackwork Portfolio and issued in the
latter part of 1962. In fact the first sets of the printed AREA plans were handed to
this committee during its September 1962 meeting. These were given at that time to
the various frog and switch manufacturers for their use, as some of the railroads were
already ordering material based upon the preliminary drawings.
Why was this assignment requested and what was the purpose of reducing the
standards to eliminate the alternates and the number of turnouts now in the trackwork
portfolio? — Economy, savings in cost of production, reduction in inventory, inter-
changeability between railroads and possibly many other advantages. At the time this
assignment was made the advantages of standardization of turnouts may have appeared
to be something new; however some of you may recall that in the Proceedings, Vol. 60
of 1959, page 870, under Assignment 11 — "Economy To Be Gained By the Railroad
From the More Extensive Use of AREA Plans," that subcommittee outlined the numer-
ous advantages to be gained and felt that the greatest economy could be achieved if a
set of recommended plans for the trackwork portfolio could be developed that would
eliminate alternates which affect the shop work. Alternates should be indicated only for
parts not basic to the manufacture of turnout materials.
The report in the Proceedings, Vol. 58 of 1957 by the committee under Assign-
ment 11, shows that of the railroads with over 1000 miles of trackage, only 5 percent
used AREA plans in general. Of smaller railroads with less than 1000 maintained miles,
25 to 38 percent used AREA plans, depending upon the turnout speeds. Of the rail-
roads having over 1000 miles not using these plans at that time, 25 percent stated they
would consider recommending the AREA plans and only 1.9 percent of the roads of
less than 1000 miles. This would indicate that approximately 30 percent on a mileage
basis of railroads with over 1000 maintained miles would possibly use the new AREA
plans. This does not reflect the actual number of railroads but it does provide a picture
of the possible percentage of production to the new plans. On the construction and
production side, the various frog and switch manufacturers were submitted five ques-
tions covering reduction in costs for one set of plans for each turnouts, delivery time,
etc. Their answers indicated a 2 to 5 percent saving in cost and reduction in delivery
time of 20 to 33 percent.
With the continued interest in the need of standardization from the time of these
reports to the adoption of the five standard turnout plans, as shown at our previous
conventions, it is possible that a larger percentage of the total railroad mileage would
now consider using these standard plans. However, at this time it docs not appear that
there is the interest beint; shown tli.it was expected. From the information I have
686 Track
received, the manufacturers have not been flooded with orders for these standards.
We realize that these plans having been issued in the latter part of 1962, it is rather
-non for the railroads to complete their studies as to the use of the standard plans.
To accomplish this goal of standardization will take considerable time and hard
work. It cannot be done at once but must be accomplished on a gradual basis. The
savings will not be available on a number of railroads until some of the alterations are
made and the turnouts gradually converted to the new standard. In a few cases the
new standards may be similar to the plans now being used and their adoption would
not be difficult or expensive and can be accomplished within a very short time. Other
railroads will be required to make a complete changeout in order to use these plans,
which could be very expensive and require a longer period of time, before the benefits
of standardization would be realized. Due to economic conditions and increased costs,
it is possible that some of the railroads may hesitate to make these changes until a new
rail section is adopted or a new turnout required.
Your committee realizes the problems that will be encountered in the adoption of
the new standards, as we have experienced similar difficulties in developing and pre-
senting them for approval. However, it is felt that standardization is the ultimate goal
we should work toward in our future planning. Your committee also realizes that as
time goes on you may wish some revisions and changes in order that the standards will
be kept up to date to cover improvements in the track structure that may be developed.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. McConaughy. Your subcommittee has done a
very worthwhile and monumental piece of work, and I am sure it will bear fruit for
many years to come.
Are there any comments or questions?
F. R. Woolford [Western Pacific] : Mr. McConaughy, do you actually think we
will ever accomplish standardization of track materials? We used the No. 14 turnout
for a number of years, and your committee came out and recommended the No. IS.
We tried to buy No. IS turnouts, but one frog manufacturer couldn't make them.
Do you think standardization will ever be adopted? I am beginning to wonder
whether we are going down a blind road.
Mr. McConaughy: Mr. Woolford, it would appear that way. We were given a very
large assignment. I am not trying to pass it off, but I think we went at it so quickly
and so rapidly that there are possibly changes that the various railroads will want
to make.
To answer your question, there has not been enough interest shown by the railroads
to warrant the manufacturers at this time making new patterns for the new standards.
However, you raise a question in my mind: Are the manufacturers really interested in
making this standardization?
Mr. Woolford: I spoke about it because you are familiar with three of the western
railroads that tried to standardize. We thought it went over, but it fell flat. I wonder
if the same thing will happen to our new standards.
Mr. McConaughy: We hope not, sir. However, in my opinion, and it has been
expressed by the committee, there is one step toward standardization that we should
particularly strive for, and that is to reduce the number of turnouts being used. I think
it would be possible that we could eventually reduce them to where the people now
using 14's, lS's, 16's or 12's could eventually use the 15. Most of us use a No. 10 now.
A lot of us use a No. 20.
I think using the No. IS turnout, if that could be accomplished, would be a step
in the right direction. Then the rest of this would fall into line eventually.
Discussion 687
B. R. Meyers [Chicago & North Western]: If it is of any comfort to the com-
mittee, I am in complete disagreement with Mr. Woolford. I think it is going to be
accomplished. It may take several years, but I think it is going to come.
We have always used the No. 14 as our standard medium-speed turnout, and
when it appeared that No. IS would undoubtedly be adopted we changed, and we didn't
have any trouble buying No. 15's. So, Mr. Woolford, you are living in the wrong part
of the country. [Laughter]
C. I. Hartsell [Chesapeake & Ohio] : I have three questions for you.
In checking over your rail-bound manganese frogs, I see no change at two particu-
larly important parts. There is a weak spot in the manganese insert about 6 to 8 in
back of the point where it drops down. That is where there is a first failure for a dis-
tance that varies, but is usually not less than from 6 up to 10 to 12 in. Have you
re-designed that insert?
Mr. McConaughy: Yes, we have. The point of weakness is characteristic, I believe,
of most frogs. You will find that same wear pattern on the spring rail frog. We have
designed a frog that was supposed to be a happy medium between the heavy 2-in wall
on one side and the %-'m wall on the other, and in so doing I believe the manufacturers
with whom we conferred have beefed up the support under the point.
I would like to ask Mr. Hassan if he has any comments on that. He was most
helpful in our redesigning.
M. J. Hassan [Taylor-Wharton Iron & Steel Company]: I think one of the main
purposes of redesigning the sections of the frog was from the standpoint of the casting
of it by the foundry people, particularly in securing the soundness of the metal, which
in the heavy wall at times showed considerable defects, especially around that point
area.
Mr. Hartsell: Have we strengthened the end of the frog?
Mr. McConaughy: Redesigning this casting to provide more uniform shrinkage
and eliminate some of the stress conditions will, I believe, help the overall situation.
Mr. von Kampen, would you have any comments to add to this problem?
Karl von Kampen [Pettibone Mulliken Corporation]: The basic reason for rede-
signing the heavy AREA insert frog was to get a more even insert section and better
foundry conditions. Our observations, from the few tests we have made, indicate that
that has been accomplished. I am just wondering whether the gentleman is talking
about the old AREA 620 series design with the heavier wall.
Mr. Hartsell: From the plan it is not obvious that there has been too much
beefing.
Mr. von Kampen: It is a case of trying to even out the metal section to get better
foundry sections.
Mr. Hartsell: In your heel blocks you have put in a thimble, or a shoulder bolt;
you have put in a bent angle bar; you have created a situation that is going to cause
considerable increased cost in the installation of this heel block as compared to the
free-floating heel block. It is going to be very difficult and costly to install this heel
block, on top of which you are going to end up with some kinked joints. It is almost
impossible to anchor that turnout so that you can prevent it from kinking. What do
you have to say about that?
Mr. McCovw <ii\ : You really have put me on the spot there. I will have to
declare that I don't believe these plans are rounded out to the point where they are
equally desirable for a large, high-speed main-line railroad that is using floating heel
688 Track
block designs; there arc things in the designs that are more adaptable to a smaller
railroad. So, I would like to air this question right here.
In designing these turnouts the committee, when I was given the chairmanship,
had the problem and the directive of making one set of turnouts from the present plans.
I think that while the endeavor was good, because of the pressure on the committee,
it wasn't realized that the bolted heel block with the shoulder bolt or thimble is prob-
ably more suited for a lot of yard jobs, little industries and belt line railroads.
I believe your experience is like that of the Southern Pacific and the Soo Line,
the Burlington, etc. They have had floating heel blocks for years, and they find them
very advantageous. So, that is possibly one of the things that we will have to take
care of if complete standardization is to be effective.
I would like to comment on one further thing concerning the casting problem.
We are hoping that the manganese casting, with this redesign to eliminate shrinkage
stresses and castings trouble, will beef up the point. However, I believe the breakdown
mentioned is a normal wear pattern, and that is why so many people have gone to
the spring rail frog, to eliminate that condition.
Your committee has been given another subject to study, namely, the economics
of these various frogs. It is going to mean quite a lengthy investigation, but I do think
it is going to answer some of the questions about the economics of the rail-bound versus
the spring rail frog.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. McConaughy. These discussions are very inter-
esting, and I would like to get mixed up in some of them myself; but I think I had
better keep quiet.
Assignment 5 — Design of Tie Plates.
Chadxman Poore: L. A. Pelton is chairman of Subcommittee S — Design of Tie
Plates. He is district engineer of the Pennsylvania Railroad, Harrisburg, and will present
his report.
L. A. Pelton: This is a final report, offered as information on the service test on
the CNO & TP (Southern Railway) in which seven designs of tie plates for 6-in rail
base were subjected to 379 million gross tons of traffic.
The investigation was conducted by the AAR research staff under direct supervision
of H. E. Durham, research engineer track.
The test was installed in 1944 on the CNO & TP approximately 12 miles north
of Chattanooga, Tenn. The installation consisted of 7 designs of tie plates in 22- 39-ft
panels of track with 131 -lb RE rail. Eight of the panels were on a short 6-deg curve
with 6 in elevation and the remaining 14 panels on tangent equally divided between oak
and pine ties.
Final test measurements were taken in May 1962 prior to the laying of continuous
welded 132-lb RE rail through the test area with accompanying tie renewals and gaging,
thereby eliminating further data on tie wear, gage, and rail wear.
A summary of tie plate cutting data for the 17.5 year test period is shown in
Table 1. There was little difference in the average rate of cutting on any of the sections
which indicates that the size of tie plate is not a factor in the average plate cutting.
The average rate of cutting, however, is probably not too significant on this test because
of the limited number of panels used, coupled with the fact that tie plate area varied
only about IS percent.
The test data did indicate less differential in plate cutting between the gage and
field side for both the inner and outer rail on the curve using the 14^4-in plate.
Discussion 689
Measurements of tie plate deflection were not conclusive in determining any
appreciable tie plate bending. The test plates were left in track with the hope that tie
plate deflection can again be checked at some future date.
As a whole the gage has held fairly well throughout the test section. The greatest
change in gage on the curve occurred with the 12-in unribbed plate and the least
change with the 14^4-in plate. On the tangent little change in gage occurred on any of
the sections.
In conclusion, the test data indicate a uniformity of plate cutting under the 14-in
and 14^4-in plates on the inner rail of the 6-deg curve, but on the outer rail the 14^4-in
plate gave a better performance. Better performance yet should be expected from the
AREA Plan 21 special 16-in tie plate with lj4-in eccentricity. For a 6-in rail base the
AREA Plan 12, 14-in plate with JHs-in eccentricity should be adequate for the inner
rail of the curve and also on tangent. The 13-in tie plate should be adequate for medium
traffic or with 5^-in rail base. The 12-in plate is indicated to be inferior as compared
to the 13, 14, or 14-}^-in plates, especially on the curve and tangent with soft wood ties.
Test results do not offer any conclusions regarding the tie plate bending but it is
the opinion that tie plate thicknesses in the AREA Manual are adequate, and no revision
in design is indicated from this test.
This report supplements the conclusions of the test made with 5^2 -in rail base on
the Illinois Central Railroad.
Chairman Poore: Mr. President, this concludes the report of the Track committee.
At this time my office as chairman expires. If this committee has done anything during
the last three years, these are the fellows who have done it.
I would like to present the new vice chairman, C. E. Peterson, assistant engineer,
Santa Fe. He has been a member of this committee for many years.
The incoming chairman is J W. Salmon, Jr., chief engineer of the Clinchfield
Railroad
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Poore. You have very ably handled the big job
of conducting the work of committee 5 during the past three years, and we want you
to know that your interest and effort have been greatly appreciated. And our thanks,
too, to Mr. Magee and the members of his staff, who have again assisted so capably in
progressing the work of some of the assignments of your committee.
And thank you, Mr. McConaughy, for the fine way in which you have picked up
and have carried forward, as chairman of Subcommittee 3, the work on standardization
of trackwork plans, so ably conducted for many years by your predecessor Subcom-
mittee Chairman Martin Zeman, engineer of track design of the Santa Fe, now retired,
and a member emeritus of your committee.
Mr. Poore, we are pleased to welcome Mr. Peterson as the new vice chairman of
your committee, and to see Mr. Salmon advance to the chairmanship. Mr Salmon, as
the symbol of the authority which you now assume, I am pleased to present to you,
on behalf of the Association, this chairman's gavel.
Mr. Poore, your committee is now excused, with the thanks of the Association.
[Applause]
690 Rail
Discussion on Rail
[For report, see Bulletin 577, pages 497 542]
President Code: We still have two important committees to hear from; so, moving
along, Committee 4 — Rail, is next invited to the speaker's table to present its report.
The able chairman of this committee, who is completing his second years as chair-
man, is W. j. Cruse, engineer maintenance of way, Great Northern Railway, at St.
Paul, Minn. Mr. Cruse, if you and the members of your committee will come up here
promptly, I shall be pleased to turn the meeting over to you. Mr. Cruse.
Chairman W. J. Cruse: Mr. President and gentlemen:
The report of Committee 4 appears on pages 497-542, inch, Bulletin 577. All nine
subcommittees have worked diligently on their reports, but time does not permit hearing
from each of them. Brief summaries will be presented of three subcommittee reports,
and I would like at this time to recognize those subcommittee chairmen who will not
report here today.
R. C. Postels, assistant chief engineer maintenance of way, Soo Line, chairman
of Subcommittee 4.
J. C. Jacobs, retired engineer maintenance of way, Illinois Central Railroad, chair-
man of Subcommittee 5. I would also like to thank you, Mr. Jacobs, for your fine con-
tributions and your efforts given to the Rail committee over these past years.
Embert Osland, office engineer of the Santa Fe, Subcommittee 6 chairman. He was
here earlier this morning but asked to be excused.
T. B. Hutcheson, chief engineer of the Seaboard Air Line, chairman of Subcom-
mittee 9.
A. P. Talbot, assistant engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad, chairman of Subcom-
mittee 10.
Following this meeting we are going to have three new subcommittee chairmen.
They will be C. E. Weller, assistant engineer maintenance of way, Illinois Central Rail-
road, who will be chairman of Subcommittee 5, succeeding Mr. Jacobs.
V. E. Hall, assistant engineer, Santa Fe, will be chairman of Subcommittee 7, a
new subcommittee which will study the metallurgical effect of rail cropping methods.
C. F. Parvin, engineer maintenance of way and structures for the Pennsylvania
Railroad, will head up Subcommittee 8, succeeding L. S. Crane.
Assignment 1 — Revision of Manual.
Chairman Cruse: In the absence of our vice chairman, J. A. Bunjer, chief engineer,
Union Pacific Railroad, I shall present the report of Subcommittee 1 — Revision of
Manual.
Chairman Cruse [for Mr. Bunjer] : To permit the use of steel made by the basic-
oxygen process at the option of the purchaser in the manufacture of rail, joint bars,
track bolts and nuts, and spring washers, and to change a chemical requirement in the
Specifications for Quenched Carbon-Steel Joint Bars, your committee submits for adop-
tion the following recommendations with respect to Chapter 4 of the Manual.
[Mr. Cruse then read the committee's recommendations as printed on pages 498
and 499 of Bulletin 577, continuing as follows:]
Chairman Cruse: I move that these recommendations be adopted.
[The motion was duly seconded.]
L. W. Green [Pennsylvania]: I wonder what the significance is of putting the
words "Basic-oxygen process may be used at the option of the purchaser" in parentheses,
Discussion 691
when apparently the previous specification leaves an option as to what kind of steel
can be used, that is, bessemer or open hearth, without parenthesis.
Chairman Cruse: While all of the laboratory work and certain of the field tests
on the basic-oxygen process have been completed, it is going to take a number of years
to run out the full tests, particularly with rail steel. The addition to the specifications
was so worded that the purchaser would have full control over whether he wants his
materials produced by the basic-oxygen process.
Mr. Green: Wouldn't he have that anyhow?
Chairman Cruse: Do you mean why the parentheses themselves are in there?
I really can't answer that. Mr. Howard, can you give us any light on that ?
Secretary Howard: They were put in at the request of the committee. [Laughter]
President Code: I think it is an editorial matter and was intended to keep the
basic-oxygen process somewhat subordinate until it has attained full approval in
service.
Mr. Green: In reading it, I had the idea that there were some qualms or restric-
tions in the use of the process. That is why I asked.
Chairman Cruse: No, it is entirely up to the purchaser himself. Probably some
railroads will prefer to wait for a number of years until there are further results from
the field installations.
B. R. Meyers [Chicago & North Western]: Maybe my understanding of it will
help.
Wording it the way vvc did, it. gives the manufacturer the choice of the conventional
methods mentioned in the specifications, but he cannot use the basic-oxygen method
unless he has the approval of the purchaser. That is, he can use the electric or the open-
hearth method without asking the purchaser, but he cannot use the basic-oxygen method
unless he asks the purchaser and the purchaser says it is okay.
Chairman Cruse: I think the question was why we used the parentheses. We
could have left out the parentheses and it would still have the same meaning.
Mr. Green: I wondered why the basic-oxygen process was not simply included
with the other methods already given in the specifications.
Chairman Cruse: The reason for that is that it was held aside. There is some
question in certain people's minds as to whether they want to go to it. If it were put
with the other methods without qualification, the purchaser would have to accept it
if the supplier wanted to use it.
Mr. Green: As I read the specifications, an individual railroad purchaser could
specify cither open-hearth steel or bessemer steel; is that right?
President Code: No. The manufacturer can offer either kind of steel, open hearth
or bessemer, where it is so stated without qualification; isn't that right, Mr. Cruse?
Excuse me for butting in.
F. R. WOOLFORD [Western Pacific! ; Mr. Cruse, in your committee's investigation
of the open-hearth process versus the basic-oxygen process, would you say the studies
you have made show that they are equal, or that the basic-oxygen process is superior?
Chairman- CRUSE: I wouldn't say it is superior. I would say they are equal. All of
the laboratory tests and field tests to date have shown that they are equal, but it is
too early to say that there is an} superior quality in steel produced by the basic-oxygen
process.
Mr. Woolford: Nothing would lie gained by going to the basic-oxygen process?
Chairman Cruse: Nut ;tt this time, from the users' point of view, but <>n the pari
of the manufacturers, probably yes.
692 Rail
Mr. Woolford: How about price?
CHAIRMAN Cruse: No. The price is the same. We would like to have a change,
however.
President Core: We have a motion on the floor. Is there any further discussion?
[The motion was put to a vote and was carried]
Assignment 3 — Rail Failure Statistics, Covering (a) All Failures:
(b) Transverse Fissures: (c) Performance of Control-Cooled Rail.
Chairman Cruse: The report on Assignment 3 will be presented by Subcommittee
Chairman D. T. Faries, chief engineer, Bessemer & Lake Erie Railroad, Greenville, Pa.
D. T. Faries: The report on Assignment 3 is printed beginning on page 508 of the
Bulletin 577. This report is submitted as information and is a technical service of the
Research Department of the Association of American Railroads. It was prepared by
Kurt Kannowski, metallurgical engineer, under the direction of G. M. Magee, director
of engineering research,
The report is based on information relative to service and detected rail failure
as submitted by 50 railroads covering all of their main track mileage, which constitutes
approximately 90 percent of the main-track mileage in the United States and Canada.
Included in the report are 4 charts and 10 tables which break down the information
into a number of areas, such as-
Total rail failures by years.
Failure rates in control-cooled rail.
Service and detected failures from transverse defects.
Accumulated failures by milL
Accumulated failures by rail section, including all types of failures except engine
burn fracture.
It is gratifying to note the reduction in rail failures that has occurred during the
last 12 or 14 years, which can be largely attributed to the introduction of the new rail
sections in 1947. The rate of failure of the old sections compared to the new sections is
shown on page 511 of the Bulletin and is quite significant.
Assignment 8 — Causes of Shelly Spots and Head Checks in Rail:
Methods for Their Prevention.
Chairman Cruse: The report of Subcommittee 8 will be given by C. F. Parvin,
engineer maintenance of way and structures, Pennsylvania, in the absence of Subcom-
mittee Chairman L. S. Crane, assistant chief mechanical officer, Southern.
C. F. Parvin [for Mr. Crane] : During the past year this investigation was prog-
ressed both by the Research Department, AAR, and the University of Illinois.
An account of the work conducted by the AAR research staff is included in our
report as Appendix 8-a. It gives the results of the latest inspection of service test
installations of heat-treated and alloy steel rail on various railroads. In this inspection
a significant difference in the performance of high-silicon-steel rail compared with
standard carbon-steel rail was observed — the former showing a greater resistance to
shelling. An additional installation consisting of rail made by the basic-oxygen process
was inspected and will be reported on next year.
The AAR research staff also conducted metallurgical and physical examinations
of rails flame-hardened by the Santa Fe Railway and the Union Pacific Railroad. Re-
ports describing the processes and presenting the test results have been prepared by
Kurt Kannowski of the AAR research staff. Copies of the reports may be obtained from
G. M. Magee, director of engineering research, AAR, 3140 S. Federal St., Chicago 16, 111.
Discussion 693
The investigation of shelly rail conducted at the University of Illinois by Professor
R. E. Cramer is presented in our printed report as Appendix 8-b. In it:
1. Rolling-load tests are reported of German abrasion-resistant rail.
2. Rolling-load tests are reported of ten specimens of basic-oxygen standard car-
bon-steel rails.
3. Rolling-load tests are reported of two specimens of basic-oxygen high-silicon
steel rails.
4. The writer recommends the use, when desired, of basic-oxygen steel, for rail-
road rails for all types of railway service, including continuous welded track.
5. Rolling-load tests are reported of two US-lb standard carbon steel rails.
6. Mechanical tests are reported of two Japanese induction-hardened 119-lb rails.
7. Rolling-load tests are reported on rails flame-hardened by the Santa Fc Rail-
way and others flame-hardened by a commercial firm for the Southern Pacific
Company.
8. One rolling-load test was made of a rail rolled in Germany from a continuous-
cast ingot produced in France.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Parvin.
Mr. Green: Mr. President, to return once more to my question; why is there a
difference in the specifications put out by the Track committee for tie plates and spikes,
in which the basic-oxygen process is not differentiated from the other methods, as it is
in the Rail committee specifications?
President Code: May I answer that, Mr. Cruse? The Track committee, I gather,
has no reservations whatever in regard to basic-oxygen steel, while the Rail committee,
with jurisdiction over rail and joint bars, which are somewhat more critical from a
quality standpoint than tie plates and spikes, felt that some reservations were necessary.
Chairman Cruse: This completes the report of Committee 4, Mr. President.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Cruse. As a member of your committee, and
well qualified to speak, I should and could say a lot of nice things about you and our
committee because you have very ably conducted its work during the past year. How-
ever, necessarily conserving time, I shall refrain from doing so.
However, I do want to take time to recognize one man who has made a great
contribution to the work of your committee over the years, and who, I understand,
will retire shortly from active service. I refer to Ralph E. Cramer, research associate
professor of engineering materials at the University of Illinois, who, since the fall of
1944, has directed the Cooperative Rails Investigation of the Rail committee and the
rail manufacturers at the University of Illinois, begun under the late Professor H. F.
Moore back in 1931.
Professor Cramer's work throughout the years has been most helpful in many
respects, and especially in connection with our investigation of failures in control-cooled
rail, and shelly spot studies, on both of which he has submitted reports again in the
current rep< it of the Rail committee.
I know I speak for the committee, and for the Association as a whole, when I say
thank you, Professor Cramer, and express the hope that you will have many years of
health and happiness in your retirement.
Mr. Cruse, your committee is now excused, with the thanks of the Association.
[Applause]
694 Continuous Welded Rail
President Code [continuing]: I should like to give you the attendance figures at
this convention: 254 railroad men, 134 non-railroad men present, totaling 388, as
compared to 648 a year ago.
Discussion of Continuous Welded Rail
[For report, see Bulletin 577, pages 449-496]
President Code: Gentlemen, the last of our committees to report to this meeting
is our Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail, the chairman of which for the
past year has been W. J. Jones, engineer maintenance of way and structures, system of
the Southern Pacific Company, at San Francisco, Calif. Mr. Jones, your committee has
an unusually comprehensive report this year, and we shall be pleased to hear it at this
time. You may proceed.
Chairman W. J. Jones: Mr. President, members and guests:
Your committee's reports on its six assignments are printed in Bulletin 577, Vol 64,
pages 449-496, inclusive.
Assignment 1 — Fabrication.
Chairman Jones: A. H. Galbraith, welding engineer, Santa Fe, is chairman of
Subcommittee 1. Mr. Galbraith, will you please stand and be recognized? Thank you,
sir.
The report on Assignment 1 is presented in three parts, all as information. Part 1
concerns the development of specifications for fabricating continuous welded rail. Your
committee is continuing its efforts to establish a set of recommended alinement and
finishing tolerances for continuous welded rail which are economically possible to attain
with presently used welding and finishing machinery, and using rail as rolled by the
mills under present finishing specifications.
Part 2 is a report on Investigation of Failures of Welded Rails, prepared by R. E.
Cramer, research associate professor, University of Illinois.
Part 3 of Assignment 1 is an interesting and informative monograph on The Future
for Fixed Commercial Continuous Welded Rail Plants, written for the committee by
Edward T. Myers, engineering editor, Modern Railroads. Mr. Myers will give a resume
of his study.
Edward T. Myers: Mr. President, members and guests:
Last year the Continuous Welded Rail committee became aware of an approaching
crisis. The fixed commercial welded rail plants were threatened with collapse. At that
time only three were operating.
Looking back several years to some of our past meetings, you may recall the hopes
in the minds of many of you for such plants. Here, railroads could obtain welded rail
in either large or small lots according to their needs. Small roads that could not afford
on-line plants could now obtain a few miles of continuous welded rail each year. It was
as if steel mills were rolling continuous rail.
Then suddenly all this was threatened. Plants were operating at deficits, and several
of them closed. Several plants that were projected failed to open. It was then that Mr.
Jones and his committee asked me to prepare the monograph which appears in Bulletin
577, beginning on page 460.
Why have these plants run into economic difficulties, and what are the solutions?
I will give you a few of the problems. You can refer to the monograph for the details,
Discussion 695
1. High switching and shipping costs. This one is caused by the railroads them
selves.
2. High cost of the permanent structures required for the welding equipment.
3. Growing real estate and property taxes which are placed on these plants.
4. Failure of railroads to schedule welding over the entire calendar year. Instead,
each railroad wants its welding done at the same time.
These are the basic problems, though there are many others.
In closing, I might say that if all railroads are to benefit from this service they
must develop inter-railroad cooperation, otherwise the fixed continuous rail welding
plants may fail to survive.
Assignment 2 — Laying.
Chairman Jones: M. S. Reid, assistant chief engineer — maintenance, Chicago &
North Western Railway, is chairman of Subcommittee 2. Mr. Reid will present his
report.
M. S. Reid: Mr. President, members and guests:
The report on Assignment 2 is contained on pages 464-47° of Bulletin 577. In
addition to the usual tabulation of continuous welded rail laid in various years, a separa-
tion has been made between new and secondhand and main track and side track for
continuous welded rail laid in 1962.
Mr. President, the Committee on Continuous Welded Rail, after having given the
matter considerable study and thought during the past year, has developed a definition
for continuous welded rail which it now submits for adoption and publication in the
Glossary of the Manual. The definition is as follows:
"Continuous welded rail — A number of rails welded together in lengths of 400 ft
or longer."
Mr. President, I move that the definition as read be adopted and included in the
Glossary of the Manual.
[The motion was duly seconded.]
President Code: Is there anyone who thinks that a rail 380 ft long is a continuous
welded rail and therefore should not be excluded?
S. H. Poure [C&0|: I have no particular quarrel with the proposed definition, but
it might be interesting to ask if the committee has considered denning rails less than
400 ft long, and giving them a name.
Mr. Reid: No, sir. This came up rather suddenly at a meeting. We found all of a
sudden that we had no definition of continuous welded rail, and thought we had better
do something about it.
After that I discussed with Mr. Magee what the Research Department considered
as continuou> welded rail. He gave me his opinion, on which our definition i^ based,
We did have one little problem that we looked into, and that was the reporting of
welded rail to the ICC, which, we found requires (hat any two rails welded together
must be reported as welded rail, hut it makes no reference to continuous welded rail.
Our definition is based on the fact that most of the continuous welded rail laid
today is restrained for five rail lengths at each end. Mr. Magee stated that their research
work has shown that this is sufficient fully to restrain the entire length oi the welded
rail. In other words, if live rail lengths on each end of a string, making a total of ten,
are fully restrained, then any rail lengths longer than the ten raUs would be full)
restrained as long as it had the same anchorage.
696 Continuous Welded Rail
The definition, therefore, is based on the ten rail lengths, rounding off at a figure
of 400 ft, as indicated in the definition, rather than just saying "ten rails." Ten rails
could be ten 38-ft or ten 39-ft rails.
Mr. Woolford: Mr. Reid, we know rails are rolled in approximately 39-ft lengths.
They may be an inch shorter or longer. Why wouldn't it be better to use 390 ft rather
than 400 ft for ten rails? Or couldn't you say "anything longer than ten 39-ft rails."
President Code: If you put ten 39-ft rails together, Frank, they wouldn't be
390 ft long.
Mr. Woolford: They wouldn't be 400 ft long, either.
President Code: Then, if I understand the proposal correctly, if this goes into
effect and you lay, say, 300 ft of welded rail through a station platform or through
a series of crossings, it would not be reported as continuous welded rail to the AREA?
Mr. Reid: That's right.
[The motion was put to a vote and was carried.]
Mr. Reid: Subcommittee 2 was very fortunate this year in having R. A. Stane,
construction engineer, Coast Lines, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, prepare a
report on laying track using continuous welded rail in 1440-ft strings. This report is
printed in the Bulletin on pages 465 through 479.
Mr. Stane is with us today, and will show the moving pictures taken during the
laying of the continuous welded rail. Mr. Stane.
R. A. Stane: The film we are about to show depicts the procedure of track laying
described in Bulletin 577, beginning on page 465.
[The film was then shown, with commentary by Mr. Stane, after which Mr. Stane
was questioned, as follows:]
C. S. Morton [Burlington]: Were the tie plates applied at the tie treating plant?
If so, were they applied before the ties were treated, or did they wait until afterwards?
Mr. Stane: Sir, these were second-hand ties salvaged from the Williams line change.
Mr. Morton: Haven't you people been plating ties at the treating plant?
Mr. Stane: Yes, we have. Our new ties are plated, and we use the Racor stud to
hold the plate down. It works out very satisfactorily.
E. R. Englert [Louisville & Nashville] : Just as a resume, how long was this job,
and how much did you shorten the trackage. How many maintenance dollars are you
saving?
Mr. Stane: The new main line is 38 miles in length. The track was shortened 14
miles. The summit was lowered approximately 1100 ft. As I said, we reduced our
curvature from a maximum of 12 deg to 2 deg, our grades from 3 percent to 1 percent.
I am sorry I don't have the answer to your other question.
Mr. Woolford: Mr. Stane, do you have any trouble in the line of your track, in
laying welded rail around curves on the pre-plated ties?
Mr. Stane: No; surprisingly, we do not. We anticipated this problem because of
possible wide gage around the curves, but for some reason we haven't found too much
wide gage. In the maintenance of the track through the years it seems to have all been
brought to standard gage, that is, without any widening for curves, and as a conse-
quence the rail laid in good line.
President Code: Any other questions? Thank you, Mr. Stane, for a very inter-
esting presentation.
Chairman Jones: Thank you, Mr. President. I would like to add the appreciation
of the committee to Mr. Stane for his very excellent report. The degree of attention
and the nature of the questions submitted by the audience attests to the interest and
Discussion 697
appreciation with which this presentation was received. We are most happy to have
had the opportunity to have included this in our part of the program.
Assignment 3 — Fastenings.
Chairman Junes: Assignment 3— Fastenings, is under the direction of C. W. Wag-
ner, engineer of tests — system, Canadian National Railways. As Mr. Wagner was unable
to join us today, I shall make his report.
Having given consideration to comments and criticisms regarding the AREA rec-
ommendation for the number and position of rail anchors on continuous welded rail,
adopted at the 1961 convention, your committee submits the following revision with
the recommendation that it be adopted and published in the Manual, replacing the
present document on page 5-5-4.2.
Rail Creepage — Number and Position of Rail Anchors (Continuous Welded Rail):
"Effective anchorage for continuous welded rail must provide restraint for tem-
perature stresses and creepage stresses due to train movement. For main tracks carrying
one- or two-direction traffic, it is considered that the anchorage of each rail at alternate
ties to restrain its movement in either direction throughout the length of the continuous
rail will provide effective anchorage. Other methods of providing anchorage have also
given satisfactory results.
"Through buffer rails, turnouts, or other special trackwork adjoining continuous
welded rail, the rails should be anchored at alternate ties against movement in either
direction.
"Sufficient anchorage should be provided on the conventional rail adjoining con-
tinuous welded rail to prevent creepage of the conventional rail."
Mr. President, I move that the proposed revision be adopted and published in the
Manual, replacing the present document on page 5-5-4.2.
[The motion was duly seconded.]
Mr. Woolford: Mr. Jones, we have heard Mr. Reid's statement that five rails on
each end of a stretch of continuous welded rail have to be restrained, and I think
Mr. Magee's studies will show that to accomplish this, every tie needs to be boxed
for the five rails on each end. How can the committee come up with a recommendation
to box only every other tie, when the laboratory has shown we need to box every tie
on the five rail lengths at each end?
Chairman Jones: Mr. President, I think the explanation of that is found in the
wording of the proposed revision, in that in box-anchoring alternate ties you are secur-
ing the rail against movement as the rail elongates. We all are aware of the need for
applying back-up anchors on the end rails of the string. Ordinarily that isn't going to
present much of a problem.
Your committee recognizes the fact that many railroads are using a lesser or
greater number of rail anchors, and possibly positioning them differently from herein
recommended. This proposed revision acknowledges that "other methods of providing
anchorage have also given satisfactory results".
Your committee feels that each railroad might best determine for itself through
experience the correct number and proper placement of anchors necessary to secure
the rail against movement. Controlling factors which cause the rail to move or affect
its movement vary from road to road. As a matter of fact, these conditions usually
vary within an individual property, and obviously they differ between roads.
What your committee proposes as recommended practice is considered adequate
anchorage for practically all cases.
698 Continuous Welded Rail
Mr. WooiioRD: Mr. Jones, isn't it a fact that we have had a number of pull-
aparts, and the pull-aparts have been more frequent when the track is anchored other
than having the five rails on each end box anchored at every tie?
Chairman Jones: That is correct.
Mr. Woolford: Why would you recommend reducing the anchorage when it has
been shown that we need the extra anchorage to eliminate pull-aparts?
Chairman Jones: We propose here a practice which would serve as a basis to be
followed or modified according to the local conditions controlling.
Mr. Woolford: Does your recommendation apply to any length of rail? — when
long strings of welded rail are welded together in the field?
Chairman Jones: Yes, sir. I think that was explained when Mr. Reid gave the
reason for our definition of continuous welded rail that the unequalized stresses occur
in the last five rails of each long string of rail, regardless of the length of that rail
after it is longer than 400 ft.
Mr. Woolford: Are you going to recommend installing anything at the ends of
these long rails, such as expansion frog assemblies or buffer rails.
D. T. Faries [B&LE]: May I speak on this? I might say I was chairman of the
subcommittee when the new recommendation for anchoring welded rail was made. We
studied various methods of anchorage, and it was apparent that there was no need to
box-anchor or put additional anchors at the end of the rail in the case of hot weather
when the rail was expanding, because the rails were expanding against each other. Con-
sequently, we removed one-half of the box anchors at the five-rail string at the end,
which was originally recommended to be fully box anchored.
Further with respect to the ends of the strings, in cold weather, when the rail is
contracting, the ties become frozen in the ballast and since the anchorage is dependent
entirely upon the resistance of the tie and ballast, greater resistance occurs. With the
greater resistance we considered that, in the wintertime when the rails were contracting,
the additional anchorage was not needed at the ends.
On our road we have anchored rail in this manner. I have had four years' experi-
ence with it now, and have had no serious problems. We have had breaks in our
welded rail, some of them occurring at joints and some of them occurring in the weld
itself. In all cases the pull-apart did not exceed \}/z in.
When you consider strings of welded rail that may be in 1440-ft lengths and taking
up anywhere from 1 to 10 miles of track, the whole piece of track becomes one con-
tinuous string, assuming that the joints are tight and will be kept tight. We do have
movement of the joints, and I don't see how we can get away from it; but we have
found that the recommended method of anchorage is quite adequate.
I might also say that we feel we have hit upon a pretty good mean in the anchor-
age, because in all of the discussion we have had, about half have said it is too much
and about half have said it is too little. So, I think it is about right.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Faries. Are there any other questions? I believe
we have a motion before us.
B. R. Meyers [C&NW] : Is there any consideration of adding to the recommenda-
tion some statement such as "Additional back-up anchors may be required, depending
on local conditions", or something like that?
Chairman Jones: Mr. Meyers, the proposed revision of the recommended practice
is complete as it is presented. Your committee has carefully reviewed these other aspects
brought out in the discussion, but it is not the intention of the committee to change
the recommendation as herein presented.
Discussion 699
Mr. Meyers: Sometimes — and I presume your committee gave full consideration
to this — you put a recommendation like that in the Manual, and sometimes manage-
ment reads those things and, pointing to a particular location, they say, "Why do you
need these extra anchors at the end?" when maybe local conditions will require them.
That is my point.
Chairman Jones: I have no further thought other than to repeat what I said
earlier — that you can find opinions ranging from one end of the scale to the other.
Even in the committee it is apparent, from the expressions of the members, that despite
the known fact that certain stretches of rail have under test been relieved of over
half of the anchors and still have not caused any trouble, exponents of the other theory
— that of trying to hold the rail by the sheer weight of the anchors alone — will still
require more anchors than experience might show to be adequate.
I would say that we have had experience with continuous welded rail long enough
for it to have lost some of its mystery. We don't adhere to the belief that you can lay
continuous welded rail and ignore it after it is laid. We do believe, though, that the
proposed recommendation will take care of practically all the conditions to be encoun-
tered. We would suggest that the maintenance engineer who is laying welded rail on
his property for the first time give careful attention to the behavior of that welded rail,
to satisfy himself as to just exactly what is needed on his property.
President Code: I think we have kicked this subject around pretty thoroughly.
Maybe we had better take a vote. Are you ready for the question?
[The motion was put to a vote and was carried.]
Assignment 4 — Maintenance.
Chairman Jones: C. R. Merriman, engineer maintenance of way and srtuctures,
Chicago South Shore & South Bend Railroad, is chairman of Subcommittee 4, whose
assignment is Maintenance. Mr. Merriman was here earlier but was called away from
Chicago. However, we shall give recognition to Mr. Merriman by thanking him for the
work of his committee.
The report submitted as information by Subcommittee 4 was developed from
returns of questionnaires on the practices used in timbering and surfacing in con-
junction with the laying of continuous welded rail.
Information gathered for the report, although varying from read to road, shows
a trend toward a general practice that is being followed by most roads in timbering
and surfacing welded rail. This practice is to do most of the work ahead of the rail
laying, including timbering, surfacing, lining, Oiling cribs and widening the ballast
section, with only touch-up work performed after laying.
Assignment 5 — Economics.
Chairman- Junks: T. C. Shedd, editor, Modern Railroads, is chairman of Subcom-
mittee 5. Mr. Shedd, please stand to be recognized. Mr. Shedd's report will be found
in Bulletin 577, page 481.
That the railroads are benefiting from welded rail is shown by its rapidly growing
use. However, the exact extent of the benefits is not always clear. With this in mind.
Subcommittee 5 was instructed to gather as much detailed information as possible on
the maintenance cost of continuous welded rail.
To accomplish this, the subcommittee prepared a questionnaire with items as listed
in the report. The questionnaire was senl to 80 railroads known or believed likelj in
have continuous welded rail in service. Replies were received from 48. Only a handful
of the railroads which answered had kept detailed records of comparative stretches "'
null. 570
700 Continuous Welded Rail
welded and jointed track. However, 7 railroads which did report in some detail are
maintaining welded track with anywhere from 3 to 59 percent fewer man-hours than
required for similar jointed track. Commonly, the savings seem to run about 20 to 30
percent. It is also apparent that railroads having welded rail are using less track material
(except anchors) in maintaining welded rail than is required in comparable jointed track.
Questionnaire comments confirm that welded track requires less spot surfacing,
lining and tie renewals. Bolt tightening, joint bar and bond replacements are greatly
reduced. The problems stemming from rail end batter are minimized. More attention
to anchors is required, however.
A number of railroads commented on the expected life of welded rail in track and
the anticipated time cycle for out-of-face surfacing. One railroad predicts a 40 to SO
percent increase in the surfacing time cycle ; it expects rail life in the first position laid
to be increased by 50 percent on the average, with a 100 percent increase on tangent
track.
It should be noted that, in most cases, these predictions of rail life and surfacing
cycle can be only informed estimates at this time, due to the relatively short time
welded rail has been in service.
However, the Delaware & Hudson, which has had welded rail in track since the
1930s, states: "We have found that in the welded rail installations which we have,
the life of the rail is at least twice that of rail in jointed track . . . Out-of-face sur-
facing is not required as frequently ... It is our opinion that continuous welded rail
will go twice as long between out-of-face surfacings as jointed track."
The subcommittee plans to conduct a similar survey on rail welding costs, com-
pared with the cost of conventional joint assemblies, during 1963.
Assignment 6 — Welding Second-hand Rail.
Chairman Jones: J. F. Beaver, chief engineer, Southern Railway System, is chair-
man of Subcommittee 6 — Welding Second-Hand Rail. Unfortunately Mr. Beaver could
not be here. His report, appearing on page 483 of the Bulletin, is recommended reading
for everyone interested in the ways that additional economies might be accrued through
welding second-hand rail.
Our final report is a monograph entitled, "Continuous Welded Rail in Europe."
This report was prepared by R. E. Dove, associate editor, Railway Track and Struc-
tures. Mr. Dove will now comment briefly on his report.
R. E. Dove: Several articles appeared in Railway Track & Structures magazine
relating railroad practices in Europe. These articles were written by M. H. Dick, vice
president and editor of the magazine, after he attended an international railway-
equipment exhibition in Frankfort au Main, Germany, in March 1962. Following this,
he spent several weeks in Germany, France and England, observing track practices in
those countries.
Noting that the magazine articles contained a large amount of interesting infor-
mation on welded-rail practices, your committee felt that the information specifically
relating to welded rail should be culled out of the articles and presented as information
by the CWR committee. Since I am a member of this committee, I was asked to pre-
pare this monograph, in collaboration with Mr. Dick, so as to keep the assignment
within the membership of the committee.
This monograph is shown in Bulletin 577 starting on page 483. I recommend the
reading of it to anyone interested in welded rail, not because I am the author, but
because it contains more welded-rail information than was published in the magazine
articles.
Closing Business Session 701
Chairman Jones: Thank you, Mr. Dove, for a most comprehensive story on Con-
tinuous Welded Rail in Europe.
At this time I should like to digress from the presentation by our committee. As
every committee has occasion to do, they look over the list of men on their committee
who have done outstanding work. The Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail
has been aware for some time that one of its members has been completely dedicated
to his responsibilities as a member of the Committee, and his dedication has served
as an emulation to the rest of us on the committee.
We investigated the requirements of nominating this man as a Member Emeritus
of our committee. Unfortunately, the Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail was
created only a relatively short number of years ago, and the gentleman who was under
subject review retired from active service before he could comply with the required
minimum number of years as an acting member on that committee.
So, as chairman of the Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail, I am taking
this opportunity to announce that we on the committee feel that T. A. Blair, retired
chief engineer — system, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, has in our mind met all
of the other prerequisites for such an honor on our committee. In the event that this
appears to be a little irregular, you can blame it on the affection which we all have
for Mr. Blair.
Mr. President, at this time I would like to report a change in committee organ-
ization. Last December D. T. Fanes resigned from our committee. His vacancy as vice
chairman has been filled by M. S. Reid, assistant chief engineer — maintenance, Chicago
& North Western Railroad.
Mr. President, this concludes our presentation.
President Code: Thank you, Mr. Jones. You have put renewed life into your
committee during the past year, which is clearly evident in your committee's report,
and in the three interesting, timely and informative monographs forming a part of
that report.
I commend this idea of monographs — which has been neglected to a large extent
in recent years — to others of our committees, where circumstances best lend themselves
to such presentations — and I am sure there are often such circumstances.
Mr. Jones, your committee has closed our technical sessions on a high note, and
we now excuse you with the thanks of the Association. [Applause]
Closing Business Session
President Code: Gentlemen, there yet remains our closing business session, the
highlight of which will be the installation of your newly elected officers as announced
at our luncheon yesterday. This will not be a long session, and I hope that many of
you will remain.
Before convening the business session, however, I want to take this opportunity
to thank you for the high honor you conferred upon me in my election as your presi-
dent. Truly, this has been a rich and rewarding experience for me, and to the extent
that I may have served the Association acceptably, I am proud and pleased.
And I want to take this opportunity, too, to thank our membership generally for
its support during the past year, and especially the members of our Board of Direction
and all committee chairmen for their support and cooperation. Statistically, tin's may
not have been the biggest year in the history of our Association, but I am satisfied
that it has been another productive one. Certainly this is not the largest annual
convention we have ever had, and it may be the smallest in attendance; hut here, too,
I am satisfied that to hold it as we have was the thing to do. and that with more
702 Closing Business Session
time !<>r reports and discussion it fully accomplished its purposes of keeping our com-
mittee work and publications on schedule, of further updating our Manual of Recom-
mended Practice, and in enabling me to turn over, on schedule, my duties as your
president to your newly elected president. These are all most important.
Having already accomplished the first two of these things on schedule, I now call
to order the closing business session of this convention in order to consummate the last
mentioned.
Is there any other business to come before this meeting?
R. H. Beeder [Santa Fe] : President Code, ladies and gentlemen:
President Code, when you and I were side-stepping around on this platform last
year I know that I had no idea that you would have such an eventful year and one
that was filled with so many extracurricular activities and duties. I suspect that perhaps
you did not realize the extent of those extra duties but you performed them in a
perfectly splendid fashion.
One of them included the planning and direction of AREA participation in the
Annual Meeting and Transportation Engineering Conference with the American Society
of Civil Engineers last October in Detroit. This happens once in a lifetime.
Another extra duty was the planning and organizing of many of the details in
connection with AREA participation in the all-out show of railroad strength which
will be called the "American Railway Progress Exposition", to take place between
October 9 and October 16, this year, in Chicago at McCormick Place.
And last, and more importantly, your fine leadership in compressing into the past
\l/2 days the business of this Association during this meeting. This job has been a trial
for many of us to accomplish in 2l/2 days.
I do not want to give you any momentum in your move to join the Past Presi-
dents' Club but I do want to give you a memento on behalf of the membership of our
Association.
This memento, in recognition of your accomplishments as president of this Asso-
ciation, is a plaque which reads as follows:
THE AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING ASSOCIATION
RECORDS ITS GRATEFUL APPRECIATION TO
CHARLES JOSEPH CODE
FOR HIS ABLE ADMINISTRATION OF THE AFFAIRS
OF THE ASSOCIATION DURING HIS TERM
AS PRESIDENT
1962-1963
Mr. President, I now hand you this plaque.
President Code: Mr. Beeder, it was a privilege and an honor to follow in your
footsteps as president of this Association. It is a further fulfillment of that honor to
accept from you this beautifully engraved plaque, which I assure you will occupy a
place of honor among my choicest possessions. Thank you, and thanks to the Association
for this additional memento of my term of office.
Now I would like to thank again each member of the Board of Direction for his
counsel, advice and support during my term as President — and especially those members
who are retiring from the Board, having completed their terms of office.
These include Past President Brown, chief engineer, Burlington Lines, who leaves
the Board under the provision of the Constitution that past presidents remain on the
Board for only two years following the completion of their term of office as president.
The others leaving the Board, having completed their three-year terms as directors,
are: C. J. Henry, chief engineer, Pennsylvania Railroad; J. M. Trissal, vice president
Closing Business Session 703
and chief engineer, Illinois Central Railroad; W. B. Throckmorton, chief engineer,
Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific Railroad; and J. A. Bunjer, chief engineer, Union Pacific
Railroad. All of these men have served your Association well in their official capacities
on the Board, and their sound judgment and counsel will be missed at future meetings.
To the extent that Past President Brown and these four retiring directors are
present in the room, I shall be pleased if they will stand and permit us to show them
our appreciation. [Applause]
It is now my pleasure and privilege to install the new directors and officers whom
you have elected for the ensuing year, as announced at our luncheon yesterday. As I
call the names of our new directors, I shall appreciate their coming to the speaker's
table and taking places on my right.
A. L. Sams, assistant chief engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago. [Applause]
J. F. Beaver, chief engineer, Southern Railway System, Washington, D. C.
[Applause]
V. C. Hanna, chief engineer, Terminal Railroad Association of St. Louis, St. Louis,
Mo. [Applause]
H. M. Williamson, chief engineer system, Southern Pacific Company, San Francisco,
Calif. [Applause]
[Messrs. Beaver and Hanna were not present]
Gentlemen, I congratulate you upon your election as directors of this Association,
and welcome you to the Board of Direction. It is an office of high honor which you
assume, and at the same time one of large responsibility ; but I know you merit the
honor, and that you will live up to your responsibility.
Furthermore, I know that you will enjoy your service on the Board for the next
three years, and that you will bring much of value to its deliberations. Again, my
congratulations. You may be seated.
Our new senior vice president is T. F. Burris, general manager construction and
maintenance of way, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway and Baltimore & Ohio Railroad, at
Huntington, W. Va., who, under the Constitution, has automatically advanced to this
position from that of junior vice president. Mr. Burris unfortunately is not present.
For your new junior vice president you have elected A. V. Johnston, chief engineer,
Canadian National Railways, who returns to the Board of Direction following a three-
year term which ended with our 1960 convention. Mr. Johnston, I shall be pleased
if you will come to the platform and stand here beside me.
Mr. Johnston, I congratulate you upon your election as junior vice president and
welcome you back on the Board, not only in your own right but because, through you,
we give recognition to our many valued members on the railroads in Canada. You may
be seated. [Applause]
For your president you have elected L. A. Loggins, chief engineer. Southern Pacific
Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines, at Houston, Tex. To accord Mr. Loggins the special
recognition due him, I have asked Past Presidents Ray McBrian and B. R. Meyers to
escort him to the platform, and I should appreciate their doing so at this time.
[Applause]
Mr. Loggins, my congratulations to you upon your further advancement to the
highest position in this Association. It is an honor which you well deserve, and it is
with the greatest of pleasure that I now proclaim you president of the American Rail
way Engineering Association. Even though not provided lor in our Constitution, your
election makes Mrs. Loggins the "first lady" in our Association, and we welcome her
as such. [Applause]
704 Closing Business Session
Unfortunately, I haven't anything to give to Mrs. Loggins, but I do have here and
want to give to you this solid gold emblem of the Association, which bears the engraved
words on the back, "L. A. Loggins, President, 1963—1964". I know you will wear this
emblem with credit to the Association and distinction to yourself. [Applause]
[Mr. Loggins assumed the presidency.]
President Loggins: Thank you, Mr. Cede. I am proud of this emblem, and I hope
to wear it with credit and honor to this Association.
Mr. Code, you have given the American Railway Engineering Association an excel-
lent administration, one of which you should be justly proud. We hope to continue its
activities with that same thoroughness and efficiency.
I feel deeply the honor bestowed upon me here today. I am fully aware of the
responsibility that comes with being elected President of this Association during the year
of the American Railway Progress Exposition, a year when the accent is on progress,
as it should be. But I have no misgivings. I am blessed with outstanding vice presidents,
Mr. Burris and Mr. Johnston, a superb executive secretary in Neal Howard with his
efficient staff, a fine Board of Direction, strong committee chairmen, vice chairmen and
subcommittee chairmen, and, I feel, the full support of our membership.
I know that I can count on the continued support and cooperation of Gerald
Magee and his research group, and the wise counsel and advice of you past presidents
will be invaluable.
I would be amiss to not recognize another important source of support and strong
influence represented here today by a group of ladies, including my wife, Pauline. I refer
to the wives of AREA. With all of this support and cooperation, let me say that I
believe we can start the American Railway Progress Exposition year with optimism
and enthusiasm.
You may not know it, but the very first meeting on the first day of the Exposi-
tion— the kick-off, so to speak — will feature a joint session of AREA, as the Engineering
Division of AAR, with the Communication and Signal Section. Immediately following
that joint opening session, AREA will present a full day of special features and
addresses. That gives AREA an opportunity to present its programs to the entire rail-
road industry. I urge the fullest possible membership attendance and participation in
those activities.
In March 1964 we will return to our regular 2^-day annual meeting pattern.
Again I want to urge the fullest possible membership attendance and participation.
I know that our committees will continue their fine work and prepare their usual
or even better reports for that occasion ; in fact, I am calling upon them for that extra
effort, because those reports will reflect the ideas and work of those who have accepted
the privileges and the obligations of committee membership. They are workers. They are
the backbone of our Association.
In scheduling the American Railway Progress Exposition for October 1963, and our
return to our regular 2^-day annual meeting pattern in March 1964, we are presented
with an excellent opportunity to encourage interest and to acquaint young railroad
engineers with the benefits of membership in this Association. We must do just that,
and we plan to give this special attention and preferred handling in programming our
work for the coming year.
Let me say to all of you that I pledge to work with my utmost ability as your
president, and with your continued cooperation and assistance I look forward to a
successful year of progress and achievement, in keeping with the fine traditions of this
Association.
Closing Business Session 70S
Thank you for the trust you have placed in me. [Applause]
At this time I would like to recognize one man who flew here from Houston, Tex.
to attend this installation — a man under whom I work and to whom I report directly.
Mr. Sines, will you stand and be recognized? Mr. Sines is vice president of the Southern
Pacific Company, Houston. He is a civil engineer by education and training, and has
been a member of AREA for many years. It has been my privilege and pleasure to
work under him for the last 11 years.
I certainly appreciate his coming here for this meeting that has meant so much
to me. I might say that it is certainly with his permission, cooperation and understand-
ing that I have been able to work in AREA and participate in its activities, and to
advance to the position I hold here today. Thank you, Mr. Sines. [Applause]
H. M. Williamson [Southern Pacific]: Mr. President, may I have the floor for a
moment ?
President Loggins, Mr. Code, members of the American Railway Engineering
Association, ladies, guests and friends:
One of the top people on our railroad told me once that any railroad should be
organized in such a way that it can do only one job at any one time. It is when we
try to do two or more things at the same time that we get into trouble. I think it was
something like that in this case, because his many friends on the Southern Pacific,
extending from Portland to New Orleans, wanted to present President Loggins with a
suitable gavel for his forthcoming year in office, so we got two gavels, not one.
[Laughter]
I think it is somewhat symbolic that we have two gavels, because they represent
the double appreciation and affection with which we hold you, Lee. If you will accept
our overabundance of appreciation we would like to show it to you in this way.
I would like to say a word about these gavels. These gavels were formed out of an
ebony wood found in the Rio Grande Valley. Mr. Loggins was the head chainman in
1925, and hewed his way through this territory, staking out the T&NO Railroad down
there, and he can well attest to the durability and toughness of these gavels. I am sure
he can use them to very good advantage in the year to come.
Congratulations, Lee. [Applause]
President Loggins: Thank you, Mr. Williamson. Instead of a two-gun Texan, it
looks like I will be a two-gavel Texan. Of course, as you all know, they will mean
a great deal more to me because the people I have worked with for years put a
lot of thought and work into them. Ebony has always been one of my favorite pieces
of wood, in spite of the fact that I had some pretty rough experiences with it on my
first job. I certainly appreciate this.
Is there any further business to come before this meeting before we bring it to a
close? I believe there is one announcement to make. Immediately following the close
of this meeting there will be a joint luncheon of the Hoard of Direction, including the
retiring and the new members of the Board, with the Arrangements Committee. It will
be in Dining Room 1. Imniediatch following thai joint session there will he ;i meeting
of the Board of Direction.
If there is no further business to come before this meeting, I now declare the 62nd
Business Meeting of the American Railway Engineering Association, and concurrent
meeting of the Engineering Division, Association of American Railroads, adjourned.
[The meeting adjourned sine die at 12:20 pm )
Report of the Executive Secretary
March 1, 1963
To the Members:
In all aspects, except one, the state of your Association at the close of another
year — its 64th year — is good. But having said this, it would be less than honest not to
say that, with better economic conditions generally, and especially in the railroad indus-
try, things could be better. The one exception, and it is an important one, is Association
membership, which is down appreciably for the second successive year. This will be
detailed later in this report. Again the Association functioned as the Engineering Divi-
sion of the Association of American Railroads, and again it filled all demands made
on it as such, with credit to both organizations.
That the Association had a good year generally in 1962 is documented in the
following details of this report. Membership, although down, remains relatively high;
the activities and production of committees, even without the desired financial support
for research activities, continued at a high level; its service to members was in no way
reduced, and its cooperation with other groups and with the colleges was actually ex-
tended; and even though the Association had a deficit year financially to achieve cer-
tain desirable ends, its total assets are high and it remains in a sound financial condi-
tion. Most important, as the year ended, the interest of the membership remained high,
the Association was looking forward to two important meetings in 1963, and your
Board of Direction had already approved plans for full-scale conventions in 1964 and
1965 — the latter to be accompanied by an exhibit.
Noteworthy among the many special activities and accomplishments of committees
and the Association during the year were the completion of the review and updating
of the Manual of Recommended Practice by committees and the reprinting of the Man-
ual as a whole; the issuance of the large 1962 Supplement to the Portfolio of Track-
work Plans, which included the new standard plans for Nos. 6, 8, 10, IS and 20 turn-
outs adopted at the 1962 convention; the official participation of the Association in
the 1962 Transportation Engineering Conference of the American Society of Civil Engi-
neers, at Detroit, Mich., October 8-12, for which it developed and put on a full-day
program on railroading, on October 9; the substantial beginning of a program, sponsored
by Committee 24 — Cooperative Relations With Universities, to put more railroad speak-
ers on college campuses; the appointment of an official program committee to cooper-
ate with committees in developing the strongest and most informative programs possible
for the membership meetings of the Association immediately ahead; and the amend-
ment of the Constitution which will permit Association annual conventions in any
month of the year, including March as in the past, by a two-thirds affirmative vote of
the entire membership of the Board of Direction, to meet any special conditions which
may exist or arise.
The 1962 Convention
Under a general convention pattern adopted by the Board of Direction in 1961,
which called for 2j4-day, full-program conventions every second year, and 1^-day,
restricted-scope conventions in alternate years, beginning in 1962, the 1962 convention
of the Association was a far cry from the 2J^-day convention in 1961, held at Mc-
Cormick Place, Chicago, in conjunction with an exhibit of the National Railway Appli-
ances Association. True, it closed out officially the work of the previous year in an effec-
tive manner, held down expenses and off-the-job time, and was a source of information,
706
Report of Executive Secretary 707
COMMITTEES OF THE BOARD OF DIRECTION
1962-1963
Executive Committee
C. J. Code (Chairman). L. A. Loggins, R. H. Boeder, E. J. Brown, T. F. Burris
Assignments
C. J. Henry (Chairman), J. A. Bunjer, J. M. Trissal, L. A. Loggins, T. F. Burris
Personnel
J. E. Eisemann (Chairman), C. J. Henry, T. F. Burris, J. H. Brown, John Ayer, Jr.
Publications
W. B. Throckmorton (Chairman), J. E. Eisemann, J. H. Brown, C. E. Defendorf,
W. L. Young.
Manual
L. A. Loggins (Chairman), \V. H. Huffman, F. R. Smith, T. B. Hutcheson, John
Ayer, Jr.
Membership
\V. H. Huffman (Chairman), J. A. Bunjer, F. R. Smith, C. E. Defendorf, T. B.
Hutcheson
Finance
J. M. Trissal (Chairman), R. H. Beeder, E. J. Brown, W. H. Huffman, W. B. Throck-
morton
Research
R. H. Beeder (Chairman), Ray McBrian, W. J. Cruse, W. L. Young
inspiration and pleasure to those who attended, but it left much to be desired from
the standpoint of the membership as a whole and, unquestionably, failed to give the
normal impetus to the work of the year ahead.
The convention was held at the Conrad Hilton Hotel, Chicago, on Friday and
Saturday, March 9 and 10 — adjourning at noon on the 10th — and its sessions were
interrupted only by the Annual Association Luncheon at noon on the 9th. In spite of
the fact that official invitations were extended alone to the officers and directors of the
Association, and to committee chairmen, vice chairmen, secretaries and subcommittee
chairmen — a total of approximately two hundred and fifty — 348 railroad men actually
registered their attendance for all or part of the program, along with 300 non-railroaders
(largely railroad supply men), upon whose attendance there was no restriction — a total
of 648. And of this total group, 572 participated in the Annual Luncheon. Supple-
menting the men, the wives of 80 railroad and non-railroad nun registered their at-
tendance at the women's headquarters. While these attendance figures wen- larger than
expected, sincerely missed were the familiar faces of many who had regularly attended
previous conventions, who did not feel at liberty to attend in 1962 under the circum-
stances, or for other reasons.
Programwise, the meeting was an intensive one, it being necessary to hear the
reports of the Association's 22 committees on 102 of their assignments in three sessions,
instead of the usual five. To make this possible, all presentations were streamlined, dis-
708 Report of Executive Secretary
cussion was severely restricted by the members themselves and, with considerable loss
of interest and valuable information, the number of special feature presentations in the
form of addresses, papers, panel discussions, etc., was restricted to 7, compared with a
total of 18 to 23 in recent years. However, within the time available, the business of
the Association was effectively transacted, much new and of value was presented, and
constant interest was sustained. Outstanding among the accomplishments of the meeting
was action by the Association on the recommendations of committees affecting a total
of 359 specifications, recommended practices and plans in the Association's Manual and
Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
Effective as was the 1962 convention in officially closing out the Association year
and in acting upon committee recommendations, its restricted nature with respect to
time, program, and number of participants was not considered conducive to the most
effective work of the Association or to the welfare of the Association as such, nor in
the interest of the membership generally. This feeling gave early rise to reconsideration
by the Board of Direction of the convention pattern referred to at the outset of this
report on the 1962 convention, with resulting changes which are reflected in plans
which have been made for subsequent conventions of the Association through 1965,
as set forth at the end of this report as a whole.
MEMBERSHIP
The one exception to continued well being of the Association in 1962, as mentioned
at the outset of this report, is that of number of members. For several years your secre-
tary has expressed concern for the future growth of the Association — even sustaining
the current membership level. Now there is confirmation that that concern was justified.
After an unbroken record of growth in membership from 1944 through 1957, the mem-
bership has slipped backward in three of the last five years — 1958, 1961, and 1962 —
and might have slipped backward in the other two years had losses in these two years
not been overcome by special circumstances or by special recruiting effort on the part
of a number of railroads.
As of February 1, 1963, the total membership of the Association stood at 3261,
a net loss of 86 members compared with the membership of 3347 one year earlier, and
a net loss of 146 from the membership of 3407 two years earlier. This net loss of 86
during the past year resulted from the enrollment of only 153 new members, compared
with 161 in 1961 (and with 198 in 1960) ; the reinstatement of 36 former members —
6 more than in 1961; and a decrease of 12 Junior Members — compared with a decrease
of 2 in 1961 ; in combination with a loss of 263 members through deaths, resignations
and being dropped for non-payment of dues — compared with a total of 249 in these
later categories in 1961 (and only 180 in 1960).
Student Affiliates
Not included in the foregoing membership figures are the Student Affiliates which
the Association began to enroll late in I960 on college campuses, a relationship which
was explained in the secretary's report for that year. Suffice it to say here that as of
February 1, 1963, the Association had 40 Student Affiliates on 22 different campuses,
compared with 47 on 20 campuses one year earlier, and 42 on 19 campuses two years
earlier.
In this group there has been and will continue to be a large turnover as new under-
graduates become interested in affiliation with the Association and as upperclassmen
and graduate students complete their studies.
Report of Executive Secretary 709
Continuing effort will be made on the part of the secretary's office to keep in touch
with the larger engineering campuses of the United States and Canada, to keep them
apprised of this type of Association affiliation, but the success of this effort would be
greatly enhanced if every railroad speaker in talking to college groups would apprise
interested students of this valuable, low-cost connection which they can have with the
Association.
Many Members Lost Through Death
During the year ended February 1, 1963, there were a total of 49 deaths among
the membership, as indicated in the roster of deceased members at the end of this report.
This was substantially more than the 31 members lost through death in the previous
year.
Unhappily, this list of deceased includes one of the Honorary Members of the Asso-
ciation— Ralph Budd, retired president of the Burlington Lines; Past President George
J. Ray (1924-1925), retired vice president, operations, of the Delaware, Lackawanna &
Western Railroad; and a past director of the Association — Clark Hungerford (1950-
1952), chairman of the board of the St. Louis-San Francisco Railway. Unhappily, too,
the list contains the names of many who contributed much to the work of the Asso-
ciation, including four past committee chairmen — Maro Johnson, chairman of Commit-
tee 9 — Highways, 1922-1924; C. M. McVay, chairman of Committee 1 — Roadway and
Ballast, 1923-1926; G. B. Campbell, chairman of Committee 17— Wood Preservation,
1949-1951 ; and E. A. McLeod, chairman of Committee 8— Masonry, 1958-1960.
Must Maintain High Membership Level
The maintenance of a high level of membership is essential from the standpoint
of both the total contribution which the Association can make to the railroads and to
railroad engineers individually, and to its financial well being. In the latter regard, the
only alternative to the maintenance of the past high level of membership may be reduced
member services to hold down costs, or higher annual dues — neither of which would be
desirable.
With the reduction taking place in the total number of technically trained employees
in the engineering and maintenance of way departments of the railroads — a trend which
can be expected to continue with further increased technology, railroad reorganizations
and consolidations, the answer to the Association's membership maintenance problem
undoubtedly lies in the enrollment in the Association of a larger percentage of the
remaining engineering and maintenance of way department personnel, both old employees
and new employees. This solution can and should have the enthusiastic endorsement
of all members and of their railroads, because it is to the benefit of all concerned.
That this solution offers a fertile field will be evident in the fact that the total
Association membership on many railroads represents a relatively small percentage of
the total number of supervisory employees in their engineering and maintenance depart-
ments. It is also particularly evident to the secretary's office as it notes that many in
these departments do not make application for membership until they have accumulated
far beyond the number of years of experience required to entitle them to membership.
In this connection, members are reminded that full membership in the association
is available to engineering employees or officers in the service of the railways who have
had not less than five years experience in the location, construction, operation or main-
tenance of railways (an engineering degree counting for three years experience) , and
that Junior Membership in the Association is available to engineering employees of the
710 Report of Executive Secretary
railroads who have had not less than three years experience (an engineering degree
counting for three years). Thus, every graduate engineer entering the employ of a rail-
road is immediately eligible for the grade of Junior Member — without entrance fee,
and at the subsidized dues rate of only $5.00. Furthermore, Junior membership may be
had or retained until the end of the year in which a man becomes 30 years of age — an
educational and financial bargain not to be found in many organizations.
So, the essential high level of Association membership in the future would appear
to lie in securing a higher degree of membership saturation in the engineering and main-
tenance of way departments on the railroads, which your secretary maintains can be
secured, to the benefit of all concerned, by interested effort on the part of the present
membership, and especially those in higher supervisory capacity.
Membership
(February 1, 1962, to February 1, 1963)
Members on the rolls February 1, 1962 3347
New Members 153
Reinstatements 36
Loss in Junior Membership — 12
3524
Deceased 49
Resigned 70
Dropped 144
263
Net loss 86
Membership February 1, 1963 3261
Membership Classification as of February 1
1956 1957 1958 1959 1960 1961 1962 1963
Life 465 470 469 482 481 474 490 489
Member 2414 2478 2524 2491 2527 2554 2467 2434
Associate 261 258 268 251 264 288 301 261
Junior 163 144 101 86 101 91 89 77
Totals 3303 3350 3362 3310 3373 3407 3347 3261
ACTIVITIES OF COMMITTEES
Personnel of Committees
Reflecting, unmistakably, the continued interest of members in serving on commit-
tees, and of their railroads being represented on committees, is the large number of
members assigned to committees during 1962, even though, due to economic conditions
and the heavy work load carried by many members, that number is slightly smaller
than the number who served on committees in 1961. Specifically, throughout the year
there were 1137 members (including 67 Members Emeritus) regularly assigned to 1227
places on the Association's 22 standing and special committees. This compares with
1160 members who occupied 1251 places on these same committees during the previous
year. In addition to their regular members during 1962, practically all committees again
carried "guest" members on their rosters — members assigned during the year on a guest
basis, awaiting regular assignment with the official roster change to become effective
with the close of the 1963 Association Business meeting.
Report of Executive Secretary 711
Again, there were no special restrictions on the number of members permitted on
committees, but again, to meet the desire of the Association of American Railroads for
relatively small AAR committees, there was continued in 1962 the plan adopted by the
Board of Direction in 1961, which provides that the chairmen, vice chairmen, secretaries
and all subcommittee chairmen — to the extent that they are in the active employ of
railroads — alone constitute the official Engineering Division committees within the larger
AREA committees. This arrangement was amended during the year to provide that in
any instance where the chairman of an AREA committee is other than an active rail-
road employee, the vice chairman of the committee must be an active railroad employee,
and in addition to being designated vice chairman of the AREA committee, he be con-
sidered the chairman of the corresponding Engineering Division committee.
Again, to set apart as a group the Engineering Division committee within each
AREA committee — for convenience and record purposes — the names of those on the
Engineering Division committee were grouped at the head of the list of personnel of the
committee as a whole, as presented in the Committee Assignments Pamphlet and the
Bulletins, and were set in bold-face type.
Reflecting the continued uncertain economic conditions ahead for the railroads in
1963, and the continued heavy work load carried by many members, necessarily restrict-
ing their Association activities, the number of members assigned to committees for 1963,
effective with the official roster changes at the end of the 1963 Business meeting, will
be down slightly from 1962. Specifically, 1118 members have been assigned to 1202
places on committees for 1963, which compares with the 1137 members who served in
1227 places during 1962.
Work of Committees
During 1962 the 22 committees of the Association worked on 174 assignments,
20 of which were new. In their work they continued to follow much the same pattern
as in previous years, their different subcommittees carrying out their own studies and
investigations independently, or with the cooperation of the research staff of the Asso-
ciation of American Railroads, looking to the preparation of progress or final reports
for information ; of revising material appearing in the AREA Manual of Recommended
Practice, the AAR Electrical Manual, and the Portfolio of Trackwork Plans; or devel-
oping new Manual and Portfolio material; and of carrying out special projects related
to their assignments. That the work accomplished by committees was again substantial
is seen in the fact that they produced one or more reports on 116 of their 174 assign-
ments (not including Assignments A), 17 of which were final reports and 20 of which
contained Manual recommendations. Furthermore, continuing the practice established
by the Board in 1958, all committees presented brief "progress" or "status" statements
with respect to assignments on which they made no formal report.
Classification of Material Produced by Committees
The work of committees during the year was again so diversified and extensive
that it is impossible to do other than to refer to it in general terms in a report of
this character. But then- is presented in the following a general categorical classification
of the results of this work, as published in the Bulletins of the Association, and to be
presented to the 1963 Business meeting:
Recommendations pertaining to the development, revision, deletion or reapproval
without change, of 52 different specifications and recommended practices for inclusion
in the AREA Manual and the AAR Electrical Manual; 87 reports on current develop-
712 Report of Executive Secretary
merits in engineering practice and design; 12 reports dealing with economy in the use
of labor and the recruiting and training of employees; 4 reports involving statistics;
6 economic and analytical studies; 4 reports on relations with public authorities; and
4 bibliographies.
The work of committees affecting the AREA Manual included the presentation of
4 specifications for adoption; the rewriting or revision of 16 specifications (with or
without reapproval) ; the reapproval of 4 specifications without change; the presentation
of 2 recommended practices for adoption, and 1 as tentative; the revision of 14 recom-
mended practices, with or without reapproval; the deletion of 1 recommended practice;
the adoption of 1 agreement form; the presentation of 3 tentative agreement forms;
and the addition of 2 terms in the Glossary. In addition, the reports of committees
presented instructions with regard to 4 machines for inclusion in the Handbook of
Instructions for Care and Operation of Maintenance of Way Equipment.
During 1963, the committees as a whole will work on 180 assignments, 33 of
which are new.
Committee Meetings
In carrying out their work during 1962, the 22 technical committees of the Asso-
ciation held the smallest number of meetings in many years, and at least seven of their
meetings were, in reality, executive sessions, held in Chicago during the 1962 convention
and attended in large part alone by the committee officers and subcommittee chairmen.
In fact, the large majority of meetings, as in recent years, were again held in Chicago
or at points central to the larger number of committee members.
Specifically, a total of 63 committee meetings were held during the Association year
ended March 1, 1963. This compares with 64 committee meetings held during the year
ended March 1, 1962, and the more normal number of 70 to 73 meetings held yearly
in immediately preceding years. Of the 63 meetings held during the 1962 Association
year, 39 were in Chicago (including the 7 held during the 1962 convention) ; 3 were held
in St. Louis, Mo.; 2 each were held at Atlanta, Ga., New Orleans, La., and Washington,
D. C; and IS were held in as many other cities.
Dictated by the scope of their work and other considerations, 5 committees each
held 4 meetings; 10 committees each held 3 meetings; 6 committees each held 2 meet-
ings; and 1 committee held only 1 meeting. Combined with their meetings, 17 inspec-
ton trips were made by committees during the year to see facilities, structures, proce-
dures or operations directly related to their work.
ASSOCIATION PUBLICATIONS
Again in 1962 the Association made widespread distribution of its publications
beyond its own membership, reprinted several of its publications, continued distribution
of its Engineer Recruiting Brochure, produced large Supplements to both its Manual
and its Portfolio of Trackwork Plans, and continued successfully several new policies
with respect to its publications adopted in 1960.
In September, on the basis of previous requests, the secretary's office made the
seventh annual mailing to the engineering colleges of the United States and Canada of
the Association's Engineer Recruiting Brochure "The Railroad Field — A Challenge and
Opportunity for Engineering Graduates", this distribution involving approximately 3300
copies to some 125 schools. In the same month the secretary's office reprinted the Asso-
ciation's 23-page, 6x9 -in, flexible-cover pamphlet entitled "Instructions for the Care
and Safe Operation of Welding and Grinding Equipment." About the same time, it
Report of Executive Secretary 713
reprinted, bringing up to date, the 109-page, 6 x 9-in, AAR Scales Pamphlet, after
integrating into the various rules and specifications contained therein for scales used in
railway service all of the many revisions adopted since the previous printing of the
pamphlet in 1957.
During the past summer, the Association produced the largest Supplement to the
Manual of Recommended Practice ever issued, this 1962 Supplement containing 518
sheets (1036 pages), and during August all members who had paid the $1 fixed fee for
the Supplement — a total of some 1100 — were sent copies.
Following the completion of the Supplement, the Association reprinted its complete
2200-page, two-volume Manual to replenish the "for sale" supply in the secretary's
office, and at the same time it secured some 300 copies of the separate chapters for sale
to members and others interested only in, or with a special interest in, certain chapters.
This was the second reprinting of the Manual since it was completely overhauled and
reprinted in 1953.
While all this was going on the Association produced one of the most important
supplements ever issued to its Portfolio of Trackwork Plans, this becoming available in
October and including the 18 Standard Plans for Nos. 6, 8, 10, 15 and 20 turnouts
adopted at the 1962 convention, along with revised sheets covering 10 other plans and
2 sheets of specifications.
Again in 1962, the Association dispensed with the publication of the annual bound
volume of the Proceedings — a practice begun in 1961. In place of the bound volume,
all of the Bulletins of the Association from the September-October 1961 issue through
the June-July 1962 issue (except Part 2 of the February Bulletin and the Year Book
issue) were punched for binding, and all members who had made prior request were
furnished, without charge, a two-post, hard-cover, book-type binder, similar in every
respect to the binder issued in 1961, in which to house as a unit their copies of the
Bulletin. Thus, again, without the past duplication of material in the Bulletins and the
Proceedings, members were able to assemble in neat bound form all of the Bulletins
for the publication year, including the complete proceedings of the 1962 annual meeting,
which appeared in the June-July issue.
RESEARCH WORK
In 1962, due to a combination of continued restricted earnings in the railroad indus-
try and a "hold-the-line" overall AAR Budget, the research activities of the Engineering
Division were held to the relatively low level which prevailed in 1961 — total expenditures
for these activities amounting to $265,343, or about the same as the expenditures of
$263,100 in 1961. They were considerably less than the total expenditure of $398,400 in
1960, and the still larger expenditures in 1957 and 1958.
Of the total amount authorized for Engineering Division research in 1962, $41,672
was for Detector Car Development and Leasing Service, and $18,172 was for general
technical services, leaving a total of only $205,499 to progress research projects sponsored
primarily by AREA committees. This total expenditure for research and technical assist-
ance on behalf of AREA committees was again far less than the amount proposed by
these committees ($375,550), and also the necessarily reduced proposed budget of
$305,600 approved by the AREA Board of Direction and recommended to the vice
president research, AAR.
To bring about the reduced 1962 expenditures, many proposed projects at the
bottom of the priority list established by the AREA Board and the director of engi-
neering research, AAR, were again entirely eliminated; participation in the work of
714 Report of Executive Secretary
Research Councils and contract research to be carried out by outside agencies and insti-
tutions was again practically eliminated; and cuts were made in the amounts requested
for the remaining projects wherever possible, while still permitting some headway during
the year and the holding intact of the basic research organization at the AAR Labora-
tory. Furthermore, for the second time in 11 years (1961 and 1962), the research bud-
get did not include the past usual appropriation of $5000 to $7000 to help defray the
cost of publishing Engineering Division research reports in the AREA Bulletins — thus
presumably, indicating a future general policy in this regard. Unable to assume this
publication cost in full, the Association, again in 1962, presented in its Bulletins, for
the most part, only edited and condensed versions of these reports, along with any
conclusions and recommendations.
Any disadvantage or loss to members under this arrangement was again offset to
some extent by the continued practice of the AAR Research Department in 1962 of
producing copies of its complete reports in typewritten, multilith form, and of sending
copies to the chief engineering and maintenance officers of AAR Member Roads, to
members of sponsoring AREA committees, and to others, on request to the AAR
Research Center.
1963 Research
In many respects the total Engineering Division research budget for 1963 is a
duplicate of the budget, or actual research expenditures, for 1962, this budget amount-
ing to $268,000. Of this amount, $41,600 is for AAR detector car development and
leasing service, and $18,300 is for general technical services, leaving a total of $208,100
to progress research projects sponsored primarily by AREA committees. This author-
ized total expenditure for Engineering Division research and technical services is again
far less than the amount proposed by these committees ($363,050), and also the neces-
sarily reduced proposed budget of $256,350 approved by the AREA Board of Direction
and recommended to the vice president, research, AAR.
Details of the authorized Engineering Division research budget for 1963 are pre-
sented in the accompanying tabulation, which shows for the different projects the ex-
penditures authorized, compared with estimated expenditures for projects in 1962. In
this tabulation, it will be noted, there are four new projects, and that four projects for
which expenditures were made in 1962 will be discontinued in 1963. Missing entirely
from this list are a considerable number of projects proposed by committees. Also, as
will be evident to committees, the authorized expenditures for a number of the projects
are less than the amount initially requested.
Furthermore, under the plan begun in 1961, the 1963 Engineering Division research
budget provides no funds to help defray the cost of publishing AAR research reports
in the AREA Bulletins. Unable to assume these publishing costs in full, the AREA will
again, in 1963, present only edited and condensed summaries of these reports, for the
most part, in the Bulletin, with any recommendations and conclusions — with the under-
standing that copies of the complete reports, in multilith form, can be secured by those
desiring them, upon request, from the AAR Research Center.
Thus, 1963 will see continued delay and deferment in Engineering Division research
and technical services as visualized and hoped for by AREA committees and the Board
of Direction — which will continue to hamper the work of committees until more ade-
quate funds can be made available.
Report of Executive Secretary 715
Total Allotments for Research, Engineering Division, AAR, Exclusive
op Detector Car Development and Leasing Service
1943-1963
1943 $ 98,445 1953 364,100
1944 109,050 1954 351,307
1945 138,110 1955 351,653
1946 159,510 1956 365,050
1947 234,428 1957 476,845
1948 291,840 1958 563,709
1949 372,457 1959 353,800
1950 294,045 1960 350,300
1951 354,770 1961 222,000
1952 381,400 1962 223,671
1963 226,400
Summary of Projects Included in 1963 Approved Engineering Division Research
Budget, Showing Expenditures Authorized for Each Project, Compared
With Estimated Expenditures for Projects in 1962
1962 1963
Estimated Approved
Expenditure Budget
Administration
Research Office $ 35,308 $ 35,400
Total $ 35,308 $ 35,400
Committee 1 — Roadway and Ballast
Roadbed Stabilization $ 15,045 $ 15,100
Vegetation Control 600
Total $ 15,045 $ 15,700
Committee 3 — Ties and Wood Preservation
Development of Prestressed Concrete Ties and Fasten-
ings $ 5,054 $ 1,900
Termite Control Investigation 400 600
Total $ 5,454 $ 2,500
Committee 4 — Rail
Investigation of Failures in Control-Cooled Rail $ 3,000 $ 3,000
Rail Failure Statistics 5,108 4,700
Insulated Rail Joint Development 3,000 3,000
Shelly Spots and Head Checks 20,050 20,200
Metallurgical Investigation of Basic Oxygen Steel for
Rail and Joint Bars 2,286 2,200
"Metallurgical Effects of Rail Cropping Methods 2,000
"Semi-Automatic Welding of Rail Batter and Bums 4,600
Total $ 33,444 $ 39,700
Committee 5 — Track
Corrosion Protection of Track and Structures from
Brine Drippings $ 841 $
Prestressed Concrete Crossing Frog Support 889 500
° New project.
716 Report of Executive Secretary
1962 1963
Estimated Approved
Expenditure Budget
Explosive Hardening of Manganese Frogs 2,018
Welding Heat Treated Carbon Steel Frogs and Switches 2,000 1,300
Riding Qualities of Equipment Through High Speed
Turnouts 1,318 1,300
Specification Development for Tie Plate Fastenings
and Tie Pads for Wood and Concrete Ties 8,600 12,300
Design of Spirals 3,600 3,800
Total $ 19,200 $ 19,200
Committee 7 — Wood Bridges and Trestles
Application of Synthetic Resins and Adhesives $ 7,608 $ 7,800
Strength of Timber Stringers 9,186 1,000
Non-Destructive Testing of Wood 2,000 5,000
Total $ 18,794 $ 13,800
Committee 8 — Masonry
Bearing Pads for Bridges $ 2,048 $
"Shear Keys for Concrete Beams $ 2,700
Total $ 2,048 $ 2,700
Committee 15 — Iron and Steel Structures
Truss Bridge Research $ 5,000 $ 5,000
Corrosion of Deck Plates $ 1,000
Total $ 5,000 $ 6,000
Committee 16 — Economics of Railway Location and Operation
Feasibility of Determining Track Maintenance Require-
ments by Digital Computer Analysis $ 5,046 $ 5,000
Total $ 5,046 $ 5,000
Committee 24 — Cooperative Relations with Universities
"Student Research Grant $ $ 1,000
Total $ $ 1,000
Committee 30 — Impact and Bridge Stresses
Steel Bridges $ 12,126 $ 9,200
Concrete Bridges 9,126 12,300
Timber Bridges 4,000 4,100
Total $ 25,252 $ 25,600
Special Committee on Continuous Welded Rail
Butt-Welding of Rails: $ 9,000 $ 9,200
Total $ 9,000 $ 9.200
0 New project.
Report of Executive Secretary 717
1962 1963
Estimated Approved
Expenditure Budget
Joint Committee on Relation Between Track and Equipment
Relation of Wheel Load to Wheel Diameter $ 8,731 $ 8,800
Clearance Requirements 5,000
Dynamic Action of Piggyback Cars in Regard to Clear-
ance, Stability and Ride Qualities 5,000 10,300
Total $ 18,731 $ 19,100
Board Committee on Research
Long-Range Weather Forecasting $ 1,000 $ 1,000
Total $ 1,000 $ 1,000
Electrical Laboratory and Instrumentation $ 12,177 $ 12,200
Total $ 12,177 $ 12,200
Grand Total for Committee-sponsored Projects $205,499 $208,100
Detector Car Development and Leasing
Further Development of Detector Car Testing— Road-
Rail Units and Ultrasonic Units $ 41,672 $ 41,600
Total $ 41,672 $ 41,600
Technical Services
General Technical Services $ 18,172 $ 18,300
Total $ 18,172 $ 18,300
Grand Total $265,343 $268,000
FINANCES
The Report of the Treasurer, Financial Statement, General Balance Sheet, and
Statement of Cash Receipts and Disbursements for the calendar year 1962, all of which
are presented herein, indicate that the Association continues in a sound financial condi-
tion, even though Disbursements during the year exceeded Receipts by $11,246.84. This
is because its total assets remain high, and because the 1962 deficit is reflected to a large
extent in an increased inventory of saleable publications, chiefly Manuals, which, it is
expected, will be converted into cash through sales during the next 4 or S years. This
deficit situation is in contrast to that of the preceding year when Receipts exceeded
Disbursements by $10,051, but with an inventory of saleable publications practically ex-
hausted. Following is a comparison of Receipts and Disbursements for the past two
years:
1961 1962
Receipts $83,461.73 $ 7(..0O7.28
Disbursements 7.^,410.20 87,344.12
$10,051.53 % 1 1.246.84
This comparison, however, does not presenl a tme picture due to the unexpected
and necessarily different method of handling payment for the 1961 Annual Association
718 Report of Executive Secretary
Luncheon. In 1962 this payment was made immediately and directly from funds realized
through the sale of Luncheon tickets, and was kept out of the Association's account, but
in 1961, due to a temporary change in hotel policy, funds realized from the sale of tickets,
in the amount of $4325, had to be deposited into the bank account of the Association,
and charges to cover the Annual Luncheon were paid by Association voucher upon pre-
sentation of invoice to cover, at a later date. Therefore, a true comparison of 1961-1962
Receipts and Disbursements is as follows:
1961 1962
Receipts $79,136.73 $ 76,097.28
Disbursements 69,085.70 87,344.12
$10,051.53 $-11,246.84
Reviewing the financial picture briefly on this basis, 1962 Receipts were some $3000
lower than those of 1961. Insofar as this differential is concerned, the lower Receipts in
1962 were occasioned by the receipt in that year of only $1196 from Convention Regis-
tration Fees, owing to the smaller attendance at the lj^-day convention in that year,
compared with Registration Fee receipts of $4469 in 1961. Further comparison of 1961-
1962 receipts accounts indicates that Membership receipts in 1962 were some $700 under
those of 1961; Publications $1300 lower; Handbook — Instructions for the Care and Op-
eration of Maintenance of Way Work Equipment $350 lower; and Miscellaneous $500
lower. Receipts for Manual, Advertising and Student Affiliate Fees were quite compar-
able to those of 1961. Offsetting these losses were higher receipts 1962 over 1961, as
follows: Interest $400, and Track Plans $3300. The large increase in receipts for Track
Plans in 1962 was occasioned entirely by the issuance and sale of an abnormally large
Supplement to the Portfolio of Trackwork Plans.
Disbursements during 1962 were considerably higher than those of 1961, but were
actually somewhat lower than anticipated. Disbursements for most items for the year,
with minor over-under expenditure, approximated very closely those anticipated for the
year. The exceptions were Bulletin and Proceedings, $942 overexpended, due to the Feb-
ruary Bulletin being issued in two parts, the second part to accommodate new and re-
vised Track Plans. Offsetting this overexpenditure was an underexpenditure of some $900
in the item of Miscellaneous Stationery and Printing, due to economies effected, fewer
orders for reprints than were expected, etc.
While not intended to be on a comparative basis, the following items are commented
on as a matter of explanation and interest in view of the large deficit incurred in 1962.
To secure a supply of saleable Manuals for the next 5 years, and to publish for member-
ship and sale purposes the extremely large 1962 Manual Supplement, it was necessary to
expend $21,296 in 1962, compared to a Manual expenditure of only $5480 in 1961. Like-
wise, Track Plan expenditures in 1962, due to the large Supplement to the Portfolio of
Trackwork Plans issued, amounted to $3758, compared with an expenditure of only $198
in 1961. Offsetting these heavy expenditures, only $1778 was expended for the item of
Convention in 1962, while, including the $4325 for the Annual Luncheon, previously re-
ferred to, $8889 was expended for the item of Convention in 1961. It is well that Re-
ceipts for Track Plans totaled some $3300 higher than in 1961, and that the cost of
producing the tracings for the new and revised Track Plans was kept to the minimum
through the assistance of two railroads and two trackwork manufacturers, or the deficit
of $11,246 incurred in 1962 would have been much greater.
Report of Executive Secretary 719
1963 Financial Prospects
The year 1963, even with normal expenditures for Supplements to the Manual and
the Portfolio of Trackwork Plans, and even with a supply of saleable Manuals on hand,
could again present a financial problem. This is because the printing of a new edition
of the Association's Engineer Recruiting Brochure, "The Railroad Field — A Challenge
and Opportunity for Engineering Graduates", is planned in 1963, for free distribution to
universities and colleges. Also under consideration is the publication of a consolidated
index of the Proceedings indexes for the years 1954 through 1963, to supplement the
previously issued, and available, consolidated index of Proceedings indexes, 1940-1953.
There will also be some additional expenditures for the items of Postage and Conven-
tion in 1963, the latter in view of the Association's participation in the AAR-sponsored
American Railway Progress Exposition in October, as well as its lj^-day Business meet-
ing in March. But every effort will be made in 1963 to prevent loss of revenues, to
augment income, and to hold down disbursements, in an effort to prevent, or hold to
the minimum, any excess of Disbursements over Receipts.
Comparison of Receipts and Disbursements for a 20-Year Period
Receipts Disbursements Net Gain
1943 28,736.00 23,809.00 4,927.00
1944 30,492.00 26,534.00 3,958.00
1945 32,305.00 29,305.00 3,000.00
1946 28,836.00 34,583.00 5,747.00*
1947 46,993.00 46,989.00 4.00
1948 57,741.00 53,062.00 4,679.00
1949 62,081.00 57,075.00 5,005.00
1950 59,752.00 51,795.00 7,957.00
1951 69,045.00 62,369.00 6,676.00
1952 77,514.00 76,964.00 550.00
1953 73,033.07 82,067.86 9,034.79*
1954 85,748.99 68,003.03 17,745.96*
1955 80,177.21 73,923.18 6,254.03
1956 79,531.11 70,336.17 9,014.04
1957 85,429.31 89,830.57 4,401.26*
1958 81,454.56 77,348.92 4,105.64
1959 80,407.16 80,297.48 109.68
1960 81,138.79 83,978.29 2,839.50*
1961 83,461.73 73,410.20 10,051.53
1962 76,097.28 87,344.12 11,246.84*
• Deficit.
LOOKING AHEAD AT 1963
While 1962 was a good Association year, with sustained interest and activity, your
Board of Direction is looking for — indeed has laid plans for — a still more active year
in 1963. In fact, looking beyond 1963, your Board has made firm plans for a 2J^-day
annual convention in 1964, to be held at the Pick-Congress Hotel in Chicago, March
9-11, and for another 2^-day annual convention in 1965, at McCormick Place, Chicago,
accompanied by an exhibit of the National Railway Appliances Association.
Following the restricted, end-of-the-week convention in March 1962, the Associa-
tion had every intention of holding a normal 2J^-day convention in March 1963, and
had commitments to that end with the Conrad Hilton Hotel. But then came into being
the AAR-sponsored plan for concurrent meetings of major railroad groups and a com-
bined exhibit of related railway supply organizations, at McCormick Place, Chicago —
720 Report of Executive Secretary
first contemplated for October 1964, but subsequently set for the 8-day period, October
9-16, 1963 — which necessarily altered Association convention plans for 1963.
Obviously, the Association had to be prominently represented in the big October
affair — which has been designated as the 1963 American Railway Progress Exposition.
Equally obvious, it was recognized that the Association should not hold two full-scale
meetings in 1963 — March and October. What to do? First thought in some quarters
was to move the annual convention of the Association to October, and amendments to
the Association's constitution to permit this were proposed by the Board of Direction
and were adopted by letter ballot of the membership in July 1962. But with no inten-
tion of shifting the annual convention permanently to the fall of the year, there came
full realization of the serious disruption of Association activities which would result
from moving the 1963 convention to October, with the prospect of returning to March
dates in 1964 and in subsequent years. To name only the more important of these
disruptions, the term of office of the current officers of the Association would be extended
to a year and one-half, while that of the incoming officers in October would be cut to
only six months, and there would be complete disruption of committee work schedules,
report filing dates, and the Association's publication schedule. Not to be overlooked, too,
was the questionable situation of holding annual conventions six months apart — October
1963 and March 1964.
Confronted with this situation, the Board, completely bypassing its newly acquired
authority to move the convention to any month of the year, decided that the Associa-
tion must have an official business meeting in March 1963, modified downward as neces-
sary, while at the same time participate wholeheartedly in the October Railway Progress
Exposition, modified from the concept of a full-scale convention. Thus, plans were
developed and approved for another lj^-day, restricted-program, end-of-the-week
strictly Business meeting on March 15 and 16, at the Conrad Hilton Hotel, stripped
of all social activities, including the usual Annual Luncheon, as such; and for a full
Membership meeting in October, at McCormick Place, with a one-day program con-
sisting exclusively of special features, supplemented by the maximum number of fall
committee meetings. Under this double-barrelled plan, the Association will transact all of
its official business and keep its committee activities on schedule through the March
meeting, and will be prominently represented — possibly with a record membership
attendance — at the October Railway Progress Exposition.
In order that the latter may be true, President Cole has asked all members who
must make a choice between the two meetings to give priority to the October meeting,
and, through their associations, he asked railway supply men to refrain from extending
any form of entertainment in connection with the March meeting, and to concentrate
their interest and attention on the fall meeting. At the same time, President Code
appointed a special Program Committee to work with committees to develop the
strongest possible program for the fall meeting.
So, confronted with the heavy work load of committees referred to earlier in this
report; with at least as much research activity in prospect as in 1962; and with planning
to do for another regular 2j4-day convention in March 1964, the Association has a
busy, interest-sustaining year in prospect in 1963. And, given the desirable, and war-
ranted, encouragement and backing of railroad managements which it has had for many
years in the past, and sustained membership, the Association is certain to have a
successful year ahead in every other respect.
Respectfully submitted,
Neal D. Howard,
Executive Secretary.
Report of Executive Secretary 721
Bcccascb fflcmbcvi
Anton Anderson
Retired General Superintendent and Chief Engineer, Monon Railroad, Lafayette, Ind.
C. T. Bltjme
General Supervisor Work Equipment, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, Springfield, Mo.
C. C. Brode
President, W. M, Brode Company, Newcomerstown, Ohio
Ralph Budd
Retired President, Burlington Lines; Retired Chairman, Chicago Transit Authority,
Santa Barbara, Calif.
R. E. Butler
Retired Vice President, Newburgh & South Shore Railway, Brecksville, Ohio
G. B. Campbell
Retired Tie and Timber Agent, Missouri Pacific Railroad, University City, Mo.
P. CmPMAN
Retired Office Engineer, Pere Marquette Railway, Fullerton, Calif.
R. L. Cochrane
Retired Assistant Engineer, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago
E. L. COLLETTE
Retired Division Engineer, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, Van Buren, Ark.
W. G. Cowte
Retired Division Engineer, New York Central System, Holyoke, Mass.
R. A. CUMMTNGS
Pittsburgh, Pa.
W. J. Cunningham
Retired Professor of Transportation, Harvard Graduate Business School, Freedom, N. H.
E. Evensen
Retired Assistant Engineer, Texas & Pacific Railway, Los Beach, Miss.
R. L. Fletcher
Structural Engineer, Timber Engineering Company, Washington, D. C.
L. C. Frohman
Retired Chief Engineer, Florida East Coast Railway, St. Augustine, Fla.
E. L. GOSNELL
Retired Chief Engineer, Reading Company, Baltimore, Md.
F. L. Guy
Retired Engineer Maintenance of Way and Structures, Southern Pacific Company,
San Mateo, Calit.
E. D. Hall
Civil Engineer, Roberi and Company Associates, Atlanta, Ga.
G. J. Harris
Assistant to Vice President Finance, Accounting. Taxation and Valuation, Association
of American Railroads, Washington, D. C.
E. L. Hoopes
Retred Assistant to Chief Engineer Maintenance of Way, Pennsylvania Railroad,
Princeton, N. J.
722 Report of Executive Secretary
Clark Hungerford
Chairman of the Board, St. Louis-San Francisco Railway, St. Louis, Mo.
H. D. F. Ingram
Retired Office Engineer, Grand Trunk Western Railroad, Florence, Wis.
Marc- Johnson
Retired Principal Assistant Engineer, Illinois Central Railroad, Chicago
A. L. Kammerer
Consulting Timber Engineer, Clayton, Mo.
N. M. Kelly
Assistant Director of Engineering, Board of Transport Commissioners for Canada,
Ottawa, Ont.
E. A. McLeod
District Engineer Structures, New York Central System, Detroit, Mich.
C. M. McVay
Retired Consulting Engineer, New York Central System, Ravenna, Ohio
W*. W. Morrison
Retired Vice President and General Manager, Pittsburgh & Shawmut Railroad,
Kittanning, Pa
E. H. Ness
Retired Supervisor Work Equipment and Welding, Erie Railroad, Susquehanna, Pa.
T. J. O'Rourke
Plant Engineer, Mergenthaler Linotype Company, New York
H. B. Ork
Assistant Chief Engineer, Chesapeake & Ohio Railway, Detroit, Mich.
J. W. Pfau
Retired Assistant to Vice President, New York Central System, Yonkers, N. Y.
G. J. Ray
Retired Vice President, Delaware, Lackawanna & Western Railroad, Summit, N. J.
O. T. Rees
Retired Assistant Engineer Tests, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Topeka, Kans.
Luis Reina
Assistant General Manager Track and Structures, National Railways of Mexico, Mexico, D. F.
F. C. Robertson
Assistant Engineer, New York, Chicago & St. Louis Railroad, Ft. Wayne, Ind.
W. A. Rucks
Assistant Engineer, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago
M. K. Ruppert
President and Chief Executive Officer, Poore & Company, Chicago
J. E. Shaw
Supervisor Track Construction, Southern Pacific Company, Texas & Louisiana Lines,
Houston, Tex.
G. B. Shipley
Consulting Engineer, Pittsburgh, Pa.
V. O. Smeltzer
Superintendent Signal — System, Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe Railway, Chicago
Report of Executive Secretary 723
C. K. Smith
Retired Research Engineer, Association of Western Railways, Evanston, 111.
M. A. Stainer
Retired Assistant Chief Engineer, Colorado & Southern Railway; Ft. Worth & Denver
Railway, Hays, Kans.
H. W. Stetson
Retired General Supervisor Maintenance of Way, Maine Central Railroad, Portland, Me.
R. M. Stimmel
Engineer Tests and Water Service, New York, Chicago & St. Louis Railroad, Ft. Wayne, Ind.
J. B. Trenholm
Retired Engineer Maintenance of Way, Atlantic Coast Line Railroad, Savannah, Ga.
E. R. Trodd
Assistant Engineer, Canadian Pacific Railway, Montreal, Que.
R. A. Whiteford
Division Engineer, Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul & Pacific Railroad, Marion, Ind.
H. A. WlSTRICH
Retired Chief Engineer Construction and Maintenance, Lehigh Valley Railroad, Bethlehem, Pa.
724 Report of Executive Secretary
FINANCIAL STATEMENT FOR CALENDAR YEAR
ENDING DECEMBER 31, 1962
Balance on Hand January 1, 1962
$156,979.67
RECEIPTS
Membership Account
Entrance Fees $ 1,380.00
Dues 41,923.46 $43,303.46
Sales of Publications
Proceedings 1,898.56
Bulletins 1,857.85
Manuals 10,191.43
Track Plans 4,701.49
Specifications 1,668.37 20,317.70
Advertising
Publications 5,876.10
Interest Account
Interest on Investments 4,956.94
Miscellaneous 1,643.08
Total $76,097.28
DISBURSEMENTS
Salaries $27,764.96
Bulletins and Proceedings 20,942.67
Stationery and Printing 3,151.68
Rent 1,140.00
Postage 2,301.00
Supplies 345.92
Audit 400.00
Pension 300.00
Social Security and Unemployment Taxes 1,296.19
Manuals 21,296.38
Committee and Officers Expenses 398.80
News Letter 1,569.19
Annual Meeting 1,778.19
Miscellaneous 900.31
Total $87,344.12
Excess Disbursements over Receipts 11,246.84
Balance on hand December 31, 1962 $145,732.83
Report of Treasurer 725
REPORT OF THE TREASURER
To The Members:
Balance on Hand January 1, 1962 $156,979.67
Receipts during 1962 $76,097.28
Paid out on Audited Vouchers 87,344.12
Excess of Disbursements over Receipts 11,246.84 11,246.84
Balance on Hand December 31, 1962
Consisting of Bonds at Cost 153,403.98
Cash in Northern Trust Co. Bank-Credit Balance 7,696.15
Petty Cash 25.00 $145,732.83
We have made an examination of the accounts of the American Railway Engineering
Association for the year ended December 31, 1962, and found them to be in accordance
with the foregoing statement.
C. A. Bick,
E. N. Thomas,
Auditors.
GENERAL BALANCE SHEET
Assets: 1962 1961
Cash in Northern Trust Co. Bank-Credit Bal $—7,696.15 $ 3,550.69
Petty Cash 25.00 25.00
Due from members 26.00 1 16.50
Due from sale of publications 24.50 49.55
Due from sale of advertising 842.80 1,128.20
Due from prepaid postage 44.51 27.76
Furniture and Fixtures 1,000.00 1,000.00
Inventories:
Publications (estimated) 500.00 500.00
Manuals 11,659.00 2,170.10
Track Plans 2,146.40 2,1 78.40
Binders, index and chapter 135.00 1 18.00
Investments (cost) 153,403.98 153,403.98
Interest accrued on investments 958.51 958.51
Totals $163,069.45 $165,301.69
Liabilities:
Members dues paid in advance $ 539.50 $ 400.50
Surplus 162,529.95 164,901 .19
Totals $163,069.45 $165,301.69
STATEMENT OF CASH RECEIPTS AND DISBURSEMENTS YEAR 1962
Cash in Bank, January 1, 1962 $ 3,550.69
Receipts:
From members, sales of publications, interest, etc 76,097.28
$79,647.97
Disbursements:
Audited vouchers 87,344.12
Cash in Bank December 31, 1962 dr $ 7,696.15
American Railway Engineering
Association
CONSTITUTION
Revised to July 10, 1962
Article I
Name, Object and Location
1. Name
The name of this Association shall be the AMERICAN RAILWAY ENGINEERING
ASSOCIATION.
2. Object
The object of the Association shall be the advancement of knowledge pertaining
to the scientific and economic location, construction, operation and maintenance of
railways.
3. Means to be Used
The means to be used for this purpose shall be:
(a) The investigation of matters pertaining to the object of the Association through
Study and Research Committees.
(b) Meeting for the presentation and discussion of papers, and for action on the
recommendations of committees.
(c) The publication of papers, reports and discussions.
4. Conclusions
The conclusions adopted by the Association shall be recommendatory.
5. Location
The office of the Association shall be located in Chicago, 111.
Article II
Membership
1. Classes
The membership of this Association shall be divided into five classes: Members,
Life Members, Honorary Members, Associates and Junior Members.
2. Qualifications
A. General
(a) An applicant to be eligible for membership in any class other than that of
Junior Member shall be not less than 25 years of age.
(b) To be eligible for membership in any class, or for retention of membership as a
Member, an Associate or a Junior Member, a person shall not be engaged directly or
primarily in the sale to the railways of appliances, supplies, patents or patented services.
(c) The right to membership shall not be terminated by retirement from active
726
Constitution 727
(d) In determining the eligibility for membership in any class, graduation in engineer-
ing from a school of recognized standing shall be considered as equivalent to three years
of active practice, and satisfactory completion of each year of work in such school,
without graduation, shall be considered as equivalent to one-half year of active practice.
(e) In determining the eligibility for Member under Section B (a) of this Article,
each year of practical experience in engineering, or in science related thereto, prior to
employment on a railway, if such experience were of the same specialized character as
the current work of the applicant, shall be considered as equivalent to one year of
railway service.
B. Member
A Member shall be:
(a) An engineer or officer in the service of a railway corporation that is a common
carrier, who has had not less than five years' experience in the location, construction,
operation or maintenance of railways.
(b) A dean, professor, assistant professor, or equivalent in engineering in a university
or college of recognized standing, or an instructor or equivalent in such university or
college, who, with an engineering degree, has had at least two years' experience in
teaching engineering.
(c) An engineer or member of a public board, commission or other official agency
who, in the discharge of his regular duties, deals with railway problems.
(d) An editor of a trade or technical magazine who, in the discharge of his regular
duties, deals with railway problems, and who has had the equivalent of five years'
engineering or railway experience.
(e) A consulting engineer, engaged in private practice, or an engineer in his employ
or in the employ of a consulting engineering organization, who has had the equivalent
of five years' engineering experience.
C. Life Member
A Life Member shall be a Member or an Associate who has paid dues for 35 years,
or who has been retired under a recognized retirement plan and has paid dues for not
less than 25 years.
D. Honorary Member
(a) An Honorary Member shall be a person of acknowledged eminence in railway
engineering or management.
(b) The number of Honorary Members shall be limited to ten.
E. Associate
An Associate shall be:
(a) An engineer of a railway which is essentially an adjunct of an industry, or
which is used primarily to transport the products and materials of an industry to and
from a railway which is a common carrier.
(b) A person qualified by training and experience to cooperate with Members in the
object of this Association, but who is not qualified to become a Member.
F. Junior Member
(a) A Junior Member shall be not less than 21 years of age and shall be an
engineering employee of a railway corporation who has had not less than three years
of experience in the location, construction, operation or maintenance of railways.
(b) His membership in this classification in the Association shall terminate at the
end of the calendar year in which he becomes 30 years of age.
(c) He may make application for membership other than as a Junior Member at
any time when he becomo eligible to do so.
728 Constitution
3. Transfers
The Board of Direction shall transfer from one class of membership to another,
or may remove from membership, any person whose qualifications so change as to
warrant such action.
4. Rights
(a) Members, and Life Members who were formerly Members, shall have all the
rights and privileges of the Association. Life Members who were formerly Associates
shall continue to have all the rights and privileges of Associates.
(b) Honorary Members shall have all the rights and privileges of the Association
except those of holding elective office, provided, however, that Members or Life Members
who are elected Honorary Members shall retain all the rights and privileges of the
Association.
(c) Associates and Junior Members shall have all the rights and privileges of the
Association except those of voting and holding elective office.
Article III
Admission, Resignation, Expulsion and Reinstatement
1. Charter Membership
The Charter Membership of this Association consists of all persons elected to mem-
bership before March 15, 1900.
2. Application for Membership
(a) A person desirous of membership in this Association shall make application
upon the form provided by the Board of Direction. In the event that Junior Membership
is desired, the applicant shall so state.
(b) The applicant shall give the names of at least three Members of this Asso-
ciation to whom personally known. Each of these Members shall be requested by the
Executive Secretary of the Association to certify to a personal knowledge of the applicant
with an opinion of the applicant's qualifications for membership.
(c) If an applicant is not personally known to as many as three Members of this
Association, the names of well-known persons engaged in railway or allied professional
work to whom he is personally known shall be substituted, as necessary, to provide a
total of at least three references. Each of these persons shall be requested by the Executive
Secretary of the Association to certify to a personal knowledge of the applicant, with an
opinion of the applicant's qualifications for membership.
(d) No further action shall be taken upon the application until replies have been
received from at least three of the persons named by the applicant as references.
3. Election to Membership
(a) Upon completion of the application in accordance with Section 2 of this Article
the Board of Direction through its Membership Committee shall consider the application
and make such investigation as it may consider desirable or necessary.
(b) Upon completion of such consideration and investigation, each member of the
Board of Direction shall be supplied with the required information, together with the
recommendation of the Membership Committee as to the class of membership, if any,
to which the applicant is eligible, and the admission of the applicant shall be canvassed by
ballot among the members of the Board of Direction.
Constitution 729
(c) In the event that an application has been made under the provisions of Section 2,
Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this Article, a two-thirds affirmative vote of the entire Board
of Direction shall be required for election.
(d) In the event that an application has been made under the provisions of Section
2, Paragraphs (a) and (c) of this Article, a unanimous affirmative vote of the entire
Board of Direction shall be required for election.
4. Subscription to the Constitution
An applicant for any class of membership in this Association shall declare his willing-
ness to abide by the Constitution of the Association in his application for membership.
5. Honorary Member
A proposal for Honorary Membership shall be endorsed by ten or more Members
of the Association and a copy furnished each member of the Board of Direction. The
nominee shall be declared an Honorary Member upon receiving a unanimous vote of the
entire Board of Direction.
6. Resignation
The Board of Direction shall accept the resignation, tendered in writing, of any
person holding membership in the Association whose obligations to the Association have
been fulfilled.
7. Expulsion
Charges of misconduct on the part of anyone holding membership in this Association,
if in writing and signed by ten or more Members, may be submitted to the Board of
Direction for examination and action. If, in the opinion of the Board action is war-
ranted, the person complained of shall be served with a copy of such charges and shall
be given an opportunity to answer them to the Board of Direction. After such oppor-
tunity has been given, the Board of Direction shall take final action. A two-thirds
affirmative vote of the entire Board of Direction shall be required for expulsion.
8. Reinstatement
(a) A person having been a Member, an Associate or a Junior Member of this
Association and having resigned such membership while in good standing may be
reinstated by a two-thirds affirmative vote of the entire Board of Direction.
(b) A person having been a Member, an Associate or a Junior Member of this
Association and having forfeited membership under the provisions of Article IV, Section
3, may, upon such conditions as may be fixed by the Board, be reinstated by a two-thirds
affirmative vote of the entire Board of Direction.
Article IV
Dues
1. Entrance Fee
(a) An entrance fee of $10 shall be payable to the Association with each application
for membership other than Junior Membership. This sum shall be returned to an applicant
not elected.
(b) No entrance fee shall be required for Junior Membership, except that a Junior
Member, in transferring to another class of membership, shall pay the entrance fee
prescribed for other classes of Membership.
730 Constitution
2. Annual Dues
(a) The annual dues for each Member and each Associate shall be $15.
(b) The annual dues for each Junior Member shall be $5.
(c) Life Members and Honorary Members shall be exempt from the payment of
dues. Life Members desiring to continue to receive the Bulletins and Proceedings of the
Association may do so by paying a subscription fee prescribed by the Board of Direction
3. Arrears
A person whose dues are not paid before April 1 of the current year shall be notified
by the Executive Secretary. If the dues are still unpaid on July 1, further notice shall be
given, informing the person that he is not in good standing in the Association. If the dues
remain unpaid by October 1, the person shall be notified that he will no longer receive
the publications of the Association. If the dues are not paid by December 31, the person
shall forfeit membership without further action or notice, except as provided for in
Section 4 of this Article.
4. Remission of Dues
The Board of Direction may extend the time of payment of dues, and may remit
the dues of any Member, Associate or Junior Member who, for good reason, is unable
to pay them.
Article V
Officers
1. Officers
(a) The officers of the Association shall be a President, two Vice Presidents,
twelve Directors, an Executive Secretary and a Treasurer.
(b) The President, the Vice Presidents and the Directors, together with the two
latest living Past Presidents continuing to be Members, shall constitute the Board of
Direction, in which the government of the Association shall be vested; they shall act
as the trustees and have the custody of all property belonging to the Association. The
President, the Vice Presidents and the Directors shall be Members.
(c) The Executive Secretary and the Treasurer shall be appointed by the Board of
Direction.
2. Term of Office
The term of office of the President shall be one year, of the Vice Presidents two
years and of the Directors three years. The term of each shall begin at the close of
the annual convention at which elected and continue until a successor is qualified.
All other officers and employees shall hold office or position at the pleasure of the Board
of Direction.
3. Officers Elected Annually
(a) There shall be elected at each annual convention a President, one Vice President
and four Directors.
(b) The candidates for President and for Vice President shall be selected from
the members or past members of the Board of Direction.
4. Conditions of Re-election of Officers
A President shall be ineligible for re-election, except as provided for in Section 5 (e)
of this Article. Vice Presidents and Directors shall be ineligible for re-election to the same
office, except as provided for in Section S (e) of this Article, until, at least one full
term has elapsed after the end of their respective terms.
Constitution 731
5. Vacancies in Offices
(a) If a vacancy should occur in the office of President, as set forth in Section 6
of this Article, the senior Vice President shall immediately and automatically become
President for the unexpired term.
(b) If a vacancy should occur in the office of the senior Vice President, due to
advancement under Section 5 (a) of this Article, or for reasons set forth in Section 6
of this Article, the junior Vice President shall automatically become senior Vice President
for the unexpired term.
(c) If a vacancy should occur in the office of the junior Vice President, due to
advancement under Section 5 (b) of this Article, or for reasons set forth in Section 6
of this Article, the Board of Direction shall by the affirmative vote of two-thirds of its
entire membership, select a junior Vice President from the members or past members
of the Board of Direction.
(d) A vacancy in the office of Director, due to advancement of a Director to junior
Vice President under Section 5 (c) of this Article, or for reasons set forth in Section 6
of this Article, shall be filled by the Board of Direction by the affirmative vote of
two-thirds of its entire membership.
(e) An incumbent in any office for an unexpired term shall be eligible for re-election
to the office held; provided, however, that anyone selected to fill a vacancy as Director
shall be eligible for election to that office, excepting that such appointee filling out an
unexpired term of two years or more shall be considered as coming within the provisions
of Section 4 of this Article.
6. Vacation of Office
(a) In the event of the death of an elected officer, or his resignation from office,
or if he should cease to be a Member of the Association as provided in Section 2 (B),
Article II; Section 6 or 7, Article III; or Section 3, Article IV, the office shall be con-
sidered as vacated.
(b) In the event of the disability of an officer or neglect in the performance of duty
by an officer, the Board of Direction, by the affirmative vote of two-thirds of its entire
membership shall have the power to declare the office vacant.
Article VI
Nomination and Election of Officers
1. Nominating Committee
(a) There shall be a Nominating Committee composed of the five latest living Past
Presidents of the Association, who are Members, and five Members who are not
officers.
(b) The five Members who are not Past Presidents shall be elected annually for a
term of one year, when the officers of the Association are elected.
(c) The senior Past President who is a member of the committee shall be the
chairman of the committee. In the absence of the senior Past President from a meeting
of the committee the Past President next in seniority present shall act as chairman.
2. Method of Nominating
(a) At least three months prior to the annual convention, the Chairman shall call
a meeting of the committee at a convenient place, at which nominees for the several
elective offices shall be selected as follows:
732 Constitution
Number of Candi-
Number o) Candi- dates to be
dates to be named elected at the
by the Nominating Annual Election
Office to be Filled Committee oj Officers
President 1 1
Vice President 1 1
Directors 8 4
Nominating Committee 10 5
(b) The Chairman of the Nominating Committee shall send the names of the
nominees to the President and Executive Secretary within 15 days after the meeting
of the Nominating Committee, and the Executive Secretary shall report the names of
these nominees to the members of the Association not less than 60 days prior to the
annual convention.
(c) At any time prior to 30 days before the annual convention, any ten or more
Members may send to the Executive Secretary additional nominations for any elective
office for the ensuing year, signed by such Members.
(d) If any person nominated shall be found by the Board of Direction to be
ineligible for the office for which nominated, or should a nominee decline such nomination,
his name shall be withdrawn. The Board of Direction may fill any vacancies that may
occur in the list of nominees up to the time the ballots are sent out.
3. Ballots Issued
Not less than thirty days prior to each annual convention, the Executive Secretary
shall issue a ballot to each voting Member of record who has paid his dues to or beyond
December 31 of the previous year, listing the several candidates to be voted upon. When
there is more than one candidate for any office, the names shall be arranged on the
ballot in the order that shall be determined by lot by the Nominating Committee. The
ballot shall be accompanied by a statement giving for each candidate his record of
membership and activities in this Association.
4. Substitution of Names
Members may remove names from the printed ballot list and may substitute the name
or names of any other person or persons eligible for any office, but the number of names
voted for each office on the ballot must not exceed the number to be elected at that
time to such office.
5. Ballots
(a) Ballots shall be placed in an envelope, sealed and endorsed with the name of
the voter, and mailed to or deposited with the Executive Secretary at any time previous
to the closure of the polls.
(b) A voter may withdraw his ballot, and cast another, at any time before the polls
close.
(c) Ballots received in unendorsed envelopes, or from persons not qualified to vote,
shall not be counted.
(d) The ballots and envelopes shall be preserved for not less than ten days after
the vote is canvassed.
6. Closure of Polls
The polls shall be closed at 12 o'clock noon on the first day of the annual con-
vention, and the ballots shall be counted by tellers appointed by the presiding officer.
Con s t i L u t i o n 733
7. Election
(a) The persons who shall receive the highest number of votes for the offices for
which they are candidates shall be declared elected.
(b) In case of a tie between two or more candidates for the same office, the
Members present at the annual convention shall elect the officer by ballot from the
candidates so tied.
(c) The presiding officer shall announce at the convention the names of the officers
elected in accordance with this Article.
Article VII
Management
1. President
The President shall have general supervision of the affairs of the Association, shall
preside at meetings of the Association and of the Board of Direction, and, by virtue
of his office, shall be a member of all committees, except the Nominating Committee.
2. Vice Presidents
The Vice Presidents, in order of seniority, shall preside at meetings in the absence
of the President.
3. Treasurer
The Treasurer shall pay all bills of the Association when properly certified by the
Executive Secretary and approved by the Finance Committee. He shall make an annual
report as to the financial condition of the Association and such other reports as may be
called for by the Board of Direction.
4. Executive Secretary
The Executive Secretary, under the direction of the President and Board of Direc-
tion shall be the Executive Officer of the Association and shall attend the meetings of the
Association and of the Board of Direction, prepare the business therefor, and record the
proceedings thereof. The Executive Secretary shall see that all money due the Associa-
tion is collected, is credited to the proper accounts, and is deposited in the designated
depository of the Association, with receipt to the Treasurer therefor. He shall personally
certify to the accuracy of all bills and vouchers on which money is to be paid. He shall
invest all funds of the Association not needed for current disbursements, as shall be
recommended by the Finance Committee and approved by the Board of Direction, with
notification to the Treasurer of such investments. The Executive Secretary shall conduct
the correspondence of the Association, make an annual report to the Association, and
perform such other duties as the Board of Direction may prescribe.
5. Auditing of Accounts
The financial accounts of the Association shall be audited annually by an accountant
or accountants approved by and under the direction of the Finance Committee.
6. Board of Direction and Executive Committee
(a) The Board of Direction shall manage the affairs of the Association, and shall
have full power to control and regulate all matters not otherwise provided for in the
Constitution.
734 Constitution
(b) The Board of Direction shall meet within thirty days after each annual
convention, and at such other times as the President may direct. Special meetings shall
be called on request, in writing, of five members of the Board of Direction.
(c) Seven members of the Board of Direction shall constitute a quorum.
(d) At the first meeting of the Board of Direction after the annual convention,
the President shall appoint from the membership of the Board, subject to ratification
by the Board, four members to serve with him as an Executive Committee which shall
possess and may exercise during intervals between meetings of the Board, all of the
powers of the Board on matters which in the judgment of a majority of the Executive
Committee cannot properly be delayed until the next meeting of the Board. Actions
of the Executive Committee shall be reported to the Board of Direction at the next
meeting of the Board. The President shall be chairman of the Executive Committee.
Actions of the Executive Committee shall be authorized by a concurring majority of
its full membership. Members of the Executive Committee shall serve until their succes-
sors are appointed or until the Executive Committee is dissolved by action of a majority
of the full membership of the Board of Direction. Following dissolution of the Executive
Committee it may be re-created at any time by action of a majority of the full mem-
bership of the Board of Direction. If not so re-created prior to the next annual con-
vention, the Executive Committee shall be reconstituted in the normal manner at the
first meeting of the Board of Direction following the convention.
7. Administrative Committees
At the first meeting of the Board of Direction after the annual convention, the
following Administrative Committees, each consisting of not less than three members,
shall be appointed by the President. The personnel of these committees shall be subject
to approval by the Board of Direction.
Assignments
Finance
Manual
Membership
Personnel
Publications
Research
Other special Administrative Committees may be appointed by the President at
any time, and reappointed annually, if necessary, their personnel being subject to
approval by the Board of Direction.
Membership on Administrative Committees shall be restricted to members of the
Board of Direction, except that one or two members of the Administrative Committee
on Research may be past members of the Board of Direction.
8. Study and Research Committees
The Board of Direction may establish continuing or special Study and Research
Committees to investigate, consider, and report upon subjects appropriate to the object
of the Association, as set forth in Art. I.
9. Duties of Administrative Committees
(a) Assignments
The Assignments Committee shall review and pass upon the recommendations of
Association Study and Research Committees for subjects to be investigated, considered
and reported on by these committees during the ensuing Association year, and shall
Constitution 735
report thereon to the Board of Direction for its approval. The Assignments Committee
shall have authority to assign additional subjects or change the scope of any existing
subjects at any time during the year, reporting its action thereon to the Board at its
next regular meeting.
(b) Finance
The Finance Committee shall have immediate supervision of the accounts and
financial affairs of the Association; shall approve all bills before payment, and shall
make recommendations to the Board of Direction as to the investment of funds and
other financial matters. The Finance Committee shall not have the power to incur
debts or other obligations binding the Association, nor authorize the payment of money
other than the amounts necessary to meet ordinary current expenses of the Association,
except by authority of the Board of Direction.
(c) Manual
The Manual Committee, with the assistance of the Publications Committee, shall
have general supervision over the Manual.
(d) Membership
The Membership Committee shall investigate applicants for membership and shall
make recommendations to the Board of Direction with reference thereto.
(e) Personnel
The Personnel Committee shall review and pass upon applications of members
for appointment to Study and Research Committees, and shall also appoint the chair-
man and vice chairman of such committees and make a report thereon to the Board
of Direction for its approval. Should an unexpected vacancy in chairmanship or vice
chairmanship of any such committee occur, the Personnel Committee shall have author-
ity to fill such vacancy immediately, reporting its action thereon to the Board at its
next regular meeting.
(f) Publications
The Publications Committee shall have general supervision over the publications
of the Association. The Publications Committee shall not have the power to incur
debts or other obligations binding the Association, nor authorize the payment of money
except by authority of the Board of Direction.
(g) Research
The Research Committee shall encourage and coordinate the research activities of
the Association, in the course of accomplishment of which it shall review and pass
upon the recommendations of Study and Research Committees for research projects and
shall report thereon to the Board of Direction, recommending for approval specific
projects initiated by these committees or by the Research Committee and recommending
allotments of funds for these projects in the research budget of the Association of
American Railroads or from other sources compatible therewith; shall collaborate closely
with the research staff of the Association of American Railroads; and when called upon
by the Vice President — Research or the Vice President — Operations and Maintenance
of that association, members of the Research Committee shall engage in the activities
of advisory committees or groups of that organization and shall report from time to
time to the Board of Direction on those activities.
10. Special Committees
The Board of Direction may appoint special committees to examine into and report
upon any subject connected with the objects of this Association.
736 Constitution
11. Discussion by Non-Members
The Board of Direction may invite discussions of reports from persons not members
of the Association.
12. Sanction of Act of Board of Direction
An act of the Board of Direction which shall have received the expressed or implied
sanction of the membership at the next annual convention of the Association shall be
deemed to be the act of the Association.
Article VIII
Meetings
1. Annual Convention
(a) The Annual Convention of the Association shall be held in the City of Chicago,
111. or in such other city as may be determined by the affirmative vote of two-thirds
of the entire membership of the Board of Direction. The convention in any year shall
be held on dates determined by the affirmative vote of two-thirds of the entire mem-
bership of the Board of Direction.
(b) The Executive Secretary shall notify all members of the Association of the time
and place of the annual convention at least 30 days in advance thereof.
(c) The order of business at the annual convention of the Association shall be:
Reading of the minutes of the last meeting
Address of the President
Reports of the Executive Secretary and the Treasurer
Reports of committees
Unfinished business
New business
Installation of officers
Adjournment
(d) This order of business may be changed by a majority vote of Members present
(e) The proceedings shall be governed by "Robert's Rules of Order" except as
otherwise herein provided.
(f) Discussions shall be limited to Members and to those others invited by the
presiding officer to speak.
2. Special Meetings
Special meetings of the Associations may be called by the Board of Directions on its
own initiative, and may be so called by the Board of Direction upon written request
of 100 Members. The request shall state the purpose of such meeting.
The call for such special meeting shall be issued not less than ten days in advance
of the proposed date of such meeting and shall state the purpose and place of the
meeting. No other business shall be taken up at such meeting.
3. Quorum
Twenty-five Members shall constitute a quorum at all meetings of the Association.
Article IX
Amendment
1. Amendment
Proposed amendment of this Constitution shall be made in writing, shall be signed
by not less than ten Members, and shall be acted upon in the following manner:
Constitution 737
The amendment shall be presented to the Executive Secretary, who shall send a
copy to each member of the Board of Direction as soon as received. If a majority of
the entire Board of Direction so votes, the matter shall be submitted to the Association
by letter ballot.
Sixty days after the date of issue of the letter ballot, the Board of Direction shall
canvass the ballots which have been received, and if two-thirds of such ballots are in
the affirmative the amendment shall be declared adopted and shall become effective imme-
diately. The result of the letter ballot shall be announced to members of the Association.
null. r.7i»
Advance Report of Committee 3 — Ties and Wood Preservation
Report on Assignment 5
Service Records
W. F. Arksey (chairman, subcommittee) A. B. Baker, C. M. Burpee, C. E. DeGeer,
K. C. Edscorn, F. J. Fudge, VV. E. Fuhr, H. M. Harlow, R. P. Hughes, W. E.
Laird, R. W. Orr, C. A. Peebles, R. B. Radkev, J. T. Slocomb, E. F. Snyder,
L. F. Strohl.
Tie Renewals and Cost per Mile of Maintained Track
The annual statistics compiled by the Bureau of Railway Economics, AAR, provid-
ing information on cross tie renewals and cost data for 1962 are presented herewith
in Tables A and B.
The 1962 figures for the Class I Roads of the United States as a whole compared
with 1961 are as follows:
Total New Wooden Renewals
Year Ties Renewed Per Mile
1961 10,999,747 35
1962 12,402,222 40
S-year average, 1958 to 1962, incl 43
The average cost in 1961 was $3.87 and in 1962, $3.90. As noted on the tables
these figures represent storekeepers average cost of ties charged out; they are not the
actual cost or prices paid for the ties purchased during the period.
In the statistics for 1961 and previous years, separation was made in Table A
between treated and untreated new wood cross ties laid in replacement. For the 1962
statistics, however, for the sake of simplification, and on the basis that very few
untreated ties are being installed these days, no such separation was made; all new
wood cross ties laid in replacement were lumped together. This permitted the elimina-
tion of five columns in Table A. Also, the figures for cross ties other than wood installed
in 1962 were omitted from Table A.
738
Region and R<
NEW ENGLAND REGION:
Bangor & Aroostook
Boston & Maine
Canadian Pacific (lii
Central Vermont
Maine Central
New York Conm
New York, New Have
"8
Total
GREAT LAKES REGION:
Ann Arbor
Delaware & Hudson
Detroit & Toledo She
Erie* Lackawanna
Grand Trunk Western
Lehigh & Hudson Rive
Lehigh Valley
Monongahela
New York Central
New York. Chicago & SI
New York, Susquehanna
Pittsburgh & Lake Er
Pittsburgh & West Vi:
Wabash
Total
CENTRAL EASTERN REGIO:
Akron, Canton & Young
Baltimore & Ohio
Bessemer & Lake Erie
Central R.R.of New J.
Chicago & Eastern II
Chicago & Illinois M
Detroit .Toledo & Iro:
Elgin, Joliet & Easte
Illinois Terminal
Long Island
Missouri-Illinois
Morion
Pennsylvania
Penna .-Reading Seash.
ReadinR Company
State
Weste
Island Rapid
n Maryland
Total
POCAHONTAS REGION:
Chesapeake & Ohio
Norfolk & Western
Richmond , Fred 'burg £>
Total
SOUTHERN REGION:
Alabama Great Southe
Alabama , Tennessee & '■
Atlanta & St .Andrews
Atlanta & West Point
Atlantic Coast Line
Carolina & Northwest'
Central of Georgia
Cincinnati, New Orleai
Cllnchfield
Florida East Coaat
Saorgli
Ceorgla & Florida
Ceorgla Southern & F
Gulf, Mobile 6 Ohio
Illlnoll Central
Louisville & Nathvil
New Orleans & Northe.
Norfolk Southern
Piedmont & Northern
Savannah & Atlanta
Seaboard Air Line
Southern
Tennessee Central
Western Ry . of Alabai
[ CANADIAN RAILROADS
SZ <•"",«
rljor
Sl«"(t5ou"nSo'.
-■»-.. ........ I
Region and R d
**" tl"
^°Jd
ss
HI*
SL
,o„l
T
r'Lwll'
"uir
Sen.w.l
""oS"
—
Average
1
2
3
*
5
6
7
8
9
10
„
l2
6 730
40 283
3.S2
2 305
11
2 245 392
1 232 286
mi
l 259 907
IK
':K
■ 00
8390
19.82c
New York, New Haven 6, Hartford
»iS
5.84
3.83
1 095
3 239
)-
3 277 253
3 132
15 III «8
ii
l:s9
28
246
9.35
Total
284 S70
3.83
8 091.72
24 386 957
3 014
31 198 566
3 856
1.17
35
135
3.50
GREAT LAKES REGION.
Erie -Lackawanna
8 241
166
4 582
3 386
4.31
5.71
397
1 151
87
02
1 210 341
3 513 956
ii
" "I HI
»|
.68
»
,08
4:0;
Lehigh Valley
54 305
3.93
4.80
525
914
231
17 086
75
282 100
52 569 575
Ik
aimm
ii
.:«
46
24
210
2.26
Pittsburgh & Lake Erie
Pittsburgh & West Virginia
lis
I'm
30 HI
3 III
*
557 527
is
1 050 906
7 796
i£
s
286
189
Total
409 258
4.74
559 991
36 718.13
112 413 573
3 062
236 639 440
6 445
.36
11
53
.82
CEKTRAL EASTERN REGION:
871
51 148
II
16 311
645 806
3 242 860
3 815 629
3 043
ill
3 779
.13
s
ii
ii
Chicaso 6. Eastern Illinois
9 559
95
Elgin, Jollet 4 Extern
5 030
28 395
23 552
If,
16
l
830
75
496 296
1 738 541
1 130 635
I Z
2 511 til
i:H
1
5:il
- ■ - .. . -;--■;
324
4.34
"m
55
so
1 320 910
2 867
"SIS
>.»
ii
5
3.92
Staten Island Rapid Transit
Western KaryUnd
>if»
Mi
nL'
35
3 266 373
2 903
7 III "o'
6 309
1 78
52
Al
S:JS
Total
1 824 121
4.05
40 899
39 876.67
114 877 505
2 881
272 405 283
6 831
1.59
46
IBS
2.71
POCAHONTAS REGION
ss
4.23
39 344
8 255.93
407.87
24 610 317
15 998 460
1 320 684
3 100
3 238
54 836 604
£
J!
IS
:l
Rlchstond, Fred 'burg & Potomac
Total
347 861
4.50
39 491
13 824.60
42 129 481
3 047
130 Z12 040
9 419
.63
25
113
1.20
9 33B
9 619
3.66
1 675 061
360 502
U 617 025
3 110
40 904 226
5 620
2.59
87
370
272
!:"
7 278
SSl&SrSL-. » t.p.
296 750
Si
33
3 503 070
2 956
iiss
Will
!:l
l"
348
l||
Georgia
Georgia Southern L Florida
3.50
13
,.H
368
994 842
1 Old
« 491 fi™
f, 074
'-HQ
62
744
2.38
4. OS
jj*U'J!|U' ^Northeaatern
289 003
2.76
23 059 851
870 991
579 604
481 772
3 083
!as
? !"
il
70
500
20.55
Seaboard Air Line
c 391 49l
270 953
33 376
£ 4.61
5 659
';'
"is a
USS
"! 486
4 "J
siSo
«
m
'lis
,.u.
2 922 471
3.93
24 2,9
51 357.29
155 376 86!
3 025
301 640 996
5 873
1.66
57
_i^J
Region an
NORTHWESTERN REGIO
Chicago & North W
Chicago Great Wes
Chicago, Milw. ,St .
Duluth.Missabe &
Duluth .Winnipeg &.
Great Northern
Green Bay & Weste
Lake Superior & I
Minneapol is , North
Northern Pacific
Soo Line R.R. Co.
Spokane Intemati
Spokane, Port land
CENTRAL WESTERN RE<
Atchison, Topeka &
Chicago, Burlingtoi
Chicago, Rock Islal
Colorado & Southe
Colorado & Wyotnin
Denver & Rio Gran'
Fort Worth & Denv
Northwestern Paci
Pacific Electric
Southern Pacific
Toledo, Peoria & W
Union Pacific
Western Pacific
SOUTHWESTERN REGIO
Kansas City South
Kansas , Oklahoma &
Louisiana & Arkan
Missouri-Kansas-T
Missouri Pacifi
Quanah.Acrae & Pac
St .Louis-San Fran
St .Louis, San Fran
St .Louis Southwes
Texas St Pacific
Texas Mexican
Total
Grand Total - Uni'
CANADIAN ROADS:
Canadian National
Canadian Pacific
Ontario & Northlai
:iST!CS (EXCLUDING SWITCH «. BRIDGE) FOR CUSS , RUUOADS I» THE UNITED STATES .
Calendar year ended December 31, 1962
= CANADIAN RAILROADS
Region and Road
Wooden cross t
m"t
Track maintained by
Equated gros
miles (thous
ands) a
N7w across tie 1
New ties
Second
3
Total
Total
Cross
mile
Total
mile
renewal
to all
laid
mile
1,000
1
2
NORTHWESTERN REGION -
Chicago & North Western
Chicago, Hilw., St. Paul t, Pac.
Duluth.Missabe & Iron Range
Duluth. Winnipeg & Pacific
355 482
154 723
345 528
72 251
7 539
$4.62
3.50
4.45
3.54
182 948
32 919
13 591.51
13 062.63
962.24
205.92
40 463 628
5 356 026
39 746 939
2 866 497
2 977
3 002
3 043
2 979
38 486 725
7 516 516
46 666 7 31
3 638 032
2 632
.88
2.89
26
87
26
75
$126
334
4.46c
7.22
3.05
8.84
Creen Bay & Western
Lake Superior & Ishpeming
Minneapolis .Northfleld & Sou.
Northern Pacific
2 642
23 472
2 919
480 960
4.22
3.19
3.99
267^75
282.70
86.22
9 076.57
31 236 542
771 120
687 900
208 266
3 118
2 860
2 433
51 180 440
567 574
149 320
262 780
5 109
2 120
528
3 048
1.58
.34
3.41
10
83
235
265
135
50
-■■..:
17
EE.SSSTL.u.
9 093
70 256
4.50
4.36
5 265.73
177.96
I 143.43
16 108 145
521 509
3 527 000
3 059
2 930
3 085
15 523 046
378 780
6 971 127
2 948
6 097
1.74
1.99
23
51
230
268
10
BO
19
Total
2 141 893
4.27
265 464
55 924.03
168 391 093
3 on
212 432 788
3 799
1.27
38
k
CENTRAL WESTERN REGION:
451 720
282 730
452 936
23 328
1 444
3.41
3.65
3.16
4.07
4.57
74 030
2 445
19 592.68
11 203.48
9 690.00
772.30
104.82
62 559 427
34 596 345
28 876 103
2 276 740
337 994
3 193
3 088
2 980
2 948
3 225
165 894 905
62 844 949
48 811 088
3 639 277
8 467
5 609
5 037
4 712
.72
.82
1.57
23
25
30
123
Chicago. Burlington & Qulncy
Chicago. Rock Island & Pac.
Colorado & Wyoming
:
2
93
93
61
Fort Worth & Denver
Northwestern Pacific
Pacific Electric
Southern Pacific Co.
12 902
10 728
848 595
3.68
3.52
2.41
3.36
403
3 042.94
1 256.07
428.87
371.00
16 642.02
9 420 554
3 779 271
1 222 280
I 068 470
50 070 000
3 096
2 850
2 880
3 009
17 554 849
S 262 430
1 817 712
346 952
5 769
4 238
935
.55
1.05
1.06
1.00
32
30
29
70
116
106
I
:.
76
50
Union Pacific
765 056
91 517
4.26
13 388.43
1 553,85
918 847
37 837 512
4 637 434
3 168
2 826
2 984
129 090 71c
13 499 732
3 469
9 642
8 668
.55
2.02
1.97
18
57
59
288
2
53
Total
3 037 951
3.66
87 118
78 336.50
237 600 977
3 033
615 131 783
7 852
1.28
39
142
1.81
SOUTHWESTERN REGION:
Kansas City Southern
Louisiana & Arkansas
Missouri -Kansas -Texas
35 886
36 101
111 511
619 238
3.05
3.08
3.40
3.23
10 476
1 384.91
240 . 34
892 .49
3 452.55
11 423.59
4 377 856
2 908 057
10 952 579
35 226 340
3 161
3 258
3 172
3 084
9 514 716
4 710 078
12 358 959
66 480 585
4 768
5 277
3 580
5 820
.82
1.31
1.02
26
43
32
131
110
175
2.49
3.07
3.01
Quanah.Acae 6. Pacific
St .Louis-San Francisco
St .Louis, San Francisco & Tex,
St .Louis Southwestern
Texas & Pacific
4 687
e 441 877
110 946
11 005
4.28
e 3.06
3.40
3.29
2.78
370
144.62
5 774.60
152.94
1 755.66
2 205.88
238.95
456 156
18 156 291
489 408
5 362 240
6 444 660
756 994
3 168
3 144
3 200
3 054
2 922
3 168
438 105
28 129 307
650 161
17 607 826
17 194 126
203 092
3 029
4 251
7 795
1.02
2.24
1.45
32
63
23
46
139
234
215
128
4.81
4.41
2.14
.95
15.04
Total
1 434 097
3.19
10 848
27 666.53
85 865 365
3 104
158 432 955
5 727
1.67
52
166
2.89
Grand Total - United States
12 402 222
3.90
1 028 110
311 795.47
941 041 834
3 016
1 958 093 851
6 280
1.32
40
155
2.47
CANADIAN ROADS:
1 u98 021
1 22U 685
100 2U
2.77
2.88
3.86
:
29 327-
20 821.33
663.7
85 993 211
60 861 751
1 991 302
2 932
2 923
3 000
80 927 211
2 351 605
f
3 732
3 ^58
1.7
2.01
5.03
51
59
151
UJ.
167
583
11^18
16.U
b Includes
d Includes
e Includes
108 concret
641 concret
4.930 narrc*
1,056 concr
"r.i:
cost of $12
cost of $13
e cost of $
97.
17.
f $2.14.
3.05.
z::l
CaTsenVer ser\
tenders
in frelgh
NEW ENGLAND REGICtt
Bang
Bost
U Aroost
6, Maine
adian Pacifi
tral Vermont
Maine Central
New York Connect
New York, New Hav
Tot a
GREAT LAKES REGICtt
Ann Arbor
Delaware & Huds
Detroit 6. Toled
Erie-Lackawanna
Grand Trunk West
Lehigh 6. Hudson
Lehigh Valley
Monongahela
New York Central
New York .Chicago
New York.Susqueh
Pittsburgh & Lak
Pittsburgh & We
Wabash
Tota
CENTRAL EASTERN RE
Akron, Canton & Y
Baltimore 6. Oh
Bessemer & Lak
Central R.R.of N
Chicago & Easter
lllino
Detroit , Toll
Elgin, Jolie
Illinois Te
Long Island
Missouri-Illino
Monon
Pennsylvania
Penna. -Reading S
Reading Company
Staten Island Ra
Western Maryland
POCAHONTAS REGION
Chesapeake & Ohi
Norfolk 4 West
Richmond, Fred 'bu
lot
SOUTHERN REGION
Alabama Great So
Alabama ,Tennesse<
Atlanta & St .And
Atlanta & West P
Atlantic Coast
Carolina 6 Northv
Central of Georg
Cincinnati, New 0
Cllnchfield
Florida East Coal
loridJ
Georgl
Ceorgl
Georgia Southe
Gulf, Mobile 4 Ohl
Illinois Central
Louisville 6 Nasi
New Orleans & Not
Norfolk Southern
Piedmont 4 North<
Savannah & At 1
Seaboard Air Lln<
Southern Ry .
Tennessee Central
Western Ry.of Alt
Total
II
M-
"*"(;
■IE 3
-™.;,
i<\:i:t
Aggre
lll'oYl
."»!„«
"reck
enev.aU
?" -VZT^ZVX-^
1958
"»
,960
1961
1962
average
1958
.95,
1960
1,61
1,62
average
1958 19
1,60
1,61
1,62
Lrrage
NEW EMGIANfi RFmiiTN-
148
20
i!
126
10.
95
122
302
S398
310
S416
5391
$390
245
2 80 2
5
;i
2 69
";
;i
£!^a.-^
New York Connecting
138
70
s
S
26
91
269
679
254
III
232
469
lie
1.05
.14
30
102
I'M
l'n
Is
Total
47
45
4!
36
35
41
175
167
153
145
135
155
1.64 1
49
1.34
1.26
1.17
1.38
GREAT LAKES REGION:
39
63
18
25
20
37
:»
21
85
"2
,06
'el
1.08 1
ii
l|
S
.68
"■I
£SdFsh™ u"*
Lehigh Valley
27
23
39
24
35
46
36
5
28
16
121
150
91
153
:55 1
B9
l:«
.80
iS
l:°o
Pittsburgh & Lake Erie
60
40
8
62
62
45
63
23
59
16
53
31
207
5
20
123
154
.36 _1
s
i
.88
.05
.59
105
Total
28
32
26
9
11
21
101
131
91
40
53
83
.91 1
03
.83
.30
.36
.69
CENTRAL EASTERN REGION
80
5S
45
39
41
45
5
80
19
30
3
172
361
56
210
246
279
299
267
205
244
.09
38
l'so
2.80
1*07
.17
B.it?;orrr»io°"n^cwn
Central R.R.of New Jersey
Chlcaao 4. Eastern Illinois
Detroit .Toledo & Ironton
Elgin, Jollet & Eastern
Illinois Terminal
38
30
22
38
42
69
17
55
53
33
37
26
30
5
32
35
22
54
135
97
48
243
303
219
223
140
254
133
111
136
131
130
.88 1
.39 1
52
'S
l:S
.99
1.15
1.98
Penn^Readlng Seashore Lines
19
51
50
66
50
52
175
153
13
.60
.61
36
45
-"
2.30
.93
1.85
1.23
Staten Island Rapid Transit
4?
683
47
52
52
45
199
271
229
228
1 55 2
16
1.83
1.60
I 78
1 78
Total
40
48
38
41
46
43
163
191
141
161
185
168
1.39 1
6fi
1.31
1.41
1.59
1.47
pnr.AHflNTAS REGION:
53
29
g
21
25
28
142
!S
195
ii
!S
77
1.08
97
IS
:ll
.83
1:SI
Richmond, Fred 'burg & Potomac
Total
30
21
28
20
25
25
116
80
115
84
113
102
.98
67
.,2
.65
.83
.81
VJHTHERN REGION:
39
51
86
70
34
68
69
56
72
245
434
135
335
231
306
277
2.61 2
V-
2.24
.60
i.u
1.30
2.H
ss-JTsi'sr"
gSjrt*.? Sorgu'""
39
99
93
65
59
65
25
75
l°b°7
163
340
S93
295
475
348
321
340
303
250
Is I
22
Is
!l£
.62
\1
G.orgL
156
57
80
106
i"
172
106
62
57
67
54
323
445
224
469
359
399
295
188
1.53 1
'
9.80
II
t:S
in
105
1.
123
143
164
36
158
241
340
365
382
252
714
642
500
292
278
lis 5
87
2.55
;:«
2.35
ii
Southern Ry-
WesterTRy.o* Alabama
1
|
«:
s
ii
101
ii
312
s
S3
156
186
IS 2
1
lis
3.06
1.05
2.39
65
63
60
49
57
60
263
236
233
196
225
231
2.26 2
06
1.97
1.62
1.88
1.97
NORTHWESTERN R
Chicago & No
Chicago Grea
Chicago ,Milw
Duluth.Missa
Duluth.Winni
Great Northe
Green Bay &
Lake Super io
Minneapolis ,
Northern Pac
Soo Line R.R
Spokane Inte
Spokane .Port
CENTRAL HESTER
Atchison, Top
Chic ago, Burl
Chicago, Rock
Colorado & S
Colorado & W
Denver & Rio
Fort Worth &
Northwestern
Pacific Elec
Southern Pac
Toledo, Peori
Union Pacifi
Western Paci
SOUTHWESTERN R
Kansas City
Kansas, Oklah
Louisiana &
Missouri-Kan
Missouri Pac
Quanah.Acme
St. Louis-Sa
St . Louis ,Sa
St. Louis So
Texas & Paci
Texas Mexica
Grand Total
CANADIAN ROADS
Canadian Nat
Canadian Pac
Ontario Nort
Table B
« AND ACHATE COST OK NEW WOOD CROSS „ RENEWALS PER raLE 0F HAImAINED TRACK MD „„„ op ^ ^ _, ffl ^ m ^ ^ ^ ^ ^^ ^
Class I roads In the United States and large Canadian roads, by years and for rh. ™.,.„ « «,
, y years, and tor the average of five years 1958 to 1962, Inclusive
Note: AH figures are exclusive of bridge and switch ties
1
Road
Number o
per
mile of
id cross tie ren
maintained trac
ewals
Aggregate coat of new wood cross tie renewals
per mile of maintained track
Per cent new wood cross tie renewals
to all ties in tracks
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
average
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
average
1958
1959
1960
1961
1962
5 year
Chicago & North Western
Chicago Great Western
Chicago, Milwaukee, St .Paul & Pacific
Duluth.Missabe & Iron Range
Dulutl^Winnipee, & Pacific
54
94
24
48
32
58
102
29
54
39
43
73
28
60
34
27
61
15
19
38
26
87
26
75
37
42
83
24
51
36
$208
343
90
164
$237
352
112
240
$197
247
112
275
$121
214
62
72
$126
304
109
334
$178
292
97
217
1.83
3.15
.77
1.61
1.93
3.39
.94
1.81
1.55
2.42
.93
2.00
.90
2.04
.51
.65
.88
2.89
.87
2.52
1.42
2.78
.80
1.72
Green Bay & Western
Lake Superior & Ishpeming
Minneapolis, Northfield 4 Southern
Northern Pacific
20
55
54
40
59
19
43
83
49
51
14
45
81
56
51
14
28
89
51
49
10
83
34
53
54
15
51
68
50
266
67
163
213
148
281
58
129
338
181
245
52
121
336
211
240
49
78
373
235
42
265
135
253
54
151
279
1.93
.70
2.18
2.26
1.88
.67
1.69
3.44
1.59
.49
1.80
3.38
1.61
.49
1.11
3.68
1.58
.34
3.41
1.40
1.72
.54
2.04
2.83
Spokane International
Spokane, Portland & Seattle
233
107
179
112
97
86
24
94
59
23
51
61
41
131
85
226
847
452
273
650
478
49
393
362
204
429
262
82
230
268
167
510
364
2.13
7.94
3.46
2.64
6.09
3.64
.47
3.30
2.80
.80
3.22
1.93
.77
1.74
1.99
1.36
4.46
2.76
Total
50
54
43
34
38
44
192
219
180
143
164
180
1.64
1.80
1.43
1.13
1.27
1.45
CENTRAL WESTERN REnTnu-
Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe
Chicago, Burlington & Quincy
Chicago, Rock Island & Pacific
Colorado & Southern
Colorado &, Wyominc
32
19
29
31
15
22
28
46
37
12
21
17
40
59
13
25
22
46
21
23
23
25
30
14
25
22
42
36
15
95
66
81
127
54
61
102
136
147
50
62
61
114
234
46
80
79
147
90
88
79
92
148
123
75
80
125
144
1.00
.61
1.03
1.03
.68
.89
1.54
1.17
.66
.56
1.34
2.01
.77
.72
1.56
.73
.72
.82
1.57
1.02
.77
.72
1.41
1.19
Fort Worth & Denver
Northwestern Pacific
Pacific Electric
Southern Pacific Co.
71
97
59
58
39
93
99
60
65
21
62
64
48
54
33
20
48
46
17
32
30
29
51
32
56
68
39
55
208
289
313
178
209
161
382
294
156
216
93
234
206
124
182
143
71
169
70
116
106
70
135
218
218
106
1.66
2.35
3.39
1.74
1.25
3.10
3.45
1.75
.69
2.07
2.25
1.42
1.06
.66
1.70
.55
1.05
1.06
1.00
1.04
1.85
2.37
1.18
Union Pacific
Western Pacific
45
50
87
43
68
86
22
62
71
24
47
54
18
57
59
30
57
71
178
196
393
166
259
405
84
251
349
71
195
273
54
244
288
111
229
342
1.43
1.78
2.93
1.37
2.40
2.87
.69
2.20
2.37
.74
1.63
1.80
.55
2.02
1.97
.96
2.01
2.39
Total
41
46
39
36
39
40
147
161
138
130
142
144
1.36
1.50
1.27
1.19
1.28
1.32
SOUTHWESTERN REGION:
Kansas City Southern
Kansas, Oklahoma & Gulf
Louisiana & Arkansas
Missouri-Kansas-Texas
Missouri Pacific
51
132
46
26
77
62
100
62
53
77
53
28
63
58
68
40
46
68
45
39
26
43
32
54
46
61
56
43
63
155
417
144
82
239
187
318
188
172
237
168
80
192
196
223
123
128
210
154
124
79
131
110
175
142
189
17 3
143
200
1.61
4.39
1.42
.83
2.49
1.96
3.33
1.89
1.68
2.49
1.68
.95
1.93
1.81
2.19
1.26
1.52
2.09
1.42
1.26
.82
1.31
1.02
1.76
1.47
2.04
1.73
1.35
2.04
Quanah,Acme & Pacific a
St. Louis-San Francisco
St. Louis, San Francisco & Texas
St . Louis Southwestern
Texas & Pacific
Texas Mexican
63
74
85
86
107
74
22
25
56
83
85
51
43
32
42
7
43
51
17
53
32
77
72
63
23
46
20
68
44
53
43
66
204
255
264
267
335
226
59
77
174
253
253
132
135
99
130
24
135
166
54
169
139
234
187
215
74
128
82
210
127
171
134
203
1.99
2.40
2.80
2.94
3.37
2.36
.74
.81
1.91
2.61
2.70
1.68
1.42
1.08
1.34
.24
1.38
1.67
.57
1.66
1.02
2.43
2.24
2.07
.77
1.45
.63
2.17
1.41
1.75
1.45
2.09
Total
64
66
61
40
52
57
201
205
195
129
166
179
2.11
2.17
2.00
1.30
1.67
1.85
Grand Total - United Staces
47
50
43
35
40
43
175
184
161
135
155
162
1.58
1.64
1.43
1.16
1.32
1.43
CANADIAN ROADS:
Canadian National
Canadian Pacific
Ontario Northland
106
83
166
86
73
164
62
70
122
59
62
98
51
59
151
73
6y
lllO
306
250
713
261
238
658
176
216
477
175
183
400
1U
167
583
212
211
566
3.63
2.87
5.60
3.01
2.54
5.50
2.12
2.43
4.11
2.00
2.15
3.29
1.7
2.01
5.03
2.5
2.U0
li.73
prior Co January 1, 1961. Data fo
Compiled by
, Bureau of Railway Economics, Washington, D.C.
ailroads to the Interstate Commerce Commission.
INDEX OF PROCEEDINGS, Vol. 64, 1963
Abra-Skull Vallej relocation, by George
Rugge, 122, 610
Accounting, [CC, classifications, revi-
sions and interpretations, 393, 594
Agreement forms, bibliography, 195, 698
— commercial advertising on railway
bridges, placing', 188, 597
— disposal of surplus railwaj property,
L91, 597
— railway property used for unloading
and storing liauifled petroleum
gases, anhydrous ammonia and
other flammable or dangerous ma-
u rials, 191, 597
— weed control chemicals, on railway
property, purchase and applica-
tions, 188, 596
Annual Meeting-, closing- session, 701
— invocation. 580
— opening session, 579
— program of, 575
ASTM specifications and designations,
references pertaining to concrete,
239, 625
Atchison, Topeka & Santa Fe, Abra-
Skull Valley relocation in Arizona,
122, 610
— bridge paint test, progress report,
368, 635
— continuous welded rail, laying single
and multiple-track, 1440-ft strings,
465, 695
— crossings, steel, manganese, explo-
sive hardened, service test, 107,
688
— grading problems encountered dur-
ing main line relocation, 25
—treated ballast test, 566, 680
Automobile cars, mul'ti-level, loading
and unloading facilities, 17::. 604
Average tie life — an interpretation, by
C. J. Code, 95
B
Ballast, asphalt- treated, progress re-
port, 565, 680
— conductivity tests of open-hearth
slag, 35
Baltimore & Ohio, cross tie service
test, 252, 671
Baltimore & Ohio Chicago Terminal,
crossing, manganese steel, explo-
sive hardened, service test, NT. 688
Basic-ox; process, expla na -
tion of, 369, 635
Bearing pads, neoprene, specifications
for design and materials, 225, 623
, G. i: . greetings from NRAA,
587
Bibliography (See Agreement Forms)
— (See Bridges, Non-Ferrous Metal)
— (Sec Concrete)
— (See Engineering and Valuation Re<
or <ls)
Waterway ProJectB)
Holts, high-strength steel, assemblj of
structural joints, steel railway
bridges, specifications, revisions,
361,
— track (See Track Bolts)
Bridges, beams, prestressed concrete,
Held investigation, 69
decks, asphal't-treated, service test,
.6 i, 680
frames, stress distribution in, 367,
— steel truss, high-strength bolts, slip-
page investigation, 328, 627
composite, steel and concrete, specl-
ftcations, 364, 633
— floorbeam bangers, stress distribu-
tion in, 367, 633
non-ferrous metal, bibliography, 365,
— progress report, 364, 633
— prestressed concrete, field investiga-
tions, 329, 627
—impact tests, 329, 627
— rating rules for, revisions, 361. 630
— steel railway, fixed spans, specifica-
tions, revisions, 361, 630
— structural joints, assembly of, using
high-strength steel bolts, 362, 630
—welded, railroad, by J. E. South. 57
Brine drippings, prevention of damage
from to track and structures, prog-
ress, report, 419, 682
I'.rine-resistant bridge paints, 369, 635
Brochure, recruiting engineering gradu-
ates, revision of, 402, 616
Buildings, report and discussion, 213,
636
specifications, bituminous road mix
surface. 215, 636
— clay hollow tile, deleted. 214, 636
— paints, revisions, reapproved, 216,
636
— pavements, asphaltic concrete,
reapproved, 214, 636
— asphaltic macadam, reapproved,
21 1, 636
— sprinkler systems, 216, 636
— tile, structural day. clay facings,
i mic veneer, 214, 636
('aide, wire and insulating materials,
109, 646
Campbell, George B., memoir, 242
Canadian National, computer simula-
tion "I CTC operations, bj C J
Hudson. 82
I 1 a iii performs nee ca Icula tor, . 3
lea ning facilit les, freight, one-
sp..t method, 164, 608
Cathodic protection, pipelines, appli-
cal ion of, l 18, 6 h
underground structures, posslbh
on signal systems, 109, 646
i !ha i les, J, 1-. photogrammel rj b
plied to r.i ii w ay local Ion, 1 1 6, 61 0
chemical control of vegetation,
ress report, 570, 681
739
740
Index
Chesapeake & Ohio, analysis of main-
tenance of way operations, 265,
655
Chicago iV- North Western, crossing,
railway, manganese steel, explo-
sive hardened, service test, 147,
688
— rail joint lubrication, service test,
progress report, 420, 682
— treated ballast test, 568, 860
Chicago Great Western, protecting
load bearing surfaces of bridges,
progress report, 368, 635
Chicago, Milwaukee, St. Paul & Pa-
cific, welded simulated crossing in-
tersections, service test, 446, 688
Chicago, Rock Island and Pacific, im-
pact tes't. steel truss span, 328, 627
— treated ballast test, bridge decks,
569, 680
New Orleans & Texas Pacific, tie plate
service test, 434, 688
Clearance information, determination
of simplification and/or standardi-
zation of, 355, 590
Clearance records, standardized method
of charting all obstructions, 358,
591
Clearance requirements, effect of spring
travel, center of gravity, speed, on
curved and tangent track, 335, 589
Clearances, report and discussion, 333,
589
— requirements of various states, 334,
589
— vertical or horizontal movements of
equipment, allowances for, 334, 589
Code, C. J., average tie life — an inter-
pretation, 95
— president's address, 581
Colleges and universities, research in,
ways in which railroads can coop-
erate, 404, 618
— stimulate interest of staff members
in railroad problems and practices,
including AREA membership, 404,
618
College and university students, affili-
ates in AREA, 400, 613
— brochures, revision of, 402, 616
— cooperative system of education, in-
cluding summer employment, 401,
615
— importance of bringing into railroad
service, 398, 613
— recruiting, and retaining in railroad
service, effective means of, 398,
613
— stimulate greater interest in science
of transportation, 399, 613
— topics suggested for theses on rail-
road subjects, cash grants avail-
able, 403, 617
Composite design of steel structures
having concrete decks, stress in-
vestigation, 331, 629
Composite steel and concrete spans,
specifications, 364, 633
Computer simulation of railroad CTC
operations, 82
Concrete, and mortars, quality of, 237,
625
Concrete beams, prestressed, bridge,
field investigation, 69
Concrete, prestressed, for railway
structures, 237, 624
— quality of, bibliography, 238, 625
Concrete ties, rail slippage tests, 39
Constitution, 726
Continuous Welded Rail, report and
discussion, 449, 694
— creepage, number and position of
anchors, 480, 697
— definition of, 465, 695
— fabricating, specifications, progress
report, 450, 694
— failures in, investigation of, 451, 694
— fastenings, 479, 697
— fixed commercial plants for, future
of, by E. T. Myers, 460, 694
— in Europe, by R. E. Dove, 483, 700
— labor economies derived from weld-
ing, distribution, laying and main-
tenance of, 302, 663
— laid, by years, 404, 695
— laying, 464, 695
— 1440-ft strings. 465, 695
— maintenance of, 481, 699
— maintenance, progress report, 481,
699
— welding, second-hand rail, progress
report, 483, 700
Contract Forms, report and discussion,
187, 596
Contract forms (See Agreement Forms)
Cooperative Relations with Universi-
ties, report and discussion, 397,
613
Corrosion of deck plates, progress re-
port, 359, 630
Corrosion prevention in potable hot-
water systems, 143, 639
Cramer, R. E., investigation of failures
in control-cooled rail, 500, 690
— shelly rail studies at the University
of Illinois, 534, 692
Crossing protection, highway- railway
grade, merits of various types, 133,
650
Crossings, highway-railway grade, au-
tomatic protection, alternate types,
study with view toward develop-
ment of, 136, 654
— prefabricated types, merits and
economics of, 132, 652
— warning to highway traffic ap-
proaching, methods of providing
additional, 130, 653
Crossings, railway, service test, 447,
688
Culverts, erosion control for outlet
structures, progress report, 543,
675
Curves, speed on, as affected by pres-
ent-day equipment, 446, 886
Index
741
D
Deck plates, corrosion of, progress re-
port, 359, 630
Depreciation, rules, revision of, for in-
come tax purposes, 398, 593
Diesel fueling and unloading stations,
methods of controlling spillag< of
fuel oil, 156, 643
Dove, R. E., Continuous Welded Rail
in Europe, 483, 700
Drive spikes, steel, specifleat inns, 130,
683
Duluth. Missabe and Iron Range, rail.
service test, 533, 692
Earth materials, physical properties of,
546, 676
Economics of Railwax Labor, report
and discussion, 263, 655
Economics of Railway Location and
Operation, report and discussion.
Ill, 606
Electric heating-, various applications,
progress report, 408, 644
Electric supply lines, fees and rentals
for occupancy of railway property,
subject discontinued, 418, 647
Electrical power sources, new, appli-
cation, progress report, 407, 644
bricity, report and discussion, 408,
644
Electrification, railway, developments
in the field of, domestic and for-
eign, ii 4, 646
Electrolysis and electrolytic corrosion,
progress report, 409, 645
Electronic and mechanized mail han-
dling facilities, 168, 604
Engineering and Valuation Records,
report and discussion, 387, 592
—bibliography, 388, 592
Epoxy resin compounds, bonding for
shotcrete, 237, 624
Epoxy resins, technology of, 1.
— application of, 4
— masonry, 5, 240
— iron and steel structures. 7. 369
— wood bridges and trestles, 5, 372
— formulations, 8
general instructions for use of, 16
uses in repair of concrete, 237, 624
Erie— Lackawanna, clearance req u i re-
ments test, freight cars, curved
and tangenl track, 335, 589
Fences, right-of-way, specifications re-
a ppro\ ed, 5 16, 675
Filter materials, for drains, third prog-
ress report , 56 I. 678
Fire-retardant coatings foi creosoted
wood, specifics i ions. 374, 621
Florida East Coast, pr< con-
crete beams, investigation, 69
Foundations, pile, specifications, 226,
624
ht car cleaning facilities, 164,
603
Fuel oil at diesei fueling and unload-
ing stations, methods of control-
ling spillage, 156, 6 13
i llued-laminated bridge stringers, lab-
ora/torj Investigation, '!s;i. 622
Grade crossing protection, highway-
railway grade, various types, rec-
ommended method of developing
annual maintenance cost of, 135,
653
('.lading, problems encountered during
A.T&SP main line relocation, 25
Great Northern, car cleaning- facility,
164. 603
—rail, service test, 533, 692
Guillou, John C, third progress report
on performance of filter materials,
554, 678
H
Handbook of instructions for care and
operation of maintenance of way
equipment, revisions, 306, 664
Highway crossing signal, flashing-light
type with stop signs, revisions,
132, 649
— wig-wag- types, revisions, 132, 649
Highway overpasses as opposed to un-
derpasses, advantages, factors to
be considered in determining, 134,
651
Highway-railway grade crossing pro-
tection, merits of various types,
133, 650
Highway-railway grade crossings,
methods of providing additional
warning to highway traffic ap-
proaching. 136, 653
Highways, report and discussion. 131,
648
1 1 ildebi a 1 1 • 1 1 I >r. Kenneth, invocation.
580
Hillman, A. B., treasurer's report, 585,
726
Hot-water systems, potable, corrosion
prevention in, 143, 639
Howard, x. D., executive secretary's
reporl and statement, 583, 706
Hudson, C. J., B computer simulation
of railroad CTC operations, 82
Huffman, J. B., an evaluation of forced.
air- drying and covered air season-
ing of oak cross ties, 246, 670
Ice houses and Icing stations, 218, 636
III is Central, experimental cross tic
ser\ Ice lest. 269, 673
742
Index
— results of study of economic value of
various sizes of rail, 527, B90
impact and Bridge Stresses, report and
discussion. 69, 327, 626
impact, prestressed concrete span, de-
sign, study, 329, 627
— steel truss spans, 328, 6l!7
Insulated rail joint, development and
research, progress report, 529, 692
Insulating material, wires and cables,
409, 645
ICC, revisions and interpretations of
accounting classifications, 393, 594
towa State University, tests on two
prestressed-steel beams, 330, 629
Iron and manganese, practical methods
of removing from small water sup-
plies, 152, 642
Iron and Steel Structures, report and
discussion, 359, 630
Iron Ore Company of Canada, dock ter-
minal, ore handling facilities, 180,
605
Joint bars, quenched carbon-steel,
specifications, revisions, 499, 690
K
Kannowski, K. H., heat-treated and
alloy-steel rail, service test report,
530, 692
Keystone dam relocation, by H. L.
Woldridge, 119, 610
Kleinkort, J. P., greetings from Com-
bined Railway Suppliers Exhibit,
587
Labor economics, continuous welded
rail, welding, distributing, laying
and maintenance of, 302, 663
— cropping rail in track versus build-
ing up rail ends by welding 274,
656
— taking up track, various methods of,
278, 656
— track maintenance derived from use
of on-off track equipment versus
on-track equipment only, 300, 663
— work measurement standards for
comparison of work performance
among gangs or divisions, 271, 655
Laminated cross ties, service test 258,
672
Li, Shu-t'ien, relative merits of high-
strength steels and box sections in
heavy-duty fender piling of water-
front facilities, 205, 600
Loading and unloading facilities, multi-
level automobile cars, 173, 604
— rail-'truck, 173, 604
Louisville and Nashville, coated ties
service test, 257, 672
— hold-down fastening's for ii>- plates,
including pads, service test, 140,
688
Lumber, hardwood structural timbers,
proposed grading rules, 372, 620
Luncheon, annual, 611
M
Mayee, G. M\, ASCE address, prevent-
ing rail failures in main track, 47
Mail handling facilities, mechanized
and electronic, 168, 604
Maintenance of way equipment, hand-
book of instructions for care and
operation of, revisions, 306, 664
Maintenance of way expense, various
traffic volumes, effect of using such
variations, in terms of equated
mileage or other derived factors,
for allocation of available funds to
maintenance of way, 113, 607
.Maintenance of way work, analysis of
operations on 'the B&O, 265, 655
Maintenance of Way Work Equipment,
report and discussion, 305, 664
Maintenance, yards, present trends in,
183, 605
Masonrv, report and discussion, 232,
623
Masonry structures, deterioration and
repair of, 237, 624
McLeod, E. A., memoir, 224
Mechanized and electronic mail han-
dling facilities, 168, 604
Missouri Pacific, bridge paint test, 369,
635
— cross tie service test, 252, 671
Monon, treated ballast test, 568, 860
Multi-level automobile cars, facilities
for loading and unloading, 173, 604
Myers, E. T., the future for fixed com-
mercial continuous welded rail
plants, 460, H94
N
Navigation projects, current policies,
practices and developments, 198,
599
Neoprene bearing pads, specifications,
225, 623
New York Central, car cleaning facili-
ties, 166, 603
— steel truss span, high-strength bolts,
slippage investigation, 328, 627
Nominating- Committee, 577
Norfolk and Western, rail, service test,
530, 532, 692
— treated ballast test, 567, 680
Nuclear and conventional equipment
for soil density and water content
determinations, comparisons of, 546,
676
Index
743
O
Ore-handling facilities, iron Ore Com-
pany of Canada, 180, 605
Orr, H. B., memoir, 264
Overpasses, highway, opposed to un-
derpasses, advantages, factor t'>
determine, 134, 651
Painting and preparation of steel sur-
faces, progress report, 368, 635
Pavements, asphaltic concrete, (See
Buildings)
Pennsylvania, laminated ties, service
test, 258, 672
— rail, service test, 531, 532, 692
Photogrammetry as applied to railway
location, by .!. L. Charles, llti, 610
Pile foundations, specifications, 226,
624
Pipe, .structural plate, progress report,
360, 630
Pipelines, cathodic protection of, 148,
641
Pittsburgh and West Virginia, treated
ballast test, bridge decks, 568, 860
Post, Don M , an evaluation of forced-
air drying and covered air season-
ing of oak cross ties, 246, 670
President's address, 581
Prestressed concrete trestles, 237, 624
R
Radioactive substances, railroad as-
pects of, 157, 643
Rail, report and discussion. 487, 690
— continuous welded (See Continuous
Welded Rail)
— control-cooled, investigation of fail-
ures in, by R. E. Cramer. 500, 690
— cropping, in track versus building up
ends by welding, labor economics
of, 274, 656
— economic value of various sixes. 526,
690
— open-hearth steel, specifications, in-
cluding basic-oxygen process, 498,
690
— end hattci'. causes and remedy, 523,
690
— failure statistics. 508, 692
— heat-treated and alloy-steel, service
test, 530, 692
— laying tight, with frozen joints.
prog ress reporl . 120, I
ions, standardization of, 542, 692
— 78-ft, service performance and eco-
nomics, 5 12, tiHL'
shel i\ . si ud j by R E. < !ra mer, .'. ; i.
692
sb.lly spots and head checks, meth-
ods of prevention, 529, •;:•:.'
Kail anchors, number and position to
pre\ i-ni continuous welded ra n
creepage, 480, 697
Kail failures In track, preventing, by
(5. .M. Magee, 17
Kail joint, insulated, progress report.
529, »'.:•-
— lubrication test, progress report, 120,
682
Kail slippage, concrete ties, test, 39
Rail-truck freight equipment, facilities
for loading and unloading, 17.:, 604
Rail-water transfer facilities, plan-
ning, construction, maintenance of,
202, 599
Regulatory bodies and courts, current
developments in valuation and de-
preciation, 391, 593
Resins, synthetic, and other adhesive
materials for protective coating
and reinforcement of steel sur-
faces, 368, 635
Rest houses, specifications, deleted,
220, 636
Roadway and Ballast, report and dis-
cussion, 543, 675
Roadway, formation of, specifications,
reapproved, 545, 675
Rugge, George, Abra-skull Valley re-
location, 122, 610
St. Louis-San Francisco, car cleaning
facility, 167, 603
— Keystone dam relocation, by H. L.
Wbldridge, 119, 610
San key. Charles, train performance cal-
culator, 73
Seaboard Air Line, bridge paint test,
progress report, 369, 635
Secretary, executive, statement and re-
port, 583, 706
Sewage, railway, disposal facilities, re-
visions, reapproved, 142, 638
Shops and locomotive terminals, store-
houses for, 220, 636
Signal systems, possible effect on of
cathodic protection systems for
underground structures. 4(19, 645
Signals, highwaj crossing, Hashing
light and wig-wag types, with
stop sign, revision, 1 •'!'-, 649
Slag, open-hearth, ballast, conductiv-
ity tests of, 35
delini t ion. ."> 16. 675
Soil density and water- content deter-
minations, comparison of, with con-
ventional and nuclear equipment,
546, 676
South. .1. K.. A.SCE address, welded rail-
road bridges, 57
spikes, drive, Bteel, specifications, 130,
683
track, high-carbon steel, specifica-
tions, 128, 683
Spring washers, specifications revi-
sions, 199, 690
Slanc, K, A,, Single and mu 1 1 i pic- 1 lack
laying, using continuous welded rail
in it m-i't Btrlngs, on th< \t.vsi-.
it;:..
744
Index
Steel, basic-oxygen, process explana-
tion <>f, 369, 635
Stimmel, Et. M., memoir, 140
Storehouses, shops and Locomotive ter-
minals, 220, 636
Stringers, glued-laminated, laboratory
investigation of static and re-
peated-load strength, 383, (122
Structural plate pipe, progress report,
360, 630
Tellers, report of, 577
Terminals, freight, design, gradients
revisions, 161, 602
— waterfront, 180, 60
Termite control, investigation, 19
Texas & Pacific, treated ballast test,
568, 860
Tie coatings, service test, 257, 672
Tie life, average, an interpretation by
C. J. Code, 95
Tie plates, design, service test, 434,
688
— hold-down fastenings for, including
pads, service test, 440, 688
— hot-worked, high-carbon steel, spec-
ifications, 423, 683
— low-carbon steel, specifications, 421,
683
Ties and Wood Preservation, report
and discussion, 341, 669
Ties, anti-splitting devices study, 257,
672
— concrete, prestressed, service test,
259, 673
— rail slippage tests, 39
— cross and switch, specifications, ex-
tent of adherence to, 243, 670
— design, possible revision of, and/or
spacing, 241, 670
— fiberglas, possibility of using for test
purposes, 259, 673
— incising, extent of use, 257, 672
— laminated, service test, 258, 672
— oak, forced-air drying and covered
air seasoning of, by J. B. Huffman
and Don M. Post, 246, 670
— reusing recovered, feasibility and
economics of, with or without ad-
ditional treatment, 244, 670
— service life, methods of prolonging',
257, 672
— service test, 252, 671
— substitutes for wood, 259, 673
— used, possibility of making charcoal
from, 260, 673
Timbers, structural, hardwood, pro-
posed grading rules, 372, 620
Tools, tracks (See Track Tools)
Track, report and discussion, 419, 682
— taking up, labor economies of vari-
ous methods, 278, 656
Track bolts, and nuts, specifications,
revisions, 499, 690
Track spikes, high-carbon steel, spec-
ifications, 428, 683
Trackwork plans, standardization of,
4 33, 684
Train performance calculator, by
Charles Sankey, 7::
Transfer facilities, rail-water, planning,
construction, maintenance, 2112, 599
Truss liridge research project, progress
report, 367, 633
Treasurer, report of, 585, 725
u
U. S. Public Health Service, coach-
servicing facilities, design, con-
struction and operation to comply
with regulations of, 147, 640
University (See College)
V
Valuation and depreciation, current de-
velopments in connection with
regulatory bodies and courts, 391,
593
Valuation records (See Engineering
and Valuation Records)
Vegetation, chemical control of, prog-
ress report, 570, 681
w
Washers, spring, specifications, revi-
sions, 499, 690
Waste disposal, railway, 152, 642
Water, for drinking purposes, stand-
ards, revisions, 141, 638
Water, Oil and Sanitation Services, re-
port and discussion, 139, 638
Water supplies, small, methods of re-
moving iron and manganese from,
152, 642
Water systems, potable, hot, corrosion
prevention in, 143, 639
Waterfront facilities, relative merits
of high-strength steels and box
sections in heavy-duty fender
piling, by Shu-t'ien Li, 205. 600
Waterfront terminals, 180, 605
Waterproofing for railway structures,
240, 625
Waterway projects involving naviga-
tion, inland, benefits and costs,
bibliography, 199, 599
Waterways and Harbors, report and
discussion, 197, 574
Welded railroad bridges, by ,T. E.
South, 57
Wire, cable and insulating materials,
standards, and new types, 409, 645
Woldridge, H. L., Keystone dam relo-
cation, 119, 610
Wood Bridge and Trestles, report and
discussion, 371, 620
—applications of synthetic resins and
adhesives to, 1
— design, specifications, progress re-
port, 371, 620
— fire-retardant coatings, specifications,
373, 621
Index 745
Wood, creosoted, flre-retardant coat- — procurement and stocking parts and
ings for, specifications, ::t I. 621 material for the repairs of, 324,
-non-destructive testing of, by 666
gamma rays, progress report, 372,
620
Y
Work equipment, machines, reclaiming
and extending service life of, yard maintenance, presenl trends in.
metallizing, plating' and welding, 183, 605
313, 665 Vards and Terminals, report and dis-
— maintaining, testing- and repairing cussion, 159, 601
hydraulic equipment, and other Vards, classification, design, gradients,
components used, 316, 666 revisions, 161, 602
3
outstanding
tampers
for the price of ONE!
A YARD TAMPER that is downright
revolutionary in character . . . that
will fulfill the majority of your yard
tamping requirements faster and bet-
ter than it has ever been done before
. . . with just about half of the
normal crew.
A JACK TAMPER: By simply sub-
stituting the regulation double-bar
JACKSON tamping units for the extra
long single units used in the YARD
TAMPER you have a powerful Jack
Tamper that is exceptionally fast,
and accurate . . . that can be used
with existing surfacing devices and
easily keeps ahead of production
tampers. Or, you can leave the long
blades on when jack tamping and
catch your switches as you go.
A UTILITY TAMPER of exceptional
speed and power for spotting and
smoothing in all ballasts in all con-
ditions ... and tamping of finest
quality in all moderate to high raises.
Split workhead permits tamping a
much larger portion of turnouts as
well as maintaining proper adjust-
ment on curves.
Let us demonstrate the multiple
advantages of this machine under
your own conditions.
JACKSON
VIBRATORS. ~
LUDINGTON, MICHIGAN, U.S.A.
£-x-t-e-n-d f-i-e J--i-fj-eJ
USE TIE PLATE
LOCK SPIKES
One-piece Design
LOCK SPIKES hold tie plates firmly in place on
cross-ties and bridge timbers.
LOCK SPIKES are quickly and easily driven,
or removed, with standard track tools.
Driven to refusal, the spread shank is com-
pressed by the walls of the hole. Tie plates are held
against horizontal and vertical movement under
spring pressure. Play between the spike and the
hole is eliminated — abrasion and seating of tie
plates is overcome.
LOCK SPIKES hold their position in the tie,
and redriving to tighten the plate is not required.
They provide a quiet and strengthened track.
Annual cost of ties and maintenance expense is
reduced by extending the life of ties and holding
gage. Here is one answer to conservation of ma-
terials and labor. Write for free folder.
BERNUTH, LEMBCKE CO., INC.
420 Lexington Avenue, New York 17, N. Y.
Actual
Size
The custom-built assembly shown
above and to the right is an all-purpose
rig designed to give maximum flexibility
in coating and painting work. It was
designed for field application of paints,
lacquers, vinyls, cutback asphalts,
creosotes, heavy oils and greases.
' It uses the economical Graco Hydra-
Spray Process, and proves once again,
you get the job done faster and better
with Graco than with any other coat-
ing system.
If speed of coating application, and
material savings are important to you,
write today for all the details of the
Graco Hydra-Spray Process.
FREE!
Graco Engineers are prepared to help you in the design of your
paint and material spray assemblies. Your Graco Railway Rep-
resentative will be glad to explain the many benefits of this
service. Write or call him . . . today!
Graco
GRAY COMPANY, INC.
MINNEAPOLIS 13, MINNESOTA
RAILWAY DEPARTMENT
JOHN P. McADAMS, Eastern Sales Representative
2304 Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia
CHICAGO — (Broadview, III.)
R. D. Worley
3030 South 25th Ave.
CLEVELAND
M. H. Frank Company, Inc.
1202 Marshall Building
HOUSTON
Houston Railroad Supply Co.
1610 Dumble Street
PHILADELPHIA
The A. R. Kidd Co.
1036 Suburban Station Bldg.
LOUISVILLE
T. F. & H. H. Going
6308 Limewood Circle
ST. LOUIS
The Carriers Supply Company
81 8 Olive Street
NEW YORK — Newark, New Jer*ey
R. A. Corley
744 Brood Street
SAN FRANCISCO
The Barnes Supply Company
141 Eleventh Street
TWIN CITIES — Si. Paul, Minn.
The Doniel L. O'Brien Supply Company
Endicott-On-Fourth Bldg.
WASHINGTON — Arlington, Va.
Southeastern Railway Supply, Inc.
2304 Wilson Blvd.
MONTREAL — Ontario, Canada
International Equipment Co., Ltd.
360 St. James Street West
Up to 22 rail anchors
per minute with...
NEW 1963 RACINE Anchor-Fast
J. he increased speed and efficiency of this new, 1963
Racine Anchor-Fast can save you extra thousands of dollars
a year on rail anchoring and tightening operations. Major
improvements include:
POSITIVE TRACK ALIGNMENT
New side guide-brackets keep nipper assembly straight and
steady; position it perfectly on rail regardless of track
elevation on curves.
GREATER BOXING PRESSURE
New built-in boxing cylinder, which replaces two smaller
external cylinders, delivers 3,000 lbs. pressure — an increase
of 300 per cent — for tighter anchoring of all types of
anchors. An Anchor-Tight head attachment is available for
this machine to reset anchors that are not against the ties.
115 FEWER PARTS
Elimination of over 115 separate parts reduces adjustments
and simplifies maintenance.
Write today for further information on the new 1963
Racine Anchor-Fast. Racine Hydraulics & Machinery, Inc.,
Dept. F93, Racine, Wisconsin.
MODERNIZING KIT AVAILABLE If you now own Racine
Anchor-Fast machines, write for details on how you can
convert them to new 1963 models at modest cost.
Unit Tamper Portable
Rail Drill
Portable Rail Saw Anchor Applicator
Rail Drill&Saw
Production and
Spot Tampers
Cut Diesel Maintenance Costs With
FLEXMASTER Pipe Couplings
Join locomotive hot water and oil lines
with FLEXMASTER Pipe Couplings
without threading or cutting. Simple
hinged couplings grip pipe securely,
absorb shock, vibration and minor
misalignment, yet are easy to remove.
Available in a wide range of types and
sizes. Write for complete information.
FLEXMASTER is an Aeroquip Trademark
eroquip
AEROQUIP CORPORATION • JACKSON, MICHIGAN
INDUSTRIAL DIVISION
INDUSTRIAL PLANTS: VAN WERT, O.; BURBANK, CALIF.; DALLAS, TEX.;
PORTLAND, ORE.; CRANBURY, N.J.; ATLANTA, GA.
In Canada: Aeroquip (Canada) Ltd., Toronto 19, Ontario
In Germany: Aeroquip G.m.b.H., Baden Baden-Oos
AEROQUIP PRODUCTS ARE PROTECTED BY PATENTS IN U.S.A., CANADA AND ABROAD
AEROQUIP PRODUCTS ARE DESIGNED FOR BETTER RAILROADING
Only Aeroquip offers two
automatic fueling systems
for your diesels
Barco Railroad Diesel
Speed Recorder
Air brake, hot water,
lube and fuel oil lines
the most efficient use
of hydraulics ever
applied to a tamper!
TAMPING UNIT DOUBLE CLUTCHES ELIMINATED
BY REVERSIBLE HYDRAULIC MOTORS!
HERE IS the world's highest tamping efficiency.
This machine retains the unbeatable Matisa principle
of vibration-compaction tamping with the machine
load always on tamped track, but now has many PLUS
features.
For details, write for the New Matisa Speedtamper
brochure.
1020 Washington Avenue
EQUIP ME N TXC ORPORATION
Chicago Heights, Illinois
MATISA opens fixed location pla
Welded Rail Shipments
Now Faster, Cost Less
Continuing the "Story of Welded Rail" as
pioneered by Matisa, new chapters are con-
stantly being added.
Refined techniques to increase the safety
of the "already safest" rail weld— to in-
crease production speed of the "already
fastest" rail weld and to decrease the
cost of the "already least expensive" rail
weld are constantly improving delivery,
efficiency and cost features of Matisa
Thoroweld Continuous Welded Rail.
The latest addition to the Matisa service
is this new plant location in the Birming-
ham switching district. Added to the
Chicago switching district plant in Argo,
Matisa rail welds are now available to
small as well as large railroads.
MATISA RAILWELD, INC.
1020 Washington Ave., Chicago Heights, III.
Organized Mechanization with
NORDBERG
gives you maximum
maintenance economy
"Organized Mechanization" is the most effective grouping of
Nordberg track maintenance equipment into efficient working
teams. In this way, these machines — which are efficient and
effective individually — can be made even more productive.
These Nordberg Mechanical Muscles
can help you cut maintenance costs:
• Adzer —
Self-Propelled
• Ballast Router
• Ballastex®
• Cribex®
• DSL Yard Cleaner
• Dun-Rite® Gaging
Machine and Bronco
• Gandy® Tie Puller
and Inserter
• Gandy-Snapper
Line Indicator
Midget Surfacer
Midget Line indicator
Power Jack
Power Wrench
Rail Drill
Rail Grinders
Rail Snapper
Screenex®
Spike Hammer
Spike Puller-
Hydraulic
IRDBERG MANUFACTURING COMPANY
• Mechanical Spike Pullers —
Self-Propelled
• Surf-Rail© Grinder
• Switchliner
• Tamping Power Jack
• Tie-Axe
• Tie Drill
• Trakliner®
• Trackshifter
• Trak-Surfacer
• Trak-Sweeper
MILWAUKEE 1, WISCONSI
®
MECHANICAL MUSCLES
63. N.M. CO.
at
your
service
for
all types of cranes
d iesel wreckers
pile drivers
buckets
ORTON
CRANE & SHOVEL CO.
608 S. DEARBORN ST.
CHICAGO 5, ILLINOIS
DANIEL A. COVELLI
President
Representatives in Principal Cities
Tbuv-s WELDED
RAIL
TRANSPORT
MM W" *•■*' *
another development
of NOG... LINK-BELT teamwork in
engineering and manufacture
CHECK THESE
SERVICE PROVEN
POINTS
NOG
Sturdy open-span construction—
for work saving feed-in;
for picking up jointed re-lay rail; maintains
best riding quality by keeping rails in
original sequence for welding.
Positive double tie-down unit.
Simplified low maintenance.
Rollers life-lubricated.
Hydraulically adjustable rollers and power-
operated unloading equipment included.
One to six-tier units.
© 1963, Chemetron Corporation
NATIONAL CYLINDER GAS
RAILROAD EQUIPMENT DEPARTMENT
840 North Michigan Avenue, Chicago 11, Illinois
MODEL 441
Developed and Built
for Railroad Maintenance
180° BOOM SWING
DOCS ALL JOBS!
LAYING STANDARD RAIL
CUTS MAINTENANCE COST!
7 2 FAST CHANGE ATTACHMENTS
• Forks
• V/a Cu. Yd. Bucket
• Tote Hook
• 18' Boom Extension
• Fork Tie Baler
• Track Cleaning Bucket
• Back Hoe
• Clamshell
• Back Filler Blade
• Pull Drag Bucket
• 4 Cu. Yd. Snow Bucket
• Pile Hammer
9' WIDE TRACK CLEANING BUCKET'
Optional Attachment
Flanged Wheels, Hydraulically Controlled
PETTIBONE MULLIKEN CORPORATIOI
RAILROAD -». DIVISION
*»yi)D
141 W. JACKSON "If" CHICAGO 4, III
80 Years of Service
to the Railroad Industry
AREA Publications — Price List
The following include some of the Association publications available from the
secretary's office on order. Prices shown are for Members only:
Member
Price
Manual of Recommended Practice, complete in 2 volumes, including binders
(first copy) $18.00
Extra binders, each 4.50
Annual Supplements ( first copy) 1.00
Separate Chapters
1— Roadway and Ballast 1.50
3-Ties 25
4-Rail 75
5-Track 75
6-Buildings 1.50
7— Wood Bridges and Trestles 1.00
8-Masonry 1.00
9-Highways 0.50
11— Engineering and Valuation Records 1.25
13— Water, Oil and Sanitation Services 1.00
14— Yards and Terminals 1.00
15— Iron and Steel Structures 1.25
16— Economics of Railway Location and Operation 0.75
17— Wood Preservation 50
20-Contract Forms 1.25
22— Economics of Railway Labor 0.50
25— Waterways and Harbors 0.25
27— Maintenance of Way Work Equipment 0.50
28— Clearances 0.25
29- Waterproofing 0.25
Flexible-cover, loose-leaf binder for separate chapters, each 0.40
Portfolio of Trackwork Plans-119 plans, 8 sheets of specifications, 5 sheets
definitions of terms, complete with leatherette cover $12.50
Track Scale Pamphlet— 109 pages, flexible cover 1.00
Federal Valuation of Railroads— 87 pages, flexible cover 1.00
Instructions for Mixing and Placing Concrete-24 pages, flexible cover 0.40
Notes on Railroad Location and Construction Procedures from the School of
Experience— 43 pages, flexible cover 0.50
Handbook of Instructions for the Care and Operation of Maintenance of Way
Equipment— 149 pages, hard cover 0.85
Instructions for Care and Safe Operation of Welding and Grinding Equip-
ment—23 pages, flexible cover 0.30
Specifications for Steel Railway Bridges (fixed spans)— 70 pages, flexible
cover 0.75
Specifications for Movable Railway Bridges— 73 pages, punched sheets 1.00
RAILWAY
SIGNAL
NX Interlocking...
Controls New Toronto Subway System
The Toronto Transit Commission has selected the GRS NX
route-type interlocking system for the new two- mile University
Avenue Subway which serves the revitalized downtown business
area, and connects with the Yonge Street Subway which has
been serving Toronto residents since 1954.
A single operator at St. George Street need only push two but-
tons to automatically line up even the most complicated route.
He has up-to-the-second information concerning the location of
each train, the position of each switch and signal, what routes
are available, and what routes are established. In addition, he has
the facility for setting up routes quickly and easily by using free-
operating pushbuttons.
Future plans call for extending the subway to areas east and
west of the center of the City.
Fred Miles, left, Toronto Transit Commission Signal Design Supervisor,
and Frank Scott, GRS Sales Engineer, inspect the new NX control machine.
GENERAL RAILWAY SIGNAL COMPANY
ROCHESTER 2 NEV
A UNIT OF GENERAL SIGNAL CORPORATION
»JEW YORK 17 NEW YORK CHICAGO 1 ILLINOIS ST LOUIS 1 MISSOURI
MONTR KM, a CANADA
THE DOUBLE U RAIL ANCHOR
ACHUFF RAILWAY SUPPLY CO.
ST. LOUIS, MO.
CLEVELAND FROG and CROSSING CO
Subsidiary of Pettibone Mulliken Corporation
CLEVELAND, OHIO
HIGHEST QUALITY TRACKWORK
CONSTRUCTED OF
STANDARD RAIL HEAT TREATED RAIL
MANGANESE STEEL
"CLEVELAND" ADJUSTABLE RAIL BRACES
"CLEVELAND" ROCKER SWITCH CLIPS
"CLEVELAND" AUTOMATIC SWITCH STANDS
STANDARD SWITCH STANDS
AUTOJACK m
ELECTROMATIC
The only completely
automatic track surfacing
machine on the market
Proven in operation by North America's
leading railroads. Complete and auto-
matic control of surface and cross level
through tangent and curve territory
regardless of height of lift.
• Combination of Autojack and Electromatic
equals or improves production of Electro-
matic alone.
• Precision of lift and uniformity of compaction
controlled automatically.
• All variations in lift, level and run-out con-
trolled from operator's panel.
• Beam "sighting" for utmost precision.
• Front buggy self-propelled ahead of tamper.
TA M P E R I N C. 53 Court St., Pittsburgh, N.Y.
SALES AND SERVICE: 2 U7 University Avenue
St. Paul 1 4, Minnesota
Phone: 645-5055
IN CANADA 160 St. Joseph Blvd.,
Lachine (Montreal), P.Q.
Phone: 637-5531
Your enquiries for detailed information or brochures on
1 'f^wHRBt
This is one way to kill weeds
It's the hard way. So forget it. The easiest, fastest, most effective way
is with these borate weed killers: M0N0B0R CHLORATE GRANULAR
• MONOBOR-CHLORATE Track Sprays • BENZABOR® • UREABOR® •
UREABOR 5D • UREABOR 8D • UREABOR 62
With one simple application, these borate weed killers will destroy
weeds and grasses about trestles, tie piles, grade crossings, yards,
signals, switches, (or wherever a weed problem exists) for a year or
more. All are extremely effective, yet safe to use. Easy and economical
to apply. And nonselective. Most roads already favor borate weed
killers for year 'round weed control. How about you? Call or write
today: Railroad Sales, Marketing %^wv*.w**lPiit
Dept, U.S. BORAX, 3456 Peterson
Avenue, Chicago 45, Illinois. (Phone:
Independence 3-6262. Code: 312)
BORAX
*•;*.>*•'
Here are the up-to-date facts on the SPENO Ballast
Cleaning and the SPENO Rail Grinding Services.
BALLAST CLEANING
SPENO Engineering and Research has de-
veloped a superior screening arrangement so
that we are now using an improved Ballast
Cleaner with greater efficiency.
RAIL GRINDING
Our Rail Grinding Service has been so well
received we are now building a THIRD Rail
Grinding Train to take care of the increased
demand.
SPENO is constantly developing means lor
better service to make sure that the Railroads
receive everything they pay for — and more
c/u4^//s4> ZTie fau$u>ads yaa£~nave useds us/
Lll'llll
FRANK SPENO RAILROAD BALLAST CLEANING CO., INC.
306 North Coy-qo Si
Ithoca N. T
THE TRASCO CAR RETARDER
HUNDREDS IN SERVICE
IN CLASS YARD TRACK
TRACK SPECIALTIES COMPANY
P.O. BOX 729 WESTPORT, CONNECTICUT
mm
■HI,
I wit IIP
Jill IP
1
SMS
II
ntss
HHHP